This is a modern-English version of A Gothic Grammar, with selections for reading and a glossary, originally written by Braune, Wilhelm. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

The cover image was created by the transcriber and is placed in the public domain.

The cover image was created by the transcriber and is now in the public domain.

A
GOTHIC GRAMMAR
WITH CHOICES FOR READING AND A GLOSSARY

WILHELM BRAUNE.

TRANSLATED

(FROM THE FOURTH GERMAN EDITION)

AND EDITED, WITH

EXPLANATORY NOTES, COMPLETE CITATIONS, DERIVATIONS, AND CORRESPONDENCES,

GERHARD H. BALG.

SECOND EDITION.

Second Edition.

Milwaukee, Wis.: THE AUTHOR.
New York: B. WESTERMANN & CO., LEMCKE & BUECHNER.
London, Eng.: KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUEBNER & CO.

Milwaukee, WI: THE AUTHOR.
NYC: B. WESTERMANN & CO., LEMCKE & BUECHNER.
London, UK.: KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUEBNER & CO.

[Pg ii]

ENTERD ACCORDING TO ACT OF CONGRESS, IN THE YEAR 1895, BY

ENTERED ACCORDING TO ACT OF CONGRESS, IN THE YEAR 1895, BY

G. H. BALG,

IN THE OFFICE OF THE LIBRARIAN OF CONGRESS, AT WASHINGTON.

IN THE OFFICE OF THE LIBRARIAN OF CONGRESS, IN WASHINGTON.

Electrotyped and Printed by the Germania Pub. Co., Milwaukee, Wis.

Electrotyped and printed by Germania Publishing Company, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

[Pg iii]

AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

The main object of this Gothic Grammar is to render service to academic instruction, as a basis for lectures and Gothic exercises; it is intended, at the same time, to afford the student sufficient aid in acquiring a practical knowledge of the Gothic language and thus enable him to follow more advantageously the lectures on historical and comparativ grammar. For this purpose the Gothic Fonology and Inflection ar, as far as possibl, set forth by themselves, without resorting to Comparativ Grammar for an explanation of the facts. Occasionally another Germanic dialect, as the Old High German, has rather been referd to. The linguistic elucidation is left to the lectures. To him, however, who lerns Gothic from this book, without any possibility of hearing lectures, wishing at the same time to gain profounder knowledge, there may be especially recommended the following helps: K. Brugmann's 'Grundriss der vergleichenden grammatik' and Fr. Kluge's 'Vorgeschichte der altgermanischen dialekte' (in Paul's 'Grundriss der germ. philologie', I, 300-406).

The main goal of this Gothic Grammar is to support academic instruction, serving as a foundation for lectures and Gothic exercises. It aims to provide students with enough help to gain practical knowledge of the Gothic language, enabling them to more effectively engage with lectures on historical and comparative grammar. To achieve this, the Gothic phonology and inflection are, as much as possible, presented independently, without relying on comparative grammar to explain the facts. Occasionally, another Germanic dialect, such as Old High German, is referenced. The linguistic details are covered in the lectures. For those learning Gothic from this book without the opportunity to attend lectures but who wish to deepen their understanding, the following resources are particularly recommended: K. Brugmann's 'Grundriss der vergleichenden grammatik' and Fr. Kluge's 'Vorgeschichte der altgermanischen dialekte' (in Paul's 'Grundriss der germ. philologie', I, 300-406).

The references to literary works containd in the Grammar itself ar not intended to act as linguistic explanations, but refer to works and treatises which present much of profit concerning the establishment and conception of facts from a purely Gothic point of view; several references to Brugmann's 'Grundriss' ar perhaps the only exceptions.

The references to literary works contained in the Grammar itself are not meant to serve as linguistic explanations, but instead point to works and treatises that provide valuable insights regarding the establishment and understanding of facts from a purely Gothic perspective; several references to Brugmann's 'Grundriss' are perhaps the only exceptions.

The Reading Exercises ar intended to offer sufficient material for Gothic exercises; they giv students working independently of a teacher an opportunity to apply what they hav lernd from the Grammar. The beginner may be[Pg iv] advized at first simply to read over the chapters on Fonology, but to giv more attention to those on Inflection (for the beginning without the notes) and then to commence reading a text. This exercise ought to be accumpanied by a more extended lerning of the Grammar, just as a thuro analysis of the text wil require a constant reference to the Grammar.

The Reading Exercises are designed to provide enough material for Gothic practice; they give students working independently of a teacher a chance to apply what they have learned from the Grammar. Beginners may be[Pg iv] advised at first to simply read through the chapters on Phonology, but to pay more attention to those on Inflection (starting out without the notes) and then to begin reading a text. This exercise should be accompanied by more in-depth study of the Grammar, just as a thorough analysis of the text will require constant reference to the Grammar.

The Glossary contains not only the vocabulary of the Reading Exercises, but also all words occurring in the Grammar. The citations from the Inflection hav been givn in ful, those from the Fonology in every case where a word is not givn merely as an arbitrary chozen exampl. Thus the Glossary may at the same time serv as an Index to the Grammar.

The Glossary includes not only the vocabulary from the Reading Exercises but also all the words found in the Grammar. The citations from Inflection have been provided in full, and those from Phonology are included whenever a word isn't just an arbitrarily chosen example. Therefore, the Glossary can also serve as an Index to the Grammar.

Sinse its first appearance in 1880, this book has not undergone essential changes; the success seemd to me to garantee the appropriateness of the plan, so that also in the present edition I hav not complied with several wishes for a farther scope. I stil hold that an admixture of elements from Comparativ Filology would be opposed to the object of the book. The question could rather arize as to whether there ought not to be added any chapters on Word-Formation and Syntax as main parts to the Fonology and Inflection. However this also has been disregarded. Such points of word-formation as may promote the practical study of the Gothic language, wil be found interwoven in the Inflection; a systematic presentation of the Gothic alone does not seem to me to prove very beneficial, but only in connection with the other Germanic, resp. Indo-Germanic, languages. And particularly with respect to this, excellent assistance is afforded the student by Kluge's 'Nominale stammbildungslehre der altgermanischen dialekte' (cp. § 223) which has been amply referd to under Inflection, and which is easily accessibl as a supplementary number to the 'Sammlung kurzer grammatiken germanischer dialekte'. The addition of a syntax in harmony with the rest of the grammar would likely hav increast the book to dubl its size, which, as regards its sale, seemd to me a point wurthy of consideration. There are, moreover, easily attainabl summaries of the Gothic language. There[Pg v]fore I hav for the present contented myself with annexing a list of grammatical and lexical helps (§ 224), which may serv as a guide to the inquirer.

For this edition I hav again receivd kind informations from sum that uze the book. Beside the correction of misprints, the contents of the book has been favorably influenced by notes receivd from Mssrs. G. H. Balg, R. Bethge, J. Franck, and M. H. Jellinek. I herewith express my sincerest thanks to all. Mr. Roediger's review has also been thankfully uzed. For assistance renderd me in correcting the proof-sheets, I ow many thanks to my friend E. Sievers.

For this edition, I have again received kind feedback from some who use the book. Besides correcting typos, the content of the book has been positively influenced by notes received from Messrs. G. H. Balg, R. Bethge, J. Franck, and M. H. Jellinek. I want to express my sincerest thanks to all of them. Mr. Roediger's review has also been gratefully utilized. I owe many thanks to my friend E. Sievers for the assistance he provided in correcting the proof sheets.

Heidelberg, May 1st, 1895.

W. BRAUNE.

Heidelberg, May 1, 1895. W. BRAUNE.

[Pg vi]
[Pg vii]

EDITOR'S PREFACE.

The present edition contains all of the latest (fourth) German edition and such additional matter as has been deemd fit to enable the student to lern Gothic more quickly than he would without it. The addition of the Explanatory Notes and of the comprehensiv amplification of the Glossary has, in a mezure, been suggested and desired by many. At first it was intended to ad explanatory notes only, leaving the glossary intact. But from numerous communications I lernd that the present glossary must be welcum to many, if not all, students of Gothic.

The current edition includes all of the latest (fourth) German edition and additional materials deemed suitable to help students learn Gothic faster than they would otherwise. The inclusion of Explanatory Notes and a more comprehensive Glossary has, to some extent, been requested and appreciated by many. Initially, the plan was to add only explanatory notes and keep the glossary as is. However, from numerous communications, I learned that the current glossary would be welcomed by many, if not all, students of Gothic.

In writing down the Notes I hav taken great pains to place myself in the position of the beginner, and it is hoped that the more advanced student wil pardon what might seem superfluous to him. Sum of the explanations ar due to Bernhardt's critical notes in his 'Wulfila' to which I hav often referd. The Notes wer much more comprehensiv before the glossary was workt out, but many of them hav been transferd to the latter, in a few cases without being deleted in their first place, as I observd in reading the proof-sheets. The Glossary has been prepared upon the following plan: It is strictly alfabetic. The compound verbs ar mentiond with the simpl verbs. Many inflectional forms which the beginner who has not yet fully masterd the declensions and conjugations, is not likely to recognize in the texts, hav been givn as vocabulary words. The inflection of every word is indicated by figures in parentheses. The figures in () immediately after the vocabulary words refer to the paragrafs on Fonology. Proper nouns hav been inflected in full inasmuch as they occur in the Selections. The references to the texts ar complete and may be regarded as the first supplement to my 'Comparativ Glossary of the Gothic Language'. Tho admitting accidental omissions in this respect, I am certain that the references ar more complete than those of any other glossary. This[Pg viii] tiresum work has cost me much time and labor, but I hope soon to be able to continue and complete it for the remaining part of the Gothic texts.

In writing down the Notes, I have made a strong effort to see things from a beginner's perspective, and I hope that more advanced students will overlook what might seem unnecessary to them. Some of the explanations are based on Bernhardt's critical notes in his 'Wulfila,' which I have referred to often. The Notes were much more comprehensive before the glossary was finalized, but many have been moved to the glossary, in a few cases without being deleted from their original sections, as I noticed while reading the proof-sheets. The Glossary has been prepared with the following plan: it is strictly alphabetical. Compound verbs are listed alongside the simple verbs. Many inflectional forms that a beginner who hasn't fully mastered the declensions and conjugations is unlikely to recognize in the texts have been included as vocabulary words. The inflection of each word is indicated by numbers in parentheses. The numbers in () immediately after the vocabulary words refer to the paragraphs on Phonology. Proper nouns have been fully inflected as they appear in the Selections. The references to the texts are complete and can be considered the first supplement to my 'Comparative Glossary of the Gothic Language.' While I acknowledge that there may be accidental omissions in this regard, I am confident that the references are more comprehensive than those of any other glossary. This[Pg viii]summary work has taken a lot of time and effort, but I hope to soon be able to continue and complete it for the remaining Gothic texts.

In the square brackets the derivation of the Gothic words is givn first; then follow the correspondences or cognates, both being, with one or two exceptions, Germanic. The cognates ar always preceded by cp. or cf. It is possibl, however, that I hav faild in sum cases to point out the transference of a word from one declension or conjugation to another.

In the square brackets, the origin of the Gothic words is provided first; then the related words or cognates follow, which are mostly Germanic, with one or two exceptions. The cognates are always preceded by cp. or cf. However, it’s possible that I may have missed some cases where a word has shifted from one declension or conjugation to another.

This part of the book makes no claim to completeness. Several articls had been laid aside for further consideration, but professional and other duties as wel as the sudden appearance of the German edition ar the causes of leaving them untucht. As regards derivation and composition, the student wil do wel by reading carefully §§ 79-82 and § 88^a together with the notes. To point out the various root-grades from which words are derived, is left to the lecturer.

The translation of the Grammar was made from the advanced plate proofs for which I am obliged to the eminent author, Prof. Wm. Braune, who kindly and promptly forwarded them to me. Altho this part of the work was done as fast as it was demanded by the printer, I feel sure that nothing has been omitted. In this respect I am indetted to my wife and one of my pupils, Miss Matilda Uihlein who, in comparing my translation with the German text, red the latter from the beginning to the end. Another pupil, Miss Ida Uihlein, is to be credited for the translation of Prof. Braune's preface, which could be sent to press with comparativly few emendations.

The translation of the Grammar was done from the advanced plate proofs, and I am grateful to the distinguished author, Prof. Wm. Braune, who kindly and promptly sent them to me. Although this part of the work was completed as quickly as the printer required, I'm confident that nothing was overlooked. In this regard, I owe thanks to my wife and one of my students, Miss Matilda Uihlein, who, by comparing my translation with the German text, read the latter from start to finish. Another student, Miss Ida Uihlein, deserves credit for translating Prof. Braune's preface, which was able to go to press with relatively few edits.

Beside the books often cited in the square brackets and in the Notes I have thankfully uzed Mayhew and Skeat's Midl English Dictionary, Skeat's Etymological Dictionary, and Mac Lean's Old and Midl English Reader.

Beside the books often cited in the square brackets and in the Notes, I have gratefully used Mayhew and Skeat's Middle English Dictionary, Skeat's Etymological Dictionary, and MacLean's Old and Middle English Reader.

Milwaukee, Aug. 15th, 1895.

G. H. BALG.

Milwaukee, Aug. 15, 1895.

G. H. BALG.

[Pg ix]

CONTENTS.

Fonology.				Page
Chap.	I.	Alfabet (§§ 1-2)		1
Chap.	II.	Vowels (§§ 3-27)		3
Chap.	III.	Table of the Vowels (§§ 28-36)		14
		A.	Fonetic System (§ 28).
		B.	Historical System (§§ 29-36).
Chap.	IV.	Consonants (§§ 37-82)		18
		A.	Sonorous Consonants (§§ 38-50).
		B.	Noizd Sounds (§§ 51-78).
			Labials (§§ 51-56).
			Gutturals (§§ 57-68).
			Dentals (§§ 69-78).
		Appendix. General Remarks on the Consonants (§§ 79-82).
Inflections.
Chap.	I.	Declension of Substantivs (§§ 83-120)		37
		General Remarks (§§ 83-88).
		A.	Vowel (Strong) Declension (§§ 89-106).
		B.	N-Declension (Weak Declension) (§§ 107-113).
		C.	Minor Declensions (§§ 114-118).
		Appendix. Declension of Foren Words (§§ 119-120).
Chap.	II.	Declension of Adjectivs (§§ 121-139)		51
		A.	Strong Adjectivs (§§ 122-139).
		B.	Weak Adjectivs (§ 132).
		C.	Declension of Participls (§§ 133-134).
		D.	Comparison of Adjectivs (§§ 135-139).
Chap.	III.	Numerals (§§ 140-149)		58
Chap.	IV.	Pronouns (§§ 150-166)		61
Chap.	V.	Conjugation (§§ 167-209)		66
		I.	Strong Verbs (§§ 169-182).
		II.	Weak Verbs (§§ 183-195).
		III.	Irregular Verbs (§§ 196-209).
Chap.	VI.	Particls (§§ 210-219)		85
Appendix.		The Goths, Sources, Editions, Grammatical and Lexical Helps, Literature of the Goth. Syntax (§§ 220-224)		89
Selections for Reading				97
Explanatory Notes				117
Glossary				135

[Pg x]

ABBREVIATIONS.

anv., anomalous verb.
cf. or cp., compare.
E., English.
follg., following.
G., German.
Gr., Greek.
Idg., Indo-Germanic.
Lt., Latin.
ME., Midl English.
MHG., Midl High German.
NE., New English.
NHG., New High German.
Nth., Northumbrian.
OE., Old English.
OHG., Old High German.
ON., Old Norse.
OS., Old Saxon.
pp., past participl.
prec., preceding.
prsp., present participl.
prt.-prs., preterit present.
Sc., Scotch.
Shak., Shakspere.
Sp., Spenser.
sta., strong adjectiv.
stv., strong verb.
th. s., the same.
w., with or word.
wa., weak adjectiv.
wv., weak verb.
<, from; >, whense.

Anz. fda., Anzeiger für deutsches alterthum, s. Zs. fda.

Anz. fda., Anzeiger für deutsches Altertum, s. Zs. fda.

Beitr., Beiträge zur geschichte der deutschen sprache und literatur. Halle 1874 ff.

Beitr., Contributions to the History of the German Language and Literature. Halle 1874 onwards.

Bezzenb. beitr., Beiträge zur kunde der indogerm. sprachen, hg. v. A. Bezzenberger. Göttingen 1875 ff.

Bezzenb. contrib., Contributions to the study of Indo-European languages, ed. by A. Bezzenberger. Göttingen 1875 onwards.

Brugm., Grundriss der vergleichenden grammatik der indog. sprachen von K. Brugmann (Engl. edition). Strassburg 1886-92.

Brugm., Outline of the Comparative Grammar of the Indo-European Languages by K. Brugmann (English edition). Strasbourg 1886-92.

Dietrich, aussprache des got., s. § 2 n. 1.

Germ., Germania, hg. von Pfeiffer-Bartsch-Behaghel (1856-92).

Germ., Germania, ed. by Pfeiffer-Bartsch-Behaghel (1856-92).

Grundr., Grundriss der germ. philologie, hg. v. H. Paul. Strassburg 1889-93.

Grundr., Grundriss der germ. philologie, ed. by H. Paul. Strasbourg 1889-93.

IF., Indogerm. forschungen, hg. v. K. Brugmann und W. Streitberg. Strassburg 1892 ff.

IF., Indogerm. Forschungen, ed. by K. Brugmann and W. Streitberg. Strasbourg 1892 ff.

Kl. W., Kluge, Wörterbuch.

Kl. W., Kluge, Dictionary.

Kuhns zs., Zeitschrift für vergleichende sprachforschung. Berlin 1852 ff.

Kuhns zs., Journal of Comparative Linguistic Research. Berlin 1852 onward.

Litbl., Literaturblatt für germ. und roman. philologie. Heilbronn 1880 ff.

Sk., Skeat, Etymological Dictionary.

Sk., Skeat, Etymology Dictionary.

vB., von Bahder, Verbalabstracta.

Wrede, Wand., Sprache der Wandalen, s. § 220 n. 4.

Wrede, Ostg., Sprache der Ostgoten, s. § 221 n. 4.

Zs. fda., Zeitschrift für deutsches alterthum. Berlin 1841 ff. With this sinse vol. 19: Anzeiger für d. alt. Berlin 1876 ff.

Zs. fda., Journal for German Antiquity. Berlin 1841 and onwards. With this, see vol. 19: Bulletin for the Ancient. Berlin 1876 and onwards.

Zs. fdph., Zeitschrift für deutsche philologie. Halle 1869 ff.

Zs. fdph., Journal of German Philology. Halle 1869 and onwards.

[Pg 1]

FONOLOGY.

CHAP. I. THE ALFABET.

§ 1. The monuments of the Gothic language ar handed down to us in a peculiar alfabet which, according to Greek ecclesiastic writers, was invented by Wulfila (s. § 221). The Gothic alfabet, however, is not entirely a new creation, but Wulfila based it on the Greek alfabet which he accomodated to the Gothic sounds, increasing it by several signs from the Latin alfabet, and, in a few cases, availing himself of the familiar runic alfabet. Of the Greek alfabet he also retaind the order and numerical value. The Gothic alfabet is now sufficiently represented in Roman letters. In the following we giv in the first line the original Gothic characters, in the second their numerical values, in the third the transliteration of the Gothic characters by Roman letters, which latter we shall uze exclusivly in this book.

𐌰	𐌱	𐌲	𐌳	𐌴	𐌵	𐌶	𐌷	𐌸
1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9
a	b	g	d	e	q	z	h	þ
𐌹	𐌺	𐌻	𐌼	𐌽	𐌾	𐌿	𐍀	𐍁
10	20	30	40	50	60	70	80	90
i	k	l	m	n	j	u	p	—
𐍂	𐍃	𐍄	𐍅	𐍆	𐍇	𐍈	𐍉	𐍊
100	200	300	400	500	600	700	800	900
r	s	t	w	f	χ	ƕ	o	—

[Pg 2]

Note 1. Of these signs one (i, 10) is represented by two forms. The i without dots occurs oftener, the i with dots stands at the beginning of a word, and in the midl of a word after a vowel, to show that it forms a syllabl for itself and does not form a difthong with the preceding vowel; e. g., fraïtiþ (= fra-itiþ). In transliteration i is employd thruout.

Note 1. One of these signs (i, 10) comes in two forms. The i without dots is used more often, while the i with dots appears at the beginning of a word and in the middle of a word after a vowel, indicating that it creates its own syllable and does not form a diphthong with the preceding vowel; for example, fraïtiþ (= fra-itiþ). In transliteration, i is used throughout.

Note 2. Two characters, the Greek episema 'koppa' (90) and 'sampi' (900), hav no fonetic values, but serv only as numerals. When the symbols denote numerals, they ar markt by a horizontal stroke abuv them, or by dots before and after them: ib or ·ib· = 12.

Note 2. Two characters, the Greek episema 'koppa' (90) and 'sampi' (900), have no phonetic values, but serve only as numerals. When the symbols indicate numerals, they are marked by a horizontal stroke above them or by dots before and after them: ib or ·ib· = 12.

Note 3. The transliteration of the Gothic symbols is not alike in all cases. Most editors hav hitherto uzed v for w (§ 39, n. 1); for the singl symbols q (§ 39, n. 1) and ƕ (§ 63) we find kv or qu and hv or w, respectivly; for þ, which is borrowd from the Norse-A.-S. alfabet, also th occurs (§ 70, n. 1).

Note 4. The Gothic monuments show but few abbreviations; the holy names, guþ, frauja, iêsus, Χristus, ar always abbreviated. Abbreviations ar denoted by a stroke abuv the word, but in our texts the abbreviated words ar uzually printed in ful; as, gþ = guþ, fa, fins = frauja, fraujins.—For more on this point, s. Gabelentz-Loebe's grammar, p. 19 et seq.

Note 4. The Gothic monuments show only a few abbreviations; the holy names, guþ, frauja, iêsus, Χristus, are always abbreviated. Abbreviations are marked by a stroke above the word, but in our texts, the abbreviated words are usually printed in full; for example, gþ = guþ, fa, fins = frauja, fraujins.—For more on this point, see Gabelentz-Loebe's grammar, p. 19 et seq.

Note 5. The Goths alredy had the Germanic runic letters before Wulfila. The names of these letters wer uzed also for the new characters. The names of the Gothic symbols, together with a few Gothic words and alfabets, ar preservd in a Salzburg-Vienna manuscript of the 9th century: W. Grimm, 'Wiener Jahrbücher der Litteratur 43', p. 4 et seq. Massmann, zs. fda. 1, p. 296 et seq.—The form of the names, however, is very corrupt. As to this, cp. A. Kirchhoff, 'Das Gotische Runenalphabet', 2nd edit., Berlin 1854; J. Zacher, 'Das Gotische Alphabet Vulfilas und das Runenalphabet', Leipzig 1855.—Of special importance is Wimmer's treatis on Wulfila's alfabet, as 'Appendix I' to his book: 'Die Runenschrift', Berlin 1887, pp. 259-274.

Note 5. The Goths already had the Germanic runic letters before Wulfila. The names of these letters were used also for the new characters. The names of the Gothic symbols, along with a few Gothic words and alphabets, are preserved in a Salzburg-Vienna manuscript from the 9th century: W. Grimm, 'Wiener Jahrbücher der Litteratur 43', p. 4 et seq. Massmann, zs. fda. 1, p. 296 et seq.—However, the form of the names is very corrupt. Regarding this, see A. Kirchhoff, 'Das Gotische Runenalphabet', 2nd edit., Berlin 1854; J. Zacher, 'Das Gotische Alphabet Vulfilas und das Runenalphabet', Leipzig 1855.—Of special importance is Wimmer's treatise on Wulfila's alphabet, as 'Appendix I' to his book: 'Die Runenschrift', Berlin 1887, pp. 259-274.

§ 2. Of the 27 characters two hav only numerical values, (§ 1, n. 2), a third, the χ, is retaind only in Greek foren words, especially in the name 'Christus', and denotes no Gothic sound. Hense there remain the following 24 characters whose fonetic values ar to be determind:

(a) Consonants:

p b f m w | t d þ s z n l r | k q g h ƕ j.

(b) Vowels:

a e i o u.

ei iu ai au.

In determining the fonetic values of these characters we ar guided by the following means: (1) The Gothic alfabet is based on the Greek alfabet; hense, the pronunciation of[Pg 3] the Greek letters to be determind for the 4th century, must also be regarded as that of the Gothic letters so long as there is no proof to the contrary. (2) The rendition of the numerous Greek foren words and proper nouns by Wulfila. (3) The transliteration of the Gothic proper nouns in Latin documents and by Latin authors of the 4th-8th centuries. (4) The testimony of the cognate Germanic languages. (5) Fonetic changes and grammatical fenomena in the Gothic language itself permit us to draw conclusions about the nature of the sounds.

In determining the phonetic values of these characters, we are guided by the following means: (1) The Gothic alphabet is based on the Greek alphabet; therefore, the pronunciation of the Greek letters as determined for the 4th century must also be considered the same for the Gothic letters unless there is evidence to the contrary. (2) The rendering of the numerous Greek foreign words and proper nouns by Wulfila. (3) The transliteration of Gothic proper nouns in Latin documents and by Latin authors from the 4th to the 8th centuries. (4) The evidence from related Germanic languages. (5) Phonetic changes and grammatical phenomena in the Gothic language itself allow us to draw conclusions about the nature of the sounds.

Note 1. Concerning the pronunciation of the Gothic letters, cp. Weingärtner, 'Die Aussprache des Gotischen zur Zeit des Ulfilas', Leipzig 1858; Fr. Dietrich, 'Ueber die Aussprache des Gotischen während der Zeit seines Bestehens', Marburg 1862; about the consonants, Paul, 'Zur Lautverschiebung', Beitr. 1, p. 147 et seq.

Note 1. Regarding the pronunciation of the Gothic letters, see Weingärtner, 'The Pronunciation of Gothic at the Time of Ulfilas', Leipzig 1858; Fr. Dietrich, 'On the Pronunciation of Gothic During Its Existence', Marburg 1862; for information about the consonants, Paul, 'On Sound Shifts', Contributions 1, p. 147 and following.

Note 2. An old testimony for the Gothic pronunciation in the Salzburg-Vienna MS.:

Note 2. An old record of the Gothic pronunciation in the Salzburg-Vienna MS.:

uuortun		otan		auar		euangeliū		ther	lucam
waurþun		uþþan		afar		aiwaggeljo		þairh	Lokan
	uuorthun		auar		thuo		iachuedant iach^uatun
	waurþun		afar		þo		jah qeþun.

ubi dicit. genuit .j. ponitur ubi gabriel .g. ponunt et alia his sim̅ ubi aspiratione . ut dicitur gah libeda jah libaida diptongon ai pro e longa p ch q ponunt.—Cp. § 1, n. 5, and, for explanation, especially Kirchhoff, p. 20 et seq.

CHAP. II. THE VOWELS.

a

§ 3. The Gothic a signifies as a rule the short a-sound [as in G. mann].

§ 3. The Gothic a usually represents the short a sound [like in G. mann].

Note 1. Foren words and names; as, Annas, Ἀννας; Akaja, Ἀχαΐα; barbarus, βάρβαρος; aggilus, ἄγγελος; karkara, carcer; lukarn, lucerna; Kafarnaum, Καπερναούμ.

Note 1. Foreign words and names; for example, Annas, Ἀννας; Akaja, Ἀχαΐα; barbarus, βάρβαρος; aggilus, ἄγγελος; karkara, carcer; lukarn, lucerna; Kafarnaum, Καπερναούμ.

Note 2. Gothic names: Athanaricus, Ariaricus, Amalafrigda (Ammian.)

Gothic names: Athanaricus, Ariaricus, Amalafrigda (Ammian.)

§ 4. Short a is very frequent both in stem-syllabls and in inflection. E. g.

§ 4. The short a sound appears often in both root syllables and in grammatical endings. For example,

(a) Stem-syllabls: agis, aw; aljis, 'alius'; tagr, tear; aƕa, 'aqua'; alan, to grow; hafjan, to heav; saltan, to salt; haldan, to hold; waldan, to rule; fadar, father; staþs, place.—ahtau, 'octo'; gasts, guest; ƕaþar, 'uter'; awistr, sheepfold (OHG. au, 'ovis'; ahd. gr., § 219, n. 3); bandi, band; barn, child; saggws, song; all preterits of the III.-V.[Pg 4] ablaut-series: bar, I bore; hlaf, I stole; band, I bound; gaf, I gave, etc.

(b) Inflections: daga (dat. sg., § 90), waúrda (nom. acc. pl., § 93), giba (nom. acc. sg., § 96), guma (nom. sg., § 107), haírtôna (nom. acc. pl., § 109); —blindamma, blindana, blinda, blindata (str. adj., § 123); —imma, ina, ita, ija, meina (prn.; § 150 et seq.); —nima (1st pers. sg. prs. ind.); nimaima, nimaiwa, nimaina (1st pers. pl. du. and 3d pers. pl. opt., § 170); haitada (medio-passiv, § 170); sôkida (weak prt., § 184); —adverbs: -ba (as, glaggwuba), nêƕa, inna, ana, waíla, etc.

Note 1. Apocope of an unaccented a before enclitics: þat-ist, þat-ei, þan-uh, þamm-uh, þan-ei, þamm-ei, kar-ist.—Also frêt and frêtum (prt. of fra-itan, to devour, § 176, n. 3).

Note 2. For a in the difthongs ai, au, s. §§ 21. 25.

Note 2. For a in the diphthongs ai, au, s. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

§ 5. In a few cases a is long [as in E. father]. (Comp. Holtzmann, Altd. Gr., I, 3 et seq.).

§ 5. In a few cases a is pronounced long [like E. father]. (See Holtzmann, Altd. Gr., I, 3 et seq.).

(a) In foren words: Silbânus (Silvanus), aurâli (orale), spaíkulâtur (speculator), Peilâtus, etc.;

In foreign words: Silbânus (Silvanus), aurâli (orale), spaíkulâtur (speculator), Peilâtus, etc.;

(b) In the following Gothic words: fâhan (OHG. fâhan), to cach; hâhan (OHG. hâhan), to hang; þâhta (prt. of þagkjan, to think); brâhta (prt. of briggan, to bring); gafâhs, a haul; faúrhâh, curtain; gahâhjô, in order; -gâhts, a going; also þâhô (OHG. dâha), clay; unwâhs, blameless (OE. wôh, wrong).

(b) In the following Gothic words: fâhan (OHG. fâhan), to catch; hâhan (OHG. hâhan), to hang; þâhta (the past tense of þagkjan, to think); brâhta (the past tense of briggan, to bring); gafâhs, a haul; faúrhâh, curtain; gahâhjô, in order; -gâhts, a going; also þâhô (OHG. dâha), clay; unwâhs, blameless (OE. wôh, wrong).

Note. In the words mentiond under (b) âh arose from anh (§ 50, n. 1). Cp. also Litbl. 1886, p. 485.

e

§ 6. e is always a long, close vowel (ê) approaching very much the sound of i [as in E. they].

§ 6. e is always a long, close vowel (ê) that sounds very similar to i [as in E. they].

Note 1. In Greek words η is regularly represented by ê; e. g., Gabriêl, Kêfas, aíkklêsjô, Krêta; —sumtimes also ι: Naên, Ναίν; Tykêkus, Τυχικός; aíloê, ἐλωί; likewise e: Jarêd, Ἰαρέδ.

Note 1. In Greek words, η is typically represented by ê; for example, Gabriêl, Kêfas, aíkklêsjô, Krêta; sometimes also by ι: Naên, Ναίν; Tykêkus, Τυχικός; aíloê, ἐλωί; similarly e: Jarêd, Ἰαρέδ.

Note 2. In Gothic names Latin writers employ e for Gothic ê: Sigismêres, Gelimêr, Reccarêd; besides, as erly as the 6th century, quite regularly also i; as, Theodemir, Valamir. Cp. Beitr., 11, 7 et seq.; Wrede, Wand., 92 et seq.

Note 2. In Gothic names, Latin writers use e for Gothic ê: Sigismêres, Gelimêr, Reccarêd; also, as early as the 6th century, they regularly use i; for example, Theodemir, Valamir. See Beitr., 11, 7 et seq.; Wrede, Wand., 92 et seq.

§ 7. Goth. ê (which regularly corresponds to OHG. and OS. â; ahd. gr., § 34) is found:

(a) in reduplicating verbs, in part with the ablaut ô (§§ 179. 181): grêtan, lêtan, slêpan; (b) in the prt. pl. of[Pg 5] the IV. and V. ablaut-series: sêtum (inf. sitan, to sit), nêmun (inf. niman, to take), têmum (inf. timan, to befit), êtum (inf. itan), and in the prt. sg. frêt; Luc. XV, 30 (§ 176, n. 3); (c) in derivativs from the verbal stems givn under (b); as, andanêms, agreeabl; andanêm, a receiving; gatêmiba, becumingly; uzêta, manger; (d) in other words; as, jêr, year; qêns, wife; mêna, moon; lêkeis, fysician; mêrjan, to preach; manasêþs ('man-seed'), world, etc.; (e) in formativ syllabls: fahêþs, joy; awêþi, flock of sheep (cp. however § 17, n. 1); azêts, easy; 2nd pers. sg. prt. of wvs., -dês (nasidês, § 184); (f) final: in the ending of the gen. pl.; as, dagê; in monosyllabic instrumentals: þê, ƕê (§§ 153. 159); in particls and advs.; as, swê, untê, hidrê, bisunjanê; lastly, in the dativs ƕammêh, ƕarjammêh, ainummê-hun (cp. §§ 163-166).

Note 1. ê before vowels appears as ai; s. § 22.

Note 2. ei occurs quite often for ê, especially in the Gospel of St. Luke; as, qeins (= qêns), faheid (= fahêd), fraleitais (= fralêtais); Lu. II, 5. 10. 29; afleitan; Mt. IX, 6, etc.

Note 2. ei often appears instead of ê, particularly in the Gospel of St. Luke; for example, qeins (= qêns), faheid (= fahêd), fraleitais (= fralêtais); Lu. II, 5. 10. 29; afleitan; Mt. IX, 6, etc.

Note 3. Sporadically also i for ê; so, frequently, in the Gospel of St. Lu.; as, birusjôs; Lu. II, 41; qiþeina; VIII, 56. IX, 21; tawidideina; VI, 11; duatsniwun; Mk. VI, 53. Only i is found in wriþus, herd; Lu. VIII, 33 (for wrêþus; cp. Bezzenb. Beitr. 3, 114).

Note 3. Occasionally, i is used instead of ê; this happens often in the Gospel of St. Luke; for example, birusjôs; Lu. II, 41; qiþeina; VIII, 56; IX, 21; tawidideina; VI, 11; duatsniwun; Mk. VI, 53. Only i is found in wriþus, herd; Lu. VIII, 33 (instead of wrêþus; see Bezzenb. Beitr. 3, 114).

Note 4. Reversely, also e occurs for i and ei (§ 10, n. 5; § 17, n. 1).—These deviations (in ns. 2-4) seem due to East Gothic writers; cp. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 161.

§ 8. From the preceding ê must be separated the ê of sum Gothic words in which it corresponds to OHG. ea, ia (not â): hêr, here; Krêks, Greek; fêra, side, region; mês, table. Cp. ahd. gr., §§ 35. 36; Beitr., 18, 409 et seq.

i

§ 9. Gothic i, as a rule, denotes the short vowel i [as in E. it], while its corresponding long sound is represented by ei [= ie in E. believ]; s. § 16.

Note 1. The i in Greek words stands for short ι, only exceptionally for η which is generally represented by ê; e. g., Aúnisimus, Ὀνήσιμος; Biþania, Βηθανία.

Note 1. The i in Greek words represents a short ι, rarely for η, which is usually shown as ê; for example, Aúnisimus, Ὀνήσιμος; Biþania, Βηθανία.

Note 2. i in Gothic words is long, when it is incorrectly employd for ê (cp. § 7, n. 3).

§ 10. The Gothic i, from an historical point of view, is of two kinds: It represents two originally distinct sounds[Pg 6] which, from a purely Gothic standpoint, can not be separated.

§ 10. From a historical perspective, the Gothic i comes in two forms: it reflects two originally different sounds[Pg 6] that, when viewed solely from a Gothic lens, cannot be distinguished.

(a) Goth. i = proethnic Germanic e (OHG. ë or i; cp. ahd. gr., §§ 28-30), as in the prs. tense of verbs of the III.-V. ablaut-series (§§ 32-34): niman, OHG. nëman; giban, OHG. gëban; giba, OHG. gëba; bindan, OHG. bintan; itan, to eat; midjis, 'medius'; hlifan, to steal; swistar, OHG. swëster; fidwôr, four; gifts, gift; -qiss, speech; the pps. of the V. ablaut-series: gibans, itans, lisans, wigans, qiþans.

(b) Goth. i = proethnic Germanic i (OHG. i; ahd. gr., § 31); e. g., lists, stratagem; fisks, fish; is, he; wissa, I knew; skritnan, to rend (intr.); prt. pl. and pp. of the verbs of the I. ablaut-series (§ 30): bitun, bitans (inf. beitan); stigun, stigans (inf. steigan); liþun, liþans (inf. leiþan).

Note 1. Final i occurs in ni, bi, si, hiri; in the nominativs of feminin and neuter j-stems: bandi (§ 96), kuni (§ 93); in the acc. and voc. sg. of the masculin j-stems: hari (§ 90); 3d pers. sg. prt. opt.: nêmi. This final i appears as j, when it becums medial (§ 45).

Note 2. Final i before a following i of an enclitic word is elided in nist (= ni-ist), sei (= si-ei), niba (= ni-iba).

Note 2. The final i before another i in an enclitic word is dropped in nist (= ni-ist), sei (= si-ei), niba (= ni-iba).

Note 3. Every i before h and r is broken to aí; cp. § 20.

Note 3. Every i before h and r is changed to aí; cp. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Note 4. ij is found in ija, 'eam'; þrija, 'tria'; fijan, to hate; frijôn, to luv; sijum, we ar; kijans, germinated, etc. i for ij is rare: fian, sium, etc., but friaþwa (beside frijaþwa), luv, occurs very often.

Note 4. ij appears in ija, 'eam'; þrija, 'tria'; fijan, to hate; frijôn, to love; sijum, we are; kijans, germinated, etc. i for ij is uncommon: fian, sium, etc., but friaþwa (beside frijaþwa), love, occurs very frequently.

Note 5. Occasionally e takes the place of i; as, usdrebi; Mk. V, 10; seneigana; I. Tim. V, 1.

Note 5. Sometimes e replaces i; for example, usdrebi; Mk. V, 10; seneigana; I. Tim. V, 1.

Note 6. For i in the difthong iu, s. §§ 18. 19.

Note 6. For i in the diphthong iu, s. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Note 7. For a separation of the two is (= OHG. ë and i) in East Gothic names, s. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 162.

Note 7. For the distinction between the two is (= OHG. ë and i) in East Gothic names, see Wrede, 'Ostg.', 162.

o

§ 11. The Gothic character o always denotes a long close o approaching sumwhat the sound of û (= o in E. home).

§ 11. The Gothic character o always represents a prolonged close o, which is somewhat similar to the sound of û (= o in E. home).

Note 1. In Greek words o, as a rule, corresponds to ω, rarely to ο; e. g., Makidonja, Μακεδονία; it also stands for ου: Iodas, Ἰούδας; Lu. III, 26.

Note 1. In Greek words, o usually corresponds to ω, and rarely to ο; for example, Makidonja, Μακεδονία; it can also represent ου: Iodas, Ἰούδας; Lu. III, 26.

Note 2. o in Gothic words often stands for (short) u (§ 14, n. 3).

§ 12. ô (= OHG. uo; s. ahd. gr., § 38 et seq.) is frequent in Gothic words. E. g., brôþar, brother; bôka, beech; frôþs, wise; flôdus, flud; fôtus, foot.

In the prt. of the VI. series (§ 35) and of the ê—ô-series (§ 36): ôl, hôf, ôg, pl. ôlum, hôfum, ôgum; laílôt, laílôtum,[Pg 7] aísô. In endings, as in nom. pl. gibôs, dagôs; wvs. II.: salbôn; final, in gen. pl. f. gibô, tuggônô; nom. sg. tuggô, haírtô. Prns.: ƕô, þô, sô, ƕanô-h, ainnô-hun, ƕarjanô-h. Verb salbô. Advs. in -ô (§ 211).

Note 1. For ô we sumtimes find u: gakrôtûda (inf. krôtôn), he is crusht; Lu. XX, 18; ûhtêdun (prs. ôg), they feard; Mk. XI, 32.—In East Gothic names u often takes the place of ô; s. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 164.

Note 1. For ô we sometimes find u: gakrôtûda (inf. krôtôn), he is crushed; Lu. XX, 18; ûhtêdun (prs. ôg), they feared; Mk. XI, 32.—In East Gothic names, u often replaces ô; see Wrede, 'Ostg.', 164.

Note 2. In a few words ô before vowels becums au; s. § 26.

Note 3. ô and u interchange in the inflection of fôn, gen. funins (§ 118). Concerning this and other relations between ô and u, cp. Beitr. 6, 377 et seq.; 564; also Kuhns Zs., 26, 16 et seq.

u

§ 13. The letter u in Gothic denotes both a short and a long vowel; the short u, however, occurs oftener than long û.

§ 13. The letter u in Gothic represents both a short and a long vowel; however, the short u appears more frequently than the long û.

Note 1. u in foren words regularly represents Gr. ου. In unaccented syllabls, however, it stands for Gr. ο: diabulus, διάβολος (beside diabaúlus), apaústulus (beside apaústaúlus), paíntêkustê, πεντηκοστή.

Note 1. u in foreign words typically represents Greek ου. In unaccented syllables, though, it stands for Greek ο: diabulus, διάβολος (alongside diabaúlus), apaústulus (alongside apaústaúlus), paíntêkustê, πεντηκοστή.

Note 2. u for ô seldom (§ 12, n. 1), u for áu (§ 25, n. 3).

§ 14. Short u is very frequent in Gothic. E. g.

§ 14. The short u sound is really common in Gothic. For example,

(a) juk, yoke; sunus, sun; drus, fall; us-drusts, a falling; fra-lusts, lost; lusnan, to perish; —in the prt. pl. and pp. of the verbs of the II. series (§ 31); e. g., gutum, gutans; lusum, lusans; —in endings of the sbs. of the u-decl.: handus, handu; —final, as in þu, prn., thou; nu, now; -u (interr. particl).

(b) wulfs, wolf; wulla, wool; gaqumþs, council; gulþ, gold; swumfsl, pond; hund, 100; sibun, 7; taíhun, 10; fulls, ful; un- (privativ prefix); in the prt. pl. and pp. of the verbs of the III. series (§ 32): bundum, bundans; in the pp. of the verbs of the IV. series (§ 33): numans, stulans.

brukans, broken; us-bruknan, to break off (intr.); trudan, to tred, pp. trudans; snutrs, wise.

brukans, broken; us-bruknan, to break off (intr.); trudan, to tread, pp. trudans; snutrs, wise.

Note 1. As a rule, the final u of stems is dropt before derivativ j-suffixes; e. g., -hardjan, to harden (< hardus); -agljan, to trubl (< aglus); manwjan, to prepare (< manwus); ufarassjan, to increase (< ufarassus); L. Meyer, 'Got. Spr.', p. 325 et seq. But skadwjan, to overshadow (< skadus), and skadweins, a shading (cp. Zs. fda. 36, 269).—Concerning u beside w, cp. § 42.

Note 2. Every u before h and r is broken to aú; cp. § 24.

Note 2. Every u before h and r changes to aú; see __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

[Pg 8]

Note 3. u is eight times (mostly in Lu.) represented by o; e. g., laúhmoni, lightning: Lu. XVII, 24; sunjos, suns; Lu. XVI, 8; ushôfon; Lu. XVII, 13; ainomêhun; Lu. VIII, 43; faího, muney; Mk. X, 23.

Note 3. u is represented by o eight times (mostly in Lu.); for example, laúhmoni, lightning: Lu. XVII, 24; sunjos, suns; Lu. XVI, 8; ushôfon; Lu. XVII, 13; ainomêhun; Lu. VIII, 43; faího, money; Mk. X, 23.

Note 4. In the endings of the u-declension u is occasionally represented by au; as, sunaus (nom. sg.); Lu. IV, 3; cp. § 105, n. 2.

§ 15. Long û certainly appears in: (a) ût, out (ûta, etc.); dûbô, duv; rûna, mystery; rûms, room, roomy; *mûl (in faúrmûljan, to muzl); brûþs, bride; hûs, house; skûra, shower; hlûtrs, pure; fûls, foul; *mûks (in mûkamôdei), meek; þûsundi, 1000; brûkjan, to uze (prt. brûhta; adj. brûks); lûkan, to lock (§ 173, n. 2); hrûkjan, to crow (s. Beitr., 6, 379); hnûþô, sting (Icel. hnúþa; s. Noreen, Nord. revy, April 1883).

(b) for nasalized u, the primitiv nasal being lost (cp. § 5, b; § 50, n. 1): þûhta (prt. of þugkjan, to think), þûhtus, thought (adj. þûhts); hûhrus, hunger; jûhiza (compar. to juggs), yunger; ûhtwô, daybreak; ûhteigs, ûhtiugs, seasonabl; bi-ûhts, accustomd (s. Brgm., I, 181).

Note 1. u is perhaps long in: þrûtsfill, leprosy (cp. ON. þrútinn, swoln; OE. þrûstfell; Beitr., 9, 254); anabûsns, commandment (Beitr., 9, 152 and 10, 497; Brgm., II, 287); lûns, ransom (Brgm., II, 285); sûts, sweet (OS. swôti, OE. swête; cp. however Kuhn's Zs., 26, 380); the suff. -dûþs (§ 103; cp. Beitr. 6, 380); jûs, ye (§ 150; Brgm., III, 374. 398). Sum write also fidûr- and -ûh (cp. § 24, n. 2).

Note 2. In Rûma, Rome, Rûmôneis, a Roman, û stands for the Lt. o.

Note 2. In Rûma, Rome, Rûmôneis, a Roman, û represents the Latin o.

Note 3. o for û occurs only in ôhteigô; II. Tim. IV, 2 (in codex B, for ûhteigô in A).

Note 3. o for û appears only in ôhteigô; II. Tim. IV, 2 (in codex B, for ûhteigô in A).

Note 4. For û becuming au before vowels, s. § 26, b.

Note 4. For û becoming au before vowels, s. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, b.

ei

§ 16. Like Greek ει at the time of Wulfila, and in imitation of it, Gothic ei denotes long î.

§ 16. Just like the Greek ει during Wulfila's time, and inspired by it, Gothic ei represents a long î.

Note 1. In Greek words ei uzually stands for ι, but also for ei, and sumtimes for η.

Note 1. In Greek, ei typically represents ι, but can also represent ei, and sometimes η.

Note 2. Concerning ei for Goth. ê, s. § 7, n. 2.

Note 3. The difthongal pronunciation of ei suggested by J. Grimm is refuted also for linguistic reasons. Cp. J. Schmidt, 'Idg. Vocalismus', I, 485; Litbl. 1886, 485; Brgm., I, 57.

Note 3. The diphthong pronunciation of ei proposed by J. Grimm is also disproven for linguistic reasons. See J. Schmidt, 'Idg. Vocalismus', I, 485; Litbl. 1886, 485; Brgm., I, 57.

§ 17. ei in stem syllabls of Gothic words occurs especially in the prs. tense of the I. series (§ 30): beitan, to bite; steigan, to mount; þeihan, to thrive; in the inflection of these verbs it interchanges with ai and i.

[Pg 9]

Other exampls: ƕeila, time; eisarn, iron; leiþu, cider; þreis, 3; leihts, light; weihs, holy; skeirs, clear; pronouns: weis, we; meins, þeins, seins; —very often in formativ and inflectional syllabls; as, adjs. in -eigs (mahteigs, mighty); in -eins (aiweins, eternal); nomina actionis in -eins (laiseins, doctrin); nom. and gen. sg. of the m. ja-stems: haírdeis, herd; laisareis, teacher; nom. pl. of the i-decl.: gasteis; opt. prt.: nêmeis; final, in feminins in -ei: managei (§ 113); imperativs: sôkei, etc. (§ 186); the rel. particl ei (§ 157), alone and in composition.

Note 1. ei is quite often represented by ê; as akêtis; Mt. XXVII, 48; wêhsa; Mk. VIII, 26. 27; akê; Gal. II, 14; izê; Mk. IX, 1. Lu. VIII, 13. 15, etc.—Here perhaps belongs also awêþi (§ 7, e), which, however, occurs three times with ê: Jo. XVI, 16. I. Cor. IX, 7; cp. Beitr., 11, 32; 18, 286.

Note 2. Onse (in seiteina; II. Cor. XI, 28) occurs ei beside in (in sinteins, daily; sinteinô, always).

Note 2. Onse (in seiteina; II. Cor. XI, 28) occurs ei next to in (in sinteins, daily; sinteinô, always).

Note 3. Beside gabeigs, rich (gabei, riches), which occurs 5 times in Luke, also II. Cor. VIII, 9. Eph. II, 4 (in B), we find more frequently (11 times) gabigs (> gabigjan, to enrich; gabignan, to grow rich); cp. Brgm., II, 261. 271.

Note 3. In addition to gabeigs, rich (gabei, riches), which appears 5 times in Luke, as well as in II. Cor. VIII, 9. Eph. II, 4 (in B), we more commonly see gabigs (greater than gabigjan, to enrich; gabignan, to grow rich); see Brgm., II, 261. 271.

iu

§ 18. In the pronunciation of iu the stress is on the i, and u is a consonant.

§ 18. In pronouncing iu, the emphasis is on the i, and u acts as a consonant.

Note 1. In Gothic words Latin writers render iu by eu, eo: Theudes, Theudicodo; Theodoricus. As to this, cp. Wrede, 'Wand', 100 et seq.; 'Ostg.', 167.

Note 1. In Gothic words, Latin writers use eu or eo for iu: Theudes, Theudicodo; Theodoricus. For more on this, see Wrede, 'Wand', 100 et seq.; 'Ostg.', 167.

Note 2. In sium (§ 10, n. 4), niu (interr. particl = ni-u, § 216) iu is dissyllabic, i. e. í-ú.

§ 19. iu is a normal vowel of the present tense of the II. series (§ 31), and here it interchanges with the ablauts au, u: biugan, to bend; biudan, to offer.—In other words; as, þiuda, peple; dius, animal; liuhaþ, light; diups, deep; siuks, sick; niujis, new; niun, 9; iup, upward.—In formativ and inflectional syllabls iu does not occur, except in the isolated ûhtiugs (I. Cor. XVI, 12. Cp. Beitr., 12, 202).

Note. In triu, tree; qiujan, to quicken, etc., iu interchanges with iw before an inflectional vowel: gen. triwis; prt. qiwida; cp. § 42.

ai

ai in Gothic words denotes two etymologically, and certainly also fonetically, different sounds.

ai in Gothic words indicates two sounds that are different both etymologically and, definitely, phonetically.

[Pg 10]

§ 20. I. The short vowel aí [= a in E. fat]. ai is uzed in Gothic to denote a short, open e [1]-sound. In this case, according to Grimm's exampl, grammarians put an accute accent over the i (aí) in order to distinguish it from ái (§ 21). Gothic ai corresponds to e or i in OHG. and in the other Germanic languages. The short e-sound represented by aí occurs:

(1) before h (ƕ) and r, which sounds hav caused breaking of every preceding short i to e (aí; § 10, n. 3); e. g., aírþa, erth; waírpan, to throw; baírhts, bright; faíhu, catl; maíhstus, dung; raíhts, right; taíhun, 10; saíƕan, to see; þaíhum (prt. pl. of þeihan, to grow). (2) in reduplicated syllabls (§ 178 et seq.): haíhald, aíaik, laílôt, saísô, etc. Cp. Osthoff, 'Zur Geschichte des Perfects', p. 276 et seq. Brugmann, IV, 15. (3) in the conj. aíþþau, or (= OHG. ëddo, ahd. gr. § 167, n. 11; cp. Beitr. 12, 211); probably, also, in waíla, wel (= OHG. wëla, ahd. gr., § 29, n. 4), but cp. Beitr. 11, 553.

Note 1. The law for the transition of i to ai before h and r (so-calld breaking or refraction) is almost without exception, and equally concerns the Germanic i in general and the Gothic is (§ 10) in particular. The i before h, r, is retaind only in the following words: nih, 'neque' (= ni uh), hiri, (cum) here!; du. hirjats, pl. hirjiþ (219); and in the isolated forms: sihu, victory (cp. § 106, n. 1), þarihis (a probably corrupt form in Mt. IX, 16), adj. in gen. sg., not fuld (said of cloth). Cp. IF. 4, 334 et seq.

Note 2. Not every ai before h, r is aí, but may also be the old difthong; e. g., þáih (prt. of þeihan, like ráis, prt. of reisan, but pl. þaíhum, like risum, § 30), áih, I hav; áihts, property; háihs, one-eyd; fáih, deceit (Beitr., 12, 397); áir, erly (OHG. êr); sáir (OHG. sêr), sorrow; áirus, messenger. Whether ai has the value of ái or aí can in most cases only be inferd from the remaining Germanic languages.

Note 3. In Latin orthografy aí is exprest by e; e. g., Ermanaricus = Goth. *Aírmanareiks, Ermenberga = Goth. *Aírminbaírga. Cp. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 162.

Note 3. In Latin spelling, aí is expressed by e; for example, Ermanaricus = Goth. *Aírmanareiks, Ermenberga = Goth. *Aírminbaírga. See Wrede, 'Ostg.', 162.

Note 4. ai is to be regarded as a difthong (ái) in baitrs, bitter; jains, yon, that (and its derivations), while formerly, according to OHG. bittar, jenêr, it was thought to be short (aí). Cp. Holtzmann, 'Altd. Gr.', p. 11 et seq.; Brgm., I, 392; Bezzenb. Beitr., 16, 156.—Scherer (Zur Gesch. d. dtsch. Sprache) presumed short aí also in the 3d pers. sg. prs. opt. (like nimai) and in several forms of the strong inflection of adjs. (nom. pl. m. blindai, gen. sg. f. blindaizôs, gen. pl. blindaizê, blindaizô). Hirt (Beitr., 18, 284 et seq.) goes stil farther in this direction.—Cp. also § 22, n. 3.

[Pg 11]

§ 21. II. The old Difthong ai. By far the greater number of the Gothic ais express a difthongal sound which is equivalent to OHG. ei or ê (ahd. gr., §§ 43. 44), OS. ê, ON. ei. The Goths of Wulfila's time indeed seem to hav stil pronounced this ai as a + i.—For the difthong ai we employ Grimm's sign ái whenever it is likely to be confused with aí. Exampls of difthongal ai (before h, r, cp. § 20, n. 2): The prts. sg. of the I. ablaut-series (§ 30),—bait, I bit (inf. beitan); staig, I mounted (inf. steigan); etc.; wait (§ 197); ains, one; hlaifs, (loaf of) bred; staiga, path; laisjan, to teach; —haitan, to be calld; maitan, to cut; skaidan, to separate; aiws, time; —hails, hale, sound; dails, deal.

ai appears also in inflectional syllabls of the III. Weak Conjugation (§ 191): habais, habaida, etc.; in the prs. opt.: nimais, etc.; anstais, gen. sg. of the i-decl.; in the str. adjs.: blindaizôs, etc. (§ 123); —final: gibai, anstai, dat. sg.: nimai, 3 prs. sg. opt.; blindai, dat. sg. f. and nom. pl. m. of the str. adj.; —monosyllabls: þai, nom. pl., these; twai, 2; bai, both; jai, yes; sai, behold!; wai, woe!

Note 1. Latin writers express the Gothic ai predominantly by ai, ei: Dagalaiphus, Gaina, Radagaisus, Gisaleicus (cp. Dietrich, 'Ausspr.'), eils in a Lt. epigram (Zs. fda., 1, 379). On the Bukarest rune-ring (cp. § 221, n. 3) stands hailag (Paul's 'Grundriss', I, 411).—Concerning the difthongal pronunciation of the Gothic ai, cp. especially Wrede, 'Wand.', 95 et seq.; about monofthongization in East Goth., s. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 165.

Note 2. ai and aj interchange in wai, woe!; wai-dêdja, evil-doer, and waja-mêrjan, to blasfeme; in aiws, time, and ajukdûþs, eternity.

Note 2. ai and aj switch places in wai, oh no!; wai-dêdja, wrongdoer, and waja-mêrjan, to blaspheme; in aiws, time, and ajukdûþs, eternity.

§ 22. Many scholars hold that also the ai in the reduplicating ablaut vs. (§ 182) saian and waian is difthongal. This ai, however, stands etymologically for Gothic ê, and its OHG. equivalent is â (not ei): OHG. sâen, wâen (cp. ahd. gr., § 359, n. 3.) The difthong ai before a vowel would becum aj; hense, *sajan, *wajan. Here ai perhaps has the sound of long æ, i. e. open e representing close e (ê) when followd by a vowel; thus, saian, waian, for sêan, wêan.

Note 1. Before the i of the 3d pers. sg. prs. a j is often found: saijiþ (Mk. IV, 14), saijiþ (II. Cor. IX, 6 in A, for saiiþ in B; Gal. VI, 7. 8. in A, for saiiþ in B). Before a the j occurs but onse: saijands (Mk. IV, 14). Cp. Beitr. 11, 75 et seq.

Note 1. Before the i in the 3rd person singular present tense, a j is often seen: saijiþ (Mk. IV, 14), saijiþ (II. Cor. IX, 6 in A, for saiiþ in B; Gal. VI, 7. 8. in A, for saiiþ in B). Before a, the j appears only once: saijands (Mk. IV, 14). See Beitr. 11, 75 et seq.

Note 2. Here belongs also the isolated faian (Rom. IX, 19, in prs. faianda); but the prs. to the prt. laílôun is lauan rather than laian. Cp. Beitr. 11, 56.

Note 2. Here also belongs the isolated faian (Rom. IX, 19, in prs. faianda); but the prs. to the prt. laílôun is lauan rather than laian. See Beitr. 11, 56.

[Pg 12]

Note 3. Also the ai in armaiô, alms (Bezzenb. Beitr. 7, 210; Beitr. 11, 74), is likely to belong here.—Concerning the fonetic values of the ais discust here, cp. especially Beitr. 11, 51 et seq.; Brgm., I, pp. 126. 127; Wrede, 'Wand.' 99, who, beside Holtzmann, is inclined to assume a long sound for these ais; Noreen, 'Urg. Lautlehre', p. 35 et seq.

Note 3. Also, the ai in armaiô, alms (Bezzenb. Beitr. 7, 210; Beitr. 11, 74), probably belongs here.—Regarding the phonetic values of the ais discussed here, see especially Beitr. 11, 51 and following; Brgm., I, pp. 126, 127; Wrede, 'Wand.' 99, who, along with Holtzmann, believes these ais have a long sound; Noreen, 'Urg. Lautlehre', p. 35 and following.

§ 23. That the Goth. ai may be both short and long (like a in E. at, fare) is evident from its regular occurrence in Greek words. As a rule, ai = ε in aikklêsjô, ἐκκλησία; Aileisabaiþ, Ἐλισάβεθ; Baiailzaibul, Βεελζεβούλ; Gainnêsaraiþ, Γεννησαρέτ, etc.; likewise = αι (i. e. long æ): Idumaia, Ἰδουμαία; Haíbraius, Ἑβραῖος; hairaísis, αἵρεσις, etc.

§ 23. That the Goth. ai can be both short and long (like a in E. at, fare) is clear from its consistent use in Greek words. Generally, ai = ε in aikklêsjô, ἐκκλησία; Aileisabaiþ, Ἐλισάβεθ; Baiailzaibul, Βεελζεβούλ; Gainnêsaraiþ, Γεννησαρέτ, etc.; likewise = αι (i.e. long æ): Idumaia, Ἰδουμαία; Haíbraius, Ἑβραῖος; hairaísis, αἵρεσις, etc.

Note. Gothic ai for Greek η is exceptional; e. g., Hairodiadins, gen. to Ἡρωδίας (Mk. VI, 17); Neikaúdaimus (Skeir. 52); Νικόδημος (for Nikaúdêmus elsewhere.)

Note. Gothic ai for Greek η is unusual; for example, Hairodiadins, gen. of Ἡρωδίας (Mk. VI, 17); Neikaúdaimus (Skeir. 52); Νικόδημος (for Nikaúdêmus elsewhere.)

au

Also Goth. au (like ai) stands for historically and fonetically different sounds.

Also Goth. au (like ai) represents historically and phonetically distinct sounds.

§ 24. I. The short vowel aú.—au in Gothic denotes a short open o-sound. In this case grammarians put an accute accent over the u (aú) in order to keep it apart from the difthong au. Goth. aú corresponds to o or u in OHG. and in the other Germanic languages.

§ 24. I. The short vowel aú.—au in Gothic represents a short, open o-sound. In this context, grammarians place an acute accent over the u (aú) to distinguish it from the diphthong au. Goth. aú corresponds to o or u in OHG and in other Germanic languages.

The aú, before h and r in Gothic words, has in every instance developt from a short u which, when immediately followd by these sounds, was 'broken' to short ŏ. E. g.

The aú, before h and r in Gothic words, has in every instance developed from a short u which, when immediately followed by these sounds, was 'broken' to short ŏ. E. g.

waúrms, wurm; haúrn, horn; baúrgs (OHG. burg), city; waúrd, word; waúrpum, prt. pl. of waírpan, to throw (cp. § 32); saúhts (OHG. suht), sickness; daúhtar, daughter; aúhsa, ox; taúhum, prt. pl. of tiuhan, to pul; baúhta, prt. of bugjan, to buy.

Note 1. aú before other sounds is entirely exceptional and sumwhat doutful. Thus, in auftô, perhaps (onse also ufto; Mt. XXVII, 64), bisauljan, to sully; bisaulnan, to becum sullied. Holtzmann (altd. gr., p. 14) regards also ufbauljan (II. Tim. III, 4) as belonging to this class.

Note 1. aú before other sounds is quite rare and somewhat questionable. For example, in auftô, perhaps (see also ufto; Mt. XXVII, 64), bisauljan, to sully; bisaulnan, to become sullied. Holtzmann (altd. gr., p. 14) also considers ufbauljan (II. Tim. III, 4) to be part of this category.

Note 2. The change of short u into aú before h is without exception. An apparent exception is the enclitic -uh, and, the u of which must be referd to a secondary development; it is never found after a short accented vowel, nor after a long vowel or difthong; e. g., sa-h, ni-h, þai-h, wiljáu-h, ƕarjanô-h; u occurs after consonants, and in polysyllabic words in which a final short a before the u was elided; as, ƕaz-uh, þammuh (= þamma uh), qiþuh (= qiþa uh). Sum, however, assume -ûh (cp. Beitr. 18, 299).—Other us before h ar all long: þûhta (cp. § 15).—There ar a few cases of[Pg 13] u before r in unaccented syllabls (§ 13, n. 1), namely in the foren words spaikulâtur and paúrpura (beside paúrpaúra), purpl; so, also, in the Gothic fidur- (§ 141, n. 1) which, however, stands perhaps for fidûr- (cp. IF. 4, 334).—The prefix ur- (in urreisan, urruns, etc.) does not belong here; it is a late form for us the s of which was assimilated to a following r (§ 78, n. 4).

Note 3. Not every au before h and r has developt from u, but may also be the difthong au; as, háuhs, high; táuh, prt. of tiuhan (but pl. taúhum, § 31); gáurs, sorry (cp. OHG. gôrag, wreched, and Goth. gaunôn, to mourn).

Note 4. The au for u in the endings of the u-declension may be aú, but also áu which would be due to confusion caused by analogy. Beitr., 18, 280.—Cp. also uftô for auftô, § 24, n. 1.

Note 5. As a rule, the Greek ο is represented by aú; e. g., apaustaulus, ἀπόστολος; alabalstraun, ἀλάβαστρον; Barþaulaumaius, Βαρθολομαῖος; Pauntius, Πόντιος; aú = υ in Saúr, Σύρος; paúrpaúra, πορφύρα.—Goth. aú = o in the East Gothic name Thorisa. (Wrede, 'Ostg.', 76. 165).

Note 5. Generally, the Greek ο is represented by aú; for example, apaustaulus, ἀπόστολος; alabalstraun, ἀλάβαστρον; Barþaulaumaius, Βαρθολομαῖος; Pauntius, Πόντιος; aú = υ in Saúr, Σύρος; paúrpaúra, πορφύρα.—Goth. aú = o in the East Gothic name Thorisa. (Wrede, 'Ostg.', 76. 165).

§ 25. II. The old difthong au [= ou in E. house]. Every au not broken from u (before h, r; s. § 24 and note 3) is a difthong; it corresponds to OHG. au, ou, or ô (ahd. gr., §§ 45. 46), OS. ô, ON. au. Whenever it is likely to be confused with aú, we put (according to Grimm), an accute accent over the a (áu). E. g.

The prts. sg. of the II. ablaut-series (§ 31): gaut, I pour (inf. giutan); laug, I lied, etc.; laugnjan, to deny; daupjan, to baptize; galaubjan, to believ; galaubeins, belief; rauþs, red; dauþus, deth; —aukan, to increase; hlaupan, to run; stautan, to push, strike; —haubiþ, hed; augô, ey.

au in inflections and final occurs in the u-declension: sunaus, sunau; 1st pers. sg. opt.: nimau, nêmjau; 3d pers. sg. imper.: lausjadau; opt. midl: haitaidau.

au in inflections and final occurs in the u-declension: sunaus, sunau; 1st pers. sg. opt.: nimau, nêmjau; 3rd pers. sg. imper.: lausjadau; opt. midl: haitaidau.

Note 1. au often interchanges with aw (cp. § 42); e. g., taujan, prt. tawida, to do; mawi, gen. maujôs, girl; sniwan, prt. snau, to hasten.

Note 2. Latin writers express Goth. au by au; as, Ausila, Austrovaldus, Audericus. Cp. Wrede, 'Wand.', 96 et seq. Concerning East Gothic monofthongizations, s. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 165 et seq. (Zs. fda., 36, 273²).

Note 2. Latin writers represent Goth. au with au; for example, Ausila, Austrovaldus, Audericus. See Wrede, 'Wand.', 96 et seq. For East Gothic monophthongizations, see Wrede, 'Ostg.', 165 et seq. (Zs. fda., 36, 273²).

Note 3. In the u-declension u is often found for áu; cp. § 24, n. 4; § 105, n. 2.

§ 26. Another au, historically, and probably also fonetically, different from the preceding ones occurs before vowels.

§ 26. Another au, historically, and likely also phonetically, different from the previous ones appears before vowels.

(a) For original ô: stauida, prt. of stôjan, to judge; staua, f., judgment; staua, m., judge; taui, n., gen. tôjis,[Pg 14] deed (cp. also ubiltôjis, evil-doer; taujan, to do, prt. tawida); afmauidai and afdauidai, pps. of *afmôjan, and *afdôjan, to tire out, weary; sauil, n., sun.

(a) For original ô: stauida, past tense of stôjan, to judge; staua, feminine, judgment; staua, masculine, judge; taui, neuter, genitive tôjis, [Pg 14] deed (see also ubiltôjis, evil-doer; taujan, to do, past tense tawida); afmauidai and afdauidai, past participles of *afmôjan and *afdôjan, to tire out, weary; sauil, neuter, sun.

(b) For û in the other Germanic languages: trauan (OHG. trûên), to trust; bauan (OHG. bûan), to dwel; bnauan, to rub (to pieces or powder. ON. (g)núa, OHG. nûan). Cp. also § 179, n. 2.

Sinse this au does not change into aw before vowels, it must denote a monofthong which is likely to be the long of aú, hense a long open o (= a in E. fall), while long close o (shading very much to û, like ô in E. home) is denoted by ô. Accordingly, Goth. antevocalic ô, û past into au. Cp. Brgm., I, 156. For the extensiv literature on this question, s. Noreen's 'Urgerm. Lautlehre', p. 34; also Beitr., 17, 563-567.

Since this au does not change into aw before vowels, it must represent a monophthong, likely the long of aú, hence a long open o (= a in E. fall), while long close o (shading very much to û, like ô in E. home) is represented by ô. Accordingly, Goth. antevocalic ô, û shifted into au. Cp. Brgm., I, 156. For the extensive literature on this question, see Noreen's 'Urgerm. Lautlehre', p. 34; also Beitr., 17, 563-567.

Note 1. Also Gr. ω before a vowel, which is represented as a rule by ô, is renderd by au: Trauada, Τρῳάς; Nauêl, Νωέ; Lauidja, Λωίς.

Note 1. Also, Gr. ω before a vowel, which is generally represented by ô, is rendered as au: Trauada, Τρῳάς; Nauêl, Νωέ; Lauidja, Λωίς.

Note 2. ô before u occurs, however, in the preterit forms waiwôun (inf. waian, § 182), lailôun (inf. *lauan, § 179, 4). Cp. Beitr., 11, 74².

APPENDIX.

§ 27. Beside the vowel-signs discust in the foregoing paragrafs, a few consonant-signs may likewise discharge the function of vowels, for the Gothic liquids l, r and the nasals m, n ar very often vocalic (i. e. syllabic) at the end of a word after a consonant. Here an original suffixal vowel was lost in most cases, and in its place the following liquid or nasal became the bearer of the accent. Thus the Gothic has dissyllabic words with vocalic liquids or vocalic nasals (sonant liquids or sonant nasals); as, akrs, field; fugls, bird; taikns, token; maiþms, present.

§ 27. In addition to the vowel signs discussed in the previous paragraphs, a few consonant signs can also function as vowels. The Gothic liquids l, r, and the nasals m, n are often vocalic (i.e., syllabic) at the end of a word following a consonant. In most cases, an original suffix vowel was lost, and in its place, the following liquid or nasal takes on the accent. As a result, Gothic has disyllabic words with vocalic liquids or vocalic nasals (sonant liquids or sonant nasals); for example: akrs, field; fugls, bird; taikns, token; maiþms, present.

Note In the West Germanic languages a new vowel (OHG. a) has developt from these vocalic liquids and nasals; e. g., OHG. akkar, fogal, zeihhan, OS. mêþom. Cp. ahd. gr., § 65, and Brgm., I, 190. 237.

FOOTNOTES:

[1] For the values of this sign according to 'Amended Spelling', s. 'Standard Dictionary', p. 568.

Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. [1] For the values of this sign according to 'Amended Spelling', s. 'Standard Dictionary', p. 568.

CHAP. III. TABLE OF THE GOTHIC VOWELS.

A. FONETIC SYSTEM.

§ 28. In the preceding paragrafs the Gothic vowels hav been givn according to the letters by which they ar represented. Now they wil be arranged according to the nature[Pg 15] of their sounds, the following scale of seven vowels from i to u being taken as a basis:

§ 28. In the previous paragraphs, the Gothic vowels have been given according to the letters that represent them. Now they will be organized based on the nature[Pg 15] of their sounds, using the following scale of seven vowels from i to u as a basis:

i e æ a ǫ o u.

e and o denote here the close e and o (which shade very much to i and u, respectivly); æ = open e (= a in fat, fare); ǫ = open o.

e and o here refer to the close e and o (which are very similar to i and u, respectively); æ = open e (= a in fat, fare); ǫ = open o.

In the following survey we shal state after each of these vowel grades whether it occurs in Gothic, and by what letter it is exprest.

In the following survey, we will indicate after each of these vowel grades whether it appears in Gothic and how it is expressed by which letter.

i:	Short, i (§ 10).
i:	Long, ei (§§ 16. 17).
e:	Short, wanting.
e:	Long, ê (§§ 6-8).
æ:	Short, aí (§ 20).
æ:	Long? (perhaps the ai in § 22).
a:	Short, a (§§ 3. 4).
a:	Long, â (§ 5).
ǫ:	Short, wanting.
ǫ:	Long, ô (§§ 11. 12).
u:	Short, u (§§ 13. 14).
u:	Long, û (§ 15).
Difthongs:
iu:	§§ 18. 19.
ai:	§ 21.
au:	§ 25.

B. HISTORICAL SYSTEM (Ablaut-Series).

§ 29. The Gothic vowels, as regarded from a historico-etymological point of view, may be groupt into a number of series of related vowels. The vowels belonging to such a series may interchange in formations with the same root; in the formation of tenses and in the verbal and nominal derivation all vowels of the same series may occur, but not such as hav nothing in common with that series. This change of vowels within a series is calld ablaut (or gradation), the series themselvs ablaut-series. The ablaut-series ar most perceptibl in the verb. The relation between the vowels of the same series is not a fonetic but a historical one; to establish it, we must pass beyond the[Pg 16] limits of the Germanic languages and take recourse to the comparativ grammar of the Indo-Germanic languages. The Gothic ablaut-series as appearing in verbal inflection ar these (cp. § 172 et seq.):

§ 30. I. Series: ei ai i (aí).

Exampls: reisan (urreisan), rais, risum, risans, to rize; urraisjan, to raiz; urrists, f., resurrection; —þeihan, þaíh, þaíhum, þaíhans, to thrive; —wait, I know; pl. witum; weitan, to see; weitwôds, witness; miþ-wissei, conscience; witubni, n., knowledge; —lais, I know; lubja-leisei, f., wichcraft; lists, f. (?), stratagem; laisjan, to teach.

Exampls: reisan (urreisan), rais, risum, risans, to rise; urraisjan, to raise; urrists, f., resurrection; —þeihan, þaíh, þaíhum, þaíhans, to thrive; —wait, I know; pl. witum; weitan, to see; weitwôds, witness; miþ-wissei, conscience; witubni, n., knowledge; —lais, I know; lubja-leisei, f., witchcraft; lists, f. (?), stratagem; laisjan, to teach.

Note. The i of this series is the proethnic Germanic i mentiond in § 10, b.

§ 31. II. Series: iu au u (aú).

Exampls: giuta, gaut, gutum, gutans, to pour; gutnan, to pour (intr.); —liugan, laug, lugum, lugans, to lie; liugnja, m., liar; liugn, n., lie; analaugns, hidn; laugnjan, to deny; —galaubjan, to believ; galaubeins, belief; liufs, dear; lubô, f., luv; lubains, f., hope; —siuks, sick; saúhts, f., sickness; —driusan, to fall; drausjan, to drop (tr.); drus, m., fall; driusô, f., slope.

Examples: giuta, gaut, gutum, gutans, to pour; gutnan, to pour (intr.); —liugan, laug, lugum, lugans, to lie; liugnja, m., liar; liugn, n., lie; analaugns, hidden; laugnjan, to deny; —galaubjan, to believe; galaubeins, belief; liufs, dear; lubô, f., love; lubains, f., hope; —siuks, sick; saúhts, f., sickness; —driusan, to fall; drausjan, to drop (tr.); drus, m., fall; driusô, f., slope.

Note. The vowel û is rare in this series; cp. lûkan, to lock (§ 173, n. 2); anabûsns (? § 15, n. 1), command, < biudan.

§ 32. III. Series: i (aí) a u (aú).

§ 32. III. Series: i (ee) a u (ow).

The themes of this series always hav two consonants after the vowel, mostly a liquid or a nasal in gemination, or a liquid or a nasal + another consonant. E. g.

The themes of this series always have two consonants after the vowel, mostly a liquid or a nasal in gemination, or a liquid or a nasal + another consonant. E. g.

bindan, band, bundum, bundans, to bind; bandi, f., band; bandja, m., prisoner; gabinda, f., band, bond; and-bundnan, to becum loose; gabundi, f., bond; —rinnan, to run; rannjan, to cause to run; runs, m., a run, course; rinnô, f., brook; —waírpan, warp, waúrpum, waúrpans, to throw; uswaúrpa, f., a casting out or away, an outcast; —þaírsan, to be dry; þaúrsnan, to wither; þaúrsus, dry, witherd; þaúrstei, thirst; —drigkan, to drink; dragkjan, to giv to drink; dragk, n., a drink, potion; -drukja, m., a drinker; drugkanei, f., drunkenness; —þriskan, to thresh; gaþrask, n., threshing-floor.

bindan, band, bundum, bundans, to bind; bandi, f., band; bandja, m., prisoner; gabinda, f., band, bond; and-bundnan, to become loose; gabundi, f., bond; —rinnan, to run; rannjan, to cause to run; runs, m., a run, course; rinnô, f., brook; —waírpan, warp, waúrpum, waúrpans, to throw; uswaúrpa, f., a casting out or away, an outcast; —þaírsan, to be dry; þaúrsnan, to wither; þaúrsus, dry, withered; þaúrstei, thirst; —drigkan, to drink; dragkjan, to give to drink; dragk, n., a drink, potion; -drukja, m., a drinker; drugkanei, f., drunkenness; —þriskan, to thresh; gaþrask, n., threshing-floor.

Note. The i of this and the following two series is that givn in § 10, a (= proethnic Germanic e).

[Pg 17]

§ 33. IV. Series: i (aí) a ê u (aú).

§ 33. IV. Series: i (ay) a e u (ow).

The stems of this series hav a simpl liquid or nasal after the vowel. E. g.

The stems of this series have a simple liquid or nasal after the vowel. E. g.

niman, nam, nêmum, numans, to take; -numja, m., taker; anda-numts, f., a receiving; andanêms, agreeabl; andanêm, n., a receiving; —baíran, bar, bêrum, baúrans, to bear; baúr, m., 'natus'; barn, n., child; bêrusjôs, parents; —ga-timan, to becum, suit; ga-tamjan, to tame; gatêmiba, fitly.

niman, nam, nêmum, numans, to take; -numja, m., taker; anda-numts, f., a receiving; andanêms, agreeable; andanêm, n., a receiving; —baíran, bar, bêrum, baúrans, to bear; baúr, m., 'natus'; barn, n., child; bêrusjôs, parents; —ga-timan, to become, suit; ga-tamjan, to tame; gatêmiba, fitly.

Note. To this series belongs also brikan, brak, brêkum, brukans, to break: gabruka, f., a broken bit; us-bruknan, to break off (intr.); brakja, f., strugl.—Also trudan, to tred; § 175, n. 2.

§ 34. V. Series: i (aí) a ê.

The vowel of the stems of this series is followd by a singl consonant other than a liquid or a nasal. E. g.

The vowel in the stems of this series is followed by a single consonant that is neither a liquid nor a nasal. E.g.

giban, gaf, gêbum, gibans, to giv; giba, f., gift; gabei, f., richness; —sitan, to sit; satjan, to set; anda-sêts, abominabl; —mitan, to mezure; mitôn, to consider; mitaþs, f., mezure; usmêt, n., manner of life; —ga-nisan, to be saved, recuver; nasjan, to save; ganists, salvation.

give, gift, gifts, giving, to give; giver, f., gift; wealth, f., richness; —sit, to sit; set, to set; abominable, abominable; —measure, to measure; consider, to consider; measurement, f., measure; lifestyle, n., manner of life; —be saved, to be saved, recover; save, to save; salvation, salvation.

Note. Also saíƕan, saƕ, sêƕum, saíƕans, belongs to this class, because ƕ represents a singl sound; § 63, n. 1.

§ 35. VI. Series: a ô.

Most of the stems of this series end in a singl consonant. E. g.

Most of the stems in this series end with a single consonant. E.g.

wakan, wôk, wôkum, wakans, to wake; waknan, to awake; wahtwô, f., wach; wôkains, f., a waching; —graban, to dig; grôba, f., pit, hole; graba, f., dich; —fraþjan, frôþ, to understand; fraþi, n., understanding; frôþs, wise; frôdei, f., understanding, wisdom; —hafjan, hôf, to heav (tr.); -hafnan, to heav (intr.); haban, to hav, hold; ungahôbains, f., incontinency; —ôg, I fear; unagands, fearless; ôgjan, to frighten; usagjan, to terrify; agis, n., fear; —sakan, to contend; sakjô, f., strife; sôkjan, to seek; sôkns, f., serch, inquiry; unand-sôks, irrefutabl.

wakan, wôk, wôkum, wakans, to wake; waknan, to awake; wahtwô, f., wach; wôkains, f., a watching; —graban, to dig; grôba, f., pit, hole; graba, f., dich; —fraþjan, frôþ, to understand; fraþi, n., understanding; frôþs, wise; frôdei, f., understanding, wisdom; —hafjan, hôf, to have (tr.); -hafnan, to have (intr.); haban, to have, hold; ungahôbains, f., incontinence; —ôg, I fear; unagands, fearless; ôgjan, to frighten; usagjan, to terrify; agis, n., fear; —sakan, to contend; sakjô, f., strife; sôkjan, to seek; sôkns, f., search, inquiry; unand-sôks, irrefutable.

§ 36. Series: ê ô (VII. Ablaut-Series).

§ 36. Series: ê ô (VII. Ablaut Series).

A connection between ê and ô occurs in the so-calld reduplicating ablaut-verbs lêtan, laílôt, etc.; saian (= *sêan, § 22), saísô, etc.; cp. § 180 et seq.

Note. This series is no longer found in the verbal inflection of the remaining Germanic languages, but its existence is proved by its occurring in word-formation; as, OHG. (â: ô) tât, f., tôn, tuon, to do; —knâan, to know: knôt, chnuat, f., kin.—For more on this point, s. Beitr. 11, 262 et seq.

Note. This series is no longer present in the verbal inflection of the other Germanic languages, but its existence is confirmed by its appearance in word formation; for example, OHG. (â: ô) tât, f., tôn, tuon, to do; —knâan, to know: knôt, chnuat, f., kin.—For more on this point, see Beitr. 11, 262 et seq.

[Pg 18]

CHAP. IV. THE CONSONANTS.

§ 37. The consonant-signs to be discust here both in regard to value and occurrence in the Gothic language hav alredy been enumerated in § 2. We divide the consonantal sounds in sonorous consonants and noizd sounds. Cp. Sievers, Grundzüge der Phonetik⁴, p. 70 et seq. Accordingly, the Gothic consonant-signs w, j, l, m, n, r, represent the sonorous sounds, the rest the noizd sounds.

A. SONOROUS CONSONANTS.

1. The semivowels w and j.

§ 38. Germanic w and j ar the vowels u and i uzed as consonants; hense in Gothic the interchange between i and j, u and w, according to their position which determins their fonetic values as vowels or consonants. The consonantal i and u, which in other languages ar denoted by the same signs as the vocalic i and u, hav special signs in Gothic, j and w. These sounds ar also calld 'semivowels'.

§ 38. Germanic w and j are the vowels u and i used as consonants; hence in Gothic the interchange between i and j, u and w, depends on their position which determines their phonetic values as vowels or consonants. The consonantal i and u, which in other languages are represented by the same symbols as the vocalic i and u, have special symbols in Gothic, j and w. These sounds are also called 'semivowels'.

w

§ 39. The sign of the Gothic alfabet which we represent by w, is, according to its form and alfabetic position, the Gr. υ. For this it also stands in Greek foren words, for exampl, Pawlus, Παῦλος; Daweid, Δαυίδ; aíwaggêljô, εὐαγγέλιον; paraskaíwê, παρασκευή. But the Gothic w stands not only for the Gr. υ of the combinations αυ, ευ, in which it had perhaps at that time assumed the value of a spirant, but also for simpl Greek υ, namely vocalic υ; as, Swmaíôn, Συμεών; swnagôgê, συναγωγή; martwr, μάρτυρ. But in our transcriptions of the Gothic texts the Greek vocalic υ is exprest by y instead of w (Symaíôn, synagôgê, martyr); so, also, for practical reasons, in this book.

§ 39. The Gothic letter we represent with w corresponds to the Greek letter Gr. υ in both its shape and alphabetical position. It also represents this in Greek words, for example, Pawlus, Παῦλος; Daweid, Δαυίδ; aíwaggêljô, εὐαγγέλιον; paraskaíwê, παρασκευή. However, the Gothic w not only stands for the Greek υ in combinations like αυ and ευ, where it likely had the value of a fricative at that time, but also for the simple Greek υ, specifically the vocalic υ, as seen in Swmaíôn, Συμεών; swnagôgê, συναγωγή; martwr, μάρτυρ. In our transcriptions of the Gothic texts, we express the Greek vocalic υ with y instead of w (Symaíôn, synagôgê, martyr); thus, for practical reasons, this approach is used in this book as well.

Note 1. A noteworthy Gothic transcription is kawtsjô (= Lt. cautio) in the document at Naples (§ 221, n. 3). Cp. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 166; Zs. fda., 36, 273.

Note 2. The Gothic sign is in most of the later editions represented by v. But because of its correspondence in the other Germanic languages the letter w should be uzed (as, Goth. wilja, MHG. NHG. wille, OE. willa, NE. wil). Cp. Beitr., 12, 218 et seq.

Note 2. The Gothic sign is usually shown as v in most later editions. However, because it matches up with other Germanic languages, the letter w should be used (as in Goth. wilja, MHG. NHG. wille, OE. willa, NE. wil). See Beitr., 12, 218 et seq.

[Pg 19]

§ 40. In Gothic words the w originally had the fonetic value of the consonantal u (= E. w). But at Wulfila's time the u-sound seems to hav alredy containd sumwhat of a spirant. Cp. Zs. fda., 36, 266 et seq. (37, 121 et seq.).

§ 40. In Gothic words, the w originally represented the phonetic sound of the consonantal u (= E. w). However, by Wulfila's time, the u-sound seems to have already contained somewhat of a spirant. See Zs. fda., 36, 266 et seq. (37, 121 et seq.).

Note. Latin writers uzually express the w in proper nouns by uu. Vvilia, Uualamir; but also often by Ub: Ubadala (= Wadila), Ubadamirus (= Wadamêrs), etc. Greek authors mostly put οὐ for the Goth. w (as in Οὐάνδαλοι), but also β (as in Βάνδαλοι). Cp. Dietrich, pp. 77-80. Wrede, 'Wand.', 102; 'Ostg.', 167 et seq.

Note. Latin writers usually represent the w in proper nouns with uu. Vvilia, Uualamir; but they often use Ub as well: Ubadala (= Wadila), Ubadamirus (= Wadamêrs), etc. Greek authors typically use οὐ for the Goth. w (as in Οὐάνδαλοι), but also β (as in Βάνδαλοι). See Dietrich, pp. 77-80. Wrede, 'Wand.', 102; 'Ostg.', 167 et seq.

§ 41. Initial Gothic w occurs frequently; e. g., wasjan, to clothe; witan, to know; wiljan, to wil; waír, man; warmjan, to warm.

§ 41. Initial Gothic w appears often; for example, wasjan, to clothe; witan, to know; wiljan, to want; waír, man; warmjan, to warm.

So also before l and r; as, wlits, countenance; wrikan, to persecute; wrôhjan, to accuse.

So also before l and r; like, wlits, face; wrikan, to harass; wrôhjan, to blame.

After the consonants: t, d, þ, s; e. g., twai, two; dwals, foolish; þwahan, to wash; swistar, sister.

After the consonants: t, d, þ, s; for example, twai, two; dwals, foolish; þwahan, to wash; swistar, sister.

Medial w before vowels; e. g., awistr, sheepfold; saiwala, soul; hneiwan, to bow; siggwan, to sing; ûhtwô, dawn; taíhswô, right hand; nidwa, rust.

Medial w before vowels; for example, awistr, sheepfold; saiwala, soul; hneiwan, to bow; siggwan, to sing; ûhtwô, dawn; taíhswô, right hand; nidwa, rust.

Note. The signs q (kw) and ƕ (hw) ar also uzually explaind as combinations of w with k and h. There ar reasons, however, to assume that q and ƕ ar simpl labialized gutturals (§§ 59. 63). But on the other hand q and ƕ in High German ar treated precisely like Goth. tw, gw, etc. (= t, g, etc., medial w being dropt); for exampl, Goth. ûhtwô, siggwan = OHG. ûhta, singan; and Goth. sigqan, saíƕan = OHG. sinkan, sehan. Altho this proves nothing as to the values of the Gothic signs, it certainly shows that in proethnic Germanic the tw, gw, etc., must hav denoted sounds analogous to those of kw and hw.

§ 42. (1) w remains unchanged after long vowels, difthongs, and consonants, (a) finally, (b) before the s of the nominativ, (c) before j; e. g., (a) lêw, n., opportunity; hlaiw, n., grave;, waúrstw, n., work; (b) snaiws, snow; triggws, tru, faithful; (c) lêwjan, to betray; hnaiwjan, to abase; skadwjan, to cast a shade (< skadus, shade); arwjô, adv., in vain.

§ 42. (1) w stays the same after long vowels, diphthongs, and consonants, (a) at the end, (b) before the s in the nominative, (c) before j; for example, (a) lêw, n., opportunity; hlaiw, n., grave; waúrstw, n., work; (b) snaiws, snow; triggws, true, faithful; (c) lêwjan, to betray; hnaiwjan, to abase; skadwjan, to cast a shadow (skadus, shadow); arwjô, adv., in vain.

(2) in all three positions, however, w becums u after a short vowel; e. g., (a) snau (prt. to sniwan, § 176, n. 2); triu, tree (gen. triwis); *kniu, knee (gen. kniwis, § 94, n. 1); (b) naus, m., a ded person (gen. nawis); *þius, servant (gen. þiwis, § 91, n. 3); (c) mawi, gen. maujôs, girl; gawi, gen. gaujis, district; þiwi, gen. þiujôs, maid-servant; tawida, pres. taujan, to do; *straujan, to strew, prt. strawida;[Pg 20] iujan, to quicken, prt. qiwida.—Cp. Grundr., I, 414; Zs. fda., 36, 277.

Note 1. Hense a word does not end in aw, iw; aws, iws, except the isolated lasiws, weak (II. Cor. X, 10).

Note 1. Hence, a word doesn’t end in aw, iw; aws, iws, except for the isolated lasiws, weak (II. Cor. X, 10).

Note 2. aw for au occurs before j in usskawjan, to awake; II. Tim. II, 26 (in B); I. Cor. XV, 34 (ussk..jiþ in MS.); and in the nom. pl. usskawai (unskawai in MS.), wakeful; I. Thess. V, 8; cp. § 124, n. 3.

Note 3. No exampl occurs for the position of medial w before consonants other than j and s; before n after a short vowel u is found in qiunan (< qiwa-), to becum alive; siuns (cp. saíƕa-).

Note 3. No examples occur for the position of medial w before consonants other than j and s; before n after a short vowel u is found in qiunan (< qiwa-), to become alive; siuns (compare saíƕa-).

j

§ 43. The sign j stands, as a rule, for the Greek antevocalic ι, in Akaja, Αχαία; Marja, Μαρία; Judas, Ἰούδας; Iskarjôtês, Ἰσκαριώτης, etc. But Gr. antevocalic ι is also often represented by Goth. i; as, Iskariôtês, Zakarias, Gabriêl, Iûdas.—The sign j in Gothic pronunciation probably has the value of a consonantal i, not that of the spirant j in German.

§ 43. The symbol j usually represents the Greek antevocalic ι, as seen in Akaja, Αχαία; Marja, Μαρία; Judas, Ἰούδας; Iskarjôtês, Ἰσκαριώτης, etc. However, the Greek antevocalic ι is also often shown as Goth. i; for example, Iskariôtês, Zakarias, Gabriêl, Iûdas.—In Gothic pronunciation, the symbol j likely has the value of a consonantal i, not the spirant j as in German.

§ 44. (a) Initial j in Gothic words: juk, yoke; jêr, year; ju, alredy; jus, yu. (b) Medial j occurs after vowels and after consonants, but always before vowels, never before consonants; e. g., midjis, 'medius'; lagjan, to lay; niujis, new; frauja, lord; þrija, 'tria'; bajôþs, both. (c) ji is contracted into ei after a consonant belonging to the same syllabl, but is retaind when the syllabl begins with j (cp. Beitr. 16, 282). The latter is the case when it is preceded by a short high-toned vowel with a singl consonant or by a long stem-vowel without a consonant. Exampls—concerning particularly the masculins (and neuters) of the ja-stems (§§ 92. 127)—ar: har-jis, tô-jis (doer), but haír-deis, dat. haírd-ja; —also the I. Weak Conjugation (§ 185): sô-kja, sô-keis, sô-keiþ; san-dja, san-deiþ; miki-lja, miki-leiþ; but nas-ja, nas-jis, nas-jiþ; stô-ja, stô-jis, stô-jiþ.

Note 1. The rule under (c) may, practically, also be worded in the following manner: ji becums ei after a long stem-syllabl and after secondary syllabls, but remains ji after a short stem-syllabl and immediately after a long stem-vowel.—For exceptions, s. § 95; § 108, n. 2; § 132, n. 1.

Note 2. Only i is often employd for medial ij before vowels; s. § 10, n. 4; for j occurring sporadically in the inflection of saian, s. § 22, n. 1.

§ 45. j is never final; in this position it always becums i; e. g., harjis, acc. hari; mawi, gen. maujôs (s. § 42, 2, c); taui, deed, gen. tôjis.

Note 1. For the change of aj and ai, s. § 21, n. 2.

[Pg 21]

2. Liquids.

l

§ 46. Gothic l occurs often,—initially, medially, and finally; as, laggs, long; galaubjan, to believ; liuhaþ, light; laúhmuni, lightning; wiljan, to wil; aljis, 'alius'; blôma, flower; —dubl l, as in fill, hide; fulls, ful; wulla, wool.

§ 46. Gothic l appears frequently—at the beginning, in the middle, and at the end of words; for example, laggs, long; galaubjan, to believe; liuhaþ, light; laúhmuni, lightning; wiljan, to want; aljis, 'another'; blôma, flower; —dubl l, as in fill, hide; fulls, full; wulla, wool.

Note 1. l is syllabic (§ 27), for exampl, in fugls, bird (fowl); tuggl, constellation, star; tagl, hair; swumfsl, pond; sigljan, to seal.

Note 2. Goth. l always corresponds to Gr. λ. It is interpolated in alabalstraún, ἀλάβαστρον.

Note 2. Goth. l always matches Gr. λ. It's included in alabalstraún, ἀλάβαστρον.

r

§ 47. r is equivalent to Gr. ρ and occurs frequently in Gothic words; e. g., raíhts, right; raubôn, to rob; baíran, to bear; fidwôr, four.—Dubl r is rare: qaírrus, meek; andstaúrran, to threten; faírra, far.

§ 47. r is equivalent to Gr. ρ and shows up often in Gothic words; for example, raíhts, right; raubôn, to rob; baíran, to bear; fidwôr, four.—Dubl r is uncommon: qaírrus, meek; andstaúrran, to threaten; faírra, far.

Note 1. Syllabic r (§ 27) occurs, for exampl, in akrs, field; brôþr, dat. sg. of brôþar (§ 114), brother; figgrs, finger; tagr, tear; hlûtrs, pure; fagrs, suitabl; maúrþr, murder; huggrjan, to hunger.

Note 2. Every i before r becums aí, and every u in the same position aú; s. §§ 20. 24.

Note 3. Concerning r from z, s. § 78, n. 4; § 24, n. 2.

3. Nasals.

m

§ 48. m occurs in all positions of a word; as, mizdô, f., reward; mêna, m., moon; ams, m., shoulder; guma, m., man; finally: nam, I took; in the terminations of the dat. pl.,—dagam, etc.; 1st pers. pl.,—nimam, nêmum, etc.—Dubl (mm) in swamms (cp. § 80, n. 1), spunge; wamm, n., spot; in the pronominal dat. sg.,—imma, blindamma.

Note. Syllabic m (§ 27) in maiþms, present; bagms, tree.

Note. Syllabic m (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__) in maiþms, present; bagms, tree.

n

§ 49. Initial n in nahts, night; niujis, new; ni (negation), etc.; medial: kuni, n., kin; ains, one, etc.; final: laun, n., reward; niun, nine; often in inflection; as, dat. sg. hanin, inf. niman, nêmun (3d pers. pl. prt.), etc.

Dubl n (nn) occurs frequently; e. g., brinnan, to burn; spinnan, to spin; rinnan, to run; kann, I know; kannjan, to make known; manna, man; brunna, wel, spring. Dubl n remains finally and before j, but is simplified before other[Pg 22] consonants (s. § 80): kant, kunþa (inf. kunnan), rant (2nd pers. sg. prt.; inf. rinnan), brunsts (inf. brinnan), ur-runs (< rinnan), outlet.

Note. Syllabic n (§ 27) in usbeisns, f., expectation; taikns, f., token; ibns, even; laugnjan, to deny; swêgnjan, to triumf, rejoice.

§ 50. Before guttural consonants n becums a guttural nasal which (in imitation of the Gr.) is denoted by g (gg; s. § 67).

Note. The (guttural) nasal disappears before h, and the preceding short vowel is lengthend. S. § 5, b; § 15, b (Brgm., I, 182 et seq.).

B. NOIZD SOUNDS.

1. Labials.

p

§ 51. The letter p, which does not occur very often in Gothic, corresponds to Gr. π.

§ 51. The letter p, which is not very common in Gothic, matches Gr. π.

(a) Initially, p may be regarded as being altogether wanting in purely Gothic words; the exampls which do occur ar either obviously foren words or at least etymologically obscure, if not loanwords too: plinsjan, to dance; plats, pach; anapraggan, to harass; paida, coat; puggs, purse; peikabagms, date-palm; pund, pound; plapja, street ('platea'); pistikeins, πιστικός, paúrpura, purpl.

(a) At first, p can be seen as lacking purely Gothic words; the examples that appear are either clearly foreign words or at least their origins are unclear, if not loanwords as well: plinsjan, to dance; plats, pach; anapraggan, to harass; paida, coat; puggs, purse; peikabagms, date-palm; pund, pound; plapja, street ('platea'); pistikeins, πιστικός, paúrpura, purple.

(b) p occurs in purely Gothic words medially and finally; e. g., slêpan, to sleep; greipan, to gripe; ƕôpan, to boast; skapjan, to shape, make; hlaupan, to run; diups, deep; waírpan, to throw; hilpan, to help; skip, ship; iup, upwards.—Initial sp in speiwan, to spit; sparwa, sparrow; spillôn, to narrate; spinnôn, to spin.

(b) p appears in purely Gothic words in the middle and at the end; for example, slêpan, to sleep; greipan, to grip; ƕôpan, to boast; skapjan, to shape, make; hlaupan, to run; diups, deep; waírpan, to throw; hilpan, to help; skip, ship; iup, upwards.—Initial sp in speiwan, to spit; sparwa, sparrow; spillôn, to narrate; spinnôn, to spin.

Note 1. pp does not occur.

Note 1. pp is not present.

Note 2. p before t becums f in gaskafts, f., creature (cp. skapjan); ƕôftuli, f., glory (cp. ƕôpan). Cp. § 81.

Note 2. p before t becomes f in gaskafts, f., creature (see skapjan); ƕôftuli, f., glory (see ƕôpan). See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

f

§ 52. Gothic f in foren words corresponds to Gr. φ; e. g., Filippus, Φίλιππος; Kajafa, Καϊάφας. Latin writers render Goth. f mostly by ph (Dietrich, p. 75); as, Dagalaiphus, Phaeba. Hense Goth. f was probably a bilabial, not a labiodental spirant, as is also evident from Goth. fimf, hamfs.

§ 52. Gothic f in foreign words corresponds to Greek φ; for example, Filippus, Φίλιππος; Kajafa, Καϊάφας. Latin writers usually represent Gothic f with ph (Dietrich, p. 75); as in Dagalaiphus, Phaeba. Thus, Gothic f was likely a bilabial, not a labiodental fricative, which is also clear from Gothic fimf, hamfs.

Note. f is regarded as labiodental by Jellinek; Zs. fda., 36, 275 et seq.

Note. f is considered labiodental by Jellinek; Zs. fda., 36, 275 et seq.

[Pg 23]

§ 53. (a) Initial f occurs often in Gothic words; e. g., fôtus, foot; fadar, father; flôdus, flud; faíhu (catl), muney; fûls, foul; frôþs, wise, judicious; frius, cold; fidwôr, 4.

§ 53. (a) Initial f appears frequently in Gothic words; for example, fôtus, foot; fadar, father; flôdus, flood; faíhu (cattle), money; fûls, foul; frôþs, wise, judicious; frius, cold; fidwôr, 4.

(b) Medially and finally f occurs in but a small number of Gothic words; as, hlifan, to steal; hafjan, to heav; hiufan, to lament; lôfa, m., palm of the hand; ufar, over; afar, after. Before consonants: luftus, air; hamfs, maimd; tweifls, dout; wulfs, wolf; —(final) fimf, five; hôf (prt. of hafjan); þarf, I need (inf. þaúrban).

(b) Medially and finally f appears in only a few Gothic words, such as hlifan, to steal; hafjan, to have; hiufan, to lament; lôfa, m., palm of the hand; ufar, over; afar, after. Before consonants: luftus, air; hamfs, maimed; tweifls, doubt; wulfs, wolf; —(final) fimf, five; hôf (part. of hafjan); þarf, I need (inf. þaúrban).

Note 1. Finally and before the s of the nom., f occurs very often for medial b; s. § 56.

Note 2. Medial f before t (n) stands for b (§ 56, n. 4), before t also for p (§ 51, n. 2).

Note 3. ff is not found.

Note 3. ff is unavailable.

b

§ 54. b corresponds to Gr. β, for which it stands in foren words; e. g., barbarus, βάρβαρος; Iakôb, Ἰακώβ. The pronunciation of the Gr. β was that of a labial soft spirant [nearly = E. v]. In like manner Goth. b has the value of a soft (voiced) labiolabial spirant medially after vowels, while initially and medially after consonants it denotes a soft stop (= E. b).

§ 54. b corresponds to Gr. β, which it represents in foreign words; for example, barbarus, βάρβαρος; Iakôb, Ἰακώβ. The pronunciation of the Gr. β was like a soft labial spirant [almost = E. v]. Similarly, in Goth. b has the value of a soft (voiced) labiolabial spirant medially after vowels, while initially and medially after consonants it represents a soft stop (= E. b).

Note 1. Gothic b between vowels in Latin foren words stands for Lt. v, but after m for b: Silbanus, Silvanus; Naúbaímbaír, November; (ana)kumbjan, cumbere.

Note 1. Gothic b between vowels in Latin foreign words stands for Lt. v, but after m for b: Silbanus, Silvanus; Naúbaímbaír, November; (ana)kumbjan, cumbere.

Note 2. In Gothic names Latin writers employ Lt. b for Gothic b initially and after a consonant (as, Amala-berga, Hildi-bald, Albila), but medially between vowels Lt. v is uzed (as, Liuva, Erelieva); cp. Dietrich, p. 71; Beitr., 1, 148 et seq.; Wrede, 'Ostg.', 169; Zs. fda., 36, 275.

Note 2. In Gothic names, Latin writers use Lt. b for Gothic b at the beginning and after a consonant (like Amala-berga, Hildi-bald, Albila), but medially between vowels, they use Lt. v (as in Liuva, Erelieva); see Dietrich, p. 71; Beitr., 1, 148 et seq.; Wrede, 'Ostg.', 169; Zs. fda., 36, 275.

§ 55. Exampls of b:

§ 55. Examples of b:

(a) initially: baíran, to bear; beitan, to bite; brikan, to break; brûkjan, to uze; blêsan, to blow; biudan, to offer; blôma, flower; brôþar, brother; bôka, letter; bnauan, to rub.

(a) initially: baíran, to bear; beitan, to bite; brikan, to break; brûkjan, to use; blêsan, to blow; biudan, to offer; blôma, flower; brôþar, brother; bôka, letter; bnauan, to rub.

(b) medially: liuba (w. m. adj.), dear; galaubjan, to believ; graban, to dig; sibja, relationship; arbi, inheritance; kalbô, hefer; —haubiþ, hed; hlaibis (gen. of hlaifs), bred; sibun, seven; haban, to hav; skaban, to shave; (bi-)leiban, to remain; liban, to liv; biraubôn, to rob; salbôn, to salv, anoint.

(b) medially: liuba (m. adj.), dear; galaubjan, to believe; graban, to dig; sibja, relationship; arbi, inheritance; kalbô, heifer; —haubiþ, head; hlaibis (gen. of hlaifs), bread; sibun, seven; haban, to have; skaban, to shave; (bi-)leiban, to remain; liban, to live; biraubôn, to rob; salbôn, to save, anoint.

Note. bb occurs in foren words only; as, sabbatus.

Note. bb appears only in foreign words; for example, sabbatus.

[Pg 24]

§ 56. b after consonants (l, m, r) remains finally, before the s of the nom., and before the t of the 2nd pers. sg. prt.; postvocalic b becums f. This means that postvocalic b was a soft spirant (§ 54) which, finally, changed into the corresponding hard spirant, while postconsonantal b, medially and finally, had the value of a stop. Hense giban, to giv, 1st and 3d pers. sg. prt.: gaf, 2nd. pers. gaft, 2nd sg. imper.: gif; hlaifs, bred, acc. hlaif, nom. pl. hlaibôs; —but lamb, lam; dumbs, dum; swaírban, to wipe, prt. swarb.

Note 1. Our texts contain a few exceptions to the rule of final f for medial b after vowels, but the preponderant number of exampls prove the validity of the rule which is fonetically founded and has a striking analogon in the OS. geƀan—gaf; lioƀo—liof (but lamb). The exceptional cases with final b (21 in all) occur only in definit parts of the texts (7 in Lu., 5 in the epistls to the Thess., 4 in Jo., 3 in Skeir., in all the other texts only onse each in Mk. and Eph.). Therefore the anomalous bs may be referd to the writers of the respectiv parts, who either from purely orthografic considerations put the medial bs also finally, or in order to express a later pronunciation as it existed at their time, according to which voiced sounds occurd also finally. The latter supposition is founded on the fact that in the Arezzo document (of the 6th century) the spelling Gudilub occurs.—Cp. also the remarks on the interchange of d and þ in § 74, n. 1.

The exceptions in the verb ar rare, only grôb (Lu. VI, 48) and gadôb (Skeir. 42); —the forms with f occur in gaf, gaft, gif (very often); onse each: grôf (inf. graban), swaif (inf. sweiban), bilaif (inf. bileiban), skauf (inf. skiuban). Accordingly, we may safely write draif (prt. of dreiban, to drive).

The exceptions in the verb are rare, only grôb (Lu. VI, 48) and gadôb (Skeir. 42); —the forms with f appear in gaf, gaft, gif (very often); once each: grôf (inf. graban), swaif (inf. sweiban), bilaif (inf. bileiban), skauf (inf. skiuban). Therefore, we can confidently write draif (prt. of dreiban, to drive).

Of nouns only hlaifs is often found: nom. hlaifs (12 times, onse hlaibs), acc. hlaif (19 times, hlaib seven times); —twalif, twelv (12 times, twalib 3 times); accordingly, also *ainlif (dat. ainlibim).

Of nouns, only hlaifs is frequently encountered: nom. hlaifs (12 times, once hlaibs), acc. hlaif (19 times, hlaib seven times); —twalif, twelv (12 times, twalib 3 times); thus, also *ainlif (dat. ainlibim).

Furthermore the following nominativs must be regarded as normal forms: *stafs, element (only stabim occurs); *laufs, leaf (only galaubamma 3 times, filugalaubis, galubaim), *gadôfs, becuming (onse gadôf, 4 times gadôb), *liufs, dear (only forms with more than one syllabl occur: liubai, liuba, liubana, etc.). Lastly, also *þiufs (= OS. thiof), thief, tho the nom. accidentally occurs (4 times) as þiubs, beside þiubôs (twice), þiubê.

Furthermore, the following nominatives should be considered as standard forms: *stafs, element (only stabim appears); *laufs, leaf (only galaubamma appears 3 times, filugalaubis, galubaim), *gadôfs, becoming (once gadôf, 4 times gadôb), *liufs, dear (only forms with more than one syllable occur: liubai, liuba, liubana, etc.). Lastly, also *þiufs (= OS. thiof), thief, though the nominative occurs accidentally (4 times) as þiubs, alongside þiubôs (twice), þiubê.

Note 2. Subject to the abuv rule ar also the preps. of and uf, the f of which becums medial by enclisis and is changed into b before the following vowel; ab-u, ub-uh. In composition, however, f remains: af-êtja, voracious eater; uf-aiþeis, under oath. (Cp. us in § 78, n. 4).

Note 3. An apparent exception is þarf, I want (for þarb), pl. þaúrbum; but þarf has real f (§ 53) and must be kept apart from the pl. with b (s. ahd. gr., § 101). b stands correctly in the adj. gaþaúrbs. Cp. § 79, n. 2.

[Pg 25]

Note 4. f before t in derivativ words stands for b elsewhere (§ 81): gifts, f., gift (< giban, onse fragibtim; Lu. I, 27), þaúrfts, necessity. b is common before n: ibns, stibna, daubnan, drôbnan, but the ending -ubni interchanges with -ufni; as, fraistubni, temptation, but waldufni, power; aflifnan, to remain, be left; cp. laiba, remnant.

2. Gutturals.

k

§ 57. Goth. k corresponds to Greek κ, Lt. c; e. g., Kêfas, Κηφᾶς; aíkklêsjô, ἐκκλησία; laíktjô, lectio. Goth. k in Greek words represents also χ; as, kaúrazein, Χοραζίν; ark-aggilus, ἀρχάγγελος. The Gr. sign χ is but rarely retaind, always in χristus (s. § 2). Cp. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 54.

Note. The labialized k (kw) has a special sign (q § 59) in Gothic.

§ 58. Exampls of k: (a) initially: kniu, knee; kaúrn, corn; kuni, kin; kalds, cold; kiusan, to choose; kalbô, f., calf; —sk: skeinan, to shine; skaidan, to separate. (b) medially: brikan, to break; aukan, to increase; akrs, field; reiks, mighty; mikils, great; waúrkjan, to work; laikan, to leap; rakjan, to strech; finally: ik, I; mik, me; juk, yoke.

§ 58. Examples of k: (a) initially: kniu, knee; kaúrn, corn; kuni, kin; kalds, cold; kiusan, to choose; kalbô, f., calf; —sk: skeinan, to shine; skaidan, to separate. (b) medially: brikan, to break; aukan, to increase; akrs, field; reiks, mighty; mikils, great; waúrkjan, to work; laikan, to leap; rakjan, to stretch; finally: ik, I; mik, me; juk, yoke.

Note 1. kk occurs in smakka, fig; sakkus, sack.

Note 1. kk occurs in smakka, fig; sakkus, sack.

Note 2. In derivativ words h takes the place of k before t (§ 81); as, saúhts, sickness (cp. siuks); wahtwô, wach (cp. wakan); brûhta (prt. of brûkjan); þâhta (prt. of þagkjan).—Sinse there occur no exampls of the 2nd pers. prt. of verbs in k (as, wakan, aukan, têkan), it is uncertain whether the k before t remaind k or was changed into h (wôkt or wôht?).

q

§ 59. The Gothic sign q does not occur in the Greek alfabet, the corresponding sign being borrowd from the Latin (Q). In Lt. words it corresponds to Lt. qu (qartus; Rom. XVI, 23) to which it most likely corresponds also fonetically. The Lt. qu denoted a labialized k-sound which was a simpl consonant not forming position. Cp. Zs. fdph., 12, 481 et seq.

§ 59. The Gothic letter q isn't found in the Greek alphabet; instead, it was borrowed from the Latin (Q). In Latin words, it corresponds to Latin qu (qartus; Rom. XVI, 23) and likely matches phonetically as well. The Latin qu represented a labialized k-sound, which was a simple consonant not forming a position. See Zs. fdph., 12, 481 et seq.

Note. The dubl sign kw (kv) which is uzed beside q for the Gothic character is due to the perception that in the cognate languages Gothic q is represented by a combination of consonants which appears as k with a w-sound closely attacht to it, and is therefore exprest by two signs: in OE. by cw, in ON. by kv, in OHG. MHG. NHG. by qu. Hense Goth. qiþan, to say, = OE. cweþan, ON. kveþa, OHG. quedan. But from this[Pg 26] nothing certain can be inferd about the fonetic value of Goth. q, altho it is possibl that its pronunciation was precisely the same as that of NHG. NE. qu.—Cp. also § 41, n. 1.

§ 60. Exampls of q: qinô, woman; *qius, pl. qiwai, alive; qaírnus, mil; qiman, to cum; qrammiþa, moisture; naqaþs, naked; aqizi, ax; riqis, darkness; sigqan, to sink, prt. sagq.

§ 60. Examples of q: qinô, woman; *qius, pl. qiwai, alive; qaírnus, mil; qiman, to cum; qrammiþa, moisture; naqaþs, naked; aqizi, ax; riqis, darkness; sigqan, to sink, prt. sagq.

h

§ 61. Gothic h in Greek words stands for the ruf breathing (as, Haíbraius, Ἑβραῖος; Hêrôdês, Ἡρώδης), but the ruf breathing is often disregarded (as, ôsanna, ὡσαννά). Accordingly, Goth. initial h had the value of a mere breathing. Medially and finally it may stil hav had the value of a fricativ sound (HG. ch). Cp. the assimilations (§ 62, n. 3) and breaking (§ 62, n. 1). Also initially before consonants, (hl, hn, hr (ƕ)), the h had probably retaind a stronger sound.

Note 1. Latin writers render Gothic h by their h (as, Hildibald, Hildericus); but they also omit it; as, Ariamirus, eils = hails in the epigram (s. § 21, n. 1), Zs. fda. 1, 379; cp. Dietrich, p. 77.

Note 2. Labialized h (hw) has a special sign in Gothic: ƕ (§§ 63. 64).

Note 3. In foren names h is sumtimes interposed medially between vowels; as, Iôhannês, Ιωάννης; Abraham, Ἀβραάμ. Cp. Es. Tegnér, Tidskr. for filol. N. R. 7, 304 et seq.

Note 3. In foreign names, 'h' is sometimes placed in the middle between vowels; for example, Iôhannês, Ιωάννης; Abraham, Ἀβραάμ. See Es. Tegnér, Tidskr. for filol. N. R. 7, 304 et seq.

§ 62. Exampls for h: (a) initially: haúrn, horn; hana, cock; haírtô, hart; hails, hole, sound; hund, hundred; hafjan, to heav; —initial combinations: hlaifs, bred; hliuma, m., hearing; hlifan, to steal; hlûtrs, pure; hlahjan, to laf; hnaiws, low; hrains, clean; hrôpjan, to call; hrôt, n., roof.—(b) medially: faíhu, muney; taíhun, ten; teihan, to show; tiuhan, to pul; saíhs, six; nahts, night; liuhtjan, to light; filhan, to conceal; swaíhra, 'socer'.—(c) finally: jah, and; -uh, and (cp. § 24, n. 2); falh (prt. of filhan); taúh (prt. of tiuhan), etc.

Note 1. Before h (as before r) i is broken to aí, u to aú; cp. §§ 20. 24.

Note 2. Dropping of n before h, which made the preceding vowel long: fâhan (< fanhan), þûhta (< þunhta), etc.; cp. § 50, n. 1; § 5, b; § 15, b.

Note 3. Final h in -uh (or -h; § 24, n. 2), jah, nih, may be assimilated to the initial sound of a following word. But rarely in the gospels (cod. argent.) and in codex B, and only before particls or prns. beginning with þ; frequently, however, also before other consonants, in codex A and Skeir; as, wasuþþan (= wasuh-þan, but it was); Mk. I, 6; sumaiþþan (= sumaih-þan, but sum); Mt. XXVI, 67; sijaiþþan (= sijaih-þan, but it[Pg 27] shall be); Mt. V, 37; jaþþê (= jah-þê, and if); niþþan (= nih-þan, and not); —before other consonants in A: jalliban (= jah liban, and liv); II. Cor. I, 8; jaggatraua (= jah gatraua, and I trust); Rom. XIV, 14; jaddu (= jah du, and to); II. Cor. II, 16; jabbrusts (= jah brusts); II. Cor. VII, 15; nukkant (= nuh kant, knowest thou now?); I. Cor. VII, 16; exceptionally also in the codex argent., but only in Lu.: janni (= jah ni); Lu. VII, 32; nissijai (= nih sijai); Lu. XX, 16.

Note 4. Final h is sumtimes dropt (in consequence of having lost its sharp sound? But cp. Beitr., XV, 277): ƕarjô (for ƕarjôh); Mk. XV, 6; ƕammê (for ƕammêh); Gal. V, 3; ƕarjanô (for ƕarjanôh); Skeir. 43; oftener inu (in A) for inuh, without; the h of consonant-combinations is dropt in hiuma; Lu. VI, 17. VIII, 4 (elsewhere hiuhma, multitude); drausnôs; Skeir. 50 (beside drauhsna, crum); als (for alhs); Mk. XV, 38, etc. All these cases ar probably due to the copyists, and most of them hav therefore been amended by the editors. Cp. Bernhardt, Vulfila, LIII et seq.—Also superfluous h occurs: snauh (for snau); I. Thess. II, 16; here, however, it is perhaps the enclitic -h (= -uh, § 24, n. 2).

Note 5. In derivativ words h occurs in certain cases beside k (s. § 58, n. 2) and g (§ 66, n. 1).

ƕ

§ 63. The sound of ƕ is peculiar to the Gothic, and has no equivalent in Gr. The Gothic sign (whose alfabetic position is that of the Greek ψ) is uzually exprest by hv (hw), because all the corresponding words of the remaining Germanic languages (at least initially) hav hw (hu, hv); as, Goth. ƕeits = OHG. hwîz, OS. OE. hwît, ON. hvîtr, white. But there ar reasons which justify the assumption that the Goth. ƕ was a simpl consonant. Fonetically, it may be regarded as a labialized h (or a voiceless w = NE. wh? Grundr., I, 411). It is therefore recommendabl to represent the simpl Gothic sign by the unitary ligature ƕ. Cp. Zs. fdph., 12, 481 et seq.; Beitr., 12, 218 et seq.

§ 63. The sound of ƕ is unique to Gothic and has no equivalent in Greek. The Gothic letter (which is in the same position as Greek ψ) is usually represented by hv (hw), because all corresponding words in other Germanic languages (at least at the beginning) have hw (hu, hv); for example, Goth. ƕeits = OHG. hwîz, OS. OE. hwît, ON. hvîtr, white. However, there are reasons to believe that the Gothic ƕ was a simple consonant. Phonetically, it can be seen as a labialized h (or a voiceless w = NE. wh? Grundr., I, 411). Therefore, it is advisable to represent the simple Gothic letter with the single ligature ƕ. Cp. Zs. fdph., 12, 481 et seq.; Beitr., 12, 218 et seq.

Note. ƕ and hw ar not identical in Gothic. This is proved by the fact that in composition the final h and the following initial w ar not exprest by ƕ, but by hw: þaírhwakandans, keeping wach (thruout); Lu. II, 8; ubuhwôpida (= uf-uh-wôpida; ufwôpida < uf-wôpjan), and he cried out; Lu. XVIII, 38.—The simpl sound of ƕ is also evident from the fact that the verb saíƕan is inflected like the verbal stems ending in a singl consonant (§ 34, n. 1), and that in reduplication ƕ is treated like a singl consonant (ƕaíƕôp, § 178). Cp. Holtzmann, altd. gr. I, 25, together with § 41, n. 1, abuv.

§ 64. Exampls of ƕ: initially: ƕas, who; ƕaírnei, f., skul; ƕaírban, to walk about; ƕeila, time; ƕôpan, to boast; ƕeits, white; ƕaiteis, wheat; —medially: aƕa, water;[Pg 28] saíƕan, to see; leiƕan, to lend; þeiƕô, thunder; nêƕa, near; aíƕa-tundi, f., brambl-bush; —also finally: saƕ, saƕt (prt. of saíƕan), nêƕ, near.

§ 64. Examples of ƕ: initially: ƕas, who; ƕaírnei, f., skul; ƕaírban, to walk about; ƕeila, time; ƕôpan, to boast; ƕeits, white; ƕaiteis, wheat; —medially: aƕa, water; [Pg 28] saíƕan, to see; leiƕan, to lend; þeiƕô, thunder; nêƕa, near; aíƕa-tundi, f., bramble bush; —also finally: saƕ, saƕt (prt. of saíƕan), nêƕ, near.

Note. i and u ar broken before ƕ as wel as before h; cp. § 62, n. 1.

§ 65. g corresponds to Greek γ, also as a guttural nasal; as, synagôgê, συναγωγή; aggilus, ἄγγελος.—The pronunciation of the Gothic initial g was quite certainly that of a soft (voiced) stop; final and medial g was possibly a spirant.

§ 65. g corresponds to the Greek letter γ, which is pronounced as a guttural nasal; for example, synagôgê, συναγωγή; aggilus, ἄγγελος.—The way the Gothic initial g was pronounced was almost certainly as a soft (voiced) stop; the final and medial g might have been pronounced as a spirant.

Note 1. Latin authors render g in Gothic names by g, but also by c; as, Caina beside Gaina (Jornandes), Commundus (= Gummundus); medially, especially before i, it is often dropt; as, Eila beside Agila, Egila, Aiulf (= Aigulf), Athanaildus (= Athanagildus); cp. Dietrich, p. 73 et seq.

Note 1. Latin authors represent g in Gothic names with g, but also with c; for example, Caina alongside Gaina (Jornandes), Commundus (= Gummundus); in the middle of words, especially before i, it is often dropped; for instance, Eila next to Agila, Egila, Aiulf (= Aigulf), Athanaildus (= Athanagildus); see Dietrich, p. 73 et seq.

Note 2. For the pronunciation of medial g as a spirant the Latin representations may be adduced (cp. especially Wrede, 'Ostg.', 173 et seq.); but this is contradicted by the fact that final g does not becum h (cp. b-f, d-þ). Jellinek (Beitr., 15, 276 et seq.; Zs. fda., 36, 85) infers a 'media affricata' for the pronunciation of medial and final g; then the value of a stop seems more probabl (cp. Wilmanns, D. Gramm., I, 16).

Note 2. For the pronunciation of medial g as a spirant, the Latin examples can be referenced (see especially Wrede, 'Ostg.', 173 and following); however, this is contradicted by the fact that final g does not become h (see b-f, d-þ). Jellinek (Beitr., 15, 276 and following; Zs. fda., 36, 85) suggests a 'media affricata' for the pronunciation of medial and final g; therefore, the value of a stop seems more likely (see Wilmanns, D. Gramm., I, 16).

§ 66. g occurs frequently in Goth. words, both initially and medially. E. g. (a) gasts, guest; guma, man; gulþ, gold; gôþs, good; giutan, to pour; greipan, to gripe, seiz; graban, to dig. (b) agis, aw; wigs, way; gawigan, to move; steigan, to mount; ligan, to lie; þragjan, to run; —augô, ey; tagr, tear; tigus, ten; aigan, to hav; suffixal g: mahteigs, mighty; môdags, angry.

§ 66. g appears often in Gothic words, both at the beginning and in the middle. For example: (a) gasts, guest; guma, man; gulþ, gold; gôþs, good; giutan, to pour; greipan, to grip, seize; graban, to dig. (b) agis, aw; wigs, way; gawigan, to move; steigan, to climb; ligan, to lie; þragjan, to run; —augô, eye; tagr, tear; tigus, ten; aigan, to have; suffixal g: mahteigs, mighty; môdags, angry.

Also final g remains unchanged: ôg, I fear; mag, I can; wig (acc. of wigs, way), etc.

Note. g becums h before a suffixal t attacht to it (§ 81); e. g., mahts, mahta (prs. mag), ôhta (prs. ôg), baúhta (inf. bugjan), brâhta (inf. briggan). But there seems to be no change of consonants before the t of the 2nd pers. prt. Only magt (1st mag) is found (201).—Also elsewhere in word-formation an interchange between h and g takes place in words belonging to the same root: taíhun, 10; and tigus, decad; filhan, to conceal, and fulgins, adj., hidn; faginôn, to rejoice, and fahêþs f., joy; huggrjan, to hunger, and hûhrus, hunger; juggs, yung; compar. jûhiza; concerning the interchange between áig and áih, s. § 203, n. 1. Cp. § 79, n. 2.

§ 67. g denotes also a guttural nasal (s. § 50); e. g., (n + g): laggs, long; briggan, to bring; tuggô, tung; figgrs, finger; gaggan, to go; —(n + k, q): drigkan, to drink; þagkjan, to think; þugkjan, to seem; igqis, (to) yu both; sigqan, to sink; stigqan, to thrust.

Note 1. Beside the singl letter g uzed to express the guttural nasal, gg is sumtimes found (so regularly in codex B): siggqan, driggkan, iggqis;[Pg 29] g is not dubld before g; the only case, atgagggand (Mt. IX, 15) is corrected by the editors. The reverse error occurs three times: faúragagja (for faúragaggja, steward); Lu. VIII, 3. XVI, 1; hugridai (for huggridai); I. Cor. IV, 11. Cp. Vulfila by Bernhardt, p. LI.

Note 1. Besides the single letter g used to represent the guttural nasal, gg is sometimes found (so regularly in codex B): siggqan, driggkan, iggqis;[Pg 29] g is not doubled before g; the only case, atgagggand (Mt. IX, 15) has been corrected by the editors. The reverse error occurs three times: faúragagja (for faúragaggja, steward); Lu. VIII, 3. XVI, 1; hugridai (for huggridai); I. Cor. IV, 11. See Vulfila by Bernhardt, p. LI.

Note 2. The Latin sign (n) for the guttural nasal occurs but a few times in Lu.; as, þank; XVII, 9; bringiþ; XV, 22.

Note 2. The Latin sign (n) for the guttural nasal appears only a few times in Lu.; for example, þank; XVII, 9; bringiþ; XV, 22.

§ 68. The combination ggw deservs special notice. (1) It is a guttural nasal + gw, as is proved by the ng of the remaining Germanic languages (also of the ON.): aggwus, narrow (OHG. engi, ON. ǫngr); siggwan, to sing (OHG. singan, ON. syngva); saggws, song. Here perhaps belongs also unmanariggws, unrestraind, wild (cognate with OHG. ringi? Dtsch. Litteraturzeitg. 1888, p. 770).

§ 68. The combination ggw deserves special attention. (1) It is a guttural nasal + gw, as shown by the ng in the other Germanic languages (including Old Norse): aggwus, narrow (Old High German engi, Old Norse ǫngr); siggwan, to sing (Old High German singan, Old Norse syngva); saggws, song. Here maybe also fits unmanariggws, unrestrained, wild (related to Old High German ringi? German Literature Journal 1888, p. 770).

(2) Another ggw corresponds to West-Germanic uw (OHG. uu or uuu; cp. ahd. gr., §§ 112. 113), to ON. gg(v); this gg certainly denotes a stop: triggws, faithful (OHG. triuwi, ON. tryggr); bliggwan, to beat (OHG. bliuwan); *glaggwus, exact (OHG. glauwêr, ON. glǫggr); skuggwa, mirror (ON. skyggja; cp. Goth. skawjan).

Note. Concerning the ggw of the words givn under (2) and the analogous ddj (§ 73, n. 1), cp. Beitr., IX, 545; Göttinger Nachrichten, 1885, No. 6; Brgm., I, 157; Scherer, 'Kleinere Schriften', I, p. XII et seq.—Concerning the East-Gothic names Triggua, Trigguilla, s. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 78 et seq.

3. Dentals.

t

§ 69. Gothic t corresponds to Greek τ, and stands frequently both initially and medially. E. g. (a) initially: tunþus, tooth; triu, tree; tuggô, tung; tagr, tear; taíhun, ten; twai, two; tamjan, to tame; trauan, to trust. st: steigan, to mount. (b) medially: watô, water; haírtô, hart; baitrs, bitter; itan, to eat; giutan, to pour; sitan, to sit; witan, to know.

§ 69. Gothic t corresponds to Greek τ and appears often at the beginning and in the middle of words. For example, (a) initially: tunþus, tooth; triu, tree; tuggô, tongue; tagr, tear; taíhun, ten; twai, two; tamjan, to tame; trauan, to trust. st: steigan, to mount. (b) medially: watô, water; haírtô, hard; baitrs, bitter; itan, to eat; giutan, to pour; sitan, to sit; witan, to know.

Final t remains unchanged; as, wait, I know; at, at; wit, we two.

Final t stays the same; as, wait, I know; at, at; wit, we two.

Note 1. t is dubld in atta, father; skatts, muney.

Note 1. t is doubled in atta, father; skatts, money.

Note 2. t before t in derivativ and inflected words becums s (§ 81); as, ushaista, very poor (cp. haitan); blôstreis, wurshipper (cp. blôtan, to wurship); 2nd pers. sg. prt. waist (1st wait), haíhaist (inf. haitan, to be calld); weak prt. gamôsta (1st pers. gamôt); kaupasta (inf. kaupatjan, to cuf); wissa (< wista, 1st wait).

[Pg 30]

§ 70. Gothic þ corresponds to Gr. θ (as, Þômas, Θωμᾶς; Naþan, Ναθάν); its sound-value was that of a voiceless dental spirant = the NE. surd th in thin. Also the Greek θ denoted at that time, as it stil does in New Greek, a similar sound.

§ 70. Gothic þ matches the Greek letter θ (like in Þômas, Θωμᾶς; Naþan, Ναθάν); it represented a voiceless dental fricative, similar to the 'th' sound in "thin." At that time, and still in Modern Greek, the Greek θ indicated a comparable sound.

Note 1. Greek authors represent the Goth. þ by θ; as, Θευδέριχος. Latin writers express Goth. þ mostly by th; as, Theodoricus, Theodomirus, but also often by t. Cp. Wrede, 'Wand.', 104; 'Ostg.', 170 et seq.—In like manner sum later prints hav th for þ (s. § 1, n. 3).

Note 2. Latin authors often uze d beside th for medial þ in proper nouns, from which a later softening may be inferd. Cp. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 171.

Note 2. Latin authors often used þ next to th for the medial position in proper nouns, indicating that a later softening might be inferred. Cf. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 171.

Note 3. Concerning the sound-value of Germanic-Goth. þ, cp. IF. 4, 341 et seq.; for the relation between Goth. þ and Gr. θ, s. Wimmer, 'Die Runenschrift', 268.

Note 3. Regarding the sound value of Germanic-Goth. þ, see IF. 4, 341 and following; for the connection between Goth. þ and Gr. θ, refer to Wimmer, 'Die Runenschrift', 268.

§ 71. þ in Gothic words is very frequent. E. g. (a) initially: þulan, to suffer; þanjan, to strech; ga-þaírsan, to wither; þaúrsus, witherd; þaúrstei, thirst; þata (prn.), that; þu, thou; þreis, three; þliuhan, flee; ga-þláihan, to cumfort, console; þwahan, to wash. (b) medially: brôþar, brother; tunþus, tooth; wiþrus, lam; fraþi, n., understanding; fraþjan, to understand; anþar, other; ƕaþar, 'uter'; waírþan, to becum; qiþan, to say. (c) Also final þ remains unchanged; as, þiuþ, n., good (gen. þiuþis); qaþ, prt. of qiþan; aiþs, acc. aiþ, oath.

§ 71. þ in Gothic words is very common. For example, (a) at the beginning: þulan, to suffer; þanjan, to stretch; ga-þaírsan, to wither; þaúrsus, withered; þaúrstei, thirst; þata (pron.), that; þu, you; þreis, three; þliuhan, to flee; ga-þláihan, to comfort, console; þwahan, to wash. (b) in the middle: brôþar, brother; tunþus, tooth; wiþrus, lame; fraþi, n., understanding; fraþjan, to understand; anþar, other; ƕaþar, uter; waírþan, to become; qiþan, to say. (c) Also at the end, þ remains unchanged; as in þiuþ, n., good (gen. þiuþis); qaþ, past tense of qiþan; aiþs, acc. aiþ, oath.

Note 1. þþ occurs in aiþþau, or (§ 20), and, by assimilation, for h-þ: niþþan, etc.; s. § 62, n. 3.

Note 2. þ finally and before the s of the nom. very often stands for d, and must be kept apart from the þ mentiond under (c) which remain þ medially also; s. § 74.

Note 3. þ becums s before t (§ 81); e. g., 2nd pers. sg. prt. qast (inf. qiþan), warst (inf. waírþan), snaist (inf. sneiþan, to cut).

Note 4. d stands for medial þ in weitwôdida, testimony; Jo. III, 32.

Note 4. d represents the medial þ in weitwôdida, testimony; Jo. III, 32.

d

§ 72. Goth. d corresponds to Greek δ. The New Greek pronunciation of δ is that of a soft (voiced) dental spirant (ð = NE. th in thou). Gothic d, at least medially after a vowel, likewise had the sound-value of this spirant. But d initially and medially after n, r, l, z, has the value of a soft (voiced) stop.

§ 72. Goth. d corresponds to the Greek letter δ. The modern Greek pronunciation of δ is a soft (voiced) dental spirant (ð = NE. th in thou). In Gothic, d also had the sound-value of this spirant, at least when it appeared medially after a vowel. However, when d occurs at the beginning of a word or after n, r, l, or z, it is pronounced as a soft (voiced) stop.

§ 73. Examples of d: (a) initially: daúr, n., door, gate; daúhtar, daughter; dal, dale, valley; dauns, odor; daddjan, to suckl; ga-daúrsan, to dare; driusan, to fall;[Pg 31] dwals, foolish. (b) medially: sidus, custom; wadi, n., wager; midjis, 'medius'; widuwô, widow; biudan, to offer; bindan, to bind; haírda, herd; waldan, to rule; mizdô, reward; fadar, father; frôdei, understanding (cp. frôþs, frôdis, intelligent); fidwôr, four; þridja, 'tertius'; þiuda, peple; -ida, as in auþida, desert; gahugds, mind; gards, house (yard); hardus, hard; hund, hundred; and, on, in; alds, age (cp. alþeis, old), kalds, cold; gazds, sting.

§ 73. Examples of d: (a) initially: daúr, n., door, gate; daúhtar, daughter; dal, dale, valley; dauns, odor; daddjan, to suckle; ga-daúrsan, to dare; driusan, to fall;[Pg 31] dwals, foolish. (b) medially: sidus, custom; wadi, n., wager; midjis, 'medius'; widuwô, widow; biudan, to offer; bindan, to bind; haírda, herd; waldan, to rule; mizdô, reward; fadar, father; frôdei, understanding (cp. frôþs, frôdis, intelligent); fidwôr, four; þridja, 'tertius'; þiuda, people; -ida, as in auþida, desert; gahugds, mind; gards, house (yard); hardus, hard; hund, hundred; and, on, in; alds, age (cp. alþeis, old), kalds, cold; gazds, sting.

Note. In Gothic words dd is found only in waddjus, wall (ON. veggr); daddjan, to suckl; twaddjê (gen. of twai, 2; ON. tweggja); iddja, I went; hense always in the combination ddj.—Cp. § 68, n. 1; and Brgm., I, 127.

§ 74. Finally and before the s of the nominativ d remains only after a consonant; e. g., hund, nimand (3d pers. pl. prs.), gards, alds, gazds, gahugds. But postvocalic d becuming final (and before the s of the nominativ) is changed into þ, because þ denotes the hard sound corresponding to d. Such eufonic þs from medial ds constitute the greater number of the Gothic final þs, the smaller number ar original (also medial) þs. (§ 71, n. 2). E. g.

staþs, stadis, place (but *staþs, staþis, shore); haubiþ, haubidis, hed; liuhaþ, liuhadis, light; frôþs, frôdis, wise; gôþs, gôdis, good; báuþ, prt. of biudan; bidjan, to pray, prt. baþ; —all pps. of wvs.; as, nasiþs, nasidis; salbôþs, salbôdis; furthermore all final þs in verbal inflection (3d pers. sg., 2nd pl.); as, nimiþ, nêmuþ, nêmeiþ,—but with enclitic -uh: nimiduh, nêmuduh, nêmeiduh; —advs. like ƕaþ, whither (cp. § 213); prep. miþ, with.

Note 1. The change of final d into þ does not occur in all cases in our manuscripts. This exception does not concern the original text of Wulfila, but is only a deviation from the normal state of orthografy, which is proved by the fact that final d occurs exceedingly often only in Lu., especially in the first ten chapters, not quite rarely also in Jo., more rarely in the other books. Exampls from the sixth chapter of Lu. ar: samalaud (34), gôds (35. 43), gôd (43), mitads (38), ptc. gamanwids (40), gasulid, and especially frequently verbal forms: taujid (2), ussuggwud (3), faginôd, laikid (23), habaid (24), usbaírid (45), etc.—Sinse yunger forms of speech ar a characteristic feature of the gospel of Lu. (§ 221, 1), they might be regarded as representativs of a later development of the Goth. language, introduced into our text by sum writers (for similar cases in East-Gothic names, s. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 171). Others explain the forms with final d as being due to their original position before words beginning with a vowel according to which the forms nimiþ and nimid would be 'dublets' ('satzdubletten').—Cp. also Kock, Zs. fda., 26, 226 et seq., who shows[Pg 32] that these ds for þs ar most frequent after unaccented vowels (as in mitads), but after an accented vowel only when the latter is long or a difthong, rarely after a short accented vowel (as in mid; Lu. VII, 11.)

Note 2. Sinse the final þ has by all means to be regarded as the regular one, it must also be employd in words of which only forms with medial d occur: biuþs, biudis, table; rauþs, red; usdauþs, zelous; gamaiþs, maimd; môþs, anger; knôþs, stock, race. Hense also garaiþs, redy; unlêds, poor, which, beside the forms with medial b, hav onse each the final forms garaid and unlêds, respectivly. But both forms occur in Lu.

Note 2. Since the final þ definitely has to be seen as the standard one, it should also be used in words where only forms with medial d appear: biuþs, biudis, table; rauþs, red; usdauþs, zealous; gamaiþs, maimed; môþs, anger; knôþs, stock, race. Hence also garaiþs, ready; unlêds, poor, which, apart from the forms with medial b, each have the final forms garaid and unlêds, respectively. But both forms appear in Lu.

With final d only ar repeatedly found: weitwôds, witness, acc. weitwôd; twice gariuds (gariud), honorabl; only one final form with d (but none with þ) occurs in braids, broad; dêds, deed; wôds, mad, possest; grids, step, grade; skaískaid (prt. of skaidan). The normal forms would be dêþs, wôþs, etc., for the forms with d insted of þ ar hardly due to anything else but unfavorabl transmission.

With final d only frequently found: weitwôds, witness, acc. weitwôd; twice gariuds (gariud), honorable; only one final form with d (but none with þ) appears in braids, broad; dêds, deed; wôds, mad, possessed; grids, step, grade; skaískaid (prt. of skaidan). The normal forms would be dêþs, wôþs, etc., for the forms with d instead of þ are likely due to unfavorable transmission.

Note 3. The occurrence of this final þ for thematic d must not be confounded with that of þ in words that hav also medial þ beside d in other words from the same root; as, frôd- (nom. frôþs), prudent; frôdei, prudence; but fraþi, understanding, fraþjan, to understand; sad- (nom. saþs), satisfied, but ga-sôþjan, to satisfy; sinþs, a going, way, but sandjan, to send; alds, age, but alþeis, old. Cp. § 79, n. 2.

Note 4. þ is seldom found where medial d is expected; as, guþa (for guda); Gal. IV, 8; unfrôþans; Gal. III, 3.

Note 4. þ is rarely seen where you would expect medial d; for example, guþa (instead of guda); Gal. IV, 8; unfrôþans; Gal. III, 3.

§ 75. The d of the weak preterit, which stands mostly after vowels (nasida, habaida), remains intact after l and n (skulda, munda), while after s, h, f it becums t: kaupasta, môsta, daúrsta, þâhta, brâhta, þûhta, brûhta, waúrhta, baúhta, ôhta, mahta, áihta, þaúrfta; it is changed into þ in kunþa; ss is assimilated from st in wissa.

§ 75. The d of the weak preterit, which mainly occurs after vowels (nasida, habaida), stays the same after l and n (skulda, munda), while after s, h, f it becomes t: kaupasta, môsta, daúrsta, þâhta, brâhta, þûhta, brûhta, waúrhta, baúhta, ôhta, mahta, áihta, þaúrfta; it changes to þ in kunþa; ss is assimilated from st in wissa.

Conform to this rule ar the respectiv ptcs. nasiþs, habaiþs, skulds, munds, but waúrhts, baúhts, mahts, binaúhts, þaúrfts, kunþs. Cp. § 187, n. 1; § 197 et seq.; §§ 208. 209.

Note. d becums s before the t of the 2nd pers. prt. (§ 81): baust (1st bauþ, inf. biudan); so, also, before consonants in derivativ words; as, gilstr, tax, tribute (< gildan); usbeisns, expectation (< usbeidan, to abide, expect).

s

§ 76. s is a hard (voiceless) dental spirant and corresponds to Gr. σ. s occurs very often in Gothic words, especially initially. E. g.

§ 76. s is a hard (voiceless) dental fricative and corresponds to Gr. σ. s appears frequently in Gothic words, particularly at the beginning. For example,

(a) initially: sunus, sun; sitan, to sit; skadus, shade; speiwan, to spit; standan, to stand; straujan, to strew; slêpan, to sleep; smals, small; snutrs, wise; swaíhra, father-in-law.

[Pg 33]

(b) medially: kiusan, to choose; wisan, to be; wasjan, to clothe; þûsundi, thousand; gasts, guest; fisks, fish; asneis, hired man; hansa, host; aúhsa, ox; þaúrsus, witherd.

(c) Also final s remains unchanged; as, gras, grass; mês, table; was (prt. of wisan), was; hals, neck.

Note 1. ss occurs frequently; e. g., ƕassei, sharpness; qiss, speech; wissa (prt. of witan); suff. -assus (þiudinassus, kingdom, etc.).

Note 1. ss appears often; for example, ƕassei, sharpness; qiss, speech; wissa (part of witan); suffix -assus (þiudinassus, kingdom, etc.).

Note 2. Final s stands in most cases for medial z, especially the final inflectional s. Cp. § 78; dropping of the s of the nominativ in § 78, n. 2.

Note 3. For s from t, þ, d, before consonants (t), s. § 69, n. 2; § 71, n. 3; § 75, n. 1.

Note 4. Concerning the fonetic distinction between the spirants s and þ, cp. IF., 342.

Note 4. Regarding the phonetic difference between the spirants s and þ, see IF., 342.

§ 77. The sign z corresponds in Greek words to ζ; as, Zaíbaídaius, Ζεβεδαῖος; azymus, ἄζυμος. Its sound, like that of the Gr. ζ both at Wulfila's time and in New Greek, was the corresponding soft sound of s, hense a voiced dental spirant (E. z).

§ 77. The sign z in Greek words corresponds to ζ; for example, Zaíbaídaius, Ζεβεδαῖος; azymus, ἄζυμος. Its pronunciation, similar to the Gr. ζ during Wulfila's time and in Modern Greek, represented the soft sound of s, hence a voiced dental fricative (E. z).

§ 78. (a) In Goth. words z occurs never initially.

§ 78. (a) In Gothic words z never appears at the beginning.

(b) Medial z is frequent. But final z becums s, the corresponding hard sound (cp. § 79). E. g.

azêts, easy; hazjan, to praise; hazeins, praise; dius, gen. diuzis, animal; hatis, gen. hatizis, hatred; hatizôn, to be angry; huzd, trezure; gazds, sting; mizdô, reward; azgô, ashes; marzjan, to offend; talzjan, to teach; —comparativs: maiza, 'major'; frôdôza, alþiza, etc.; —pronominal forms; as, izwara, þizôs, þizê, blindaizôs; 2nd pers. sing. midl: haitaza.

azêts, easy; hazjan, to praise; hazeins, praise; dius, gen. diuzis, animal; hatis, gen. hatizis, hatred; hatizôn, to be angry; huzd, treasure; gazds, sting; mizdô, reward; azgô, ashes; marzjan, to offend; talzjan, to teach; —comparatives: maiza, 'major'; frôdôza, alþiza, etc.; —pronominal forms; as, izwara, þizôs, þizê, blindaizôs; 2nd pers. sing. midl: haitaza.

(c) Most of the Gothic final ss represent z, especially the inflectional s; this reappears as z when it becums medial by an enclitic addition, for exampl, the s of the nom. ƕas, who?, but ƕazuh; is, he, but izei, who; us, out, but uzuh, uzu; dis- (as in dizuhþansat; Mk. XVI, 8); þôs, nom. pl. f., but þôzuh; weis, we; weizuh; wileis, 2nd pers. sg., but wileizu; advs.: mais (compar. maiza), more; áiris, erlier (compar. áiriza), etc.

(c) Most of the Gothic final ss represent z, especially the inflectional s; this shows up as z when it becomes medial through an enclitic addition, for example, the s of the nom. ƕas, who?, but ƕazuh; is, he, but izei, who; us, out, but uzuh, uzu; dis- (as in dizuhþansat; Mk. XVI, 8); þôs, nom. pl. f., but þôzuh; weis, we; weizuh; wileis, 2nd pers. sg., but wileizu; advs.: mais (compar. maiza), more; áiris, earlier (compar. áiriza), etc.

Note 1. z is but rarely employd for final s: minz, less; II. Cor. XII, 15 (Codex B), for mins elsewhere; riqiz (4 times), darkness, beside riqis, gen. riqizis; aiz, brass, muney (only Mk. VI, 8); mimz, flesh; I. Cor. VIII, 13.—For a different view of final s for z, s. Wilmanns, Dtsch. Gramm., I, p. 86.

Note 1. z is rarely used for the final s: minz, less; II. Cor. XII, 15 (Codex B), for mins elsewhere; riqiz (4 times), darkness, besides riqis, gen. riqizis; aiz, brass, money (only Mk. VI, 8); mimz, flesh; I. Cor. VIII, 13.—For a different perspective on final s for z, see Wilmanns, Dtsch. Gramm., I, p. 86.

[Pg 34]

Note 2. The s (z) of the nom. sg. is dropt (1) after s (ss, z): drus, m., gen. drusis, fall; swês, gen. swêsis, adj., one's own; laus, lausis, loose; us-stass, f., gen. usstassais, resurrection; (2) after r immediately preceded by a short vowel: waír, waíris, man; baúr, sun; kaisar, Cæsar; anþar, other; unsar, our; but s remains unchanged after a long syllabl: akrs, field; hôrs, whoremonger; skeirs, clear; swêrs, honord; gáurs, sorrowful. An exception is the onse occurring nom. stiur, steer, calf. Cp. Brgm., I, 516; II, 531; Wrede, 'Ostg.', 177 et seq.—At a later stage of development, especially in East-Gothic, the loss of the nominativ-s occurs more extensivly. So alredy in the Documents (Neap. Doc.: Gudilub, Ufitahari); cp. Wrede, loc. cit.

Note 2. The s (z) of the nominative singular is dropped (1) after s (ss, z): drus, m., gen. drusis, fall; swês, gen. swêsis, adj., one's own; laus, lausis, loose; us-stass, f., gen. usstassais, resurrection; (2) after r immediately preceded by a short vowel: waír, waíris, man; baúr, sun; kaisar, Cæsar; anþar, other; unsar, our; but s remains the same after a long syllable: akrs, field; hôrs, whoremonger; skeirs, clear; swêrs, honored; gáurs, sorrowful. An exception is the nominative stiur, steer, calf. Cp. Brgm., I, 516; II, 531; Wrede, 'Ostg.', 177 et seq.—At a later stage of development, especially in East-Gothic, the loss of the nominative -s occurs more extensively. So already in the Documents (Neap. Doc.: Gudilub, Ufitahari); cp. Wrede, loc. cit.

Note 3. z and s interchange in the prt. of slêpan; saíslêp; Mt. VIII, 24. Lu. VIII, 23. I. Thess. IV, 14; saízlêp; Jo. XI, 11. I. Cor. XV, 6; —in the neuters in -is (gen. agisis and gen. hatizis); s. 94, n. 5.

Note 3. z and s switch places in the part of slêpan; saíslêp; Mt. VIII, 24. Lu. VIII, 23. I. Thess. IV, 14; saízlêp; Jo. XI, 11. I. Cor. XV, 6; —in the neuters in -is (gen. agisis and gen. hatizis); s. 94, n. 5.

Note 4. The z (s. c, abuv) of the prep. us is in compounds assimilated to a following r (cp. § 24, n. 2); e. g., urruns, a running out; urreisan, to (a)rise; urrûmnan (beside usrûmnan, in Codex B, II. Cor. VI, 11), to expand; onse ur for the prep. us: ur riqiza; II. Cor. IV, 6.—us remains unchanged before other sounds in cpds.; as, usagjan, to frighten; usbeidan, to abide, expect (cp. § 56, n. 2). z for s before a vowel appears only in uzôn (prt. of *usanan, to expire); Mk. XV, 37. 39; and in uzêtin (dat. of *usêta, manger); Lu. II, 7. 12. 16.

Note 5. When us is affixt to a word beginning with st, only one s is sumtimes writn: ustaig (prt. of us-steigan); Mk. III, 13; ustôþ; Lu. VIII, 55. X, 25; ustandiþ (prt. and prs. of us-standan); Mk. X, 34; ustassai (nom. usstass); Lu. XIV, 14.—Cp. twistandans (in B = twis-standans in A); II. Cor. II, 13; diskritnan (for dis-skritnan); Mt. XXVII, 51; there is no analogon for sp.

Note 5. When us is attached to a word starting with st, only one s is sometimes written: ustaig (part of us-steigan); Mk. III, 13; ustôþ; Lu. VIII, 55; X, 25; ustandiþ (part and present of us-standan); Mk. X, 34; ustassai (nom. usstass); Lu. XIV, 14.—See twistandans (in B = twis-standans in A); II. Cor. II, 13; diskritnan (for dis-skritnan); Mt. XXVII, 51; there is no equivalent for sp.

APPENDIX.
GENERAL REMARKS ON THE CONSONANTS.

§ 79. The Gothic soft spirants, b, d, z, finally and before the s of the nom. (cp. §§ 56. 74. 78) ar changed into the corresponding hard sounds, f, þ, s, while the fourth soft spirant, medial g, remains unchanged when final (§ 66; § 65, n. 2).

Note 1. Also the final b, d, z hav sumtimes remaind unchanged, i. e. z rarely (§ 78, n. 1), but b and d especially often in certain parts where also other forms show a later stage of development. Cp. § 56, n. 1; § 74, n. 1, and Zs. fda., 25, 226 et seq.

Note 2. Interchange between f and b, þ and d, h and g, s and z, which had taken place in proethnic Germanic according to definit laws and is better preservd in other Germanic languages ('Grammatical Change'; s. ahd. gr., § 100 et seq.), occurs in Gothic only in derivativ words; cp. g-h, § 66, n. 1; d-þ, § 74, n. 3; (z—s, § 78, n. 3); and traces of it ar seen in the inflection of the verbs þarf (§ 56, n. 3), áih (§ 203, n. 1).

[Pg 35]

§ 80. Gemination of the Gothic liquids and nasals, l, m, n, r, is frequent; also ss and a few instances of kk (§ 58, n. 1), tt (§ 69, n. 1), þþ (§ 71, n. 1), dd (§ 73, n. 1); —the more frequent exampls of gg (§§ 67. 68) ar in part of another kind.

The geminated consonants remain unchanged when final and before the s of the nominativ: skatts, full, kann, rann, wamm, gawiss; likewise before j (as in fulljan, skattja, kannjan, etc.), but ar as a rule simplified before other consonants: kant, kunþa (cp. kann); rant, 2nd pers. sg. prt., ur-runs, m., a running out (cp. rinnan); swumfsl, pond (cp. *swimman); —but uzually fullnan, only a few times fulnan.

The doubled consonants stay the same when they are at the end and before the s of the nominative: skatts, full, kann, rann, wamm, gawiss; similarly before j (as in fulljan, skattja, kannjan, etc.), but are usually simplified before other consonants: kant, kunþa (see kann); rant, 2nd person singular past, ur-runs, m., a running out (see rinnan); swumfsl, pond (see *swimman); —but usually fullnan, with only a few instances of fulnan.

Note. Sum instances of gemination as wel as of simplified gemination in the MSS. ar merely orthografic errors; as, allh for alh; Lu. II, 46; wisêdun (s for ss); inbranjada (nj for nnj); Jo. XV, 6; swam for swamm; Mk. XV, 36.—Such errors ar mostly corrected by the editors. Cp. Bernhardt, 'Vulfila', p. LVII.

Note. Some instances of gemination as well as simplified gemination in the manuscripts are just spelling mistakes; for example, allh for alh; Lu. II, 46; wisêdun (s for ss); inbranjada (nj for nnj); Jo. XV, 6; swam for swamm; Mk. XV, 36.—Most of these errors are corrected by the editors. See Bernhardt, 'Vulfila', p. LVII.

§ 81. The changes of consonants before dentals may, as far as the Gothic is concernd, be embraced in the following rule:

§ 81. The changes of consonants before dentals can, regarding Gothic, be summarized in the following rule:

Before the dentals, d, þ, t, all labial stops and spirants ar changed into f, all gutturals into h, all dentals into s, the second dental appearing always as t. E. g.

Before the dental sounds, d, þ, t, all labial stops and fricatives are changed into f, all guttural sounds into h, all dental sounds into s, with the second dental always appearing as t. For example,

skapjan, gaskafts (§ 51, n. 2); þaúrban (*þaúrbda), þaúrfta; giban, gifts (§ 56, n. 4); —siuks, saúhts; þagkjan, þâhta (§ 58, n. 2); magan, mahta (§ 66, n. 1); —wait, waist (§ 69, n. 2); waírþan, warst (§ 71, n. 3); biudan, baust (§ 75, n. 1).

Note 1. Exceptions ar magt (2nd pers. sg.; 1st mag, § 201) and gahugds, mind.

Note 2. st often becums ss by assimilation; as, wissa, prt. of witan (§ 76, n. 1). Cp. Beitr., 7, 171 et seq.; 9, 150 et seq.; IF., 4, 341 et seq.

Note 3. The rule givn abuv from a practical standpoint of the Gothic grammar must be formulated differently from a comparativ-historical standpoint, because the discust sound-shiftings hav not originated in the Gothic language, but ar reflections of proethnic Germanic and Indo-Germanic relations of sounds. S. Brgm., I, 381 et seq.; 403 et seq.

Note 3. The rule given above from a practical perspective of Gothic grammar needs to be stated differently from a comparative-historical viewpoint, because the discussed sound changes did not originate in the Gothic language, but are reflections of proto-Germanic and Indo-European sound relationships. S. Brgm., I, 381 et seq.; 403 et seq.

§ 82. Assimilations occur only in combination with h (s. § 62, n. 3) and us (§ 78, n. 4).

[Pg 36]
[Pg 37]

INFLECTION.

CHAP. I. DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVS.

GENERAL PRELIMINARY REMARKS.

(a) On declension in general.

§ 83. The Gothic declension, like that of the remaining Old-Germanic dialects, comprises three genders: the masculin, neuter and feminin.

§ 83. The Gothic declension, similar to the other Old-Germanic dialects, has three genders: the masculine, neuter, and feminine.

Note 1. The neuter of all declensions resembls in form very closely the masculin; a distinction occurs in the nom. and acc. sg. and pl. only.

Note 1. The neuter form in all declensions closely resembles the masculine; the difference appears only in the nominative and accusative singular and plural.

Note 2. A distinction of gender is wanting only with the personal prn. of the 1st and 2nd persons, with the reflexiv prn. (§ 150), and with the numeral adjectivs 4-19 (§ 141).

§ 84. The Goth. declension has two numbers: singular and plural.

§ 84. The Goth. declension has two forms: singular and plural.

Note. The dual which originally existed in all Indg. languages, is preservd in the Goth. decl. in the 1st and 2nd pers. of the personal prn. only (§ 150).

§ 85. The Goth. declension has four complete cases: nominativ, genitiv, dativ, accusativ. The vocativ is mostly identical with the nominativ, only in the singular of sum classes of declension the vocativ is different from the nominativ, but then it is always identical with the accusativ.

§ 85. The Goth. declension has four complete cases: nominative, genitive, dative, accusative. The vocative is usually the same as the nominative, but in the singular of some declension classes, the vocative differs from the nominative; however, it always matches the accusative.

Note. The Goth. dativ represents several Indg. cases (dativ, locativ, ablativ, instrumental). Relics of the neuter instrumental ar stil present in the pronominal declension: þê (§ 153), ƕê (§ 159).

(b) On the declension of substantivs.

§ 86. The declension of substantivs in Gothic is divided into a vocalic and a consonantal declension, according as the stems of the substantivs end in a vowel or a consonant.

§ 86. The declension of nouns in Gothic is split into a vocalic and a consonantal declension, depending on whether the stems of the nouns end in a vowel or a consonant.

[Pg 38]

Note. The original form of the stem is in part unrecognizabl in the Gothic language, because the stem has blended with the endings, final vowels hav been lost, and the like, so that the division into a vocalic and a consonantal declension appears correct only in the light of the Comparativ Indo-Germanic Grammar, and but with reference to this it must be retaind. Such a division would never hav been made from an especially Gothic-Germanic standpoint.

Note. The original form of the stem is partially unrecognizable in the Gothic language because the stem has merged with the endings, final vowels have been lost, and so on, making the separation into a vocalic and consonantal declension seem accurate only when viewed through the lens of the Comparative Indo-Germanic Grammar, and it must be maintained only in this context. This kind of division would never have been established from a distinctly Gothic-Germanic perspective.

§ 87. Of the consonantal stems in Gothic the n-stems (i. e. the stems in -an, -ôn, -ein), ar very numerous, while of other consonantal declensions but a few remains ar preservd (§ 114 et seq.). Sinse the time of Jac. Grimm the n-declension has also been calld Weak Declension.

§ 88. There ar four classes of the vocalic declension: stems in a, ô, i, u. Accordingly, we distinguish them as a-, ô-, i-, and u-declensions. The stem-characteristics ar stil clearly seen in all classes in the dat. and acc. pl.; e. g., dagam, dagans; — gibôm, gibôs; — gastim, gastins; — sunum, sununs. Sinse the time of Jacob Grimm the vocalic declension has also been calld Strong Declension.

§ 88. There are four classes of the vocalic declension: stems in a, ô, i, u. Accordingly, we distinguish them as a-, ô-, i-, and u-declensions. The stem characteristics are still clearly seen in all classes in the dative and accusative plural; e.g., dagam, dagans; — gibôm, gibôs; — gastim, gastins; — sunum, sununs. Since the time of Jacob Grimm, the vocalic declension has also been called Strong Declension.

Note 1. Of the four vocalic declensions the a- and ô-declensions ar closely connected, the a-declension containing only masculins and neuters (dags, waúrd), the ô-declension the corresponding feminins. Both classes ar therefore uzually givn as one, the a-declension.

Note 1. Of the four vowel declensions, the a- and ô- declensions are closely related, with the a-declension including only masculine and neuter forms (dags, waúrd), and the ô-declension covering the corresponding feminine forms. Both categories are usually treated as one, the a-declension.

Note 2. The Gothic a-declension corresponds to the second or o-declension in Greek and Latin (Gr. m. -ος, n. -ον; Lt. -us, -um), the Goth. ô-declension corresponds to the first or ā-declension in Gr. and Lt. Now sinse Comparativ Grammar teaches us that the Græco-Lt. vowels ar the more original ones, and that onse also the Germanic stems of the corresponding masculine and neuters must hav ended in o and those of the feminins in â, we often meet in Germanic Grammar with the term o-declension for the masculins and neuters, and with the term â-declension for the feminins.

Note 2. The Gothic a-declension is equivalent to the second or o-declension in Greek and Latin (Gr. m. -ος, n. -ον; Lt. -us, -um). The Goth. ô-declension is similar to the first or ā-declension in Greek and Latin. As Comparative Grammar indicates that the Greek and Latin vowels are the more original forms, it follows that the Germanic stems of the corresponding masculine and neuter forms must have ended in 'o', while the feminine forms ended in 'â'. Therefore, in Germanic Grammar, we often use the term o-declension for the masculine and neuter forms and the term â-declension for the feminine forms.

(c) On the nominal composition.

§ 88^a. Substantivs (and adjectivs) as the first parts of compounds end as a rule in a vowel, the connecting vowel of the components (or composition-vowel), which in the case of the vocalic stems is oftenest identical with the stem-vowel. Exampls: a-decl.: figgra-gulþ, hunsla-staþs, himina-kunds, fulla-tôjis; —i-decl.: gasti-gôþs, naudi-bandi; —u-decl.: fôtu-baúrd, hardu-haírtei, filu-waúrdei.

§ 88^a. Nouns (and adjectives) as the first parts of compounds usually end in a vowel, which serves as the connecting vowel between the components (or composition vowel), and in the case of vocalic stems, it is often the same as the stem vowel. Examples: a-decl.: figgra-gulþ, hunsla-staþs, himina-kunds, fulla-tôjis; —i-decl.: gasti-gôþs, naudi-bandi; —u-decl.: fôtu-baúrd, hardu-haírtei, filu-waúrdei.

But the connecting vowel of the o-stems is always -a; as, aírþa-kunds, hleiþra-stakeins; the -ja of ja-stems per[Pg 39]sists when the stem is a short syllabl, but it becums i when the stem is long (cp. § 44); as, wadja-bôkôs, alja-kuns; arbi-numja, aglaiti-waúrdei; in like manner þûsundi-faþs, < stem in -jô-, nom. þûsundi (§ 145).

The n-stems hav simpl a insted of the thematic ending -an, -ôn; as, guma-kunds, fruma-baúr, wilja-halþei, qina-kunds, auga-daúrô; but mari-saiws (cp. Beitr., 8, 410).

The n-stems have a simple a instead of the thematic ending -an, -ôn; for example, guma-kunds, fruma-baúr, wilja-halþei, qina-kunds, auga-daúrô; but mari-saiws (cp. Beitr., 8, 410).

Note 1. The composition-vowel was often dropt in Gothic, especially that of the a-stems; e. g., of a-stems: wein-drugkja (but weina-triu, weina-basi, etc.), gud-hûs, guþ-blôstreis (but guda-faúrhts, guda-laus, guþa-skaunei), laus-qiþrs, laus-handus (but lausa-waúrds), þiudan-gardi, háuh-þûhts, ain-falþs, þiu-magus (for þiwa-, § 91, n. 3); —of ja-stems: niuklahs (but niuja-satiþs), frei-hals, aglait-gastalds (but aglaiti-waúrdei); —of i-stems: brûþ-faþs, þut-haúrn (Beitr., 8, 411), twalib-wintrus (§ 141).

Note 2. Sum words show evasions of the composition-vowel: þiuþi-qiss (for þiuþa-); I. Cor. X, 16 (in Cod. A); anda-laus (for andja-); I. Tim. I, 4 (in A, but andi-laus in B); hrainja-haírts (for hraini-); Mt. V, 8; garda- in cpds. seems to be the normal form beside the stem gardi- (s. § 101): garda-waldands; Mt. X, 25. Lu. XIV, 21; miþgarda-waddjus; Eph. II, 14 (in B, but midgardi-w. in A); Beitr., 8, 432. Cp. also brôþra-lubô; Rom. XII, 10 (in A, but brôþru-lubô; I. Thess. IV, 9, in B).—The evasions occur mostly in Codex A and seem to be yunger East-Gothic forms; cp. the names in the Documents (e. g., Gudi-lub, in Ar. Doc.; Sunjai-friþas, in Neap. Doc.), and Wrede, 'Ostg.', 184.

Note 3. Beside the other consonantal stems there occur: brôþru-lubô (§ 114); cp. the preceding note; baúrgs-waddjus, a genitiv-composition (§ 116); nahta-mats (§ 116); beside mann- (§ 117) the stem mana- is found: mana-sêþs, mana-maúrþrja, unmana-riggws; and (probably according to note 1) man-leika.—sigis-laun and þruts-fill, which belong to old s-stems (s. § 94, n. 5.—Leo Meyer, Got. Spr., p. 174), may (by loss of a, according to note 1) also refer to a-stems.

Note 4. For more about the cpds. in Gothic, s. Beitr., 8, 371-460; Brgm., II, 73 et seq.; Wrede, 'Ostg.', 183 et seq.

Note 4. For more about the compounds in Gothic, see Beiträge, 8, 371-460; Brgm., II, 73 and following; Wrede, 'Ostg.', 183 and following.

A. VOCALIC (STRONG) DECLENSION.

1. (a) A-Declension.

§ 89. The Gothic a-declension contains only masculins and neuters. We distinguish between pure a-stems and ja-stems.

§ 89. The Gothic a-declension includes only masculine and neuter nouns. We differentiate between pure a-stems and ja-stems.

Note. The wa-stems in Gothic differ but very litl from the pure a-stems. Their number is very small (§ 91, n. 3; § 93; § 94, n. 1).

Masculins.

§ 90. Paradims of the masculins. (a) Pure a-stems: dags, day (< an erlier *dagaz, proethnic Germanic *dago-z,[Pg 40] § 88, n. 2); hlaifs, (loaf of) bred (proethnic Germanic *hlaibo-z). (b) ja-stems: haírdeis, herdsman (proethnic Germanic *herdio-z); harjis, army (proethnic Germanic *hario-z).

Sing.	N.	dags	hlaifs	haírdeis	harjis
	G.	dagis	hlaibis	haírdeis	harjis
	D.	daga	hlaiba	haírdja	harja
	A.	dag	hlaif	haírdi	hari
	V.	dag	hlaif	haírdi	hari
Plur.	A.	dagôs	hlaibôs	haírdjôs	harjôs
	G.	dagê	hlaibê	haírdjê	harjê
	D.	dagam	hlaibam	haírdjam	harjam
	A.	dagans	hlaibans	haírdjans	harjans

§ 91. Like dags decline many masculins; as, stains, stone; skalks, servant; tains, twig; himins, heven; fisks, fish; wigs, way; wulfs, wolf; fugls, bird (fowl); aiþs (gen. aiþis), oath.

§ 91. Just like dogs decline many masculine forms; for example, stains, stone; skalks, servant; tains, twig; himins, heaven; fisks, fish; wigs, way; wulfs, wolf; fugls, bird (fowl); aiþs (gen. aiþis), oath.

hlaifs shows the hardening of the medial soft spirant when becuming final (cp. §§ 56. 79). So does laufs (nom. pl. laubôs), leaf.

Note 1. The declension of these masculins is identical with that of the masculin i-stems (100) in the hole sg. and in the gen. pl. Only the nom., acc., and dat. pl. can show to which declension they belong. Consequently, a number of masculins which ar not found in those pl. cases cannot with certainty be classified. The testimony of the other Germanic languages, however, wil in many cases enable us to decide. Thus akrs, field; mêgs, sun-in-law; maúrgins, morning; snaiws, snow; maiþms, present, etc., belong to the a-decl.

Note 1. The declension of these masculine nouns is the same as that of the masculine i-stems (100) in the entire singular form and in the genitive plural. Only the nominative, accusative, and dative plural forms can indicate which declension they belong to. As a result, several masculine nouns that are not found in those plural cases cannot be definitively categorized. However, the evidence from other Germanic languages will often help us determine their classification. For example, akrs, field; mêgs, son-in-law; maúrgins, morning; snaiws, snow; maiþms, present, etc., belong to the a-declension.

Note 2. Words which ar not found in the nom. sg. nor in the nom. acc. pl., may be neuter. Thus the nom. to the isolated gen. akeitis (vinegar) may be both akeits and akeit, that to the dat. staþa (shore) both staþs and staþ. Sum of such words ar undoutedly m., as is evident from the adjs. which modify them, or from the cognate dialects; e. g., slêps, sleep; wôkrs, uzury; aúhns, oven; tweifls, dout; môþs, anger (gen. môdis, § 74).

Note 3. According to the rules for final w (§ 42), þius and þiu ar givn, respectivly, as the nom. and voc. sg. to the nom. pl. þiwôs (servants), gen. þiwê—the only forms found. Cp. þiu-magus, servant, § 88^a, n. 1.

Note 4. According to § 78, n. 2, the s of the nom. sg. is dropt in *ans (dat. anza), beam; *hals (halsis), neck; freihals, liberty; *ams (acc. pl. amsans), shoulder: waír, man; *gabaúr (n. pl. gabaúrôs), festiv meal; kaisar, emperor, Cæsar; stiur, steer (Neh. 5, 18; cp. Zs. fda., 37, 319).

Note 5. wêgs, wave (nom. pl. wêgôs, but dat. pl. wêgim); aiws, time (dat. pl. aiwam, acc. pl. aiwins), show a tendency to merge into the i-decl.

Note 5. wêgs, wave (nominative plural wêgôs, but dative plural wêgim); aiws, time (dative plural aiwam, accusative plural aiwins), show a tendency to merge into the i-declension.

[Pg 41]

§ 92. The ja-stems ar subject to the rules concerning the contraction of the ji into ei (s. § 44, c and n. 1), according to which there is a distinction between the words with long and those with short stem-syllabls. Further exampls: (a) long-stemd and trisyllabic (polysyllabic): asneis, hired man; andeis, end; ƕaiteis, wheat; sipôneis, disciple; the words in -areis (Kluge, Stammbildung, §§ 8. 9; ahd. gr., § 200): laisareis, teacher; bôkareis, scribe, etc. (b) short stems: niþjis, cuzin; *andastaþjis, adversary.

Note 1. andeis, end, has in Rom. X, 18 the acc. pl. according to the i-decl.: andins.

Note 1. andeis, end, has in Rom. X, 18 the accusative plural according to the i-decl.: andins.

Note 2. Only in the pl. occurs: bêrusjôs, parents (§ 33).

Note 3. The acc. pl. hlijans (Mk. IX, 5) suggests the nom. sg. *hleis (like freis, § 126, n. 2), tent. Cp. Zimmer, QF., 13, 308.

Note 4. A nom. pl. silbawiljôs, adj. uzed as sb. (nom. sg. *silba-wiljis, willing of one's self; cp. gawiljis, § 126), occurs in II. Cor. VIII, 3.

Neuters.

§ 93. Paradims. (a) pure a-stems: waúrd, word; haubiþ, hed. (b) wa-stems: triu, tree. (c) ja-stems: kuni, kin.

§ 93. Paradigms. (a) pure a-stems: waúrd, word; haubiþ, hed. (b) wa-stems: triu, tree. (c) ja-stems: kuni, kin.

Sing.	N.	waúrd	haubiþ	triu	kuni
	G.	waúrdis	haubidis	triwis	kunjis
	D.	waúrda	haubida	triwa	kunja
	A.	waúrd	haubiþ	triu	kuni
Plur.	N.	waúrda	haubida	triwa	kunja
	G.	waúrdê	haubidê	triwê	kunjê
	D.	waúrdam	haubidam	triwam	kunjam
	A.	waúrda	haubida	triwa	kunja

§ 94. Like waúrd ar declined a very great number of neuter nouns; e. g., blôþ, blôþis, blud; gulþ, gold; juk, yoke; jêr, year; haúrn, horn; sauil, sun; silubr, silver; agis, fear; sáir, sorrow; maúrþr, murder; gras, grasis, grass.

§ 94. Like waúrd, it declined a large number of neuter nouns; for example, blôþ, blôþis, blood; gulþ, gold; juk, yoke; jêr, year; haúrn, horn; sauil, sun; silubr, silver; agis, fear; sáir, sorrow; maúrþr, murder; gras, grasis, grass.

Exampls of words, like haubiþ, with a final hard sound for a medial soft spirant: dius, diuzis, animal; hatis, hatred; riqis, darkness (§ 78, n. 1); liuhaþ, liuhadis, light; witôþ, law.

Note 1. According to § 42, the final w of wa-stems becums u after a short vowel. There occur two words of this kind: the paradim triu (weina-triu, vine) and *kniu, kniwis, knee. No change after a long vowel; as, lêw, opportunity; fraiw, seed.

Note 2. According to § 91, n. 2, it is doutful whether sum words ar m. or n. The reasons givn there permit us to class words like þaúrp, field;[Pg 42] maþl, market, with the neuters; doutful ar the forms dal, dale (cp. ON. dalr), lun, ransom (or lûns, cp. § 15, n. 1).

Note 3. The word guþ, which is neuter in form, is uzed as m. when denoting the Christian God. But the n. pl. guda (heathen) gods (cp. § 74, n. 4), is stil uzed. The inflection of the sg. is uncertain, because only abbreviated forms (§ 1, n. 4) occur: gþ, gþs, gþa. As ful forms ar givn: nom. acc. guþ, gen. guþs, dat. guþa, tho we should expect the gen. gudis, dat. guda. If the gen. form guþs is correct, the word guþ would belong to the consonantal stems (§ 114 et seq.).—In composition guda- and guþa-; s. § 88^a, n. 1.

Note 4. fadrein, 'paternity', in the sense of 'parents', may be uzed as an indeclinabl pl. with the art.: þai fadrein, þans fadrein. But also the regular neuter pl. fadreina occurs in the sense of 'parents'. The fem. fadreins, lineage, family, is a separate word (§ 103).—Cp. J. Schmidt, 'Indog. Neutra', 14.

Note 5. The gen. of hatis, hatred, occurs onse (in cod. B) as hatis (a consonantal form); Eph. II, 3 (hatizê in A). For a different view, s. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 77.—Concerning the neuters in -is, s. v. Bahder, 'Verbalabstracta', 52 et seq.; Kluge, Stammbild., §§ 84. 145; Brgm., II, 419 et seq. Cp. also § 78, n. 3.

§ 95. Like kuni ar declined both short and long ja-stems; e. g., badi, bed; nati, net; faírguni, mountain; gawi, gaujis, province (§ 42, n. 2); taui, tôjis, deed (§ 26); reiki, reikjis, kingdom; arbi, arbjis, inheritance; galigri, consummation of marriage; gawaúrki, business; garûni, counsel; andwaírþi, presence.

Note 1. Beside -jis a contracted gen. in -eis (cp. § 44, c; § 92) is found in but a few long and short stems; as, trausteis (nom. trausti, cuvenant); Eph. II, 12; andbahti, office, has the gen. andbahtjis (3 times) beside andbahteis (onse); Lu. I, 23; gawaírþi, peace, has gawaírþjis (6 times), gawaírþeis (3 times); waldufni, power, has waldufneis (Skeir., 49) beside waldufnjis (twice).

1. (b) Ô-Declension.

§ 96. The Gothic ô-declension contains only feminins which serv as a supplement to the a-decl. (§ 88, n. 1). Also here we distinguish between pure ô-stems and jô-stems.

Paradims: (a) giba, gift (stem gibô-). (b) long jô-stems: bandi, bond (stem bandjô-); mawi, girl (stem maujô-).

Paradigms: (a) giba, gift (stem gibô-). (b) long jô-stems: bandi, bond (stem bandjô-); mawi, girl (stem maujô-).

Sing.	N. giba	bandi	mawi
	G. gibôs	bandjôs	maujôs
	D. gibai	bandjai	maujai
	A. giba	bandja	mauja
Plur.	N. gibôs	bandjôs	maujôs
	G. gibô	bandjô	maujô
	D. gibôm	bandjôm	maujôm
	A. gibôs	bandjôs	maujôs

[Pg 43]

§ 97. Like giba ar declined a great many words; as, bida, request; þiuda, peple; hansa, multitude; saiwala, soul; stibna, voice; aírþa, erth; ƕeila, hour; wamba, belly; mildiþa, mercy; aƕa, water.

§ 97. Like giba ar declined a lot of words; for example, bida, request; þiuda, people; hansa, multitude; saiwala, soul; stibna, voice; aírþa, earth; ƕeila, hour; wamba, belly; mildiþa, mercy; aƕa, water.

Note 1. The declension of the wô- and short jô-stems is identical with that of giba; e. g., triggwa, cuvenant; bandwa, sign; —sunja, truth; halja, hel; sibja, relationship; wrakja, persecution; plapja, street.

Note 1. The declension of the wô- and short jô-stems is the same as that of giba; for example, triggwa, covenant; bandwa, sign; —sunja, truth; halja, hell; sibja, relationship; wrakja, persecution; plapja, street.

Note 2. The acc. sg. of ƕeila before the enclitic -hun is found as ƕeilô- in ƕeilôhun; s. § 163, n. 1 (as regards the form, cp. ainôhun, § 163, c; ƕarjôh, § 165).

§ 98. Like bandi go the long and polysyllabic jô-stems. Their inflection is the same as that of giba, except in the nom. and voc. sg. which hav i insted of ja.—Further exampls: þiudangardi, kingdom; ƕôftuli, glory; *haiþi, field, heath; *wasti, garment; *frijôndi, f., frend; *fraistubni, temptation.

§ 98. Like bandi go the long and multi-syllabic jô-stems. Their inflection is the same as that of giba, except in the nom. and voc. sg. which have i instead of ja.—Further examples: þiudangardi, kingdom; ƕôftuli, glory; *haiþi, field, heath; *wasti, garment; *frijôndi, f., friend; *fraistubni, temptation.

Note 1. Like mawi (for the change of w into u, s. § 42), whose inflection corresponds to that of bandi, inflects also þiwi, þiujôs, maid-servant.

2. I-Declension.

§ 99. The i-declension contains only masculins and feminins. Both genders properly ought to inflect precisely alike. But this is the case in the pl. only, while the sg. of the masculins has the gen. and dat. after the analogy of the a-declension.

§ 99. The i-declension includes only masculine and feminine nouns. Both genders should technically inflect the same way. However, this is true only in the plural; in the singular, masculine nouns follow the patterns of the a-declension for the genitive and dative cases.

Masculins.

§ 100. Paradim: balgs, wine-skin (proethnic Germanic balgi-z).

§ 100. Paradim: bags, wine skin (proethnic Germanic balgi-z).

Sing.	N.	balgs	Plur.	N.	balgeis
	G.	balgis		G.	balgê
	D.	balga		D.	balgim
	A.	balg		A.	balgins
	V.	balg

§ 101. The number of masculins inflecting like balgs is not very great; e. g., gasts, guest; gards, house; muns, thought; mats, meat, food; saggws, song; sauþs, saudis, sacrifice; brûþ-faþs (d), bridegroom; staþs (d), sted, place.

§ 101. The number of masculine nouns that inflect like balgs is not very large; for example, gasts, guest; gards, house; muns, thought; mats, meat, food; saggws, song; sauþs, saudis, sacrifice; brûþ-faþs (d), bridegroom; staþs (d), sted, place.

Note 1. Words not occurring in the nom., dat., acc. pl. can not with certainty be referd to this declension (cp. § 91, n. 1). In many cases, however, we can infer from the remaining Germanic languages to what declension they belong. Accordingly, the word saiws, sea, lake, belongs[Pg 44] here; and, particularly, a number of verbal abstracts like qums, arrival; drus, fall; wlits, face; runs (gen. runis), a running; grêts, weeping; krusts, gnashing.

Note 2. The s of the nom. is dropt according to § 78, n. 2; e. g., ur-runs, ur-runsis; drus, drusis; baúr, baúris (< baíran, to bear), sun.

Note 3. naus, a ded person, is explaind according to the rules for w (§ 42); nom. pl. naweis, acc. pl. nawins; so, also, the acc. and voc. sg. nau.

Note 4. For wêgs and aiws, s. § 91, n. 5; for the acc. pl. andins, s. § 92, n. 1.

Feminins.

§ 102. Paradim: ansts, favor (proethnic Germanic ansti-z).

Sing.	N.	ansts	Plur.	N.	ansteis
	G.	anstais		G.	anstê
	D.	anstai		D.	anstim
	A.	anst		A.	anstins
	V.	anst

§ 103. A great number of feminins belong to this class. Exampls: qêns, woman, wife; dails, deal; wêns, hope; nauþs, nauþais, need; siuns, sight; sôkns, serch; taikns, token; fahêþs, fahêdais, joy; magaþs (þ), maid; fadreins, generation, family; arbaiþs (d), work; asans, harvest; ahaks, duv; those in -duþs, -duþais (perhaps -dûþs; cp. § 15, n. 1): mikilduþs, greatness; managduþs, abundance; ajukduþs, eternity; gamainduþs, communion.

Very numerous ar the verbal abstracts which may be formd from every strong verb by means of the dental suffix t (þ, d); e. g., gaskafts, creation; þaúrfts, need; ganists, salvation; fralusts, loss; gakusts, test; gabaúrþs, birth; gataúrþs, destruction; manasêþs (d), world; dêþs, deed; gahugds, thought.

There are many verbal nouns that can be formed from each strong verb using the dental suffix t (þ, d); for example, gaskafts, creation; þaúrfts, need; ganists, salvation; fralusts, loss; gakusts, test; gabaúrþs, birth; gataúrþs, destruction; manasêþs (d), world; dêþs, deed; gahugds, thought.

Note 1. Here belong also the abstracts in -eins, -ôns, -ains, derived from the weak verbs of the I., II., and III. Weak Conjugations, respectivly; e. g., naseins (< nasjan), salvation; laiseins, doctrin; háuheins, a 'heightening', hense praise; galaubeins, belief; naiteins, blasfemy; laþôns (< laþôn), invitation; salbôns, salv, ointment; mitôns, consideration; þulains (< þulan), suffering, patience; libains, life.—But those in -eins hav the nom. and gen. pl. according to the ô-declension. Thus, for exampl:

Note 1. This includes the forms ending in -eins, -ôns, -ains, which come from the weak verbs of the I., II., and III. Weak Conjugations, respectively; for example, naseins (< nasjan), salvation; laiseins, doctrine; háuheins, a 'heightening', hence praise; galaubeins, belief; naiteins, blasphemy; laþôns (< laþôn), invitation; salbôns, salv, ointment; mitôns, consideration; þulains (< þulan), suffering, patience; libains, life.—However, those ending in -eins have the nominative and genitive plural according to the ô-declension. So, for example:

Sing.	N.	naiteins	G.	naiteinais	D.	naiteinai	A. V.	naitein
Plur.	N.	naiteinôs	G.	naiteinô	D.	naiteinim	A.	naiteinins.

So in one exampl also the dat. pl.: unkaúreinôm; II. Cor. XI, 8.—The pl. of the abstracts in -ôns, -ains is regular: mitôneis, mitônê, etc.

So in one example, the data. pl.: unkaúreinôm; II. Cor. XI, 8.—The plural of the abstracts in -ôns, -ains is regular: mitôneis, mitônê, etc.

Note 2. Whether words ar f. or m. is doutful when they do not occur in a distinctiv case; as, lists, craftiness; fulleiþs (or fulleiþ, n.), fulness.

Note 2. Whether words are feminine or masculine is unclear when they do not appear in a specific case; for example, lists, craftiness; fulleiþs (or fulleiþ, n.), fulness.

[Pg 45]

Note 3. The s of the nom. is dropt according to § 78, n. 2; e. g., us-stass, us-stassais, resurrection; garuns, -runsais, street.

Note 4. haims, village, forms its pl. according to the ô-declension: haimôs, etc.

Note 4. haims, village, makes its plural according to the ô-declension: haimôs, etc.

3. U-Declension.

Masculins and Feminins.

§ 104. The masculins and feminins of the u-declension ar identical in form. Paradim: sunus, sun.

§ 104. The masculine and feminine forms of the u-declension are the same. Paradigm: sunus, sun.

Sing.	N.	sunus	Plur.	N.	sunjus
	G.	sunáus		G.	suniwê
	D.	sunáu		D.	sunum
	A.	sunu		A.	sununs
	V.	sunu

§ 105. Further exampls: (a) masculins; e. g., áirus, messenger; asilus, ass; dauþus, deth; wulþus, glory; hûhrus, hunger; þaúrnus, thorn; haírus, sword; liþus, lim; lustus, lust; magus, boy; faírƕus, world; fôtus, foot; stubjus, dust; wrêþus, flock (§ 7, n. 3); in -assus (Kluge, Stammbildg., § 137 et seq.): draúhtinassus, warfare; ibnassus, evenness; þiudinassus, kingdom; in -ôdus, -ôþus (Kluge, Stammbildg., § 134); e. g., auhjôdus, tumult; gabaúrjôþus, plezure.

(b) The only feminins ar certainly only handus, hand; kinnus, cheek; waddjus, wall (cp. Beitr., 16, 318¹), and perhaps asilus (if ὄνου in Lu. XIX, 30. Joh. XII, 15, means she-ass).

(b) The only feminine forms are definitely only handus, hand; kinnus, cheek; waddjus, wall (cp. Beitr., 16, 318¹), and maybe asilus (if ὄνου in Lu. XIX, 30. Joh. XII, 15, means she-ass).

The gender of sum is doutful; as, qaírnus, mil; flôdus, flud; luftus, air.

The gender of sum is doubtful; as, qaírnus, mil; flôdus, flud; luftus, air.

Note 1. Foren words like aggilus, angel; sabbatus, sabbath, fluctuate in the pl. between the u- and i-decl.; s. § 120, n. 1.

Note 2. There is a notewurthy fluctuation between u and au (aú? cp. § 24, n. 4) in the terminations of the sing. All cases of this kind hav been collected by Leo Meyer in his 'Got. Spr.', p. 574. au occurs for u: nom. sunaus; Lu. IV, 3; faírƕaus; Gal. VI, 14 (in cod. B = faírƕus in cod. A); Bartimaiaus; Mt. X, 46; —acc. handau; Mk. VII, 32; þiudinassau; Lu. IX, 27; haírau; Rom. XIII, 4 (in A = haíru in Cod. Car.); —voc. sunau (often), magau; Lu. II, 48.

Reversely we find u for au: gen. dauþus; Lu. I, 79; wulþus; Rom. IX, 23; apaustaulus; II. Cor. XII, 12 (in A = apaustaulaus in B); dat. wulþu; Lu. IX, 26; Paítru; Gal. II, 7 (in A = Paítrau in B).

From the great number of exampls, however, we infer that the abuv paradim is by all means the regular one; the deviations just mentiond ar merely owing to confusion on the part of later copyists. When a word[Pg 46] occurs in two manuscripts, it generally has the correct form in one. Especially in Cod. Amb. A and in the gospel of Lu. the u-decl. is confused in this way. Cp. Beitr., 18, 280¹.

From the numerous examples, we can conclude that the above paradigm is definitely the standard one; the deviations just mentioned are simply due to confusion on the part of later copyists. When a word[Pg 46] appears in two manuscripts, it usually has the correct form in one of them. This confusion is especially evident in Cod. Amb. A and in the gospel of Lu. See Beitr., 18, 280¹.

Neuters.

§ 106. The word faíhu, muney (orig. 'catl', = OHG. fihu) is the only neuter sb. of this class which occurs in several cases in the singular. No n. pl. is found.

§ 106. The word faíhu, muney (originally 'catl', = OHG. fihu) is the only neuter noun of this category that appears in several cases in the singular. There is no neuter plural found.

N.	faíhu
G.	[faíháus]
D.	faíháu
A.	faíhu

Note 1. Also gairu, sting, is n. It occurs only in the nom. sg. (II. Cor. XII, 7 in A, as a gloss to hnûþô).—The sb. leiþu, fruit-wine, probably belongs here too; only the acc. sg. leiþu occurs (Lu. I, 15); cp. Gallée (§ 223, n. 1), I, p. 38.—The acc. sg. sihu, a gloss to the neuter sigis, victory, in Cod. B I. Cor. XV, 57, is probably miswritn for sigu (because the i in sihu would hav becum aí) which may also belong to a masculin (nom. sg. *sigus = OHG. sigu). But cp. J. Schmidt, 'Idg. Neutra', 153.

Note 2. The gen. faíháus has been inferd from the m. (f.) and from the adv. gen. filaus (§ 131, n. 3).

B. N-DECLENSION (WEAK DECLENSION).

1. Masculins.

§ 107. Paradim: guma, man.

§ 107. Paradim: gum, person.

Sing.	N.	guma	Plur.	N.	gumans
	G.	gumins		G.	gumanê
	D.	gumin		D.	gumam
	A.	guman		A.	gumans

§ 108. Like guma inflect a great many masculins; e. g., staua, judge; hana, cock; skula, detter; mêna, moon; atta, father; ahma, spirit; blôma, flower; milhma, cloud; hliuma, hearing; weiha, priest; swaíhra, father-in-law; magula, litl boy; pl. brôþrahans, brothers (J. Schmidt, 'Idg. Neutra', 16); —bandja, prisoner; haúrnja, trumpeter; fiskja, fisher; timrja, carpenter; arbja, heir; wilja, wil; manamaúrþrja, (man-)murderer; waúrstwja, workman.

§ 108. Like guma inflects a lot of masculine words; for example, staua, judge; hana, cock; skula, daughter; mêna, moon; atta, father; ahma, spirit; blôma, flower; milhma, cloud; hliuma, hearing; weiha, priest; swaíhra, father-in-law; magula, little boy; pl. brôþrahans, brothers (J. Schmidt, 'Idg. Neutra', 16); — bandja, prisoner; haúrnja, trumpeter; fiskja, fisher; timrja, carpenter; arbja, heir; wilja, want; manamaúrþrja, (man-)murderer; waúrstwja, workman.

Note 1. aba, man, has the gen. pl. abnê, dat. pl. abnam; of aúhsa, ox, occurs the gen. pl. aúhsnê. Cp. the neuters in § 110, n. 1. Onse (I. Cor. IX, 9) we meet with the acc. pl. aúhsununs which either stands for aúhsuns (according to § 80, n. 1; cp. Anz. fda. 6, 120) or for aúhsnuns (Beitr., 8, 115; 12, 543; Brgm., I, 203).

Note 2. The long stems in -ja do not contract the ji of the gen. and dat. sg. into ei (s. § 44, n. 1); hense, bandja, gen. bandjins, dat. bandjin.

[Pg 47]

2. Neuters.

§ 109. Paradim: haírtô, hart.

Sing.	N.	haírtô	Plur.	N.	haírtôna
	G.	haírtins		G.	haírtanê
	D.	haírtin		D.	haírtam
	A.	haírtô		A.	haírtôna

§ 110. Like haírtô inflect but few substantivs: augô, ey; ausô, ear; barnilô, litl child; auga-daúrô, window; þaírkô, hole, ear of a needl; kaúrnô, corn; sigljô, seal. Cp. J. Schmidt, 'Indog. Neutra', 106 et seq.

§ 110. Like haírtô inflect but few nouns: augô, eye; ausô, ear; barnilô, little child; auga-daúrô, window; þaírkô, hole, eye of a needle; kaúrnô, corn; sigljô, seal. Cp. J. Schmidt, 'Indog. Neutra', 106 et seq.

Also the weak adjectivs (§ 132).

Also the weak adjectives __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Note 1. Irregular forms occur in the pl. of the neuters namô, name, and watô, water. The sg. inflects like haírtô. Paradim:

Note 1. Irregular forms appear in the plural of the neuter words namô, name, and watô, water. The singular inflects like haírtô. Paradigm:

Sing.	N.	namô	G.	namins	D.	namin	A.	namô
Plur.	N.	namna	G.	namnê	D.	namnam	A.	namna.

The pl. of watô occurs only in the dat. watnam. Cp. § 108, n. 1.

Note 2. To the dat. sg. sunnin which occurs (twice) in the frase: at sunnin urrinnandin (Mk. IV, 6. XVI, 2), belongs perhaps a neuter sunnô (not a m. sunna), beside the f. sunnô, sun (§ 112).—Cp. Mahlow, 'Die langen vocale a, e, o', p. 156, and Sievers' comments on this in the appendix to the 3d G. edition of this grammar.

Note 3. The word gajukô which was formerly regarded as n., is f., 'a female cumpanion'. Cp. Bernhardt's 'Vulfila', comment on Phil. IV, 3.

Note 3. The word gajukô, which was previously considered a noun, is now feminine, 'a female companion'. See Bernhardt's 'Vulfila', comment on Phil. IV, 3.

3. Feminins.

§ 111. The feminins of the n-declension ar divided into two classes: stems in -ôn- and -ein-. Their inflection is the same. Paradims: tuggô, tung; managei, multitude.

§ 111. The feminine nouns of the n-declension are divided into two classes: stems in -ôn- and -ein-. Their inflection is the same. Paradigms: tuggô, tung; managei, multitude.

Sing.	N.	tuggô	managei
	G.	tuggôns	manageins
	D.	tuggôn	managein
	A.	tuggôn	managein
Plur.	N.	tuggôns	manageins
	G.	tuggônô	manageinô
	D.	tuggôm	manageim
	A.	tuggôns	manageins

§ 112. Like tuggô inflect many substantivs; as, qinô, woman, wife; ûhtwô, dawn; swaíhrô, mother-in-law; azgô, ashes; gatwô, street; staírnô, star; wikô, week; sunnô, sun (cp. § 110, n. 2); —arbjô, heiress; brunjô, brestplate; tainjô, basket; niþjô, female cuzin; raþjô, account.

Note 1. Also the feminins of the weak adjectivs inflect like tuggô (§ 132).

[Pg 48]

§ 113. Nearly all substantivs inflecting like managei ar derived from adjectivs. Such an abstract in -ei may be formd from every adjectiv, hense the great number of these words; e. g., diupei, depth; laggei, length; bleiþei, mercy; mikilei, greatness; braidei, bredth; frôdei, wisdom; hardu-haírtei, hard-hartedness; drugkanei, drunkenness; sum can not be referd to corresponding adjs., but they likewise denote a state; e. g., þaúrstei, thirst; magaþei, maidenhood. But very few hav a concrete meaning; as, aiþei, mother; þramstei, locust; kilþei, womb; marei, sea; ƕaírnei, skul.

§ 113. Almost all nouns that inflect like managei are derived from adjectives. An abstract noun in -ei can be formed from any adjective, which is why there are so many of these words; for example, diupei, depth; laggei, length; bleiþei, mercy; mikilei, greatness; braidei, breadth; frôdei, wisdom; hardu-haírtei, hard-heartedness; drugkanei, drunkenness; some cannot be traced back to corresponding adjectives, but they similarly indicate a state; for example, þaúrstei, thirst; magaþei, maidenhood. However, very few have a concrete meaning; like aiþei, mother; þramstei, locust; kilþei, womb; marei, sea; ƕaírnei, skull.

Note 1. There is a close resemblance between adjectival abstracts in -ei and the verbal abstracts in -eins (cp. § 103, n. 1); e. g., háuhei, height (< háuhs), but háuheins, a heightening, praise (< háuhjan). Both hav the acc. sg. háuhein.

In one case there is confusion. In Jo. X, 33 we meet with a gen. sg. wajamêreins (nom. wajamêreins, blasfemy) from which it is customary to infer a nom. wajamêrei, tho in its meaning such a form is impossibl.

In one case, there is confusion. In Jo. X, 33 we encounter a gen. sg. wajamêreins (nom. wajamêreins, blasfemy) from which it is customary to infer a nom. wajamêrei, though in its meaning such a form is impossible.

Note 2. In Cod. B. three nominativs sg. in -ein ar found: liuhadein, illumination; II. Cor. IV, 4 (liuhadeins in A; comp. this passage in Bernhardt's 'Vulfila'); wiljahalþein, favor; Col. III, 25 (wanting in A); gagudein, piety; I. Tim. IV, 8 (gagudei in A).

Note 2. In Cod. B, there are three singular nominatives ending in -ein: liuhadein, illumination; II. Cor. IV, 4 (liuhadeins in A; see this passage in Bernhardt's 'Vulfila'); wiljahalþein, favor; Col. III, 25 (missing in A); gagudein, piety; I. Tim. IV, 8 (gagudei in A).

Note 3. The comparativs, the superlativs in -ma, and the prs. participls form their feminin like managei (cp. § 132, n. 4).

C. MINOR DECLENSIONS.
(REMAINS OF CONSONANTAL DECLENSIONS.)

§ 114. Nouns in -r denoting relationship. The words brôþar, brother; daúhtar, daughter; swistar, sister; fadar, father, hav replaced their old consonantal inflection in the nom., acc., and dat. pl. with the forms of the u-declension (§ 104). Paradim:

Sing.	N.	brôþar	Plur.	brôþrjus
	G.	brôþrs		brôþrê
	D.	brôþr		brôþrum
	A.	brôþar		brôþruns

Note. Cp. the cpd. brôþru-lubô, brotherly luv (§ 88^a, n. 3; § 210, n. 1).

§ 115. The present participls in Gothic inflect like weak adjectivs (§ 133). An older (substantival) inflection, however, persists with sum participls uzed substantivly. Paradim: nasjands, savior.

[Pg 49]

Sing.	N.	nasjands	Plur.	nasjands
	G.	nasjandis		nasjandê
	D.	nasjand		nasjandam
	A.	nasjand		nasjands
	V.	nasjand		—

Furthermore: fijands, fiend; frijônds, frend (> frijôndi, § 98), daupjands, the Baptist; mêrjands, preacher; bisitands, neighbor; talzjands, teacher; -waldands, ruler (all-w., the Almighty; garda-w., master of the house); fraweitands, avenger; fraujinônds, ruler; midumônds, mediator; gibands, giver. Cp. Zs. fdph., 5, 315.

§ 116. A number of feminins following in sum cases the i-decl. (ansts, § 102) appear in others as short forms which ar remains of an old consonantal inflection. Paradim: baúrgs, (burg), town, city.

Sing.	N.	baúrgs	Plur.	N.	baúrgs
	G.	baúrgs		G.	baúrgê
	D.	baúrg		D.	baúrgim
	A.	baúrg		A.	baúrgs

Like baúrgs inflect also alhs, templ; spaúrds, race-course; brusts, brest; dulþs, feast; waíhts, thing; miluks, milk; mitaþs (d), mezure.

Like baúrgs inflect also alhs, temple; spaúrds, racecourse; brusts, brest; dulþs, feast; waíhts, thing; miluks, milk; mitaþs (d), measure.

The word nahts, night, inflects in the sg. like baúrgs, in the pl. only the dat. nahtam is found. Cp. nahta-mats, § 88^a, n. 3.

Note 1. waíhts and dulþs chiefly follow the i-declension; hense, g. sg. waíhtais, dulþais. According to the cons. declension occur onse each the dat. sg. dulþ and acc. pl. waíhts. Beside waíhts there is a n. nom. sg. waíht in the combination ni-waíht, nothing.

Note 1. Waíhts and dulþs mainly follow the i-declension; hence, genitive singular: waíhtais, dulþais. According to the consonant declension, the dative singular is dulþ and the accusative plural is waíhts. Besides waíhts, there is a neuter nominative singular waíht in the phrase ni-waíht, meaning nothing.

§ 117. Masculins with short (consonantal) cases: manna, man; mênôþs, month; reiks, ruler; weitwôds, witness (cp. § 74, n. 2). But in point of inflection they ar not fully alike.

(1) manna follows in sum cases the n-decl. (guma, § 107). These cases ar here put in Italics:

Sing.	N.	manna	Plur.	N.	mans, mannans
	G.	mans		G.	mannê
	D.	mann		D.	mannam
	A.	mannan		A.	mans, mannans

Note 1. To manna belongs the cpd. *alamans (all men), found in the dat. pl. alamannam (Skeir.) only; also the neuter gaman (cumpanion, cumpany) which inflects, however, in all the extant forms (nom. acc. sg. gaman, dat. sg. gamana, dat. pl. gamanam) precisely like waúrd (§ 93).

Note 2. In composition the stem mana- (man-) appears; s. § 88^a, n. 3.

[Pg 50]

(2) mênôþs and reiks follow in the g. sg. the a-decl.: mênôþis, reikis, but in the dat. sg. the short forms mênôþ and reik (Eph. II, 2) occur. In the nom. acc. pl. the short forms mênôþs and reiks ar uzed; gen. pl. reikê. In the dat. pl. mênôþum, but reikam.—Beside the nom. sg. weitwôds there occur the acc. sg. weitwôd and the g. pl. weitwôdê.

(2) mênôþs and reiks follow in the genitive singular of the a-declension: mênôþis, reikis, but in the dative singular the short forms mênôþ and reik (Eph. II, 2) occur. In the nominative and accusative plural the short forms mênôþs and reiks are used; genitive plural reikê. In the dative plural mênôþum, but reikam.—Alongside the nominative singular weitwôds there are also the accusative singular weitwôd and the genitive plural weitwôdê.

Note 3. The g. sg. mênôþis (Neh. VI, 15) is not quite certain; Löbe red mênôþs.

Note 3. The g. sg. mênôþis (Neh. VI, 15) is not completely certain; Löbe read mênôþs.

Note 4. Here belongs also the nom. bajôþs, dat. bajôþum, both (s. § 140, n. 1).

§ 118. The neuter fôn, fire, has this form in the nom. acc. sg., but funins in the gen., and funin in the dat.—No plural occurs. Cp. § 12, n. 3.

Note 1. Concerning the neuter genitivs guþs and hatis, s. § 94, n. 3, and § 94, n. 5, respectivly.

APPENDIX.
DECLENSION OF FOREN WORDS.

§ 119. A number of foren words from the Latin and Greek wer fully adopted into the Gothic language thru commercial and political intercourse, so that their inflection is the same as that of purely Gothic words; e. g., pund, n., pound; marikreitus, m., perl; Krêks, m., Greek; karkara, f., 'carcer'; alêw, n., oil; kaisar, m., Cæsar.

§ 119. Several foreign words from Latin and Greek were fully incorporated into the Gothic language through trade and political interaction, so their inflection is the same as that of completely Gothic words; for example, pund, n., pound; marikreitus, m., pearl; Krêks, m., Greek; karkara, f., 'prison'; alêw, n., oil; kaisar, m., Cæsar.

§ 120. A second portion of foren words wer at a later period forced on the Gothic language by Christianity and especially by the version of the Bible. To these belong for the most part proper nouns which ar stil felt to be foren elements and hav but imperfectly adopted the Gothic inflection. For their treatment in Gothic no fixt rules can be givn. Sumtimes they retain their Greek inflection, sumtimes they take either similar or arbitrarily formd case-endings.—Cp. Bernhardt's 'Vulfila', p. XXVIII, and especially M. H. Jellinek, 'Beitr. zur erklärung der german. flexion' (Berlin 1891), pp. 76-84.

§ 120. A second set of foreign words was later introduced into the Gothic language by Christianity, particularly through the Bible translation. These mostly include proper nouns that are still seen as foreign elements and have only partially adopted Gothic inflection. There are no fixed rules for their treatment in Gothic. Sometimes they keep their Greek inflection, and other times they take on similar or randomly formed case endings.—See Bernhardt's 'Vulfila,' p. XXVIII, and especially M. H. Jellinek, 'Beitr. zur erklärung der german. flexion' (Berlin 1891), pp. 76-84.

Note 1. Most consistent is the treatment of the Gr. masculins in -ος, Lt. -us, which inflect in Gothic according to the u-decl. (§§ 104, 105); e. g., Paítrus, Barþaúlaúmaius, Teitus, aípiskaúpus, ἐπίσκοπος; apaústaúlus, ἀπόστολος; aggilus, ἄγγελος; sabbatus, sabbath. But only in the sg. pl. forms follow mostly the i-decl.; e. g., apaústaúleis, sabbatins, aggileis, aggilê beside aggiljus.

[Pg 51]

Note 2. Greek case-endings ar retaind in the neuters alabalstraún, ἀλάβαστρον; praitôriaún, πραιτώριον, etc.; Israêleitês has the nom. pl. Israêleitai = Ἰσραηλῖται; Rom. IX, 4; or (with Gothic inflection) Israêleiteis; II. Cor. XI, 22.

Note 2. Greek case endings are retained in the neuter words alabalstraún, ἀλάβαστρον; praitôriaún, πραιτώριον, etc.; Israêleitês has the nominative plural Israêleitai = Ἰσραηλῖται; Rom. IX, 4; or (with Gothic inflection) Israêleiteis; II. Cor. XI, 22.

Note 3. The following exampl may illustrate arbitrary inflection. The Gr. ἐπιστολή is represented in Goth. by aípistaúlê (nom. sg.). But the dat. sg. is aípistaúlein, the dat. pl. aípistaúlêm, and the acc. pl. aípistaúlans.

Note 3. The following example may illustrate arbitrary inflection. The Greek word ἐπιστολή is represented in Gothic as aípistaúlê (nominative singular). However, the dative singular is aípistaúlein, the dative plural is aípistaúlêm, and the accusative plural is aípistaúlans.

CHAP. II. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVS.

§ 121. In Gothic, as in all other Germanic languages, adjectivs hav two kinds of inflection, the strong and the weak. The strong inflection is the original one corresponding to that of the cognate languages, the weak originated on Germanic soil. Every normal adj. may hav both a strong and a weak inflection. The distinction is a syntactic one: the weak form is employd after the articl (rarely in other positions), the strong form in all other cases, especially when the adj. is uzed predicativly, or attributivly without the articl. Cp. Zs. fda., 18, 17-43.

§ 121. In Gothic, just like in all other Germanic languages, adjectives have two types of inflection: the strong and the weak. The strong inflection is the original one that corresponds to those of related languages, while the weak form developed on Germanic territory. Every normal adjective can have both a strong and a weak inflection. The distinction is syntactic: the weak form is used after the article (rarely in other positions), while the strong form is used in all other cases, especially when the adjective is employed predicatively or attributively without the article. Cp. Zs. fda., 18, 17-43.

A. STRONG ADJECTIVS.

§ 122. The strong inflection of adjectivs is in part the same as the vocalic (or strong) inflection of the substantivs with which it was originally identical. In Germanic, however, sum cases of the adj. hav adopted the pronominal inflection, so that the identity between the adjectival inflection and that of the substantivs is now confined to certain cases. The nom. and acc. sg. of the neuter gender hav two forms of the same value, a substantival and a pronominal one (in -ata). The latter, however, is not uzed predicativly.

§ 122. The strong inflection of adjectives is partly the same as the vocalic (or strong) inflection of the nouns with which it was originally identical. In Germanic, however, some cases of the adjective have adopted the pronominal inflection, so the similarity between the adjectival inflection and that of the nouns is now limited to certain cases. The nominative and accusative singular forms of the neuter gender have two forms of the same value, a noun-like and a pronoun-like one (in -ata). However, the latter is not used predicatively.

The Gothic adjectiv, like the substantiv, has three vocalic declensions: (1) Adjectivs of the a-declension which correspond to the substantival a-declension in the m. and n. (§ 89 et seq.) and in the f. of the ô-declension (§ 96 et seq.).—A subdivision is formd by the ja-stems, just as in the case of the corresponding substantivs. (2) Adjectivs of the i-declension which correspond to the substantivs in §§ 99-103. (3) Adjectivs of the u-declension belonging to the substantivs in §§ 104-106.

[Pg 52]

Classes (2) and (3), however, contain but very few remains in Gothic. The few adjectival ja-stems hav in most of the inflectional cases past over to the 1st class, so that the normal strong declension of the adjectivs in Gothic embraces only the a-declension and its subdivision, the ja-stems.

Classes (2) and (3), however, contain very few remains in Gothic. The few adjectival ja-stems have, in most of the inflectional cases, moved over to the 1st class, so that the standard strong declension of the adjectives in Gothic includes only the a-declension and its subdivision, the ja-stems.

Note. Subject to strong inflection ar all pronouns (except sama and silba, § 132, n. 3), the cardinal numbers, inasmuch as they inflect adjectivly, and anþar, the second; also the adjectivs of a more general meaning: alls, all; ganôhs, enuf; halbs, half; midjis, 'medius'; fulls, ful.

§ 123. Paradim of the strong adjectival declension: blinds, blind. The pronominal forms differing from the inflection of the corresponding substantivs ar in the following paradim put in Italics:

§ 123. Paradigm of the strong adjectival declension: blinds, blind. The pronoun forms that differ from the inflection of the corresponding nouns are in the following paradigm put in italics:

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	blinds	blind, blindata	blinda
	G.	blindis		blindaizôs
	D.	blindamma		blindai
	A.	blindana	blind, blindata	blinda
Plur.
	N.	blindai	blinda	blindôs
	G.	blindaizê		blindaizôs
	D.	blindaim		blindaim
	A.	blindans	blinda	blindôs

§ 124. Here belong most of the extant adjectivs; e. g., hails, hole, helthy; siuks, sik; juggs, yung; triggws, tru, faithful; swinþs, strong; ubils, evil; aiweins, eternal; haiþiwisks, wild; mahteigs, mighty; ansteigs, gracious; manags, much, many; môdags, angry; handugs, wise.—Also adjectiv pronouns; as, meins, mine, my; þeins, thine, thy; seins, his; jains, yun; the superlativs (§ 137) and pps. pass.; as, numans, taken; nasiþs, saved (cp. § 134).

Note 1. According to § 78, n. 2, the s of the nom. sg. is dropt, (1) after s; e. g., swês, swêsis, own; gaqiss, gaqissis, consenting. (2) after r preceded by a short vowel: anþar, the second, the other; unsar, our; izwar, your; ƕaþar, which of the two. Accordingly, the nom. pl. warai must hav had a nom. sg. war, wary.

Note 2. The rules for the hardening of final soft spirants (79) must be noted; as, frôþs, frôdis, wise; gôþs, gôdis, good (§ 74); liufs, liubis, dear; daufs, daubis, def (§ 56, n. 1).

Note 3. Stems having a w before the case-endings ar subject to the rule for final w (§ 42) in the nom. sg. m. and n. The three words of this kind occur only in other cases. Therefore the noms. pl. fawai, qiwai, usskawai suggest as noms. sg. m. and n. faus, fau, few; qius, qiu, alive;[Pg 53] usskaus, usskau, wakeful. According to usskawjan (to awake, § 42, n. 2), also usskaws might be supposed insted of usskaus. For lasiws, s. § 42, n. 1.

Note 4. The pronominal adjectivs in -ar: unsar, izwar, anþar, ƕaþar, hav in the n. sg. only the shorter forms: unsar, izwar, etc.

Note 4. The pronoun adjectives ending in -ar: unsar, izwar, anþar, ƕaþar only have the shorter forms in the nominative singular: unsar, izwar, etc.

§ 125. Adjectiv-stems with ja before the endings (ja-stems) hav most of their forms like the paradim blinds. Only in few forms a change is caused by the j. As in the case of nouns, we distinguish between short and long adjectival ja-stems.

§ 125. Adjective stems with ja before the endings (ja-stems) have most of their forms like the paradigm blinds. Only in a few forms is a change caused by the j. As with nouns, we differentiate between short and long adjectival ja-stems.

Paradim of a short ja-stem: midjis, midl:

Paradigm of a short ja-stem: midjis, midl:

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	midjis	midi, midjata	midja
	G.	midjis		midjaizôs
	D.	midjamma		midjai
	A.	midjana	midi, midjata	midja
Plur.
	N.	midjai	midja	midjôs
	G.	midjaizê		midjaizô
	D.	midjaim		midjaim
	A.	midjans	midja	midjôs

§ 126. As regards inflection, the m. midjis is closely related to the substantiv harjis (§§ 90. 92), the n. midi to the substantiv kuni (§§ 93. 95). The fem. midja shows no deviation whatever.

Only a small number of adjectivs belong to this class: aljis, another; sunjis, tru; ga-wiljis, unanimous; unsibjis, criminal; -fraþjis, minded (only in grinda-, sama-fr.); ƕarjis (§ 160); also those whose stems end in a vowel (§ 44, c): niujis, new; -tôjis, doing (as, ubiltôjis, evil-doing).

Note 1. On account of the small number of these adjs. sum forms of the abuv paradim ar not extant. Thus, the short form of the neuter midi is givn in conformity with the long stems (§ 127), and that of niujis would be niwi; only niujata occurs; the n. of -tôjis would be -taúi (§ 26, a).

Note 2. The adj.-stem frija-, free, which occurs in the f. sg. frija, frijaizôs, frijai, frija, and in the m. forms, acc. sg. frijana, nom. pl. frijai, acc. frijans, has a contracted nom. sg. m. freis (for frijis). Also the gen. sg., if extant, would be freis.

Note 2. The adjective stem frija-, free, appears in the feminine singular forms frija, frijaizôs, frijai, frija, and in the masculine forms, accusative singular frijana, nominative plural frijai, accusative frijans. It also has a shortened masculine nominative singular freis (instead of frijis). The genitive singular, if it exists, would also be freis.

Note 3. The nom. sg. f. of niujis is niuja (contrary to þiwi, § 98, n. 1).

§ 127. The long ja-stems inflect in the pl. like midjis. Paradim wilþeis (stem wilþja-), wild, in the sg.:

§ 127. The long ja-stems change in the plural like midjis. Paradigm wilþeis (stem wilþja-), wild, in the singular:

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	wilþeis	wilþi, wilþjata	wilþi
	G.	[wilþeis or wilþjis?]		[wilþjaizôs]
	D.	wilþjamma		wilþjai
	A.	wilþjana	wilþi, wilþjata	wilþja

[Pg 54]

§ 128. The infl. of the m. is related to that of the sb. haírdeis (§§ 90. 92), the infl. of the f. to that of bandi (§§ 96. 98; only wôþi occurs; II. Cor. II, 15). None of the few adjs. of this class occurs in the gen. sg.; wilþjis (Rom. XI, 24) probably stands for wilþjins; s. § 132, n. 1.

Further exampls: alþeis, old; faírneis, old; aírzeis, astray; wôþeis, sweet.

Below is a short piece of text (5 words or fewer). Modernize it into contemporary English if there's enough context, but do not add or omit any information. If context is insufficient, return it unchanged. Do not add commentary, and do not modify any placeholders. If you see placeholders of the form __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_x__, you must keep them exactly as-is so they can be replaced with links. Further examples: alþeis, old; faírneis, old; aírzeis, astray; wôþeis, sweet.

§ 129. According to § 122, only remains of the original adjs. of the i- and u-declension ar extant in Gothic, viz.: nom. sg. of all genders, acc. sg. n., and gen. sg. m. and n. All other extant cases hav past over to the inflection of the ja-stems (§§ 125-127). The same rule applies to the weak forms (§ 132, n. 1).

Note. The old form of the gen. sg. [m.] n. is seen in skeiris (Skeir. 45) for the i-decl., in filaus (§ 131, n. 3) for the u-decl.; the latter, of course, is only a partial proof for the adj.

§ 130. The adjectival i-stems ar connected with the substantivs balgs, ansts (§§ 99-103). Exampls: hrains, clean; gamains, common; brûks, uzeful; analaugns, hidn; anasiuns, visibl; andanêms, agreeabl; andasêts, abominabl; sêls, kind (unsêls, wicked); suts, sweet; skeirs, clear; gafáurs, sober (unfáurs, talkativ); aljakuns, of different kind. The paradim hrains inflects thus:

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	hrains	hrain [hrainjata]	hrains
	G.	[hrainis]		[hrainjaizos]
	D.	hrainjamma		hrainjai
	A.	hrainjana	hrain [hrainjata]	hrainja
Plur.
N.		hrainjai	hrainja	hrainjôs
		etc.

Note 1. A gen. sg. f. as wel as a longer n. form (like hrainjata) ar not extant.

Note 1. A genitive singular feminine form as well as a longer noun form (like hrainjata) are not available.

Note 2. A word may with certainty be referd to this class, (1) if it occurs in the nom. sg. f. (hrains), (2) if besides the nom. sg. m. and n. also cases with j ar found. But if only the nominativs m. and n. (hrains, hrain) occur, the word may inflect like blinds (123); if only j-cases (as, hrainjamma) ar found, it may decline like wilþeis, midjis (§§ 127. 125).—Other adjectivs, however, ar without sufficient proof, but for other considerations, included in this class; e. g., skauns, beutiful; auþs, desolate, waste; hauns, base; bleiþs, merciful; gadôfs, fit; *mêrs, famous (in[Pg 55] wailamêr, nom. sg. n.).—Cp. Kluge, Stammbildg., §§ 178. 197. 229-231; Beitr., 14, 167; 15, 489; Brgm., II, 287.

Note 3. Adjectival i-stems may be inferd from adverbs in -iba (§ 210); e. g., arniba, gatêmiba.

§ 131. The adjectival u-stems ar related to the substantivs sunus (fem. handus), faíhu (§§ 104-106). Exampls: hardus, hard; qaírrus, meek; þaúrsus, dry; tulgus, stedfast; manwus, redy; aggwus, narrow; aglus, difficult; seiþus, late; þlaqus, tender; twalibwintrus, twelv years (lit. winters) old. Paradim hardus:

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	hardus	hardu, hardjata	hardus
	G.	[hardaus?]		[hardjaizôs]
	D.	[hardjamma]		[hardjai]
	A.	hardjana	hardu, hardjata	hardja
Plur.
N.		hardjai	[hardja]	hardjôs
		etc.

Note 1. Whether adjectivs belong to this class is seen from the nom. sg. in which the abuv adduced exampls occur (the only f. forms being þaúrsus and tulgus; Beitr., 15, 570; 16, 318). laushandus, empty-handed; hnasqus, soft; kaúrus, hevy, ar merely inferd from their ja-cases.

Note 1. Whether adjectives belong to this class can be seen from the nominative singular in which the above examples occur (the only feminine forms being þaúrsus and tulgus; Beitr., 15, 570; 16, 318). laushandus, empty-handed; hnasqus, soft; kaúrus, heavy, are merely inferred from their ja-cases.

Note 2. From the adv. glaggwuba (§ 210) an adj. glaggwus (§ 68) can be inferd.

Note 3. The original adj. *filus, much, is preservd in Goth. in the nom. acc. sg. n. uzed substantivly and adverbially: filu, the gen. filaus being uzed adverbially.

Note 3. The original adjective *filus, much, is preserved in Gothic in the nominative accusative singular neuter used as a noun and adverb: filu, with the genitive filaus used adverbially.

B. WEAK ADJECTIVS.

§ 132. The weak declension of adjectivs is fully identical with the weak or n-declension of nouns (§§ 107-112). But it must be noticed that the f. of the weak adj. inflects like the paradim tuggô (cp. § 112, n. 1).—Exampl of an inflected weak adj. (blinds, § 123):

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	blinda	blindô	blindô
	G.	blindins		blindôns
	D.	blindin		blindôn
	A.	blindan	blindô	blindôn
Plur.
	N.	blindans	blindôna	blindôns
	G.	blindanê		blindônô
	D.	blindam		blindôm
	A.	blindans	blindôna	blindôns

[Pg 56]

Note 1. Like blinda inflect all weak adjectivs. Of ja-stems: nom. sg. niuja, niujô, niujô (cp. § 126), wilþja (§ 127); —i-stems: hrainja, hrainjô; u-stems: hardja, hardjô (cp. § 129 et seq.).—In the cases with i (gen. dat. sg. m. n.) of the long stems in -ja- (-i-, -u-) the forms with -ji- appear as the regular ones (as in the sb., § 108, n. 2; contrary to § 44, c); cp. wilþji(n)s; Rom. XI, 24; unhrainjin; Mk. IX, 25. Lu. VIII, 29; unsêljin; Mt. V, 39. Jo. XVII, 15. But beside unsêljins; Eph. VI, 16 (in A) unsêleins (in B); beside faírnjin; Mk. II, 21. Lu. V, 36, also faírnin; II. Cor. VIII, 10. IX, 2.

Note 2. Sum adjectivs occur only in the weak forms; as, usgrudja, idle, despondent; alaþarba, poor; usfaírina, blameless; inkilþô, pregnant, and a few more of which sum ar probably to be regarded as substantivs (cp. Zs. fda., 18, 41, note).—The weak form ainaha (no strong form occurs), only, has in Lu. VIII, 42 the nom. sg. f. ainôhô (cp. Beitr., 12, 203) which is certainly incorrect for ainahô.

Note 2. Some adjectives only appear in their weak forms; for example, usgrudja, idle, despondent; alaþarba, poor; usfaírina, blameless; inkilþô, pregnant, and a few others that are probably better viewed as nouns (see Zs. fda., 18, 41, note).—The weak form ainaha (no strong form exists), only, has in Lu. VIII, 42 the nominative singular feminine ainôhô (see Beitr., 12, 203) which is definitely incorrect for ainahô.

Note 3. All ordinals except 1st and 2nd (cp. § 146), and the prns. sama and silba (§ 156) follow the weak inflection only.

Note 4. Lastly, the prs. ptcs. (§ 133), comparativs (§ 136), and the superlativs in -ma (§ 139) inflect exclusivly like weak adjs. But all these words hav the f. according to the paradim managei (§ 113, n. 3).

C. DECLENSION OF THE PARTICIPLS.

§ 133. The present participl has lost its strong inflection and declines like a weak adj., but with the f. in -ei (§ 132, n. 4). Only the nom. sg. m. has frequently both the strong and the weak inflection. Paradim gibands, giving:

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	gibands	gibandô	gibandei
	N.	gibanda	gibandô	gibandei
	G.	gibandins		gibandeins
	D.	gibandin		gibandein
	A.	gibandan	gibandô	gibandein
Plur.
	N.	gibandans	gibandôna	gibandeins
	G.	gibandanê		gibandeinô
	D.	gibandam		gibandeim
	A.	gibandans	gibandôna	gibandeins

Note 1. Concerning the shorter inflection of sum participls uzed substantivly, s. § 115.

§ 134. The prt. ptc. pass., like an ordinary adj., follows the strong and weak inflection; e. g., the pp. of the stv. giban:

§ 134. The participle, like a regular adjective, follows the strong and weak inflection; for example, the past participle of the verb giban:

Strong:	m.	gibans	n.	giban, gibanata	f.	gibana
Weak:	m.	gibana	n.	gibanô	f.	gibanô

[Pg 57]

The pp. of the wv. nasjan:

Strong:		nasiþs	n.	nasiþ, nasidata	f.	nasida
Weak:		nasida	n.	nasidô	f.	nasidô

Note. Concerning the interchange between þ and d in the pp. of the weak verbs, s. § 74.

D. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVS.

1. COMPARATIV.

§ 135. The comparativ degree of adjectivs in Gothic is formd by means of two suffixes, -iz- and -ôz-, to which the terminations of the weak adjectivs ar added.

§ 135. The comparative degree of adjectives in Gothic is formed using two suffixes, -iz- and -ôz-, to which the endings of the weak adjectives are added.

The formation with the suff. -iz- is more general than the other. It is found in adjs. of all kinds; e. g., managiza (< manags, a-stem), alþiza (< alþeis, §§ 127. 128), hardiza (< hardus, § 131).—But the suffix -ôz- occurs in a-stems only: frôdôza (< frôþs), swinþôza (< swinþs).

Note. The adj. juggs, yung, has the compar. jûhiza (according to § 50, n. 1). Its superlativ is not extant.

§ 136. The comparativs inflect exactly like weak adjectivs, but the f. ends in -ei (§ 132, n. 4):

Sing.	N.	m.	frôdôza	n.	frôdôzô	f.	frôdôzei
	G.		frôdôzins				frôdôzeins,

etc., like the prs. ptc. (§ 133).

2. SUPERLATIV.

§ 137. The superlativ degree, like the comparativ, is formd in two ways, in -ist- or in -ôst-; e. g., managists (< manags), armôsts (< arms, poor). The inflection of the superlativs is precisely the same as that of ordinary adjectivs—strong and weak.

§ 137. The superlative degree, like the comparative, is formed in two ways, using -ist- or -ôst-; for example, managists (< manags), armôsts (< arms, poor). The inflection of the superlatives is exactly the same as that of regular adjectives—strong and weak.

Note. No rule can be givn for the appearance of the ô or the i in the suffix, except that the ô-form occurs only with a-stems. We may suppose that a word which forms the compar. by means of i, has i in the superl. also, and that, in like manner, the ô-forms correspond to each other. This supposition, however, is only founded on a few extant exampls.

Note. There’s no definite rule for when to use the ô or the i in the suffix, except that the ô-form only appears with a-stems. We can assume that a word that forms the comparative with i also has i in the superlative, and similarly, the ô-forms match each other. However, this assumption is only based on a few existing examples.

3. IRREGULAR COMPARISON.

§ 138. The lack of comparison of sum adjectivs is supplied by comparativs and superlativs with a corresponding meaning, but without a positiv:

§ 138. The absence of comparative forms for some adjectives is compensated by comparatives and superlatives that have a similar meaning, but without a positive form.

[Pg 58]

gôþs (d), good	Compar.	batiza	Superl.	batists
ubils, evil	"	waírsiza	"	—
mikils, great	"	maiza	"	maists
leitils, litl	"	minniza	"	minnists
sineigs, old	"	—	"	sinista.

§ 139. A superlativ with an m-suffix is found in six words, which ar derived from adverbial stems and appear without a positiv. The m-suffix is either simpl: fru-ma, innu-ma, aúhu-ma, or compound: af-tuma, if-tuma, hlei-duma.

§ 139. A superlative with an m-suffix is found in six words, which are derived from adverbial stems and appear without a positive. The m-suffix is either simple: fru-ma, innu-ma, aúhu-ma, or compound: af-tuma, if-tuma, hlei-duma.

Two of them hav assumed a comparativ meaning: aúhuma, higher; hleiduma, left (ἀριστερός); the others hav a superlativ or an intensiv signification: aftuma, the last; iftuma, the next; innuma, the inmost; fruma, the first.

Two of them have taken on a comparative meaning: aúhuma, higher; hleiduma, left (ἀριστερός); the others have a superlative or intensive significance: aftuma, the last; iftuma, the next; innuma, the inmost; fruma, the first.

These words follow the weak inflection, but hav the f. in -ei, exactly like the comparativs.

These words follow the weak inflection but have the f. in -ei, just like the comparatives.

Note. Sum superlativs in -ma ar compared anew in the uzual manner: aftumists, the last; aúhumists, oftener than aúhmists (cp. OE. ŷmest, Sievers-Cook, OE. Gr., § 314, n. 3), the highest; frumists, the first.—The forms hindumists, hindmost, spêdumists, last (< *spêþs, beside spêdiza, spêdists), suggest the missing hinduma and spêduma. Also miduma, midst, midumônds, mediator, point to a form *miduma, midl (cp. OE. meodume, midmest).

Note. The superlatives ending in -ma are compared in the usual way: aftumists, the last; aúhumists, more often than aúhmists (compare OE. ŷmest, Sievers-Cook, OE. Gr., § 314, n. 3), the highest; frumists, the first.—The forms hindumists, hindmost, spêdumists, last (*spêþs, alongside spêdiza, spêdists), imply the missing hinduma and spêduma. Additionally, miduma, midst, midumônds, mediator, indicate a form *miduma, midl (compare OE. meodume, midmest).

CHAP. III. NUMERALS.

1. CARDINALS.

§ 140. The first three numerals ar declinabl in all cases and genders.

§ 140. The first three numbers can be declined in all cases and genders.

1. ains, n. ain and ainata, f. aina, inflects entirely like a strong adj. (blinds, § 123). Plural forms mean only, alone. No weak inflection is found. (§ 122, n. 1).

2.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	twai	twa	twôs
	G.	twaddjê		—
	D.	twaim		twaim
	A.	twans	twa	twôs
3.	N.	—	þrija	—
	G.	þrijê		—
	D.	þrim		—
	A.	þrins	þrija	þrins

The nom. of the m. and f., which is not extant, may with certainty be givn as þreis.

The name for the m. and f., which no longer exists, can certainly be given as þreis.

[Pg 59]

Note. The definit dual number 'both', ἀμφότεροι, is renderd by bai, which inflects like twai. The extant forms ar nom. m. bai, dat. baim, acc. bans, nom. acc. n. ba.—There occurs also an extended form with the same meaning, its inflection being that of a consonantal substantiv (§ 117, n. 4): nom. bajôþs, dat. bajôþum.

§ 141. The numerals from 4 to 19 ar of one gender. Extant ar: fidwôr, 4; fimf, 5; saíhs, 6; sibun, 7; ahtau, 8; niun, 9; taíhun, 10; ainlif (§ 56, n. 1), 11; twalif, 12; fidwôrtaíhun, 14; fimftaíhun, 15. These numerals ar uzed uninflected, but may take an inflected gen. and dat. according to the i-declension (§ 99 et seq.). Thus, fidwôr, dat. fidwôrim; niun, gen. niunê; taíhun, dat. taíhunim; ainlif, dat. ainlibim; twalif, gen. twalibê, dat. twalibim.

Note. For fidwôr appears fidur- (s. § 24, n. 2) in cpds.: fidurfalþs, fourfold; fidurdôgs, time of four days; fidurragineis, tetrarch. Cp. Beitr., 6, 394; Brgm., III, 11.

§ 142. The tens from 20 to 60 ar formd by means of the pl. tigjus (< *tigus, a decad), preceded by the units. tigjus inflects regularly like sunus (§ 104). The object counted is always givn in the gen.—twai tigjus, 20; *þreis tigjus, 30 (extant in gen. þrijê tigiwê, acc. þrins tiguns), fidwôr tigjus, 40; fimf tigjus, 50; saíhs tigjus, 60.

§ 143. From 70 to 100 -têhund takes the place of tigjus: sibuntêhund, 70; ahtautêhund, 80; niuntêhund, 90; taíhuntêhund and taíhuntaíhund, 100. The numerals in -têhund ar substantivs which ar as a rule indeclinabl. Onse (Lu. XV, 7) we meet with an inflected gen. sg.; in niuntêhundis jah niunê garaíhtaizê.—Cp. Brgm., III, 40.

§ 143. From 70 to 100 -hundred replaces tens: seventy, 70; eighty, 80; ninety, 90; one hundred and one hundred, 100. The numerals in -hundred are nouns that are generally indeclinable. Once (Lu. XV, 7) we encounter an inflected gen. sg.; in ninety hundred and nine parts.—See Brgm., III, 40.

§ 144. The hundreds ar formd by means of the plural of a neuter hund (a hundred). The following ar extant: twa hunda, 200; þrija hunda, 300; fimf hunda, 500; niun hunda, 900.

§ 144. The hundreds are formed by using the plural of a neuter hund (a hundred). The following are present: two hundreds, 200; three hundreds, 300; five hundreds, 500; nine hundreds, 900.

§ 145. þûsundi, 1000, is a f. sb. (inflecting like bandi, § 96), with a gen. pl.; several thousands ar exprest by þûsundjôs.—Onse (Ezra II, 14) occurs a n. pl. twa þûsundja. Cp. ahd. gr., § 275. OE. Gr., § 327, and Mahlow, 'Die langen Vocale', p. 98.

The extant thousands ar: twôs þûsundjôs, 2000; .g. þûsundjôs, 3000; fidwôr þûsundjôs, 4000; fimf þûsundjôs,[Pg 60] 5000; taíhun þ., 10000; miþ twaim tigum (dat.) þûsundjô (gen.), with 20000.

The existing thousands are: two thousand, 2000; three thousand, 3000; four thousand, 4000; five thousand,[Pg 60] 5000; ten thousand, 10000; with twenty thousand (dat.) thousand (gen.), with 20000.

Note (to §§ 141-145). The numerals ar very often denoted by letters (cp. § 1, n. 2). Therefore so many words for numerals ar wanting.

2. ORDINALS.

§ 146. The first two ordinals differ in point of stem from the corresponding cardinals. 1. m. fruma, n. frumô, f. frumei (s. § 139), and the superl. frumists, first (§ 139, n. 1). 2. anþar, second, other, inflects like a strong adj. (§ 122, n. 1; § 124, ns. 1. 4).—All subsequent ordinals ar derived from the cardinals and inflect like weak adjectivs (§ 132, n. 3). The extant ordinals ar: þridja, 3d; *fimfta (only in 15th), fifth; saíhsta, 6th; ahtuda, 8th; niunda, 9th; taíhunda, tenth; fimftataíhunda, 15th. Only the second component is declined: dat. sg. (in jêra) fimftataíhundin; Lu. III, 1.

3. OTHER NUMERALS.

§ 147. A distributiv numeral is tweihnai, two apiece, two-and-two, extant in the dat. f. tweihnaim and acc. f. tweihnôs.

§ 147. A distributive numeral is tweihnai, two each, two by two, existing in the dat. f. tweihnaim and acc. f. tweihnôs.

Note. All other distributivs ar exprest by means of the cardinals along with ƕazuh, ƕarjizuh (§§ 164. 165) or the prep. bi; as (insandida ins) twans ƕanzuh, two and two; Lu. X, 1; bi twans; I. Cor. XIV, 27.

§ 148. Multiplicativs ar formd by means of the adj. falþ-: ainfalþs, onefold; fidurfalþs, fourfold; taíhuntaíhund-falþs, hundredfold; managfalþs, manifold.

§ 148. Multiplicatives are formed using the prefix falþ-: ainfalþs, onefold; fidurfalþs, fourfold; taíhuntaíhund-falþs, hundredfold; managfalþs, manifold.

§ 149. Numeral adverbs answering the question 'how many times', 'how often'? ar exprest by the dat. sg. sinþa or by the dat. pl. sinþam (nom. sg. sinþs, time, lit. 'a going') preceded by the cardinals: ainamma sinþa, onse; twaim sinþam, twice; þrim sinþam, thrice; fimf s., five times; sibun s., seven times.—With an ordinal numeral: anþaramma sinþa, a second time.

§ 149. Numeral adverbs that answer the question 'how many times' or 'how often' are expressed by the dat. sg. sinþa or by the dat. pl. sinþam (nom. sg. sinþs, time, literally 'a going') preceded by the cardinals: ainamma sinþa, once; twaim sinþam, twice; þrim sinþam, thrice; fimf s., five times; sibun s., seven times.—With an ordinal numeral: anþaramma sinþa, a second time.

Note. Also the n. þridjô, a third time, is uzed adverbially (II. Cor. XII, 14).

Note. Also the n. þridjô, a third time, is used as an adverb (II. Cor. XII, 14).

[Pg 61]

CHAP. IV. PRONOUNS.

1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS WITHOUT GENDER (REFLEXIV).

§ 150.

		1. Person.	2. Person.	Reflexiv.
Sing.	N.	ik	þu	—
	G.	meina	þeina	seina
	D.	mis	þus	sis
	A.	mik	þuk	sik
Dual	N.	wit	—	—
	G.	ugkara	igqara	seina
	D.	ugkis	igqis	sis
	A.	ugkis, ugk	igqis	sik
Plur.	N.	weis	jus	—
	G.	unsara	izwara	seina
	D.	uns, unsis	izwis	sis
	A.	uns, unsis	izwis	sik

Note 1. ugkis, igqis, etc., are also speld uggkis, iggqis; cp. § 67, n. 1.

Note 2. The nom. du. 2nd pers. is not extant; it was undoutedly jut. For jus (jûs?), s. § 15, n. 1.

§ 151. From the stems of these pronouns adjectivs ar derived, the so-calld possessiv pronouns. 1st pers.: m. meins, n. mein, meinata; f. meina, my (mine); 2nd pers.: þeins, thy (thine); refl. seins, his. Plurals: 1st pers. unsar, our; 2nd pers. izwar, your. The only extant dual poss. prn. is igqar, the 1st pers. would be ugkar.

§ 151. From the stems of these pronouns, adjectives are derived, known as possessive pronouns. 1st person: m. mine, n. my, myself; f. mine, my (mine); 2nd person: yours, thy (thine); refl. his, his. Plurals: 1st person ours, our; 2nd person yours, your. The only remaining dual possessive pronoun is us, the 1st person would be we.

Note 1. The inflection of these pronominal adjectivs is identical with that of the strong adj.; concerning unsar, izwar, cp. § 124, ns. 1 and 4.—No weak inflection occurs.

Note 2. The reflexiv *seins occurs only in the gen., dat., acc.; insted of the nominativs of all genders and numbers the genitivs of the prn. of the 3d pers. (is, izôs; izê, izô; § 152) ar employd.

2. PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON.

§ 152.

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	is, he	ita, it	si, she
	G.	is		izôs
	D.	imma		izai
	A.	ina	ita	ija
Plur.
	N.	eis	ija	[ijôs]
	G.	izê		izô
	D.	im		im
	A.	ins	[ija]	ijôs

Note. The acc. and gen. pl. n. and the nom. pl. f. ar not extant, but the inferd forms ar undoutedly correct.

Note. The accusative and genitive plural neuter forms and the nominative plural feminine forms are not available, but the inferred forms are undoubtedly correct.

[Pg 62]

3. DEMONSTRATIV PRONOUNS.

§ 153. The simpl dem. prn. sa, sô, þata is uzed both as dem. prn., this, that (for the Gr. οὗτος or αὐτός), and, with a weakend force, as articl, the. The latter uze is predominant.—The neuter sing. (like the interrog., § 159) has preservd the instrumental case.

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	sa	þata	sô
	G.	þis		þizôs
	D.	þamma		þizai
	A.	þana	þata	þô
Instr.		—	þê	—
Plur.
	N.	þai	þô	þôs
	G.	þizê		þizô
	D.	þaim		þaim
	A.	þans	þô	þôs

Note 1. The final as of the dissyllabic forms ar dropt in combination with enclitics beginning with a vowel; cp. § 4, n. 1.—For þei from *þa-ei, s. § 157, n. 2.

Note 2. The instr. n. þê is preservd only in the combinations bi-þê, du-þê (duþþê), jaþ-þê (§ 62, n. 3), þêei (§ 157, n. 1), and, like þana (in þanamais, þanaseiþs), before a comparativ (= E. 'the' in 'the more').

§ 154. A compound demonstrativ pronoun is formd by affixing the enclitic particl -uh to the simpl demonstrativ. Cp. § 24, n. 2. Its meaning is always that of the simpl sa uzed demonstrativly, this, that (= Gr. οὗτος or αὐτός).—It inflects thus:

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	sah	þatuh	sôh
	G.	þizuh		[þizôzuh]
	D.	þammuh		[þizaih]
	A.	þanuh	þatuh	[þôh]
Plur.
	N.	þáih	[þôh]	[þôzuh]
	G.	[þizêh]		[þizôh]
	D.	[þaimuh]		[þaimuh]
	A.	[þanzuh]	[þôh]	[þôzuh]

Note 1. The forms in square brackets ar not extant.

Note 1. The forms in square brackets are not available.

Note 2. The instr. n. þêh occurs only in the adv. bi-þêh.

Note 2. The abbreviation þêh appears only in the adverb bi-þêh.

§ 155. A defectiv demonstrativ pronoun hi- (nom. *his = is, § 152), this, occurs only in temporal frases in the[Pg 63] dativ m. and n. himma and in the acc. m. hina, n. hita; e. g., himma daga, to-day; und hina dag, to this day; und hita, til now.

§ 156. jains (concerning the vowel ai, cp. § 20, n. 4), n. jainata, f. jaina (yon), that, inflects like a strong adj. (blinds, § 124).

Like weak adjectivs inflect silba, self, and sama, same, or with the articl: sa sama, the same (cp. § 132, n. 3).

4. RELATIV PRONOUNS.

§ 157. A simpl relativ pronoun is not found in the Gothic language. A relativ prn. of the 3d pers. is formd from the simpl demonstrativ pronoun by affixing the particl ei which, when uzed independently, has the force of a conjunction, that, in order that. This relativ pronoun inflects as follows:

§ 157. A simple relative pronoun is not found in the Gothic language. A relative pronoun of the third person is formed from the simple demonstrative pronoun by adding the particle ei which, when used independently, functions as a conjunction, that, in order that. This relative pronoun inflects as follows:

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	saei	þatei	sôei
	G.	þizei		þizôzei
	D.	þammei		þizaiei
	A.	þanei	þatei	þôei
Instr.		—	þêei	—
Plur.
	N.	þaiei	þôei	þôzei
	G.	þizêei		[þizôei]
	D.	þaimei		þaimei
	A.	þanzei	þôei	þôzei

Note 1. The instr. n. þêei is uzed only as a conjunction.

Note 1. The instr. n. þêei is used only as a conjunction.

Note 2. Beside þatei occurs þei, which is employd, however, only in combination with ƕah (§ 164, n. 1), and (like þatei) as a conjunction, that. Cp. Beitr., 4, 467; 6, 402; Zs. fda., 29, 366 et seq.

Note 3. Insted of the nom. sg. saei, m., sôei, f., also izei, m., sei (i. e. si-ei, § 10, n. 2), f., (formd from the 3d pers. of the pers. prn., § 152) ar employd. The form sei occurs even more frequently than sôei. Sumtimes izei stands as nom. pl. m. (for eizei which is not found); e. g., þai izei bimaitanai sind; Gal. VI, 13.—For izei the form izê is often found; cp. § 17, n. 1.

Note 4. Concerning the change of final s before ei into z, s. § 78, c.

§ 158. When a relativ clause refers to a prn. of the 1st or 2nd pers., the relativ particl is affixt to the respectiv pers. prn. Thus, ikei, who (1st pers. sg.); —þuei, who; þuzei, to whom (as in Mk. I, 11); þukei, whom (2nd pers. sg.); —juzei, who; izwizei, to whom (2nd pers. pl.).

§ 158. When a relative clause refers to a pronoun of the 1st or 2nd person, the relative particle is attached to the respective person pronoun. Thus, ikei, who (1st person singular); —þuei, who; þuzei, to whom (as in Mk. I, 11); þukei, whom (2nd person singular); —juzei, who; izwizei, to whom (2nd person plural).

[Pg 64]

5. INTERROGATIV PRONOUNS.

§ 159. The interrogativ pronoun ƕas, who? (= Lt. quis), is formd from the simpl interrogativ stem ƕa-. A substantiv following ƕas occurs always in the genitiv; e. g., ƕa mizdônô, τίνα μισθόν; Mt. V, 46.

§ 159. The interrogative pronoun ƕas, who? (= Lt. quis), is formed from the simple interrogative stem ƕa-. A noun following ƕas always appears in the genitive; for example, ƕa mizdônô, τίνα μισθόν; Mt. V, 46.

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	ƕas	ƕa	ƕô
	G.	ƕis		[ƕizôs]
	D.	ƕamma		ƕizai
	A.	ƕana	ƕa	ƕô
Instr.		—	ƕê	—

Note 1. The gen. f. is not extant. The instr. occurs only in the neuter (cp. sa, § 153).

Note 2. ƕas has no plural; cp. however ƕanzuh, § 164, n.

Note 3. ƕas is also employd as an indefinit prn.; cp. § 162, n. 2.

§ 160. From stem ƕa- ar derived: ƕaþar, which of two?, and ƕarjis, which? A substantiv following is always put in the gen. Both words inflect like strong adjectivs—ƕaþar like anþar (cp. § 124, n. 1), ƕarjis like midjis (§ 125), f. ƕarja, the n. *ƕarjata like ƕarjatôh (§ 165).

§ 161. Compound interrogativs: ƕileiks, what sort of?, 'qualis?' (its correlativ being swaleiks, such, 'talis'), and ƕêlauþs, f. ƕêlauda, how great?, 'quantus?' (correlativ swalauþs, so great, 'tantus'). These words inflect like a strong adjectiv.

§ 161. Compound interrogatives: ƕileiks, what kind of?, 'qualis?' (its correlativ being swaleiks, such, 'talis'), and ƕêlauþs, f. ƕêlauda, how big?, 'quantus?' (correlativ swalauþs, so big, 'tantus'). These words inflect like a strong adjective.

Note. ƕeleiks (in Lu. I, 29), for ƕileiks, is probably miswritn (according to § 10, n. 5).

6. INDEFINIT PRONOUNS.

§ 162. The Goth. indefinit pronoun sums, f. suma, n. sum, sumata, sum (Gr. τις, τι), inflects like a strong adjectiv and is uzed adjectivly; with the meaning sum one, a certain one, it is also uzed substantivly.

§ 162. The Goth. indefinite pronoun sums, f. suma, n. sum, sumata, sum (Gr. τις, τι), inflects like a strong adjective and is used adjectivally; with the meaning someone, a certain one, it is also used substantively.

Note 1. An enumerativ expression is sums...sums (= Gr. ὁ μέν...ὁ δέ). In most cases uh (§ 24, n. 2) is added to the second sums, occasionally also to the first; as, sumai...sumáih, or sumáih...sumáih, sum ... others.

Note 2. Also the interrogativ ƕas (§ 159) is very often uzed as an indefinit prn., anyone.

§ 163. The enclitic particl -hun is uzed to form indefinit pronouns which occur only with the negativ particl ni. Their meaning is no one, none.

§ 163. The enclitic particle -hun is used to form indefinite pronouns that appear only with the negative particle ni. Their meaning is no one, none.

[Pg 65]

(a) The singular of manna, man (§ 117), with the suffix -hun means no one.—The extant forms ar:

n. ni mannahun,
d. ni mannhun,
g. ni manshun,
acc. ni mannanhun.

(b) ni ƕashun (< ƕas, § 159), uzed substantivly, no one. It occurs in the nom. sg. m. only.—An analogon to ƕashun is ƕanhun (< ƕan, § 214, n. 1).

(c) ni ainshun, the commonest indef. prn., is uzed substantivly (no one, none) and adjectivly (no, not any). A following sb. occurs always in the (partit.) gen.; e. g., ni ainshun þiwê, no servant; Lu. XVI, 3.—The declension of ainshun differs in sum cases from that of the simpl form ains (§ 140).

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	ainshun	ainhun	ainôhun
	G.	ainishun		—
	D.	ainummêhun		ainaihun
	A.	ainnôhun	ainhun	ainôhun
	A.	ainôhun	ainhun	ainôhun

Note. -hun is also affixt to the acc. sg. of the sb. ƕeila (§ 97, n. 2): ƕeilôhun, for an hour (ni ƕeilôhun, οὐδὲ πρὸς ὥραν; Gal. II, 5).

§ 164. 'Every' is renderd by affixing -uh to the interrogativ pronouns.

§ 164. 'Every' is made by adding -uh to the question pronouns.

(a) ƕazuh, every. A noun or prn. following takes the gen. Its inflection differs in part from that of the simpl form ƕas (§ 159):

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	ƕazuh	ƕah	ƕôh
	G.	ƕizuh		—
	D.	ƕammêh		—
	A.	ƕanôh	ƕah	—
Plur.
	A.	ƕanzuh	—	—

In the pl. only the acc. ƕanzuh occurs.

In the plural, only the accusative ƕanzuh appears.

Note 1. The indef. relativ 'whoever, whosoever' (Lt. quicunque) is renderd: (1) by ƕazuh saei or, with sa prefixt, saƕazuh saei. For saei also izei is found (§ 157, n. 3).—These forms ar uzed in the nom. sg. only, the nom. n. þataƕah þei (þei = þatei, § 157, n. 2) occurs twice: Jo. XV, 7. 16.—(2) by þisƕazuh followd by saei or ei in all cases; the first component, þis, remains uninflected: m. n. þisƕazuh saei, dat. þisƕammêh saei, acc. þisƕanôh saei; —nom. acc. n. þisƕah þei (or þatei), gen. þisƕizuh þei, dat. þisƕammêh þei.

[Pg 66]

Note 2. Here may be observd the adverbs: ƕêh (instr. of ƕazuh), at least, at any rate, only, and þisƕaduh þei, whithersoever, þisƕaruh þei, wheresoever (cp. ƕaþ, ƕar, § 213, n. 1).

§ 165. (b) ƕarjizuh, every, each.

ƕarjizuh, every, each.

Sing.		M.	N.	F.
	N.	ƕarjizuh	ƕarjatôh	—
	G.	ƕarjizuh		—
	D.	ƕarjammêh		—
	A.	ƕarjanôh	[ƕarjatôh]	ƕarjôh

Note. ƕarjizuh is also compounded with (uninflected) ain: ainƕarjizuh, every one, every, each, n. ainƕarjatôh, dat. ainƕarjammêh, etc.

Note. ƕarjizuh can also be combined with (uninflected) ain: ainƕarjizuh, everyone, every, each, n. ainƕarjatôh, dat. ainƕarjammêh, etc.

§ 166. Each of two is renderd by ƕaþaruh; it occurs only in the dat. ƕaþarammêh (Skeir. 46), for the evidently incorrect ƕaþaramma (cp. Bernhardt's comment on this passage); —also with ain- prefixt (cp. § 165, n. 1): ainƕaþaruh, each one of two (only ainƕaþarammêh occurs; Skeir. 41).

CHAP. V. CONJUGATION.

GENERAL REMARKS.

§ 167. The Gothic verb has the following forms:

§ 167. The Gothic verb has these forms:

1. Two voices, Activ and Midl. The Activ Voice alone has preservd a great variety of forms. The Midl Voice is retaind in but a few forms of the prs. indicativ and optativ, which occur, however, very often. The midl forms hav a passiv meaning. Therefore the Midl Voice is also calld Passiv or Medio-Passiv Voice.

1. Two voices, Active and Middle. The Active Voice alone has preserved a great variety of forms. The Middle Voice is retained in only a few forms of the present indicative and optative, which occur quite often, though. The middle forms have a passive meaning. Therefore, the Middle Voice is also called Passive or Medio-Passive Voice.

Note 1. The lost passiv forms ar supplied by the pp. along with the corresponding forms of waírþan or wisan; e. g., daupjada, he is baptized, but daupiþs was or warþ, he was baptized. Cp. Zs. fdph., 5, 409 et seq.

Note 1. The missing passive forms are provided by the pages along with the corresponding forms of waírþan or wisan; for example, daupjada, he is baptized, but daupiþs was or warþ, he was baptized. See Zs. fdph., 5, 409 et seq.

Note 2. The originally inchoativ verbs in -nan (§ 194) frequently hav a medial meaning (§ 194).

2. Two tenses, Present and Preterit (Perfect). The Preterit is the general tense for the past. The future is wanting; its place is mostly supplied by the present, seldom by means of auxiliary verbs (skulan, shal; haban, hav; duginnan, to begin).

2. Two tenses, Present and Past (Perfect). The Past is the main tense for talking about what happened. There isn't a clear future tense; it's mostly expressed using the present, and sometimes with auxiliary verbs (skulan, shal; haban, hav; duginnan, to begin).

3. Two complete moods, Indicativ and Optativ (also calld Subjunctiv). An Imperativ occurs only in the present; it has the second persons of all three numbers and a 1st pers. pl.—There ar but few instances of a 3d pers. sg. and[Pg 67] pl. imper. This is uzually exprest by the 3d pers. opt. But also the 2nd and 1st pers. imp. ar frequently exprest by the opt.

3. Two complete moods, Indicative and Optative (also called Subjunctive). An Imperative only appears in the present; it has the second person in all three numbers and a first person plural. There are only a few examples of a third person singular and plural imperative. This is usually expressed by the third person optative. However, the second and first person imperatives are often expressed using the optative.

4. Three numbers: Singular, Dual, and Plural. The 3d pers. du. is wanting.

4. Three numbers: Singular, Dual, and Plural. The 3rd person dual is missing.

5. The Present Infinitiv, the Present Participl with an activ meaning, and the Preterit Partic. with a passiv meaning.

5. The Present Infinitive, the Present Participle with an active meaning, and the Preterite Participle with a passive meaning.

§ 168. The Gothic verbs ar, from a Germanic point of view, divided according to the formation of the preterit in relation to the present into two chief classes:

§ 168. From a Germanic perspective, Gothic verbs are divided into two main categories based on how the past tense is formed in relation to the present tense:

I. Powerful Verbs.

The strong verbs do not form the preterit with an additional suffix, but by change of the radical vowel or by reduplication. Thus, we hav two subdivisions:

The strong verbs don't create the past tense with an extra suffix, but by changing the root vowel or by reduplication. So, we have two subdivisions:

1. Ablaut Verbs. The preterit of these verbs is formd without reduplication. It differs from the present only by a regular change of the radical vowel, the so-calld ablaut (cp. § 29); e. g., binda, I bind, band, I bound.

2. Reduplicating Verbs. The prt. has reduplication, but no ablaut; e. g., halda, I hold, haíhald, I held.

2. Reduplicating Verbs. The past tense has reduplication, but no vowel changes; e. g., halda, I hold, haíhald, I held.

3. Reduplicating Ablaut Verbs. A smaller number of verbs hav the prt. both with ablaut and reduplication; e. g., lêta, I let; laílôt, I let (prt.).

3. Reduplicating Ablaut Verbs. A smaller number of verbs have the past tense both with ablaut and reduplication; e.g., lêta, I let; laílôt, I let (past tense).

II. Weak Verbs.

The weak verbs form the preterit by the addition of a suffix beginning with a dental consonant; e. g., nasja, I save, nasida, I saved. This suffixal element, -da, was formerly regarded as a form of the verb 'do' (Germanic dôn), wherefore the weak prt. was also calld 'compound preterit'.

The weak verbs create the past tense by adding a suffix that starts with a dental consonant; for example, nasja, I save, nasida, I saved. This suffix, -da, used to be considered a form of the verb 'do' (Germanic dôn), which is why the weak past tense was also called 'compound past tense'.

The weak verbs (except a few) ar derivativ verbs. According to their formativ suffixes, which ar best preservd in the preterit forms, they ar divided into four classes: (1) Suffix i (in the present j): nasja, nasi-da. (2) Suffix ô: salbô, salbô-da. (3) Suffix ai (in the present in part obscured): haba, habai-da. (4) Suffix nô (in the present n): fullna, fullnô-da.

The weak verbs (except for a few) are derivative verbs. Based on their formative suffixes, which are best preserved in the past tense forms, they are divided into four classes: (1) Suffix i (in the present j): nasja, nasi-da. (2) Suffix ô: salbô, salbô-da. (3) Suffix ai (in the present somewhat obscured): haba, habai-da. (4) Suffix nô (in the present n): fullna, fullnô-da.

Note. The small number of verbs which can not be referd to the two chief classes must, according to this classification, be considerd 'irregular'.

Note. The small number of verbs that can't be categorized into the two main classes must, according to this classification, be considered 'irregular'.

[Pg 68]

I. STRONG VERBS.

A. INFLECTION OF THE STRONG VERBS.

§ 169. The inflection of the strong verbs (by means of personal endings) is the same in all three classes (§ 168). Therefore we first giv the paradims of inflection and then discuss the formation of the tense-stems (which is different in each class). As paradims may serv a reduplicating verb, haitan, to be calld, and two ablaut verbs, niman, to take, and biudan, to offer.

§ 170.

(a) Present (Activ).
Indicative.
Sing.	1.	nima	biuda	haita
	2.	nimis	biudis	haitis
	3.	nimiþ	biudiþ	haitiþ
Dual	1.	nimôs	biudôs	haitôs
Dual	2.	nimats	biudats	haitats
Plur.	1.	nimam	biudam	haitam
	2.	nimiþ	biudiþ	haitiþ
	3.	nimand	biudand	haitand
Optative.
Sing.	1.	nimau	biudau	haitau
	2.	nimais	biudais	haitais
	3.	nimai	biudai	haitai
Dual	1.	nimaiwa	biudaiwa	haitaiwa
Dual	2.	nimaits	biudaits	haitaits
Plur.	1.	nimaima	biudaima	haitaima
	2.	nimaiþ	biudaiþ	haitaiþ
	3.	nimaina	biudaina	haitaina
Imperative.
Sing.	2.	nim	biuþ	hait
Sing.	3.	nimadau	biudadau	haitadau
Dual	2.	nimats	biudats	haitats
Plur.	1.	nimam	biudam	haitam
	2.	nimiþ	biudiþ	haitiþ
	3.	nimandau	biudandau	haitandau
Infinitive.
		niman	biudan	haitan
Participl.
		nimands	biudands	haitands
[Pg 69]
(b) Preterit.
Indicative.
Sing.	1.	nam	bauþ	haíhait
	2.	namt	baust	haíhaist
	3.	nam	bauþ	haíhait
Dual	1.	nêmu	budu	haíhaitu
Dual	2.	nêmuts	buduts	haíhaituts
Plur.	1.	nêmum	budum	haíhaitum
	2.	nêmuþ	buduþ	haíhaituþ
	3.	nêmun	budun	haíhaitun
Optative.
Sing.	1.	nêmjau	budjau	haíhaitjau
	2.	nêmeis	budeis	haíhaiteis
	3.	nêmi	budi	haíhaiti
Dual	1.	nêmeiwa	budeiwa	haíhaiteiwa
Dual	2.	nêmeits	budeits	haíhaiteits
Plur.	1.	nêmeima	budeima	haíhaiteima
	2.	nêmeiþ	budeiþ	haíhaiteiþ
	3.	nêmeina	budeina	haíhaiteina
(c) Preterit Participl Passiv.
		numans	budans	haitans
(d) Medio-Passiv—Present.
Indicative.
Sing.	1.	nimada	biudada	haitada
	2.	nimaza	biudaza	haitaza
	3.	nimada	biudada	haitada
Plur.	1. 2. 3.	nimanda	biudanda	haitanda
Wishful thinking.
Sing.	1.	nimaidau	biudaidau	haitaidau
	2.	nimaizau	biudaizau	haitaizau
	3.	nimaidau	biudaidau	haitaidau
Plur.	1. 2. 3.	nimaindau	biudaindau	haitaindau

Note 1. biudan is subject to the rules for the final soft spirants (§ 79): imper. sg. biuþ, prt. bauþ (cp. § 374). Likewise giban, gif, gaf (cp. § 56).

Note 2. The termination of the 2nd pers. sg. prt. (-t) causes the change stated in the rule for consonants before dentals (§ 81). Final b of stems becums f: gaft (inf. giban); exampls for pt ar wanting: skôpt or skôft? (inf. skapjan); —g remains unchanged in magt (§ 66, n. 1), other exampls ar wanting; neither ar there any exampls for kt (wôkt or wôht? cp. § 58, n. 2); —dentals becum s: warst < waírþan, qast < qiþan (§ 71, n. 3), gastôst < standan, baust < biudan (§ 75, n. 1), bigast < gitan,[Pg 70] haíhaist < haitan (§ 69, n. 2).—The extant 2nd pers. prt. of saísô (inf. saian) is saísôst. On account of the scarcity of exampls it is uncertain whether all stems ending in a vowel had -st.—The 2nd pers. prt. of rinnan is rant (§ 80).

Note 3. Only one strong verb is found (twice) in the 3d pers. sg. imper.: atsteigadan, καταβάτω; Mt. XXVII, 42. Mk. XV, 32 (cp. § 186, n. 1). The 3d pers. pl. may be givn with certainty according to the weak verb (§ 192, n. 1).

Note 4. The dual forms of the verb occur very seldom. The 1st pers. du. opt. prt., nêmeiwa, etc., which is only givn according to the corresponding form of the prs. nimaiwa, is not found at all. Also the 2nd pers. du. opt. prt. is but an inferd form according to the anomalous wileits (§ 205).

Note 5. Concerning the irregular formation of the present of sum strong verbs with j, s. § 206, n.

B. TENSE-FORMATION OF THE STRONG VERBS.

1. Ablaut Verbs.

§ 171. The ablaut verbs form their tense-stems by a regular change of the radical vowel, the so-calld ablaut. The several ablaut-series and the conditions of their appearance wil be found givn in §§ 30-35. To each of these series belong ablaut verbs, and therefore six ablaut classes must be distinguisht. Each ablaut verb contains four ablaut vowels which appear in the formation of the verb in the following manner: (1) The first vowel belongs to the present and to what is connected with the present (prsp., inf., also medio-passiv). (2) The second vowel is that of the sg. prt. indic. (3) The third vowel appears in the du. and pl. prt. indic. and thruout the prt. opt. (4) The fourth vowel belongs to the pp.

In order to determin the inflection of a strong verb, it is customary to giv the following four forms (principal parts): (1) 1st pers. sg. prs. indic., or the prs. inf.; (2) 1st pers. sg. prt. indic.; (3) 1st pers. pl. prt. indic.; (4) the pp.

In order to determine the inflection of a strong verb, it's common to give the following four forms (principal parts): (1) 1st person singular present indicative, or the present infinitive; (2) 1st person singular past indicative; (3) 1st person plural past indicative; (4) the past participle.

In the following we arrange the ablaut verbs according to their classes.

In the following, we organize the ablaut verbs by their classes.

§ 172. Class I. Verbs of the first ablaut series: ei—ái—i (aí) (cp. § 30); e. g., greipa, graip, gripum, gripans, to gripe, seiz; i before h (ƕ) becums aí by breaking (§ 20): leiƕa, láiƕ, laíƕum, laíƕans, to lend.

[Pg 71]

Note 1. Like these inflect: deigan, to knead; steigan, to mount; gateihan, to show; þeihan, to thrive; þreihan, to throng; weihan, to fight; —beitan, to bite; dis-kreitan, to tear to pieces; ga-smeitan, to smear; -weitan (inweitan, to wurship; fraweitan, to punish); beidan, to wait; leiþan, to go; sneiþan, to cut; —weipan, to crown; dreiban, to drive; bi-leiban, to remain; sweiban, to cease; —reisan, to rize; skeinan, to shine; hneiwan, to decline, bow; speiwan, to spit.

Note 1. Like these, the following verbs inflect: deigan, to knead; steigan, to mount; gateihan, to show; þeihan, to thrive; þreihan, to throng; weihan, to fight; — beitan, to bite; dis-kreitan, to tear to pieces; ga-smeitan, to smear; -weitan (inweitan, to worship; fraweitan, to punish); beidan, to wait; leiþan, to go; sneiþan, to cut; — weipan, to crown; dreiban, to drive; bi-leiban, to remain; sweiban, to cease; — reisan, to rise; skeinan, to shine; hneiwan, to decline, bow; speiwan, to spit.

Note 2. The n of keinan (OHG. kînan), to germinate, occurs only in the prs. stem (cp. § 206, b); the pp. is kijans (only in uskijanata; Lu. VIII, 6). The prt. *kai, *kijum, has been replaced by a weak prt. of the IV. weak conjugation (keinôda, § 195, n. 2). Cp. Kluge, 'Germ. Conjug.', 143.

Note 3. The verb neiwan, to hav a quarrel against, occurs only in a sumwhat doutful exampl: naiw; Mk. VI, 19. Cp. Bernhardt, 'Vulfila', p. 282, and Zs. fdph., 7, 112. 484.

Note 3. The verb neiwan, to have a quarrel against, appears only in a somewhat questionable example: naiw; Mk. VI, 19. See Bernhardt, 'Vulfila', p. 282, and Zs. fdph., 7, 112. 484.

§ 173. Class II. Verbs of the second ablaut series: iu—au—u (aú)—u (aú) (cp. § 31); e. g., biuda, bauþ, budum, budans, to offer; with breaking (§ 24): tiuha, táuh, taúhum, taúhans, to draw, lead.

Note 1. Like tiuhan inflect: siukan, to be sick; biugan, to bend; driugan, to perform military service; liugan, to lie; þliuhan, to flee; —giutan, to pour; usþriutan, to trubl, vex; niutan, to enjoy; liudan, to grow; —dis-hniupan, to break to pieces; sliupan, to slip; af-skiuban, to shuv away; hiufan, to weep; driusan, to fall; kiusan, to choose; fra-liusan, to lose; kriustan, to gnash.

Note 1. Like tiuhan inflect: siukan, to be sick; biugan, to bend; driugan, to serve in the military; liugan, to lie; þliuhan, to flee; —giutan, to pour; usþriutan, to trouble, vex; niutan, to enjoy; liudan, to grow; —dis-hniupan, to break into pieces; sliupan, to slip; af-skiuban, to shove away; hiufan, to weep; driusan, to fall; kiusan, to choose; fra-liusan, to lose; kriustan, to gnash.

Note 2. The vowel of the prs. is irregular in lûka, lauk, lukum, lukans, to lock.

Note 2. The vowel of the present tense is irregular in lûka, lauk, lukum, lukans, to lock.

§ 174. Class III. Verbs of the third ablaut series: i (aí)—a—u (aú)—u (aú) (cp. § 32); e. g., binda, band, bundum, bundans, to bind; with breaking (§§ 20. 24): waírpa, warp, waúrpum, waúrpans, to throw, cast.

Note 1. Like these inflect: brinnan, to burn; du-ginnan, to begin; af-linnan, to depart; rinnan, to run; spinnan, to spin; winnan, to suffer; —trimpan, to tred; —fra-slindan, to devour; windan, to wind; hinþan, to cach; finþan, to find; þinsan, to draw; —stiggan (only by conjecture in Mt. V, 29), to sting; bliggwan, to beat (§ 68, 2); siggwan, to sing; sigqan, to sink; stigqan, to thrust; drigkan, to drink; —gildan, to be of value; swiltan, to die; hilpan, to help; filhan, to hide; wilwan, to rob; —baírgan, to hide, keep; gaírdan, to gird; waírþan, to becum; ga-þaírsan, to wither; swaírban, to wipe; ƕaírban, to walk; —þriskan, to thresh; ga-wrisqan, to bear fruit (these two only in the prs. tense, in I. Tim. V, 18. Lu. VIII, 14).

Note 2. According to its prs. tense, also briggan would belong here; s. § 208.

§ 175. Class IV. Verbs of the fourth ablaut series: i (aí)—a—ê—u (aú) (cp. § 33); e. g., nima, nam, nêmum,[Pg 72] umans, to take; with breaking (§§ 20. 24): baíra, bar, bêrum, baúrans, to bear.

Note 1. Like these inflect: qiman, to cum; ga-timan, to suit; stilan, to steal; ga-taíran, to tear; —brikan, to break (§ 33, n. 1).

Note 2. Here belongs also trudan, [traþ], [trêdum], trudans, to tred (ON. troða, trað, traðum, troðinn; in OHG. according to V.: trëtan, trat, trátum, trëtan). According to trudan, we should also write wulan, to boil (only prsp. wulandans occurs; Rom. XII, 11).

Note 2. Here also belongs trudan, [traþ], [trêdum], trudans, to tred (ON. troða, trað, traðum, troðinn; in OHG. according to V.: trëtan, trat, trátum, trëtan). Based on trudan, we should also write wulan, to boil (only prsp. wulandans occurs; Rom. XII, 11).

§ 176. Class V. Verbs of the fifth ablaut series: i (aí)—a—ê—i (aí) (cp. § 34); e. g., mita, mat, mêtum, mitans, to mezure; giba, gaf, gêbum, gibans, to giv.

Note 1. Here belong also wrikan, to persecute; rikan (found in the prs. only), to accumulate; ligan, to lie; ga-wigan, to move; saíƕan, to see (cp. § 34, n. 1); —hlifan, to steal; —bigitan, to get, obtain; sitan, to sit; fitan, to bear (children)?; widan, to bind; qiþan, to say; niþan, to help (?); —lisan, to gather; ga-nisan, to recuver; wisan, to remain.

Note 2. sniwan, to hasten, has sniwa, snau (§ 42), snêwum, sniwans. Onse occurs the prt. snauh (with additional h; cp. § 62, n. 4), onse sniwun for snêwun (§ 7, n. 3).—Like sniwan inflects probably diwan, to die, of which only the pp. (þata) diwanô occurs.

Note 3. The prt. sg. of itan is, irregularly, êt, not at; only the cpd. frêt (< fra-itan, to eat up; § 4, n. 1; § 7, b) is extant. Hense itan, êt, êtum, itans. Cp. the OHG. prts. âz frâz (ahd. gr., § 343, n. 5), ON. át. Möller, 'Engl. Studien', 3, 154.

Note 4. The n of fraíhnan, to ask, occurs only in the prs. stem: fraíhna, frah, frêhum, fraíhans (cp. § 206, b).

Note 5. The j in bidjan occurs in the prs. stem only: bidja, baþ, bêdum, bidans (cp. § 206, n.). Onse the prs. is found without j: usbida; Rom. IX, 3.

§ 177. Class VI. Verbs of the sixth ablaut series: a—ô—ô—a (cp. § 35); e. g., slaha, slôh, slôhum, slahans, to strike.

Note 1. Like slahan go: sakan, to quarrel; wakan, to wake; dragan, to carry, load; þwahan, to wash; hlaþan, to load; ga-daban, to becum, fit; ga-draban, to hew; graban, to dig; skaban, to shave; alan, to grow; malan, to grind; swaran, to swear; faran, to fare, go; us-anan, to expire. Sum of these verbs occur only in the prs.: wakan, dragan, alan, malan, faran.

Note 1. Like slahan go: sakan, to argue; wakan, to wake up; dragan, to carry, load; þwahan, to wash; hlaþan, to load; ga-daban, to become, fit; ga-draban, to cut; graban, to dig; skaban, to shave; alan, to grow; malan, to grind; swaran, to swear; faran, to travel, go; us-anan, to expire. Some of these verbs only appear in the present tense: wakan, dragan, alan, malan, faran.

Note 2. Sum verbs of this class hav j in the present stem, which is wanting in the prt. and pp.; e. g., hafjan, to heav, forms: hafja, hôf, hôfum, hafans. So do: fraþjan, to understand; hlahjan, to laf; skapjan, to shape, make; skaþjan, to do scath, to injure; wahsjan, to wax, grow. Doutful is the prs. form *garaþjan which is uzually inferd from the pp. garaþana (Mt. X, 30), to count.—Cp. § 206, n.

Note 3. The n of standan occurs only in the present stem (cp. § 206, b): standa, stôþ, stôþum. The pp. *staþans (ON. staðinn) is wanting; cp. Anz. fda., 14, 286.

[Pg 73]

2. Reduplicating Verbs.

§ 178. The preterit of the reduplicating verbs is formd by reduplication only, the radical vowel remaining unchanged. The reduplication consists of the initial consonant together with the constant reduplication vowel aí (short e; s. § 20); e. g., haita, I am calld, prt. haíhait; ƕôpa, I boast, prt. ƕaíƕôp. When the word begins with two consonants, only the first is repeated; e. g., fraisa, I tempt, prt. faífrais. The initial combinations st, sk, [sp], however, ar repeated together; e. g., (ga-)stalda, I possess, prt. staístald; skaida, I separate, prt. skaískaiþ. When the word begins with a vowel, only the reduplication vowel is prefixt; e. g., auka, I increase, prt. aíauk.

The pp. is formd without reduplication: haitans, fraisans, etc.

The pp. is formed without duplication: haitans, fraisans, etc.

§ 179. The reduplicating verbs may be divided into five classes according to their radical vowels: (1) a (â). (2) ê. (3) ai. (4) ô. (5) au. Sinse the vowel remains unchanged in the hole verb, it causes no change of inflection. Therefore the paradim haitan (givn in § 170) is sufficient for all classes.

The preterits of the following reduplicating verbs ar extant:

The past tense forms of the following reduplicating verbs are available:

(1) haldan, to hold; falþan, to fold; staldan, to possess; —fâhan, to cach (prt. faífâh, pl. faífâhum, pp. fâhans), hâhan, to hang (§ 62, n. 2).

(2) slêpan, to sleep (concerning the prt., cp. § 78, n. 3).

(3) af-aikan, to deny; fraisan, to tempt; haitan, to be calld; laikan, to leap; maitan, to cut off; skaidan, to separate.

(3) af-aikan, to deny; fraisan, to tempt; haitan, to be called; laikan, to leap; maitan, to cut off; skaidan, to separate.

(4) ƕôpan, to boast; flôkan, to lament.—The inf. belonging to the prt. laílôun (Jo. IX, 28) is probably (according to § 26, n.) *lauan, to revile. Cp. § 22, n. 2.

(5) aukan, to increase.

(5) aukan, to boost.

Note 1. It is tolerably certain that several verbs of which the preterit does not occur belong here too: (1) us-alþan, to grow old; blandan, to blend; saltan, to salt; waldan, to wield, rule; ana-praggan, to oppress, harass. (2) blêsan, to blow. (3) ga-þláihan, to cumfurt, caress. (4) blôtan, to wurship. (5) stautan, to thrust, smite; hlaupan, to run.

Note 1. It’s fairly certain that several verbs without a past tense also belong here: (1) us-alþan, to grow old; blandan, to blend; saltan, to salt; waldan, to wield, rule; ana-praggan, to oppress, harass. (2) blêsan, to blow. (3) ga-þláihan, to comfort, caress. (4) blôtan, to worship. (5) stautan, to thrust, strike; hlaupan, to run.

[Pg 74]

Note 2. bauan, to dwel, which formerly belongd here according to the testimony of other Germanic dialects, has the weak prt. bauaida and is referd to the third weak conjugation (§ 193) also because of the f. bauains (§ 103, n. 1). But the 3d pers. sg. is bauiþ which is stil a form of the strong conjugation. The inflection of the Goth. bnauan, to rub, which occurs only onse (bnauandans; Lu. VI, 1) can not be determind; its ON. correspondence, *bnúa, (g)núa (altisl. gr., § 433; cp. Zs. fdph., 17, 250), like the OHG. nûan, niuwan (ahd. gr., § 334, n. 5) belongs to the strong inflection; trauan, however, follows the weak inflection thruout.—Cp. § 26, b.

Note 3. gaggan, to go, pp. gaggans, has lost its prt. *gaígagg, which is replaced by other forms. Cp. § 207.

Note 4. Insted of flôkan the form flêkan was formerly uzed on account of the isolated prt. faíflôkun (according to § 181). That this is wrong was shown by Bezzenberger, 'Ueber die a-reihe der got. spr.', p. 56⁴. Cp. also Gallée, 'Noord en Zuid', 4, 54 et seq.

Note 5. arjandan (in Lu. XVII, 7) seems to refer to a red. v. arjan (to plow), w. a j-present (206^a); cp. OHG. erien, iar, giaran (ahd. gr., § 350, n. 5).

Note 5. arjandan (in Lu. XVII, 7) appears to refer to a red. v. arjan (to plow), with a j-present (206^a); cf. OHG. erien, iar, giaran (ahd. gr., § 350, n. 5).

3. Reduplicating Ablaut Verbs.

§ 180. A number of verbs with the stem-vowel ê in the present (or final ai in the root) hav the ablaut of the ê—ô-series (s. § 36). The prt. has the vowel ô and reduplication. In the pp. appears the same vowel as in the prs. These verbs ar divided into two classes according to the vowel of the prs.:

§ 181. I. Stems ending in a consonant hav ê in the prs.; e. g., lêtan, to let, which has lêta, laílôt, laílôtum, lêtans. Of this kind ar also grêtan (gaígrôt), to weep; têkan (taítôk), to tuch; -rêdan (raírôþ), to counsel.

§ 181. I. Stems that end in a consonant have ê in the present tense; for example, lêtan, to let, which has lêta, laílôt, laílôtum, lêtans. Also of this type are grêtan (gaígrôt), to weep; têkan (taítôk), to touch; -rêdan (raírôþ), to counsel.

§ 182. II. Roots ending in a vowel change the ê into ai (§ 22). Here belong: saian, to sow: saia, saísô, saísôum, saians (concerning other forms, cp. § 22, n. 1; § 170, n. 2), and waian (waíwô), to blow.

Note. The prt. of faian, to blame, is not extant; cp. § 22, n. 2.

II. WEAK VERBS.

§ 183. The formation and inflection of the prt. and pp. of the four classes of the weak verbs (§ 168) ar alike. The pp. is formd by means of the suffix -da- (nom. m. -þs) which is in all classes added to the verbal stem. The latter varies according to the formativ suffix and causes in the present[Pg 75] forms a considerabl difference of inflection in the four classes. We first giv the inflection of the prt., which is the same in all classes.

1. INFLECTION OF THE WEAK PRETERIT.

§ 184. Paradims: nasida, salbôda, habaida, fullnôda. Only one exampl is necessary to show the inflection.

§ 184. Paradigms: nasida, salbôda, habaida, fullnôda. Only one example is needed to demonstrate the inflection.

		Indicative.	Optative.
Sing.	1.	nasi-da	nasi-dêdjau
	2.	nasi-dês	nasi-dêdeis
	3.	nasi-da	nasi-dêdi
Dual	1.	nasi-dêdu	nasi-dêdeiwa
Dual	2.	nasi-dêduts	nasi-dêdeits
Plur.	1.	nasi-dêdum	nasi-dêdeima
	2.	nasi-dêduþ	nasi-dêdeiþ
	3.	nasi-dêdun	nasi-dêdeina

What has been said in § 170, n. 4 concerns also the 1st and 2nd pers. du. optativ.

2. FIRST WEAK CONJUGATION (-jan).

§ 185. The verbs of this class hav the formativ suffix i which appears in the present as j (inf. -jan). This j and a following i ar either contracted into ei (according to § 44, c and n. 1) or remain ji. Thus we hav two subdivisions: (a) Verbs with short stem-syllabls; e. g., nasjan, to save, or verbs in a long vowel; as, stôjan, to judge. (b) Verbs with long stem-syllabls ending in a consonant; e. g., sôkjan, to seek, and polysyllabic verbs; e. g., mikiljan, to praise.

§ 186.

(a) Present (Activ).
Indicator.
Sing.	1.	nasja	stôja	sôkja
	2.	nasjis	stôjis	sôkeis
	3.	nasjiþ	stôjiþ	sôkeiþ
Dual	1.	nasjôs	stôjôs	sôkjôs
Dual	2.	nasjats	stôjats	sôkjats
Plur.	1.	nasjam	stôjam	sôkjam
	2.	nasjiþ	stôjiþ	sôkeiþ
	3.	nasjand	stôjand	sôkjand[Pg 76]
Optative.
Sing.	1.	nasjau	stôjau	sôkjau
	2.	nasjais	etc.	etc.
	3.	nasjai
Dual	1.	nasjaiwa
Dual	2.	nasjaits
Plur.	1.	nasjaima
	2.	nasjaiþ
	3.	nasjaina
	Imperative.
Sing.	2.	nasei	[stauei]	sôkei
Sing.	3.	nasjadau	stôjadau	sôkjadau
Dual	2.	nasjats	stôjats	sôkjats
Plur.	1.	nasjam	stôjam	sôkjam
	2.	nasjiþ	stôjiþ	sôkeiþ
	3.	nasjandau	stôjandau	sôkjandau
Infinitive.
		nasjan	stôjan	sôkjan
Participl.
		nasjands	stôjands	sôkjands
(b) Preterit.
		nasida	stauida	sôkida
(Inflection § 184.)
(c) Preterit Participl (Passiv).
		nasiþs	stauiþs	sôkiþs
(d) Medio-Passiv: Present.
Indicative.
Sing.	1.	3. nasjada	stôjada	sôkjada
Sing.	2.	nasjaza	stôjaza	sôkjaza
Plur.	1. 2. 3.	nasjanda	stôjanda	sôkjanda
Optative.
Sing.	1. 3.	nasjaidau	stôjaidau	sôkjaidau
Sing.	2.	nasjaizau	stôjaizau	sôkjaizau
Plur.	1. 2. 3.	nasjaindau	stôjaindau	sôkjaindau

Note 1. The 3d pers. sg. imper. is preservd in lausjadau, ῥυσάσθω; Mt. XXVII, 43 (cp. § 170, n. 3). The 3d pers. pl. would be lausjandau according to § 192, n. 1.

Note 2. The 2nd pers. sg. imper. stauei (inf. stôjan) is suggested by the prt. stauida according to § 26.

[Pg 77]

§ 187. Further exampls of this very numerous class: (a) 1. verbs with short stem-syllabls: waljan, to choose; ga-tamjan, to tame; uf-þanjan, to strech; warjan, to forbid; lagjan, to lay; us-wakjan, to awake; satjan, to set; wasjan, to vest, clothe; hazjan, to praise; huljan, to cuver; 2. stems ending in a vowel: taujan (imper. sg. tawei, prt. tawida, pp. tawiþs), to do; *straujan, to strew (only the prt. strawida and pp. strawiþs ar extant); qiujan (qiwida), to quicken; ana-niujan (-niwida), to renew; siujan, to sew; —concerning *môjan (in afmôjan, to weary) and *dôjan (in afdôjan, to tire out), s. § 26, a.

(b) verbs with long stems and polysyllabic verbs: mêljan, to write; mêrjan, to preach; sipônjan, to be a disciple; hnaiwjan, to abase; hrainjan, to clean; hausjan, to hear; þiuþjan, to bless; —brannjan, to burn; sandjan, to send; namnjan, to name; andbahtjan, to serv; glitmunjan, to glitter; haúrnjan, to blow the horn.

(b) verbs with long stems and polysyllabic verbs: mêljan, to write; mêrjan, to preach; sipônjan, to be a disciple; hnaiwjan, to abase; hrainjan, to clean; hausjan, to hear; þiuþjan, to bless; —brannjan, to burn; sandjan, to send; namnjan, to name; andbahtjan, to serve; glitmunjan, to glitter; haúrnjan, to blow the horn.

Note 1. kaupatjan, to buffet, has the prt. kaupasta (without i; cp. § 75), but the pp. kaupatiþs (cp. § 209, n. 1). The verbs lauhatjan, to shine; swôgatjan, to sigh, occur in the prs. only.

Note 2. Sum primary verbs with j in the present stem inflect in the present like the weak verbs of the first class. In the prt. they ar either strong or weak without the formativ suffix i. Cp. § 206, a (§ 209).

Note 3. Only two verbs assume occasionally forms of the 2nd weak conjugation: hausjan, to hear, beside hausjôn (occurs several times); pp. un-beistjôþs, unlevend, but ga-beistjan, to leven.

Note 3. Only two verbs sometimes take forms from the 2nd weak conjugation: hausjan, to hear, alongside hausjôn (occurs several times); pp. un-beistjôþs, unlevend, but ga-beistjan, to leven.

Note 4. Like the 2nd pers. du. and pl. imper. of nasjan go the interjectional hirjats, hirjiþ. The sg. hiri is irregular. Cp. § 219.

§ 188. Verbs of this class ar derived from verbs, adjectivs and substantivs. Their meaning is predominantly causativ. Causativs from strong ablaut verbs hav the vowel of the prt. sg.; e. g., wandjan, to wend, turn (< windan); dragkjan, to giv to drink (< drigkan); ur-raisjan, to raiz (< ur-reisan, to arize); ga-drausjan, to cause to fall (< driusan).—Also verbs derived from adjectivs and substantivs show, with few exceptions, a causativ meaning; e. g., háuhjan, to make high (< háuhs); hailjan, to heal (< hails); warmjan, to warm (< warms); —dailjan, to deal (< dails); taiknjan, to make a sign, to show (< taikns, a token); etc.—Only a few hav an intransitiv meaning, e. g., sipônjan, to be a disciple; faúrhtjan, to fear.

§ 188. Verbs in this category come from verbs, adjectives, and nouns. Their meaning is mainly causative. Causative forms from strong ablaut verbs have the vowel of the past singular; for example, wandjan, to wend, turn (windan); dragkjan, to give to drink (drigkan); ur-raisjan, to raise (ur-reisan, to arise); ga-drausjan, to cause to fall (driusan). Also, verbs derived from adjectives and nouns generally have a causative meaning, with a few exceptions; for example, háuhjan, to make high (háuhs); hailjan, to heal (hails); warmjan, to warm (warms); — dailjan, to deal (dails); taiknjan, to make a sign, to show (taikns, a token); etc. — Only a few have an intransitive meaning, for instance, sipônjan, to be a disciple; faúrhtjan, to fear.

[Pg 78]

3. SECOND WEAK CONJUGATION (-ôn).

§ 189. The formativ suffix (ô) occurs in this class not only in the prt., but also in the hole prs., and absorbs the initial vowels appearing in the endings of the strong verb. Paradim: salbôn, to anoint.

§ 189. The formative suffix (ô) appears in this class not only in the past tense but also in all present tenses, and it takes in the initial vowels that show up in the endings of the strong verbs. Paradigm: salbôn, to anoint.

(a) Present.
		Indic.	Opt.	Imper.
Sing.	1.	salbô	salbô	—
	2.	salbôs	salbôs	salbô
	3.	salbôþ	salbô	salbôdau
Dual	1.	salbôs	salbôwa	—
Dual	2.	salbôts	salbôts	salbôts
Plur.	1.	salbôm	salbôma	salbôm
	2.	salbôþ	salbôþ	salbôþ
	3.	salbônd	salbôna	salbôndau
		Infinitive:	salbôn
		Participl:	salbônds
(b) Preterit.
		salbôda, -dês, -da, etc. (s. § 184).
(c) Pret. Participl Passiv.
salbôþs
(d) Medio-Passiv: Present.
		Indic.	Choose.
Sing.	1. 3.	salbôda	salbôdau
Sing.	2.	salbôza	salbôzau
Plur.	1. 2. 3.	salbônda	salbôndau

Note. No exampls of the 3. pers. sg. and pl. imper. ar extant, but they may be safely inferd like other forms; e. g., the dual forms, or the 2nd pers. sg. midl: salbôza, salbôzau, which hav been merely inferd according to the other conjugations.

Note. No examples of the 3rd person singular and plural imperative are available, but they can be inferred like other forms; for example, the dual forms, or the 2nd person singular middle: salbôza, salbôzau, which have been simply inferred based on the other conjugations.

§ 190. The number of verbs of the 2nd class is greater than that of the 3d, but much smaller than that of the verbs in -jan. Exampls: mitôn, to think; ƕarbôn, to wander; fiskôn, to fish; sidôn, to practis; idreigôn, to repent; awiliudôn, to thank; þiudanôn, to be king; faginôn, to rejoice; fraujinôn, to rule; reikinôn, to rule; frijôn, to luv; sunjôn, to justify; hausjôn (§ 187, n. 3).

[Pg 79]

4. THIRD WEAK CONJUGATION (-an).

§ 191. Verbs of this class hav the formativ suffix -ai. This, however, appears in all forms of the prt. (and in the pp.), while it occurs in but few forms of the present and what belongs to the prs., the greater number following entirely the present forms of the strong verb. The ai is found in the present only where the terminations of the strong verb begin with i which it absorbs (thus, in the 2nd and 3d pers. sg. indic., in the 2nd pers. pl. indic., and in 2nd pers. pl. imper.), and in 2nd pers. sg. imper. (which has no termination).—But the ai is entirely wanting before the endings beginning with a (ô).

§ 191. Verbs in this category have the formative suffix -ai. This appears in all forms of the past tense (and in the past participle), but it only appears in a few forms of the present tense and related forms, most of which follow the present forms of the strong verb. The ai is only found in the present tense where the endings of the strong verb start with i, which it absorbs (specifically, in the 2nd and 3rd person singular indicative, in the 2nd person plural indicative, and in the 2nd person plural imperative), and in the 2nd person singular imperative (which has no ending).—However, the ai is completely absent before endings that begin with a (ô).

§ 192. Paradim haban, to hav.

§ 192. Paradim haban, to have.

(a) Present.
		Indic.	Choose.	Imper.
Sing.	1.	haba	habau	—
	2.	habais	habais	habai
	3.	habaiþ	habai	habadau
Dual	1.	habôs	habaiwa	—
Dual	2.	habats	habaits	habats
Plur.	1.	habam	habaima	habam
	2.	habaiþ	habaiþ	habaiþ
	3.	haband	habaina	habandau
		Infinitive:	haban
		Participl:	habands
(b) Preterit.
		habaida, -dês, -da, etc. (s. § 184).
(c) Preterit Participl.
habaiþs
(d) Medio-Passiv: Present.
		Indic.	Opt.
Sing.	1. 3.	habada	habaidau
Sing.	2.	habaza	habaizau
Plur.		habanda	habaindau

Note. An exampl of the 3d pers. pl. imper. is extant in this conjugation only: liugandau, γαμησάτωσαν; I. Cor. VII, 9.

Note. An example of the 3rd person plural imperative exists in this conjugation only: liugandau, γαμησάτωσαν; I. Cor. VII, 9.

[Pg 80]

§ 193. Verbs of this class ar mostly intransitiv. Their number is comparativly small. Exampls: þahan, to be silent; þulan, to suffer; liban, to liv; ana-silan, to be silent; fijan, to hate; trauan, to trust (cp. § 26); saúrgan, to sorrow; liugan, to marry.

Note. hatan, to hate, fluctuates between this and the 1st weak conj. (hatjan); —bauan, to dwel, has the 3d pers. sg. prs. indic. strong: bauiþ; cp. § 179, n. 2.

5. FOURTH WEAK CONJUGATION (-nan).

§ 194. By means of the suff. -no- in the prt., n (-na-) in the present, verbs ar formd in Gothic which denote an entering into a state; therefore they hav an 'inchoativ' meaning. When they hav a medial meaning, they often also render Greek medio-passiv verbs. These verbs ar always intransitiv and never hav a purely passiv meaning. Hense, for exampl, andbindada means it is loost (by sum one), but andbundniþ, it becums loose, it loosens. Nearly all of these verbs ar derived from adjectivs or from the stem of the pp. passiv. Exampls: (a) from strong verbs: and-bundnan (bindan), to loosen (intr.); us-bruknan (brikan), to break off (intr.); dis-kritnan, to rend (intr.); fra-lusnan (fra-liusan), to perish; ga-waknan (wakan), to awaken; ga-skaidnan (skaidan), to becum parted, to depart; —(b) from adjectivs: gahailnan (hails), to becum hole; mikilnan (mikils), to becum great; weihnan (weihs), to becum holy; gadauþnan, to becum ded, to die.

§ 194. Using the suffix -no- in the past tense, n (-na-) in the present, verbs in Gothic indicate an entry into a state; thus, they have an 'inchoative' meaning. When they have a medial meaning, they often correspond to Greek medio-passive verbs. These verbs are always intransitive and never hold a purely passive meaning. For example, andbindada means it is being loosened (by someone), but andbundniþ means it becomes loose, it loosens. Almost all of these verbs are derived from adjectives or from the stem of the past participle passive. Examples: (a) from strong verbs: and-bundnan (bindan), to loosen (intransitive); us-bruknan (brikan), to break off (intransitive); dis-kritnan, to tear (intransitive); fra-lusnan (fra-liusan), to perish; ga-waknan (wakan), to awaken; ga-skaidnan (skaidan), to become parted, to depart; — (b) from adjectives: gahailnan (hails), to become whole; mikilnan (mikils), to become great; weihnan (weihs), to become holy; gadauþnan, to become dead, to die.

Note 1. To substantivs belong gafrisahtnan (frisahts, image), to be formd; ga-gawaírþnan (ga-waírþi), to reconcile one's self to; the stem-vowel is irregular in: us-geisnan, to becum amazed; in-feinan, to be moved with compassion.

Note 1. The nouns include gafrisahtnan (frisahts, image), to be formed; ga-gawaírþnan (ga-waírþi), to reconcile oneself to; the stem-vowel is irregular in: us-geisnan, to become amazed; in-feinan, to be moved with compassion.

Note 2. That the fundamental meaning of these verbs is inchoativ has been shown by Egge, 'Inchoativ or n-verbs in Gothic' (American Journal of Phil., 7, p. 38 et seq.). The corresponding Norse verbs in -na ar inchoativ only.

Note 2. The basic meaning of these verbs is inchoative, as demonstrated by Egge, 'Inchoativ or n-verbs in Gothic' (American Journal of Phil., 7, p. 38 et seq.). The equivalent Norse verbs in -na are solely inchoative.

§ 195. The inflection of these verbs is in the present identical with that of the strong verbs. No medio-passiv nor a pp. can be formd. Paradim: fullnan (fulls, ful; fulljan, to fil), to becum ful, fil (intr.).

§ 195. The present tense form of these verbs is the same as that of the strong verbs. Neither a medio-passive nor a past participle can be formed. Paradigm: fullnan (fulls, ful; fulljan, to fill), to become full, fill (intransitive).

[Pg 81]

(a) Present.
		Indication.	Opt.	Imper.
Sing.	1.	fullna	fullnau	—
	2.	fullnis	fullnais	fulln
	3.	fullniþ	fullnai	fullnadau
Dual	1.	fullnôs	fullnaiwa	—
Dual	2.	fullnats	fullnaits	fullnats
Plur.	1.	fullnam	fullnaima	fullnam
	2.	fullniþ	fullnaiþ	fullniþ
	3.	fullnand	fullnaina	fullnandau
		Infinitive:	fullnan
		Participl:	fullnands
(b) Preterit.
		fullnôda, -dês, -da (s. § 184).

Note 1. Of the imper. of verbs of this class only the 2nd pers. sg. is extant.

Note 1. Of the imperatives of this class, only the second person singular exists.

Note 2. The prt. keinôda, germinated, aroze thru the influence of the strong present keinan (§ 172, n. 2) which could not belong here merely because of its meaning.

III. IRREGULAR VERBS.

1. PRETERIT-PRESENTS.

§ 196. Preterit-Presents ar strong verbs whose preterit has assumed a present meaning. In consequence thereof the real presents hav been lost. These verbs form the preterit like weak verbs by adding -da (-ta, -þa, -sa; cp. §§ 75. 81). Their inflection is the same as that of nasida (§ 184). According to the form of their presents, the preterit-presents may be distributed among the different classes of the strong verbs. The prs. inflects like a strong preterit. In the following the 13 Gothic verbs of this kind ar clast according to the corresponding ablaut-series:

§ 197. First Ablaut-Series.

§ 197. First Ablaut Series.

1. Prs. wait, I know, 2nd pers. waist, pl. witum, opt. witjau; prt. wissa, prt. opt. wissêdjau, prs. ptc. witands, inf. [witan].

2. lais, I know (the only form extant; causativ laisjan, to teach).

2. lais, I know (the only form still in use; causative laisjan, to teach).

Note. The complete strong verb of wait is *weitan, wait, witum, witans, retaind in fraweitan, to avenge, and in inweitan, to wurship (§ 172, n. 1).—To wait belongs also a weak verb of the III. weak conj., witan, witaida, to look at, observ.

[Pg 82]

§ 198. Second Ablaut-Series.

§ 198. Second Ablaut Series.

3. daug (impers., the only form extant), it is of use, it profits.

3. daug (impersonal, the only form still in use), it is useful, it is beneficial.

§ 199. Third Ablaut-Series.

§ 199. Third Ablaut Series.

4. kann, I know, 2nd pers. kant (also kannt; cp. § 80), pl. kunnum; prt. indic. kunþa, prt. opt. kunþêdjau, pp. kunþs, known; inf. kunnan; prsp. kunnands.

5. þarf, I need, be in want of, 2nd pers. þarft, pl. þaúrbum, opt. þaúrbjau; prt. þaúrfta, pp. þaúrfts, necessary, prsp. þaúrbands, needing, inf. [þaúrban].—Cp. § 56, n. 3.

6. ga-dars, I dare, pl. ga-daúrsum, opt. gadaúrsjau; prt. gadaúrsta; inf. gadaúrsan.

Note. Like kann inflect its cpds.: frakann, I despise; gakann, I subject myself.—With this must not be confounded the derivativ weak verb -kunnan of the III. weak conjug., -kunnan, -kunnaida, to recognize, in the cpds.: anakunnan (ἀναγιγνώσκειν), to read; atkunnan, to grant, award; gakunnan, to know, consider, read (Mk. XII, 26).—uf-kunnan, to recognize, know, belongs in the prs. and pp. (ufkunnaiþs) to the III. weak conjug., but its prt. is ufkunþa, onse (I. Cor. I, 21) ufkunnaida.

Note. Just like kann can change its compounds: frakann, I despise; gakann, I submit.—This should not be confused with the weak derivative verb -kunnan of the III. weak conjugation, -kunnan, -kunnaida, to recognize, in the compounds: anakunnan (ἀναγιγνώσκειν), to read; atkunnan, to grant, to award; gakunnan, to know, to consider, to read (Mk. XII, 26).—uf-kunnan, to recognize, to know, belongs in the present and past participle (ufkunnaiþs) to the III. weak conjugation, but its past tense is ufkunþa, once (I. Cor. I, 21) ufkunnaida.

§ 200. Fourth Ablaut-Series.

§ 200. Fourth Ablaut Series.

7. skal, I shal, 2nd pers. skalt, pl. skulum, opt. skuljau; prt. skulda, opt. skuldêdjau, pp. skulds, owing; inf. [skulan], prsp. skulands.

7. shall, I shall, 2nd person shalt, plural shall, subjunctive should; past owed, subjunctive should have owed, past participle owed, owing; infinitive [to owe], present participle owing.

8. man, I think, suppose, 2nd pers. [mant], pl. munum, opt. munjau; prt. munda, pp. munds (Lu. III, 23); inf. munan, prsp. munands.

Note. Like man goes gaman, I remember.—To this belongs also munan, prt. munaida, a derivativ wv. of the III. conjug.

Note. Just as man is linked to gaman, I remember.—This also includes munan, part munaida, a derivative verb of the III. conjugation.

§ 201. Fifth Ablaut-Series.

§ 201. Fifth Ablaut Series.

9. mag, I may, can, 2nd pers. magt, 3d mag; dual magu, maguts, pl. magum, maguþ, magun, opt. magjau; prt. mahta, opt. mahtêdjau, pp. mahts; inf. [magan], prsp. magands.

9. mag, I may, can, 2nd person magt, 3rd mag; dual magu, maguts, plural magum, maguþ, magun, optional magjau; past tense mahta, optional mahtêdjau, past participle mahts; infinitive [magan], present participle magands.

10. ga-nah, it suffices; binah, it is permitted, it is lawful. These impersonal forms and the pp. binaúhts ar the only forms extant. There may be inferd the pl. -naúhum; prt. -naúhta; inf. -naúhan.

10. ga-nah, it's enough; binah, it's allowed, it's legal. These impersonal forms and the pp. binaúhts are the only forms that exist. From this, we can infer the pl. -naúhum; prt. -naúhta; inf. -naúhan.

§ 202. Sixth Ablaut-Series.

§ 202. Sixth Ablaut Series.

11. ga-môt, I hav or find room or place, 2nd pers. [môst], pl. [môtum], opt. gamôtjau, prt. gamôsta; inf. [gamôtan].

11. ga-môt, I have or find room or place, 2nd person. [môst], plural [môtum], optional gamôtjau, past tense gamôsta; infinitive [gamôtan].

[Pg 83]

12. ôg, I fear, 2nd pers. [ôht], pl. [ôgum], opt. ôgjau; prt. ôhta; inf. [ôgan]. Causativ ôgjan, to frighten.

12. ôg, I fear, 2nd person [ôht], plural [ôgum], optative ôgjau; part. ôhta; infinitive [ôgan]. Causative ôgjan, to frighten.

Note 1. To ôg belongs an anomalous 2nd pers. sg. imper.: ôgs, fear thou! The opt. ôgeiþ does duty for the corresponding 2nd pers. pl.

Note 1. The verb ôg has an unusual 2nd person singular imperative: ôgs, fear thou! The optative ôgeiþ serves as the equivalent for the corresponding 2nd person plural.

Note 2. The only extant form of the primary strong verb is the negativ prsp. unagands, fearless.

Note 2. The only existing form of the primary strong verb is the negative present participle unagands, fearless.

§ 203. The verb áih, I hav, belongs to none of the ablaut-series. Disregarding the want of reduplication, we may, according to its formation, refer it to a reduplicated prt. like haíhait (§ 179, 3). The extant forms ar: 1st and 3d pers. sg. áih (onse aig), pl. 1st aigum and áihum, 2nd áihuþ (onse), 3d aigun, opt. sg. 3d aigi, pl. 2nd aigeiþ, 3d aigeina; prt. áihta; prsp. aigands (5 times) and áihands (onse), inf. áihan (only onse, in faíráihan, to partake).

Note. In most forms there is a peculiar fluctuation between g and h in such a manner that the h is predominant in the sg. (áih), the g in the other forms. Cp. § 66, n. 1; § 79, n. 2.

2. THE VERBS 'be' AND 'wil'.

§ 204. The old root es-, which is preservd in all Indo-Germanic languages, occurs in the Gothic substantiv verb only in the present indic. and opt. The remaining forms ar supplied by the strong verb wisan (§ 176, n. 1). The pp. is wanting (cp. Anz. fda., 14, 286).

Present.
		Indic.	Opt in.
Sing.	1.	im	sijau
	2.	is	sijais
	3.	ist	sijai
Dual	1.	siju	[sijaiwa]
Dual	2.	[sijuts]	[sijaits]
Plur.	1.	sijum	sijaima
	2.	sijuþ	sijaiþ
	3.	sind	sijaina
		Inf.:	wisan
		Prsp.:	wisands
Preterit.
Indication.:		was, wast, was, etc.
Opt.:		wêsjau

Note 1. For ij (in the opt. and du. pl. indic. prs.) also simpl i (§ 10, n. 4) is occasionally found; e. g., pl. indic. 1st pers. sium, 2nd siuþ, opt.[Pg 84] siau, etc. But the ful forms occur far more frequently. The comparativly small number of the forms with i is confined to the epistls (especially in Cod. B) and to the gospel of Lu. which also in other respects shows many irregular forms (V, 10. VIII, 25. IX, 12. 41. XIV, 31). Of two extant codices (II. Cor. VII, 13. Phil. IV, 5. Col. IV, 6. I. Tim. V, 22) one (in three cases A) always has the correct form with j.

Note 2. Insted of the imper. the opt. forms, sg. sijais, sijai, pl. sijaiþ, ar employd. The form sai (= Gr. ἔστω), which occurs onse in the manuscript, either stands erroneously for sijai, siai, or must, according to Osthoff (Beitr., 8, 311), be regarded as interj. sai, 'ecce'!

Note 2. Instead of using the imperative forms, the optative forms, singular sijais, sijai, and plural sijaiþ, are used. The form sai (= Gr. ἔστω), which appears once in the manuscript, either mistakenly represents sijai, siai, or, according to Osthoff (Beitr., 8, 311), should be considered as the interjection sai, 'ecce'!

Note 3. nist = ni ist, is not (§ 10, n. 2), þatist = þata ist, that is, karist = kara ist, there is care, it concerns; Jo. X, 12 (§ 4, n. 1).

§ 205. The verb 'wil' has in the present only an opt. which discharges, however, the function of the indicativ. This present optativ has the uzual terminations of the prt. opt. Its preterit is weak. The extant forms ar:—

§ 205. The verb 'wil' currently has only an optative form, which, however, serves the purpose of the indicative mood. This present optative has the usual endings of the past optative. Its past tense is weak. The existing forms are:—

Present:	Sg. 1.	wiljau	2.	wileis	3.	wili
Du.	2.	wileits
Pl.	1.	wileima	2.	wileiþ	3.	wileina
Infinitive:	wiljan
Prsp.:	wiljands
Pret.:	wilda	Opt.:	wildêdjau
(Inflection like that of nasida, § 184.)

3. IRREGULARITIES.

§ 206. The distinction between the present stem and the preterit stem of the strong ablaut verbs consists only in the change of the vowel. The consonantal skeleton of the word remains the same. This was not always so, for in proethnic Germanic, as in other Indo-Germanic languages, there existed present formations with additional consonantal elements. Of these a few remnants stil survive in Gothic, which from a Gothic point of view must be regarded as irregularities.

§ 206. The difference between the present stem and the past stem of the strong ablaut verbs is just in the change of the vowel. The consonant structure of the word stays the same. This wasn't always the case; in early Germanic, like in other Indo-European languages, there were present forms with extra consonant elements. A few remnants of these still exist in Gothic, which must be seen as irregularities from a Gothic perspective.

(a) Present formations with j. The j of these formations which in the present inflect entirely like weak verbs of the I. conjug. (as, nasjan, sôkjan), is no formativ suffix and is dropt in the prt. and pp. The existing exampls ar:—bidjan (§ 176, n. 5), hafjan, fraþjan, hlahjan, skapjan, skaþjan, wahsjan (§ 177, n. 2), arjan (§ 179, n. 5). Cp. also § 209.

(b) Present stems with a final nasal: keinan (§ 172, n. 2) and fraíhnan (§ 176, n. 4); —a medial nasal is seen in standan (§ 177, n. 3).

[Pg 85]

§ 207. The verb gaggan belongs, according to its present and pp. and according to the testimony of the other Germanic languages, to the reduplicated verbs (§ 179, n. 3). Its prt. is uzually represented by the defectiv iddja which is conjugated like a weak prt.: iddja, I went, iddjês, iddja, etc.; opt. iddjêdjau. Onse, however (Lu. XIX, 12), a weak prt. gaggida occurs.

§ 208. briggan, to bring, is, according to its prs., an ablaut verb (III), but the prt. (with ablaut) is formd weak: brâhta (from *branhta, § 5, b), pp. [brâhts].

§ 209. Sum verbs whose present follows the first weak conjug. (in part perhaps belonging to § 206, a), form the prt. weak, but without the formativ suffix i: bugjan, to buy, baúhta; brûkjan, to uze, brûhta; waúrkjan, to work, waúrhta; þagkjan, to think, þâhta (§ 5, b); þugkjan, to seem, þûhta (§ 15, b). The extant pps. ar:—baúhts < bugjan, waúrhts < waúrkjan, the remaining ones would be brûhts, þâhts, þûhts (§ 75); þâhts occurs in anda-þâhts, cautious, vigilant; þûhts in háuh-þûhts, mikil-þûhts, haughty.

Note. Cp. also kaupatjan (§ 187, n. 1), which has, however, the formativ i in the pp.

CHAP. VI. PARTICLS.

1. ADVERBS.

§ 210. Adverbs of Manner ar formd from adjectivs. (a) The commonest adverbial suff. is -ba which is added to the stem of the adjectiv.

§ 210. Adverbs of manner are formed from adjectives. (a) The most common adverbial suffix is -ba, which is added to the stem of the adjective.

Thus, from a-stems (§§ 123. 124); e. g., ubilaba, evilly; baírhtaba, brightly; from a ja-stem (§ 125 et seq.): sunjaba, truly.—The original i- and u-stems (§§ 129-131) also show here their real stem-endings; e. g., analaugniba, secretly; anasiuniba, visibly; arniba, surely; gatêmiba, fitly; —harduba, hard, severely; manwuba, redily; glaggwuba, accurately.

Note. a for u is found onse each in hardaba; II. Cor. XIII, 10 (in Cod. A, harduba in B); glaggwaba; Lu. XV, 8.—Cp. brôþra-lubô (in A), § 88^a, n. 2.

§ 211. (b) Another class of adverbs formd from adjectivs hav the suffix -ô which contains the final vowel of the[Pg 86] adjectival stem; e. g., galeikô, similarly; ûhteigô, seasonably; þiubjô, secretly; glaggwô (beside glaggwuba, accurately).

§ 211. (b) Another category of adverbs is formed from adjectives that have the suffix -ô, which includes the final vowel of the [Pg 86] adjectival stem; for example, galeikô, similarly; ûhteigô, seasonably; þiubjô, secretly; glaggwô (alongside glaggwuba, accurately).

Note. The same adverbial ending also in auftô, perhaps; sprautô, quickly; missô, reciprocally; sundrô, especially; unwêniggô, unexpectedly; ufarô, abuv; undarô, below; aftarô, behind, from behind.

Note. The same adverbial ending also appears in auftô, perhaps; sprautô, quickly; missô, reciprocally; sundrô, especially; unwêniggô, unexpectedly; ufarô, above; undarô, below; aftarô, behind, from behind.

§ 212. From comparativ adjectivs an adverbial form has developt which ends in the bare comparativ suffix (-iz), -is; e. g., háuhis, higher; áiris, erlier; mais, more; haldis, rather, more; framis, further; nêƕis, nearer.

§ 212. From comparative adjectives, an adverbial form has developed that ends in the bare comparative suffix (-iz, -is); e.g., háuhis, higher; áiris, earlier; mais, more; haldis, rather, more; framis, further; nêƕis, nearer.

Note 1. Without the i of the suffix ar formd: mins (§ 78, n. 1), less; waírs, wurse; þana-seiþs, further, more.

Note 2. With the comparativ suffix -ôs appear sniumundôs, more speedily; aljaleikôs, otherwise.

Note 2. With the comparative suffix -ōs appear sniumundōs, faster; aljaleikōs, in another way.

Note 3. As superlativ adverbs occur the neuter forms frumist, first; maist, most.

Note 3. In superlative adverbs, the neuter forms are frumist, first; maist, most.

§ 213. Adverbs of Place ar formd either without a suffix or by means of the suffixes -þ (-d) and -drê to denote motion towards a place; by means of the suffixes -r and -a to denote rest in a place; with the suffixes -þrô and -ana to denote motion from a place.

§ 213. Adverbs of Place are formed either without a suffix or using the suffixes -þ (-d) and -drê to indicate movement toward a location; using the suffixes -r and -a to indicate being in a location; and with the suffixes -þrô and -ana to indicate movement away from a location.

Note 1. From pronominal stems ar thus formd the correlativs:

Note 1. From pronoun stems are thus formed the correlatives:

ƕaþ, ƕadrê, wither?	ƕar, where	ƕaþrô, whense
[þaþ] (þadei, where, whither)	þar, there	þaþrô, thense
jaind, jaindrê, thither	jainar, yonder	jainþrô, thense
aljaþ, elsewhere, away	aljar, elsewhere	aljaþrô, by another way
	hêr, here

Note 2. Other exampls: (a) 'Whither'? dalaþ, down; samaþ, together; iup, upwards; ût, out; inn, into. (b) 'Where'? dalaþa, below; iupa, abuv; ûta, out; inna, in; faírra, far; afta, behind. (c) 'Whense'? dalaþrô, from below; iupaþrô and iupana, from abuv; ûtaþrô and ûtana, from without; innaþrô and innana, from within; allaþrô, from all sides; faírraþrô, from afar; aftana, from behind; hindana, from behind, beyond.

Note 2. Other examples: (a) 'Where to'? dalaþ, down; samaþ, together; iup, upwards; ût, out; inn, into. (b) 'Where'? dalaþa, below; iupa, above; ûta, out; inna, in; faírra, far; afta, behind. (c) 'From where'? dalaþrô, from below; iupaþrô and iupana, from above; ûtaþrô and ûtana, from outside; innaþrô and innana, from inside; allaþrô, from all sides; faírraþrô, from far away; aftana, from behind; hindana, from behind, beyond.

§ 214. Adverbs of Time ar for the most part represented by cases of substantivs; e. g., gistradagis, to-morrow; himma daga, to-day; du maúrgina, to-morrow; ni aiw, never (acc. of aiws, time); framwigis, continually.

§ 214. Adverbs of time are mostly expressed through noun cases; for example, gistradagis, tomorrow; himma daga, today; du maúrgina, tomorrow; ni aiw, never (acc. of aiws, time); framwigis, continually.

Note. Simpl adverbs of time are rare: nu, now; ju, alredy; áir, erly; simlê, onse; ufta, often; from pronominal stems: þan, then; ƕan, when?, whenever; suman, in times past.

Note. Simple time adverbs are rare: nu, now; ju, already; áir, early; simlê, once; ufta, often; from pronominal stems: þan, then; ƕan, when?, whenever; suman, in times past.

§ 215. Other nominal cases than those givn in § 214 ar also uzed as adverbs; e. g., landis, far away, lit. 'of land'; allis, holely; sunja and bi sunjai, truly.

[Pg 87]

§ 216. Questions and Answers ar mostly accumpanied by adverbial particls. Interrogativ particls ar: -u (niu, not?, § 18, n. 2); an, nuh, then?; ibai, whether; jau (ja-u), whether; þau, perhaps.—Affirmativ particls: ja, jai, yes, truly!; a negativ particl is nê, no! These particls, however, ar rarely uzed 'alone' as answers, the verb of the question being uzually repeated, in negativ sentences with the adv. ni.

Note. The interrogativ particl -u is enclitically attacht to the first word of the sentence; as, skuldu; e. g., skuldu ist kaisaragild giban; Mk. XII, 14. In combinations with a prefix the u is attacht to the prefix; e. g., galaubjats þatei magjau þata taujan? Mk. IX, 28.

Note. The question particle -u is attached to the first word of the sentence; for example, skuldu; e.g., skuldu ist kaisaragild giban; Mk. XII, 14. In combinations with a prefix, the u is attached to the prefix; for example, galaubjats þatei magjau þata taujan? Mk. IX, 28.

2. PREPOSITIONS.

§ 217. (a) With the Dativ: alja, except; af, of; du, to; miþ, with; us, out, out of; faúra, before; fram, from; nêƕa, near; faírra, far off; undarô, under.

§ 217. (a) Using the Dative: alja, except; af, of; du, to; miþ, with; us, out, out of; faúra, before; fram, from; nêƕa, near; faírra, far off; undarô, under.

(b) With the Accusativ: and, along; þaírh, thru, by; inuh, without; undar, under; wiþra, against; faúr, for.

(b) With the Accusative: and, along; þaírh, through, by; inuh, without; undar, under; wiþra, against; faúr, for.

(c) With Dativ and Accusativ: ana, on, upon; at, at, by; afar, after; bi, by, according to, against, about, concerning; hindar, behind, beyond; und w. dat., for; w. acc., unto, to, until; uf, under, beneath; ufar, over, abuv.

(c) With Dative and Accusative: ana, on, upon; at, at, by; afar, after; bi, by, according to, against, about, concerning; hindar, behind, beyond; und with dative, for; with accusative, unto, to, until; uf, under, beneath; ufar, over, above.

(d) With Genitiv and Dativ: ufarô, over, abuv, upon.

(d) With Genitive and Dative: ufarô, over, above, upon.

(e) With Genitiv, Dativ, and Accusativ: in w. gen., on account of, for ... sake; w. dat., in, into, within, among, on, at; w. acc., in, into, toward, against, etc. (s. the Glossary).

(e) With Genitive, Dative, and Accusative: in with genitive, on account of, for ... sake; with dative, in, into, within, among, on, at; with accusative, in, into, toward, against, etc. (see the Glossary).

Note. Also adverbs ar uzed as prepositions with the genitiv; as, utaþrô, utana, hindana, innana (§ 213, n. 2).

3. CONJUNCTIONS.

§ 218. (a) Copulativ: jah, and, also; -uh, and (cp. § 24, n. 2); nih, and not. (b) Disjunctiv: aíþþau, or; andizuh... aíþþau, either ... or; jaþþê...jaþþê, whether ... or; þau (þáuh), or. (c) Adversativ: iþ, þan, aþþan, akei, but, however; ak, but. (d) Causal: allis, auk, untê, raíhtis, for, because. (e) Conclusiv: þanuh, þaruh, eiþan, nu, nuh, þannu, nunu, now, therefore, hense. (f) Conditional: jabai, if, niba, nibai, if not, unless (§ 10, n. 2). (g) Concessiv: þáuhjabai, even if, tho; swêþauh, yet, indeed, however. (h) Final: ei, þatei, þêei, þei, that, in order that; ei, swaei,[Pg 88] waswê, so that; ibai (iba), that not, lest. (i) Comparativ: ƕaiwa, how?; swê, as; swaswê, so as, as; þau, (þáuh), than. (k) Temporal: swê, as, when; þan, þandê, when, as long as; biþê, miþþanei, while; sunsei, as soon as; faúrþizei, before; untê, und þatei, þandê, til, until, as long as.

Note. Sum of these conjunctions ar uzed also as adverbs. The adverbial origin of a few is even recognizabl from their form; e. g., allis, raihtis, faúrþizei (faúrþis, adv., beforehand).

Note. The sum of these conjunctions are also used as adverbs. The adverbial origin of a few is even recognizable from their form; e.g., allis, raihtis, faúrþizei (faúrþis, adv., beforehand).

4. INTERJECTIONS.

§ 219. ô, oh! ah!; wai, woe!; sai, behold!—Interjectional in meaning ar the sg. hiri, the du. hirjats, and the pl. hirjiþ, cum here! (cp. § 20, n. 1; § 187, n. 4).

[Pg 89]

APPENDIX.

Cp. Sievers 'Grundr.', I, 407-416 ('Geschichte der got. sprache'); II, 1, 65-70 ('Gotische literatur'); Kögel, Geschichte der deutsch. litteratur, I, 1, 176-195.

Cp. Sievers 'Basic Work', I, 407-416 ('History of the Gothic Language'); II, 1, 65-70 ('Gothic Literature'); Kögel, History of German Literature, I, 1, 176-195.

§ 220. THE GOTHS.

(a) The Gothic language is the language of the Gothic peple (Gut-þiuda) which, divided into the two great tribes of the East and West Goths, figured in history in the time of the great migration. Together with the fall of the East Gothic kingdom in Italy and of the West Gothic kingdom in Spain the Gothic nation also past away. Only scatterd remains of the Goths and their language remaind until the beginning of the modern era in the Crimea. ('Crimean' or 'Tetraxitic' Goths.)

(a) The Gothic language is the language of the Gothic people (Gut-þiuda), which was split into the two major tribes of the East and West Goths and played a significant role in history during the time of the great migration. With the fall of the East Gothic kingdom in Italy and the West Gothic kingdom in Spain, the Gothic nation ultimately disappeared. Only scattered remnants of the Goths and their language remained until the beginning of the modern era in the Crimea. ('Crimean' or 'Tetraxitic' Goths.)

Note 1. The Goth. spelling of the name of the Goths as a peple is *Gutans and *Gutôs, with t, not with þ according to J. Grimm's suggestion which is supported by Kremer (Beitr., 8, 447). Concerning the form, inflection, and etymology of the name of the Goths, cp. Zs. fda., 9, 243 et seq.; Grundr., I, 407; Wrede, 'Ostg.', 44 et seq.; Beitr., 17, 178 et seq.; Ax. Erdmann, folknamnen 'Götar' och 'Goter', Stockholm 1891 (cp. Litbl. 1894, 249).

Note 1. The Gothic spelling of the name of the Goths as a people is *Gutans and *Gutôs, with t, not with þ according to J. Grimm's suggestion which is supported by Kremer (Beitr., 8, 447). For information about the form, inflection, and etymology of the name of the Goths, see Zs. fda., 9, 243 et seq.; Grundr., I, 407; Wrede, 'Ostg.', 44 et seq.; Beitr., 17, 178 et seq.; Ax. Erdmann, folknamnen 'Götar' och 'Goter', Stockholm 1891 (see also Litbl. 1894, 249).

Note 2. The current interpretation of the two Lt. names Austro-, Ostrogot(h)æ, -i and Wisigot(h)æ, -i, as East Goths and West Goths, which dates back to Jordanes, might hold good for the former only; the name of the Wisigothæ which ar simply calld also Vesi, Visi, has nothing to do with 'west'. Ep. IF., 4, 300 et seq.

Note 2. The current understanding of the two names Austro-, Ostrogot(h)æ, -i and Wisigot(h)æ, -i, as East Goths and West Goths, which goes back to Jordanes, may only apply to the former; the name Wisigothæ, which is also simply called Vesi, Visi, has nothing to do with 'west'. Ep. IF., 4, 300 et seq.

Note 3. Concerning the Crimean Goths and the remains of their language, s. Zs. fda., 1, 345-366; W. Tomaschek, 'Die Goten in Taurien', Wien 1881; Beitr., 11, 563 et seq.; F. Braun, 'Die letzten schicksale der Krimgoten'. Program St. Petersburg 1890 (cp. Anz. fda. 17, 167 f.).

Note 3. Regarding the Crimean Goths and what’s left of their language, see Zs. fda., 1, 345-366; W. Tomaschek, 'The Goths in Taurida', Vienna 1881; Beitr., 11, 563 and following; F. Braun, 'The Final Fates of the Crimean Goths'. Program St. Petersburg 1890 (see Anz. fda. 17, 167 f.).

(b) It was for the Gothic peple that the group of Germanic tribes to which the Goths belongd has been frequently calld the 'Gothic Group'. For this there has been recently proposed the name 'Vandilians' (according to Pliny, 'nat. hist.', IV, 99). The most important of these[Pg 90] Vandilians ar the Goths, the Gepidae, the Vandals, the Burgundi, the Heruli, and the Rugii. At the beginning of the Christian era their abodes wer between the Elbe and the Vistula. The languages of these peples wer closely related. The extant literary remains, however, except in Gothic, ar very few, and these ar almost entirely proper nouns.

(b) It was for the Gothic people that the group of Germanic tribes to which the Goths belonged has often been called the 'Gothic Group'. Recently, the name 'Vandilians' has been proposed for this group (according to Pliny, 'nat. hist.', IV, 99). The most important of these [Pg 90] Vandilians are the Goths, the Gepidae, the Vandals, the Burgundians, the Heruli, and the Rugii. At the beginning of the Christian era, their settlements were located between the Elbe and the Vistula. The languages of these peoples were closely related. However, the surviving literary remains, apart from Gothic, are very few, and these are almost entirely proper nouns.

Note 4. Concerning the Vandilians, cp. F. Wrede, 'Ueber die sprache der Wandalen', Strassburg, 1886 (QF., 59), p. 3 et seq.; F. Dahn, 'Urgeschichte der germ. und rom. völker', vol. I (Berlin 1881), p. 139 et seq.; R. Much, 'Goten und Ingvaeonen. (Beitr., 17, 178-221).

Note 4. About the Vandilians, see F. Wrede, 'On the Language of the Vandals', Strasbourg, 1886 (QF., 59), p. 3 and following; F. Dahn, 'Prehistory of the Germanic and Roman Peoples', vol. I (Berlin 1881), p. 139 and following; R. Much, 'Goths and Ingvaeones. (Contributions, 17, 178-221).

(c) The Gothic or Vandilian group of tribes together with the Scandinavians constitute the 'East Germanic' division as opposed to the 'West Germanic' division which embraces the remaining Germanic tribes.

(c) The Gothic or Vandalian group of tribes, along with the Scandinavians, make up the 'East Germanic' division, as opposed to the 'West Germanic' division, which includes the other Germanic tribes.

Note 5. Concerning the division of the Germanic race into East Germanic and West Germanic tribes, cp. H. Zimmer, 'Ostgermanisch und Westgermanisch', in Zs. fda., 19, 393 et seq.; Beitr. 9, 546 et seq.; Grundr., I, 362 et seq.; concerning the separate position of the Scandinavian as compared with the Gothic, s. Noreen, 'altisl. gr.²', § 2, and Grundr., I, 419 et seq.

§ 221. SOURCES OF THE GOTHIC LANGUAGE.

We know the Gothic language from the fragments of the biblical translation which is safely ascribed to bishop Ulfilas (or, in Gothic spelling, Wulfila; cp. Bernhardt, Vulfila, p. VII; Anz. fda., 14, 285; Grundr., II, 67⁴). Wulfila was born in 310 and died at the end of 380 or erly in 381 after Christ. During the last 33 years of his life he was bishop of that part of the West Goths which, when persecuted by their heathen kinsmen, he led across the Danube where they wer permitted by Constantius to setl in Moesia (Moeso-Goths or Goti minores).—The fragments of the biblical version hav cum down to us in the following manuscripts:—

We know the Gothic language from the fragments of the biblical translation that is reliably attributed to Bishop Ulfilas (or, in Gothic spelling, Wulfila; see Bernhardt, Vulfila, p. VII; Anz. fda., 14, 285; Grundr., II, 67⁴). Wulfila was born in 310 and died at the end of 380 or early in 381 AD. For the last 33 years of his life, he served as bishop to that part of the West Goths, whom he led across the Danube when they were persecuted by their pagan relatives. They were allowed by Constantius to settle in Moesia (Moeso-Goths or Goti minores). The fragments of the biblical version have come down to us in the following manuscripts:—

1. 'Codex Argenteus' at Upsala. It containd on 330 leavs the four gospels in the following order: Matthew, John, Luke, Mark. Of these 330 leavs 187 ar extant. The gospel of Lu. shows yunger forms of speech which differ in many respects from the normal forms (cp. §§ 7, n. 2; 14, n. 3; 56, n. 1; 62, n. 3; 67, n. 2; a 74, n. 1; 105, n. 2; 204,[Pg 91] n. 1; probably thru the influence of the dialect of the East Gothic writers; cp. Wrede, 'Ostg.', 200 et seq.).

2. 'Codex Carolinus', a 'codex rescriptus' at Wolfenbüttel, which contains portions of the 11.-15. chaps. of the epistl to the Romans.

2. 'Codex Carolinus', a 'codex rescriptus' in Wolfenbüttel, which includes parts of chapters 11-15 of the letter to the Romans.

3. 'Codices Ambrosiani', five fragments ('codices rescripti') in the Ambrosian library at Milan, which contain chiefly St. Paul's epistls. They are clast as follows:—

3. 'Codices Ambrosiani', five fragments ('codices rescripti') in the Ambrosian library in Milan, which mainly contain St. Paul's letters. They are classified as follows:—

Codex A contains on 95 leavs fragments of the epistls to the Romans, Corinthians, Ephesians, Galatians, Philippians, Colossians, Thessalonians, Timothy, Titus, Philemon, and a fragment of a Gothic calendar.

Codex A contains 95 leaves of fragments from the letters to the Romans, Corinthians, Ephesians, Galatians, Philippians, Colossians, Thessalonians, Timothy, Titus, Philemon, and a fragment of a Gothic calendar.

Codex B contains on 77 leavs all of the second epistl to the Corinthians, fragments of the first epistl to the Corinthians, of the epistls to the Galatians, Ephesians, Philippians, Colossians, Thessalonians, Timothy, Titus.—In contents Codex A and Codex B ar partly the same, which is important for the criticism of the text.

Codex B contains all of the second letter to the Corinthians on 77 leaves, along with fragments of the first letter to the Corinthians, and the letters to the Galatians, Ephesians, Philippians, Colossians, Thessalonians, Timothy, and Titus. In terms of content, Codex A and Codex B are partly the same, which is important for the analysis of the text.

Codex C. Two leavs with fragments of Mt. XXV-XXVII.

Codex C. Two leaves with fragments of Matt. XXV-XXVII.

Codex D. Three leavs with fragments of the books of Ezra and Nehemiah.

Codex D. Three leaves with fragments of the books of Ezra and Nehemiah.

Codex E. Eight leavs three of which ar in the Vatican library at Rome, and contain the fragments of an interpretation of the gospel of St. John. They wer calld by their editor (Massmann): Skeireins aíwaggêljôns þaírh Jôhannên, and are therefore stil cited as Skeireins (concerning which cp. Zs. fda., 37, 320; Anz. fda., 20, 148 et seq.).

Codex E contains eight leaves, three of which are in the Vatican library in Rome, and they include fragments of an interpretation of the Gospel of St. John. They were named by their editor (Massmann): Skeireins aíwaggêljôns þaírh Jôhannên, and are still referred to as Skeireins (see Zs. fda., 37, 320; Anz. fda., 20, 148 et seq.).

4. 'Codex Taurinensis', four considerably damaged leavs with scanty fragments of the epistls to the Galatians and Colossians, which remain to be deciferd.

4. 'Codex Taurinensis', four significantly damaged leaves with few fragments of the letters to the Galatians and Colossians, which still need to be deciphered.

Note 1. Concerning Wulfila, cp. Waitz, 'Ueber das leben und die Lehre des Ulfila' (Hannover 1840); Bessell, 'Ueber das leben des Ulfilas' (Göttingen 1860); G. Kaufmann, 'Kritische untersuchung der quellen zur geschichte Ulfilas', in Zs. fda., 27, 193 et seq.; Grundr. II, 68; Kögel, 'Gesch. der dtsch. Litt.', I, 1, 182.

Note 1. Regarding Wulfila, see Waitz, 'On the Life and Teachings of Ulfila' (Hannover 1840); Bessell, 'On the Life of Ulfilas' (Göttingen 1860); G. Kaufmann, 'Critical Examination of the Sources on the History of Ulfilas', in Zs. fda., 27, 193 and following; Grundr. II, 68; Kögel, 'History of German Literature', I, 1, 182.

Note 2. For more on the Gothic manuscripts, s. Bernhardt's 'Vulfila', Introduction, p. XXXIX et seq.; for the history of the 'Codex Ar[Pg 92]genteus', cp. also the recent articls by Schulte, 'Gotthica minora', in Zs. fda., 23, 51. 318 and 24, 324 et seq.: lastly, J. Peters, 'Germania', 30, 314 et seq.

Note 2. For more on the Gothic manuscripts, see Bernhardt's 'Vulfila', Introduction, p. XXXIX and following; for the history of the 'Codex Ar[Pg 92]genteus', also check the recent articles by Schulte, 'Gotthica minora', in Zs. fda., 23, 51. 318 and 24, 324 and following: lastly, J. Peters, 'Germania', 30, 314 and following.

Note 3. Beside the translation of the Bible (and the Skeireins) there ar no Gothic literary monuments of great moment. The most important ones ar two Latin title deeds with Gothic signatures at Naples and Arezzo, and the abuv (with Codex A) mentiond fragment of a Gothic calendar. The editions of Wulfila contain these remains also. Concerning the Gothic words and alfabets in the Salzburg-Vienna manuscript (§ 1, n. 5; § 2, n. 2) and other remains of the Gothic language, cp. Massmann's articl 'Gotthica minora', in Zs. fda., 1, 294-393.—Concerning Gothic runic inscriptions, s. Wimmer, 'Die runenschrift' (1887), p. 62 et seq.; R. Henning, 'Die deutschen runendenkmäler', Strassburg 1889 (and Zs. fdph., 23, 354 et seq.; Wimmer, 'de tyske runemindesmærker, Aarb. f. nord. oldk. og hist.', 1894, 1 et seq.). The most important inscription is that of the Bukarest ring ('gold-ring of Pietroassa', Henning, 27 et seq.): gutaniowi hailag.

Note 4. The numerous proper nouns in Gothic, which ar containd in Greek and stil more so in Latin sources, hav been utilized by Dietrich ('Ausspr.') and by Bezzenberger, 'Ueber die A-reihe der got. sprache', Göttingen 1874, p. 7 et seq. A monografic treatment of the East Gothic names has been givn us by F. Wrede, 'Ueber die sprache der Ostgoten in Italien', Strassburg 1891 (OF., 68); cp. review of this book in Litbl. 1891, p. 333; Anz. fda., 18, 43 et seq., 309 et seq.

Note 4. The many proper nouns in Gothic, which are found in Greek and even more so in Latin sources, have been utilized by Dietrich ('Ausspr.') and by Bezzenberger, 'Ueber die A-reihe der got. sprache', Göttingen 1874, p. 7 et seq. A monographic treatment of the East Gothic names has been provided by F. Wrede, 'Ueber die sprache der Ostgoten in Italien', Strassburg 1891 (OF., 68); see the review of this book in Litbl. 1891, p. 333; Anz. fda., 18, 43 et seq., 309 et seq.

§ 222. EDITIONS.

The first printed edition of the 'Codex Argenteus' is that by Fr. Junius, Dortrecht 1665. All the erlier editions (the titles of which s. in Bernhardt's 'Vulfila', p. LXIII et seq., and in Balg's 'First Germanic Bible', p. XVII et seq.; cp. also v. Bahder, 'Die deutsche philologie', Paderborn 1883, p. 44 et seq.) hav now only historical value. For the study of the Gothic language the following editions ar of importance:—

The first printed edition of the 'Codex Argenteus' is the one published by Fr. Junius in Dordrecht in 1665. All the earlier editions (the titles of which can be found in Bernhardt's 'Vulfila', p. LXIII et seq., and in Balg's 'First Germanic Bible', p. XVII et seq.; see also v. Bahder, 'Die deutsche Philologie', Paderborn 1883, p. 44 et seq.) now hold only historical value. For the study of the Gothic language, the following editions are important:—

(a) The large edition of Ulfilas by v. d. Gabelentz and Löbe, which appeard in 1843-46 in three volumes 4to. Altho the text in the first volume is antiquated in consequence of Uppström's editions, the glossary (vol. II, 1) and particularly the grammar (vol. II, 2) ar of great value for their abundant compilations and syntactic elaboration.

(a) The large edition of Ulfilas by v. d. Gabelentz and Löbe, published between 1843-46 in three volumes 4to. Although the text in the first volume is outdated because of Uppström's editions, the glossary (vol. II, 1) and especially the grammar (vol. II, 2) are very valuable for their extensive compilations and detailed syntactic analysis.

(b) For an exact establishment of the manuscripts ar exceedingly important the new readings of the learnd Swedish Professor Andreas Uppström who issued[Pg 93] exact reprints of the text according to these readings: Codex Argenteus, Upsala 1854,—Decem codicis argentei rediviva folia, Upsala 1857,—Fragmenta gothica selecta 1861,—Codices gotici ambrosiani 1864-68.—(For complete titles, s. v. Bahder, loc. cit.; cp. also Balg, loc. cit.).

(b) For a precise establishment of the manuscripts, the new readings from the knowledgeable Swedish Professor Andreas Uppström are extremely important. He published[Pg 93] exact reprints of the text based on these readings: Codex Argenteus, Upsala 1854; Decem codicis argentei rediviva folia, Upsala 1857; Fragmenta gothica selecta, 1861; Codices gotici ambrosiani, 1864-68. (For complete titles, see Bahder, loc. cit.; also refer to Balg, loc. cit.).

(c) A critically amended text based on Uppström's readings, with critical exegetic notes and the original Greek text, is givn in E. Bernhardt's edition: 'Vulfila oder die gotische bibel'. Halle 1876. Cp. review of it in Zs. fdph., 7, 103 et seq.

(c) A critically revised text based on Uppström's readings, complete with critical explanatory notes and the original Greek text, is provided in E. Bernhardt's edition: 'Vulfila oder die gotische bibel'. Halle 1876. See the review of it in Zs. fdph., 7, 103 et seq.

(d) A good manual of Ulfilas, with a glossary and a grammar, is that by M. Heyne, 8th edition. Paderborn 1885. Its text is likewise based on Uppström's readings, but it is treated more conservativly than Bernhardt's. The fonological and inflectional parts of the grammar rest on antiquated views, but the glossary is a recommendabl handbook containing all the words of the Gothic language.

(d) A good manual of Ulfilas, complete with a glossary and grammar, is the one by M. Heyne, 8th edition, Paderborn 1885. Its text is also based on Uppström's readings but is approached more conservatively than Bernhardt's. The phonological and inflectional sections of the grammar rely on outdated ideas, but the glossary is a useful resource that includes all the words from the Gothic language.

Note. Other later editions of the texts ar: (a) Bernhardt's, Halle 1884 (a reprint of the text of his larger edition, with a concise glossary); cp. review of it in Zs. fdph., 17, 249 et seq. (b) The first Germanic Bible translated from the Greek by the Gothic bishop Wulfila in the fourth century, and the other remains of the Gothic language, edited (according to Bernhardt's edition), with an introduction, a syntax, and a glossary, by G. H. Balg. Milwaukee, Wis. 1891.

Note. Other later editions of the texts are: (a) Bernhardt's, Halle 1884 (a reprint of the text from his larger edition, with a brief glossary); see the review of it in Zs. fdph., 17, 249 et seq. (b) The first Germanic Bible translated from the Greek by the Gothic bishop Wulfila in the fourth century, along with the other remnants of the Gothic language, edited (based on Bernhardt's edition), with an introduction, syntax, and glossary, by G. H. Balg. Milwaukee, Wis. 1891.

§ 223. GRAMMATICAL AND LEXICAL HELPS.

I. Fonology and Inflection.

(a) The Gothic grammar by v. d. Gabelentz and Löbe, mentiond in § 222, a.

(b) Leo Meyer, Die gotische Sprache. Berlin 1869. A comparativ treatment of the Gothic fonology, with complete material.

(b) Leo Meyer, The Gothic Language. Berlin 1869. A comparative treatment of Gothic phonology, with complete material.

II. Word-Formation.

(a) The 2nd and 3d volumes of J. Grimm's 'Deutsche Grammatik' (reprinted, Berlin 1878. 1890) ar stil the fundamental helps on word-formation.

(a) The 2nd and 3rd volumes of J. Grimm's 'Deutsche Grammatik' (reprinted, Berlin 1878, 1890) are still the essential resources on word formation.

(b) The section on word-formation in v. d. Gabelentz and Löbe's 'Grammatik', pp. 108-135.

(b) The section on word formation in v. d. Gabelentz and Löbe's 'Grammar', pp. 108-135.

[Pg 94]

(c) From a comparativ point of view: Fr. Kluge, 'Nominale stammbildungslehre der altgermanischen dialekte'. Halle 1886.—See also Brugmann, II, the sections concerning Gothic.

(c) From a comparative perspective: Fr. Kluge, 'Nominal Stem Formation Theory of the Old Germanic Dialects'. Halle 1886.—See also Brugmann, II, the sections about Gothic.

III. Lexicografy.

(a) The glossary in v. d. Gabelentz and Löbe's edition, II, 1 (s. § 222, a). (Arranged according to the Gothic alfabet).

(b) Ernst Schulze, 'Gotisches Glossar. Mit einer vorrede von J. Grimm'. Magdeburg 1847. The most complete Gothic Glossary.—An extract (without citations, but with etymological references and based on Uppström's readings): 'Gotisches wörterbuch nebst flexionslehre' by E. Schulze. Züllichau 1867.

(b) Ernst Schulze, 'Gothic Glossary. With a preface by J. Grimm'. Magdeburg 1847. The most complete Gothic Glossary.—An extract (without citations, but with etymological references and based on Uppström's readings): 'Gothic Dictionary along with Inflection Theory' by E. Schulze. Züllichau 1867.

(d) Lorenz Diefenbach, 'Vergleichendes Wörterbuch der gotischen Sprache', vols. 1. and 2. Frankfurt 1851.

(d) Lorenz Diefenbach, 'Comparative Dictionary of the Gothic Language', vols. 1 and 2. Frankfurt 1851.

(e) Sigmund Feist, 'Grundriss der gotischen Etymologie'. Strassburg 1888. For reviews of it, cp. Anz. fda., 16, 61 et seq.; Litbl. 1889, 365 et seq.; 1890, 47.

(e) Sigmund Feist, 'Outline of Gothic Etymology'. Strasbourg 1888. For reviews of it, see Anz. fda., 16, 61 et seq.; Litbl. 1889, 365 et seq.; 1890, 47.

Note 1. Sum grammatical facts hav been laid down in the useful articls of J. H. Gallée, 'Gutiska' (I.) 'Lijst van gotische woorden, wier geslacht of buiging naar analogie van andere gotische woorden, of van het oudgermaansch wordt opgegeven'. Haarlem 1880; (cp. also the addenda to this in the 'Tijdschrift voor Nederl. taal-en letterk.', I, 220 et seq.); —(II.) 'De adjectiva in het gotisch en hunne suffixen'. Utrecht 1882.

Note 1. Some grammatical facts have been outlined in the useful articles of J. H. Gallée, 'Gutiska' (I.) 'List of Gothic words, whose gender or inflection is provided by analogy with other Gothic words or Old Germanic'. Haarlem 1880; (see also the additions to this in the 'Journal for Dutch Language and Literature', I, 220 et seq.); —(II.) 'The adjectives in Gothic and their suffixes'. Utrecht 1882.

Note 2. Concise treatments of the Gothic word-formation also in the grammars of Le M. Douse and Bernhardt (s. § 224, n. 1).

Note 3. Further lexical works: W. W. Skeat, 'A Moeso-Gothic glossary, with an introduction, an outline of Moeso-Gothic grammar, and a list of Anglo-Saxon and old and modern English words etymologically connected with M.-G.' London 1868.—G. H. Balg, 'A comparativ glossary of the Gothic language, with especial reference to English and German'. Milwaukee, Wis. 1887-1889. Cp. Zs. fdph., 24, 236 et seq.—O. Priese, 'Deutsch-gotisches wörterbuch', with an appendix, containing a topically arranged survey of the Gothic vocabulary and a collection of idioms and proverbs. Leipzig 1890.

Note 3. Additional lexical works: W. W. Skeat, 'A Moeso-Gothic glossary, including an introduction, an overview of Moeso-Gothic grammar, and a list of Anglo-Saxon and old and modern English words that are etymologically related to M.-G.' London 1868.—G. H. Balg, 'A comparative glossary of the Gothic language, focusing on English and German'. Milwaukee, Wis. 1887-1889. See Zs. fdph., 24, 236 et seq.—O. Priese, 'German-Gothic dictionary', with an appendix that includes a thematically organized overview of the Gothic vocabulary and a collection of idioms and proverbs. Leipzig 1890.

§ 224. LITERATURE OF THE GOTHIC SYNTAX.

(a) General works: J. Grimm, 'Deutsche grammatik', vol. 4. Göttingen 1837, (syntax of the simpl sentence).—v. d. Gabelentz and Löbe, in vol. II, 2 of their edition (an elaborate treatment of the hole syntax).

(a) General works: J. Grimm, 'German Grammar', vol. 4. Göttingen 1837, (syntax of the simple sentence).—v. d. Gabelentz and Löbe, in vol. II, 2 of their edition (a detailed discussion of the whole syntax).

[Pg 95]

Note. Concise works on Gothic syntax, which ar useful to the beginner, and which rest in part on independent investigation, ar the respectiv parts in: T. Le Marchant Douse's 'An introduction, phonological, morphological, syntactic, to the Gothic of Ulfilas'. London 1886 (pp. 208-268); E. Bernhardt's 'Kurzgefasste got. grammatik'. Halle 1885 (cp. Zs. fdph., 17, 254 et seq.); Heyne's Ulfilas (§ 222 d); Balg's 'First Germanic Bible' (pp. 222-292; cp. § 222, n. 1).

(b) Monografs (cp. W. Scherer, 'Kl. schriften', I, 360 et seq.):

(b) Monographs (see W. Scherer, 'Collected Works', I, 360 and following):

APELT, O., 'Ueber den accus. c. infin. im gotischen' (Germ., 19, 280-97).

APELT, O., 'On the accus. c. infin. in Gothic' (Germ., 19, 280-97).

BERNHARDT, E., (a) 'Die partikel ga als hilfsmittel bei der got. conjugation' (Zs. fdph. 2, 158-66).—(b) 'Ueber den genet. partit. nach transitiven verben im got.' (Zs. fdph., 2, 292-94).—(c) 'Der artikel im gotischen' (19 pp.), Progr. Erfurt 1874.—(d) 'Der gotische optativ' (Zs. fdph., 8, 1-38).—(e) 'Zur got. syntax' (Zs. fdph. 9, 383 et seq.).—(f) 'Zur got. casuslehre' ('Beitr. zur deutschen philol.' Halle 1880, 71-82).—(g) 'Zur got. casuslehre' (Zs. fdph., 13, 1-20).

BERNHARDT, E., (a) 'The particle ga as a tool in Gothic conjugation' (Zs. fdph. 2, 158-66).—(b) 'On the genitive participle after transitive verbs in Gothic.' (Zs. fdph., 2, 292-94).—(c) 'The article in Gothic' (19 pp.), Progr. Erfurt 1874.—(d) 'The Gothic optative' (Zs. fdph., 8, 1-38).—(e) 'On Gothic syntax' (Zs. fdph. 9, 383 et seq.).—(f) 'On Gothic case theory' ('Contributions to German Philology' Halle 1880, 71-82).—(g) 'On Gothic case theory' (Zs. fdph., 13, 1-20).

BORRMANN, J., 'Ruhe und Richtung in den gotischen verbalbegriffen'. Halle diss. 1892 (39 pp.).

BORRMANN, J., 'Calm and Direction in Gothic Verbal Concepts'. Halle diss. 1892 (39 pp.).

BURCKHARDT, F., 'Der got. conjunctiv verglichen mit den entsprechenden modis des neutestamentl. griechisch'. Zschopau 1872 (36 pp.).—reviewd by Erdmann, in Zs. fdph., 4, 455-59.

BURCKHARDT, F., 'The Gothic Conjunctive Compared with the Corresponding Modes of New Testament Greek'. Zschopau 1872 (36 pp.).—reviewed by Erdmann, in Zs. fdph., 4, 455-59.

COLLIN, 'Sur les conjonctions gothiques' (40 pp., in Lunds univers. årsskrift, XII. 1875-76).

COLLIN, 'On Gothic Conjunctions' (40 pp., in Lund University Yearbook, XII. 1875-76).

DORFELD, C., 'Ueber die function des praefixes ge- (got. ga-) in der composition mit verben. Teil 1.: Das praefix bei Ulfilas und Tatian'. Giessen diss. 1885 (47 pp.).

DORFELD, C., 'On the function of the prefix ge- (Gothic ga-) in the composition with verbs. Part 1.: The prefix in Ulfilas and Tatian'. Giessen diss. 1885 (47 pp.).

ECKARDT, E., 'Ueber die syntax des got. relativpronomens'. Halle diss. 1875 (54 pp.).—Reviewd by Bernhardt in Zs. fdph. 6, 484.

ECKARDT, E., 'On the Syntax of the Gothic Relative Pronoun'. Halle diss. 1875 (54 pp.).—Reviewed by Bernhardt in Zs. fdph. 6, 484.

ERDMANN, O., 'Ueber got. ei u. ahd. thaz'. (Zs. fdph., 9, 43-53).

ERDMANN, O., 'On Gothic ei and Old High German thaz'. (Journal of Philology, 9, 43-53).

FRIEDRICHS, E., 'Die stellung des pron. personale im gotischen'. Leipzig diss. Jena 1891 (124 pp.). Publisht in 1893.

FRIEDRICHS, E., 'The Position of the Personal Pronoun in Gothic'. Leipzig diss. Jena 1891 (124 pp.). Published in 1893.

GERING, H. (a) 'Ueber den syntactischen gebrauch der participia im got.' (Zs. fdph., 5, 294-324; 393-433).—Reviewd by Marold, in 'Wissenschaftl. monatsblätter' 1875, 26-28.—(b) 'Zwei parallelstellen aus Wulfila und Tatian' (Zs. fdph., 6, 1-3).

GERING, H. (a) 'On the Syntactic Use of Participles in Gothic.' (Journal of Philology, 5, 294-324; 393-433).—Reviewed by Marold in 'Scientific Monthly' 1875, 26-28.—(b) 'Two Parallel Passages from Wulfila and Tatian' (Journal of Philology, 6, 1-3).

KLINGHARDT, H., 'Die syntax der got. partikel ei' (Zs. fdph., 8, 127-180; 289-329).

KLINGHARDT, H., 'The Syntax of the Gothic Particle ei' (Journal of the Faculty of Philosophy, 8, 127-180; 289-329).

KÖHLER, A., (a) 'Ueber den syntakt. gebrauch des dativs im got'. Göttingen Diss. Dresden 1864 (54 pp.), and Germ. 11, 261-305. Nachtrag Germ., 12, 63 et seq.—(b) 'Der syntaktische gebrauch des infinitivs im got.' (Germ., 12, 421-462).—(c) 'Der syntakt. gebrauch des optativs im got.' (Germanist. studien, 1, 77-133).—Reviewd by Erdmann in Zs. fdph., 5, 212-16.

KÖHLER, A., (a) "On the Syntactic Use of the Dative in Gothic." Göttingen Diss. Dresden 1864 (54 pp.), and Germ. 11, 261-305. Addendum Germ., 12, 63 et seq.—(b) "The Syntactic Use of the Infinitive in Gothic." (Germ., 12, 421-462).—(c) "The Syntactic Use of the Optative in Gothic." (Germanist. Studien, 1, 77-133).—Reviewed by Erdmann in Zs. fdph., 5, 212-16.

LICHTENHELD, A., 'Das schwache adjectiv im gotischen' (Zs. fda., 18, 17-43).

LICHTENHELD, A., 'The Weak Adjective in Gothic' (Journal of the Academy, 18, 17-43).

[Pg 96]

LÜCKE, O., 'Absolute participia im got. und ihr verhältnis zum griech. original, mit besonderer berücksichtigung der Skeireins'. Göttingen diss. Magdeburg 1876 (58 pp.).—Reviewd by Bernhardt in Zs. fdph., 8, 352-54.

LÜCKE, O., 'Absolute participles in Gothic and their relationship to Greek originals, with special consideration of the Skeireins'. Göttingen diss. Magdeburg 1876 (58 pp.).—Reviewed by Bernhardt in Zs. fdph., 8, 352-54.

MAROLD, K., (a) 'Futurum und futurische ausdrücke im gotischen' (Wissensch. monatsblätter 1875, 169-176).—(b) 'Ueber die got. conjunctionen, welche οὖν und γάρ vertreten'. Progr. Königsberg 1881 (30 pp.).

MAROLD, K., (a) 'Futurum and Future Expressions in Gothic' (Scientific Monthly Journal 1875, 169-176).—(b) 'On the Gothic Conjunctions That Represent οὖν and γάρ'. Progress Report, Königsberg 1881 (30 pp.).

MOERKERKEN, P. H. van, 'Over de verbinding der volzinnen in't gotisch' (Bekroond..en uitgeg. door de k. vlaamsche acad. voor taal en letterk.). Gent 1888 (104 pp.).

MOERKERKEN, P. H. van, 'On the Connection of Complete Sentences in Gothic' (Awarded and published by the Royal Flemish Academy for Language and Literature). Ghent 1888 (104 pp.).

MOUREK, V. E., (a) 'Syntax der got. praepositionen'. Prag 1890 (X and 234 pp.). [In the Czechic language]. Reviewd by Heinzel in Anz. fda., 17, 91-93.—(b) 'Ueber den einfluss des hauptsatzes auf den modus des nebensatzes im got.' (Sitzungsber. d. k. böhm. ges. der wissensch. 1892, 5, 263-96).—(c) 'Syntax der mehrfachen sätze im gotischen'. Prag 1893 (X and 334 pp.). [In the Czechic language, pp. 285-334 an extract in the German language].

MOUREK, V. E., (a) 'Syntax of Gothic Prepositions'. Prague 1890 (X and 234 pp.). [In Czech]. Reviewed by Heinzel in Anz. fda., 17, 91-93.—(b) 'On the Influence of the Main Clause on the Mood of the Subordinate Clause in Gothic.' (Sitzungsber. d. k. böhm. ges. der wisensch. 1892, 5, 263-96).—(c) 'Syntax of Multiple Sentences in Gothic'. Prague 1893 (X and 334 pp.). [In Czech, pp. 285-334 an extract in German].

NABER, F., 'Gotische Praepositionen' I. Progr. Detmold 1879 (26 pp.).

NABER, F., 'Gothic Prepositions' I. Progr. Detmold 1879 (26 pp.).

PIPER, P., 'Ueber den gebrauch des dativs im Ulfilas, Heliand und Otfrid'. Progr. Altona 1874 (30 pp.).—Reviewd by Erdmann in Zs. fdph., 6, 120-23.

PIPER, P., 'On the Use of the Dative in Ulfilas, Heliand, and Otfrid'. Progr. Altona 1874 (30 pp.).—Reviewed by Erdmann in Zs. fdph., 6, 120-23.

RÜCKERT, H., 'Die gotischen absoluten nominativ-und accusativ-constructionen' (Germ. 11, 415-43).

RÜCKERT, H., 'The Gothic Absolute Nominative and Accusative Constructions' (Germ. 11, 415-43).

SALLWÜRK, E. v., 'Die Syntax des Wulfila' I (I. die fürwörter, II. der relativsatz, III. der inhaltssatz). Progr. Pforzheim 1875 (36 pp.).

SALLWÜRK, E. v., 'The Syntax of Wulfila' I (I. the pronouns, II. the relative clause, III. the content clause). Progr. Pforzheim 1875 (36 pp.).

SCHIRMER, K., 'Ueber den gebrauch des optativs im got.' Marburg diss. 1874 (47 pp.).—Reviewd by Bernhardt in Zs. fdph., 6, 485.

SCHIRMER, K., 'On the Use of the Optative in Gothic.' Marburg diss. 1874 (47 pp.).—Reviewed by Bernhardt in Zs. fdph., 6, 485.

SCHRADER, K., 'Ueber den syntakt. gebrauch des genitivs in der got. sprache'. Göttingen diss. 1875 (58 pp.).

SCHRADER, K., 'On the Syntactic Use of the Genitive in the Gothic Language'. Göttingen diss. 1875 (58 pp.).

SKLADNY, A., 'Ueber das got. passiv.' Progr. Neisse 1873 (19 pp.).—Reviewd by Bernhardt in Zs. fdph., 6, 483.

SKLADNY, A., 'On the Gothic Passive.' Progr. Neisse 1873 (19 pp.).—Reviewed by Bernhardt in Zs. fdph., 6, 483.

SILBER, 'Versuch über den got. dativ.' Progr. Naumburg 1845 (16 pp.).

SILBER, 'Essay on the Gothic Dative.' Naumburg Program 1845 (16 pp.).

STREITBERG, W., 'Perfective und imperfective actionsart im germanischen'. Introduction and I. part: 'Gotisch' (Beitr. 15, 70-177).

STREITBERG, W., 'Perfective and Imperfective Action Types in Germanic'. Introduction and Part I: 'Gothic' (Beitr. 15, 70-177).

TOBLER, L., 'Conjunctionen mit mehrfacher bedeutung; ein beitrag zur lehre vom satzgefüge' (Beitr. 5, 358-88).

TOBLER, L., 'Conjunctions with Multiple Meanings; a Contribution to the Theory of Sentence Structure' (Contributions 5, 358-88).

WEISKER, Ed., 'Ueber die bedingungssätze im gotischen'. Progr. Freiburg in Schlesien 1880 (14 pp.).

WEISKER, Ed., 'On the Conditional Sentences in Gothic'. Progr. Freiburg in Schlesien 1880 (14 pp.).

[Pg 97]

SELECTIONS FOR READING.

1. FROM THE GOSPEL OF ST. MATTHEW.
(CODEX ARGENTEUS).

Chap. V. 17 Ni hugjaiþ ei qemjau gatairan witoþ aiþþau praufetuns; ni qam gatairan, ak usfulljan. 18 amen auk qiþa izwis: und þatei usleiþiþ himins jah airþa, jota ains aiþþau ains striks ni usleiþiþ af witoda, unte allata wairþiþ. 19 iþ saei nu gatairiþ aina anabusne þizo minnistono, jah laisjai swa mans, minnista haitada in þiudangardjai himine; iþ saei taujiþ jah laisjai swa, sah mikils haitada in þiudangardjai himine.

Chap. V. 17 Don't let yourselves be fooled by charming talk from false prophets; they don't come to you genuinely but as a disguise. 18 Amen, I tell you this: whatever happens on earth and in the heavens, nothing comes into being without its cause, because everything comes into existence. 19 But whoever is truly grounded in these teachings and lives by them will be called great in the kingdom of heaven; and whoever breaks and misleads others by not living by them will be called least in the kingdom of heaven.

20 Qiþa auk izwis þatei nibai managizo wairþiþ izwaraizos garaihteins þau þize bokarje jah Fareisaie, ni þau qimiþ in þiudangardjai himine. 21 hausideduþ þatei qiþan ist þaim airizam: ni maurþrjais; iþ saei maurþreiþ, skula wairþiþ stauai. 22 aþþan ik qiþa izwis þatei ƕazuh modags broþr seinamma sware skula wairþiþ stauai; iþ saei qiþiþ broþr seinamma raka, skula wairþiþ gaqumþai; aþþan saei qiþiþ dwala, skula wairþiþ in gaiainnan funins. 23 jabai nu bairais aibr þein du hunslastada, jah jainar gamuneis þatei broþar þeins habaiþ ƕa bi þuk, 24 aflet jainar þo giba þeina in andwairþja hunslastadis, jah gagg faurþis gasibjon broþr þeinamma, jah biþe atgaggands atbair þo giba þeina. 25 sijais waila hugjands andastauin þeinamma sprauto, und þatei is in wiga miþ imma, ibai ƕan atgibai þuk sa andastaua stauin, jah sa staua þuk atgibai andbahta, jah in karkara galagjaza. 26 amen qiþa þus: ni usgaggis jainþro, unte usgibis þana minnistan kintu.

20 I say to you that whoever has much will be given more, and whoever has little will lose even what they think they have. 21 Listen to what I say to those who are listening: do not murder; but whoever murders will be judged. 22 Then I say to you that whatever your brother does wrong should be judged; but whoever says to his brother, "You fool," should be in danger of hellfire. 23 If you bring your gift to the altar and there remember that your brother has something against you, 24 leave your gift there in front of the altar; first go and be reconciled to your brother, and then come and offer your gift. 25 Agree with your adversary quickly, while you are still on the way with him, lest your adversary deliver you to the judge, and the judge hand you over to the officer, and you be thrown into prison. 26 Truly I say to you, you will not get out of there until you have paid the last penny.

27 Hausideduþ þatei qiþan ist: ni horinos. 28 aþþan ik qiþa izwis, þatei ƕazuh saei saiƕiþ qinon du luston izos, ju gahorinoda izai in hairtin seinamma. 29 iþ jabai augo þein þata taihswo marzjai þuk, usstigg [2] ita jah wairp af [Pg 98]þus; batizo ist auk þus ei fraqistnai ains liþiwe þeinaize, jah ni allata leik þein gadriusai in gaiainnan. 30 jah jabai taihswo þeina handus marzjai þuk, afmait þo jah wairp af þus; batizo ist auk þus ei fraqistnai ains liþiwe þeinaize, jah ni allata leik þein gadriusai in gaiainnan. 31 qiþanuh þan ist þatei ƕazuh [3] saei afletai qen, gibai izai afstassais bokos. 32 iþ ik qiþa izwis þatei ƕazuh saei afletiþ qen seina, inuh fairina kalkinassaus, taujiþ þo horinon; jah sa ize afsatida liugaiþ, horinoþ.

33 Aftra hausideduþ þatei qiþan ist þaim airizam: ni ufarswarais, iþ usgibais fraujin aiþans þeinans. 34 aþþan ik qiþa izwis ni swaran allis, ni bi himina, unte stols ist guþs; 35 nih bi airþai, unte fotubaurd ist fotiwe is, nih bi Iairusaulymai, unte baurgs ist þis mikilins þiudanis; 36 nih bi haubida þeinamma swarais, unte ni magt ain tagl ƕeit aiþþau swart gataujan. 37 sijaiþ-þan waurd izwar: ja, ja; ne, ne; iþ þata managizo þaim us þamma ubilin ist.

33 Here’s what I say to those who ask: Do not swear by the heavens, for the throne belongs to God; 34 nor by the earth, for it is his footstool; nor by Jerusalem, for it is the city of the great King; 36 nor by your own head, for you cannot make a single hair white or black. 37 Simply let your yes be yes, and your no be no; anything beyond that comes from evil.

38 Hausideduþ þatei qiþan ist: augo und augin, jah tunþu und tunþau. 39 iþ ik qiþa izwis ni andstandan allis þamma unseljin; ak jabai ƕas þuk stautai bi taihswon þeina kinnu, wandei imma jah þo anþara. 40 jah þamma wiljandin miþ þus staua jah paida þeina niman, aflet imma jah wastja. 41 jah jabai ƕas þuk ananauþjai rasta aina, gaggais miþ imma twos. 42 þamma bidjandin þuk gibais, jah þamma wiljandin af þus leiƕan sis ni uswandjais.

38 This is what I say: eye and eyes, and purpose and purposes. 39 But if I say something to you, you should not resist all of that; but if someone makes you feel uneasy about your body, change it and also the other. 40 And for that want, you stand and take your own, release it and let it go. 41 And if someone is taking your path, go with them two. 42 To the asking, you should give, and to the wanting, do not turn away from them.

43 Hausideduþ þatei qiþan ist: frijos neƕundjan þeinana, jah fiais fiand þeinana. 44 aþþan ik qiþa izwis: frijoþ fijands izwarans, þiuþjaiþ þans wrikandans izwis, waila taujaiþ þaim hatjandam izwis, jah bidjaiþ bi þans usþriutandans izwis, 45 ei wairþaiþ sunjus attins izwaris þis in himinam, unte sunnon seina urranneiþ ana ubilans jah godans, jah rigneiþ ana garaihtans jah ana inwindans. 46 jabai auk frijoþ þans frijondans izwis ainans, ƕo mizdono habaiþ? niu jah þai þiudo þata samo taujand? 47 jah jabai goleiþ þans frijonds izwarans þatainei, ƕe managizo taujiþ? niu jah motarjos þata samo taujand? 48 sijaiþ nu jus fullatojai, swaswe atta izwar sa in himinam fullatojis ist.

43 This is what I say: love your enemies, and do good to those who hate you. 44 Then I say to you: love your friends, just as they are treating you, and treat them well, and pray for those who mistreat you, 45 so that you may be children of your Father in heaven, for he lets his sun rise on the evil and the good, and sends rain on the righteous and the unrighteous. 46 If you love only those who love you, what reward do you have? Don’t even the tax collectors do the same? 47 And if you greet only your friends, what are you doing that is unusual? Don’t even the pagans do that? 48 Be perfect, therefore, as your heavenly Father is perfect.

Chap. VI. 1 Atsaiƕiþ armaion izwara ni taujan in andwairþja manne du saiƕan im; aiþþau laun ni habaiþ fram attin izwaramma þamma in himinam. 2 þan nu taujais armaion, ni haurnjais faura þus, swaswe þai liutans taujand in gaqumþim jah in garunsim, ei hauhjaindau fram mannam; amen qiþa izwis: andnemun mizdon seina. 3 iþ þuk taujandan armaion ni witi hleidumei þeina, ƕa taujiþ[Pg 99] taihswo þeina, 4 ei sijai so armahairtiþa þeina in fulhsnja, jah atta þeins saei saiƕiþ in fulhsnja [4], usgibiþ þus in bairhtein. 5 jah þan bidjaiþ, ni sijaiþ swaswe þai liutans, unte frijond in gaqumþim jah waihstam plapjo standandans bidjan, ei gaumjaindau mannam. amen, qiþa izwis, þatei haband mizdon seina. 6 iþ þu þan bidjais, gagg in heþjon þeina, jah galukands haurdai þeinai bidei du attin þeinamma þamma in fulhsnja, jah atta þeins saei saiƕiþ in fulhsnja [5], usgibiþ þus in bairhtein.

7 Bidjandansuþ-þan ni filuwaurdjaiþ, swaswe þai þiudo; þugkeiþ im auk ei in filuwaurdein seinai andhausjaindau. 8 ni galeikoþ nu þaim; wait auk atta izwar þizei jus þaurbuþ, faurþizei jus bidjaiþ ina. 9 swa nu bidjaiþ jus: atta unsar þu in himinam, weihnai namo þein. 10 qimai þiudinassus þeins. wairþai wilja þeins, swe in himina jah ana airþai. 11 hlaif unsarana þana sinteinan gif uns himma daga. 12 jah aflet uns þatei skulans sijaima, swaswe jah weis afletam þaim skulam unsaraim. 13 jah ni briggais uns in fraistubnjai, ak lausei uns af þamma ubilin; unte þeina ist þiudangardi jah mahts jah wulþus in aiwins. amen.

7 Bidjandansuþ-þan ni filuwaurdjaiþ, just like the people; they also do it in their daily lives. 8 Don't worry about them now; your father knows what you need before you ask him. 9 So now, when you ask: Our father in heaven, may your name be honored. 10 Let your kingdom come. Let your will be done, just like in heaven and on earth. 11 Give us today our daily bread. 12 And forgive us our debts, just as we have forgiven our debtors. 13 And do not lead us into temptation, but deliver us from evil; for yours is the kingdom, the power, and the glory forever. Amen.

14 Unte jabai afletiþ mannam missadedins ize, afletiþ jah izwis atta izwar sa ufar himinam. 15 iþ jabai ni afletiþ mannam missadedins ize, ni þau atta izwar afletiþ missadedins izwaros.

14 If you forgive people their wrongs, your Father in heaven will also forgive you. 15 But if you do not forgive people their wrongs, your Father will not forgive your wrongs.

16 Aþþan biþe fastaiþ, ni wairþaiþ swaswe þai liutans gaurai; frawardjand auk andwairþja seina, ei gasaiƕaindau mannam fastandans. amen, qiþa izwis, þatei andnemun mizdon seina. 17 iþ þu fastands salbo haubiþ þein, jah ludja þeina þwah, 18 ei ni gasaiƕaizau mannam fastands, ak attin þeinamma þamma in fulhsnja, jah atta þeins, saei saiƕiþ in fulhsnja, usgibiþ þus.

16 When you fast, don't be like the hypocrites who put on a sad face; they make it obvious to everyone that they're fasting. Truly, I tell you, they have received their reward in full. 17 But when you fast, anoint your head and wash your face, 18 so that it won't be obvious to others that you're fasting, but only to your Father, who is unseen; and your Father, who sees what is done in secret, will reward you.

19 Ni huzdjaiþ izwis huzda ana airþai, þarei malo jah nidwa frawardeiþ, jah þarei þiubos ufgraband jah hlifand. 20 iþ huzdjaiþ izwis huzda in himina, þarei nih malo nih nidwa frawardeiþ, jah þarei þiubos ni ufgraband nih stiland. 21 þarei auk ist huzd izwar, þaruh ist jah hairto izwar.

19 You will find your home in the earth, where there is no malice and no violence, and where the gentle are sheltered and protected. 20 But you will find your home in the heavens, where there is neither malice nor violence, and where the gentle neither suffer nor cease to exist. 21 Therefore, your home is true, and so is your heart.

22 Lukarn leikis ist augo: jabai nu augo þein ainfalþ ist, allata leik þein liuhadein wairþiþ; 23 iþ jabai augo þein unsel ist, allata leik þein riqizein wairþiþ. jabai nu liuhaþ þata in þus riqiz ist, þata riqiz ƕan filu!

22 If your eye is healthy, your whole body will be full of light; 23 but if your eye is bad, your whole body will be full of darkness. If then the light in you is darkness, how great is the darkness!

24 Ni manna mag twaim fraujam skalkinon; unte jabai fijaiþ ainana, jah anþarana frijoþ; aiþþau ainamma ufhauseiþ, iþ anþaramma frakann. ni maguþ guþa skalkinon jah mammonin [6]. 25 duþþe qiþa izwis: ni maurnaiþ saiwalai izwarai ƕa matjaiþ jah ƕa drigkaiþ, nih leika izwaramma [Pg 100]ƕe wasjaiþ; niu saiwala mais ist fodeinai jah leik wastjom? 26 insaiƕiþ du fuglam himinis, þei ni saiand nih sneiþand, nih lisand in banstins, jah atta izwar sa ufar himinam fodeiþ ins. niu jus mais wulþrizans sijuþ þaim? 27 iþ ƕas izwara maurnands mag anaaukan ana wahstu seinana aleina aina? 28 jah bi wastjos ƕa saurgaiþ? gakunnaiþ blomans haiþjos, ƕaiwa wahsjand; nih arbaidjand nih spinnand. 29 qiþuh þan izwis þatei nih Saulaumon in allamma wulþau seinamma gawasida sik swe ains þize. 30 jah þande þata hawi haiþjos himma daga wisando jah gistradagis in auhn galagiþ guþ swa wasjiþ, ƕaiwa mais izwis, leitil galaubjandans? 31 ni maurnaiþ nu qiþandans: ƕa matjam aiþþau ƕa drigkam, aiþþau ƕe wasjaima? 32 all auk þata þiudos sokjand; waituh þan atta izwar sa ufar himinam þatei þaurbuþ——

2. FROM THE GOSPEL OF ST. MARK.
(CODEX ARGENTEUS).
AIWAGGELJO ÞAIRH MARKU ANASTODEIÞ.

Chap. I. 1 Anastodeins aiwaggeljons Iesuis Xristaus sunaus guþs.

Chap. I. 1 The Gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God.

2 Swe gameliþ ist in Esaïin praufetau: sai, ik insandja aggilu meinana faura þus, saei gamanweiþ wig þeinana faura þus. 3 stibna wopjandins in auþidai: manweiþ wig fraujins, raihtos waurkeiþ staigos guþs unsaris. 4 was Iohannes daupjands in auþidai jah merjands daupein idreigos du aflageinai frawaurhte. 5 jah usiddjedun du imma all Iudaialand jah Iairusaulymeis, jah daupidai wesun allai in Iaurdane aƕai fram imma, andhaitandans frawaurhtim seinaim. 6 wasuþ-þan Iohannes gawasiþs taglam ulbandaus jah gairda filleina bi hup seinana, jah matida þramsteins jah miliþ haiþiwisk [7], 7 jah merida qiþands: qimiþ swinþoza mis sa afar mis, þizei ik ni im wairþs anahneiwands andbindan skaudaraip skohe is. 8 aþþan ik daupja izwis in watin, iþ is daupeiþ izwis in ahmin weihamma.

9 Jah warþ in jainaim dagam, qam Iesus fram Nazaraiþ Galeilaias, jah daupiþs was fram Iohanne in Iaurdane. 10 jah suns usgaggands us þamma watin gasaƕ uslukanans [8] himinans, jah ahman swe ahak atgaggandan ana ina. 11 jah stibna qam us himinam: þu is sunus meins sa liuba, in þuzei waila galeikaida [9]. 12 jah suns sai, ahma ina ustauh in auþida. 13 jah was in þizai auþidai dage fidwor tiguns fraisans fram Satanin, jah was miþ diuzam, jah aggileis andbahtidedun imma.

[Pg 101]

14 Iþ afar þatei atgibans warþ Iohannes, qam Iesus in Galeilaia merjands aiwaggeljon þiudangardjos guþs, 15 qiþands þatei usfullnoda þata mel jah atneƕida sik þiudangardi guþs: idreigoþ jah galaubeiþ in aiwaggeljon. 16 jah ƕarbonds faur marein Galeilaias gasaƕ Seimonu jah Andraian broþar is, þis Seimonis, wairpandans nati in marein; wesun auk fiskjans. 17 jah qaþ im Iesus: hirjats afar mis, jah gatauja igqis wairþan nutans manne. 18 jah suns afletandans þo natja seina laistidedun afar imma. 19 jah jainþro inngaggands framis leitil [10] gasaƕ Iakobu þana Zaibaidaiaus jah Iohanne broþar is, jah þans in skipa manwjandans natja. 20 jah suns haihait ins. jah afletandans attan seinana Zaibaidaiu in þamma skipa miþ asnjam, galiþun afar imma.

21 Jah galiþun in Kafarnaum, jah suns sabbato daga galeiþands in synagogen laisida ins. 22 jah usfilmans waurþun ana þizai laiseinai is; unte was laisjands ins swe waldufni habands jah ni swaswe þai bokarjos. 23 jah was in þizai synagogen ize manna in unhrainjamma ahmin, jah ufhropida 24 qiþands: fralet, ƕa uns jah þus, Iesu Nazorenai? qamt fraqistjan uns; kann þuk, ƕas þu is, sa weiha guþs. 25 jah andbait ina Iesus qiþands: þahai jah usgagg ut us þamma, ahma unhrainja. 26 jah tahida ina ahma sa unhrainja, jah hropjands stibnai mikilai usiddja us imma. 27 jah afslauþnodedun allai sildaleikjandans, swaei sokidedun miþ sis misso qiþandans: ƕa sijai þata? ƕo so laiseino so niujo, ei miþ waldufnja jah ahmam þaim unhrainjam anabiudiþ jah ufhausjand imma? 28 usiddja þan meriþa is suns and allans bisitands Galeilaias.

21 Jesus went to Capernaum, and on the Sabbath he taught in the synagogues. 22 Everyone was amazed at his teaching because he taught with authority, not like their teachers of the law. 23 In the synagogue, there was a man possessed by an unclean spirit, and he cried out, 24 “What do you want with us, Jesus of Nazareth? Have you come to destroy us? I know who you are—the Holy One of God!” 25 Jesus said firmly, “Be quiet! Come out of him!” 26 The unclean spirit shook the man violently and came out of him with a shriek. 27 The people were all so amazed that they asked each other, “What is this? A new teaching—and with authority! He even gives orders to unclean spirits and they obey him.” 28 News about him spread quickly over the whole region of Galilee.

29 Jah suns us þizai synagogen usgaggandans qemun in garda Seimonis jah Andraiins miþ Iakobau jah Iohannen. 30 iþ swaihro Seimonis lag in brinnon; jah suns qeþun imma bi ija. 31 jah duatgaggands urraisida þo undgreipands handu izos, jah aflailot þo so brinno suns, jah andbahtida im. 32 Andanahtja þan waurþanamma, þan gasaggq sauil, berun du imma allans þans ubil habandans jah unhulþons habandans. 33 jah so baurgs alla garunnana was at daura. 34 jah gahailida managans ubil habandans missaleikaim sauhtim, jah unhulþons managos uswarp, jah ni fralailot rodjan þos unhulþons, unte kunþedun ina.

29 The sons of the synagogue gathered at the house of Simon and Andrew with Jacob and John. 30 But Simon was lying in fever; and they spoke to him about her. 31 And when they approached and took his hand, he lifted him up, and the fever left him, and he served them. 32 That evening after sunset, they brought to him all who were sick and possessed by demons. 33 And the whole city was gathered at the door. 34 And he healed many who were sick with various diseases, and he cast out many demons, and he did not allow the demons to speak because they knew him.

35 Jah air uhtwon usstandands usiddja, jah galaiþ ana auþjana staþ, jah jainar baþ. 36 jah galaistans waurþun imma Seimon jah þai miþ imma. 37 jah bigitandans ina qeþun du imma þatei allai þuk sokjand. 38 jah qaþ du im: gaggam du þaim bisunjane haimom [11] jah baurgim, ei jah jainar merjau, unte duþe qam. 39 jah was merjands [Pg 102]in synagogim ize and alla Galeilaian jah unhulþons uswairpands.

40 Jah qam at imma þrutsfill habands, bidjands ina jah kniwam knussjands jah qiþands du imma þatei jabai wileis, magt mik gahrainjan. 41 iþ Iesus infeinands, ufrakjands handu seina attaitok imma jah qaþ imma: wiljau, wairþ hrains. 42 jah biþe qaþ þata Iesus, suns þata þrutsfill aflaiþ af imma, jah hrains warþ. 43 jah gaƕotjands imma suns ussandida ina, 44 jah qaþ du imma: saiƕ ei mannhun ni qiþais waiht; ak gagg þuk silban ataugjan gudjin, jah atbair fram gahraineinai þeinai þatei anabauþ Moses du weitwodiþai im. 45 iþ is usgaggands dugann merjan filu jah usqiþan þata waurd, swaswe is juþan ni mahta andaugjo in baurg galeiþan, ak uta ana auþjaim stadim was; jah iddjedun du imma allaþro.

40 After a long time, the sick man answered him, saying, "I have no one to put me into the pool when the water is stirred up, and while I am going, another steps down before me." 41 Jesus said to him, "Get up, take your mat, and walk." 42 Immediately, the man was healed, and he took up his mat and walked. 43 Now that day was the Sabbath, so the Jews said to the man who had been healed, "It is the Sabbath, and it is not lawful for you to take up your mat." 44 But he answered them, "The man who healed me said to me, 'Take up your mat and walk.'" 45 They asked him, "Who is the man who said to you, 'Take up your mat and walk'?" 46 Now the man who had been healed did not know who it was, for Jesus had withdrawn, as there was a crowd in the place. 47 Afterward, Jesus found him in the temple and said to him, "See, you are well! Sin no more, that nothing worse may happen to you." 48 The man went away and told the Jews that it was Jesus who had healed him.

Chap. II. 1 Jah galaiþ aftra in Kafarnaum afar dagans, jah gafrehun þatei in garda ist. 2 jah suns gaqemun managai, swaswe juþan ni gamostedun nih at daura, jah rodida im waurd. 3 jah qemun at imma usliþan bairandans, hafanana fram fidworim [12]. 4 jah ni magandans neƕa qiman imma faura manageim, andhulidedun hrot þarei was Iesus, jah usgrabandans insailidedun þata badi, jah fralailotun ana þammei lag sa usliþa. 5 Gasaiƕands þan Iesus galaubein ize qaþ du þamma usliþin: barnilo, afletanda þus frawaurhteis þeinos. 6 wesunuh þan sumai þize bokarje jainar sitandans jah þagkjandans sis in hairtam seinaim: 7 ƕa sa swa rodeiþ naiteinins? ƕas mag afletan frawaurhtins, niba ains guþ? 8 jah suns ufkunnands Iesus ahmin seinamma þatei swa þai mitodedun sis, qaþ du im: duƕe mitoþ þata in hairtam izwaraim? 9 ƕaþar ist azetizo du qiþan þamma usliþin: afletanda [13] þus frawaurhteis þeinos, þau qiþan: urreis jah nim þata badi þeinata jah gagg? 10 aþþan ei witeiþ þatei waldufni habaiþ sunus mans ana airþai afletan frawaurhtins, qaþ du þamma usliþin: 11 þus qiþa: urreis nimuh þata badi þein jah gagg du garda þeinamma. 12 jah urrais suns jah ushafjands badi usiddja faura andwairþja allaize, swaswe usgeisnodedun allai jah hauhidedun mikiljandans guþ, qiþandans þatei aiw swa ni gaseƕum [14].

13 Jah galaiþ aftra faur marein, jah all manageins iddjedun du imma, jah laisida ins. 14 jah ƕarbonds gasaƕ Laiwwi þana Alfaiaus sitandan at motai, jah qaþ du imma: gagg afar mis. jah usstandands iddja afar imma. 15 jah warþ, biþe is anakumbida in garda is, jah managai motarjos jah frawaurhtai miþanakumbidedun Iesua jah siponjam is; wesun auk managai jah iddjedun afar imma. 16 jah [Pg 103]þai bokarjos jah Fareisaieis gasaiƕandans ina matjandan miþ þaim motarjam jah frawaurhtaim, qeþun du þaim siponjam is: ƕa ist þatei miþ motarjam jah frawaurhtaim [15] matjiþ jah driggkiþ? 17 jah gahausjands Iesus qaþ du im: ni þaurbun swinþai lekeis, ak þai ubilaba habandans; ni qam laþon uswaurhtans ak frawaurhtans.

18 Jah wesun siponjos Iohannis jah Fareisaieis fastandans; jah atiddjedun jah qeþun du imma: duƕe siponjos Iohannes jah Fareisaieis fastand, iþ þai þeinai siponjos ni fastand? 19 jah qaþ im Iesus: ibai magun sunjus bruþfadis, und þatei miþ im ist bruþfaþs, fastan? swa lagga ƕeila swe miþ sis haband bruþfad, ni magun fastan. 20 aþþan atgaggand dagos þan afnimada af im sa bruþfaþs, jah þan fastand in jainamma daga. 21 ni manna plat fanins niujis siujiþ ana snagan fairnjana; ibai afnimai fullon af þamma sa niuja þamma fairnjin, jah wairsiza gataura wairþiþ. 22 ni manna giutiþ wein juggata in balgins fairnjans; ibai aufto distairai wein þata niujo þans balgins, jah wein usgutniþ, jah þai balgeis fraqistnand; ak wein juggata in balgins niujans giutand.

18 John's disciples and the Pharisees were fasting; and they came and asked him: Why do John's disciples and the Pharisees fast, but your disciples do not fast? 19 Jesus said to them: Can the wedding guests fast while the bridegroom is with them? As long as they have the bridegroom with them, they cannot fast. 20 But the days will come when the bridegroom is taken away from them, and then they will fast in that day. 21 No one sews a piece of unshrunk cloth on an old garment; otherwise, the patch tears away from it, and the worst tear is made. 22 And no one puts new wine into old wineskins; otherwise, the wine will burst the skins, and the wine is lost, and the skins are as well; but new wine must be put into fresh wineskins.

23 Jah warþ þairhgaggan imma sabbato daga þairh atisk, jah dugunnun siponjos is skewjandans raupjan ahsa. 24 jah Fareisaieis qeþun du imma: sai, ƕa taujand siponjos þeinai sabbatim þatei ni skuld ist? 25 jah is qaþ du im: niu ussuggwuþ aiw ƕa gatawida Daweid, þan þaurfta jah gredags was, is jah þai miþ imma? 26 ƕaiwa galaiþ in gard guþs uf Abiaþara gudjin jah hlaibans faurlageinais matida, þanzei ni skuld ist matjan niba ainaim gudjam, jah gaf jah þaim miþ sis wisandam? 27 jah qaþ im: sabbato in mans warþ gaskapans, ni manna in sabbato dagis; 28 swaei frauja ist sa sunus mans jah þamma sabbato.

23 Then he went through the grainfields on the Sabbath, and his disciples began to pluck heads of grain. 24 And the Pharisees said to him, "Look, why are they doing what is not lawful on the Sabbath?" 25 And he said to them, "Have you never read what David did when he was in need and hungry, he and those with him? 26 How he went into the house of God in the days of Abiathar the high priest and ate the showbread, which is not lawful to eat except for the priests, and also gave some to those who were with him?" 27 And he said to them, "The Sabbath was made for man, not man for the Sabbath. 28 Therefore, the Son of Man is also Lord of the Sabbath."

Chap. III. 1 Jah galaiþ aftra in synagogen, jah was jainar manna gaþaursana habands handu. 2 jah witaidedun imma, hailidediu sabbato daga, ei wrohidedeina ina. 3 jah qaþ du þamma mann þamma gaþaursana habandin handu: urreis in midumai. 4 jah qaþ du im; skuldu ist in sabbatim þiuþ taujan aiþþau unþiuþ taujan, saiwala nasjan aiþþau usqistjan? iþ eis þahaidedun. 5 jah ussaiƕands ins miþ moda, gaurs in daubiþos hairtins ize, qaþ du þamma mann: ufrakei þo handu þeina! jah ufrakida, jah gastoþ aftra so handus is.

Chap. III. 1 Jesus went back into the synagogues, and there was a man with a withered hand. 2 They were watching him closely to see if he would heal him on the Sabbath so they could accuse him. 3 He said to the man with the withered hand, “Stand up in front of everyone.” 4 Then he asked them, “Is it lawful on the Sabbath to do good or to do evil, to save life or to kill?” But they remained silent. 5 After looking around at them in anger and deeply distressed at their stubborn hearts, he said to the man, “Stretch out your hand!” He stretched it out, and his hand was restored.

6 Jah gaggandans þan Fareisaieis sunsaiw miþ þaim Herodianum garuni gatawidedun bi ina, ei imma usqemeina. 7 jah Iesus aflaiþ miþ siponjam seinaim du marein, jah filu manageins us Galeilaia[15] laistidedun afar imma. 8 jah u[Pg 104]s Iudaia jah us Iairusaulymim jah us Idumaia jah hindana Iaurdanaus; jah þai bi Tyra jah Seidona, manageins filu, gahausjandans ƕan filu is tawida, qemun at imma. 9 jah qaþ þaim siponjam seinaim ei skip habaiþ wesi at imma in þizos manageins, ei ni þraiheina ina. 10 managans auk gahailida, swaswe drusun ana ina ei imma attaitokeina, 11 jah swa managai swe habaidedun wundufnjos jah ahmans unhrainjans, þaih þan ina gaseƕun, drusun du imma jah hropidedun qiþandans þatei þu is sunus guþs. 12 jah filu andbait ins ei ina ni gaswikunþidedeina.

13 Jah ustaig in fairguni jah athaihait þanzei wilda is, jah galiþun du imma. 14 jah gawaurhta twalif du wisan miþ sis, jah ei insandidedi ins merjan, 15 jah haban waldufni du hailjan sauhtins jah uswairpan unhulþons. 16 jah gasatida Seimona namo Paitrus; 17 jah Iakobau þamma Zaibaidaiaus, jah Iohanne broþr Iakobaus, jah gasatida im namna Bauanairgais, þatei ist: sunjus þeiƕons; 18 jah Andraian, jah Filippu jah Barþaulaumaiu jah Matþaiu jah Þoman jah Iakobu þana Alfaiaus, jah Þaddaiu jah Seimona þana Kananeiten. 19 jah Iudan Iskarioten, saei jah galewida ina.

13 Jesus called his disciples and chose twelve of them. 14 He named them apostles, so they could be with him and to send them out to preach, 15 and to have authority to drive out demons. 16 These are the names of the twelve: Simon (whom he called Peter), 17 James son of Zebedee, and his brother John; they were given the name Boanerges, which means “sons of thunder”; 18 Andrew, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, and Simon the Zealot. 19 Judas Iscariot, who betrayed him.

20 Jah atiddjedun in gard, jah gaïddja sik managei, swaswe ni mahtedun nih hlaif matjan. 21 jah hausjandans fram imma bokarjos jah anþarai usiddjedun gahaban ina; qeþun auk þatei usgaisiþs ist. 22 jah bokarjos þai af Iairusaulymai qimandans qeþun þatei Baiailzaibul habaiþ, jah þatei in þamma reikistin unhulþono uswairpiþ þaim unhulþom. 23 jah athaitands ins in gajukom qaþ du im: ƕaiwa mag Satanas Satanan uswairpan? 24 jah jabai þiudangardi wiþra sik gadailjada, ni mag standan so þiudangardi jaina. 25 jah jabai gards wiþra sik gadailjada, ni mag standan sa gards jains. 26 jah jabai Satana usstoþ ana sik silban jah gadailiþs warþ, ni mag gastandan, ak andi habaiþ. 27 ni manna mag kasa swinþis galeiþands in gard is wilwan, niba faurþis þana swinþan gabindiþ; jah þan[16] þana gard is diswilwai. 28 amen, qiþa izwis, þatei allata afletada þata frawaurhte sunum manne, jah naiteinos swa managos swaswe wajamerjand; 29 aþþan saei wajamereiþ ahman weihana, ni habaiþ fralet aiw, ak skula ist aiweinaizos frawaurhtais. 30 unte qeþun: ahman unhrainjana habaiþ.

31 Jah qemun þan aiþei is jah broþrjus is jah uta standandona insandidedun du imma, haitandona ina. 32 jah setun bi ina managei; qeþun þan du imma: sai, aiþei þeina jah broþrjus þeinai jah swistrjus þeinos uta sokjand þuk. 33 jah andhof im qiþands: ƕo ist so aiþei meina aiþþau[Pg 105] þai broþrjus meinai? 34 jah bisaiƕands bisunjane þans bi sik sitandans qaþ: sai, aiþei meina jah þai broþrjus meinai. 35 saei allis waurkeiþ wiljan guþs, sa jah broþar meins jah swistar jah aiþei ist.

31 So they said to him, “Your mother and your brothers are standing outside, wanting to speak to you.” 32 But he answered the one who told him, “Look, your mother and your brothers are outside, seeking you.” 33 And he replied to them, “Who is my mother, and who are my brothers?” 34 And pointing to his disciples, he said, “Here are my mother and my brothers. 35 For whoever does the will of my Father in heaven is my brother and sister and mother.”

Chap. IV. 1 Jah aftra Iesus dugann laisjan at marein, jah galesun sik du imma manageins filu, swaswe ina galeiþandan [17] in skip gasitan in marein; jah alla so managei wiþra marein ana staþa was. 2 jah laisida ins in gajukom manag, jah qaþ im in laiseinai seinai: 3 hauseiþ! sai, urrann sa saiands du saian fraiwa seinamma. 4 jah warþ, miþþanei saiso, sum raihtis gadraus faur wig, jah qemun fuglos jah fretun þata. 5 anþaruþ-þan gadraus ana stainahamma, þarei ni habaida airþa managa, jah suns urrann, in þizei ni habaida diupaizos airþos; 6 at sunnin þan urrinnandin ufbrann, jah unte ni habaida waurtins, gaþaursnoda. 7 jah sum gadraus in þaurnuns; jah ufarstigun þai þaurnjus jah afƕapidedun þata, jah akran ni gaf. 8 jah sum gadraus in airþa goda, jah gaf akran urrinnando jah wahsjando, jah bar ain ·l· jah ain ·j· jah ain ·r·. 9 jah qaþ: saei habai ausona hausjandona, gahausjai.

10 Iþ biþe warþ sundro, frehun ina þai bi ina miþ þaim twalibim þizos gajukons. 11 jah qaþ im: izwis atgiban ist kunnan runa þiudangardjos guþs, iþ jainaim þaim uta in gajukom [18] allata wairþiþ, 12 ei saiƕandans saiƕaina jah ni gaumjaina. jah hausjandans hausjaina jah ni fraþjaina, nibai ƕan gawandjaina sik jah afletaindau im frawaurhteis. 13 jah qaþ du im: ni wituþ þo gajukon, jah ƕaiwa allos þos gajukons kunneiþ? 14 sa saijands waurd saijiþ. 15 aþþan þai wiþra wig sind, þarei saiada þata waurd, jah þan gahausjand unkarjans, suns qimiþ Satanas jah usnimiþ waurd þata insaiano in hairtam ize. 16 jah sind samaleiko þai ana stainahamma saianans, þaiei þan hausjand þata waurd, suns miþ fahedai nimand ita. 17 jah ni haband waurtins in sis, ak ƕeilaƕairbai sind; þaþroh, biþe qimiþ aglo aiþþau wrakja in þis waurdis, suns gamarzjanda. 18 jah þai sind þai in þaurnuns saianans, þai waurd hausjandans, 19 jah saurgos þizos libainais jah afmarzeins gabeins jah þai bi þata anþar lustjus innatgaggandans afƕapjand þata waurd, jah akranalaus wairþiþ. 20 jah þai sind þai ana airþai þizai godon saianans, þaei hausjand þata waurd jah andnimand, jah akran bairand, ain ·l· jah ain ·j· jah ain ·r·.

21 Jah qaþ du im: ibai lukarn qimiþ duþe ei uf melan satjaidau aiþþau undar ligr? niu ei ana lukarnastaþan satjaidau? 22 nih allis ist ƕa fulginis þatei ni gabairhtjaidau; [Pg 106]nih warþ analaugn, ak ei swikunþ wairþai. 23 jabai ƕas habai ausona hausjandona, gahausjai.

21 Do you see what I’m saying: if you look at the darkness, do you sit under it? Or do you sit at the edge of the darkness? 22 Nothing is hidden that isn't revealed; [Pg 106] nothing comes to light unless it’s brought forth. 23 If anyone has ears to hear, let them listen.

24 Jah qaþ du im: saiƕiþ, ƕa hauseiþ! In þizaiei mitaþ mitiþ, mitada izwis jah biaukada izwis þaim galaubjandam. 25 unte þisƕammeh saei habaiþ gibada imma; jah saei ni habaiþ jah þatei habaiþ afnimada imma.

24 I said to them: listen, what are you saying! In this manner, I measure and assess you and proclaim to you those who believe. 25 For this reason, he who has will be given to him; and he who doesn’t have, even what he does have will be taken from him.

26 Jah qaþ: swa ist þiudangardi guþs, swaswe jabai manna wairpiþ fraiwa ana airþa. 27 jah slepiþ jah urreisiþ naht jah daga, jah þata fraiw keiniþ jah liudiþ swe ni wait is. 28 silbo auk airþa akran bairiþ: frumist gras, þaþroh ahs, þaþroh fulleiþ kaurnis in þamma ahsa. 29 þanuh biþe atgibada akran, suns insandeiþ gilþa, unte atist asans.

26 For this is God's kingdom, just like when people labor on earth. 27 And they rest and rise night and day, and that work is known and not unseen. 28 The earth also bears fruit: first grass, then stalk, then full grain in the ear. 29 Then the harvest will come, because the season is near, since the harvest is coming.

30 Jah qaþ: ƕe galeikom þiudangardja guþs, aiþþau in ƕileikai gajukon gabairam þo? 31 swe kaurno sinapis, þatei þan saiada ana airþa, minnist allaize fraiwe ist þize ana airþai; 32 jah þan saiada, urrinniþ jah wairþiþ allaize grase maist, jah gataujiþ astans mikilans, swaswe magun uf skadau is fuglos himinis gabauan. 33 jah swaleikaim managaim gajukom rodida du im þata waurd, swaswe mahtedun hausjon. 34 iþ inuh gajukon ni rodida im, iþ sundro siponjam seinaim andband allata.

30 For what should we say about the kingdom of God, or what parable should we use to describe it? 31 It’s like a mustard seed, which is the smallest of all seeds on earth; 32 yet when planted, it grows and becomes the largest of all garden plants, with such big branches that the birds can perch in its shade. 33 With many similar parables, Jesus spoke the word to them, as much as they could understand. 34 He did not say anything to them without using a parable. But when he was alone with his own disciples, he explained everything.

35 Jah qaþ du im in jainamma daga at andanahtja þan waurþanamma: usleiþam jainis stadis. 36 jah afletandans þo managein andnemun ina swe was in skipa; jah þan anþara skipa wesun miþ imma. 37 jah warþ skura windis mikila jah wegos waltidedun in skip, swaswe ita juþan gafullnoda. 38 jah was is ana notin ana waggarja slepands, jah urraisidedun ina jah qeþun du imma: laisari, niu kara þuk þizei fraqistnam? 39 jah urreisands gasok winda jah qaþ du marein: gaslawai, afdumbn! jah anasilaida sa winds, jah warþ wis mikil. 40 jah qaþ du im: duƕe faurhtai sijuþ swa? ƕaiwa ni nauh habaiþ galaubein? 41 jah ohtedun sis agis mikil, jah qeþun du sis misso: ƕas þannu sa sijai, unte jah winds jah marei ufhausjand imma?

35 Then I saw him on the following day at dawn as he was getting up: he was in a certain place. 36 And as he was letting go, many took him; and then there were other ships with him. 37 And a great wind arose and waves crashed into the ship as if they were overflowing. 38 And he was lying at the stern, sleeping, and they woke him and said to him: Teacher, don’t you care that we are perishing? 39 And waking up, he rebuked the wind and said to the sea: Peace, be still! And the wind ceased, and there was a great calm. 40 And he said to them: Why are you so afraid? Do you still have no faith? 41 And they were filled with great fear and said to one another: Who then is this, that even the wind and the sea obey him?

Chap. V. 1 Jah qemun hindar marein in landa Gaddarene. 2 jah usgaggandin imma us skipa suns gamotida imma manna us aurahjom in ahmin unhrainjamma, 3 saei bauain habaida in aurahjom: jah ni naudibandjom eisarneinaim manna mahta ina gabindan. 4 unte is ufta eisarnam bi fotuns gabuganaim jah naudibandjom eisarneinaim gabundans was, jah galausida af sis þos naudibandjos, jah þo ana fotum eisarna gabrak, jah manna ni mahta ina gatamjan [19]. 5 jah sinteino nahtam jah dagam in aurahjom jah in fairgunjam was hropjands jah bliggwands sik stainam. 6 gasaiƕands [20] þan Iesu fairraþro rann jah inwait [Pg 107]ina, 7 jah hropjands stibnai mikilai qaþ: ƕa mis jah þus, Iesu, sunau guþs þis hauhistins? biswara þuk bi guþa, ni balwjais mis! 8 unte qaþ imma: usgagg, ahma unhrainja, us þamma mann! 9 jah frah ina: ƕa namo þein? jah qaþ du imma: namo mein Laigaion, unte managai sijum. 10 jah baþ ina filu ei ni usdrebi im us landa. 11 wasuh þan jainar hairda sweine haldana at þamma fairgunja. 12 jah bedun ina allos þos unhulþons qiþandeins: insandei unsis in þo sweina, ei in þo galeiþaima. 13 jah uslaubida im Iesus suns. jah usgaggandans ahmans þai unhrainjans galiþun in þo sweina, jah rann so hairda and driuson in marein; wesunuþ-þan swe twos þusundjos, jah afƕapnodedun in marein. 14 jah þai haldandans þo sweina gaþlauhun jah gataihun in baurg jah in haimom, jah qemun saiƕan ƕa wesi þata waurþano. 15 jah atiddjedun du Iesua, jah gasaiƕand þana wodan sitandan jah gawasidana jah fraþjandan, þana saei habaida laigaion, jah ohtedun. 16 jah spillodedun im þaiei gaseƕun, ƕaiwa warþ bi þana wodan jah bi þo sweina. 17 jah dugunnun bidjan ina galeiþan hindar markos seinos. 18 jah inngaggandan ina in skip baþ ina, saei was wods, ei miþ imma wesi. 19 jah ni lailot ina, ak qaþ du imma: gagg du garda þeinamma du þeinaim, jah gateih im, ƕan filu þus frauja gatawida jah gaarmaida þuk. 20 jah galaiþ jah dugann merjan in Daikapaulein, ƕan filu gatawida imma Iesus; jah allai sildaleikidedun.

21 Jah usleiþandin Iesua in skipa aftra hindar marein, gaqemun sik manageins filu du imma, jah was faura marein, 22 jah sai, qimiþ ains þize synagogafade namin Jaeirus; jah saiƕands ina gadraus du fotum Iesuis, 23 jah baþ ina filu, qiþands þatei dauhtar meina aftumist habaiþ, ei qimands lagjais ana þo handuns, ei ganisai jah libai. 24 jah galaiþ miþ imma, jah iddjedun afar imma manageins filu jah þraihun ina. 25 jah qinono suma wisandei in runa bloþis jera twalif, 26 jah manag gaþulandei fram managaim lekjam jah fraqimandei allamma seinamma jah ni waihtai botida, ak mais wairs habaida, 27 gahausjandei bi Iesu, atgaggandei in managein aftana attaitok wastjai is. 28 unte qaþ þatei jabai wastjom is atteka, ganisa. 29 jah sunsaiw gaþaursnoda sa brunna bloþis izos, jah ufkunþa ana leika þatei gahailnoda af þamma slaha. 30 jah sunsaiw Iesus ufkunþa in sis silbin þo us sis maht usgaggandein; gawandjands sik in managein qaþ: ƕas mis taitok wastjom? 31 jah qeþun du imma siponjos is: saiƕis þo managein þreihandein þuk, jah qiþis: ƕas mis taitok? 32 jah wlaitoda saiƕan þo þata taujandein. 33 iþ so qino ogandei jah reirandei, witandei þatei warþ bi ija, qam jah draus du imma, jah qaþ imma alla þo sunja. 34 iþ is qaþ[Pg 108] du izai: dauhtar, galaubeins þeina ganasida þuk, gagg in gawairþi, jah sijais haila af þamma slaha þeinamma.

21 Jesus got back in a boat and crossed over to the other side of the lake. A large crowd gathered around him, and he stayed by the lake. 22 Then one of the synagogue leaders, named Jairus, came and saw Jesus. He fell at his feet 23 and pleaded earnestly with him, "My little daughter is dying. Please come and put your hands on her so that she will be healed and live." 24 So Jesus went with him, and a large crowd followed and pressed around him. 25 And a woman was there who had been subject to bleeding for twelve years. 26 She had suffered a great deal under the care of many doctors and had spent all she had, yet instead of getting better, she grew worse. 27 When she heard about Jesus, she came up behind him in the crowd and touched his cloak, 28 because she thought, "If I just touch his clothes, I will be healed." 29 Immediately her bleeding stopped and she felt in her body that she was freed from her suffering. 30 At once Jesus realized that power had gone out from him; he turned around in the crowd and asked, "Who touched my clothes?" 31 "You see the people crowding against you," his disciples answered, "and yet you can ask, 'Who touched me?'" 32 But Jesus kept looking around to see who had done it. 33 Then the woman, knowing what had happened to her, came and fell at his feet, trembling with fear, and told him the whole truth. 34 He said to her, "Daughter, your faith has healed you. Go in peace and be freed from your suffering."

35 Nauhþanuh imma rodjandin qemun fram þamma synagogafada, qiþandans þatei dauhtar þeina gaswalt; ƕa þanamais draibeis þana laisari? 36 iþ Iesus sunsaiw gahausjands þata waurd rodiþ, qaþ du þamma synagogafada: ni faurhtei; þatainei galaubei. 37 jah ni fralailot ainohun ize miþ sis afargaggan, nibai Paitru jah Iakobu jah Iohannen broþar Iakobis. 38 jah galaiþ in gard þis synagogafadis, jah gasaƕ auhjodu jah gretandans jah waifairƕjandans filu. 39 jah innatgaggands qaþ du im: ƕa auhjoþ jah gretiþ? þata barn ni gadauþnoda, ak slepiþ. 40 jah bihlohun ina. iþ is uswairpands allaim ganimiþ attan þis barnis jah aiþein jah þans miþ sis, jah galaiþ inn þarei was þata barn ligando. 41 jah fairgraip bi handau þata barn qaþuh du izai: taleiþa kumei, þatei ist gaskeiriþ: mawilo, du þus qiþa: urreis. 42 jah suns urrais so mawi jah iddja; was auk jere twalibe; jah usgeisnodedun faurhtein mikilai. 43 jah anabauþ im filu ei manna ni funþi þata, jah haihait izai giban matjan.

35 Then a leader of the synagogue came to him, saying that his daughter was dying; he asked, “What about the teacher to help her?” 36 But Jesus overheard it, and said to the leader of the synagogue: “Don’t be afraid; just believe.” 37 And he did not let anyone go with him except Peter, James, and John, the brother of James. 38 When they entered the house of the synagogue leader, they saw a commotion, with people crying and wailing loudly. 39 He went in and said to them: “Why all this commotion and wailing? The child is not dead, but asleep.” 40 They laughed at him. But he went in, took the child by the hand and said to her: “Little girl, I say to you, get up.” 41 Immediately the girl stood up and began to walk around; she was twelve years old. At this, they were completely astonished. 42 He gave them strict orders not to let anyone know about this, and told them to give her something to eat.

3. FROM THE GOSPEL OF ST. LUKE.
(CODEX ARGENTEUS).

Chap. II. 1 Warþ þan in dagans jainans, urrann gagrefts fram kaisara Agustau, gameljan allana midjungard. 2 soh þan gilstrameleins frumista warþ at [wisandin kindina Syriais][21] raginondin Saurim Kyreinaiau. 3 jah iddjedun allai, ei melidai weseina, ƕarjizuh in seinai baurg. 4 urrann þan jah Iosef us Galeilaia, us baurg Nazaraiþ, in Iudaian, in baurg Daweidis sei haitada Beþlahaim, duþe ei was us garda fadreinais Daweidis, 5 anameljan miþ Mariin, sei in fragiftim was imma qeins, wisandein inkilþon. 6 Warþ þan, miþþanei þo wesun jainar, usfullnodedun dagos du bairan izai. 7 jah gabar sunu seinana þana frumabaur, jah biwand ina, jah galagida ina in uzetin, unte ni was im rumis in stada þamma. 8 jah hairdjos wesun in þamma samin landa, þairhwakandans jah witandans wahtwom nahts ufaro hairdai seinai. 9 iþ aggilus fraujins anaqam ins jah wulþus fraujins biskain ins, jah ohtedun agisa mikilamma. 10 jah qaþ du im sa aggilus: ni ogeiþ; unte sai, spillo izwis faheid mikila, sei wairþiþ allai managein, 11 þatei gabaurans ist izwis himma daga nasjands, saei ist Xristus frauja, in baurg Daweidis. 12 jah þata izwis taikns: bigitid barn [Pg 109]biwundan jah galagid in uzetin. 13 jah anaks warþ miþ þamma aggilau managei harjis himinakundis hazjandane guþ jah qiþandane: 14 wulþus in hauhistjam guþa jah ana airþai gawairþi in mannam godis wiljins.

15 Jah warþ, biþe galiþun fairra im in himin þai aggiljus, jah þai mans þai hairdjos qeþun du sis misso: þairhgaggaima ju und Beþlahaim, jah saiƕaima waurd þata waurþano, þatei frauja gakannida unsis. 16 jah qemun sniumjandans, jah bigetun Marian jah Iosef jah þata barn ligando in uzetin. 17 gasaiƕandans þan gakannidedun bi þata waurd þatei rodiþ was du im bi þata barn. 18 jah allai þai gahausjandans sildaleikidedun bi þo rodidona fram þaim hairdjam du im. 19 iþ Maria alla gafastaida þo waurda, þagkjandei in hairtin seinamma. 20 jah gawandidedun sik þai hairdjos mikiljandans jah hazjandans guþ in allaize þizeei gahausidedun jah gaseƕun swaswe rodiþ was du im.

15 That night, angels appeared to them in the sky, and the shepherds said to one another: "Let’s go to Bethlehem and see what has happened, which the Lord has made known to us." 16 So they hurried off and found Mary and Joseph, and the baby lying in a manger. 17 When they had seen him, they spread the word concerning what had been told them about this child. 18 And all who heard it were amazed at what the shepherds said to them. 19 But Mary treasured up all these things and pondered them in her heart. 20 The shepherds returned, glorifying and praising God for all the things they had heard and seen, which were just as they had been told.

21 Jah biþe usfullnodedun[1] dagos ahtau du bimaitan ina, jah haitan was namo is Iesus, þata qiþano fram aggilau, faurþizei ganumans wesi in wamba.

21 For us will be fulfilled the eight days until we present him, and his name will be called Jesus, which means from salvation, because he will save his people.

22 Jah biþe usfullnodedun [22] dagos hraineinais ize bi witoda Mosezis, brahtedun ina in Iairusalem, atsatjan faura fraujin, 23 swaswe gamelid ist in witoda fraujins: þatei ƕazuh gumakundaize uslukands qiþu weihs fraujins haitada, 24 jah ei gabeina fram imma hunsl, swaswe qiþan ist in witoda fraujins, gajuk hraiwadubono aiþþau twos juggons ahake. 25 þaruh was manna in Iairusalem, þizei namo Symaion, jah sa manna was garaihts jah gudafaurhts, beidands laþonais Israelis, jah ahma weihs was ana imma. 26 jah was imma gataihan fram ahmin þamma weihin ni saiƕan dauþu, faurþize seƕi Xristu fraujins. 27 jah qam in ahmin in þizai alh; jah miþþanei innattauhun berusjos þata barn Iesu, ei tawidedeina bi biuhtja witodis bi ina. 28 jah is andnam ina ana armins seinans, jah þiuþida guþa jah qaþ: 29 nu fraleitais skalk þeinana, fraujinond frauja, bi waurda þeinamma in gawairþja; 30 þande seƕun augona meina nasein þeina, 31 þoei manwides in andwairþja [23] allaizo manageino, 32 liuhaþ du andhuleinai þiudom jah wulþu managein þeinai Israela. 33 jah was Iosef jah aiþei is sildaleikjandona ana þaim þoei rodida wesun bi ina. 34 jah þiuþida ina Symaion jah qaþ du Mariin, aiþein is: sai, sa ligiþ du drusa jah usstassai managaize in Israela jah du taiknai andsakanai. 35 jah þan þeina silbons saiwala þairhgaggiþ hairus, ei andhuljaindau us managaim hairtam mitoneis. 36 jah was Anna praufeteis, dauhtar Fanuelis, us kunja Aseris; soh framaldra dage managaize [Pg 110]libandei miþ abin jera sibun fram magaþein seinai, 37 soh þan widuwo jere ahtautehund jah fidwor, soh ni afiddja fairra alh fastubnjam jah bidom blotande fraujan nahtam jah dagam. 38 soh þizai ƕeilai atstandandei andhaihait fraujin, jah rodida bi ina in allaim þaim usbeidandam laþon Iairusaulymos. 39 jah biþe ustauhun allata bi witoda fraujins, gawandidedun sik in Galeilaian, in baurg seina Nazaraiþ. 40 iþ þata barn wohs jah swinþnoda ahmins fullnands jah handugeins, jah ansts guþs was ana imma.

41 Jah wratodedun þai birusjos is jera ƕammeh in Iairusalem at dulþ paska. 42 jah biþe warþ twalibwintrus, usgaggandam þan im in Iairusaulyma bi biuhtja dulþais, 43 jah ustiuhandam þans dagans, miþþane gawandidedun sik aftra, gastoþ Iesus sa magus in Iairusalem, jah ni wissedun [24] Iosef jah aiþei is. 44 hugjandona in gasinþjam ina wisan qemun dagis wig jah sokidedun ina in ganiþjam jah in kunþam. 45 jah ni bigitandona ina gawandidedun sik in Iairusalem sokjandona ina. 46 jah warþ afar dagans þrins, bigetun ina in alh sitandan in midjaim laisarjam jah hausjandan im jah fraihnandan ins. 47 usgeisnodedun þan allai þai hausjandans is ana frodein jah andawaurdjam is. 48 jah gasaiƕandans ina sildaleikidedun, jah qaþ du imma so aiþei is: magau, ƕa gatawides uns swa? sai, sa atta þeins jah ik winnandona sokidedum þuk. 49 jah qaþ du im: ƕa þatei sokideduþ mik? niu wisseduþ þatei in þaim attins meinis skulda wisan? 50 jah ija ni froþun þamma waurda þatei rodida du im. 51 jah iddja miþ im jah qam in Nazaraiþ, jah was ufhausjands im; jah aiþei is gafastaida þo waurda alla in hairtin seinamma. 52 jah Iesus þaih frodein jah wahstau jah anstai at guþa jah mannam.

4. FROM THE SECOND EPISTL TO THE CORINTHIANS.
(CHAPS. I-V IN CODEX AMBR. B; I, 8-IV, 10 AND V ALSO IN CODEX AMBR. A).
DU KAURINÞAIUM ANÞARA DUSTODEIÞ.

Chap. I.[25] 1 Pawlus apaustaulus Iesuis Xristaus þairh wiljan guþs jah Teimauþaius broþar aikklesjon guþs þizai wisandein in Kaurinþon miþ allaim þaim weiham þaim wisandam in allai Akaïjai. 2 ansts izwis jah gawairþi fram guþa attin unsaramma jah fraujin Iesu Xristau.

[Pg 111]

3 Þiuþiþs guþ jah atta fraujins unsaris Iesuis Xristaus, atta bleiþeino jah guþ allaizo gaþlaihte, 4 saei gaþrafstida uns ana allai aglon unsarai, ei mageima weis gaþrafstjan þans in allaim aglom þairh þo gaþlaiht þizaiei gaþrafstidai sijum silbans fram guþa. 5 unte swaswe ufarassus ist þulaine Xristaus in uns, swa jah þairh Xristu ufar filu ist jah gaþrafsteins unsara. 6 aþþan jaþþe þreihanda, in izwaraizos gaþlaihtais jah naseinais þizos waurstweigons in stiwitja þizo samono þulaine, þozei jah weis winnam, jah wens unsara gatulgida faur izwis; jaþþe gaþrafstjanda in izwaraizos gaþlaihtais jah naseinais, 7 witandans þatei swaswe gadailans þulaine sijuþ, jah gaþlaihtais wairþiþ. 8 unte ni wileima izwis unweisans, broþrjus, bi aglon unsara þo waurþanon uns in Asiai, unte ufarassau kauridai wesum ufar maht, swaswe [26] skamaidedeima uns jah liban. 9 akei silbans in uns silbam andahaft dauþaus habaidedum, ei ni sijaima trauandans du uns silbam, ak du guþa þamma urraisjandin dauþans, 10 izei us swaleikaim dauþum uns galausida jah galauseiþ, du þammei wenidedum ei galauseiþ, 11 at hilpandam jah izwis bi uns bidai, ei in managamma andwairþja so in uns giba þairh managans awiliudodau faur uns. 12 unte ƕoftuli unsara so ist, weitwodei miþwisseins unsaraizos, þatei in ainfalþein jah hlutrein guþs, ni in handugein leikeinai, ak in anstai guþs usmeitum [27] in þamma fairƕau, iþ ufarassau at izwis. 13 unte ni alja meljam izwis, alja þoei anakunnaiþ aiþþau jah ufkunnaiþ; aþþan wenja ei und andi ufkunnaiþ, 14 swaswe gakunnaideduþ uns bi sumata, unte ƕoftuli izwara sijum, swaswe jah jus unsara in daga fraujins Iesuis Xristaus [28].

15 Jah þizai trauainai wilda faurþis qiman at izwis, ei anþara anst habaidedeiþ, 16 jah [29] þairh izwis galeiþan in Makidonja [30] jah aftra af Makidonjai qiman at izwis, jah fram izwis gasandjan mik in Iudaia. 17 þatuþ-þan nu mitonds, ibai aufto leihtis bruhta? aiþþau þatei mito, bi leika þagkjau, ei sijai [31] at mis þata ja ja jah þata ne ne? 18 aþþan triggws guþ, ei þata waurd unsar þata du izwis nist ja jah [32] ne. 19 unte guþs sunus Iesus Xristus, saei in izwis þairh uns wailamerjada [33], þairh mik jah Silbanu jah Teimauþaiu, nih [34] warþ ja jah [35] ne, ak ja in imma warþ. 20 ƕaiwa managa gahaita guþs, in imma þata ja, duþþe jah [36] þairh ina amen, guþa du wulþau þairh uns. 21 aþþan sa gaþwastjands unsis [37] miþ izwis in Xristau jah salbonds [38] uns guþ, 22 jah sigljands uns jah gibands wadi [Pg 112]ahman in hairtona unsara. 23 aþþan ik weitwod guþ anahaita ana meinai saiwalai, ei freidjands izwara þanaseiþs ni qam in Kaurinþon; 24 ni þatei fraujinoma [39] izwarai galaubeinai, ak gawaurstwans sijum anstais izwaraizos; unte galaubeinai gastoþuþ.

Chap. II.[40] 1 Aþþan gastauida þata silbo at mis, ei aftra in saurgai ni qimau at izwis. 2 unte jabai ik gaurja izwis, jah ƕas ist saei gailjai mik, niba [41] sa gaurida us mis? 3 jaþþata [42] silbo gamelida izwis, ei qimands saurga ni habau fram þaimei skulda faginon, gatrauands in allaim izwis þatei meina faheþs [43] allaize izwara ist. 4 aþþan us managai aglon jah aggwiþai hairtins gamelida izwis þairh managa tagra, ni þeei saurgaiþ, ak ei frijaþwa [44] kunneiþ þoei haba ufarassau du izwis. 5 aþþan jabai ƕas gaurida, ni mik gaurida, ak bi sumata [45], ei ni anakaurjau allans izwis. 6 ganah þamma swaleikamma andabet [46] þata fram managizam, 7 swaei þata andaneiþo izwis mais fragiban jag-[47]gaþlaihan, ibai aufto managizein saurgai gasiggqai sa swaleiks. 8 inuþ-[48]þis bidja izwis tulgjan in imma friaþwa. 9 duþþe gamelida, ei ufkunnau kustu izwarana, sijaidu in allamma ufhausjandans. 10 aþþan þammei ƕa fragibiþ, jah ik; jah þan ik, jabai ƕa fragaf, fragaf [49] in izwara in andwairþja Xristaus, 11 ei ni gaaiginondau [50] fram Satanin; unte ni sijum unwitandans munins is.

12 Aþþan qimands in Trauadai in aiwaggeljons [51] Xristaus jah at haurdai mis uslukanai in fraujin, 13 ni habaida gaƕeilain ahmin meinamma, in þammei ni bigat Teitaun broþar meinana; ak twisstandands im [52] galaiþ in Makaidonja [53]. 14 aþþan guþa awiliuþ [54] þamma sinteino ustaiknjandin hroþeigans uns in Xristau jah daun kunþjis seinis gabairhtjandin þairh uns in allaim stadim [55]; 15 unte Xristaus [56] dauns sijum woþi guþa in þaim ganisandam jah in þaim fraqistnandam [57]: 16 sumaim dauns us dauþau [58] du dauþau, sumaimuþ-þan dauns us libainai du libainai; jad-[59]du þamma ƕas wairþs? 17 unte ni sium swe [60] sumai maidjandans waurd guþs, ak us hlutriþai, ak swaswe us guþa in andwairþja guþs in Xristau rodjam.

Chap. III. 1 Duginnam aftra uns silbans anafilhan? aiþþau ibai þaurbum swe sumai anafilhis boko du izwis, [Pg 113]aiþþau us izwis anafilhis? 2 aipistaule unsara jus siuþ [61], gamelida in hairtam unsaraim, kunþa jah anakunnaida fram allaim mannam. 3 swikunþai [62] þatei siuþ [63] aipistaule Xristaus, andbahtida fram uns, inn [64] gamelida ni swartiza [65], ak ahmin guþs libandins, ni in spildom staineinaim, ak in spildom hairtane leikeinaim.

4 Aþþan trauain swaleika habam þairh Xristu du guþa, 5 ni þatei wairþai sijaima þagkjan ƕa af uns silbam, swaswe af uns silbam [66], ak so wairþida unsara us guþa ist, 6 izei jah wairþans brahta uns andbahtans niujaizos triggwos, ni bokos, ak ahmins; unte boka usqimiþ, iþ ahma gaqiujiþ. 7 aþþan jabai andbahti dauþaus in gameleinim gafrisahtiþ in stainam warþ wulþag, swaei ni mahtedeina [67] sunjus Israelis fairweitjan du wlita Mosezis in wulþaus wlitis is þis gataurnandins, 8 ƕaiwa nei mais andbahti ahmins wairþai in wulþau? 9 jabai auk andbahtja [68] wargiþos wulþus, und filu mais ufarist andbahti garaihteins in [69] wulþau. 10 unte ni was wulþag þata wulþago in þizai halbai in ufarassaus wulþaus; 11 jabai auk þata gataurnando þairh wulþu, und filu mais þata wisando in wulþau.

12 Habandans nu swaleika wen managaizos balþeins brukjaima, 13 janni [70] swaswe Mosez [71] lagida hulistr ana andawleizn, duþe ei ni fairweitidedeina sunjus Israelis in andi þis gataurnandins; 14 ak afdaubnodedun [72] fraþja ize, unte und hina dag þata samo hulistr in anakunnainai þizos fairnjons triggwos wisiþ unandhuliþ, unte in Xristau gatairada. 15 akei und hina dag miþþanei siggwada Moses, hulistr ligiþ ana hairtin ize. 16 aþþan miþþanei gawandeiþ du fraujin, afnimada þata hulistr. 17 aþþan frauja ahma ist; aþþan þarei ahma fraujins, þaruh freihals [73] ist. 18 aþþan weis allai andhulidamma andwairþja wulþu fraujins þairhsaiƕandans, þo samon frisaht ingaleikonda af wulþau in wulþu [74], swaswe af fraujins ahmin.

Chap. IV.[75] 1 Duþþe habandans þata andbahti [76], swaswe gaarmaidai waurþum, ni wairþaima [77] usgrudjans, 2 ak afstoþum þaim analaugnjam aiwiskjis, ni gaggandans in warein nih galiug taujandans waurd guþs, ak bairhtein sunjos [78] ustaiknjandans uns silbans du allaim miþwisseim manne in andwairþja guþs. 3 aþþan jabai ist gahulida aiwaggeljo unsara, in þaim fralusnandam ist gahulida, 4 in þaimei guþ þis aiwis gablindida fraþja þize ungalaubjandane, [Pg 114]ei ni liuhtjai im liuhadeins [79] aiwaggeljons wulþaus Xristaus, saei ist frisahts guþs ungasaiƕanins [80]. 5 aþþan ni uns silbans merjam, ak Iesu Xristu fraujan, iþ uns skalkans [81] izwarans in Iesuis. 6 unte guþ saei qaþ ur-riqiza liuhaþ skeinan, saei jah liuhtida in hairtam unsaraim du liuhadein kunþjis wulþaus guþs in andwairþja Iesuis Xristaus.

7 Aþþan habandans þata huzd in airþeinaim kasam, ei ufarassus sijai mahtais guþs jah ni us unsis. 8 in allamma þraihanai, akei ni gaaggwidai; andbitanai, akei ni afslauþidai; 9 wrikanai, akei ni biliþanai; gadrausidai, akei ni fraqistidai, 10 sinteino dauþein fraujins Iesuis ana leika unsaramma [82] bairandans, ei jah libains, Iesuis ana leika unsaramma[83] uskunþa sijai. 11 sinteino weis libandans in dauþu atgibanda in Iesuis, ei jah libains Iesuis swikunþa wairþai in riurjamma leika unsaramma. 12 swaei nu dauþus in uns waurkeiþ, iþ libains in izwis. 13 habandans nu þana saman ahman galaubeinais bi þamma gamelidin: galaubida, in þizei jah rodida, jah weis galaubjam, in þizei jah rodjam, 14 witandans þatei sa urraisjands fraujan Iesu jah unsis þairh Iesu urraiseiþ jah fauragasatjiþ miþ izwis. 15 þatuh þan allata in izwara, ei ansts managnandei þairh managizans awiliud ufarassjai du wulþau guþa. 16 inuh þis ni wairþam usgrudjans, ak þauhjabai sa utana unsar manna frawardjada, aiþþau sa innuma ananiujada daga jah daga. 17 unte þata andwairþo ƕeilaƕairb jah leiht [84] aglons unsaraizos bi ufarassau aiweinis wulþaus kaurei waurkjada unsis. 18 ni fairweitjandam þizei gasaiƕanane, ak þizei ungasaiƕanane; unte þo gasaiƕanona riurja sind, iþ þo ungasaiƕanona aiweina.

Chap. V. 1 Witum auk þatei, jabai sa airþeina unsar gards þizos hleiþros gatairada, ei gatimrjon us [85] guþa habam, gard unhanduwaurhtana aiweinana in himinam. 2 unte jah in þamma swogatjam, bauainai unsarai þizai us himina ufarhamon gairnjandans, 3 jabai sweþauh jah [86] gawasidai, ni naqadai bigitaindau. 4 jah auk wisandans in þizai hleiþrai swogatjam kauridai, ana þammei ni wileima afhamon, ak anahamon, ei fraslindaidau þata diwano fram libainai. 5 aþþan saei jah [87] gamanwida uns du þamma guþ, saei jah gaf uns [88] wadi ahman. 6 gatrauandans nu sinteino jah witandans þatei wisandans in þamma leika afhaimjai sijum fram fraujin; 7 unte þairh galaubein gaggam, ni [Pg 115]þairh siun. 8 aþþan gatrauam jah waljam mais usleiþan us þamma leika jah anahaimjaim wisan at fraujin. 9 inuh [89] þis usdaudjam, jaþþe anahaimjai jaþþe afhaimjai, waila galeikan imma. 10 unte allai weis ataugjan skuldai sijum faura stauastola Xristaus, ei ganimai ƕarjizuh þo swesona leikis, afar þaimei gatawida, jaþþe þiuþ jaþþe unþiuþ.

11 Witandans nu agis fraujins mannans fullaweisjam, iþ guþa swikunþai sijum. aþþan wenja jah in miþwisseim izwaraim swikunþans wisan uns. 12 ni ei aftra uns silbans uskannjaima [90] izwis, ak lew gibandans izwis ƕoftuljos fram uns [91], ei habaiþ wiþra þans in andwairþja ƕopandans jah ni hairtin [92]. 13 unte jaþþe usgeisnodedum, guþa, jaþþe fullafraþjam, izwis. 14 unte friaþwa Xristaus dishabaiþ uns, 15 domjandans þata þatei ains faur allans gaswalt, þannu allai gaswultun, jah faur allans gaswalt, ei þai libandans ni þanaseiþs sis [93] silbam libaina [94], ak þamma faur sik gaswiltandin jah urreisandin. 16 swaei weis fram þamma nu ni ainnohun kunnum bi leika; iþ jabai ufkunþedum bi leika Xristu, akei nu ni þanaseiþs ni kunnum ina [95]. 17 swaei jabai ƕo in Xristau niuja gaskafts, þo alþjona usliþun; sai, waurþun niuja alla. 18 aþþan alla us guþa, þamma gafriþondin uns sis [96] þairh Xristu jah [97] gibandin uns [98] andbahti gafriþonais. 19 unte sweþauh guþ was in Xristau manaseþ gafriþonds sis, ni rahnjands im missadedins ize, jah lagjands in uns waurd gafriþonais. 20 faur Xristu nu airinom, swe at guþa gaþlaihandin þairh uns; bidjam [99] faur Xristu gagawairþnan guþa. 21 unte þana izei [100] ni kunþa frawaurht, faur uns gatawida frawaurht, ei weis waurþeima garaihtei guþs in imma.

5. FROM THE SKEIREINS.
(LEAF VII.—ABOUT JOHN VI, 9-13.)[101]

(a 49)—ahun kunnandins fraujins maht jah andþaggkjandins sik is waldufneis. nih Stains ains[102], ak jah Andraias, saei qaþ: ist magula ains her, saei habaiþ ·e· hlaibans barizeinans jah twans fiskans, analeiko swe [Pg 116]Filippus gasakada, ni waiht mikilis hugjands nih wairþidos laisareis andþaggkjands, þairh þoei usbar qiþands: akei þata ƕa ist du swa managaim? iþ frauja andtilonds ize niuklahein (b) qaþ: waurkeiþ þans mans anakumbjan. iþ eis, at hauja managamma wisandin in þamma stada, þo filusna anakumbjan gatawidedun, fimf þusundjos waire inuh qinons jah barna. swe at mikilamma nahtamata anakumbjandans wesun[103] at ni wisandein [104] aljai waihtai ufar þans fimf hlaibans jah twans fiskans, þanzei nimands jah awiliudonds gaþiuþida, jah swa managai ganohjands ins wailawiznai ni þatainei ganauhan þaurftais im fra-(c 50)gaf, ak filaus maizo; afar þatei matida so managei, bigitan was þizei hlaibe ·ib· tainjons fullos, þatei aflifnoda. samaleikoh þan jah þize fiske, swa filu swe wildedun. nih þan ana þaim hlaibam ainaim seinaizos mahtais filusna ustaiknida, ak jah in þaim fiskam; swa filu auk [105] gamanwida ins wairþan, swaei ainƕarjammeh swa filu swe wilda andniman is [106], tawida; jah ni in waihtai waninassu þizai filusnai wairþan gatawida. akei (d) nauh us þamma filu mais siponjans fullafahida jah anþarans gamaudida gaumjan, þatei is was sa sama, saei in auþidai ·m· jere attans ize fodida. þanuh, biþe sadai waurþun, qaþ siponjam seinaim: galisiþ þos aflifnandeins drausnos, ei waihtai ni fraqistnai. þanuh galesun jah gafullidedun ·ib· tainjons gabruko us þaim ·e· hlaibam barizeinam jah ·b· fiskam, þatei aflifnoda at þaim —

FOOTNOTES:

[2] usstagg MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ usstagg Ms.

[3] ƕa ƕazuh MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ What’s up MS.

[4] fulhsja MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ fulhsja MS.

[5] fulhlsnja MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ fulfills MS.

[6] in the margin faihuþra.., i. e. faihuþraihna Luke XVI, 13.

[7] gloss wilþi.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ gloss will.

[8] usluknans MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ usluknans MS.

[9] in the margin þukei wilda.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ in the margin is wild.

[10] leita MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ search MS.

[11] haimon MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ haimon MS.

[12] fidworin MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ fidworin MS.

[13] afleþanda MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ revealing MS.

[14] gaseƕū MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ gas

[15] Galeilaian MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Galeilaian Manuscript

[16] wanting MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ wanting MS.

[17] galeiþan MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ galeiþan MS.

[18] gajukon MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ gajukon MS.

[19] gloss in the margin, gabindan.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ margin note, gabindan.

[20] gasaisaiƕands MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ gasaisaiƕands MS.

[21] wisandin kindina Syriais is evidently a marginal gloss of the manuscript, which was accidentally put in the text.

[22] usfulnodedun MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ useful node done MS.

[23] anandwairþja MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ anandwairþja MS.

[24] wisedun MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ wisedun MS.

[25] According to codex B; from verse 8, onward, with the various readings of A.

[26] In A: swaswe afswaggwidai weseima jal liban, and the additional marginal gloss skamaidedeima.

[27] usmetum A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ usmetum A.

[28] Xristaus wanting in A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Xristaus wanting in A.

[29] jaþ A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ and A.

[30] Makaidonja, Makaidonjai A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Makaidonja, Makaidonjai A.

[31] ei ni sijai B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ it's not like B.

[32] jan A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Jan A.

[33] merjada A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ merjada A.

[34] Timaiþaiu ni A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Timaiþaiu ni A.

[35] jan A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Jan A.

[36] jaþ A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ and A.

[37] uns A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ uns A.

[38] salbonsd A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ salbonsd A.

[39] fraujoma B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ lady B.

[40] Chaps. II. III. according to A, with the various readings of B.

[41] nibai B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ is cool B.

[42] jah B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ yeah B.

[43] faheds B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ faheds B.

[44] friaþwa B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ fríaþwa B.

[45] bi sumata» bi sum ain B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ is spelled bi sum ain B.

[46] andabeit B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ and albeit B.

[47] jah B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ yeah B.

[48] inuh B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ inuh B.

[49] For fragaf in both cases fragiba B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ For fragaf in both cases fragiba B.

[50] marginal gloss ni gafaihondau in A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ marginal gloss in A.

[51] aiwaggeljon B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ aiwaggeljon B.

[52] twistandands imma B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ twistandands I'm a B.

[53] in in Makidonja B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ in Macedonia B.

[54] awiliud B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ awiliud B.

[55] þairh uns after stadim B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ through us after stadium B.

[56] Xristaus wanting in A.

Xristaus wanting in A.

[57] gloss fralusnandam in A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ gloss fralusnandam in A.

[58] sumaim auk dauns dauþaus B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ sumaim auk dauns dauþaus B.

[59] jah B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ yeah B.

[60] sijum B, swe wanting in B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ sijum B, swe wanting in B.

[61] jus siuþ» jusijuþ B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ just south» just youth B.

[62] swikunþ B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ swikunþ B.

[63] sijuþ B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ sijuþ B.

[64] inna B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ in a B.

[65] swartizla B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ swartizla B.

[66] swaswe af uns silbam wanting in A.

[67] mahtededeina B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ mahtededeina B.

[68] andbahti B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ andbahti B.

[69] us B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ us B.

[70] jah B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ yeah B.

[71] Moses B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Moses B.

[72] gloss afdaubnodedun in A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ gloss afdaubnodedun in A.

[73] freijhals A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ freijhals A.

[74] wulþau B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ wulþau B.

[75] Chaps. IV. V. according to B, with the various readings of A.

[76] andbahtei A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ andbahtei A.

[77] wairþam A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ wairþam A.

[78] sunjus A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ sunjus A.

[79] liuhadein B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ liuhadein B.

[80] ungas. wanting in A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ungas. wanting in A.

[81] unskalkans A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ unskalkans A.

[82] unsaram—A stops here.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ unsaram—A stops here.

[83] The words put in Italics are wanting in the manuscript, they are interpolated translations from the Greek original.

[84] ƕeiht MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ height MS.

[85] Here A begins again.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Here A starts over.

[86] jah wanting in A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ jah wanting in A.

[87] jag A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ jag A.

[88] unsis A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ unsis A.

[89] inuþ A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ in A.

[90] gloss anafilhaima in A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ gloss anafilhaima in A.

[91] unsis A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ unsis A.

[92] jan-ni in hairtin A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ January in hairtin A.

[93] sis wanting in A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ sis wanting in A.

[94] libainai B.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ libainai B.

[95] ina wanting in A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ in a wanting in A.

[96] uns sis» unsis AB.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ uns sis» unsis AB.

[97] jag A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ jag A.

[98] unsis A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ unsis A.

[99] bidjandans A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ bidjandans A.

[100] ize A.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ize A.

[101] John VI, 9-13 according to Codex Argenteus: 9. ist magula ains her, saei habaiþ ·e· hlaibans barizeinans jah ·b· fiskans; akei þata ƕa ist du swa managaim? 20. iþ Iesus qaþ: waurkeiþ þans mans anakumbjan. wasuh þan hawi manag ana þamma stada. þaruh anakumbidedun wairos raþjon swaswe fimf þusundjos. 11. namuh þan þans hlaibans Iesus jah awiliudonds gadailida þaim anakumbjandam; samaleiko jah þize fiske, swa filu swe wildedun. 12. þanuh, biþe sadai waurþun, qaþ du siponjam seinaim: galisiþ þos aflifnandeins drauhsnos, þei waihtai ni fraqistnai. 13. þanuh galesun jah gafullidedun ·ib· tainjons gabruko us fimf hlaibam þaim barizeinam, þatei aflifnoda þaim matjandam.

[102] ains interpolated by Uppström.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ains interpolated by Uppström.

[103] wesun interpolated by Vollmer.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ wesun processed by Vollmer.

[104] wisandin MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ wisdom MS.

[105] swe after auk in MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ swe after auk in MS.

[106] ist MS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ is MS.

[Pg 117]

EXPLANATORY NOTES.

[The figures in parentheses refer to paragrafs of the syntax of my 'First Germanic Bible', when preceded by S.; to paragrafs of this grammar, when preceded by Gr.]

[The numbers in parentheses refer to sections of the syntax of my 'First Germanic Bible', when preceded by S.; to sections of this grammar, when preceded by Gr.]

I. FROM THE GOSPEL OF ST. MATTHEW.

Chap. V, 17. ni hugjaiþ; prohibitiv optativ (S., 91, (2)).—qêmjau; opt. in a final object clause (S., 93).—gataíran, to tear or break completely, destroy; usfulljan, to fulfil. Both gat. and usf. ar infinitivs of purpose (S., 114), the prefixes ga and us being intensiv. 18. usleiþiþ himins jah aírþa; two subj. nominativs with a sg. v. (S., 5, n. 1). 19. saei; rel. prn. (Gr., 157; S., 60).—þizô; dem. prn., not art. (S., 63).—gataíriþ (prs. ind.) .....laisjai (prs. opt.); the first denoting a fact, the second a possibility (S., 99, c): whosoever breaks and 'should' teach.—minnista; an exceptional case of a weak adj. without the art.—þiudangardjai himinê; without the art. (in the Grk. text τῇ....τῶν).

Chap. V, 17. ni hugjaiþ; prohibitive optative (S., 91, (2)).—qêmjau; opt. in a final object clause (S., 93).—gataíran, to tear or break completely, destroy; usfulljan, to fulfill. Both gat. and usf. are infinitives of purpose (S., 114), with the prefixes ga and us being intensifying. 18. usleiþiþ himins jah aírþa; two subj. nominatives with a singular verb (S., 5, n. 1). 19. saei; relative pronoun (Gr., 157; S., 60).—þizô; demonstrative pronoun, not article (S., 63).—gataíriþ (present indicative) .....laisjai (present optative); the first denotes a fact, the second a possibility (S., 99, c): whosoever breaks and 'should' teach.—minnista; an exceptional case of a weak adjective without the article.—þiudangardjai himinê; without the article (in the Greek text τῇ....τῶν).

20. managizô (n. compar. uzed as sb.) izwaraizôs garaíhteins, more of your righteousness than of [the righteousness of] the scribes.—þau (conj.), than ...þau (adv.), in any case; ni þau, in no case.—qimiþ in þiudangardjai; the dativ after qiman in and similar vs. of 'motion towards' is distinctivly Gothic (S., 55). 21. qiþan ist; stands for the Grk. aor. (S., 87, n., c) = imperf. in English.—maúrþrjais; the hort. opt. for the second pers. fut. in Grk.—waírþiþ; the prs. for the Grk. fut. (S., 86, (3)).—skula w. dat., a detter or subject to (S., 35, (2)). 22. ik; the personal prn. is uzed with a v. for the sake of emfasis (S., 2, n. 1).—ƕazuh môdags; for πᾶς ὁ w. a ptc.—brôþr seinamma; dat. after môdags: angry with (lit. 'to'; S., 36, (3)).—gaqumþai, council, from gaqiman, to cum together.—dwala (voc.); weak adj. uzed as sb.—skula in gaíaínnan; in denoting 'direction' 'in regard to'; the expression seems to be an imitation of the corresponding Grk. passage: ἔνοχος ἔσται εὶς τὴν γέενναν.

20. managizô (n. compar. used as sb.) izwaraizôs garaíhteins, more of your righteousness than of [the righteousness of] the scribes.—þau (conj.), than ...þau (adv.), in any case; ni þau, in no case.—qimiþ in þiudangardjai; the dative after qiman in and similar verbs of 'motion towards' is distinctly Gothic (S., 55). 21. qiþan ist; stands for the Grk. aor. (S., 87, n., c) = imperfect in English.—maúrþrjais; the hort. opt. for the second person future in Grk.—waírþiþ; the present for the Grk. future (S., 86, (3)).—skula w. dat., a debtor or subject to (S., 35, (2)). 22. ik; the personal pronoun is used with a verb for the sake of emphasis (S., 2, n. 1).—ƕazuh môdags; for πᾶς ὁ w. a ptc.—brôþr seinamma; dat. after môdags: angry with (lit. 'to'; S., 36, (3)).—gaqumþai, council, from gaqiman, to come together.—dwala (voc.); weak adj. used as sb.—skula in gaíaínnan; in denoting 'direction' 'in regard to'; the expression seems to be an imitation of the corresponding Grk. passage: ἔνοχος ἔσται εὶς τὴν γέενναν.

23. jabai nu baírais...gamuneis (Gr., 200, n. 1; and 196); a conditional sentence, the vs. of the protasis being in the opt., those of the apodosis in the imper. (S., 102, e).—aibr; s. 'Vocabulary'.—þeins; attri[Pg 118]butes generally follow their sb. (S., 10, n. 2).—ƕa; here indef. (Gr., 162, n. 2; S., 78, n. 2). 24. Here the apodosis begins.—þô; the art. is uzed, because the sacrifice (aibr) is again mentiond (as giba) (S., 67).—þeina; for its strong inflection, s. Gr. 122, n. 1.—brôþr þeinamma; dat. after gasibjôn (S., 43). 25. andastauin þeinamma; dat. after waíla hugjands (S., 41).—ibai, lest, lit. perhaps, which sense is also exprest by the opt. atgibai.—stauin; from staua, m. (Gr., 108; not f.; Gr., 97).—in karkara gal.; gal. in w. acc., more frequently w. dat.; see qimiþ in, abuv; jah galagjaza, and [then] thou wilt be cast. 26. usgaggis..usgibis; the first prs. expresses the first, the second the past future.—minnistan; this word does not exactly answer ἔσχατον (which Wulfila in other places renders by aftuma, aftumists, spêdiza, spêdists, spêdumists). It is not impossibl, however, that kintus ment not one particular coin (or mezure), but any coin (or mezure) of litl value.

23. the sacrificial offerings...community (Gr., 200, n. 1; and 196); a conditional sentence, with the verbs of the protasis in the optative mood and those of the apodosis in the imperative (S., 102, e).—offerings; see 'Vocabulary'.—those; attributes generally follow their nouns (S., 10, n. 2).—what; here indefinite (Gr., 162, n. 2; S., 78, n. 2). 24. Here the apodosis begins.—the; the article is used because the sacrifice (offerings) is mentioned again (as gift) (S., 67).—of yours; for its strong inflection, see Gr. 122, n. 1.—brother of yours; dative after to make a sacrifice (S., 43). 25. offering of yours; dative after to hold in mind (S., 41).—for, lest, literally perhaps, which meaning is also expressed by the optative to give.—offering; from offering, masculine (Gr., 108; not feminine; Gr., 97).—in the temple; temple in accusative, more often with dative; see arrive in, above; and then you will be cast. 26. you give...you will give; the first present tense expresses the first, the second the past future.—least; this word does not exactly correspond to ἔσχατον (which Wulfila translates elsewhere as last, the last, the most recent, most recent, the very last). However, it is not impossible that coin meant not one particular coin (or measure), but any coin (or measure) of little value.

27. For the tenses and opt. mood, see 21, abuv. 28. saei saíƕiþ; ind. in a rel. clause for a Grk. ptc. (S., 99).—du lustôn; inf. of purpose after du (S., 144).—izôs; gen. after lustôn (S., 26).—gahôrinôda (For the Grk. aor.; S., 87, (3)) izai; instrumental dat. of association (S., 52, (1), c). 29. marzjai; opt. necessitated by the sense, not by the conj. jabai (S., 102).—usstigg ita jah waírp; the order of words is Grk.; in Engl. we repeat the object 'it' after the second v. (waírp).—gadriusai in gaíaínnan; gadr. in w. acc.; onse (Lu. 8, 7) it takes the dat.; comp. qiman in, chap. V, 20, abuv. 30. taíhswô þeina handus; comp. the sequence of words (without the art.) with the similar expression (with the art.) in 29, abuv.—þô, this, that; but αὐτήν in Grk.—batizô ist þus ei, etc.; the dependent clause after batizô ist is sumtimes an acc. w. inf. (S., 113); þus is dat. of advantage (S., 36, (4)).—fraqistnai....gadriusai; both optativs imply possibility (S., 103). 31. -uh þan; both particls (= þan alone) ar here continuativ: but farther, also.—saei aflêtai qên; opt. in a rel. clause which does not contain a statement of the speaker, but of sum one else (cp. verse 32, below); qên is less definit here than in the following verse, where seina is emfatic, and qên seina means as much as 'his legitimate wife'.—gibai; hort. opt. (S., 91, (2)).—afstassais bôkôs, a writing (lit. letters; cp. the Latin 'littera': 'litterae') of divorcement (lit. 'standing off'; cp. the G. 'abstand' in the sense of 'desistence'). 32. saei aflêtiþ.....taujiþ; the vs. ar in the ind. mood, because they contain the speaker's statements (as opposed to the preceding ones).—izê; for izei (Gr., 157, n. 3). 33. ufarswarais...usgibais; hort. opt. (S., 91, (2)).—fraujin; without the articl, when signifying God (S., 68, n. 2. The Grk. text has τῷ). 34. swaran; objectiv inf. after qiþan, to say, with the sense of 'commanding' (S., 110).—guþs; gen. in its abbreviated form (Gr., 94, n. 3). 35. baúrgs; without the art., as in Grk. 36. tagl, a singl hair; skuft, the hairs collectivly. 37. sijaiþ-þan (for sijaih þan, for sijai-uh þan; see Gr., 62, n. 3), but ... shall be.—þata (art.) managizô; n. compar. uzed as sb.: lit. 'the more', i. e. what is more.—þaim; dat. as abl. (S., 54, 3), after the compar. managizô (= þau w. nom.; cp. the Grk. gen. and the Lt. abl. in such cases).—ubilin; dat. of the n. sg. ubilô uzed as sb. 38. und, for, in return for, w. dat.; in other senses, and more frequently, w. acc. 39. andstandan;[Pg 119] inf., as in verse 34.—allis; adverbial gen., from the adj. alls, at all, without equivalent in the Grk. text. Wulfila probably inserted it according to verse 34, where the Grk. text shows ὅλως.—þamma unsêljin; weak adj. n. uzed as sb.; see ubilin in 37, abuv.—ƕas; here indef., as in 23, abuv.—stautai; opt., as in 29, abuv; likewise the imper. wandei in the apodosis.—jah, also. 40. jah, and.—þamma wiljandin; a participial construction, as in Grk. (τῷ θέλοντι).—niman; complimentary inf. after wiljandin (as in 42, below; S., 109). 41. ananauþjai..gaggais; the prs. opt. in protasis and apodosis (S., 102, a).—rasta aina; acc. expressing extent of space (S., 15, (2), β); rasta (for μίλιον, the Roman mile), lit. 'rest', place of resting, a stage or station, also the distance between two stages. 42. þamma wiljandin; dat. as abl. after uswandjais (S., 54, (1), where us should be inserted after af).—leiƕan (complementary inf.; S., 109) sis, to borrow; leiƕan, to lend. 43. frijôs...fiais fiand.....frijôþ fijands; these words and several others ar found both with and without j (Gr., 10, n. 4); fiand (fijand), acc. of fiands (fijands), enemy, lit. hating, prsp. of fi(j)an, to hate (Gr., 115). 44. þiuþjaiþ þans wrikandans; bless ye (= treat wel; for the dat. after þiuþjan, s. S., 45, page 246, below).—bi, concerning, for.—usþriutandans; acc. of the prs. ptc. (Gr., 133) of usþriutan, the us- being intensiv; -þriutan = '-trude' in 'obtrude'. 45. ei waírþaiþ sunjus; ei, that, in order that; waírþaiþ, prs. opt. in a final clause (S., 96, a).—in himinam; adv. frase uzed substantivly after the art. (þis).—urranneiþ; ur- from us; Gr., 24, n. 2; 78, n. 4.—rigneiþ; from rignjan, factitiv of rign, n., rain. 46. ƕô mizdônô; the interr. ƕô agrees with the following gen. in gender.—niu (i. e. ni-u); interr. particl.—þai þiudô, the (= those) of the Gentiles, = the Gentiles; þiudô is gen. pl. of þiuda, peple. 47. þans frijônds izwarans, the frends (of) yours, = your frends; frijônds is sb. in form (Gr., 115) and meaning, while þans frijôndans stil has its verbal force; izwarans is a poss. prn. acc. pl. agreeing with frijônds, but izwis is a personal prn. acc. pl. guvernd by frijôndans.—ƕê; instr. case of ƕa, n. of ƕas (Gr., 159; S., 51).—managizô; compar. after ƕê (S., 51). 48. jus; for the personal prn. with a vb., see verse 22, abuv.—swaswê atta izwar sa in himinam is the subject, not sa, sa in himinam being an attribute of atta izwar, and may be renderd by a rel. clause in English.

27. For the tenses and optative mood, see 21, above. 28. who is saved; indicative in a relative clause for a Greek participle (S., 99).—to desire; infinitive of purpose after to (S., 144).—of desire; genitive after to desire (S., 26).—having been directed (for the Greek aorist; S., 87, (3)) to be; instrumental dative of association (S., 52, (1), c). 29. it is necessary; optative necessitated by the sense, not by the conjunction if (S., 102).—he is sitting and reaping; the word order is Greek; in English, we repeat the object 'it' after the second verb (reaping).—gathering in the field; to gather with accusative; sometimes (Lu. 8, 7) it takes the dative; compare to come in, chap. V, 20, above. 30. your hand; compare the sequence of words (without the article) with the similar expression (with the article) in 29, above.—this, that; but αὐτήν in Greek.—he is sitting, etc.; the dependent clause after he is sitting is sometimes an accusative with infinitive (S., 113); thus is dative of advantage (S., 36, (4)).—asking...gathering; both optatives imply possibility (S., 103). 31. -and then; both particles (= then alone) are here continuative: but further, also.—who is free; optative in a relative clause that does not contain a statement of the speaker, but of someone else (compare verse 32, below); is is less definitive here than in the following verse, where her is emphatic, and is her means as much as 'his legitimate wife'.—give; hortatory optative (S., 91, (2)).—writing, a writing (literally letters; compare the Latin 'littera': 'litterae') of divorcement (literally 'standing off'; compare the German 'abstand' in the sense of 'desistence'). 32. who frees...will marry; the verses are in the indicative mood because they contain the speaker's statements (as opposed to the preceding ones).—is; for is (Gr., 157, n. 3). 33. who is helping...he will give; hortatory optative (S., 91, (2)).—lord; without the article when signifying God (S., 68, n. 2. The Greek text has τῷ). 34. to swear; objective infinitive after to say, to command (S., 110).—of God; genitive in its abbreviated form (Gr., 94, n. 3). 35. city; without the article, as in Greek. 36. a single hair; the hairs, collectively. 37. it shall be (for it will be, for it shall be; see Gr., 62, n. 3), but ... shall be.—the more; comparative used as a noun: literally 'the more', i.e., what is more.—to them; dative as ablative (S., 54, 3), after the comparative the more (= they with nominative; compare the Greek genitive and the Latin ablative in such cases).—to bear; dative of the singular noun to be used as a noun. 38. for, in return for, with dative; in other senses, and more frequently, with accusative. 39. understand; [Pg 119] infinitive, as in verse 34.—at all; adverbial genitive, from the adjective at all, without equivalent in the Greek text. Wulfila probably inserted it according to verse 34, where the Greek text shows ὅλως.—of that unspeakable; weak adjective noun used as a noun; see to bear in 37, above.—who; here indefinite, as in 23, above.—to leap; optative, as in 29, above; likewise the imperative to wander in the apodosis.—and, also. 40. and, also.—to that willing; a participial construction, as in Greek (τῷ θέλοντι).—to take; complementary infinitive after willing (as in 42, below; S., 109). 41. to be born...to go; the present optative in protasis and apodosis (S., 102, a).—a journey; accusative expressing extent of space (S., 15, (2), β); a journey (for μίλιον, the Roman mile), literally 'rest', place of resting, a stage or station, also the distance between two stages. 42. to that willing; dative as ablative after until (S., 54, (1), where us should be inserted after off).—to borrow; complementary infinitive; (S., 109) to lend. 43. friends...enemy...enemy-hating; these words and several others are found both with and without j (Gr., 10, n. 4); enemy (enemy), accusative of enemies (enemies), enemy, literally hating, present participle of to hate (Gr., 115). 44. bless you (i.e., treat well; for the dative after to bless, see S., 45, page 246, below).—concerning, for.—putting on; accusative of the present participle (Gr., 133) of to put on, the us- being intensive; -put on = '-trude' in 'obtrude'. 45. that you may be sons; that, in order that; you may be, present optative in a final clause (S., 96, a).—in heaven; adverbial phrase used substantively after the article (this).—through; through from from; Gr., 24, n. 2; 78, n. 4.—to reign; from to reign, factitive of to rain, n., rain. 46. where is reward; the interrogative where agrees with the following genitive in gender.—new (i.e. not-new); interrogative particle.—the Gentiles, the (= those) of the Gentiles, = the Gentiles; Gentiles is genitive plural of people, people. 47. your friends, the friends (of) yours, = your friends; friends is a noun in form (Gr., 115) and meaning, while those friends still has its verbal force; yours is a possessive pronoun accusative plural agreeing with friends, but yours is a personal pronoun accusative plural governed by friends.—how; instrumental case of who, n. of who (Gr., 159; S., 51).—more; comparative after how (S., 51). 48. you; for the personal pronoun with a verb, see verse 22, above.—such a father is yours in heaven is the subject, not he, he in heaven being an attribute of your father, and may be rendered by a relative clause in English.

Chap. VI. 1. taujan; complimentary inf. after atsaíƕiþ (2nd pers. pl. imper.).—du saíƕan im prop. a gerundiv construction, to be seen by them, lit. 'for them to see'. The activ inf. in Gothic often has a passiv force (S., 106, n. 3, end).—aiþþau, or else, otherwise. 2. þan, when.—taujais; opt. in a temporal clause (S., 100).—haúrnjais; hort. opt. (S., 91, (2)).—þai liutans; the art. denotes a class of peple (S., 68, (6), n.).—háuhjaindau; prs. opt. pass. in a final clause (S., 96, a, α).—fram, by.—qiþa; without ik; see V, 22, abuv.—andnêmun; pret. expressing completion (= our prs. perf.): they hav receivd (Cp. 5, below). 3. þuk taujandan armaiôn ni witi hleidumei þeina, ƕa taujiþ taíhswô þeina; a puzling construction, indeed! (Cp. O. Luecke, 'Absolute Participia im Gotischen, etc.'; and E. Bernhardt, 'Gotische Grammatik', p. 116). Sum Latin manuscripts hav 'te facientem'. But þuk taujandan probably depends on witi: Let[Pg 120] not thy left hand know thee doing alms, what thy right hand doeth (= when thou doest alms, let not thy left hand know what thy right hand doeth.) 4. sijai; prs. opt. in a final clause (S., 96, a).—saíƕiþ; ind. in a rel. clause expressing a fact (S., 99).—usgibiþ; prs. ind. for the Grk. fut. (S., 86, (3)). 5. ei gaumjaindau mannam; dat. after gaumjan in the pass. ('to be seen by' = 'to appear' or 'show one's self to').—þatei haband, etc.; cp. andnêmun, etc., in 2, abuv. 6. haúrdai þeinai; instr. dativ after galûkands (S., 52, (4), note). 7. bidjandansuþ; s before the enclitic -uh (-uþ; Gr., 62, n. 3) generally becums z (Gr., 78, c).—þai þiudô; gen. after the art. in the nom.; see V, 46.—im; dat. (of the pers. prn. is) after the impers. þugkeiþ (S., 42, n.).—andhausjaindau; prs. opt. pass. expressing probability (S., 91, (3)). 8. þaim (dem. prn. S., 63); instr. dat. after galeikôþ (S., 51 and 52).—þizei jus þaúrbuþ, of what you ar in need; þizei is gen. of attraction (= þata þizei; S., 70, n. 1; 72); for the inflection of þaúrbuþ, s. Gr., 196.—bidjaiþ; opt. in a temporal clause. 9. bidjaiþ; hort. opt. (S., 91, (2)).—atta unsar þu; voc. accumpanied by þu (for the Greek art. S., 14, ns. 1 and 2).—(9 ... 13) weihnai.. qimai..waírþai.....briggais; opts. expressing a wish, while the imperativs gif....aflêt.....lausei imply what the speaker desires to be done now (S., 91, n. 1). 11. hlaif unsarana þana sinteinan, our bred, the daily = our daily bred; sinteins, continual (= daily) is undoutedly ment to express the 'cotidianum' of the Itala, for the Grk. τὸν ἐπιούσιον means the following [ἡ ἐπιοῦσα (whense ἐπιούσιος), sc. ἡμέρα, the following day].—himma daga; loc. dat. (S., 53, (2)): to day. (For the dem. himma, s. Gr., 155). 12. uns; dat. of the indir. object, as in 14, below.—þatei; acc. after skulans sijaima (S., 15, n. 5). 13. in fraistubnjai; dat. after in, where we should expect the acc., as in V, 20.—þeina ist; the predicate is in the sg., altho it belongs to three coordinate subjects (S., 5, n. 1), the gender of þeina being that of the first subject (S., 9, n. 3).—in aiwins (acc. pl. of the i-declension; see Gr., 91, n. 5), for ages, for ever. 14. aflêtiþ (2nd pers. pl. prs. ind.) ...aflêtiþ (3d pers. sing. prs. ind., for the Grk. future); the ind. in both clauses regarded as statements implying facts (S., 102).—izê, of them = their (S., 60). 15. þau; adv.; see V, 20.—missadêdins; acc. pl. of -dêþs (-dêds; s. Gr., 74, n. 2). 18. mannam; dat., as in 5, abuv.—usgibiþ þus; cp. verse 6, end. 19. frawardeiþ; sg., altho belonging to two subjects connected by jah (S., 5, n. 1). 21. ist; for the Grk. future.—jah, also. 22. lukarn leikis ist augô; the subject is augô; in the Grk. text the art. occurs with each noun.—waírþiþ; for ἔσται. 23. ƕan filu; supply ist from the protasis. 24. twaim fraujam; dat. of the relation of one person towards another (S., 37 and 45); so after the following vbs., ufhauseiþ and frakunnan (S., 41).—jabai; as if for εἰ, but the Grk. text has ἤ; hense the follg. jah means also. 25. duþþê; for du-h-þê (see 'Vocabulary').—saiwalai...leika; dats. of the thing towards which the action of the vb., maúrnaiþ, is directed (S., 40): for your life.—matjaiþ ..drigkaiþ..wasjaiþ; opt. in indir. questions (S., 95).—ƕê; instr. case (Gr., 153 and 159; S., 52, (2)).—fôdeinai..wastjôm; abl. dats. after mais (S., 54, (3)). 26. þei ni saiand, etc.; an object clause depending on insaíƕiþ; þei is conj. (Gr., 218).—mais wulþrizans; a pleonastic use[Pg 121] of the compar. degree (S., 57. n.).—þaim; abl. dat., as fôdeinai in 25. 29. qiþuh; for qiþa-uh (Gr., 4, n. 1). 30. himma daga; s. verse 11.—gistradagis, to-morrow; the corresponding word of the cognate dialects means yesterday. See 'Vocabulary'.—wisandô; prs. ptc. n. (weak infl.; Gr., 133) ...galagiþ; pp. n. (strong infl.; Gr., 134).—guþ; subject. 31. matjam..drigkam; ind.: what shal we eat ... drink [now] ..wasjaima [sc. uns]; opt. (for the Grk. fut.): wherewith shal [= may (S., 91, (3))] we clothe ourselvs [hereafter]? 32. waituh; for wait-uh.

Chap. VI. 1. taujan; complimentary infinitive after atsaíƕiþ (2nd person plural imperative).—du saíƕan im is essentially a gerundive construction, to be seen by them, literally 'for them to see'. The active infinitive in Gothic often has a passive force (S., 106, n. 3, end).—aiþþau, or else, otherwise. 2. þan, when.—taujais; optative in a temporal clause (S., 100).—haúrnjais; hortative optative (S., 91, (2)).—þai liutans; the article denotes a class of people (S., 68, (6), n.).—háuhjaindau; present optative passive in a final clause (S., 96, a, α).—fram, by.—qiþa; without ik; see V, 22, above.—andnêmun; past expressing completion (= our present perfect): they have received (Cp. 5, below). 3. þuk taujandan armaiôn ni witi hleidumei þeina, ƕa taujiþ taíhswô þeina; a puzzling construction, indeed! (Cp. O. Luecke, 'Absolute Participia im Gotischen, etc.'; and E. Bernhardt, 'Gotische Grammatik', p. 116). Some Latin manuscripts have 'te facientem'. But þuk taujandan probably depends on witi: Let[Pg 120] not your left hand know what your right hand is doing with alms (= when you do alms, do not let your left hand know what your right hand does.) 4. sijai; present optative in a final clause (S., 96, a).—saíƕiþ; indicative in a relative clause expressing a fact (S., 99).—usgibiþ; present indicative for the Greek future (S., 86, (3)). 5. ei gaumjaindau mannam; dative after gaumjan in the passive ('to be seen by' = 'to appear' or 'show oneself to').—þatei haband, etc.; compare andnêmun, etc., in 2, above. 6. haúrdai þeinai; instrumental dative after galûkands (S., 52, (4), note). 7. bidjandansuþ; s before the enclitic -uh (-uþ; Gr., 62, n. 3) generally becomes z (Gr., 78, c).—þai þiudô; genitive after the article in the nominative; see V, 46.—im; dative (of the personal pronoun is) after the impersonal þugkeiþ (S., 42, n.).—andhausjaindau; present optative passive expressing probability (S., 91, (3)). 8. þaim (demonstrative pronoun S., 63); instrumental dative after galeikôþ (S., 51 and 52).—þizei jus þaúrbuþ, of what you are in need; þizei is the genitive of attraction (= þata þizei; S., 70, n. 1; 72); for the inflection of þaúrbuþ, see Gr., 196.—bidjaiþ; optative in a temporal clause. 9. bidjaiþ; hortative optative (S., 91, (2)).—atta unsar þu; vocative accompanied by þu (for the Greek article S., 14, notes 1 and 2).—(9 ... 13) weihnai..qimai..waírþai.....briggais; optatives expressing a wish, while the imperatives gif....aflêt.....lausei imply what the speaker wants to be done now (S., 91, n. 1). 11. hlaif unsarana þana sinteinan, our bread, the daily = our daily bread; sinteins, continual (= daily) is undoubtedly meant to express the 'cotidianum' of the Itala, because the Greek τὸν ἐπιούσιον means the following [ἡ ἐπιοῦσα (whence ἐπιούσιος), sc. ἡμέρα, the following day].—himma daga; locative dative (S., 53, (2)): today. (For the demonstrative himma, see Gr., 155). 12. uns; dative of the indirect object, as in 14, below.—þatei; accusative after skulans sijaima (S., 15, n. 5). 13. in fraistubnjai; dative after in, where we would expect the accusative, as in V, 20.—þeina ist; the predicate is in the singular, although it belongs to three coordinate subjects (S., 5, n. 1), the gender of þeina being that of the first subject (S., 9, n. 3).—in aiwins (accusative plural of the i-declension; see Gr., 91, n. 5), for ages, forever. 14. aflêtiþ (2nd person plural present indicative) ...aflêtiþ (3rd person singular present indicative, for the Greek future); the indicative in both clauses regarded as statements implying facts (S., 102).—izê, of them = their (S., 60). 15. þau; adverb; see V, 20.—missadêdins; accusative plural of -dêþs (-dêds; see Gr., 74, n. 2). 18. mannam; dative, as in 5, above.—usgibiþ þus; compare verse 6, end. 19. frawardeiþ; singular, although belonging to two subjects connected by jah (S., 5, n. 1). 21. ist; for the Greek future.—jah, also. 22. lukarn leikis ist augô; the subject is augô; in the Greek text, the article occurs with each noun.—waírþiþ; for ἔσται. 23. ƕan filu; supply ist from the protasis. 24. twaim fraujam; dative indicating the relationship of one person towards another (S., 37 and 45); so after the following verbs, ufhauseiþ and frakunnan (S., 41).—jabai; as if for εἰ, but the Greek text has ἤ; hence the following jah means also. 25. duþþê; for du-h-þê (see 'Vocabulary').—saiwalai...leika; datives indicating the thing towards which the action of the verb, maúrnaiþ, is directed (S., 40): for your life.—matjaiþ ..drigkaiþ..wasjaiþ; optatives in indirect questions (S., 95).—ƕê; instrumental case (Gr., 153 and 159; S., 52, (2)).—fôdeinai..wastjôm; ablative datives after mais (S., 54, (3)). 26. þei ni saiand, etc.; an object clause depending on insaíƕiþ; þei is a conjunction (Gr., 218).—mais wulþrizans; a pleonastic use of the comparative degree (S., 57, n.).—þaim; ablative dative, as fôdeinai in 25. 29. qiþuh; for qiþa-uh (Gr., 4, n. 1). 30. himma daga; see verse 11.—gistradagis, tomorrow; the corresponding word in the cognate dialects means yesterday. See 'Vocabulary'.—wisandô; present participle (weak infl.; Gr., 133) ...galagiþ; past participle (strong infl.; Gr., 134).—guþ; subject. 31. matjam..drigkam; indicative: what shall we eat ... drink [now] ..wasjaima [sc. uns]; optative (for the Greek future): wherewith shall [= may (S., 91, (3))] we clothe ourselves [hereafter]? 32. waituh; for wait-uh.

II. FROM THE GOSPEL OF ST. MARK.

Chap. I. 1. aíwaggêljôns...guþs; contrary to the Greek text, the art. is omitted before these gens. (S., 68, n. 2). 2. gamêliþ ist; for the Grk. perf.—Êsaïin praúfêtau; in the Greek text the art. is uzed before both dats. (S., 68, n. 2); for the different forms of praúfêtus, s. 'Vocabulary'.—sai (Gr., 204, n. 2).—ik; the pers. prn. might here be omitted, as it does not seem to be emfasized (S., 59). Probably for this reason sum MSS. do not hav it.—saei; rel. prn. (Gr., 157).—gamanweiþ; the prs. for the Grk. future (S., 86, (3)).—þeinana; after its sbs., because it is not emfatic (S., 10, n. 2). 3. wôpjandins; gen. sg. of wôpjanda, weak prs. ptc. (Gr., 133).—manweiþ; there is no perceptibl difference between this v. and the compound gamanweiþ in the second verse. 4. du aflageinai; du denotes purpose.—frawaúrhtê; objectiv gen. (S., 20; and 19) with the verbal noun aflageinai. 5. daupidai wêsun; imperf. made up of the pp. and the prt. of wisan (S., 87, n. a).—Iaúrdanê (Grk. dat.); attribute of aƕai.—fram (w. dat.), by.—andhaitandans; w. the dat. of the dir. object (S., 45). 6. wasuþ-þan; for was-uh-þan (Gr., 62, n. 3).—taglam; instr. dat. after gawasiþs (S., 52, (2), b).—gaírda filleina; subj. of was understood.—haiþiwisk, wild, lit. 'pertaining to the heath'. 7. mis; abl. dat. after swinþôza (S., 54, (3)).—sa afar mis; sa seems to hav been added erroneously, or afar should be ufar (?).—ik; emfatic, as opposed to swinþôza, or sa.—andbindan; the prefix and- expresses the contrary of an action (Cp. E. un-in 'unbind').—is, his (Gr., 152; S., 60 et seq.).—ik.....is; uzed for the sake of emfasis (S., 2). 9. warþ...qam; an asyndetic construction.—Nazaraíþ; indecl. pr. n.—Galeilaias; notice the adj. force of this adnominal gen. (S., 20).—fram; by, as in 5, abuv; —Iôhannê and Iaúrdanê ar Grk. dativs. 10. uslukanans; the emendation is wel grounded; see Bernhardt's large edition. 11. þuzei (= þus-ei; Gr., 78); rel. prn. (Gr., 158; S., 73). 12. sai, ahma, not sa ahma, because ahma, 'Holy Ghost', occurs always without the art. (Bernhardt, note to this passage). 13. dagê; partit. gen. with tiguns (Gr., 142; S., 21).—diuzam; dat. pl. of dius (Gr., 78, b; 94).—imma; dat. with andbahtidêdun (S., 38). 14. Galeilaia; (Grk.) dat. after qam in; see V, 20. 15. usfullnôda...atnêƕida; for the Grk. perfect (S., 87, (2)).—galaubeiþ in; with the dat. (for other constructions after galaubjan, see S., 41 and note). 16. faúr, along, lit. before.—Galeilaias; (Grk.) gen. as in verse 9.—is, his, i. e. Simon's (S., 62). 17. hirjats; dual of hiri (Gr., 20, n. 1).—igqis; dir. obj.—nutans; predicate acc. (S., 18). 18. seina; poss. prn. referring to the subj. of the[Pg 122] sentence; cp. verse 16. 19. inngaggands, going on.—þana Zaíbaídaiaus, [that of Zebedee, = the 'Zebedeean' =] the son of Zebedee. Observ the adj. force of the gen. (S., 19 and 21).—is; see verses 16 and 18, abuv.—manwjandans; weak inflection of the prs. ptc. uzed as sb., and with an obj., natja (Gr., 133. Cp. also Gr., 115; and Mt. V, 47). 20. seinana; this poss. prn. refers to the subj.; cp. the poss. is in v. 19; also v. 16. 21. sabbatô; indecl. sb. for the gen. pl.—synagôgên; acc. 22. usfilmans; this is one of the adjs. that follow the weak infl. only (Gr., 132, n. 2). 23. synagôgên; dat.—in (the second); denotes a condition: in, with. 24. ƕa uns jah þus, what hav we to do with thee, lit. what [is there] to us and to thee (S., 35, n. 1).—Nazôrênai; a Grk. ending, or -ai is an error for -au.—uns; is dat. or acc. with fraqistjan (S., 46).—weiha; weak adj. uzed as sb.—guþs; gen. (Gr., 94, n. 3). 25. ût us þamma, out of him (lit. this, for the Grk. αὐτός. S., 63).—unhrainja; the weak infl. of adjs. in the voc. case is quite common in Gothic. 26. stibnai mikilai; instr. dat. (S., 52, (2)). 27. miþ sis missô, with one another (S., 59, n.).—sijai; prs. opt. in a dir. question implying possibility (S., 91, (3)).—ƕô, of what kind; the copula is omitted, as in Grk.—laiseinô; gen. pl.; s. Mt. V, 46; also Gr., 159.—ahmam þaim unhrainjam; dat. with anabiudiþ (S., 37).—imma; dat. after ufhausjand (S., 38; and 45). 28. is, his.—bisitands, neighbor (lit. sitting, i. e. dwelling, near; for this kind of nouns, see Gr., 115). 29. in garda; in with dat. after qiman; see Mt. V, 20.—Iôhannên; with a Grk. ending. There is no fixt rule for the declension of proper names in Gothic (Gr., 120). 30. in brinnôn; in fever, lit. 'in burning'. 31. im; dat. pl. of is, guvernd by andbahtida (S., 38); refers to Jesus and those with him. 32. andanahtja waúrþanamma; dat. abs. (S., 119).—þan; for δέ, the second þan for ὅτε.—sauil; this word occurs only twice in Gothic, and without the art. (S. 262), the uzual word for 'sun' being sunnô. 34. missaleikaim saúhtim; instr. dat. (or 'with-case'. S., 50) of cause: ubil habandans m. s., (having evil =) being sick with divers diseases. 36. jah galaistans waúrþun imma; imma is instr. dat. of accumpaniment or association, depending on the predicate noun galaistans (S., 52, (1), a). 37. þatei, conj., that, before a dir. quotation. 38. bisunjanê; attributiv adv. preceded by the art. (S., 68, (2)). 40. þrutsfill habands, (a person) having leprosy, for λεπρός, a leper.—kniwam knussjands; an alliterativ expression, kniwam being a superfluous instr. dat. (S., 52, (2)). 41. imma; dat. guvernd by attaítôk (S., 40).—wiljau; the opt. of this vb. discharges the function of the ind. (Gr., 205).—waírþ, be thou (for the distinction between the imper. and the hort. opt., see S., 91, n. 1). 42. þata..þata; the former is the dem. prn., the latter the art. 43. imma; dir. obj. in the dat., guvernd by gaƕôtjands (S., 40; cp. verse 41, abuv). 44. qiþais; opt. in a final clause (S., 96, a).—mannhun; indef. prn. in the dat. (Gr., 163, a).—ataugjan; inf. of purpose (without du, to) after gagg (S., 114).—fram (περί), concerning, for.—þatei; rel. prn., for þata-ei (Gr., 4, n. 1; 157), that which, = giba þôei in Mt. VIII, 4. 45. swaswê, so that.—is, he (= Iesus), while the first is refers to the heald man.

Chap. I. 1. God...god; unlike the Greek text, the article is left out before these names. (S., 68, n. 2). 2. is married; for the Grk. perfect.—Jesus the prophet; the Greek text uses the article before both names. (S., 68, n. 2); for the different forms of prophet, see 'Vocabulary'.—he (Gr., 204, n. 2).—I; the personal pronoun might be omitted here, as it doesn’t seem to be emphasized (S., 59). Probably for this reason some manuscripts do not have it.—that; relative pronoun (Gr., 157).—he will gather; the present tense for the Greek future (S., 86, (3)).—the sinner; after its nouns, because it is not emphatic (S., 10, n. 2). 3. for the sake of; genitive singular of for the sake of, weak present participle (Gr., 133).—one will gather; there is no noticeable difference between this verb and the compound is gathering in the second verse. 4. to sustain; to indicates purpose.—of the lord; objective genitive (S., 20; and 19) with the verbal noun to sustain. 5. they were; imperfect composed of the past participle and the present of to be (S., 87, n. a).—Jordan (Grk. dat.); attribute of river.—by (with dat.), by.—and those who are calling; with the dative of the direct object (S., 45). 6. was for was it (Gr., 62, n. 3).—my word; instrumental dat. after taught (S., 52, (2), b).—and the fields; subject of was understood.—wild, lit. 'of the wilderness'. 7. me; ablative dat. after Simon (S., 54, (3)).—so far from me; so seems to have been added wrongly, or afar should be over (?).—I; emphatic, as opposed to Simon, or so.—unbind; the prefix un- represents the opposite action (Cp. E. un-in 'unbind').—is, his (Gr., 152; S., 60 et seq.).—I...is; used for emphasis (S., 2). 9. became...came; an asyndetic construction.—Nazarene; indeclinable proper noun.—Galilean; notice the adjectival force of this attributive genitive (S., 20).—by; by, as in 5, above; —John and Jordan are Greek datives. 10. useless; the emendation is well-founded; see Bernhardt's large edition. 11. that (= that is; Gr., 78); relative pronoun (Gr., 158; S., 73). 12. that, Spirit, not the Spirit, because Spirit, 'Holy Spirit', always occurs without the article (Bernhardt, note to this passage). 13. day; partitive genitive with ten (Gr., 142; S., 21).—nights; dative plural of night (Gr., 78, b; 94).—with; dative with to appear (S., 38). 14. Galilee; (Grk.) dative after came in; see V, 20. 15. became full of... filled with; for the Grk. perfect (S., 87, (2)).—believed in; with the dative (for other constructions after believe, see S., 41 and note). 16. before, along, lit. in front of.—Galilean; (Grk.) genitive as in verse 9.—is, his, i.e. Simon's (S., 62). 17. two; dual of two (Gr., 20, n. 1).—the person; direct object.—the question; predicate accusative (S., 18). 18. his; possessive pronoun referring to the subject of the sentence; cp. verse 16. 19. those who are going, going on.—the son of Zebedee, [that of Zebedee, = the 'Zebedeean' =] the son of Zebedee. Observe the adjectival force of the genitive (S., 19 and 21).—is; see verses 16 and 18, above.—concerning; weak inflection of the present participle used as a noun, and with an object, names (Gr., 133. Cp. also Gr., 115; and Mt. V, 47). 20. his; this possessive pronoun refers to the subject; cp. the possessive his in v. 19; also v. 16. 21. Sabbath; indeclinable noun for the genitive plural.—synagogue; accusative. 22. full of; this is one of the adjectives that follow weak inflection only (Gr., 132, n. 2). 23. to the synagogue; dative.—in (the second); denotes a condition: in, with. 24. what do we have in common with you, lit. what [is there] to us and to you (S., 35, n. 1).—Nazarene; a Greek ending, or -ai is an error for -au.—us; is dative or accusative with questioning (S., 46).—holy; weak adjective used as a noun.—God; genitive (Gr., 94, n. 3). 25. out of him (lit. this, for the Greek αὐτός. S., 63).—common; the weak inflection of adjectives in the vocative case is quite common in Gothic. 26. highly esteemed; instrumental dative (S., 52, (2)). 27. with each other (S., 59, n.).—may it be; present optative in a direct question implying possibility (S., 91, (3)).—what kind; the copula is omitted, as in Greek.—of what; genitive plural; see Mt. V, 46; also Gr., 159.—that they are common; dative with convened (S., 37).—with; dative after getting together (S., 38; and 45). 28. is, his.—neighbor, dwelling, i.e. dwelling, near; for this kind of nouns, see Gr., 115). 29. in the yard; in with dative after come; see Mt. V, 20.—John; with a Greek ending. There is no fixed rule for the declension of proper names in Gothic (Gr., 120). 30. in fever, lit. 'in burning'. 31. to; dative plural of is, governed by appear (S., 38); refers to Jesus and those with him. 32. the night will become; dative absolute (S., 119).—the second; for δέ, the second than for ὅτε.—sun; this word occurs only twice in Gothic, and without the article (S. 262), the usual word for 'sun' being sun. 34. having illnesses; instrumental dative (or 'with-case'. S., 50) of cause: evil having m. s., (having evil =) being sick with various diseases. 36. and it will be gathered; with is instrumental dative used to indicate accompaniment or association, depending on the predicate noun gathering (S., 52, (1), a). 37. that, conjunction, that, before a direct quotation. 38. that is; attributive adverb preceded by the article (S., 68, (2)). 40. a person having leprosy, for λεπρός, a leper.—in good health; an alliterative expression, in being a superfluous instrumental dative (S., 52, (2)). 41. that; dative governed by father’s teaching (S., 40).—want; the optative of this verb serves the function of the indicative (Gr., 205).—be you (for the distinction between the imperative and the hortative optative, see S., 91, n. 1). 42. what.. that; the former is the demonstrative pronoun, the latter the article. 43. in the speaking; direct object in the dative, governed by speaking (S., 40; cp. verse 41, above). 44. may it be; optative in a final clause (S., 96, a).—someone; indefinite pronoun in the dative (Gr., 163, a).—to overlook; infinitive of purpose (without to, to) after to go (S., 114).—regarding (περί), concerning, for.—that; relative pronoun, for that which (Gr., 4, n. 1; 157), that which, = that which in Mt. VIII, 4. 45. so that.—is, he (= Jesus), while the first is refers to the healed man.

Chap. II. 1. þatei; conj., that (Gr., 157, n. 2).—ist (for ἐστίν); we[Pg 123] should rather expect the prt. 2. swaswê juþan ni gamôstêdun (prt. of gamôtan; Gr., 202) nih at daúra, so that they found no room any more, not even at the door.—im; dat. of the indir. obj. (S., 37).—waúrd; in Gr.: τὸν λόγον. 3. hafanana (acc. sg. of hafans; Gr., 134), pp. of hafjan (Gr., 177, n. 2). 4. imma; dat. guvernd by nêƕa (qiman; cp. nêƕjan sik, S., 39).—faúra (w. dat.), because of.—usgrabandans; for ἐξορύξαντες, digging out; hense breaking up (sc. hrôt).—insailidêdun þata badi jah fralaílôtun (for χαλῶσιν τόν κράβαττον), lit.: they tied the bed to cords and let (it) down. 5. þus; dat. after aflêtanda (S., 37). 6. þagkjandans sis, reasoning with themselvs, the refl. dat., sis, does duty for the Grk. midl (S., 47, n. 1). 7. ƕa (acc. sg. of the interr. prn., = τί, quare), why?—sa; dem. prn. (S., 63).—ains, alone. 8. ahmin seinamma; loc. dat. (S., 53, (1), c).—sis; refl. dat., as in verse 6, abuv.—duƕê, = du-ƕê, ƕê being an instr. case proper (Gr., 159, n. 1; S., 51). 9. du qiþan....qiþan; two subj. infs., the former with, the latter without du (S., 107, a and b). 10. mans; gen. sg. (Gr., 117, (1)). 11. nimuh, and take. 12. jah háuhidêdun mikiljandans guþ, and glorifying praised God, for δοξάζειν τὸν θεόν. Similarly in chap. I, v. 27: afsláuþnôdêdun sildaleikjandans, for ἐθαμβήθησαν.—aiw ..ni, ever not, = never. aiw is, properly, the acc. sg. of aiws, time, and answers in form and meaning our 'aye'.—gasêƕum; notice change of person. 13. iddjêdun; pl. vb., agreeing with the subj., all, in sense (S., 5 and 82, c). 14. þana Alfaiaus; cp. I, 19. III, 18. 15. warþ...... jah managai, etc. (for a different construction with warþ, s. Mk. II, 23. S., 108, n.; 113), it came to pass [that] ... also many, etc.—Iêsua sipônjam; instr. dat. of accumpaniment (S., 52, 1, c). 16. ƕa, how, as in 7. 17. lêkeis; gen. (as abl.) with þaúrbun (S., 27).—ubilaba (adv.) habandans; for κακῶς ἔχοντες, being sick; cp. Mk. V, 26. 18. Jôhannis..... Iôhannês; these genitivs in the same verse ar a striking exampl of arbitrary inflection of proper names in Gothic (Gr., 120). 19. ibai; an interr. particl, perhaps, or its sense is exprest by our may, a negativ answer being expected. 20. atgaggand...fastand; for the Grk. future (S., 86, (3)).—þan...þan, when, then. 21. ibai afnimai fullôn af þamma sa niuja þamma faírnjin (εἰ δὲ μή, αἴρει τό πλήρωμα ἀπ' αὐτοῦ τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ). Wulfila took πλήρωμα to be the obj. of αἴρει. The subj. of the Goth. construction is either the preceding plat fanins niujis; with sa niuja as apposition, or sa niuja (sc. plat). In both cases þamma faírnjin is in apposition with af þamma (dem. pron. S., 63). 23. jah warþ þaírhgaggan imma, and it came to pass that he went (Lit.: and it came to pass to him to go. S., 108, n.). Cp. 14, abuv.—sabbatô (indecl., for gen. pl.; sabbatê daga in Mk. XVI, 1.) daga; loc. dat. of time (S., 53, (2)). 24. sabbatim; dat. as in verse 23. 25. niu (= ni-uh) aiw, never. 26. uf, under, i. e. in the time of.—þanzei (i. e. þans-ei; Gr., 157, n. 4).—matjan; subj. inf. (S., 108).—ainaim gudjam, for the priests alone (S., 108, n.).—sis; refers to the subj. (S., 60). 27. in (for διά with the acc.) mans (gen.; Gr., 117), for man; in sabbatô dagis, for sabbath day.—warþ gaskapans; for the Gr. aor. (S., 87, (4), c). 28. frauja; predicate noun.—jah, also.—þamma sabbatô; dat. depending on frauja (S., 35, (2)).

Chap. II. 1. that; conj., that (Gr., 157, n. 2).—is (for ἐστίν); we[Pg 123] should rather expect the past form. 2. so that they found no room anymore, not even at the door (past of gamôtan; Gr., 202) and at the door, so that they found no room any more, not even at the door.—to; dat. of the indirect object (S., 37).—word; in Gr.: τὸν λόγον. 3. having (acc. sg. of hafans; Gr., 134), pp. of hafjan (Gr., 177, n. 2). 4. then; dat. governed by nêƕa (qiman; cp. nêƕjan sik, S., 39).—because of (w. dat.).—digging out; for ἐξορύξαντες, digging out; hence breaking up (sc. hrôt).—they tied the bed to cords and lowered it down (for χαλῶσιν τόν κράβαττον), lit.: they tied the bed to cords and let (it) down. 5. thus; dat. after aflêtanda (S., 37). 6. reasoning with themselves, the refl. dat., themselves, does duty for the Grk. mid (S., 47, n. 1). 7. why (acc. sg. of the interrogative pronoun, = τί, quare), why?—that; dem. pron. (S., 63).—alone. 8. in their own; loc. dat. (S., 53, (1), c).—themselves; refl. dat., as in verse 6 above.—because, = because, being an instrumental case proper (Gr., 159, n. 1; S., 51). 9. to say....to say; two subj. infinitives, the former with, the latter without to (S., 107, a and b). 10. of man; gen. sg. (Gr., 117, (1)). 11. and take. 12. and glorifying praised God, and glorifying praised God, for δοξάζειν τὸν θεόν. Similarly in chap. I, v. 27: were astonished, for ἐθαμβήθησαν.—ever not, never. ever is, properly, the acc. sg. of aiws, time, and answers in form and meaning our 'aye'.—to be noticed; notice change of person. 13. they were calling; pl. vb., agreeing with the subj., all, in sense (S., 5 and 82, c). 14. the Alphaeus; cp. I, 19. III, 18. 15. it came to be......and many, etc. (for a different construction with came, see Mk. II, 23. S., 108, n.; 113), it came to pass [that] ... also many, etc.—Iêsua __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ instr. dat. of accompaniment (S., 52, 1, c). 16. how, how, as in 7. 17. and were saying; gen. (as abl.) with that (S., 27).—being sick (adv.) being sick; for κακῶς ἔχοντες, being sick; cp. Mk. V, 26. 18. Johannes.....Iôhannês; these genitives in the same verse are a striking example of arbitrary inflection of proper names in Gothic (Gr., 120). 19. perhaps; an interrogative particle, perhaps, or its sense is expressed by our may, a negative answer being expected. 20. going...standing; for the Greek future (S., 86, (3)).—when...then, when, then. 21. if I take fullness from the new (εἰ δὲ μή, αἴρει τό πλήρωμα ἀπ' αὐτοῦ τὸ καινὸν τοῦ παλαιοῦ). Wulfila took πλήρωμα to be the object of αἴρει. The subject of the Goth. construction is either the preceding partake of the new; with that new as apposition, or that new (sc. partake). In both cases of the new is in apposition with of the (dem. pron. S., 63). 23. and it came to pass that he went, and it came to pass that he went (Lit.: and it came to pass to him to go. S., 108, n.). Cp. 14, above.—the Sabbath (indecl., for gen. pl.; the Sabbath day in Mk. XVI, 1.) days; loc. dat. of time (S., 53, (2)). 24. on the Sabbath; dat. as in verse 23. 25. never (= not-ever) ever, never. 26. under, i.e. in the time of.—when (i.e. in the time of; Gr., 157, n. 4).—to be cut out; subj. inf. (S., 108).—for the priests alone (S., 108, n.).—themselves; refers to the subj. (S., 60). 27. in (for διά with the acc.) man (gen.; Gr., 117), for man; on the Sabbath day, for the Sabbath day.—came into being; for the Gr. aor. (S., 87, (4), c). 28. Lord; predicate noun.—and, also.—the Sabbath; dat. depending on Lord (S., 35, (2)).

[Pg 124]

Chap. III. 1. synagôgên; Grk. acc., as in Mk. I, 21. 2. imma; dat. guvernd by witaidêdun (S., 40).—hailidêdiu; the suffix -u introduces the indir. question: whether he would heal, the prt. opt. being uzed after the prt. in the leading clause (S., 95, b).—prt. wrôhidêdeina; opt. in a final clause (S., 96, b, β). 3. in midumai (for εἰς τὸ μέσον); dat. with in after a vb. of motion within limited space (S., 55). 4. skuldu; the suffix -u introduces the question (cp. verse 2, abuv).—sabbatim; for its decl., s. Gr., 120, n. 1. 5. gastôþ (figurativ), was restored, lit. stood. 6. imma; instr. dat. (S., 52, p. 250) of the dir. obj., guvernd by usqêmeina, prt. opt. of purpose (S., 96, b). 7. manageins; partitiv gen. with filu (S., 21).—laistidêdun; its subj., filu manageins, is pl. in sense (S., 5). 9. ei skip habaiþ (n. sg. of the prt. ptc. in the predicate) wêsi (prt. opt. of purpose. S., 96, b), that a ship be redy (lit. had or held).—in, because of.—þraíheina; prt. opt. of purpose, like wêsi. 10. drusun, they prest upon, lit. fel upon.—imma; dir. obj. (S., 40) guvernd by attaítôkeina (prt. opt. of têkan). 11. þaih (i. e. þai-h, for þai-uh; Gr., 154) þan, when they. þatei, conj., that, before a direct quotation, as in Mk. I, 37. 13. ustaig; for usstaig (Gr. 78, n. 5), prt. of us-steigan.—þanzei; see II, 26. 14. sis; refers to the subj. of gawaúrhta (S., 60). 16. Paítrus; predicate nom.; we should rather hav expected the acc. (S., 13, n. 2). 17. þamma Z.; s. I, 19. 18. Seimôna; (Grk.) acc., while the same form in 16 is a regular Goth. dat. 20. gaïddja sik; for συνέρχεται (S., 16, n.). 22. þaim unhulþôm; instr. dat. guvernd by uswaírpiþ (S., 52, (4), and p. 253, n. 2). 23. Satanan; acc. after uswaírpan (cp. v. 22). 27. mag kasa swinþis galeiþands in gard is wilwan, (can rob a strong one's goods, entering into his house =) can enter into a strong man's house and rob his goods. 28. allata þata frawaúrhtê, all that of sins; frawaúrhtê is partitiv gen. after þata (S., 21; and 68, (3)). 29. aiweinaizôs frawaúrhtais, gen. depending on skula (S., 22, p. 235, where dauþus is an error for dauþaus). 31. standandôna...haitandôna, the n. (pl.) is uzed in the predicate (cp. the following verse), because the persons in the subj. ar of different gender (S., 9, n. 3). 32. sêtun; refers to managei, which is pl. in meaning (S., 5).—þeina..þeinai..þeinôs; the attribute (cp. the preceding verse) occurs with each of the sbs. of different gender (S., 10, n. 1). 35. allis; here conj.: for.—waúrkeiþ, for the Grk. future (S., 86, (3)).—sa; dem. prn.—meins; agrees with the nearest sb., and (meina) is understood with the others, swistar, aiþei.—The first jah was added by Wulfila.

Chap. III. 1. synagôgên; Greek accusative, as in Mk. I, 21. 2. imma; dative governed by witaidêdun (S., 40).—hailidêdiu; the suffix -u introduces the indirect question: whether he would heal, the past subjunctive being used after the past in the leading clause (S., 95, b).—past participle wrôhidêdeina; subjunctive in a final clause (S., 96, b, β). 3. in midumai (for εἰς τὸ μέσον); dative with in after a verb of motion within limited space (S., 55). 4. skuldu; the suffix -u introduces the question (cp. verse 2, above).—sabbatim; for its declension, see Gr., 120, n. 1. 5. gastôþ (figurative), was restored, literally stood. 6. imma; instrumental dative (S., 52, p. 250) of the direct object, governed by usqêmeina, past subjunctive of purpose (S., 96, b). 7. manageins; partitive genitive with filu (S., 21).—laistidêdun; its subject, filu manageins, is plural in sense (S., 5). 9. ei skip habaiþ (n. sg. of the past participle in the predicate) wêsi (past subjunctive of purpose. S., 96, b), that a ship be ready (literally had or held).—in, because of.—þraíheina; past subjunctive of purpose, like wêsi. 10. drusun, they pressed upon, literally fell upon.—imma; direct object (S., 40) governed by attaítôkeina (past subjunctive of têkan). 11. þaih (i.e. þai-h, for þai-uh; Gr., 154) þan, when they. þatei, conjunction, that, before a direct quotation, as in Mk. I, 37. 13. ustaig; for usstaig (Gr. 78, n. 5), past of us-steigan.—þanzei; see II, 26. 14. sis; refers to the subject of gawaúrhta (S., 60). 16. Paítrus; predicate nominative; we would rather have expected the accusative (S., 13, n. 2). 17. þamma Z.; see I, 19. 18. Seimôna; (Greek) accusative, while the same form in 16 is a regular Gothic dative. 20. gaïddja sik; for συνέρχεται (S., 16, n.). 22. þaim unhulþôm; instrumental dative governed by uswaírpiþ (S., 52, (4), and p. 253, n. 2). 23. Satanan; accusative after uswaírpan (cp. v. 22). 27. mag kasa swinþis galeiþands in gard is wilwan, (can rob a strong one's goods, entering into his house =) can enter into a strong man's house and rob his goods. 28. allata þata frawaúrhtê, all that of sins; frawaúrhtê is partitive genitive after þata (S., 21; and 68, (3)). 29. aiweinaizôs frawaúrhtais, genitive depending on skula (S., 22, p. 235, where dauþus is an error for dauþaus). 31. standandôna...haitandôna, the nominative (plural) is used in the predicate (cp. the following verse), because the persons in the subject are of different gender (S., 9, n. 3). 32. sêtun; refers to managei, which is plural in meaning (S., 5).—þeina..þeinai..þeinôs; the attribute (cp. the preceding verse) occurs with each of the subjects of different gender (S., 10, n. 1). 35. allis; here conjunction: for.—waúrkeiþ, for the Greek future (S., 86, (3)).—sa; demonstrative pronoun.—meins; agrees with the nearest noun, and (meina) is understood with the others, swistar, aiþei.—The first jah was added by Wulfila.

Chap. IV. 1. The gen. manageins depends on filu (S., 21), the predicate, galêsun, being in the pl. because of the pl. meaning of the subj. (S., 5).—swaswê; with the acc. (ina galeiþandan, ptc. agreeing with ina) and inf. (gasitan), for ὥστε w. the acc. and inf. (S., 115).—was; here managei takes a sg. v. (S., 5). 2. manag; acc. sg. n. uzed as sb. 3. saiands; prsp. uzed substantivly. For its declension, s. Gr., 133.—du saian; inf. of purpose after urrann, a vb. of motion (S., 114).—fraiwa seinamma; instr. dat. guvernd by saian (S., 52, (4)). 4. þata; for αὐτό. 5. anþaruþ-þan, i. e. anþar-uh-þan (Gr., 62, n. 3).—stainahamma; uzed substantivly: stony ground.—in þizei, because (s. 'Vocabulary', in, (1)).[Pg 125]—diupaizôs airþôs; gen. guvernd by habaida (S., 25). 6. at sunnin þan urrinnandin; dat. abs. introduced by at (S., 119); þan for δέ.—waúrtins; for the sg. in Grk. 8. For the numeral signs in this verse, see Gr., 1. 9. hausjandôna; for the inf. in Grk., for which we find du hausjan (S., 114) in Lu. VIII, 8.—gahausjai; hort. opt. (S., 91, (2)). 10. warþ, was, lit. became (ἐγένετο).—ina...þizôs gajukôns; acc. of the pers. addrest and the gen. of the th. askt about (S., 26), for a dubl acc. in Grk. 11. atgiban (pp.) ist; for δέδοται.—jainaim þaim (art. S., 68, (2)) ûta, to them (the =) that ar without. 12. nibai ƕan (for μήποτε; we should expect ibai ƕan; cp. Mt. V, 25) gawandjaina sik, lest at any time they should be converted (lit.: should convert themselvs).—aflêtaindau (prs. opt. pass.) im frawaúrhteis, their sins should be forgivn (lit.: sins should be forgivn to them. S., 37). 13. þô; dem. prn. ...þôs; art.—kunneiþ; for the Grk. fut. 14. saijands..saijiþ; without the j in verses 3 and 15 (Gr., 22 and n. 1). 15. aþþan þai wiþra wig sind; the Greek text is: οὕτοι δέ εὶσιν οἱ παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, but Lu. VIII, 12: οἱ δέ παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν εὶσιν.—þan, when.—unkarjans; added by Wulfila from a Lt. MS., for 'negligenter'. 16. jah; sc. þai, dem. prn. 18. þai, dem. prn. ...þai, art. ...þai, art. 19. þai bi þata anþar lustjus, the lusts of (lit.: concerning) other things (lit.: that other, for τὰ λοιπά). 21. ibai; here it introduces a dir. question, a negativ answer being expected.—qimiþ, is brought (lit. does cum).—duþê ei, to that that, i. e. for the purpose that.—satjaidau; opt. in a final clause (S., 96, a).—niu (= ni-u = ni-uh), and not? i. e. and (is it) not (brought)? 22. nih (= ni-uh), for not.—allis, at all.—ist ƕa fulginis, is (there) anything hidn (lit.: of anything hidn, the gen. fulginis depending on the indef. prn., ƕa; Gr., 162, n. 2; and S., 21).—gabaírhtjaidau; opt. in a consecutiv rel. clause (S., 99, a).—nih, and not, neither. 23. hausjandôna; prsp. for the inf. in Grk., as in IV, 9.—gahausjai; hort. opt. (S., 91, (2)). 24. in þizaiei mitaþ; the noun (mitaþ; dat., Gr., 116) is attracted into the rel. clause, and agrees with the rel. prn. (þizaiei; Gr., 157, and S., 72, n.).—izwis þaim galaubjandam (Gr., 133); þ. g. is in apposition (S., 11) with the dat. izwis (Gr., 150). 25. gibada; for the Grk. fut. (S., 86, (3)).—imma; abl. dat. guvernd by afnimada (S., 54, (1)). 26. fraiwa; instr. dat. guvernd by wairþiþ (S., 52, (4)). 27. slêpiþ..urreisiþ; the ind. for the Grk. subj. (S., 90; and 100, n.).—naht (Gr., 116) jah daga; loc. dat. (S., 53, (2)): night and day.—is; i. e. manna. 28. silbô; weak form (Gr., 156), agreeing with aírþa; it stands for αὐτομάτη, spontaneous, of herself. 29. insandeiþ; its subj. is is, i. e. manna.—atist; the prs. for the Grk. perf. (ἕστηκα; S., 86, (4)). 30. ƕê; instr. of ƕa (Gr., 159; S., 51), guvernd by galeikôm (S., 52, (1), c).—gabaíram, shal we compare, lit. bear or bring together; here ga- has an associativ force. 31. þatei; subj. of ist.—þan, when. 33. swaleikaim managaim gajukôm; instr. dat. of manner (S., 52, (6); in Mk. III, 23 we hav in gajukôm).—im; dat. pl. guvernd by du, while in the following verse im is guvernd by rôdida. 35. andanahtja þan (then) waúrþanamma; dat. abs. introduced by at (S., 120).—jainis stadis (S., 30), 'yun' shore, = that shore (towards which the speaker pointed), i. e. to the other side [of the lake]. 36. jah þan; emfatic: and also, besides, moreover.[Pg 126] 37. warþ, arose.—waltidêdun; orig. trans., but here intr. (S., 16, 3). 38. niu (= ni-u, the enclitic -u introducing the question) kara þuk þizei?, is there not care to thee of that (þis) that (ei; Gr., 157), i. e. does it not concern thee that? kara (or kara ist) takes the acc. of the person and the gen. of the obj. (S., 15, (1), n. 4). 39. winda; the dat. is guvernd by gasôk (S., 45).—afdumbn; imper. sing. (Gr., 195, n. 1). 41. sis; refl. dat. for the Grk. midl (S., 47, n. 1).—agis mikil; cognate acc. (with a vb. of kindred signification, ôhtêdun; S., 15, (2), b).—du sis missô, to one another (S., 60, n.).—sa (dem. prn.) sijai; opt. in a dir. question (S., 91, (3), p. 276): may he be.—imma; dat. guvernd by ufhausjand, listen with submission, obey (S., 38).

Chap. IV. 1. The general management depends on filu (S., 21), the predicate, galêsun, being in the plural because of the plural meaning of the subject. (S., 5).—swaswê; with the accusative (ina galeiþandan, participle agreeing with ina) and infinitive (gasitan), meaning ὥστε with the accusative and infinitive (S., 115).—was; here managei takes a singular verb (S., 5). 2. manag; accusative singular neuter used as a noun. 3. saiands; present participle used substantively. For its declension, see Gr., 133.—du saian; infinitive of purpose after urrann, a verb of motion (S., 114).—fraiwa seinamma; instrumental dative governed by saian (S., 52, (4)). 4. þata; for αὐτό. 5. anþaruþ-þan, i.e. anþar-uh-þan (Gr., 62, n. 3).—stainahamma; used substantively: stony ground.—in þizei, because (see 'Vocabulary', in, (1)).[Pg 125]—diupaizôs airþôs; genitive governed by habaida (S., 25). 6. at sunnin þan urrinnandin; dative absolute introduced by at (S., 119); þan for δέ.—waúrtins; for the singular in Greek. 8. For the numeral signs in this verse, see Gr., 1. 9. hausjandôna; for the infinitive in Greek, for which we find du hausjan (S., 114) in Lu. VIII, 8.—gahausjai; hortatory optative (S., 91, (2)). 10. warþ, was, literally became (ἐγένετο).—ina...þizôs gajukôns; accusative of the person addressed and the genitive of the thing asked about (S., 26), for a double accusative in Greek. 11. atgiban (past participle) ist; for δέδοται.—jainaim þaim (article S., 68, (2)) ûta, to them (the =) that are without. 12. nibai ƕan (for μήποτε; we should expect ibai ƕan; compare Mt. V, 25) gawandjaina sik, lest at any time they should be converted (literally: should convert themselves).—aflêtaindau (present optative passive) im frawaúrhteis, their sins should be forgiven (literally: sins should be forgiven to them. S., 37). 13. þô; demonstrative pronoun ...þôs; article.—kunneiþ; for the Greek future. 14. saijands..saijiþ; without the j in verses 3 and 15 (Gr., 22 and n. 1). 15. aþþan þai wiþra wig sind; the Greek text is: οὕτοι δέ εὶσιν οἱ παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν, but Lu. VIII, 12: οἱ δέ παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν εὶσιν.—þan, when.—unkarjans; added by Wulfila from a Latin manuscript, for 'negligenter'. 16. jah; sc. þai, demonstrative pronoun. 18. þai, demonstrative pronoun ...þai, article ...þai, article. 19. þai bi þata anþar lustjus, the lusts of (literally: concerning) other things (literally: that other, for τὰ λοιπά). 21. ibai; here it introduces a direct question, a negative answer being expected.—qimiþ, is brought (literally does come).—duþê ei, to that that, i.e. for the purpose that.—satjaidau; optative in a final clause (S., 96, a).—niu (= ni-u = ni-uh), and not? i.e. and (is it) not (brought)? 22. nih (= ni-uh), for not.—allis, at all.—ist ƕa fulginis, is (there) anything hidden (literally: of anything hidden, the genitive fulginis depending on the indefinite pronoun ƕa; Gr., 162, n. 2; and S., 21).—gabaírhtjaidau; optative in a consecutive relative clause (S., 99, a).—nih, and not, neither. 23. hausjandôna; present participle for the infinitive in Greek, as in IV, 9.—gahausjai; hortatory optative (S., 91, (2)). 24. in þizaiei mitaþ; the noun (mitaþ; dative, Gr., 116) is attracted into the relative clause and agrees with the relative pronoun (þizaiei; Gr., 157, and S., 72, n.).—izwis þaim galaubjandam (Gr., 133); þ. g. is in apposition (S., 11) with the dative izwis (Gr., 150). 25. gibada; for the Greek future (S., 86, (3)).—imma; ablative dative governed by afnimada (S., 54, (1)). 26. fraiwa; instrumental dative governed by wairþiþ (S., 52, (4)). 27. slêpiþ..urreisiþ; the indicative for the Greek subjunctive (S., 90; and 100, n.).—naht (Gr., 116) jah daga; local dative (S., 53, (2)): night and day.—is; i.e. manna. 28. silbô; weak form (Gr., 156), agreeing with aírþa; it stands for αὐτομάτη, spontaneous, of herself. 29. insandeiþ; its subject is is, i.e. manna.—atist; the present for the Greek perfect (ἕστηκα; S., 86, (4)). 30. ƕê; instrumental of ƕa (Gr., 159; S., 51), governed by galeikôm (S., 52, (1), c).—gabaíram, shall we compare, literally bear or bring together; here ga- has an associative force. 31. þatei; subject of ist.—þan, when. 33. swaleikaim managaim gajukôm; instrumental dative of manner (S., 52, (6); in Mk. III, 23 we have in gajukôm).—im; dative plural governed by du, while in the following verse im is governed by rôdida. 35. andanahtja þan (then) waúrþanamma; dative absolute introduced by at (S., 120).—jainis stadis (S., 30), 'yun' shore, = that shore (towards which the speaker pointed), i.e. to the other side [of the lake]. 36. jah þan; emphatic: and also, besides, moreover.[Pg 126] 37. warþ, arose.—waltidêdun; originally transitive, but here intransitive (S., 16, 3). 38. niu (= ni-u, the enclitic -u introducing the question) kara þuk þizei?, is there not care to you of that (þis) that (ei; Gr., 157), i.e. does it not concern you that? kara (or kara ist) takes the accusative of the person and the genitive of the object (S., 15, (1), n. 4). 39. winda; the dative is governed by gasôk (S., 45).—afdumbn; imperative singular (Gr., 195, n. 1). 41. sis; reflexive dative for the Greek middle (S., 47, n. 1).—agis mikil; cognate accusative (with a verb of kindred signification, ôhtêdun; S., 15, (2), b).—du sis missô, to one another (S., 60, n.).—sa (demonstrative pronoun) sijai; optative in a direct question (S., 91, (3), p. 276): may he be.—imma; dative governed by ufhausjand, listen with submission, obey (S., 38).

Chap. V. 1. landa; dat. guvernd by qiman in (S., 55, n.). 2. usgaggandin imma; dat. abs. (S., 119).—imma; dat. guvernd by gamôtida (S., 39). 3. naudibandjôm eisarneinaim; instr. dat. (S., 52, (2)), as in the following verse. 4. eisarnam bi fôtuns gabuganaim; the hole frase translates the Greek πέδαις, its literal meaning being: with bent irons for (bi, about, for, = περί) the feet.—naudibandjôm eisarneinaim (for ἁλύσεσιν), with chains, but literally: with iron 'need-bands', i. e. fetters.—naudibandjôs; for ἁλύσεις.—þô ana fôtum eisarna (for τὰς πέδας), the irons on the feet. 5. nahtam jah dagam; adv. frase (S., 53, (2)): night and day (The Greek has the gen. Cp. S., 30).—stainam; instr. dat. (S., 52, (2)). 7. stibnai mikilai; instr. dat. of manner (S., 52, (6)).—ƕa mis jah þus (the copula ist being understood); dativs denoting relationship (S., 35, n. 1): what is there to me and to thee?, i. e. what hav I to do with thee?—sunau; this is the voc. (Gr., 105, n. 2), in apposition with Iêsu.—balwjais; hort. opt. (S., 91, (2)).—mis; dat. guvernd by balwjais (S., 44). 8. mann; dat. sg. (Gr., 117, (1)). 10. im; instr. dat. pl. (Gr., 152), referring to the subj. of sijum, and guvernd by usdrêbi, for usdribi (Gr., 10, (2), n. 5), (S., 52, (4)). 12. qiþandeins; nom. pl. of the prsp. (Gr., 133). 14. baúrg; dat. (Gr., 116).—haimôm; dat. (Gr., 103, n. 4).—qêmun; its subj. is they, i. e. the peple.—saíƕan; inf. of purpose (without du, to; S., 114).—wêsi, might be; prt. opt. in an indir. question.—þata (art.) waúrþanô (pp. uzed as sb.), 'the being done', i. e. that which was done. 15. atiddjêdun (the prt.) ...gasaíƕand (the prs.); both for the Grk. historical prs. (S., 86, (2)).—þana saei habaida laígaíôn; for τὸν εσχηκότα λεγεῶνα; þana is dem. prn. 17. seinôs, their; refers to the subj. of dugunnun (S., 62; and 60; cp. Mk. III, 14). 18. inngaggandan ina in skip (for ἐμβαίνοντος αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ πλοῖον), him going into the ship; baþ ina saei was wôds, him prayd he that had been (lit. was) possest. 21. usleiþandin Iêsua; dat. abs. (S., 119).—hindar marein; depends on usleiþandin.—gaqêmun sik; for the Grk. midl (S., 16, n. 1).—manageins; gen. with filu, the predicate being here in the pl. (S., 5). 22. qimiþ...gadraus; change of tense, as in V, 15.—namin; dat. of specification (S., 15, (2), n. 2, α). 23. þatei; conj. (Gr., 157, n. 2) before a dir. quotation.—aftumist habaiþ, 'has the last', i. e. lies (or is) at the point of deth.—ei; conj., that, which here introduces an exhortation.—qimands lagjais, cuming thou mayst lay, i. e. cum and lay.—ganisai...libai; opts. of purpose (S., 96, a). 25. suma; indef. prn. uzed substantivly, and with a part. gen. (Gr., 162;[Pg 127] S., 78, (1)). 26. allamma seinamma (uzed as sb. S., 82, (2), c); instr. dat. guvernd by fraqimandei (S., 52, (1), c), lit.: 'cuming away with all hers', i. e. having spent (lit. spending. S., 117) all that she had.—ni waíhtai (instr. dat. denoting mezure of difference. S., 52, (7)), not in anything, in nothing; bôtida (fem. of the pp. Gr., 134), betterd.—mais waírs; mais is pleonastic, as in Mt. VI, 26.—habaida (3d pers. sg. prt. ind., not pp.); cp. Mk. II, 17. 27. wastjai; dat. guvernd by attaítôk (prt. of attêkan. Gr., 181), (S., 40). 28. þatei; conj., as in 23. 29. izôs (Gr., 151, n. 2). 30. mis; so-calld poss. dat. (for the gen. in Grk. S., 48).—wastjôm; dat. as in 27. 32. þô þata taujandein, her that had done this (lit.: the this doing), the prsp. having a prt. meaning, as in 26. 34. ganasida; for the Grk. perf. (S., 87, (2)).—sijais; the opt. for the Grk. imper., the imper. of wisan being wanting (Gr., 204, n. 2). 35. imma rôdjandin; dat. abs. (S., 119).—qêmun; the prt. for the historical prs. in Grk. (S., 87, 3).—þatei; introduces a dir. quotation; cp. verse 23.—ƕa; why? It is uzed like τί (S., 74, n. 2), as in verse 39. 36. rôdíþ; pp. of rôdjan, agreeing with waúrd. 40. allaim; instr. dat. guvernd by uswaírpands (S., 52, 4; and n. 2, p. 253). 41. qaþuh (= qaþ-uh), and said. The first part of the compound sentence stands for a participial frase in Greek.—izai; refers to the natural gender of barn; cp. Lu. II, 27. 28. 42. jêrê twalibê; gen. of quality (S., 24), of twelv years, i. e. twelv years old.—faúhrtein mikilai; instr. dat. of manner (S., 52, (6)) which is here (and in Lu. II, 9) uzed with a vb. of kindred signification; hense it resembls the cognate acc. (S., 15, (2), n. 2). 43. ei manna ni funþi (prt. opt. in a final clause, after a prt., anabauþ, in the leading clause. S., 96, b), that a man should not find out, i. e. that no man should find out.—izai...matjan; the former is the indir., the latter the dir. obj. of giban (for the pass. inf. in Grk. S., 84, n. 3), this being the obj. of haíhait (S., 110).

Chap. V. 1. landa; dative governed by qiman in (S., 55, n.). 2. usgaggandin imma; dative absolute (S., 119).—imma; dative governed by gamôtida (S., 39). 3. naudibandjôm eisarneinaim; instrumental dative (S., 52, (2)), as in the following verse. 4. eisarnam bi fôtuns gabuganaim; the whole phrase translates the Greek πέδαις, its literal meaning being: with bent irons for (bi, about, for, = περί) the feet.—naudibandjôm eisarneinaim (for ἁλύσεσιν), with chains, but literally: with iron 'need-bands', i.e. fetters.—naudibandjôs; for ἁλύσεις.—þô ana fôtum eisarna (for τὰς πέδας), the irons on the feet. 5. nahtam jah dagam; adverbial phrase (S., 53, (2)): night and day (The Greek has the gen. Cp. S., 30).—stainam; instrumental dative (S., 52, (2)). 7. stibnai mikilai; instrumental dative of manner (S., 52, (6)).—ƕa mis jah þus (the copula ist being understood); datives denoting relationship (S., 35, n. 1): what is there to me and to thee?, i.e. what have I to do with thee?—sunau; this is the vocative (Gr., 105, n. 2), in apposition with Iêsu.—balwjais; hortative optative (S., 91, (2)).—mis; dative governed by balwjais (S., 44). 8. mann; dative singular (Gr., 117, (1)). 10. im; instrumental dative plural (Gr., 152), referring to the subject of sijum, and governed by usdrêbi, for usdribi (Gr., 10, (2), n. 5), (S., 52, (4)). 12. qiþandeins; nominative plural of the participle (Gr., 133). 14. baúrg; dative (Gr., 116).—haimôm; dative (Gr., 103, n. 4).—qêmun; its subject is they, i.e. the people.—saíƕan; infinitive of purpose (without du, to; S., 114).—wêsi, might be; participle optative in an indirect question.—þata (article) waúrþanô (past participle used as a noun), 'the being done', i.e. that which was done. 15. atiddjêdun (the past participle) ...gasaíƕand (the present); both for the Greek historical present (S., 86, (2)).—þana saei habaida laígaíôn; for τὸν εσχηκότα λεγεῶνα; þana is a demonstrative pronoun. 17. seinôs, their; refers to the subject of dugunnun (S., 62; and 60; cp. Mk. III, 14). 18. inngaggandan ina in skip (for ἐμβαίνοντος αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ πλοῖον), him going into the ship; baþ ina saei was wôds, him prayed he that had been (lit. was) possessed. 21. usleiþandin Iêsua; dative absolute (S., 119).—hindar marein; depends on usleiþandin.—gaqêmun sik; for the Greek middle (S., 16, n. 1).—manageins; genitive with filu, the predicate being here in the plural (S., 5). 22. qimiþ...gadraus; change of tense, as in V, 15.—namin; dative of specification (S., 15, (2), n. 2, α). 23. þatei; conjunction (Gr., 157, n. 2) before a direct quotation.—aftumist habaiþ, 'has the last', i.e. lies (or is) at the point of death.—ei; conjunction, that, which here introduces an exhortation.—qimands lagjais, cuming thou mayst lay, i.e. come and lay.—ganisai...libai; optatives of purpose (S., 96, a). 25. suma; indefinite pronoun used substantively, and with a participle genitive (Gr., 162;[Pg 127] S., 78, (1)). 26. allamma seinamma (used as substantive S., 82, (2), c); instrumental dative governed by fraqimandei (S., 52, (1), c), lit.: 'cuming away with all hers', i.e. having spent (lit. spending. S., 117) all that she had.—ni waíhtai (instrumental dative denoting measure of difference. S., 52, (7)), not in anything, in nothing; bôtida (feminine of the past participle Gr., 134), bettered.—mais waírs; mais is pleonastic, as in Mt. VI, 26.—habaida (3rd person singular past indicative, not past participle); cp. Mk. II, 17. 27. wastjai; dative governed by attaítôk (past participle of attêkan. Gr., 181), (S., 40). 28. þatei; conjunction, as in 23. 29. izôs (Gr., 151, n. 2). 30. mis; so-called possessive dative (for the genitive in Greek S., 48).—wastjôm; dative as in 27. 32. þô þata taujandein, her that had done this (lit.: the this doing), the participle having a past meaning, as in 26. 34. ganasida; for the Greek perfect (S., 87, (2)).—sijais; the optative for the Greek imperative, the imperative of wisan being wanting (Gr., 204, n. 2). 35. imma rôdjandin; dative absolute (S., 119).—qêmun; the participle for the historical present in Greek (S., 87, 3).—þatei; introduces a direct quotation; cp. verse 23.—ƕa; why? It is used like τί (S., 74, n. 2), as in verse 39. 36. rôdíþ; past participle of rôdjan, agreeing with waúrd. 40. allaim; instrumental dative governed by uswaírpands (S., 52, 4; and n. 2, p. 253). 41. qaþuh (= qaþ-uh), and said. The first part of the compound sentence stands for a participial phrase in Greek.—izai; refers to the natural gender of barn; cp. Lu. II, 27. 28. 42. jêrê twalibê; genitive of quality (S., 24), of twelve years, i.e. twelve years old.—faúhrtein mikilai; instrumental dative of manner (S., 52, (6)) which is here (and in Lu. II, 9) used with a verb of kindred meaning; hence it resembles the cognate accusative (S., 15, (2), n. 2). 43. ei manna ni funþi (past participle optative in a final clause, following a participle, anabauþ, in the leading clause. S., 96, b), that a man should not find out, i.e. that no man should find out.—izai...matjan; the former is the indirect, the latter the direct object of giban (for the passive infinitive in Greek S., 84, n. 3), this being the object of haíhait (S., 110).

III. FROM THE GOSPEL OF ST. LUKE.

Chap. II. 1. warþ...urrann; asyndetic constructions with warþ ar quite common in Gothic.—in dagans jainans; for the acc. we should rather hav expected the dat. of the Grk. text. 2. at raginôndin Kyreinaiau; abl. abs. introduced by at (S., 120).—Saúrim; dat. (pl.) guvernd by raginôndin (S., 38; 52, 3, n.). 3. ei mêlidai (pp. Gr., 134) wêseina; a final clause for the inf. in Grk.—ƕarjizuh in seinai baúrg (dat. Gr., 116); belongs to mêlidai: every one (of all that went) in his own city. 4. Galeilaia...Nazaraíþ (indecl.); both stand for the dat. (Gr., 120 and notes).—sei; for si-ei (Gr., 157, n. 3). 5. anamêljan (for the inf. pass. in Grk.) to enrol (himself).—sei was imma qeins (for qêns, Gr., 7, n. 2), who was to him a wife, i. e. who was his wife (S., 35, (1)); the rel. clause stands for the Grk. art. with a ptc.—wisandein inkilþôn (w. adj. uzed as sb. in the predicate); in apposition with Mariin. 6. warþ ...usfullnôdêdun; see verse 1.—þô; nom. pl. n. of sa, referring to two persons of different gender (Joseph and Mary. S., 8).—du baíran (for τοῦ τεκεῖν. Cp. the Latin: tempus est abire, for the gen. of the gerund).—izai; dat. of advantage after usfullnôdêdun (S. 47). 7. uzêtin; dat.[Pg 128] after galagida in; see Mt. V, 20.—im; dat. of possession after was (S., 35).—rûmis; gen. as subj.: of room, i. e. room (S., 25, n. 2). 8. wahtwôm; dir. obj. after witandans (S., 40).—nahts (Gr., 116), adv. gen. (S., 30), by night. 9. agisa mikilamma; see Mk. V, 42. 10. waírþiþ; for ἔσται.—allai managein; poss. dat., as in verse 7. 11. himma daga; adv. frase (S., 53, (2)), this day. 12. þata; subj. prns. are not subject to agreement with pred. sbs. (S., 7).—bigitid (d for þ is very common in this gospel. Gr., 74, 1); for the Grk. fut. (S., 86, (3)).—biwundan.. galagid (d for þ, as abuv); acc. sg. n. of the pp. (Gr., 134). 13. warþ, was, lit. became, appeard: it is the pred. (in the sing.) of the collectiv noun managei (S., 5. Cp. Mk. V, 32).—harjis h.; gen. after managei.—hazjandanê..qiþandanê (Gr., 133); attributiv ptcs. agreeing w. harjis in gender and number (in sense. S., 5 and 9, n. 1). 14. in háuhistjam, in the highest, for ἐν ὑψίστοις.—guþa (sc. sijai); dat. of possession (S., 35). 15. himin; dat. guvernd by galiþun in; see Mk. V, 20.—þai haírdjôs; in apposition (S., 11) with mans (Gr., 117).—þaírhgaggaima ...saíƕaima; 1st pers. pl. of the hort. opt., for the more common 1st pers. pl. imper. (S., 91, n. 1). 18. im; refers to allai (S., 61). 19. þagkjandei; prsp. fem. (in -ei. Gr., 133): pondering (sc. them). 20. in allaizê þizêei, because of all that which, the rel. prn. (Gr., 157) being assimilated to the case of its antecedent (S., 71). verse 6. 21. jah biþê... and when—du bimaitan ina; cp. verse 6.—....jah; introduces the principal clause, and remains untranslated. We might rather expect þan which is uzually found after temporal clauses introduced by biþê.—namô is; subj. ...Iêsus; pred. nom. with haitan was (S., 13, b, β).—þata qiþanô; refers to namô.—wêsi; opt. in a temporal clause (S., 100); so always with faúrþizei (S., 100, n.). 22. atsatjan; sc. ina. 23. ƕazuh (Gr., 164); uzed substantivly, and followd by the partitiv gen.—weihs; predicate adj. with haitada (cp. 21, abuv).—fraujins; guvernd by weihs (S., 22). 24. ei gêbeina; prt. opt. in a final clause (S., 96, b), while the coordinate atsatjan (in verse 22) is an 'inf.' of purpose (S., 114).—fram imma, on his behalf (cp. Mk. I, 44; II Cor. V, 12).—juggôns; adj. uzed as sb., followd by a partitiv gen. (S., 21). 25. þaruh; for καὶ ἰδοῦ, and behold.—sa; dem. prn. laþônais; obj. gen. after beidands (S., 26). 27. alh; dat. (Gr., 116) guvernd by qam in; see Mt. V, 20.—ina; refers to the natural gender of barn, as in verse 28, and elsewhere. 28. guþa; dat. guvernd by þiuþida (S., 45). 29. fraleitais (ei for ê. Gr., 7, n. 2); opt. proper (S., 91, (1)). 32. þiudôm (for ἐθνῶν); dat. of advantage after andhuleinai, like managein (for λαοῦ) þeinai after wulþu (S., 34).—Israêla; in apposition with managein (S., 11). 33. sildaleikjandôna; nom. pl. n., referring to two living beings of different gender (S., 9, n. 3). 34. ina; the Grk. text has αὐτούς.—sa; dem. prn. 35. þeina saiwala; the obj. of þaírhgaggiþ.—silbôns (always weak. Gr., 156); intensiv (like the Lt. 'ipsius' preceded by a poss. prn. and followd by the sb.), its gender being that of the noun or prn. to which it refers (here Mariin). 36. sôh (for sô-uh); a compd. dem. (Gr., 154), for αὕτη.—dagê managaizê; emfatic gen. w. framaldra (S., 22).—jêra sibun; acc. of extent of time (S., 15, n. 2, β). 37. sôh þan, and this, and she (sc. was).—ahtáutêhund jah[Pg 129] fidwôr; uninflected (Gr., 143) attribute to jêrê.—sôh; here for ἥ.—fastubnjam...bidôm; instr. dat. of manner (S., 52, (6)).—blôtandê (ê for ei, fem. ending of the prsp. Gr., 17, n. 1, and 133).—nahtam jah dagam; loc. dat. of time (S., 53, (2)), like þizai ƕeilai in the next verse. 38. andhaíhait with the dat. (fraujin), to giv thanks to (S., 45).—in allaim (in being added by Wulfila), among all (without in, allaim would be the indir. obj. after rôdida); allaim is attribute to the ptc. usbeidandam, which is uzed substantivly, but with a dir. obj. (S., 15, n. 2), laþôn, redemption. 40. ahmins..handugeins; instr. genitivs guvernd by fullnands, becuming fild with spirit and wisdom (S., 27). 41. jêra ƕammêh (Gr., 164, a); loc. dat. of time (S., 53, (2)): every year.—at dulþ (acc. Gr., 116) paska (indecl. attribute), at the feast of the passover; at with the acc. always denotes time. 42. 43. usgaggandam þan im...jah ustiuhandam; dat. abs. (S., 119), when they then (þan referring to the preceding clause) went up ... and when they had fulfild.—miþþanê (ê for ei, as in 37) gawandidêdun sik aftra, as they returnd, lit.: as they turnd themselvs back.—wissêdun; here the pl. occurs in an abridged compound sentence (S. 1, n.), sumtimes the sing. (S., 5, n. 1). 44. hugjandôna; n. pl., as in verse 33.—ina wisan; acc. and inf. guvernd by hugjandôna (S., 112).—dagis (adnominal gen. S., 20) wig (acc. of extent of space. S., 15, n. 2, β), a day's way, a day's jurney.—kunþam; weak dat. of kunþs (uzed as sb. Gr., 132). 46. warþ; see verse 1.—in midjaim laisarjaim, in the midst of the teachers (cp. the Lt. 'in media urbe').—im; dat. guvernd by hausjandan, hearing, i. e. listening to (S., 45). 47. is, him, lit. of him; obj. gen. guvernd by hausjandans (S., 26).—ana frôdein; depends on usgeisnôdêdun. 48. magau; voc. for magu (Gr., 105, n. 2).—ƕa; acc. of specification (S., 15, 2, b, n. 2, α): why?—uns; dat. of the indir. obj. (S., 37).—sôkidêdum; here and in verse 49 we should rather hav expected the dual (S., 5, n. 4). The subj. being of different persons, the first person is preferd (S., 5, n. 2). 49. in þaim attins meinis; so-calld elliptic expressions like this ar also common in Grk., a noun signifying 'things' or the like being understood with the art.: in, or about, the things of my father. As a matter of fact, however, attins meinis shows the orig. adj. force of the gen. which is here uzed substantivly (S., 19, and 68, (3)). 50. ija; nom. pl. n. (Gr., 152), referring to Joseph and Mary; see verse 6.—þamma waúrda; loc. dat. guvernd by frôþun (S., 53, (1), p. 254; and cp. n. 2, p. 255), prt. of fraþjan (Gr., 177, n. 2). 51. im; dat. after ufhausjands (S., 38). 52. frôdein..wahstau..anstai; loc. dats. of specification (S., 53, 1, c).

Chap. II. 1. went...to become; asyndetic constructions with went are quite common in Gothic.—in days like these; for the accusative we would rather have expected the dative of the Greek text. 2. at the ruling Kyreinians; ablative absolute introduced by at (S., 120).—The rulers; dative (plural) governed by ruling (S., 38; 52, 3, n.). 3. to be mixed (pp. Gr., 134) to be; a final clause for the infinitive in Greek.—wherever in their own city (dative Gr., 116); belongs to to be mixed: everyone (of all that went) in his own city. 4. Galilee...Nazareth (indecl.); both stand for the dative (Gr., 120 and notes).—that; for si-ei (Gr., 157, n. 3). 5. to enroll (for the infinitive passive in Greek) to enroll (himself).—who was to him a wife (for wife, Gr., 7, n. 2), who was his wife (S., 35, (1)); the relative clause stands for the Greek article with a participle.—being wise men (with adjective used as a noun in the predicate); in apposition with Mary. 6. went...was fulfilled; see verse 1.—those; nominative plural neuter of that, referring to two persons of different gender (Joseph and Mary, S., 8).—to bear (for τοῦ τεκεῖν. Cp. the Latin: tempus est abire, for the genitive of the gerund).—for them; dative of advantage after was fulfilled (S. 47). 7. in all things; dative [Pg 128] after about; see Mt. V, 20.—him; dative of possession after was (S., 35).—of room; genitive as subject: of room, i.e. room (S., 25, n. 2). 8. wonder; direct object after knew (S., 40).—by night (Gr., 116), adverbial genitive (S., 30), by night. 9. great fear; see Mk. V, 42. 10. it will be; for ἔσται.—everyone possessive dative, as in verse 7. 11. this day; adverbial phrase (S., 53, (2)), this day. 12. that; subject pronouns are not subject to agreement with predicate nouns (S., 7).—to be fulfilled (d for þ is very common in this gospel. Gr., 74, 1); for the Greek future (S., 86, (3)).—being called... to be fulfilled (d for þ, as above); accusative singular neuter of the participle (Gr., 134). 13. went, was, lit. became, appeared: it is the predicate (in the singular) of the collective noun everyone (S., 5, Cp. Mk. V, 32).—of great; genitive after everyone.—his having had...his saying (Gr., 133); attributive participles agreeing with great in gender and number (in meaning. S., 5 and 9, n. 1). 14. in the highest, for ἐν ὑψίστοις.—of God (sc. to be); dative of possession (S., 35). 15. in the heavens; dative governed by about; see Mk. V, 20.—there to behold; in apposition (S., 11) with people (Gr., 117).—let us go...look; 1st person plural of the hortatory optative, for the more common 1st person plural imperative (S., 91, n. 1). 18. him; refers to all (S., 61). 19. pondering; present participle feminine (in -ei. Gr., 133): pondering (sc. them). 20. because of all that which, the relative pronoun (Gr., 157) being assimilated to the case of its antecedent (S., 71). verse 6. 21. and when—to be applied to him; cp. verse 6.—...and; introduces the principal clause and remains untranslated. We might rather expect then which is usually found after temporal clauses introduced by and when.—the name is; subject ...Jesus; predicate nominative with was called (S., 13, b, β).—that he be called; refers to name.—to be; optative in a temporal clause (S., 100); so always with to be fulfilled (S., 100, n.). 22. to be called; sc. to him. 23. what (Gr., 164); used substantively, and followed by the partitive genitive.—holy; predicate adjective with named (cp. 21, above).—the Lord; governed by holy (S., 22). 24. if you will give; past optative in a final clause (S., 96, b), while the coordinate to be called (in verse 22) is an 'infinitive' of purpose (S., 114).—on his behalf (cp. Mk. I, 44; II Cor. V, 12).—to be counted; adjective used as a noun, followed by a partitive genitive (S., 21). 25. and behold, and behold.—that; demonstrative pronoun to be named; object genitive after the two (S., 26). 27. all; dative (Gr., 116) governed by about; see Mt. V, 20.—him; refers to the natural gender of child, as in verse 28 and elsewhere. 28. of God; dative governed by to teach (S., 45). 29. would prevent (ei for ê. Gr., 7, n. 2); optative proper (S., 91, (1)). 32. among nations (for ἐθνῶν); dative of advantage after to do, like everyone (for λαοῦ) to be after glory (S., 34).—Israel; in apposition with everyone (S., 11). 33. two living beings; nominative plural neuter, referring to two beings of different gender (S., 9, n. 3). 34. him; the Greek text has αὐτούς.—that; demonstrative pronoun 35. of the same cloth; the object of to go.—known (always weak. Gr., 156); intensive (like the Latin 'ipsius' preceded by a possessive pronoun and followed by the noun), its gender being that of the noun or pronoun to which it refers (here Mary). 36. this (for that); a compound demonstrative (Gr., 154), for αὕτη.—the many days; emphatic genitive w. old (S., 22).—for seven years; accusative of extent of time (S., 15, n. 2, β). 37. this too, and this, and she (sc. was).—apply the power of authority; uninflected (Gr., 143) attribute to to speak.—this; here for ἥ.—going...coming; instrumental dative of manner (S., 52, (6)).—sacrificing (ê for ei, feminine ending of the present participle Gr., 17, n. 1, and 133).—by night and by day; locative dative of time (S., 53, (2)), like for this time in the next verse. 38. to give thanks with the dative (to the Lord), to give thanks to (S., 45).—among all (in being added by Wulfila), among all (without in, all would be the indirect object after to redeem); all is an attribute to the participle to redeem, which is used substantively, but with a direct object (S., 15, n. 2), redemption, redemption. 40. filled...with spirit and wisdom; instrumental genitvies governed by to fulfill, becoming filled with spirit and wisdom (S., 27). 41. every year (Gr., 164, a); locative dative of time (S., 53, (2)): every year.—at the Passover (acc. Gr., 116) feast (indecl. attribute), at the feast of the Passover; at with the accusative always denotes time. 42. 43. when they then went up...and they returned; dative absolute (S., 119), when they then (then referring to the preceding clause) went up...and when they had fulfilled.—as they returned (ê for ei, as in 37) returned back, as they turned themselves back.—they knew; here the plural occurs in an abridged compound sentence (S. 1, n.), sometimes the singular (S., 5, n. 1). 44. being thoughtful; nominative plural, as in verse 33.—to do; accusative and infinitive governed by being thoughtful (S., 112).—of a day (adnominal gen. S., 20) a day's journey (acc. of extent of space. S., 15, n. 2, β), a day's way, a day's journey.—known; weak dative of known (used as noun Gr., 132). 46. went; see verse 1.—in the midst of the teachers (cp. the Latin 'in media urbe').—to him; dative governed by to hear, listening to (S., 45). 47. is, him, lit. of him; object genitive governed by to hear (S., 26).—to see; depends on to teach. 48. child; vocative for child (Gr., 105, n. 2).—why; accusative of specification (S., 15, 2, b, n. 2, α): why?—to us; dative of the indirect object (S., 37).—we should have expected; here and in verse 49 we would rather have expected the dual (S., 5, n. 4). The subject being of different persons, the first person is preferred (S., 5, n. 2). 49. in the things of my father; so-called elliptic expressions like this are also common in Greek, a noun signifying 'things' or the like being understood with the article: in, or about the things of my father. As a matter of fact, however, of my father shows the original adjective force of the genitive which is here used substantively (S., 19, and 68, (3)). 50. they; nominative plural (Gr., 152), referring to Joseph and Mary; see verse 6.—of that word; locative dative governed by to speak (S., 53, (1), p. 254; and cp. n. 2, p. 255), partitive of to speak (Gr., 177, n. 2). 51. to him; dative after to hear (S., 38). 52. to teach...to grow...to stand; locative datives of specification (S., 53, 1, c).

IV. FROM THE SECOND EPISTL TO THE CORINTHIANS.

Chap. I. 1. aíkklêsjôn; dat., the guverning vb. being omitted.—þizai wisandein; agrees with aíkklêsjôn. 2. Iêsu; for Iêsua which, together with Xristau, is in apposition with fraujin. 3. þiuþiþs; sc. sijai: blessed be.—jah (καί); here emfatic: (who is) even. 4. gaþrafstida...gaþrafstidai sijum; we should have expected the prs., because the statement does not[Pg 130] refer to any particular consolations, but is a statement of 'general truth'.—weis; emfatic (S., 2, n. 1).—in allaim aglôn; a prepositional frase, with the art., uzed as sb. (S., 68, (2)).—þizaiei; instr. dat. guvernd by gaþrafstidai. 5. swaswê...swa jah, as ... so also; the second jah may remain untranslated, or the first jah may be rendered by 'the same' (jah þaírh Xristu, by the same Christ), and the second by also.—ufar filu ist, is beyond much, i. e. abounds. 6. aþþan, but.—jaþþê þr., in...; jaþþe gaþr., in..., whether we ar afflicted, (it is) because of ..., or whether we ar cumforted, (it is) because of. 7. swaswê...jah, as (so) also.—waírþiþ; added by the translator: ye shal be (lit. becum, sc. gadailans, partakers, with the gen. S., 20; and cp. 26). 8. izwis unweisans (sc. wisan); acc. and inf. depending on wileima (S., 112).—brôþrjus (before which we should put a comma); voc.—uns; dat. of interest (S., 47).—ufarassau; instr. dat. of manner (S., 52, (6)).—ufar maht (acc. Gr., 102), abuv strength; cp. verse 5.—swaswê skamaidêdeima uns (refl. acc. S., 16, n. 1); opt. in a consecutiv clause (S., 97, b): so that we wer ashamed.[107]—jah, even. 9. akei silbans in uns silbam andahaft dauþaus habaidêdum, but we ourselvs had the answer of deth in ourselvs, i. e. (according to de Wette.—Bernhardt's large edition, p. 415) the question, whether I should escape deth, I answerd negativly.—sijaima; final opt. (S., 96, a, β). 10. izei; rel. prn. (= saei. Gr., 157, n. 3).—dauþum, deths, i. e. dangers of deth.—galauseiþ (not for ῥύεται. Bernhardt, p. 415) ...galauseiþ; both for the Grk. fut. (S., 86, (3)). 11. at hilpandam jah izwis; dat. abs. introduced by at (S., 119): as ye also ar helping.—bidai; instr. dat. (S., 52, (2)).—bi; w. acc., for (= ὑπερ w. gen., as in Mt., 44).—in managamma andwaírþja, in (= before) a great presence, i. e. before many persons.—ei sô in uns giba awiliudodau (3d pers. sg. prs. opt. pass. Gr., 189, d), that for the gift (bestowd) on us thanks be givn, lit.: that the gift (bestowd) on us be praizd.—þaírh managans, by many.—faúr uns, on our behalf. 12. þatei; conj., that.—usmeitum; ei for ê (Gr., 7, n. 2).—iþ ufarassau (instr. dat. of manner. S., 52, (6)), and more abundantly (περισσοτέρως δὲ), and beyond mezure. 13. alja; acc. pl. n. of aljis (Gr., 125), here uzed substantivly.—alja (the second); conj., except. 14. unsara; sc. sijuþ ƕôftuli. 15. þizai (dem. prn.) trauainai; instr. dat. of manner (S., 52, (6)).—habaidêdeiþ; prt. opt. (Gr., 192) in a final clause (S., 96, b). 16. gasandjan mik (an activ vb. with a refl. acc., for a pass. vb. in Grk. (S., 16)): to return. 17. þatuþ-þan; for þata-uh-þan, and this.—ibai auftô, perhaps (a negativ answer being expected).—leihtis; gen. guvernd by brûhta (S., 25).—aíþþau þatei (rel. prn.) mitô bi leika þagkjau, or do I purpose that which I think according to the flesh? There is a notewurthy change of mood in this and other dubl questions (S., 91).—þata ja ja jah þata nê nê (advs. w. the art. uzed substantivly. S., 68, (2)), the yea, yea and the nay, nay? i. e. now yea, now nay? 18. aþþan triggws guþ, an ellipsis: but (as) God (is) tru, [so tru it is]. 19. nih; for ni-h, the -h (= uh) being intensiv.—warþ; here the same as was. 20. ƕaiwa managa gahaita guþs, ín imma, as many promises of God,[Pg 131] [they ar] in him, i. e. all promises of God ar in him (= Christ).—duþþê (for du-uh-þê. Gr., 62, n. 3), to that, for that, therefore. 21. guþ; sc. ist. 22. wadi; predicate acc. (S., 18), as a pledge. 23. weitwôd; like wadi, pred. acc.—izwara; gen. guvernd by freidjands (S., 26). 24. izwarai galaubeinai; dat. guvernd by fraujinôma (S., 38; cp. also 52, (3), n.)—anstais, joy, but probably for χάριτος (not χαρᾶς), which is found in sum manuscripts.—galaubeinai; loc. dat. (S., 53, 1, b), after gastôþuþ, for which we might expect the pres. (S., 86, 4).

Chap. II. 1. gastauida; prt. of gastôjan (Gr., 186).—at, with.—qimau; opt. in an obj. clause expressing possibility (S., 92).—at, to. 2. gailjai; opt. in a rel. clause expressing result (S., 99, a).—sa; art.—gáurida; nom. sg. m. of the weak pp. (Gr., 134).—us, by. 3. jaþ; for jah (Gr., 62, n. 3).—izwis; dat. of the indir. obj. after gamêlida (S., 37).—habau; prs. opt. in a final clause after a prt. in the leading proposition (S., 96, a, β).—fram þaimei (its antecedent being omitted. S., 70, n. 1; and 72); loc. dat. guvernd by faginôn (S., 53, 1, b).—allaizê (uzed substantivly) izwara (pers. prn. in the gen. pl. Gr., 150); sc. fahêþs, the joy of all of you (S., 82). 4. aþþan (γάρ; so in the epistls only), for.—þaírh, with; expresses the situation of the subj.—ni þêei (prop. instr. of the rel. prn. Gr., 157, n. 1); conj. not that.—ufarassau; see I, 8. 5. ƕas; indef. prn. (Gr., 162, n. 2).—bi sumata, ei ni anakaúrjau, allans izwis, in sum mezure, that I may not overcharge (him) you all. 6. þamma swaleikamma (the dat. being guvernd by ganah, which uzually takes the acc. S., 42, n.); uzed substantivly (S., 68, (1), a, α).—andabêt (ê for ei. Gr., 17, n. 1).—managizam; compar. (Gr., 132, n. 4; 135; 136), where we uze the positiv: many. 7. swaei..izwis..fragiban jag (g for h. Gr., 62, n. 3) gaþláihan; acc. with the inf. introduced by swaei to express result (S., 115; cp. Mk. IV, 1).—þata andaneiþô; adverbial acc. (S., 15, (2), n. 2): contrariwise.—managizein (weak compar. adj. fem. Gr., 132, n. 4) saúrgai; instr. dat. of cause (S., 52, 5; cp. also 53, n. 1).—sa swaleiks (for its strong inflection, see Gr., 161), such a one. 8. inuþ (for in-uh, i. e. -uh attacht to the prep. in, which is here uzed with the gen.: because of. The prep. inuh or inu means without) þis, on this account, therefore.—in imma; for εὶς αὐτόν. 9. sijaidu (for sijaiþ-u. Gr., 74, n. 1); opt. in an indir. question depending on ufkunnau, and introduced by the interr. particl -u (S., 95, a, β). 10. aþþan; here for δέ; cp. 4.—ƕa; here indef. prn.; see Mt. V, 23.—jah ik, [to him] I [forgiv] also.—jah þan ik ...fragaf (in both cases for the Grk. perf.), for I hav alredy forgivn.—jabai ƕa (indef.) fragaf, if I hav forgivn anything. 11. gaáiginôndau; 1st pers. pl. prs. opt. (in a final clause. S., 96, a, α) pass. (Gr., 189, d).—munins; gen. after unwitandans (S., 23).—is; pers. prn. for the poss. prn. (S., 62). 12. aþþan; for δέ.—qimands in Trauadai; see Mt. V, 20.—at haúrdai uslukanai; dat. abs. with at (S., 120).—mis; dat. of interest (S., 47). 13. ahmin meinamma; loc. dat. (S., 53, (1), c).—in þammei (for þamma ei. Gr., 4, n.), in that (Gr., 157), because.—im; abl. dat., guvernd by twisstandands (S., 54). 15. dauns wôþi; for εὐωδία. 16. us, of.—jad; for jah (Gr., 62, n. 3). 17. sium; for sijum (Gr., 10, n. 4; 204, n. 1).

Chap. II. 1. gastauida; part. of gastôjan (Gr., 186).—at, with.—qimau; opt. in an obj. clause expressing possibility (S., 92).—at, to. 2. gailjai; opt. in a rel. clause expressing result (S., 99, a).—sa; art.—gáurida; nom. sg. m. of the weak pp. (Gr., 134).—us, by. 3. jaþ; for jah (Gr., 62, n. 3).—izwis; dat. of the indir. obj. after gamêlida (S., 37).—habau; prs. opt. in a final clause after a part. in the leading proposition (S., 96, a, β).—fram þaimei (its antecedent being omitted. S., 70, n. 1; and 72); loc. dat. governed by faginôn (S., 53, 1, b).—allaizê (used substantivly) izwara (pers. prn. in the gen. pl. Gr., 150); sc. fahêþs, the joy of all of you (S., 82). 4. aþþan (γάρ; so in the epistles only), for.—þaírh, with; expresses the situation of the subj.—ni þêei (prop. instr. of the rel. prn. Gr., 157, n. 1); conj. not that.—ufarassau; see I, 8. 5. ƕas; indef. prn. (Gr., 162, n. 2).—bi sumata, ei ni anakaúrjau, allans izwis, in some measure, that I may not overcharge (him) you all. 6. þamma swaleikamma (the dat. being governed by ganah, which usually takes the acc. S., 42, n.); used substantivly (S., 68, (1), a, α).—andabêt (ê for ei. Gr., 17, n. 1).—managizam; compar. (Gr., 132, n. 4; 135; 136), where we use the positive: many. 7. swaei..izwis..fragiban jag (g for h. Gr., 62, n. 3) gaþláihan; acc. with the inf. introduced by swaei to express result (S., 115; cp. Mk. IV, 1).—þata andaneiþô; adverbial acc. (S., 15, (2), n. 2): contrariwise.—managizein (weak compar. adj. fem. Gr., 132, n. 4) saúrgai; instr. dat. of cause (S., 52, 5; cp. also 53, n. 1).—sa swaleiks (for its strong inflection, see Gr., 161), such a one. 8. inuþ (for in-uh, i.e. -uh attached to the prep. in, which is here used with the gen.: because of. The prep. inuh or inu means without) þis, on this account, therefore.—in imma; for εὶς αὐτόν. 9. sijaidu (for sijaiþ-u. Gr., 74, n. 1); opt. in an indir. question depending on ufkunnau, and introduced by the interr. particl -u (S., 95, a, β). 10. aþþan; here for δέ; cp. 4.—ƕa; here indef. prn.; see Mt. V, 23.—jah ik, [to him] I [forgive] also.—jah þan ik ...fragaf (in both cases for the Grk. perf.), for I have already forgiven.—jabai ƕa (indef.) fragaf, if I have forgiven anything. 11. gaáiginôndau; 1st pers. pl. prs. opt. (in a final clause. S., 96, a, α) pass. (Gr., 189, d).—munins; gen. after unwitandans (S., 23).—is; pers. prn. for the poss. prn. (S., 62). 12. aþþan; for δέ.—qimands in Trauadai; see Mt. V, 20.—at haúrdai uslukanai; dat. abs. with at (S., 120).—mis; dat. of interest (S., 47). 13. ahmin meinamma; loc. dat. (S., 53, (1), c).—in þammei (for þamma ei. Gr., 4, n.), in that (Gr., 157), because.—im; abl. dat., governed by twisstandands (S., 54). 15. dauns wôþi; for εὐωδία. 16. us, of.—jad; for jah (Gr., 62, n. 3). 17. sium; for sijum (Gr., 10, n. 4; 204, n. 1).

[Pg 132]

Chap. III. 1. anafilhis; adnominal gen. after bôkô (S., 20).—bôkô; abl. gen. guvernd by þaúrbum. 2. siuþ; = sijuþ; see II, 17.—gamêlida ..kunþa..anakunnaida; pps. agreeing with aípistaúlê (Gr., 134). 3. swikunþai þatei, siuþ, etc., forasmuch as ye ar known [to be], etc. B has swikunþ: It is manifest that ye ar.—swartiza..ahmin; instr. dats. (S., 52, (2)). 5. ƕa; indef. prn. 6. izei; rel. prn. (Gr., 157, n. 3).—brâhta, with two accs. (S., 18): made. 7. swaei mahtêdeina (Gr., 201); consecutiv clause (S., 97, b).—þis gataúrnandins; belongs to wulþaus, not to the adnominal gen. wlitis. 8. waírþai; potential opt. in a dir. question (S., 91, (3)). 9. andbahtja; dat. of possession, the vb. being understood: For if there be glory to the ministration of, etc. 11. þaírh; denotes here, as in II, 4, a state or condition. 12. managaizôs balþeins; gen. guvernd by brûkjaima (S., 25), hort. opt. (S., 91, (2)). 13. jan; for jah (Gr., 62, n. 3).—duþê (i. e. du + the instr. case of þata. Gr., 153. S., 51) ei (Gr., 157), 'to that that', for the purpose that, in order that, with a final opt. (S., 96, b).—gataúrnandins; gen. sg. of the weak pp. (Gr., 134) uzed substantivly (S., 68, (4)): of the vanishing (glory). 14. wisiþ, remains. 16. gawandeiþ (intr. S., 16, n. 2); its subj. is haírtô izê, to be supplied from the preceding verse. 18. þô samôn frisaht; this acc., with a pass. vb., is an imitation of the corresponding Greek passage: τήν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα μεταμορφούμεθα, we ar changed into the same image (S., 17 and 18, n. 4, where this passage ought to hav been explaind).

Chap. III. 1. anafilhis; adnominal gen. after bôkô (S., 20).—bôkô; abl. gen. governed by þaúrbum. 2. siuþ; = sijuþ; see II, 17.—gamêlida ..kunþa..anakunnaida; pps. agreeing with aípistaúlê (Gr., 134). 3. swikunþai þatei, siuþ, etc., as you are known [to be], etc. B has swikunþ: It is clear that you are.—swartiza..ahmin; instr. dats. (S., 52, (2)). 5. ƕa; indef. prn. 6. izei; rel. prn. (Gr., 157, n. 3).—brâhta, with two accs. (S., 18): made. 7. swaei mahtêdeina (Gr., 201); consecutive clause (S., 97, b).—þis gataúrnandins; belongs to wulþaus, not to the adnominal gen. wlitis. 8. waírþai; potential opt. in a direct question (S., 91, (3)). 9. andbahtja; dat. of possession, the vb. being understood: For if there is glory in the ministry of, etc. 11. þaírh; denotes here, as in II, 4, a state or condition. 12. managaizôs balþeins; gen. governed by brûkjaima (S., 25), hort. opt. (S., 91, (2)). 13. jan; for jah (Gr., 62, n. 3).—duþê (i.e. du + the instr. case of þata. Gr., 153. S., 51) ei (Gr., 157), 'to that that', for the purpose that, in order that, with a final opt. (S., 96, b).—gataúrnandins; gen. sg. of the weak pp. (Gr., 134) used substantively (S., 68, (4)): of the vanishing (glory). 14. wisiþ, remains. 16. gawandeiþ (intr. S., 16, n. 2); its subj. is haírtô izê, to be supplied from the preceding verse. 18. þô samôn frisaht; this acc., with a passive vb., is an imitation of the corresponding Greek passage: τήν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα μεταμορφούμεθα, we are changed into the same image (S., 17 and 18, n. 4, where this passage ought to have been explained).

Chap. IV. 1. gaarmaida waúrþum (for the Grk. aor. pass. S., 87, (4), c), wer pitied, receivd mercy.—ni waírþaima; hort. opt. (for the ind. in A).—usgrudjans; only weak (Gr., 132, n. 2). 2. þaim analaugnjam (adj. uzed as sb. S., 68, (1)); abl. dat. guvernd by afstôþum (S., 54,(1)).—galiug (pred. acc. S., 18) taujandans waúrd guþs, falsifying the word of God, lit.: making the word of God a lie.—baírhtein; instr. dat. (S., 52, (2)). 4. ei ni liuhtjai im liuhadeins. Like Bernhardt, I am in favor of liuhadeins (gen. as subj. S., 25, n. 2); cp. ni was im rûmis in Lu. II, 7. Sum editors (cp. Gr., 113, n. 2) prefer liuhadein (in B). Bernhardt remarks that liuhadein may 'allenfalls' be explaind as an acc.: 'damit er ihnen nicht leuchten lasse das licht'. But it may also pass as instrumental dat.: 'damit er ihnen nicht leuchte vermöge des lichtes', lest ther be any light to them thru the light, etc. Cp. similar instr. dativs in Mk. V, 42; Lu. II, 8. 9. 5. aþþan, for; see II, 4. 6.—uns; external obj. after mêrjam.—skalkans izwarans; pred. acc. (S., 18). 6. untê guþ; sc. ist: for it is God who, etc.—ur-; for us (Gr., 78, n. 4).—liuhaþ skeinan; acc. and inf. depending on qaþ (S., 112).—saei jah, and who. 7. aþþan, but. 11. in dauþu; depends on atgibanda. 12. swaei nu (for ὥστε), therefore. 13. gamêlidin; dat. of the pp. n. (Gr., 134) uzed substantivly (S., 68, (4)). 14. jah, also.—urraiseiþ...faúragasatjiþ; for the Grk. fut. (S., 86, (3)). 15. þatuh (for the art. þata and the intensiv particl -uh), immediately followd by þan, allata being uzed substantivly (S., 82, (1), a): for all (the) things.—managizans, more; we uze the positiv: several, many (see II, 6).—ufarassjai; trans., its obj. being awiliud.—guþa; dat. after a sb. (for the Grk. gen. S., 34; and 35, n. 2): for God, i. e. of God. 16. inuh (for in-uh; see II, 8) þis, because of this, for this reason.—ak þáuhjabai (for[Pg 133] ἀλλ' εἰ καί), but even if, but tho.—aíþþau, yet (cp. S., 102, b).—daga jah daga; loc. dat. of time (S., 53, (2)). 17. þata andwaírþô (adv.) ƕeilaƕaírb jah leiht (for τὸ παραυτίκα πρόσκαιρον καὶ ἐλαφρόν), that (which is) at present, etc., the two uninflected adjs. being uzed substantivly, with an adnominal gen., aglôns unsaraizôs.—waúrkjada; the pass. for the Grk. midl, with the pred. nom. (S., 18, n. 4) kaúrei. 18. faírweitjandam, sc. unsis; dat. abs. (S., 119), or the ptc. is simply in apposition with the preceding dat. unsis.—þizei (ei for ê. Gr., 7, n. 2); gen. pl. of the art. before the following two ptcs. (Gr., 134) uzed substantivly (S., 68, n. 4).

Chap. IV. 1. gaarmaida waúrþum (for the Greek aorist passive S., 87, (4), c), who were pitied, received mercy. — ni waírþaima; hortatory optative (for the indicative in A). — usgrudjans; only weak (Gr., 132, n. 2). 2. þaim analaugnjam (adjective used as a noun S., 68, (1)); ablative dative governed by afstôþum (S., 54,(1)). — galiug (predicate accusative S., 18) taujandans waúrd guþs, falsifying the word of God, literally: making the word of God a lie. — baírhtein; instrumental dative (S., 52, (2)). 4. ei ni liuhtjai im liuhadeins. Like Bernhardt, I favor liuhadeins (genitive as subject S., 25, n. 2); compare ni was im rûmis in Lu. II, 7. Some editors (see Gr., 113, n. 2) prefer liuhadein (in B). Bernhardt notes that liuhadein may 'possibly' be explained as an accusative: 'so that he does not let them be illuminated by the light'. But it may also be interpreted as instrumental dative: 'so that he does not shine upon them through the light', lest there be any light to them through the light, etc. Compare similar instrumental datives in Mk. V, 42; Lu. II, 8. 9. 5. aþþan, for; see II, 4. 6. — uns; external object after mêrjam. — skalkans izwarans; predicate accusative (S., 18). 6. untê guþ; sc. ist: for it is God who, etc. — ur-; for us (Gr., 78, n. 4). — liuhaþ skeinan; accusative and infinitive depending on qaþ (S., 112). — saei jah, and who. 7. aþþan, but. 11. in dauþu; depends on atgibanda. 12. swaei nu (for ὥστε), therefore. 13. gamêlidin; dative of the present participle (Gr., 134) used substantively (S., 68, (4)). 14. jah, also. — urraiseiþ...faúragasatjiþ; for the Greek future (S., 86, (3)). 15. þatuh (for the article þata and the intensive particle -uh), immediately followed by þan, allata being used substantively (S., 82, (1), a): for all (the) things. — managizans, more; we use the positive: several, many (see II, 6). — ufarassjai; transitive, its object being awiliud. — guþa; dative after a noun (for the Greek genitive S., 34; and 35, n. 2): for God, i.e. of God. 16. inuh (for in-uh; see II, 8) þis, because of this, for this reason. — ak þáuhjabai (for ἀλλ' εἰ καί), but even if, but though. — aíþþau, yet (see S., 102, b). — daga jah daga; locative dative of time (S., 53, (2)). 17. þata andwaírþô (adverb) ƕeilaƕaírb jah leiht (for τὸ παραυτίκα πρόσκαιρον καὶ ἐλαφρόν), that (which is) at present, etc., the two uninflected adjectives being used substantively, with an adnominal genitive, aglôns unsaraizôs. — waúrkjada; the passive for the Greek middle, with the predicate nominative (S., 18, n. 4) kaúrei. 18. faírweitjandam, sc. unsis; dative absolute (S., 119), or the participle is simply in apposition with the preceding dative unsis. — þizei (ei for ê. Gr., 7, n. 2); genitive plural of the article before the following two participles (Gr., 134) used substantively (S., 68, n. 4).

Chap. V. 1. þatei; repeated after the protasis in the form of ei.—jabai; with the ind., for ἐάν with the subj. (S., 102; cp. also 100, n.). 2. ufarhamôn; uzed reflexivly (for the Grk. midl. S., 16, n. 3), and with the instr., bauainai unsarai þizai (S., 52, (2), b). 3. jabai swêþáuh jah, if even tho.—gawasidai; the pass. for the Grk. midl; cp. the preceding verse. 4. ana þammei (for þamma ei), over that that, for the reason that.—afhamôn..anahamôn; for the Grk. midl; cp. verse 2. 5. jah; a strange addition in the Gothic text. Perhaps it is ment to connect gamanwida, etc., with what it is said in the preceding verses to cum from God (or heven), then the second jah means also; or jah..jah = both ... and.—guþ; sc. ist.—wadi ahman; the latter is the external obj. of gaf, the former predicate acc. (S., 18; cp. also n. 1). 8. mais, rather.—anahaimjaim wisan (for ἐνδημῆσαι). Gabelentz and Loebe and Uppström explain the dat. anahaimjaim as being due to unsis understood with waljam. 9. inuh; see IV, 16.—imma; dat. guvernd by galeikan (S., 42), the obj. of usdaudjam (S., 109). 10. skuldai sijum, we ar owing, we must.—þô swêsôna leikis, the body's own, the bodily things, i. e. the things which the body deservs.—afar þaimei; for afar þaim þôei (by attraction. S., 71. Cp. the reverse attraction in Grk. πρός ἅ). 11. swikunþans (pred. adj.) wisan uns (subj.); acc. with the inf. (in Grk. the inf. alone) after wênja (S., 112). 12. ni ei, not that, not as if.—uskannjaima; final opt. (S., 96, a).—ƕôftuljôs; adnominal gen. after lêw (S., 20).—fram, concerning, for, on behalf of (cp. Mk. I, 44; Lu. II, 24). 13. guþa..izwis; dats. of interest (S., 47): (it is) for God ... (it is) for you. 15. þata; dem. prn.—þatei; conj., that.—sis silbam...sik; refers to the subj. of the dependent clause, þai libandans (S., 60).—þamma gaswiltandin jah urreisandin; like the preceding sis, dats. of advantage (S., 36, (4)), the prsp. rendering the Grk. aor. ptc. (S., 117). 16. swaei kunnum; a consecutiv clause, the vb. being in the ind. (cp. S., 97 and 89).—fram þamma nu, lit. from the now (nu with the art. being uzed substantivly. S., 68, 2), i. e. henseforth.—ni ainnôhun; indef. prn. (Gr., 163, c).—ni..ai; the two negativs strengthen the negation (never make an affirmativ in Goth.) 17. ƕô (indef. prn. f. Gr., 159, n. 3); agrees with gaskafts, and is uzed adjectivly (we might hav expected ƕas: if any man (be) in Christ, he (is) a new creature).—þô alþjôna (the n. adj. uzed as sb. S., 68, (1)) usliþun (apodosis), the old things past away.—niuja (nom. pl. n. Gr., 126); pred. adj. agreeing with alla uzed substantivly (S., 82, (1)). 18. uns (the first), dir. obj. of gafriþôndin.—sis; indir. obj. (S., 43).—uns (the second); dat. 19. untê swêþauh (seems to stand for 'quoniam quidem' of the Lt.[Pg 134] manuscripts.—Bernhardt), because indeed.—im..izê, to them ... their, referring to mankind, world. 20. at guþa gaþlaíhandin; dat. abs. introduced by at (S., 120).—guþa; dat. after gagawaírþnan (cp. sis in verse 18). 21. þana (dem. prn.) izei (rel. prn. Gr., 157, n. 3) kunþa (prt. of kunnan. Gr., 199, (4)); for τὸν γνόντα.—gatawida; with an external obj., þana, and a pred. acc., frawaúrht (S., 18).—ei weis waúrþeima (final opt. S., 96, b), that we might becum.

Chap. V. 1. that; repeated after the protasis in the form of if.—if; with the indicative, for ἐάν with the subj. (S., 102; see also 100, n.). 2. understand; used reflexively (for the Greek middle, S., 16, n. 3), and with the instrumental, in this situation for us (S., 52, (2), b). 3. if even though, if even though.—understood; the passive for the Greek middle; see the preceding verse. 4. for this (for for that), because of that, for the reason that.—understand...not understand; for the Greek middle; see verse 2. 5. and; a strange addition in the Gothic text. It might connect create, etc., with what is mentioned in the preceding verses as coming from God (or heaven), then the second and means also; or and..and = both ... and.—God; sc. is.—external to; the latter is the external object of gave, the former predicate accusative (S., 18; see also n. 1). 8. rather, rather.—to dwell (for ἐνδημῆσαι). Gabelentz and Loebe and Uppström explain the dative to dwell as being due to our understood with will. 9. now; see IV, 16.—at this time; dative governed by to equal (S., 42), the object of to be dead (S., 109). 10. we owe, we are owing, we must.—the body's own, the bodily things, i.e., the things that the body deserves.—because of that; for because of that which (by attraction, S., 71. See the reverse attraction in Greek πρός ἅ). 11. to be grateful (predicate adjective) for us (subject); accusative with the infinitive (in Greek the infinitive alone) after to hope (S., 112). 12. not that, not as if.—we cannot; final opt. (S., 96, a).—the place; adnominal genitive after life (S., 20).—concerning, about, for, on behalf of (see Mk. I, 44; Lu. II, 24). 13. for God...for you; datives of interest (S., 47): (it is) for God ... (it is) for you. 15. this; demonstrative pronoun.—that; conjunction, that.—is now seen...oneself; refers to the subject of the dependent clause, who are living (S., 60).—that are passing away and coming forth; like the preceding is, datives of advantage (S., 36, (4)), the preposition rendering the Greek aorist participle (S., 117). 16. so that; a consecutive clause, the verb being in the indicative (see S., 97 and 89).—from now on, lit. from the now (now with the article being used substantively, S., 68, 2), i.e., henceforth.—not anyone; indefinite pronoun (Gr., 163, c).—not..any; the two negatives strengthen the negation (never create an affirmative in Gothic). 17. if anyone (indefinite pronoun, f. Gr., 159, n. 3); agrees with being, and is used adjectivally (we might have expected if anyone: if any man (is) in Christ, he (is) a new creation).—the old (the neuter adjective used as a noun S., 68, (1)) have passed away (apodosis), the old things have passed away.—new (nom. pl. n. Gr., 126); predicate adjective agreeing with all used substantively (S., 82, (1)). 18. the first, direct object of have given.—the one; indirect object (S., 43).—the second; dative. 19. because indeed (seems to stand for 'quoniam quidem' of the Latin manuscripts.—Bernhardt), because indeed.—to them...their, referring to mankind, world. 20. at God's disposition; dative absolute introduced by at (S., 120).—of God; dative after to make (see is in verse 18). 21. the one (dem. pron.) is (rel. pron. Gr., 157, n. 3) who is known (participle of to know. Gr., 199, (4)); for τὸν γνόντα.—with an external object, the one, and a predicate accusative, the one who is saved (S., 18).—that we might become (final opt. S., 96, b), that we might become.

V. FROM THE SKEIREINS.

a 49. ...ahun; the remaining part of an unknown word, probably ainahun.—kunnandins; weak inflection of the prsp. (Gr., 133), uzed as sb.—is; refers to fraujins (S., 60).—waldufneis; gen. guvernd by andþaggkjandins.—Stains; i. e. Πέτρος, Peter.—ains (the first), alone.—ains (the second), one.—·e·, five (Gr., 1 and n. 2).—mikilis; gen. depending on waíht (S., 21).—waírþidôs (dignity, greatness); gen. guvernd by andþaggkjands (sik being omitted. S., 26 and 16, n. 2).—þaírh þôei (acc. pl. n. Gr., 157), thru which, i. e. wherefore.—usbar, brought forth, i. e. exclaimd.—niuklahein; dat. guvernd by andtilônds (S., 38). b. þans mans (Gr., 117, (1)) anakumbjan; acc. with the inf., guvernd by waúrkeiþ (S., 112).—at hauja managamma wisandin; dat. abs. introduced by at (S., 120).—þô filusna anakumbjan; acc. with the inf., guvernd by gatawidêdun.—inuh (prep., not in-uh), without.—at ni wisandein (Gr., 133) aljai waíhtai; dat. abs. with at (S., 120).—swa managai; belongs to waílawiznai, instr. dat. (S., 52, 2, a).—ganaúhan; acc. sing. m. of ganaúha (for the inf. ganaúhan, s. Gr., 201), guvernd by fragaf, im being the indir. obj. c. filaus; adv. gen. w. the (acc. sg. n. of the) compar. maizô (S., 30, c).—afar þatei; temporal conj.: after that, when.—managei; here w. a sg. v. (S., 5).—matida (prt. here = our past perfect = Lt. 'postquam' w. the perfect).—bigitan was, there was found; we should expect the pl., but the sense is: there was found a quantity of twelv (·ib· Gr., 1, n. 2) baskets, etc.—þatei, which (i. e. which quantity).—þizei (ei for ê. Gr., 7, n. 2) hlaibê...þizê fiskê; partit. gens. (S., 21).—nih þan, for not.—ana...in; change of prep. without change of sense.—ainaim, alone (Gr., 140, 1).—swaei; consecutiv conj., that.—ainƕarjammêh; dat. (Gr., 165, n. 1) guvernd by tawida.—is; I prefer Bernhardt's emendation, izê, of them (i. e. of the fishes). d. naúh us þamma, besides (lit. 'stil from that.')—jêrê; partit. gen. after ·m· (Gr., 1, n. 2).—aflifnandeins; prsp. f. (Gr., 133).—waíhtai; dat. guvernd by fraqistnai (impers.; cp. the Lt. 'mihi invidetur'. S., 49); opt. in a final clause.

a 49. ...ahun; the remaining part of an unknown word, probably ainahun.—kunnandins; weak inflection of the present participle, used as a noun.—is; refers to fraujins (S., 60).—waldufneis; genitive governed by andþaggkjandins.—Stains; i.e., Πέτρος, Peter.—ains (the first), alone.—ains (the second), one.—·e·, five (Gr., 1 and n. 2).—mikilis; genitive depending on waíht (S., 21).—waírþidôs (dignity, greatness); genitive governed by andþaggkjands (sik being omitted. S., 26 and 16, n. 2).—þaírh þôei (accusative plural neuter Gr., 157), through which, i.e., therefore.—usbar, brought forth, i.e., exclaimed.—niuklahein; dative governed by andtilônds (S., 38). b. þans mans (Gr., 117, (1)) anakumbjan; accusative with the infinitive, governed by waúrkeiþ (S., 112).—at hauja managamma wisandin; dative absolute introduced by at (S., 120).—þô filusna anakumbjan; accusative with the infinitive, governed by gatawidêdun.—inuh (prep., not in-uh), without.—at ni wisandein (Gr., 133) aljai waíhtai; dative absolute with at (S., 120).—swa managai; belongs to waílawiznai, instrumental dative (S., 52, 2, a).—ganaúhan; accusative singular masculine of ganaúha (for the infinitive ganaúhan, s. Gr., 201), governed by fragaf, im being the indirect object. filaus; adverbial genitive with the (accusative singular neuter of the) comparative maizô (S., 30, c).—afar þatei; temporal conjunction: after that, when.—managei; here with a singular verb (S., 5).—matida (participle here = our past perfect = Latin 'postquam' with the perfect).—bigitan was, there was found; we would expect the plural, but the sense is: there was found a quantity of twelve (·ib· Gr., 1, n. 2) baskets, etc.—þatei, which (i.e., which quantity).—þizei (ei for ê. Gr., 7, n. 2) hlaibê...þizê fiskê; partitive genitive (S., 21).—nih þan, for not.—ana...in; change of prep. without change of sense.—ainaim, alone (Gr., 140, 1).—swaei; consecutive conjunction, that.—ainƕarjammêh; dative (Gr., 165, n. 1) governed by tawida.—is; I prefer Bernhardt's emendation, izê, of them (i.e., of the fishes). d. naúh us þamma, besides (lit. 'still from that').—jêrê; partitive genitive after ·m· (Gr., 1, n. 2).—aflifnandeins; present participle feminine (Gr., 133).—waíhtai; dative governed by fraqistnai (impersonal; compare Latin 'mihi invidetur'. S., 49); optative in a final clause.

FOOTNOTES:

[107] afswaggwidai wêseima; evidently a better rendering of ἐξαπορεῖσθαι, to be utterly embarrast.—jal; for jah. Gr., 62, n. 3.

[Pg 135]

GLOSSARY.

Remarks.—The signs ƕ, q, þ follow h, k, t, respectivly.—The figures in () refer to the paragrafs of the Grammar.

Comments.—The signs ƕ, q, þ come after h, k, t, respectively.—The numbers in () refer to the paragraphs of the Grammar.

Aba, m. (108, n. 1), husband, man; Lu. II, 36.

Abiaþar, pr. n., Abiathar; dat. -a; Mk. II, 26. [< Ἀβιάθαρ.]

Abiaþar, proper noun, Abiathar; dative -a; Mk. II, 26. [< Ἀβιάθαρ.]

Abraham (61, n. 3), pr. n., Abraham. [< Ἀβραάμ.]

af (56, n. 1), prep. w. dat. (217), of, from, out of, away from, off; Mt. V, 18. 42. Mk. III, 22. II. Cor. III, 5. [OE. of, ME. of, off, a, o, NE. of, off, a- (as in 'adown').]

af-aikan, rv. (179), to deny, curse.

af-aikan, rv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to reject, curse.

afar, prep. (217), (1) w. dat.: after, according to; Mk. I, 7. 17. 20. II. Cor. V, 10. (2) w. acc.: after (only of time); afar dagans, after sum days; Mk. II, 1; afar þatei, after that, when; Mk. I, 14. Skeir. VII, c. [< af + compar. suff. -ar. OHG. avar, abur, MHG. aver, aber, NHG. aber- (in compos.), further, again, aber, conj., but. Cf. OE. eafora, m., posterity, child.]

afar-gaggan, anv. (179, n. 3; 207), to go after, follow; w. miþ w. dat.; Mk. V, 37.

af-daubnan, wv. (194), to becum def, grow dul; II. Cor. III, 14.

af-dôjan (26, a), wv. (187), to tire out, vex, harass.

af-dumbnan, wv. (194), to becum dum, hold one's peace; Mk. IV, 39.

af-êtja (56, n. 2), m. (108), voracious eater, glutton. [-êtja < √ of itan + suff. -jan-.]

af-gaggan, stv. (179, n. 3; 207), to go away, depart; w. faírra w. dat.; Lu. II, 37.

*af-haimeis, adj. (127), away from home, absent; II. Cor. V, 6. 9. [-haimeis < haims. Cf. anahaimeis.]

af-hamôn, wv. (190), to take off clothes, to unclothe; II. Cor. V, 4.

af-hlaþan, stv. (177, n. 1), to lade, load.

af-ƕapjan, wv. (188), w. acc., to choke; Mk. IV, 7. 19.

af-ƕapnan, wv. (194), to choke (intr.), be choked; Mk. V, 13.

af-iddja, prt. of afgaggan.

af-iddja, part of afgaggan.

af-lageins, f. (124), a laying aside, remission; Mk. I, 4. [< af-lagjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

af-laílôt, prt. of aflêtan.

af-laílôt, part of aflêtan.

af-leiþan, stv. (172, n. 1), to go away, depart; w. af w. dat.; Mk. I, 42; du w. dat.; Mk. III, 7.

af-lêtan (-leitan; 7, n. 2), rv. (181), w. acc. of pers. or th., to leav, forsake, put away (a wife); Mt. V, 24. 31. 32; w. dat. of pers. and acc. of th., to let off, forgiv; Mt. VI, 12. 14. 15; to let one hav; Mt. V, 40.

[Pg 136]

af-lifnan (56, ns. 1. 4), wv. (194), to remain, remain over and abuv; Skeir. VII, c.

af-linnan, stv. (174, n. 1), to depart.

af-maitan, stv. (179), to cut off; w. acc. of th.; Mt. V, 30.

af-marzeins, f. (103, n. 1), offense, deceitfulness; Mk. IV, 19. [< af-marzjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

af-môjan (26), wv. (187), to weary, fatigue.

af-môjan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), to tire, exhaust.

af-niman, stv. (170; 175), w. acc., to take away, remove; II. Cor. III, 16; and dat.; Mk. IV, 25; or af w. dat.; Mk. II, 20. 21.

af-satjan, wv. (187), w. acc., to put away (a wife), divorce; Mt. V, 32.

af-skiuban (56, n. 1), stv. (173, n. 1), to shuv away, put away, reject.

af-slauþjan, wv. (188), to amaze; in pass.: to be in despair; II. Cor. IV, 8.

af-slauþnan, wv. (194), to becum beside one's self, be amazed.

af-standan, stv. (177, n. 3), to fall away, renounce; w. dat.; II. Cor. IV, 2.

af-stass, f. (103, n. 3), a standing off, falling away; afstassais bôkôs, a writing of divorcement; Mt. V, 31. [< stem -stassi- < stat-ti-< stat (< √ of standan +-t) + suff. -ti-.]

af-stôþum, prt. of afstandan.

af-stôþum, part. of afstandan.

af-swaggwjan, wv. (188), to make despondent; afswaggwiþs wisan, to despair; II. Cor. I, 8 (note).

afta, adv. (213, n. 2), behind. [< af + suff. -ta. OE. æft, again, behind.]

aftana, adv. (213, n. 2), from behind; Mk. V, 27. [< afta + suff. -na. OE. æftan, ME. æfte, NE. aft; cf. abaft < a, on, + bi, by, + aft.]

aftarô, adv. (211, n. 1), from behind, behind. [< af + adv. compar. suff. -tarô.]

aftra, adv., back, backwards, behind; Lu. II, 43; again; Mt. V, 33. [< af + adv. compar. suff. -tra. OE. æfter, ME. æfter, after, NE. after.]

aftuma, superl. adj. (139), the last. [< af + superl. suff. -tu-ma-n-.]

aftumists, superl. adj. (139, n. 1), the last; aftumist haban, to lie, or be, at the point of deth; Mk. 5, 23. [< aftuma + superl. suff. -ist-a-. OE. ME. æftemest, NE. aftermost (by influence of after and most; s. aftra and maists).]

aggilus, m. (120, n. 1), angel, messenger; Lu. II, 9. 10; dat. -au; Lu. II, 13. 21; acc. -u; Mk. I, 2; pl. nom. -jus; Lu. II, 15; or -eis; Mk. I, 13. [< ἄγγελος, messenger, angel.]

aggwiþa, f. (97), anguish; II. Cor. II, 4. [< aggwus + suff. -iþô-.]

*aggwjan, wv. (188), in ga-aggwjan. [< aggwus.]

*aggwjan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in ga-aggwjan. [< aggwus.]

aggwus, adj. (68; 131), narrow. [OE. ange, ME. ang, OHG. engi (ja-stem), MHG. enge, NHG. enge, eng, adj. narrow.]

agis, gen. agisis, n. (35; 94), aw, fear; Mk. IV, 41. Lu. II, 9. II. Cor. V, 11. [< agan (s. un-agands) + suff. -is-a-. OE. ege (or i-stem; see Brgm., II, p. 421, § 132, Rem. 2), ME. eᵹe, ON. agi > ME. aghe, awe, NE. aw.]

*agjan, wv. (35), in us-agjan. [< *ags, awful, fearful, < -agan; s. agis.]

aglait-gastalds (88^a, n. 1), adj. (124), greedy of filthy lucre, greedy. [-gastalds < ga- + -stalds < √ of staldan.]

aglaiti, n. (95), lasciviousness, unchastity. [< *aglaits, adj., lascivious; cp. agls, adj., indecent.]

aglaiti-waúrdei (88^a), f. (113), indecent language, filthy talk. [< aglaiti-waúrds, adj.; -waúrds < waúrd.]

-agljan (14, n. 1), wv. (188), to trubl, in us-a. [< aglus. OE. eglan, ME. eile, NE. ail.]

aglô, f. (112), tribulation, anguish, distress; Mk. IV, 17. II. Cor. I, 4. 8. II, 4. IV, 17. [< aglus.]

aglus, adj. (131), difficult, hard.[Pg 137] [< √ of agis + suff. -lu-. OE. egle (jô-stem), ME. egle, trublsum, < eglan, ME. eile, NE. ail.]

Agustus, pr. n., Augustus; dat. -au; Lu. II, 1. [Αὔγουστος.]

ahaks, f. (103, n. 2), duv; Mk. I, 10. Lu. II, 24.

ahma, m. (108), the Spirit, the Holy Ghost; Mk. I, 8. 10. 12. 23. 25. 26. 27. II, 8. 11. 29. 30. V, 2. 8. 13. Lu. II, 26. 27. 40. II. Cor. I, 22. II, 13. III, 3. 6. 8. 17. 18. IV, 13. V, 5. [< √ of ahjan, to think, + suff. -man-.]

ahs, n. (94), ear (of grain); Mk. II, 23. IV, 28. [OE. êar (< *eaur, *eahur, *ahur), ME. ear, er, NE. ear (of grain; for ear, the organ of hearing, s. ausô).]

ahtau, indecl. num. (141), eight; Lu. II, 21. [OE. eahta, ME. eighte, NE. eight.]

ahtau-têhund, indecl. num. (143), eighty; Lu. II, 37.

ahtuda, ord. num. (146), the eighth. [< aht-au + suff. -u-da-n-. OE. eahtoða, ME. eighte, NE. eighth.]

aƕa, f. (97), river, stream, water; Mk. I, 5. [OE. êa (< *au, *ahu, *ahwu), f., ME. æ, river, water, > OE. îg, iland, lit. 'belonging to the water', and in composition: îgland, ME. iland, NE. iland.]

aibr, n. (94), an offering; Mt. V, 23. [No doubt a corrupt form for *tibr = OE. tifer, n., OHG. zebar, victim, sacrifice; cf. MHG. un-ge-zibere, un-zifer, NHG. ungeziefer, n., vermin, prop. 'an animal unfit for a sacrifice'.]

áigan (áihan), prt.-prs. (203), to own, hav, possess.—Cpd. faíráihan (203). [OE. âgan, ME. aghe, owe, NE. ow.—Prt.: Gothic áihta, OE. âhte, ME. âhte, ouhte, NE. ought.]

áiginôn, wv., in ga-aiginôn. [< aigin (< √ of aigan + suff. -ina-), n., property.]

áiginôn, vb., in ga-aiginôn. [< aigin (< √ of aigan + suff. -ina-), n., property.]

áihts (20, n. 2), f. (103), property, possession; in pl. goods, things. [< √ of aigan + suff. -ti-. OHG. êht, f., property, goods, in compos. frêht (= Goth. *fra-aihts), gain, wages; cf. LG. fracht, Du. vracht > ME. fraht, fraught, cargo, freight, > frahte, fraughte, to load, pp. fraught, NE. fraught. Of G. or Du. origin is the ML. frecta, fretta, > OF. *freit, fret > ME. freit, freight (the gh being due to 'fraught'), NE. freight.]

aíƕa-tundi (64), f. (98), brambl-bush, bush. [< aíƕa = OE. eoh (< *eohu), m., horse; -tundi < *tindan > the caus. tandjan, to kindl, OE. tendan, ME. tende, NE. tind.]

*aikan, rv. (179), in af-aikan.

*aikan, rv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in af-aikan.

aíkklêsjô, f. (111), church. [< ἐκκλησία.]

aíkklêsjô, f. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), church. [< ἐκκλησία.]

Aíleisabaíþ (23), pr. n., Elisabeth. [< Ἐλισάβεθ.]

Aíleisabaíþ (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Elisabeth. [< Ἐλισάβεθ.]

aílôê (6, n. 1), my God! [< Ἐλωί < the Hebrew.]

ainaha, weak adj. (132, n. 2), only. [< ains + suff. -(a)ha-n-.]

ain-falþei, f. (113), simplicity; II. Cor. I, 12. [< ainfalþs.]

ain-falþs, adj. (148), 'one-fold', singl; Mt. VI, 22.

ain-ƕarjizuh, prn. (165, n. 1), every one, each one; Luc. II, 3. II. Cor. V, 10.

ain-ƕaþaruh, prn. (166), each of two.

ain-ƕaþaruh, prn. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), one of two.

*ainlif (56, n. 1), num. (141), eleven. [< ains + -lif, left, over. OE. and-, end-leofan, -leofen, (for ân-leofan, etc., -leofan being the dat. of-lif), ME. end-, en-, el-leven, NE. eleven.]

ain(n)ôhun, acc. sg. of ainshun.

ain(n)ôhun, accusative singular of ainshun.

ains, num. (140), (I) one, a singl one, (1) alone; II. Cor. V, 15; (2) w. a sb., (a) follg.; Mt. V, 18. 36; (b) preceding; Mt. V, 18. 41; (c)[Pg 138] understood; Mk. IV, 8; (3) w. a partit. gen. follg.; Mt. V, 19. 29. 30. VI, 29; (4) ains—anþar, the one, the other; Mt. VI, 24. (II) indef., one, sum one, an, a, w. a partit. gen. follg.; Mk. V, 22. (III) only, alone, (1) w. a sb., (a) prec.; Skeir. VII, c; (b) follg.; Mk. II, 7. 26; (2) w. a prn. prec.; Mt. V, 46. [OE. ân, one, ME. on, an, ane, a, one, o, (shortend when uzed as a proclitic), one, alone; an, NE. one; an, a.]

ains-hun, indef. prn. (163, c), only in negativ sentences, not any one, none, (1) alone; II. Cor. V, 16; (2) w. a partit. gen. follg.; Mk. V, 37.

aípiskaúpus, m. (120, n. 1), bishop. [< ἐπίσκοπος, bishop.]

aípistaúlê, f. (120, n. 3), epistl, letter; II. Cor. III, 2. 3. [< ἐπιστολή, message, letter.]

áir, adv. (214, n. 1), erly; Mk. I, 35. [OE. *âr > the compar. æ̂r; see áiris.]

áirinôn, wv. (190), to be a messenger, an ambassador; w. faúr w. acc.; II. Cor. V, 20. [< áirus.]

áiris, comp. adv. (212), erlier. [< áir + suff. -is. OE. æ̂r, ME. er, sooner, erlier, before, NE. ere.]

áiriza, comp. adj. (136), of old time, living formerly; in pl. uzed substantivly; Mt. V, 21. 33. [< áir + suff. -iz-an-. OE. æ̂ror, ME. erer, former.]

aírþa, f. (97), erth, ground, land; Mt. V, 18. 35. VI, 10. 19. Mk. II, 10. IV, 5. 8. 20. 28. 31. Lu. II, 14. [OE. eorðe, ME. erthe, NE. erth.]

aírþa-kunds (88^a), adj. (124), erthy, born of the erth.

aírþeins, adj. (124), of erth, erthen; II. Cor. IV, 7. erthly; II. Cor. V, 1. [< aírþa + suff. -eina-. ME. eorthen, erthen, NE. erthen.]

áirus (20, n. 2), m. (105), messenger, ambassador. [OE. âr (of the o-declension), m., messenger. Cf. OE. æ̂rende, n., ME. erand, NE. errand.]

aírzeis, adj. (128), astray, led astray. [OE. yrre, eorre, ME. eorre, irre, angry, OHG. irri, MHG. NHG. irre, adj., astray, confused.]

*ais (for which aiz, 78, n. 1; occurs only onse; Mk. VI, 8), n. (94), brass, bronz, muney. [OE. âr, f., brass, bronz, copper, ME. ôr, NE. ore.]

aiþei, f. (113), mother; Mk. III, 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. V, 40. Lu. II, 33. 34. 43. 48. 51. [OHG. eidi, eide, mother.]

aiþs, gen. aiþis, m. (91), oath; Mt. V, 33. [OE. âð, m., ME. oth, NE. oath.]

aíþþau (20, 3; 71, n. 1), conj. (218), or; Mt. V, 17. 18. 36. VI, 31. Mk. III, 4. 33. IV, 17. 21. 30. Lu. II, 24. II. Cor. I, 13. 17. III, 1; jabai ...aíþþau, either ... or; Mt. VI, 24; else, otherwise; Mt. VI, 1. [Cf. OE. oððe, North æththa, or.]

Aiulf, prn. n. (65, n. 1).

aiw, adv. (prop. acc. sing. of aiws, q. v.), ever, always with ni: never; Mk. II, 12. 25. III, 29. [OE. â (for *âw), ME. â, ô, ON. ei > NE. aye.]

aiw, adv. (proper accusative singular of aiws, q. v.), ever, always with ni: never; Mk. II, 12. 25. III, 29. [OE. â (for *âw), ME. â, ô, ON. ei > NE. aye.]

aíwaggêljô, f. (112), gospel; Mk. I, 1. 14. 15. [< εὐαγγέλιον.]

aiweins, adj. (124), eternal; Mk. III, 29. II. Cor. IV, 17. 18. V, 1. [< aiws + suff. -ein-a-.]

aiwiski, n. (95), shame, dishonesty; II. Cor. IV, 2. [< *aiwisks (in un-aiwisks, that need not be ashamed). OE. æ̂wisc, ashamed.]

aiws, m. (91, n. 5), time, life-time, age, world, eternity; II. Cor. IV, 4; in aiwins, forever; Mt. VI, 13.—S. also aiw.

aiz; see ais.

ajukduþs (21, n. 2), f. (103), time, eternity. [< ajuk- (perhaps < aiws) + suff. -du-þ-i-.]

[Pg 139]

ak, conj. (218), but, for; Mt. V, 17. 39. VI, 13. 18. Mk. I, 45. II, 17. 22. III, 26. 29. IV, 17. 22. V, 19. 26. 39. II. Cor. I, 9. 12. 19. 24. II, 4. 5. 13. 17. III, 3. 5. 6. 14. IV, 2. 5. 18. V, 4. 12. 15. Skeir. VII, a. c. [OE. ME. ac, but.]

Akaïja, pr. n., Achaja; dat. -ai; II. Cor. I, 1. [< Ἀχαΐα.]

Akaïja, proper noun, Achaja; dative -ai; II. Cor. I, 1. [< Ἀχαΐα.]

akei, conj. (218), but; II. Cor. I, 9. III, 15. IV, 8. 9. Skeir. VII, a; yet; II. Cor. V, 16. [< ak + ei.]

akeits, m. (? 91, n. 2), vinegar. [< Lt. acêtum, vinegar.]

akran, n. (94), fruit; Mk. IV, 7. 8. 20. 28. 29. [OE. æcern, n., ME. akern, acorn, NE. acorn.]

akrana-laus, adj. (124), fruitless, unfruitful; Mk. IV, 19.

akrs, m. (91, n. 1), field. [OE. æcer, m., field, ME. aker, NE. acre.]

aqizi, f. (98), ax. [OE. æx, eax, f., ME. æx, NE. ax.]

alabalstraún (24, n. 5; 46, n. 2), indecl. sb. n. (120, n. 2), alabaster box. [< ἀλάβαστρον.]

ala-mans, m. (117, n. 1), all men, the hole human race. [For ala-, s. alaþarba; mans is nom. pl. of manna.]

alan, stv. (177), to grow. [OE. alan, to nurish.]

ala-þarba, adj. (132, n. 2), very poor, very needy. [ala- stands for alla- (< alna- < √ of alan + ptc. suff. -na-), stem of alls, all; þarba, needy, < √ of þaúrban.]

Albila (54), pr. n., Albila.

Albila (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), proper noun, Albila.

alds (73; 74, n. 3), f. (103), age, generation, life, world. [< √ of alan + suff. -di-. OE. ieldu (orig. i-stem), ME. elde, NE. eld (poet.), age. Cf. alþeis.]

aleina, f. (97), el, cubit; Mt. VI, 27. [OE. eln, f., ME. (< the inflected cases) elne, elle, NE. el.]

alêw, n. (119), oliv, oil; Mk. VI, 13. [< Lt. oleum, oil.]

Alfaius, pr. n., Alpheus; gen. -aus; Mk. II, 14. III, 18. [< Αλφαῖος.]

Alfaius, proper noun, Alpheus; gen. -aus; Mk. II, 14. III, 18. [< Αλφαῖος.]

alhs, f. (116), templ; Lu. II, 27. 37. 46. [OE. alh, ealh, m., templ.]

alja, (1) conj., than, except, unless; II. Cor. I, 13. (2) prep. w. dat. (217), except. [< stem of aljis.]

alja-kuns, adj. (130), foren, strange. [alja < aljis; kuns < kuni.]

alja-kuns, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), foreign, strange. [alja < aljis; kuns < kuni.]

alja-leikôs, adv. (212, n. 2), otherwise. [From stems of aljis and -leiks + adv. compar. suff. -ôs.]

aljar, adv. (213, n. 1), elsewhere. [< stem of aljis + suff. -r.]

aljaþ, adv. (213, n. 1), in another direction. [< stem of aljis + suff. -þ.]

aljaþrô, adv. (213, n. 1), from elsewhere. [< stem of aljis + suff. -þrô.]

aljis, adj. (126), other, another; II. Cor. I, 13. Skeir. VII, b. [OE. elles (gen. sg. n.), ME. elles, NE. else.]

allaþrô, adv. (213, n. 2), from all directions, from every quarter; Mk. I, 45. [< stem of alls + suff. -þrô.]

allis, (1) adv. (215), in general, holely, at all; ni—allis, not at all. (2) conj. (218), never at the beginning, for; Mk. III, 35; for neither, for not; Mk. IV, 22. [Prop. gen. sg. n. of alls. OE. ealles, ME. alles, adv., holely.]

alls, adj. (122, n. 1), all, every, hole, (1) alone, w. or without the prec. or follg. art. or dem. prn.; Mt. V, 18. VI, 32. Mk. I, 5. 27. 37. II, 12. IV, 11. 34. V, 20. 40. Lu. II, 3. 19. II. Cor. II, 9. IV, 8. 15. V, 15. 17. 18. (2) w. a pers. prn. prec. or follg.; II. Cor. II, 3. III, 18. V, 10. (3) w. a poss. prn. follg.; Mk. V, 26. (4) w. attraction of a rel. prn. (see 'Explanatory Notes'); Lu. II, 20. (5) w. a ptc.; Mk. I, 32. Lu. II, 18. 38. 47. (6) w. a follg. adj. prec. by the art.; II. Cor. I, 1. (7) w. an adv. frase; Lu. II, 39. (8) w. a sb., w. or without the art.; Mt. VI, 29. Mk. I, 5. 28. 33. 39.[Pg 140] IV, 1. 13. V, 12. 33. Lu. II, 1. 10. 31. 51. II. Cor. I, 1. 3. 4. II, 14. III, 2. IV, 2; and a poss. prn.; Mt. V, 29. 30. VI, 22. 23. (9) in gen. pl. w. a superl.; Mk. IV, 31. 32. (10) all (sing. n.) w. gen. sg.; Mk. II, 13; allata þata w. gen. pl.; Mk. III, 28. [< √ of alan + suff. -la <-no-; cp. fulls. OE. eall, ME. all, NE. all.]

all-waldands, m. (115), all-ruling, almighty. [< all-s + prsp. of waldan.]

-alþan, rv. (179, n. 1), in us-alþan. [Cp. alþeis.]

alþeis, adj. (128), old; n. pl. þô alþjôna, (the) old things; II. Cor. V, 17. [Cp. alds; also OE. eald (w. suff. -do-), ME. ald, old, NE. old.]

Amalaberga, pr. n. (54, n. 2).

Amalafrigda, pr. n. (3, n. 2).

amên, amen, verily; Mt. V, 18. 26. VI, 2. 5. 13. 16. Mk. III, 28. II. Cor. I, 20. [< ἀμήν < the Hebrew.]

amen, amen, truly; Mt. 5:18, 26. 6:2, 5, 13, 16. Mk. 3:28. 2 Cor. 1:20. [< ἀμήν < the Hebrew.]

ams, m. (91, n. 4), shoulder.

ams, m. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 4), shoulder.

an, interr. particl (216), then.

an, interr. particle (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), then.

ana, prep. (217), (1) w. dat., (a) local, in, to, on, upon, over; Mk. I, 45. IV, 5. 16. 20. 38. V, 4. II. Cor. III, 15; (b) of cause, especially w. vs. of 'affection', in, for, at, over; Mk. I, 22. Lu. II, 33. 47. II. Cor. I, 4; ana þammei, for that; V, 4; (c) w. vs. of 'knowing, showing', and the like, on, by, from, in; Mk. V, 29. Skeir. VII, c; (d) in other relations, denoting 'inclination, reference', and the like; Lu. II, 25. 40. II. Cor. I, 23. IV, 10. (2) w. acc., local, on, upon, at, into; Mt. V, 45. VI, 27. Mk. I, 10. 35. II, 21. III, 10. IV, 21. 26. 31. V, 23. Lu. II, 28. II. Cor. III, 13. [OE. an, ǫn, ME. on, o, NE. on.]

ana-aukan, rv. (179), to ad, w. ana w. acc.; Mt. VI, 27.

ana-biudan, stv. (170; 173), to command, instruct, bid, (1) w. dat. of pers.; Mk. I, 27. (2) w. acc. of th.; Mk. I, 44. (3) w. dat. of pers. and an obj. clause w. ei; Mk. V, 43.

ana-busns (15, n. 1), f. (103); command, commandment; Mt. V, 19. [< ana-biudan + suff. -sni- (the radical d being dropt). OE. bysen, bisen, ME. bisne, f., NE. (dial.) byzen, exampl.]

ana-filh, n. (94), commendation; anafilhis bôkôs, epistls of commendation; II. Cor. III, 1. [< ana-filhan.]

ana-filhan, stv. (174, n. 1), to hand down as tradition, commit to, commend, w. acc. (dir. obj.); II. Cor. III, 1; and dat. (indir. obj.); II. Cor. V, 12.

*ana-haimeis, adj. (127), at home, present; II. Cor. V, 8. 9. [-haimeis < haims.]

ana-haitan, rv. (170; 179), w. two accs.; II. Cor. I, 23.

ana-hamôn, w. v. (190), to put on clothes, to clothe; II. Cor. V, 4.

ana-hneiwan, stv. (172, n. 1), to bend down, stoop down; Mk. 1, 7.

ana-kaúrjan, w. v. (193) w. acc., to press upon, overload; II. Cor. II, 5.

anaks, adv., suddenly, at onse; Lu. II, 13.

anaks, adv., suddenly, at once; Lu. II, 13.

ana-kumbjan (54, n. 1), wv. (187), to lie down, recline, sit at meat; Mk. II, 15. Skeir. VII, b.

ana-kunnains, f. (103, n. 1), a reading; II. Cor. III, 14. [< ana-kunnan + suff. -ai-ni-.]

ana-kunnan, wv. (193) w. acc., to read; II. Cor. I, 13. III, 2.

ana-qiman, stv. (175, n. 1) w. acc., to cum near, approach; Lu. II, 9.

ana-laugniba, adv. (210), secretly, in secret. [< analaugns + suff. -ba.]

ana-laugns, adj. (130), hidn, secret; Mk. IV, 22. II. Cor. IV, 2. [< ana + -laugns < liugan + suff. -ni-.]

ana-leikô, adv., in like manner; Skeir. VII, a. [< *analeiks (< ana + -leiks; s. also galeikô) + suff. -ô; = OHG.[Pg 141] analih (anagilîh), MHG. anelîch, NHG. ähnlich, adj., like, similar.]

ana-leikô, adv., in the same way; Skeir. VII, a. [< *analeiks (< ana + -leiks; s. also galeikô) + suff. -ô; = OHG.[Pg 141] analih (anagilîh), MHG. anelîch, NHG. ähnlich, adj., like, similar.]

ana-mêljan, w. v. (187), to write down, enrol for taxation; Lu. II, 5.

-anan (78, n. 4), stv. (177, n. 1), in us-anan, to breath out, giv up the ghost. [< √ an, in OE. andian, to be angry, OHG. andôn, MHG. anden, NHG. ahnden, to punish.]

ana-nauþjan, wv. (188), w. acc., to constrain, force, compel; Mt. V, 41.

ana-niujan, wv. (188), to renew; II. Cor. IV, 16.

ana-praggan (51), rv. (178), to harass, trubl.

ana-praggan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), rv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), to harass, trouble.

ana-silan, wv. (193), to be silent, be stil; Mk. IV, 39.

ana-siuns, adj. (130), visibl.

ana-siuns, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), visible.

ana-stôdeins, f. (103, n. 1), beginning; Mk. I, 1. [< ana-stôdjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

ana-stôdjan, wv. (188), intr., to begin; Mk. superscr.

ana-trimpan, stv. (174, n. 1), to tred upon, press upon.

and, prep. w. acc. (217), local, denoting 'motion over', along (orig. opposit), to, into, on, in; Mk. I, 28. 39. and driusôn, down a slope; Mk. V, 13. [Orig. *anda = anda-, uzed w. sbs. and adjs. only; and- also w. vs. and advs. OE. ME. and-, ǫnd-, NE. an- (in answer).]

anda-; s. and.

anda-beit (in B, -bêt in A), n. (94), reproach; II. Cor. II, 6. [< and-beitan.]

anda-hafts, f. (103), answer, reply; sentence; II. Cor. I, 9. [-hafts < hafjan + suff. -ti-.]

anda-nahti, n. (95), the time toward night, evening; Mk. I, 32. IV, 35. [nahti < nahts.]

anda-neiþs, adj. (124), contrary; þata andaneiþô, contrariwise; II. Cor. II, 7. [-neiþs < neiþ, n., envy, OE. nîð, m., ME. nið, OHG. nîd, MHG. nît (nîd-), NHG. neid, m., envy.]

anda-nêm (33), n. (94), a receiving. [< and- (= anda-) niman.]

anda-nêm (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), n. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), a receiving. [< and- (= anda-) niman.]

anda-nêms (33), adj. (130), plezant, acceptabl. [< and-niman; cp. prec. w.]

anda-numts (33), f. (103), a receiving, acceptation. [< and-niman + suff. -ti-; cp. prec. w.]

anda-sêts (34), adj. (130), abominabl. [< and- (s. and) sitan, to fear, regard. Cf. G. entsetzlich, terribl, < (sich) entsetzen, to be amazed, < ent-+ setzen, factit. of sitzen, to sit, +-lich.]

anda-staþjis, m. (92), adversary. [-staþjis < staþs.]

anda-staþjis, m. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), opponent. [-staþjis < staþs.]

anda-staua, m. (107), adversary; Mt. V, 25.

anda-þâhts, (209), adj. (124), vigilant, cautious. [Prop. an old ptc. in-to-, < and-þagkjan.]

and-augjô, adv., openly, publicly; Mk. I, 45. [< and-augi (+ adv. suff. -ô), n., face; -augi < aug- (in augô) + suff. -ja-.]

anda-waúrdi, n. (95), answer; Luc. II, 47. [waúrdi < -waúrds (in lausa-waúrds, etc.) < waúrd. OHG. ant-wurti, n. f., MHG. ant-würte, -wurt, NHG. antwort, f., answer.]

anda-wleizn, n. (94) or -wleizns, f. (103), countenance, face; II. Cor. III, 13. [-wleizn < *wleitan (= OE. wlîtan, ME. wlite, to look) + (if f.) suff. -sni-.]

and-bahti, n. (95, n. 1), service, office, ministry, ministration; II. Cor. III, 7. 8. 9. IV, 1. V, 18. [< andbahts.]

and-bahtjan, wv. (187) w. dat. of pers., to serv, minister; Mk. I, 13. 31; w. acc. of th., to perform, administer; II. Cor. III, 3. [< andbahts, andbahti.]

and-bahts, m. (91), servant, minister; II. Cor. III, 6. officer; Mt. V, 25.[Pg 142] [Perhaps < L. ambactus, servant, of Celtic origin.]

and-beitan, stv. (172, n. 1), w. acc., to rebuke, charge; Mk. I, 25. III, 12; in pass., to be perplext; II. Cor. IV, 8.

and-bindan, stv. (174) w. acc., to unbind, loose; Mk. I, 7; to explain; Mk. IV, 34.

and-bundnan, wv. (194), to becum loose, loosen.

andeis, m. (92, n. 1), end; Mk. III, 26; und, or in, andi, to the end; II. Cor. I, 13. III, 13. [OE. ende, m., ME. ende, end, NE. end.]

and-hafjan, stv. (177, n. 2), w. dat. of pers., to answer; Mk. III, 33.

and-haitan, rv. (170; 179), to confess, w. dat. of pers., to confess (one's self) to, to thank; Lu. II, 38; w. dat. of th., to confess sumthing; Mk. I, 5.

and-hausjan, wv. (187), to listen to (and answer favorably), to hear; pers. pass.; Mt. VI, 7.

and-hôf, prt. of andhafjan.

and-hôf, part of andhafjan.

and-huleins, f. (103, n. 1), uncuvering, revelation; illumination; Lu. II, 32. [< and-huljan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

and-huljan, wv. (187), w. acc., to uncuver; Mk. II, 4; to reveal; Lu. II, 35; pp. andhuliþs, uncuverd, open; II. Cor. III, 18.

andi-laus (88^a, n. 2), adj. (124), endless.

andi-laus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__^a, n. 2), adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), infinite.

andizuh, conj. (218), otherwise, else. [< andiz-, perhaps a compar. form of and, anda-, orig. opposit.]

and-niman, stv. (170; 175), w. acc., to take, receiv, partake, accept; Mk. IV, 20. 36. Skeir. VII, c; in the prt. to hav receivd, to hav; Mt. VI, 2, 16; and ana w. acc., to take, take up in; Lu. II, 28.

Andraías, pr. n. Andrew; Skeir. VII, a; gen. -ins; Mk. I, 29; acc. -an; Mk. I, 16. III, 18. [< Ἀνδρέας.]

Andraías, proper noun Andrew; Skeir. VII, a; gen. -ins; Mk. I, 29; acc. -an; Mk. I, 16. III, 18. [< Ἀνδρέας.]

and-sakan, stv. (177, n. 1), to argue against, speak against; Lu. II, 34.

and-standan, stv. (177, n. 3), w. dat., to stand against, resist; Mt. V, 39.

and-staúrran, wv. (193), to murmur against.

and-staúrran, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to complain.

and-tilôn, wv. (189), to serv, accomodate one's self to; Skeir. VII, a.

and-þagkjan (gg; 67, n. 1), wv. (209), prt. -þâhta (5, b), to consider, devise; w. sik and gen. of th., to recollect, remember; Skeir. VII, a; so without sik; Skeir. VII, a.

and-waírþi, n. (95), presence, sight, face; Mt. VI, 16. II. Cor. II, 17. III, 18. IV, 2; person; II. Cor. II, 10; in managamma andwaírþja, before many persons; II. Cor. I, 11. in andwaírþja w. gen., in the presence of, before; Mt. V, 24. VI, 1. Lu. II, 31; faúra a. w. gen., before; Mk. II, 12. [< and-waírþs.]

and-waírþs, adj. (124), present; II. Cor. IV, 17. [-waírþs < waírþan. OE. ǫnd-, and-weard, ME. NE. -ward.]

Anna, pr. n., Anna; Lu. II, 36. [< Ἀννα.]

Anna, proper noun, Anna; Lu. II, 36. [< Ἀννα.]

Annas, pr. n., Annas. [< Ἀννας.]

Annas, proper noun, Annas. [< Ἀννας.]

*ans, m. (91, n. 4), beam. [ON. ǫss, áss (from *ans), beam, pole, > vindáss, windlass, > ME. windas, NE. windlass (the l by influence of windlass, a circuit, < the vb. wind +-lass, for lace).]

ansteigs, adj. (124), gracious, favorabl. [< ansts + suff. -eig-a-.]

ansts, f. (102), favor; Lu. II, 52; grace; Lu. II, 40. II. Cor. I, 2. 12; joy; II. Cor. I, 24. benefit; II. Cor. I, 15. [OE. êst (ê is i-uml. of ô < ǫn for an), m., ME. este, favor, grace.]

anþar, adj. (122, n. 1; 124, ns. 1. 4; 146), another, second, (1) alone, with or without the art.; Mt. V, 39. Mk. III, 21. V, 19; ains... anþar, the one ... the other; Mt. VI, 24; sum...anþaruþ þan, sum ... sum; Mk. IV, 5; (2) w. a sb.;[Pg 143] Mk. IV, 36. II. Cor. I, 15. [OE. ǫ̂ðer (ǫ̂ < ǫn for an), ME. other, NE. other.]

apaústaúlus, m. (120, n. 1; apaústulus, 13, n. 1), apostl, messenger; II. Cor. I, 1. [< ἀπόστολος.]

arbaidjan, wv. (187), to work, labor, toil; Mt. VI, 28. [< arbaiþs.]

arbaiþs, f. (103), work, labor, toil. [< *arban, to work (vB., 78) + suff. -di-. OE. earfoð, earfeðe, n., ME. earfeð-, labor, pains, trubl, OHG. arabeit, MHG. arebeit, arbeit, f., labor, trubl, need, NHG. arbeit, f., work, labor.]

arbi, n. (95), heritage, inheritance. [OE. yrfe, ierfe (ie is i-uml. of ea), n., ME. erfe, OHG. erbi, MHG. NHG. erbe, n., heritage, inheritance.]

arbi-numja (88^a), m. (108), one who takes an inheritance, an heir. [-numja < niman +-suff. -jan-.]

arbja, m. (108), heir. [< arb-i + suff. -jan-.]

arbja, m. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), heir. [< arb-i + suff. -jan-.]

arbjô, f. (112), heiress. [< arbi + suff. -jôn-. OHG. arbeo (-eo <-jo), erbo, MHG. NHG. erbe, m., heir.]

Ariamirus (61, n. 1), pr. n.

Ariamirus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

Ariaricus (3, n. 2), pr. n.

Ariaricus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 2), proper noun.

arjan, rv. (179, n. 5), to til, plow, cultivate. [OE. erian, ME. ere, NE. ear, to plow.]

ark-aggilus (57), m. (105), archangel. [< ἀρχάγγελος.]

ark-aggilus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), archangel. [< ἀρχάγγελος.]

arma-haírtiþa, f. (97), pity, mercy; Mt. VI, 4. [< armahaírts (+ suff. -iþô-), merciful, < arms = OE. earm, ME. arm, OHG. aram, arm, MHG. NHG. arm, adj. poor, miserabl; + -haírts < haírt-ô. Formd after the Lt. misericors.]

armaiô (22, n. 3), f. (112), mercy, pity; alms; Mt. VI, 1. 2. 3. [< arman.]

arman, wv. (192), to show mercy.—Cpd. ga-a. [< arms, adj.; s. armahaírtiþa.]

arms, m. (101), arm; Lu. II, 28. [OE. earm, m., ME. arm, NE. arm.]

arniba, adv. (130, n. 3; 210), surely. [< *arni- (+ suff. -ba) = OE. *ærne- > eorn-ost, ME. ernest, NE. ernest.]

arwjô, adv., without cause, freely, for nought.

arwjô, adv., without reason, freely, for free.

asans, f. (103), harvest, harvest time, summer; Mk. IV, 29. [< √ as = OE. ær in earnian, ME. arne, erne, NE. ern.]

Asêr, pr. n., Aser; gen. -is; Lu. II, 36. [< Ἀσήρ.]

Asêr, proper noun, Aser; genitive -is; Lu. II, 36. [< Ἀσήρ.]

Asia, pr. n., f., Asia; dat. -ai; II. Cor. I, 8.

Asia, proper noun, feminine, Asia; dative -ai; II. Cor. I, 8.

asilus, m. f. (105), yung ass, ass. [Lt. asinus (with change of suff.), OE. esol, m., ass, OHG. esil, MHG. esel, NHG. esel, m., ass.]

asneis, m. (92), servant, hired man, hireling; Mk. I, 20. [< asans. OE. esne, m., servant.]

asts, m. (91), branch, twig; Mk. IV, 32. [OE. *æst (> æstel, m., litl branch, book-mark), OHG. MHG. NHG. ast, m., branch, bough.]

at, prep. (217), (I) w. dat., (1) local, (a) denoting nearness, at, by, with, about; Mk. II, 2. 14. IV, 1. V, 11. for (s. haban); Mk. III, 9; in an abstract sense; Luc. II, 52. II. Cor. I, 12. 17. II, 1 (the first). 17. V, 8; (b) the point or goal at which anything arrives, after vs. of 'cuming, bringing', and the like, to; Mk. I, 33. 40. II, 3. III, 8. II. Cor. I, 15. 16. II, 1 (the second). Skeir. VII, b (the second); (2) temporal, i. e. 'the time within which'; emfatic w. the dat. abs.; Mk. IV, 6. 35. Lu. II, 2. II. Cor. I, 11. II, 12. V, 20. Skeir. VII, b (the first and third). (II) w. acc., only temporal, at, in; at dulþ, at the feast; Lu. II, 41. [OE. æt, ME. NE. at.]

[Pg 144]

at-augjan, wv. (187), (1) w. refl. acc. (sik) and dat. of pers., to bring before the eys, show (one's self to); Mk. I, 44; (2) w. faúra w. dat., to show one's self, appear; II. Cor. V, 10.

at-baíran, stv. (175), w. acc. of th., to bring; Mt. V, 24; to offer; Mk. I, 44.

at-gaggan, anv. (179, n. 3; 207), to go to, cum; Mt. V, 24. Mk. II, 18. 20; w. ana w. acc.; Mk. I, 10; du w. dat.; Mk. V, 15; in w. acc.; Mk. III, 20; aftana; Mk. V, 27.

at-giban (56, n. 1), stv. (176), (1) w. acc. (in pass. the nom.), to giv over, deliver up, deliver, put in prison; Mk. I, 14; to bring forth; Mk. IV, 29; and in w. acc., to deliver unto; II. Cor. IV, 11; (2) w. dat. (indir. obj.) and acc. (dir. obj.), to deliver; Mt. V, 25; in pass. w. dat. of pers. (indir. obj.) and an inf. clause (subj.); Mk. IV, 11.

at-haitan (69, n. 2), rv. (170; 179), w. acc., to call to one; Mk. III, 13. 23.

Athanaildus (65, n. 1), pr. n.

Athanaildus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

Athanaricus (3, n. 2), pr. n.

Athanaricus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 2), proper noun.

at-iddja, prt. of at-gaggan.

at-iddja, part of at-gaggan.

atisk, n. (94) or m. (91; only acc. sg., atisk, occurs), seed, cornfield; Mk. II, 23.

at-kunnan, wv. (193), w. dat. of pers. and acc. of th., to afford, grant, award, giv.

at-nêƕjan, wv. (188), w. sik, to draw near, (in prt.) to be at hand; Mk. I, 15.

at-saíƕan (34, n. 1), stv. (176, n. 1), w. inf., to take heed; Mt. VI, 1.

at-satjan, wv. (186), w. acc. (understood) and faúra w. dat. (fraujin), to present to the Lord; Lu. II, 22.

at-standan, stv. (177, n. 3), to stand near, cum near; Lu. II, 38.

atta (69, n. 1), m. (108), father; Mk. I, 20. V, 40. Lu. II, 48. (= God) Mt. V, 45. 48. VI, 4. 6. 8. 9. 14. 15. 18. 26. 32. Lu. II, 49. II. Cor. I, 2. 3; forefather, ancestor; Skeir. VII, d. [OHG. atto.—< the language of children.]

attaítôk, prt. of attêkan.

attaítôk, past tense of attêkan.

attaúhun, prt. of attiuhan.

attaúhun, part of attiuhan.

at-têkan (ei for ê; 7, n. 2), rv. (181), w. dat.; to tuch; Mk. I, 41. III, 10. V, 27. 28.

Attila, pr. n. (108), prop. 'litl father'.

at-tiuhan, stv. (173), to pul or draw towards, to bring; s. inn-at-tiuhan.

at-þinsan, stv. (174, n. 1), w. acc., to draw towards.

at-wisan, to be present, be at hand; Mk. IV, 29.

aþþan, conj. (218), always at the beginning of the sentence, but, moreover; Mt. V, 22. 28. 34. 44. VI, 16. Mk. II, 10. 20. III, 29. IV, 15. II. Cor. I, 6. 13. 18. 21. 23. II, 1. 5. 10. 14. III, 4. 7. 16. 17. 18. IV, 3. 7. V, 5. 8. 11. 18; for; II. Cor. II, 4. IV, 5; aþþan ik...iþ is, I (indeed) ... but he; Mk. I, 8.

Audericus (25, n. 2), pr. n.

Audericus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 2), proper noun.

auftô (24, n. 1; 211, n. 1), adv., perhaps, likely, surely; ibai auftô, lest perhaps; Mk. II, 22. II. Cor. I, 17. II, 7.

auga-daúrô (88^a), n. (110), window, lit. 'ey-door'. [The pl. f. daúrôns means door; s. also daúr.]

augjan, wv. (187), to show.—Cpd. at-au. [< stem auga- (s. prec. w.). OE. æt-êawan, æt-ŷwan, ME. (at-)ewe, to show.]

augô, n. (110), ey; Mt. V, 29. 38. VI, 22. 23. Lu. II, 30. [OE. êage, n., ME. eᵹe, eye, NE. ey.]

auhjôdus (aúhjôdus?), m. (105), noiz, tumult; Mk. V, 38. [< aúhjôn + suff. -ô-dus.]

auhjôn (aúhjôn?), wv. (190), to make a noiz, cry aloud; Mk. V, 39.

*aúhns, m. (91, n. 2), oven; Mt. VI, 30. [OE. ofen (for the common[Pg 145] orig. of h and f, s. Brgm., I, p. 305 et seq.), m., ME. oven, furnace, oven, NE. oven.]

aúhsa, m. (108, n. 1), ox. [OE. oxa, m., ME. oxe, NE. ox.]

aúhuma, superl. adj. (139), w. a compar. meaning, higher, > aúhumists, aúhmists (a new superl.; 124; 139, n. 1), highest, chief. [OE. ŷmest, highest.]

auk, conj. (in our 'Selections' after the first, or two first closely connected words of the sentence), for; Mt. V, 18. 20. 29. 30. 46. VI, 7. 8. 16. 21. 32. Mk. I, 16. II, 15. III, 10. 21. IV, 28. V, 42. II. Cor. III, 9. 11. V, 1. Skeir. VII, c; jah auk, for; II. Cor. V, 4; auk...-uþ (= uh)-þan, for ... but; II. Cor. II, 16 (in B). [OE. êac, ME. êk, êke, also, likewise, NE. eke.]

aukan, rv. (179), to increase.—Cmpds. ana-, bi-au. [OE. *êacan (pp. êacen), to increase, > the caus. ŷcan, *êcan, ME. eke, eche, to increase, NE. eke (dial.), ech(e) (Shak.).]

Aúnisimus (9, n. 1), pr. n.

Aúnisimus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

aurahi (98, or aurahjô, 111? aú? Only dat. pl., aurahjôm, occurs), f., tomb; Mk. V, 2. 3. 5.

aurâli (5, a), n. (98), napkin. [< Lt. orale, napkin.]

Ausila (25, n. 2), pr. n.

Ausila (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 2), proper noun.

ausô, n. (110), ear; Mk. IV, 9. 23. [OE. êare, ME. êre, n., NE. ear.]

Austrovaldus (25, n. 2), pr. n.

Austrovaldus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 2), proper noun.

auþeis, adj. (127; or auþs, 130, n. 2), desert, waste; Mk. I, 35. 45. [ON. auðr, OHG. ôdi, MHG. œde, NHG. öde, desert, waste.]

auþida, f. (97), desert; Mk. I, 3. 4. 12. 13. Skeir. VII, d. [< auþeis or auþs + suff. -idô-.]

awêþi (17, n. 1), n. (95), flock of sheep. [Perhaps for *aweiþi (7, n. 4), < *awi; s. awistr. OE. eowde, n., ME. eowd, flock of sheep.]

awiliuþ (-d), n. (94), thanks; II. Cor. II, 14. giving of thanks, thanksgiving; II. Cor. IV, 15.

awiliudôn, wv. (190), to thank, giv thanks; Skeir. VII, b; w. faúr w. acc.; II. Cor. I, 11.

awistr (4), n. (94), sheepfold. [< *awi (OE. eowu, a-stem, f., ME. ewe, NE. ewe, yu) + suff. -stra. OE. eowestre, n., sheepfold.]

azêts, adj. (124), easy; compar. azêtizô, n.; Mk. II, 9.

azgô, f. (112), ashes. [Cf. OE. asce, f., ME. asche, pl. -en (reg.) and es, NE. ash, pl. ashes.]

azymus (77), occurs only onse, in gen. pl. azymê, unlevend bred. [< ἄζυμος, adj., unlevend, unmixt, azymê being formd in accordance w. τῶν ἀζύμων, gen. pl. of the n. adj. uzed substantivly.]

Badi, n. (95), bed; Mk. II, 4. 9. 11. 12. [OE. bed(d), n., ME. NE. bed.]

bagms (48, n. 1), m. (91), tree. [Cf. OE. bêam, m., tree, ME. beom, bêm, NE. beam.]

-bahtjan, wv., in and-bahtjan.

bai, num. adj. (140, n. 1), both. [OE. *bâ (for which beᵹen; cp. my Compar. Gloss., p. 583), m., bâ, f., ME. bâ, bô, f. n., NE. bo-, in both.]

Baíaílzaíbul, pr. n. in acc., Beelzebub; Mk. III, 22. [< Βεελζεβούλ.]

Baíaílzaíbul, proper noun in accusative, Beelzebub; Mk. III, 22. [< Βεελζεβούλ.]

baíran, stv. (175), (1) to carry, bring (a person); w. at w. dat.; Mk. II, 3; du w. dat.; Mk. I, 32. (a th.) Mt. V, 23. (2) to bear; bring, bring forth (a child); Lu. II, 6; w. akran, fruit; Mk. IV, 8. 28.—Cpds. at-, ga-, us-b. [OE. beran, ME. bere, NE. bear.]

baírgan, stv. (174, n. 1), w. dat., to hide, keep. [OE. beorgan, ME. berᵹe, to keep, preserv, protect.]

baírhtaba, adv. (210), clearly, brightly. [< baírhts + suff. -ba.]

baírhtei, f. (113), brightness, clear[Pg 146]ness; baírhtein sunjôs, by manifestation of the truth; II. Cor. IV, 2; in baírhtein, openly; Mt. VI, 4. 6. [< baírhts.]

baírhtjan, wv. (187), to make clear, show.—Cpd. ga-b. [< baírhts.]

baírhts, adj. (124), bright, manifest. [OE. beorht, byrht, ME. briᵹt, briht, NE. bright.]

baitrs (20, n. 4), adj. (124), bitter. [< bait (the √-form of the prt. sg. of beitan) + suff. -ra-. OE. ME. NE. bitter < bit-, the √-form of the prt. pl. and pp.]

bajôþs, adj. (117, n. 1; 140, n. 1), both. [Cf. bai.]

balgs, m. (100), lether bag, wine-skin, botl; Mk. II, 22. [Orig. skin of an animal. OE. bælg, m., a lethern bag, pouch, belly, ME. bely, NE. belly.]

balþei, f. (113), boldness; II. Cor. III, 12. [< *balþs, bold, daring, = OE. beald, ME. bald, bold, NE. bold.]

balwjan, wv. (187), w. dat., to torment, plague; Mk. V, 7. [< *balws, pernicious, baleful, = OE. bealu, adj., evil, pernicious, and n. sb., evil, sorrow, ME. bale, sb., bali, adj., NE. bale, misery.]

bandi, f. (96), band, bond. [< bindan. OE. bend, m. f. n., ME. NE. bend.]

bandja (32), m. (108), one being bound, prisoner. [< band-i + suff. -jan-.]

bandwa, f. (97, n. 1), sign, token.

bansts, m. (101), barn. Mt. VI, 26. [Cf. OE. bôs (< *bǫns < *bans), n., stable, ME. bôs, NE. boose.]

barizeins, adj. (124), of barley; Skeir. VII, a. d. [< *baris (+ suff. -eina-), barley, = OE. bere, m. (?), ME. bere, barley, NE. bar-in barley.]

barn (33), n. (93), child; Mk. V, 39. 40. 41. Lu. II, 12. 16. 17. 27. 40. Skeir. VII, b. [OE. bearn, barn, ME. barn, n., child, NE. barn (Shak.).]

barnilô, n. (110), litl child, sun; Mk. II, 5. [< barn + suff. -i-lôn-.]

Barþaúlaúmaius (24, n. 5), pr. n., Bartholomew; acc. -u; Mk. III, 18. [< Βαρθολομαῖος.]

batiza, compar. adj. (138), better, w. dat. of pers. and a subj. clause; Mt. V, 29. 30. [< *bat-, good, + compar. suff. -iz-a-n-. OE. bet(e)ra, ME. betere, bettre, NE. better.]

baþ, prt. of bidjan.

baþ, past tense of bidjan.

bauains, f. (103, n. 1), dwelling; Mk. V, 3. II. Cor. V, 2. [< bauan + suff. -ai-ni-.]

bauan (26), wv. (179, n. 2; 193, n. 1), to dwel, inhabit.—Cpd. ga-b. [OE. bûan, ME. bue, OHG. bûan, MHG. bûwen, to dwel, til, plant, cultivate, NHG. bauen, to build, cultivate, etc. Its √ is containd also in NE. bower and-bor, in neighbor.]

Baúanaírgaís (a by-name of James and John), Boanerges; Mk. III, 17. [< Βοανεργές.]

Baúanaírgaís (a nickname for James and John), Boanerges; Mk. III, 17. [< Βοανεργές.]

-bauljan (24, n. 1), wv. (187), to cause to swel, in uf-b. [Cf. OE. bŷle, f., ME. bile, bule, NE. bile, boil, tumor.]

baúr (33), m. (101, n. 2), son. [< baíran. OE. byre (< *buri-), m., son.]

baúrgs, f. (116), town, city; Mt. V, 35. Mk. I, 33. 38. 45. V, 14. Lu. II, 3. 4. 11. 39. [OE. burh, burg, f., ME. burgh, borugh, NE. borough.]

baúrgs-waddjus (88^a, n. 3), f. (105), town-wall.

baúrgs-waddjus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__^a, n. 3), f. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), town wall.

beidan, stv. (172, n. 1), w. gen., to abide, expect; Lu. II, 25.—Cpd. us-b. [OE. bîdan, ME. bide, NE. (a)bide.]

-beistjan, wv. (187, n. 3), to leven, in ga-b. [< beist, n., leven. < √ of beitan.]

[Pg 147]

beitan, stv. (172, n. 1), to bite.—Cpd. and-b. [OE. bîtan, ME. bite, NE. bite.]

bêrusjôs (bi-; 7, n. 3), pl. (sing. *bêruseis; 33), m. (92, n. 2), parents; Lu. II, 27. 41. [Orig. perfect ptc. activ, < √ of baíran.]

Bêþlahaim (aí for a in Jo. VII, 42; concerning the h, s. 61, n. 3), indecl. pr. n., Bethlehem; Lu. II, 4. 15. [< Βηθλεéμ.]

bi, prep. (217), (I) w. dat., (1) local, by. Mk. V, 41; (2) in abstr. relations, by, on; Mt. V, 34. 35. 36. Mk. V, 7; after, according to, in; Lu. II, 22. 27. 29. 39. 42. II. Cor. I, 17. IV, 13. V, 16; bi ufarassau, exceedingly; II. Cor. IV, 17. (II) w. acc., (1) local, against, on; Mt. V, 39; about; Mk. I, 6. III, 8. 32. 34. IV, 10. V, 4; (2) in abstr. relations, about, over, for, of, concerning; Mt. V, 44. Mk. I, 30. IV, 19. V, 16. 27. 33. Lu. II, 17. 27. 33. 38. II. Cor. I, 8. 11; against; Mt. V, 23. Mk. III, 6; because of, at, about; Mt. VI, 28. Lu. II, 18.—bi sumata, in part; II. Cor. I, 14. II, 5. [OE. bî, prep., bĭ-, be-, pref. ME. bi, by, bi-, be-, NE. by, be-.]

bi-aukan, rv. (179), to increase; in pass. w. dat. of pers., to ad to, giv more; Mk. IV, 24.

bida, f. (97), request, prayer; Lu. II, 37; the pers. for whom the prayer is made, is exprest by bi w. acc.; II. Cor. I, 11. [< bidjan. OE. bedu, f. (ge-bed, n.), ME. bede, OHG. beta, bita, MHG. bete, bite, NHG. bitte, f., prayer, request.]

bidjan, stv. (176, n. 5), to pray, ask, desire, beseech, call on, beg, (1) abs.; Mt. VI, 5. 6. 7. 9. Mk. I, 35; (2) w. acc. of the pers. addrest; Mt. V, 42. VI, 8. Mk. I, 40. V, 12. 23; (3) w. du w. dat. of the pers. addrest; Mt. VI, 6; (4) the pers. for whom the prayer is made, is exprest by bi w. acc.; Mt. V, 44; (5) w. acc. of pers. and a dependent clause introduced by ei (w. opt.); Mk. V, 10. 18; or an inf. clause; Mk. V, 17. II. Cor. II, 8. V, 20. [OE. biddan, ME. bidde, NE. bid, to pray, which represents also OE. bêodan; s. biudan.]

bi-gaírdan, stv. (174, n. 1), to begird, gird one's self.

bi-gat, bi-gêtun, prt. of bigitan.

bi-gat, bi-gêtun, past tense of bigitan.

bi-gitan, stv. (176, n. 1), to find, meet with, w. acc.; Mk. V, 37. Luc. II, 16. 45; w. two accs., the second being a ptc. in agreement w. the first; Lu. II, 12. 16 (barn). 46; in pass. w. nom.; Skeir. VII, c; or two noms. (one being implied); II. Cor. V, 3.

bi-hlahjan, stv. (177, n. 2), to laf at, laf to scorn; Mk. V, 40.

bi-leiban (56, n. 1), stv. (172, n. 1), to remain.

bi-leiþan, stv. (172, n. 1), to leav, forsake, in pp.; II. Cor. IV, 9.

bi-maitan, rv. (179), w. acc., to circumcise; Lu. II, 21.

bi-naúhan, prt.-prs. (201); impers.: bi-nah, it is lawful.

bindan, stv. (174), to bind.—Cpds. and-, ga-b. [OE. bindan, ME. binde, NE. bind.]

bi-raubôn, wv. (190), to rob, strip, despoil.

birusjôs; s. bêrusjôs.

birusjôs; n. bêrusjôs.

bi-saíƕan (34, n. 1), stv. (176, n. 1), w. acc., to look round about on; Mk. III, 34.

bi-sauljan (24, n. 1), wv. (188), to sully, defile.

bi-saulnan (24, n. 1), wv., to becum soild, sullied, defiled.

bi-sitan, stv. (176, n. 1), to sit about or near; only in prsp. uzed substantivly (115): and allans bisitands (acc. pl.) G., to 'all dwellers'[Pg 148] of G., i. e. round about G.; Mk. I, 28.

bi-skeinan, stv. (172, n. 1), w. acc., to shine upon, shine round about; Lu. II, 9.

bi-sunjanê, adv., about, round about, near; Mk. I, 38. III, 34. [-sunjanê, for *sundjanê, gen. pl. of the prsp. of √ es- + suff. -jon- (Feist p. 19); s. im.]

bi-sunjanê, adv., about, around, near; Mk. I, 38. III, 34. [-sunjanê, for *sundjanê, gen. pl. of the prsp. of √ es- + suff. -jon- (Feist p. 19); s. im.]

bi-swaírban, stv. (174, n. 1), to wipe.

bi-swaran, stv. (177, n. 1), to swear to, to adjure, w. acc. of pers. and bi w. dat.; Mk. V, 7.

Biþania (9, n. 1), pr. n., Bethany.

Biþania (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), pr. n., Bethany.

bi-þê and bi-þêh (153, n. 2; 154, n. 2; for -h, s. -uh), (1) adv., after that, then, afterward; Mt. V, 24. (2) conj. (218), while, when, as, as soon as; Mt. VI, 16. Mk. I, 42. II, 15. IV, 10. 17. 29. Lu. II, 15. 21. 22. 39. 42. Skeir. VII, d.

-biudan, stv. (170; 173), to offer.—Cpd. ana-b. [OE. bêodan, ME. bede, to offer, command, announce. NE. bid represents both OE. biddan and bêodan; s. bidjan.]

biugan, stv. (173, n. 1), to bow, bend.—Cpd. ga-b. [OE. bûgan (û for êo in the prs. forms), ME. buge, bouwe, NE. bow.]

bi-ûhti, n. (95), custom; Lu. II, 27. 42. [< biûhts.]

bi-ûhts (15), adj. (124), accustomd, wont.

bi-ûhts (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), accustomed, used to.

biuþs (74, n. 2), m. (91, n. 2), table. [Apparently < √ of biudan. OE. bêod, m., table.]

bi-windan, stv. (174, n. 1), to wind round, enwrap, swathe, w. acc.; Lu. II, 7. (biwundans, wrapt) 12.

blandan, rv. (179, n. 1), to blend, mix. [OE. blandan, blǫndan, to mix, confused with blendan, to make blind, to mix, ME. blende, NE. blend.]

bleiþei, f. (113), mercy; II. Cor. I, 3. [< bleiþs.]

bleiþs, adj. (130, n. 2), merciful, kind. [OE. blîðe, happy, glad, frendly, ME. bliþe, NE. blithe.]

-blêsan, rv. (179, n. 1), to blow, in uf-b. [OHG. blâsan, MHG. NHG. blasen, to blow.]

bliggwan (68), stv. (174, n. 1), to beat, cut, w. acc. and instr. dat.; Mk. V, 5. [OE. *blêowan (Kluge, W., bläuen) (> ME. blowe, NE. blow, a stroke, hit), OHG. bliuwan, MHG. bliuwe, NHG. bläuen (now connected with blau, blu), to beat.]

-blindjan, wv. (187), to make blind, in ga-b. [< blinds.]

-blindnan, wv. (194), to becum blind, in ga-blindnan. [< blinds.]

blinds, adj. (123), blind. [OE. blind, ME. blind, NE. blind.]

blôma, m. (108), flower; Mt. VI, 28. [< √ blô, to bloom, + suff. -man-. OE. blôma, m., ME. blome, NE. bloom.]

-blôstreis (69, n. 2), m. (92), wurshipper, only in guþ-b. [< *blôstra-, a sacrifice, < blôtan + suff. -stra-.]

blôtan, rv. (179, n. 1), to reverence, wurship, w. acc. of pers. and instr. dat.; Lu. II, 37. [OE. blôtan, to sacrifice.]

blôþ (gen. blôþis; 94), n., blud; Mk. V, 25. 29. [OE. blôd (w. -d), n., ME. blod, n., NE. blud.]

blood (gen. blood's; 94), n., blood; Mk. V, 25. 29. [OE. blôd (w. -d), n., ME. blod, n., NE. blood.]

blôþa-rinnands, adj. (prop. prsp.; 133), blud-running. [< stem of blôþ + prsp. of rinnan.]

blôþa-rinnands, adj. (prop. prsp.; 133), blood-running. [< stem of blôþ + prsp. of rinnan.]

bnauan (26), stv. (? 179, n. 2), to rub. [For bi-n. ON. *bnûa < b- + nûa =-nûa in gnûa (later nûa), to scrape.]

bôka, f. (97), letter; II. Cor. III, 6; in pl. letters; epistl; anafilhis bôkôs, letters of commendation; II. Cor. III, 1. afstassais bôkôs, writing of divorcement; Mt. V, 31. [Probably nom. pl. of bôk, n., which, at a later period, was mistaken for a nom. sg. f. OE. bôc, n., uzually[Pg 149] f. (pl. bêc, w. i-uml.), ME. bok, NE. book.]

bôkareis, m. (92), scribe; Mt. V, 20. Mk. I, 22. II, 6. 16. III, 21. 22. [OE. ME. bôcere, m., scribe, lit. 'booker'.]

bôtjan, wv. (187), w. acc., to boot, profit, advantage. ni waíhtai bôtida, nothing betterd; Mk. V, 26. [< bôta (= OE. bôt, f., ME. bôte, advantage, NE. boot, reparation). OE. bêtan, ME. bête, NE. beet, bete, to mend, make better.]

brâhta, prt. of briggan.

brâhta, past tense of briggan.

braidei, f. (113), bredth. [< braiþs. OE. bræ̂du (the u for orig. î = Goth. ei), ME. brêde, NE. bredth (the th being due to sbs. w. orig. th = Goth.) -þ- of the ful suff. -iþô-.]

*braiþs, braids (74, n. 2), adj. (124), broad. [OE. brâd, ME. brâd, brôd, NE. broad.]

brakja (33, n. 1), f. (97, n. 1), strugl. [Orig. 'breach' (Brgm., II, § 63), < brikan + suff. -jan-.]

-brannjan (80, n. 1), wv. (187), to burn (tr.), in in-br. [Caus. of brinnan (prt. brann). OE. brennan, bærnan, ME. brenne, NE. burn (tr.).]

briggan (67, n. 2), anv. (174, n. 2; 208), to bring, lead, w. acc. and in w. dat.; Mt. VI, 13; waírþana b., to make or count wurthy; II. Cor. III, 6. [OE. bringan (prt. brǫ̂hte < *branhte = Goth. brâhta < *branhta), ME. bringe, NE. bring.]

brikan (33, n. 1), stv. (175, n. 1), to break.—Cpd. ga-b. [OE. brecan, ME. breke, NE. break.]

brinnan, stv. (174, n. 1), to burn (intr.).—Cpd. uf-b. [OE. brinnan, beornan (< birnan for brinnan), ME. berne, birne, NE. burn.]

brinnô, f. (112), fever; Mk. I, 31; in brinnôn ligan, to lie sick of fever; Mk. I, 30. [< brinnan.]

brôþar, m. (114), brother; Mt. V, 22. 23. 24. Mk. I, 16. 19. III, 17. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. V, 37. II. Cor. I, 1. 8. [OE. brôðor, ME. broðer, NE. brother.]

brôþru-lubô (88^a, ns. 2. 3; 210, n. 1), f. (112), brotherly luv.

brûkjan (15), anv. (209), to uze, partake of, w. gen.; II. Cor. I, 17. III, 12. [< brûks.]

-bruknan, wv. (194), to break off (intr.), in us-b. [< pp. stem of brikan.]

brûks (15), adj. (130), useful, profitabl. [OE. brŷce, ME. briche, useful, < √ of Goth. *brûkan, OE. brûcan, ME. brôke, brouke, to uze, enjoy, NE. brook (v.).]

brunjô, f. (112), brestplate. [OE. byrne (-yr-for-ry-), f., ME. brynie, G. brünne, coat of mail.]

brunna, m. (108), wel, spring, issue; Mk. V, 29. [OE. burna (-ur-for -ru-), m., ME. burne, bourne, NE. bourn(e).]

-brunsts (49), f. (103), in ala-brunsts, holocaust, burnd offering. [< brinnan + suff. -sti-.]

brusts, f. (116), brest. [OHG. MHG. NHG. brust, f., brest. Cf. OE. brêost, n., ME. brest, NE. brest.]

brûþ-faþs (88^a, n. 1; gen. -fadis), m., (101), bridegroom; Mk. II, 19. 20.

brûþs (15), f. (116), bride, daughter-in-law. [OE. brŷd, ME. bryde, brid, NE. bride.]

bugjan, anv. (209), to buy, sel. [OE. bycᵹan, ME. bugge, bigge, biᵹe, beye, NE. buy.]

-bundnan, wv. (194), in and-b. [< pp. stem of bindan.]

-Daban, stv. (177, n. 1), in ga-d. [OE. *dafan > the verbal adj. dæft, mild, gentl, ME. deft, daft, NE. deft, fit, dexterous, neat.]

daddjan (73, n. 1), wv. (187), to giv suck, suckl. [See Brgm., IV, § 707.]

Dagalaiphus (21, n. 1; 52), pr. n.

[Pg 150]

dags, m. (90), day; Mk. I, 9. 13. II, 20. IV, 35. Lu. II, 1. 6. 21. 22. 36. 44. II. Cor. I, 14; daga jah daga, day by day, daily; II. Cor. IV, 16; afar dagans, after (sum) days; Mk. II, 1; himma daga, to-day; Mt. VI, 11. 30. Lu. II, 11; und hina dag, until (unto) this day; II. Cor. III, 14. 15; naht jah daga, night and day; Mk. IV, 27; nahtam jah dagam, th. s.; Mk. V, 5. Lu. II, 37. [OE. dæg, m., ME. dæi, dai, day, NE. day.]

Daíkapaúlis, pr. n., Decapolis; dat. -ein; Mk. V, 20.

Daíkapaúlis, proper noun, Decapolis; dative case -ein; Mk. V, 20.

dailjan, wv. (188), to deal. Cpd. ga-d. [< dails. OE. dæ̂lan, ME. dêle, NE. deal, v.]

dails, f. (103), deal, part, portion, share. [OE. dæ̂l, m., ME. deal, dêl, NE. deal, sb.]

dal, n. (? 94, n. 2), dale, valley. [OE. dæl, n., ME. dale, NE. dale.]

dalaþ, adv. (213, n. 2), downward, down. [< stem of dal + suff. -þ.]

dalaþa, adv. (213, n. 2), below. [< dalaþ + suff. -a.]

dalaþrô, adv. (213, n. 2), from beneath. [< stem of dal + suff. -þrô.]

daubiþa, f. (97), defness; d. haírtins, hardness of hart; Mk. III, 5. [< daufs, gen. daub-is, + suff. -iþô-.]

-daubnan, wv. (194, b), to becum def, in af-d. [< *daufs, gen. daubis.]

-daudjan, wv. (188), in us-d. [< -dauþs, zelous, in us-dauþs.]

-daudjan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in us-d. [< -dauþs, zealous, in us-dauþs.]

*daufs (56, n. 1), adj. (124, n. 2), def, hardend. [OE. dêaf, ME. dêf, NE. def.]

daug, prt.-prs. in 3d pers. sg. prs. ind. (198), it is fit, it is of use, it profits. [OE. dêah, inf. dugan, ME. duᵹe, dowe, NE. do (in the frase 'that wil do'), prov. E. dow.]

daúhtar, f. (114), daughter; Mk. V, 23. 34. 35. Lu. II, 36. [OE. dohtor, f., ME. douᵹter, NE. daughter.]

dauns, f. (103, n. 1), odor, savor; II. Cor. II, 14. 15. 16. [ON. daunn, m., odor.]

daupeins, f. (103, n. 1), baptism; Mk. I, 4. [< daupjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

daupjan, wv. (187), to baptize, (1) abs.; Mk. I, 4. (2) w. acc. and in w. dat.; Mk. I, 8. (pass.) Mk. I, 5. 9. [OE. dŷpan (ŷ for ie < êa + -j = Goth. au + -j), to immerge, baptize.]

daupjands, m., prop. prsp. of daupjan (115); sa d., the Baptist.

daúr, n. (94), door, gate; Mk. I, 33. II, 2. [OE. dor, n., OHG. MHG. tor, NHG. thor, n., door, gate; s. also auga-daúrô.]

-daúrsan, prt.-prs. (199), to dare, in ga-d. [OE. *durran, prs. ind. sg. dear (= Goth. -dars), ME. dar, der, NE. dare.]

dauþeins, f. (103, n. 1), the dying; II. Cor. IV, 10. [< dauþjan + (suff. -ei-ni), to kil, < dauþs.]

-dauþnan, wv. (194), to die, in ga-d. [< dauþs.]

-dauþnan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to die, in ga-d. [< dauþs.]

dauþs, gen. dauþis, adj. (124), ded; II. Cor. I, 9. [Prop. an old ptc. < √ dau (containd in ON. dó, prt. of deyja (Noreen, § 413), stv., to die, > ME. deye, NE. die) + suff. -þo-. OE. dêad, ME. dêd, ded, NE. ded.]

dauþus, m. (105), deth; II. Cor. I, 9. II, 16. in pl. deths, i. e. dangers of deth; II. Cor. I, 6. III, 7. IV, 11. 12. [< √ dau (s. dauþs) + suff. -þu-. OE. dêað (orig. u-stem), m., ME. deaþ, deð, NE. deth.]

Daweid, pr. n., David; Mk. II, 25. gen. -is: Lu. II, 4. 11. [< Δαυΐδ.]

-dêds; s. -dêþs.

-deeds; s. -deeds.

deigan, stv. (172, n. 1), to knead. [< √ dîg, in prt. daig = OE. dâg, seen in dâg (Goth. daigs), dâh, m., ME. dah, dogh, NE. dough.]

-dêþs, -dêds (74, n. 2), f. (103), deed, only in cpds.; cf. missa-dêþs. [< √ dê (: dô > OE. dôn, ME. dô,[Pg 151] NE. do) + suff. -þi-. OE. dæ̂d, f., ME. dede, NE. deed.]

diabaúlus, diabulus (13, n. 1), m. (105), devil. [< διάβολος, slanderer, devil.]

dis-, inseparabl particl prefixt to vs. (and verbal sbs.), (1) asunder, apart; (2) uzed intensivly (cf. dis-haban). [In meaning = Lt. dis- (> NE. dis- and OE. des-)> NE. de- (different from de-< Lt. de).]

dis-haban, wv. (192), w. acc., to constrain (s. dis-); II. Cor. V, 14.

dis-hniupan, wv. (173, n. 1), to break to pieces.

dis-kreitan, stv. (172, n. 1), to tear asunder, rend (tr.).

dis-skritnan, wv. (194), to rend (intr.).

dis-skritnan, v. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to tear (intr.).

dis-taíran, stv. (175, n. 1), w. acc., to tear asunder, burst; Mk. II, 22.

dis-wilwan, stv. (174, n. 1), to plunder (completely), spoil; Mk. III, 27.

diupei, f. (113), depth, deep. [< diups.]

diupei, f. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), depth, deep. [< diups.]

diups, adj. (124), deep; Mk. IV, 5. [OE. dêop, ME. dêp, NE. deep.]

dius, gen. diuzis, n. (94), beast; Mk. I, 13. [OE. dêor, n., ME. dêr, der, (wild) animal, NE. deer.]

diwan, stv. (176, n. 2), to die; þata diwanô, that which is mortal, mortality; II. Cor. V, 4. [Cp. dauþs.]

-dôjan (26), wv. (187), in af-d.

-dôjan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), in af-d.

dômjan, wv. (187), w. acc., to deem, judge; II. Cor. V, 14. [< dôms, m., judgment (= OE. dôm, m., ME. dôm, NE. doom). OE. dêman, ME. dême, deme, NE. deem.]

-draban, stv. (177, n. 1), in ga-d.

dragan, stv. (177, n. 1), to carry, load. [OE. dragan, ME. drawe, draᵹe, NE. draw.]

dragk (32; -ggk; 67, n. 1), n. (94), drink. [< drigkan, prt. dragk.]

dragkjan, wv. (188), to giv to drink. [Caus. of drigkan. OE. drencan, ME. drenche, NE. drench.]

draibjan, wv. (188), w. acc., to trubl; Mk. V, 35. [Caus. of dreiban. OE. -dræ̂fan, OHG. MHG. treiben, wv., to drive.]

draúhsna (drausna; 62, n. 4), f. (97), crum, fragment. Skeir. VII, d. [OE. drosn, ME. drosne, dregs.—?]

draúhtinassus, m. (105), warfare. [< draúhtinôn + suff. -assu-, to war, < stem of -draúhts (ga-draúhts, m., soldier), < √ of driugan + suff. -ti-.]

-drausjan, wv. (188), to cause to fall, in ga-dr. [Caus. of driusan.]

dreiban (-drêbi; 10, n. 5), stv. (172, n. 1), to drive, in us-dr. [OE. drîfan, ME. drive, NE. drive.]

drigkan (gg for g; 67, n. 1), (stv. 174, n. 1), to drink, (1) abs.; Mk. II, 16. (2) w. acc.; Mt. VI, 25. 31. [OE. drincan, ME. drinke, NE. drink.]

driugan, stv. (173, n. 1), to perform military service, to war. [OE. drêogan, ME. drege, dreᵹe, NE. dree, to endure, suffer.]

driusan, stv. (173, n. 1), to fall, fall down, w. ana w. acc.; Mk. III, 10; du w. dat.; Mk. III, 11. V, 33.—Cpd. ga-d. [OE. drêosan (> drêor n., gore, blud, > drêorig, gory, sad, ME. drery, NE. dreary), ME. drese, to fall, > the NE. frequ. drizl.]

driusô (31), f. (112), slope; Mk. V, 13. [< driusan.]

drôbnan (56, n. 4), wv. (194), to becum trubld. [< *drôfs = OE. drôf, trubld, > OE. drêfan, ME. dreve, to trubl, afflict, = Goth. drôbjan, to stir up, trubl, OHG. truoben, MHG. trüeben, NHG. trüben, to make turbid, to afflict.]

drugkanei (32), f. (113), drunkenness. [< pp. stem of drigkan.]

-drugkja (32), m., in weindrugkja. [< drugk- (s. drugkanei) + suff. -jan-.]

drus, m. (101, ns. 1. 2), fall; Lu. II,[Pg 152] 34. [< driusan, pp. drusans. OE. dryre, m., fall.]

drusun, prt. of driusan.

drusun, part of driusan.

du, prep. w. dat., (1) local (especially after vs. of 'saying, speaking', and the like, denoting the pers. or th. addrest), to, into, at, on, towards; Mt. V, 23. VI, 6. 26. Mk. I, 5. 32. 37. 38. 40. 44. 45. II, 5. 8. 10. 11. 13. 14. 16. 17. 18. 24. 25. III, 3. 5. 7. 11. 13. 23. 31. 32. IV, 1. 13. 21. 24. 33. 35. 38. 39. 40. 41. V, 9. 15. 19. 21. 22. 31. 33. 34. 36. 39. 41. Lu. II, 10. 15. 17. 18. 20. 34. 48. 49. 50. II. Cor. I, 18. III, 7. 16. (2) abstr., to, unto, toward, for; Mt. VI, 6. Mk. I, 4. 44. Lu. II, 32. 34. II. Cor. I, 18. 20. II, 4. III, 1. IV, 2. 6. 15. V, 5. Skeir. VII, a; in; II. Cor. I, 9. 10. III, 4. (3) w. inf., to; Mt. V, 28. VI, 1. Mk. II, 9. III, 14. 15. IV, 3. Lu. II, 6. 21. [In meaning (not in form) identical w. OE. tô, ME. to, NE. to, prep. (too, adv.).]

-dûbô (15), in hraiwa-dûbô. [OE. dûfe, f., ME. douve, NE. duv.]

du-ginnan, stv. (174, n. 1), to begin, w. inf.; Mk. I, 45. II, 23. IV, 1. V, 17. 20. II. Cor. III, 1.

du-ƕê, adv., wherefore; Mk. II, 8. 18. IV, 40.

du-ƕê, adv., why; Mk. II, 8. 18. IV, 40.

dulþs, f. (116 and n. 1), feast; Lu. II, 41. 42. [OHG. tuld, MHG. tuld, dult, f., NHG. (Bavarian) dult, a fair.]

-dumbnan, wv. (194), in af-d. [< dumbs.]

-dumbnan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in af-d. [< dumbs.]

dumbs, adj. (124), dum. [OE. dumb, ME. domb, dum, NE. dum.]

du-stôdjan, wv. (188), to begin; II. Cor. superscr.

du-þê (duþþê, for duhþê, i. e. du-h-þê, for du-uh þê; s. 62, n. 3), adv. and conj. (153, n. 2), therefore; Mt. VI, 25. Mk. I, 38. II. Cor. I, 20. II, 9. IV, 1; duþê ei w. indic., for, because; Lu. II, 4; w. opt., that, in order that; Mk. IV, 21. II. Cor. III, 13.

dwals, adj. (124), foolish; dwala, m. (107; cp. also 132, n. 2), fool. [OE. dwal, dwol, dol, ME. dwal, dul, adj., foolish, NE. dul.]

Ei, (1) conj. (218), (a) before subj. clauses, that; Mt. V, 29. 30. VI, 7. II. Cor. I, 18; (b) before obj. clauses, after vs. of 'perceiving, knowing, believing, hoping, saying, commanding', and the like, that; Mt. V, 17. Mk. I, 44. III, 9 (first). 12. V, 43. II. Cor. I, 10. 13. 23. II, 1 (appositional). V, 1; (d) before final clauses, after vs. of 'willing, praying', and the like, that, in order that; Mt. V, 45. VI, 2. 4. 5. 16. 18. Mk. I, 38. II, 10. III, 2. 6. 9 (second). 10. 14. IV, 12. 21. 22. V, 10. 12. 18. 23. Luc. II, 3. 20. 24. 27. 35. II. Cor. I, 4. 9. 11. 15. 17. II, 3. 4. 5. 9. 11. III, 13. IV, 4. 7. 10. 11. 15. V, 4. 10. 12. 15. 21; (e) causal, sinse, for; Mk. I, 27. (2) enclitic, forming, (a) rel. prns. (157, 158; S., 69): saei, ikei, etc.; (b) rel. advs.: þarei, þadei, etc.; (c) conjs.: akei, faúrþizei, etc.; (d) adv. particls: waitei, wainei, etc. [Cp. sai.]

Eila (65, n. 1), pr. n.

Eila (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

eils = hails (21, n. 1; 61, n. 1).

eisarn, n. (94), iron. See note to Mk. V, 4. [OE. îsern, îren, n., ME. iren, NE. iron. Of Keltic orig.]

eisarneins, adj. (124), of iron, iron; Mk. V, 3. 4. [< eisarn + suff. -eina-.]

ei-þan, conj. (218), therefore.

ei-þan, conj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), so.

Erelieva (54, n. 2), pr. n.

Erelieva (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 2), proper noun.

Ermanaricus (20, n. 3), pr. n.

Ermanaricus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 3), proper noun.

Ermenberga (20, n. 3), pr. n.

Ermenberga (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 3), proper noun.

Esaeias, pr. n. m., Esaias; dat. Esaïin; Mk. I, 2. [< Ἠσαΐας.]

Esaeias, proper noun, male, Esaias; dative Esaïin; Mk. I, 2. [< Ἠσαΐας.]

[Pg 153]

Fadar, m. (114), father. [OE. fæder, m., ME. fader, NE. father (th for d may be due to the influence of ON. faðir and to 'brother', which hav orig. th).]

fadrein, n. (94, n. 4), paternity, family. [Prop. adj. uzed as sb., < fadar + suff. -eina-.]

fadreins, f. (103), lineage, family; Lu. II, 4. [< fadar + suff. -eini-.]

faginôn (66, n. 1), wv. (190), to rejoice, w. fram w. dat.; II. Cor. II, 3. [< a lost adj. (cp. aiginôn). OE. fæᵹnian (< fæᵹen, adj., glad), ME. faine, to rejoice, NE. fain (obs.), to wish, desire.]

fagrs, adj. (124), suitabl, fair. [OE. fæᵹer, adj., fair, beutiful, ME. fæiᵹer, fayr, NE. fair.]

fâhan (5 b), rv. (179), to cach, seiz. [OE. fôn (< fôan < fôhan < fǫnhan < fanhan; prt. fêng), ME. fon, fong (by influence of the prt. forms w. ng), to cach, > OE. ME. fang, NE. fang (sb.).]

fahêþs (fahêds; acc. faheid; 7, n. 2), f. (103), joy, gladness; Mk. IV, 16. Lu. II, 10. II. Cor. II, 3. [< fah- (cp. fag-inôn) + suff. -êdi-.]

-fahjan, wv. (188), in fulla-f. [< fah-; s. fahêþs.]

-fahjan, verb (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in fulla-f. [< fah-; noun fahêþs.]

faian (22, n. 2), rv. (? 182, n. 1), to find fault with. [Cp. fijan.]

fáih (20, n. 2), n., fraud, deception.

fáih (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 2), n., fraud, scam.

-fáihôn, wv. (190), in ga-f. [< fáih. Cp. OE. fâh, adj., hostil, ge-fâh, m., foe, ME. fâ, fô, adj., hostil, (i-) fâ, (i-) fô, m. (sb.), NE. foe. See also ga-fáihôn.]

faíhu (53), n. (106), catl, property, muney. [OE. feoh, n., ME. fê, NE. fee.]

*faíhu-þraíhns, m. (91, or -þraíhn, n.; 94?), plenty of catl, riches. [-þraíhns < þreihan + suff. -na-.]

faír-, inseparabl particl, w. vs. and verbal derivativs which it intensifies. [OE. for-, intensiv prefix, ME. NE. for- (except in forfeit, where it is) < Lt. foris, out of doors.]

faír-, inseparable particle, used with verbs and verbal derivatives that it intensifies. [OE. for-, intensive prefix, ME. NE. for- (except in forfeit, where it is) < Lt. foris, out of doors.]

faír-áihan, prt.-prs. (203), to partake.

faír-áihan, prt.-prs. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to take part.

faír-greipan, stv. (172), w. acc., to take hold of, take; Mk. V, 41.

faírguni, n. (95), mountain; Mk. III, 13. V, 5. 11. [OE. firgen-, n., mountain, in f.-bêam, m., mountain-tree; f.-holt, n., mountain-wood, etc.]

-faírƕjan, wv. (188), in wai-f. [< faírƕus.]

-faírƕjan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in wai-f. [< faírƕus.]

faírƕus, m. (105), the world; II. Cor. I, 12. [OE. feorh, m. n., ME. vor, life.]

faírina, f. (97), charge, cause; Mt. V, 32. [< faír- + suff. -inô- (?). OE. firen (< *firenu), f., crime, sin.]

faírneis, adj. (128), old; Mk. II, 21, 22. [< *faírna- (< *faír-; cp. faírra) + suff. -na. OE. fyrn (cp. Siev., § 302), ME. furn, former, OHG. firni, MHG. virne, NHG. firn, old.]

faírra, adv. (213, n. 2; 217), far, far off; uzed as prep. w. dat.; Lu. II, 15. 37. [< faír- + suff. -ra. OE. feor(r), ME. feor, fer, adv. and adj., NE. far.]

faírraþrô, adv. (213, n. 2), far from, afar off; Mk. V, 6. [< faírra + -þrô.]

faír-weitjan, wv. (187), to look at, behold stedfastly, fix the eys upon, w. gen.; II. Cor. IV, 18; w. du w. dat.; II. Cor. III, 7; in w. acc.; II. Cor. III, 13.

falþan, rv. (179), to fold. [OE. fealdan, ME. falde, folde, NE. fold.]

-falþs, adj. (148), -fold, in ain-f., fidur-f. [< falþan. OE. -feald, ME. -fald, -fold, NE. -fold.]

fana, m. (108), a small piece of cloth, a pach; Mk. II, 21. [OE. fana, a piece of cloth, banner, ME. fane, vane, NE. vane, flag.]

Fanuêl, pr. n., Phanuel; gen. -is; Lu. II, 36. [< Φανουήλ.]

Fanuêl, proper noun, Phanuel; genitive -is; Lu. II, 36. [< Φανουήλ.]

[Pg 154]

faran, stv. (177, n. 1), to fare, go. [OE. faran, to go, travel, ME. fare, NE. fare.]

Fareisaius, m., Farisee; nom. pl. -eis; Mk. II, 16. 18. 24. III, 6; gen. pl. -ê; Mt. V, 20. [< Φαρισαῖος.]

fastan, wv. (193), to hold fast, observ, keep; to fast; Mt. VI, 16. 17. 18. Mk. II, 18. 19. 20.—Cpd. ga-f. [< *fasts (= OE. fæst, adj., firm, strong, ME. NE. fast). OE. fæstan, ME. faste, to fasten, fast, NE. fast (also fasten, ME. fæstne, OE. fæstnian < OE. fæst).]

fastubni, n. (95), (1) a keeping, observance. (2) fasting; Lu. II, 37. [< fastan + suff. -ubnja-. OE. fæsten, n., ME. fasten, festen, fasting.]

-faþs, m. (101), master; s. brûþ-, synagôga-, þûsundi-faþs.

-faþs, m. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), master; s. brûþ-, synagogue-, house-faþs.

faúr, prep. w. acc. (217), (1) of space, before, along, by; Mk. I, 16. II, 13. IV, 4. (2) in abstr. relations, for, for ... sake, concerning; II. Cor. I, 6. 11. V, 15. 20.—Occurs also in composition w. other words. [OE. for, prep., before, for, ME. NE. for.]

faúra, faúr-, (1) adv. of space and time, before. (2) prep. w. dat. (217), (a) of space, before; Mt. VI, 2. Mk. I, 2. V, 21. Lu. II, 22. II. Cor. V, 10; (b) in abstr. relations, for, because of; Mk. II, 4. f. andwaírþja w. gen., before; Mk. II, 12.—Occurs also in composition w. other words. [OE. ME. fore, prep., for, before; cp. faúr.]

faúra-gaggja (67, n. 1), m. (108), 'fore-goer', guvernor, steward. [< -gaggja < *gaggi < gaggan + suff. -ja.]

faúra-ga-satjan, wv. (187), w. acc., to set before, to present; II. Cor. IV, 14.

faúr-hâh (5 b), n. (94), curtain. [< -hâh < hâhan.]

faúr-hâh (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ b), n. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), curtain. [< -hâh < hâhan.]

faúrhtei, f. (113), fright, fear; Mk. V, 42. [< faúrhts. OE. fyrhtu (u for orig. î), f., ME. frigt, friᵹt, NE. fright.]

faúrhtjan, wv. (188), to fear, be afraid; Mk. V, 36. [< faúrhts. OE. fyrhtan, ME. friᵹte, a-friᵹt, pp., NE. fright (poet.), affright.]

faúrhts, adj. (124), fearful; Mk. IV, 40. [OE. forht, timid.]

faúr-lageins, f. (103, n. 1), a laying before; hlaibôs faúrlageinais, show-bred; Mk. II, 26. [< faúr-lagjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

faúr-mûljan (15), wv. (188), to bind up one's mouth, to muzl.

faúrþis, adv., first, beforehand, before; Mt. V, 24. Mk. III, 27. II. Cor. I, 15. [< faúr + adverbial compar. suff. -þis (< -þiza-). OE. furðor, ME. furðer, NE. further.]

faúrþiz-ei, conj. (218), before; Mt. VI, 8. Lu. II, 21. faúrþizê (6, n. 4); Lu. II, 26.

*faus, adj. (124, n. 3), few. [OE. fêa(w-), ME. fêwe (the-we is due to the inflected forms), NE. few.]

-feinan, wv. (193), in in-f., to be moved with compassion, to pity; Mk. I, 41.

fêra (8), f. (97), region, side, part. [OHG. feara, fiara, side, part.]

fidur- (15, n. 1; 24, n. 2; 141, n. 1), num. (only in cpds.), four. [< *fiþur. OE. fyðer-, ME. feðer-, four; cp. fidwôr.]

fidur-falþs, adj. (148), four-fold.

fidur-falþs, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), fourfold.

fidwôr, num. (141), four; Lu. II, 37; dat. -im; Mk. II, 3. [For *fidwôr(i)z. OE. fyðer-, ME. feðer-. Cp. OE. fêower (< *fewur, for *fehwur = O. Icel. fjogor, fjugur, n., < an erlier *kwekur-< *kwetur-; cp. Brugm., III, p. 11), ME. foure, NE. four. Cp. fidur.]

fidwôr-taíhun, num. (141). [OE. fêower-tene, ME. fourtene, NE. fourteen.]

fidwôr tigjus (cp. tigus), num. (142),[Pg 155] forty; Mk. I, 13. Skeir. VII, d (= ·m·). [OE. fêowertiᵹ, ME. fowwerrtiᵹ, vourti, NE. forty.]

figgra-gulþ (88^a), n. (94), 'finger-gold', finger-ring.

figgra-gulþ (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__^a), n. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), 'finger gold', finger ring.

figgrs, m. (91), finger. [OE. finger, m., ME. finger, NE. finger.]

fijan (fian; 10, n. 4), wv. (193), to hate, w. acc.; Mt. V, 43. VI, 24. [OE. fêon (< *fi(j)ǫn). Cp. fijands.]

fijands (fiands), m. (115), enemy; Mt. V, 43. 44. [Prop. prsp. of fijan, uzed as sb. OE. fêond (< fi(j)ǫnd), m., ME. fênd, NE. fiend.]

filhan, stv. (174, n. 1), to hide, conceal.—Cpd. ana-f. [OE. feolan (< *feolhan), to hide, be-feolan, to commit, ME. fele, to hide, be-fele, to commit, OHG. bifel(h)an, to commit, trust, recommend, also to hide, bury, MHG. bevel(he)n, to trust, commit, command, NHG. be-fehlen, to command, commend, commit.]

Filippus, pr. n., Philip; Skeir. VII, a; acc. -u; Mk. III, 18. [< Φίλιππος.]

-fill, n. (94), skin, hide, in þrûts-fill. [< Germanic fella- (i. e. fel-la-; -la- < orig. -no-; cp. Brgm., I, § 67). OE. fel(l), n., skin, hide, ME. NE. fel.]

filleins, adj. (124), made of skin, lethern; Mk. I, 6. [< fill + suff. -eina-.]

filu, adj. (131, n. 3), much, very; II. Cor. I, 5; w. a sb. in the gen.; Mk. III, 7. 8. IV, 1. V, 21. 24; as adv., much, greatly; Mk. I, 45. III, 12. V, 10. 23. 38. 43; w. a compar.: filu mais, much more; Skeir. VII, d; filaus (gen.) maizô, (sumthing) much greater; Skeir. VII, c; und filu mais, much more, stil more; II. Cor. III, 9. 11; ƕan filu, how much, how great; Mt. VI, 23. Mk. III, 8. V, 19. 20. w. advs.: swa filu, so much; Skeir. VII, c. swa filu swê, as much as; Skeir. VII, c. [OE. feolu, feola, ME. fela, fele, OHG. filu, MHG. vil(e), NHG. viel, much.]

filusna, f. (97), abundance; Skeir. VII, c (the first); multitude; Skeir. VII, b. c (the second). [< filu + suff. -s-nô-; cp. Brgm. II, p. 141.]

filu-waúrdei, f. (113), much talking; Mt. VI, 7. [< *filu-waúrds, adj.; -waúrds < waúrd.]

filu-waúrdjan, wv. (188), to uze many words, to speak much; Mt. VI, 7. [< *filuwaúrds; s. prec. word.]

fimf, num. (141), five; Skeir. VII, b; fimf-taíhun (141), fifteen. fimf tigjus (142), fifty. fimf þûsundjôs waírê, five thousand (of) men; Skeir. VII, b. [OE. fîf (< *fimf), ME. fif, vive, NE. five.—OE. fîftene, -tyne, ME. fiftene, NE. fifteen.—OE. fîftiᵹ, ME. fifti, NE. fifty.]

fimfta-taíhunda, ord. num. (146), the fifteenth. [OE. fîftêoða (< fîfta-têoða, -têogeða), the fifteenth.]

finþan, stv. (174, n. 1), to find, find out, know, w. acc.; Mk. V, 43. [OE. findan, ME. finde, NE. find.]

fiskja, m. (107), fisher; Mk. I, 16. [< fisks + suff. -jan-.]

fiskôn, wv. (190), to fish. [< fisks.]

fiskôn, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to fish. [< fisks.]

fisks, m. (91), fish; Skeir. VII, a. b. c. d. [OE. fisc, m., ME. fiss, fish, NE. fish.]

fitan, stv. (? 176, n. 1), to travail (in birth), to bear (children).

fitan, verb (? 176, n. 1), to struggle (in childbirth), to give birth (to children).

flôdus, f. (? 105, b), flud. [< √ flô (also seen in OE. flôwan, ME. flowe, NE. flow) + suff. -du-. OE. flôd, m., ME. flôd, flod, NE. flud.]

flôkan, rv. (179 and n. 4), to lament, bewail. [OS. -flôkan (stv.) in far-flôkan, to curse, OHG. (far-)fluohhôn (wv., but pp. farfluahhan), MHG. (ver-)fluochen, NHG. (ver-)fluchen (wv.), to curse.]

fôdeins, f. (103, n. 1), food; Mt. VI, 25. [< fôdjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

[Pg 156]

fôdjan, wv. (188), to feed, nurish, bring up, w. acc.; Mt. VI, 26. Skeir. VII, d. [OE. fêdan (< *fôdian), ME. fede, NE. feed.]

fôn (12, n. 3), n. (118), gen. funins, dat. funin, fire; Mt. V, 22. [< √ fû (Goth. ô for û) + suff. -na, -n-an-. In West-Germanic the suff. -r-is added. OE. fŷr (< fû-ir), ME. fir, NE. fire.]

fôtu-baúrd (88^a), n. (94), foot-board, foot-stool; Mt. V. 35. [< fôtus + baúrd = OE. bord, n., board, shield, table, ME. bord, NE. board.]

fôtus, m. (105), foot; Mt. V, 35. Mk. V, 4. 22. [Stem fôtu-, orig. fôt- (consonantal stem). OE. fôt, pl., fêt, m., ME. fôt, fot, pl. fêt, NE. foot.]

fra-, an inseparabl particl uzed w. vbs. and verbal nouns. It chiefly signifies 'separation, destruction, loss, change', and the like. [A variant of faír-.]

fra-, an inseparable particle used with verbs and verbal nouns. It mainly signifies 'separation, destruction, loss, change', and similar concepts. [A variant of faír-.]

fra-gaf, prt. of fra-giban.

fra-gaf, past tense of fra-giban.

fra-giban (56, n. 1), stv. (176), w. acc. of th. (dir. obj.) and dat. of pers. (indir. obj.), to forgiv; II. Cor. II, 7. 10; to giv, grant; Skeir. VII, b. [OE. for-giefan, ME. forgive, NE. forgiv.]

fra-gifts (56, n. 4), f. (103), a giving away; espousal; Lu. II, 5. [< fra-giban; s. -gifts.]

fraíhnan, stv. (176, n. 4), to ask, w. acc. of the pers. askt and gen. of the th. askt for; Mk. IV, 10; for the gen. a dir. question; Mk. V, 9; to ask questions; Lu. II, 46. [OE. frignan, ON. fregna > ME. freine, to ask; cp. OHG. frâgên, MHG. vrâgen, NHG. fragen, to ask.]

fraisan, rv. (179), to tempt; Mk. I, 13. [Cp. OE. frâsian, wv., to tempt.]

fraistubni, f. (98), temptation; Mt. VI, 13. [< fraisti- (< fraisan + suff. -ti-) = ON. freisti, f., temptation; + suff. -ubnjô-.]

fra-itan, stv. (176, n. 3), to eat up, devour, w. acc.; Mk. IV, 4. [OE. fretan (< *for-etan), to eat up, devour, ME. frete, to devour, consume, corrode, NE. fret, to eat away.]

fraiw, n. (94, n. 1), seed; Mk. IV, 3. 26. 27. 31. [ON. fræ̂ (dat. fræ̂wi), n., seed.]

fra-kunnan, prt.-prs. (199, n. 1), to despise, w. dat.; Mt. VI, 24.

fra-qiman, stv. (175, n. 1), to expend, spend, consume, w. dat.; Mk. V, 26.

fra-qistjan, wv. (188), to destroy; Mk. I, 24. II. Cor. IV, 9.

fra-qistnan, wv. (194), to perish; Mt. V, 29. 30. Mk. II, 22. IV, 38. II. Cor. II, 15. Skeir. VII, d.

fra-laílôt, prt. of fralêtan.

fra-laílôt, part of fralêtan.

fra-lêtan (-leitan; 7, n. 2), rv. (181), w. acc., to let free, dismiss, send away; Lu. II, 29; to let down; Mk. II, 4; w. dat. of pers. and an inf., to permit, suffer; Mk. I, 34. V, 37; fralêt (imper.), let be, let alone; Mk. I, 24.

fra-lêts, m. (91; or -lêt; n.; 94?), forgivness; Mk. III, 29. [< fra-lêtan.]

fra-liusan, stv. (173, n. 1), to lose. [OE. for-lêosan, ME. forlêse, NE. *forleese (s. -liusan), pp. forlorn.]

fra-lusnan, wv. (194), to perish; II. Cor. II, 15 (gloss). IV, 3.

fra-lusts, f. (103), loss, destruction. [< fraliusan + suff. -ti-.] [OHG. vir-lust, MHG. verlust, f., NHG. verlust, m., loss.]

fram, prep. w. dat. (217), (1) local, denoting, (a) 'separation', from, away from; II. Cor. V, 6; (b) 'motion, direction', from; Mk. I, 9. V, 35. (2) temporal, from, sinse; Lu. II, 36. II. Cor. V, 16. (3) in other relations, (a) after vs. of[Pg 157] 'hearing, knowing, receiving, lerning', of, from, about; Mk. III, 21; (b) of 'cause or motiv', from; II. Cor. II, 3; (c) denoting the 'source' whense anything cums, from; Lu. II, 1. II. Cor. I, 2. on the part of, of; Mt. VI, 1; (d) concerning, on behalf, for; Mk. I, 44. Lu. II, 24. II. Cor. V, 12; (e) w. a pass. v., of, by; Mt. VI, 2. Mk. I, 5. 9. 13. II, 3. Lu. II, 18. 21. 26. II. Cor. I, 4. II, 6 (where a pp. may be added). 11. III, 2. 3. V, 4; or an act. v. w. a pass. meaning; Mk. V, 26. II. Cor. I, 16.—Occurs also in composition w. other words. [OE. frǫm, fram, ME. from, vram, NE. from.]

fram-aldrs, adj. (124), advanced in age, very old; Lu. II, 36. [-aldrs < *aldr, n. (= OE. ealdor, n., OHG. altar, MHG. NHG. alter, n., age), age, < alan + suff. -dra-.]

framis, compar. adv. (212), further, onward; Mk. I, 19. [< fram + -is, the adv. ending of the compar.]

fram-wigis, adv. (214), continually, ever more, [-wigis is gen. sg. of wigs.]

fra-slindan, stv. (174, n. 1), to swallow up; II. Cor. V, 4.

fraþi (74, n. 3), n. (95), mind; II. Cor. III, 14. IV, 4. [< fraþ- (in fraþjan).]

fraþjan, stv. (177, n. 2), to understand, know; Mk. IV, 12; be in right mind; Mk. V, 15; w. dat., to understand; Lu. II, 50. [Cp. frôþs (w. ablaut).]

-fraþjan, wv. (185), in fulla-f. [< -fraþjis.]

-fraþjan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in fulla-f. [< -fraþjis.]

-fraþjis, adj. (126), thinking, minded. [< fraþ- (in fraþjan, stv.) + suff. -ja-.]

frauja (1, n. 4), m. (108), lord, master; Mt. V, 33. Mk. I, 3. II, 28. V, 19. Lu. II, 29. II. Cor. I, 2. 3. III, 17. IV, 5. [OE. frêa (for *frêa(j)a), m., lord (especially Christ, God), OHG. frô, MHG. vrô, lord, king, God, NHG. frohn- (< OHG. frôno, gen. pl.) in cpds.]

fraujinôn, wv. (190), to be lord, be king, rule over; Lu. II, 29; w. dat.; II. Cor. I, 24. [< frauja.]

fraujinônds, m. (115), ruler. [Prop. prsp. of fraujinôn.]

fra-waírþan, stv. (174, n. 1), to go to ruin, to corrupt (intr.).

fra-wardjan, wv. (188), to ruin, corrupt, w. acc. (exprest or understood); Mt. VI, 19. 20; to disfigure; Mt. VI, 16; in pass. to perish; II. Cor. IV, 16.

fra-waúrhts, adj. (124), evil-working, sinful; (in our 'Selections') uzed as m. sb., sinner; Mk. II, 15. 16. 17. [Prop. pp. of fra-waúrkjan.]

fra-waúrhts, f. (103), sin; Mk. I, 4. 5. II, 5. 7. 9. III, 28. 29. IV, 12. II. Cor. V, 21. [< fra-waúrkjan, to work il, do evil, sin, + suff. -ti-. OE. -wyrht (< *wurhti-), f., ME. -wurht, deed, work.]

fra-weitan, stv. (172. n. 1; 197, n. 1), to avenge, revenge.

fra-weitands, m. (115), revenger. [Prop. prsp. of fra-weitan.]

frêhun, prt. of fraíhnan.

frêhun, past tense of fraíhnan.

freidjan, wv. (188), to spare, w. gen.; II. Cor. I, 23. [OHG. frîten, to luv, foster, protect, > frît-in frîthof, MHG. vrîthof, churchyard, cognate with vride, enclosure, > NHG. friedhof, m., churchyard, graveyard. Cp. friaþwa, -friþôn.]

frei-hals (88^a), m. (91, n. 4), liberty, freedom; II. Cor. III, 17. [< freis + hals. OE. frêols (< *frêoheals < *frîoheals, for *frijo-hals), liberty, freedom, lit. the state of having a free neck.]

freis, adj. (126, n. 2), free. [OE. frêo (< frîo, *frijo), ME. frê, NE. free.—See also friaþwa.]

frêtun, prt. of fra-itan.

freight, part of freight.

frijaþwa, friaþwa (10, n. 4), f. (97),[Pg 158] luv; II. Cor. II, 4. 8. V, 14. [< frija-, stem of freis, free, orig. dear, (cp. Brugm., II, 61) + suff. -þwô.]

frijôn (10, n. 4), wv. (190), to luv, w. acc.; Mt. V, 43. 44. 46. VI, 24; w. inf.; Mt. VI, 5. [< stem of freis; s. also frijaþwa. Cp. OE. frêogan, to luv and to make free, ME. freoie, to 'free', MHG. (prop. LG., Kl. W.) vrîen, NHG. freien, to woo, marry.]

frijôndi, f. (98), a female frend. [< frijônds.]

frijônds, m. (115), frend; Mt. V, 47. [Prop. prsp. of frijôn. OE. frêond (< fri(j)ǫnd), ME. frend, NE. frend.]

-fri-sahtjan, wv. (188), to make an image, in ga-f. [< fri-sahts.]

-fri-sahtnan, wv. (194, n. 1), to be formd, in ga-f. [< frisahts.]

fri-sahts, f. (103), image, exampl, ridl; II. Cor. III, 18. IV, 4. [< fri- (allied to faír-?) + -sahts (= OE. saht, sæht, f., ME. sahte, sæhte, reconciliation, peace) < sakan + suff. -ti-.]

-friþôn, wv. (190), in ga-f. [< *friþus (= OE. frioðu-< friðu-, m., later frið, n., ME. frið, peace, luv, protection, = G. friede, m., peace), < √ fri (cp. friaþwa) + suff. -þ-. OE. friðian, to make peace, treat kindly, protect, ME. friðie, to keep in peace, preserv. Cp. freidjan.]

frius, n. (94; or m., 91?), frost, cold. [< *friusan = OE. frêosan, ME. frêse, NE. freez.]

frôdei (74, n. 3), f. (113), wisdom, understanding; Lu. II, 47. 52. [< frôþs.]

frôþs (35), adj. (124, n. 2), wise, prudent, skilful. [< fraþjan (prt. frôþ). OE. frôd, wise.]

frôþun, prt. of fraþjan, stv.

frôþun, part. of fraþjan, stv.

fruma, superl. adj. (139 and n. 1), the first (146). [< the adv. stem fru- (cp. OHG. fru-o, MHG. vruo, NHG. fruh, früh (by influence of the adj. früh), erly), + suff. -ma-n-. Cp. frum, n. (or frums, m.?), and OE. fruma, m., ME. frume, frome, beginning.]

fruma-baúr (88^a), m. (101, n. 2), a first-born; Lu. II, 7.

frumists, superl. adj. (139 and n. 1), foremost, first (146); frumist, adv. (212, n. 3), first. [< fruma + suff. -ista-.]

fugls, m. (91), fowl, bird; Mk. IV, 4. 32. [OE. fugol, m., ME. foᵹel, fowel, NE. fowl.]

fulgins (66, n. 1), adj. (124), hidn; Mk. IV, 22. [< the stem of the pp. of filhan.]

fulhsni, n. (95), that which is hidn, a secret; Mt. VI, 4. 6. 18. [< filhan + suff. -snja- < -sni- + -ja-. ON. fylsne, fylgsne, a hiding-place.]

fulla-fahjan, wv. (188), to please fully, to satisfy, w. acc.; Skeir. VII, d.

fulla-fraþjan, wv. (185), to be fully in right mind, be sober; II. Cor. V, 13.

fulla-tôjis (88^a), adj. (126), perfect; Mt. V, 48.

fulla-weisjan, wv. (188), to inform fully, to persuade, w. acc.; II. Cor. V, 11. [< fullaweis < stem of fulls + -weis (s. un-weis).]

fulleiþ(s), f. (? 103, n. 2), fulness; Mk. IV, 28.—Cpds. ga-, us-f. [< fulljan + suff. -þi (for -ei-, cp. vB., 79). OE. fylleð, f. (?), fulness.]

fulljan, wv. (188), to fil, fulfil.—Cpds. ga-, us-f. [< fulls.]

fulljan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to fill, fulfill.—Cpds. ga-, us-f. [< fulls.]

fullnan, fulnan (80), wv. (195), to becum ful, to fil (intr.), w. gen.; Lu. II, 40.—Cpds. ga-, us-f. [< fulls.]

fullô, f. (112), fulnes; Mk. II, 21. [< fulls.]

fulls, adj. (122, n. 1), ful. [< an old pp. in-no-, fulla- < ful-no-. OE. ME. full, NE. ful.]

fûls (15), adj. (124), foul. [OE. fûl, ME. foul, NE. foul.]

funins; s. fôn.

funins; s. phone.

[Pg 159]

Ga-, inseparabl particl prefixt to vs., sbs., adjs., and advs. For its various meanings, s. my 'Comparativ Glossary', p. 113, or 'First Germanic Bible', p. 343. [OE. ge-, ME. ᵹe-, i- (in handiwork), e- (in enuf).]

Ga- is an inseparable prefix attached to verbs, nouns, adjectives, and adverbs. For its various meanings, see my 'Comparative Glossary', p. 113, or 'First Germanic Bible', p. 343. [OE. ge-, ME. ᵹe-, i- (in handiwork), e- (in enough).]

ga-aggwjan, wv. (188), to constrain, distress; II. Cor. IV, 8.

ga-aiginôn, wv. (190), to take possession of, get an advantage of; II. Cor. II, 11.

ga-arman, wv. (192), to hav pity on, to pity, w. acc.; Mk. V, 19; in pass., to be pitied, receiv mercy; II. Cor. IV, 1.

ga-baíran, stv. (175), w. acc., to bring together, compare; Mk. IV, 30; to bear (a child); Lu. II, 7; in pass. the nom.; Lu. II, 11.

ga-baírhtjan, wv. (188), to make bright or clear, to manifest, show, w. acc.; II. Cor. II, 14; in pass. the nom.; Mk. IV, 22.

ga-bar, prt. of gabaíran.

ga-bar, part of gabaíran.

ga-bauan (26), wv. (179, n. 2; 193, n. 1), to dwel; Mk. IV, 32.

ga-baúr, m. (91, n. 4), a festiv meal. [Lit. that which is brought together, < ga-baíran, to bring together.]

ga-baúrþs, f. (103), birth. [< ga-baíran, to bear, + suff. -þi-. OE. ge-byrd, f., ON. burðr > ME. burth, birth, burþ, NE. birth.]

gabei (34), f. (113), riches; Mk. IV, 19. [< giban.]

ga-beistjan, wv. (187, n. 3), to levn.

gabigs, gabeigs (17, n. 3), adj. (124), rich. [< giban + suff. -i-ga-, -ei-ga-.]

ga-binda (32), f. (97), band, bond. [< ga-bindan.]

bond (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), f. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), band, bond. [< ga-bindan.]

ga-bindan, stv. (174), to bind, w. acc.; Mk. III, 27. V, 4 (gloss); and instr. dat.; Mk. V, 3; in pass. w. a subj. nom.; Mk. V, 4.

ga-biugan, stv. (173, n. 1), to bow, bend; Mk. V, 4 (s. note).

ga-blindjan, wv. (187), w. acc.; to make blind, to blind, w. acc.; II. Cor. IV, 4.

ga-blindnan, wv. (194), to becum blind; II. Cor. III, 14 (gloss in A).

ga-brak, prt. of gabrikan.

ga-brak, part of gabrikan.

Gabriêl (6), pr. n., Gabriel. [< Γαβριήλ.]

Gabriêl (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Gabriel. [< Γαβριήλ.]

ga-brikan (33, n. 1), stv. (175, n. 1), w. acc., to break; Mk. V, 4.

ga-bruka (33, n. 1), f. (97), a broken bit, fragment; Skeir. VII, d. [< ga-brikan.]

ga-bundi (32), f. (98), bond. [< ga-bindan.]

ga-bundi (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), f. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), bond. [< ga-bindan.]

ga-daban, stv. (177, n. 1), to becum, fit, befall, happen.

ga-daila, m. (108), partaker; II. Cor. I, 7. [< *ga-dails, adj., partaking; -dails < sb. dails.]

ga-dailjan, wv. (188), to divide, separate, w. acc. (in pass. the nom.); Mk. III, 26; w. wiþra w. acc.; Mk. III, 24. 25.

ga-daúrsan, prt.-prs. (199), to dare.

ga-daúrsan, prt.-prs. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to take a risk.

ga-dauþnan, wv. (194), to die; Mk. V, 39.

Gaddarênus, pr. n. [< Γαδαρηνός.]

Gadarene, pr. n. [< Γαδαρηνός.]

*ga-dôfs (56, n. 1), adj. (130, n. 2), becuming, fit. [< ga-daban (prt. gadôf). OE. ge-dêfe, adj.; suitabl, fit. See also -daban.]

ga-draban, stv. (177, n. 1), to hew out.

ga-draus, prt. of gadriusan.

ga-draus, part of gadriusan.

ga-drausjan, wv. (188), w. acc., to thrust down, cast down; pp. gadrausiþs; II. Cor. IV, 9.

ga-driusan, stv. (173, n. 1), to fall, w. ana (upon) w. dat.; Mk. IV, 5; du (at) w. dat.; Mk. V, 22; faúr wig, by the way side; Mk. IV, 4; in w. acc., into, among, on; Mk. IV, 7. 8; so in a pass. sense, to be cast; Mt. V, 29. 30.

gaf, prt. of giban.

gaf, part of giban.

[Pg 160]

ga-fâhs (5 b), m. (91), a cach, haul. [< ga-fâhan.]

ga-fáihôn, wv. (190), to defraud; II. Cor. II, 11. [< *gafáihs adj., deceitful, hostil, < ga + -fáihs (= OE. fâh, adj., hostil; ge-fâh, m.) < fáih; s. also -fáihôn.]

ga-fastan, wv. (193), to hold fast, keep; Lu. II, 19. 51.

ga-fáurs, adj. (130), sober, wel behaved.

ga-fáurs, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), sober, well-behaved.

ga-fraíhnan, stv. (176, n. 4), to find out by inquiry, w. an obj. clause; Mk. II, 1.

ga-frêhun, prt. of gafraíhnan.

ga-frêhun, part of gafraíhnan.

ga-frisahtjan, wv. (188), to make an image, engrave; II. Cor. III, 7.

ga-frisahtnan, wv. (194, n. 1), to be formd.

ga-friþôn, wv. (190), to make peace, reconcile, w. dat. of the pers. to whom one is reconciled, and acc. of the pers. reconciled; II. Cor. V, 18. 19.

ga-friþôns, f. (103, n. 1), reconciliation; II. Cor. V, 18. 19. [< ga-friþôn.]

ga-fulljan, wv. (188), to fil, w. acc., the th. w. which anything is fild, occurs in the gen., Skeir. VII, d.

ga-fullnan, wv. (194), to becum ful, to fil (intr.), fil up (intr.); hense to be fild; Mk. IV, 37.

ga-gaggan, anv. (179, n. 3; 207), to cum together, gather together; so w. the refl. sik; Mk. III, 20.

ga-ga-waírþnan, wv. (194, n. 1), w. dat., to reconcile one's self to, be reconciled to; II. Cor. V, 20. [< *ga-waírþs; s. gawaírþi.]

gaggan, anv. (179, n. 3; 207), to go, go one's way, walk, cum; Mk. II, 9. III, 6. V, 42; w. inf.; Mt. V, 24. Mk. I, 44; w. afar w. dat. (to go after, follow); Mk. II, 14. 15. V, 24; du w. dat.; Mk. I, 38. 45. II, 11. 13. V, 19; in w. dat.; II. Cor. IV, 2; or acc.; Mt. VI, 6. Mk. V, 34; miþ w. dat.; Mt. V, 41. VI, 6. Lu. II, 51; þaírh w. acc.; II. Cor. V, 7; a final clause; Lu. II, 3.—Cpds. af-, afar-, at-, du-at-, inn-at-, ga-, þaírh-, us-g. [OE. gǫngan, gangan, ME. gange, NE. (Sc.) gang.]

ga-grêfts, f. (103), decree; Lu. II, 1. [-grêfts < √ grêf (+ suff. -ti-) seen in OHG. grâvo, MHG. grâve, NHG. graf, m., erl, count.]

ga-gudei, f. (113, n. 2), piety, godliness. [< gaguþs, adj., godly, pious, < ga- + -guþs < guþ.]

ga-haban, wv. (192), to hav, possess, hold; to lay hold on; w. acc.; Mk. III, 21.

ga-hâhjô (5 b), adv., in order, connectedly. [< *gahâhs, adj., connected, lit. hanging together, < ga- + *-hâhs < hâhan.]

ga-hailjan, wv. (188), to heal, w. acc. of pers.; Mk. I, 34. III, 10.

ga-hailnan, wv. (194), to becum hole, be heald; Mk. V, 29.

ga-hait, n. (94), promise; II. Cor. I, 20. [< ga-haitan. OE. ge-hât, n., promise, ME. hat, hôt, promise, OHG. gaheiȥ, m., MHG. geheiȥ, m., geheiȥe, n., NHG. geheiss, n., command.]

ga-hardjan (14, n. 1), wv. (197), to harden.

ga-hausjan, wv. (187), to hear; Mk. II, 17. IV, 9. 15. Lu. II, 18; w. acc.; Mk. V, 36. Lu. II, 20 (s. note); bi w. acc.; Mk. V, 27.

ga-hôrinôn, wv. (190), to whore, commit adultery with, w. dat.; Mt. V, 28.

ga-hraineins, f. (103, n. 1), a clenzing; Mk. I, 44. [< ga-hrainjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

ga-hrainjan, wv. (188), to clenz; Mk. I, 40.

-gâhts (5 b), f. (103), a going, in cpds. [Stem -gâhti- (for-ganhti-) < gangan + suff. -ti-.]

[Pg 161]

ga-hugds (81, n. 1), f. (103), thought, mind; conscience. [< (*ga-)hugjan + suff. -di- (cp. Brgm., I, p. 405). OE. gehygd, f. n., thought, mind.]

ga-huljan, wv. (187), to cuver, hide, conceal, w. acc. (in pass. the nom.), II. Cor. IV, 3.

ga-ƕeilains, f. (103, n. 1), a staying for a while, rest; II. Cor. II, 13. [< ga-ƕeilan + suff. -ai-ni-.]

ga-ƕôtjan, wv. (188), to threten, rebuke, charge, w. dat.; Mk. I, 43.

ga-iddja, prt. of ga-gaggan.

ga-iddja, part of ga-gaggan.

Gaíaínna, m. (108), Gehenna; Mt. V, 22. 29. 30. [< γέεννα.]

gailjan, wv. (187), to make glad, w. acc.; II. Cor. II, 2. [< *gails, adj., = OE. gâl, ME. gal, gol, adj., proud, wanton, OHG. MHG. geil, wanton, merry, gay, NHG. geil, adj., lascivious, lewd, fat.]

Gaina (21, n. 1; 65, n. 1), pr. n.

Gaínnêsaraíþ (23), pr. n., Gennesaret. [< Γεννησαρέθ.]

Gaínnêsaraíþ (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Gennesaret.

gaírda, f. (97), girdl; Mk. I, 6. [< √ of -gaírdan. ON. gjǫrð, f., girdl, girth, > ME. gerth, NE. girth.]

-gaírdan, stv. (174, n. 1), to gird, in bi-g. [Cp. OE. gyrdan, wv., ME. girde, NE. gird.]

gaírnjan, wv. (188), to yern for, cuvet, desire, wish; II. Cor. V, 2. [< -gaírns (= OE. georn, adj.) (georne, adv.), ME. ᵹern, adj., zelous, eager (ᵹerne, adv.), OHG. MHG. gern, adj., desirous, eager, > OHG. gernô, MHG. gerne, NHG. gerne, gern, adv., (gladly, willingly, eagerly.) OE. geornian, ME. ᵹerne, NE. yern.]

gairu (cp. 20, n. 2), n. (106, n. 1), sting.

-gaisjan, wv. (188), in us-g. [ME. (< Scand.) gâse, NE. gaze. Cp. aghast for agast for agasted, pp. of ME. agasten [Sk.] < OE. â- (= Goth. us-) + gæ̂stan, to terrify, < a lost sb. gæ̂st < *gâs- (= Goth. gais-) + suff. -ti-.]

ga-juk, n. (94), that which is joind in a yoke, a pair; Lu. II, 24.

ga-jukô, f. (112), that which is put together for the sake of comparison, hense a comparison, parabl; Mk. III, 23. IV, 2. 10. 11. 13. 30. 33. 34. [< gajuk.]

ga-jukô, f. (110, n. 3), a female cumpanion. [< gajuk.]

ga-kannjan, wv. (188), to make known, w. acc. of pers. and dat. of th.; Lu. II, 15; to make known abroad, w. bi w. acc.; Lu. II, 17.

ga-krôtôn (12, n. 1), wv. (190), to crush, grind.

ga-kunnan, prt.-prs. (199, n. 1), to acknowledge one's inferiority or subjection, to subject one's self.

ga-kunnan, wv. (193; 199, 1), to recognize, know, consider, w. acc., Mt. VI, 28. II. Cor. I, 14.

ga-kusts, f. (103), proof, test. [< ga-kiusan, to prove, test, + suff. -ti-. -kusts = OE. cyst, f., ME. cust, choice, quality.]

ga-qêmun, prt. of gaqiman.

ga-qêmun, part of gaqiman.

ga-qiman, stv. (175, n. 1), to cum together; Mk. II, 2; w. sik and du w. dat.; Mk. V, 21.

ga-qiss, adj. (124, n. 1), consenting. [< ga-qiþan + suff. -ta- (qissa- < *qiþ-to-).]

ga-qiujan (42), wv. (187), to quicken, giv life; II. Cor. III, 6.

ga-qiunan (42, n. 3), wv. (194), to becum alive.

ga-qumþs, f. (103), a cuming together, assembly, council; Mt. V, 22; synagog; Mt. VI, 2. 5. [< gaqiman + suff. -þi-. -qumþs = OHG. MHG. kumft, kunft (w. eufonic f before which m changed to n), a cuming, arrival, NHG. -kunft (in cpds.).]

ga-lagjan, wv. (188), to lay, lay down, w. acc. and in w. dat.; Lu.[Pg 162] II, 7. 12; or acc., to cast into; Mt. V, 25. VI, 30.

ga-laista, m. (108), follower, cumpanion; g. waírþan w. dat., to follow; Mk. I, 36. [< *ga-laists, adj., following; -laists < the sb. laists; s. laistjan.]

ga-laiþ, prt. of ga-leiþan.

ga-laiþ, past tense of ga-leiþan.

ga-laubeins (31), f. (103, n. 1), belief, faith; Mk. II, 5. IV, 40. V, 34. II, Cor. I, 24. IV, 13. V, 7. [< galaubjan + suff. -eini-.]

ga-laubjan (31), wv. (188), to believ, (1) abs.; Mk. IV, 24. V, 36. II. Cor. IV, 13. (2) w. in w. dat.; Mk. I, 15.—leitil galaubjands, litl-believing, of litl faith; Mt. VI, 30.

*ga-laufs (56, n. 1), adj. (124), precious, valuabl. [Cp. liufs.]

ga-lausjan, wv. (188), to loose, loosen, w. acc. of th. and af w. dat.; Mk. V, 4; to deliver, w. acc. of pers. and us w. dat.; II. Cor. I, 10.

ga-leikan, wv. (193), to please; waíla g., w. dat., to please, be acceptabl to; II. Cor. V, 9; or in w. dat., to take great plezure in, be wel pleased in; Mk. I, 11.

ga-leikô, adv. (211), like, alike. [< ga-leiks (= OE. ge-lîc, ME. i-lik, lik, NE. like, similar) < ga + -leiks (= OE. -lîc, ME. -lich, -li, NE. -ly) < leik. OE. ge-lîce, ME. iliche, ylyke, NE. like.]

ga-leikôn, wv. (190), (1) tr., w. acc. of th. and ƕê (whereunto), to liken; Mk. IV, 30. (2) intr., w. dat., to be like unto, be conformd to; Mt. VI, 8.

Galeilaia, pr. n., f., Galilee; gen. -as; Mk. I, 9. 16. 28; dat. -a; Mk. I, 14. III, 7. Lu. II, 4; acc. -an; Mk. I, 39. Lu. II, 39. [< Γαλιλαία.]

Galeilaia, proper noun, feminine, Galilee; genitive -as; Mk. I, 9. 16. 28; dative -a; Mk. I, 14. III, 7. Lu. II, 4; accusative -an; Mk. I, 39. Lu. II, 39. [< Γαλιλαία.]

ga-leiþan, stv. (172, n. 1), to go, cum; Mk. V, 20; w. afar w. dat.; Mk. I, 20; ana w. acc.; Mk. I, 35; du w. dat.; Mk. III, 13; faírra w. dat.; Lu. II, 15; faúr w. acc.; Mk. II, 13; hindar w. acc.; Mk. V, 17; in w. acc.; Mk. I, 21. 45. II, 1. 26. III, 1. 27. IV, 1. V, 12. 13. 38. Lu. II, 15. II. Cor. I, 16. II, 13; miþ w. dat.; Mk. V, 24; inn; Mk. V, 40.

ga-lêsun, prt. of galisan.

ga-lêsun, part of galisan.

ga-lêwjan, wv. (188), w. acc., to betray; Mk. III, 19.

ga-ligri, n. (95), consummation of marriage, lit. a lying-together. [< *ga-ligrs, having the same bed with, < ga + the sb. ligrs. OE. geligere, adultery.]

ga-lisan, stv. (176, n. 1), to gather, gather up; Skeir. VII, d; w. sik and du w. dat., to gather, congregate unto; Mk. IV, 1.

ga-liþun, prt. of galeiþan.

ga-liþun, past tense of galeiþan.

ga-liug, n. (94), a lie; g. taujan, to falsify; II. Cor. IV, 2.

ga-lûkan (15), stv. (173, n. 2), to shut, close, w. (instr.) dat.; Mt. VI, 6.

ga-mainduþs, f. (103), communion, fellowship. [< ga-mains + suff. -du-þi-.]

ga-mains, adj. (130), common. [OE. ge-mæ̂ne, ME. (i-) mene, NE. mean.]

*ga-maiþs (74, n. 2), adj. (124), (bodily) weak, bruised.

ga-man, n. (94; 117, n. 1), fellow-man, cumpanion, partner, communion.

ga-manwjan, wv. (188), to prepare, make redy, w. acc.; Mk. I, 2. Skeir. VII, c; and du w. dat.; II. Cor. V, 5.

ga-marzjan, wv. (188), to offend; Mk. IV, 17.

ga-maudjan, wv. (188), to remind, w. acc. of pers. and an inf.; Skeir. VII, d.

ga-mêleins, f. (103, n. 1), a writing, the scripture; II. Cor. III, 7. [< ga-mêljan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

ga-mêljan, wv. (187), to write, (1), w. dat. of the pers. addrest; II. Cor. II, 4. (2) the th. writn is in[Pg 163]dicated by the acc., to enrol for taxation, to tax; Lu. II, 1. (3) w. dat. of pers. and acc. of th.; II. Cor. II, 3. (4) w. in w. dat.; II. Cor. III, 2; and swê; Mk. I, 2; or swaswê; Lu. II, 23. (5) w. a final clause w. duþþê...ei; II. Cor. II, 9; or ei; II. Cor. II, 3. (6) inn g., to inscribe; II. Cor. III, 3.—þata gamêlidô (pp. uzed as sb.), that which is writn; II. Cor. IV, 13.

ga-môstêdun, prt. of gamôtan.

ga-môstêdun, past tense of gamôtan.

ga-môtan, prt.-prs. (202), to hav or find room, hav place; Mk. II, 2.

ga-môtjan, wv. (188), to meet, w. dat.; Mk. V, 2.

ga-munan, prt.-prs. (200, n. 1), to mind, remember, w. þatei; Mt. V, 23.

ga-nasjan, wv. (185), to make hole, to heal, save; Mk. V, 34.

ga-naúha, m. (108), sufficiency, contentment; Skeir. VII, b. [< ga-naúhan.]

ga-naúhan, prt.-prs. (201), to suffice; ganah; it is enuf, it is sufficient, w. dat. of pers.; II. Cor. II, 6.

ga-niman, stv. (170; 175), w. acc., to take, take with one; Mk. V, 40; to receiv; II. Cor. V, 10; to conceiv; Lu. II, 21 (pass.).

ga-nisan, stv. (176, n. 1), to becum hole, be heald; Mk. V, 23. 28; to be saved; II. Cor. II, 15.

ga-nists (34), f. (103), a becuming hole, recuvery, salvation. [< ga-nisan + suff. -ti-.]

ga-niþjis, m. (92), kinsman; Lu. II, 44.

ga-nôhjan, wv. (188), to satisfy, w. acc. of pers. and (instr.) dat.; Skeir. VII, b. [< ga-nôhs.]

ga-nôhs, adj. (122, n. 1), enuf. [Cf. ga-naúhan. OE. ge-nôh, ME. inôh, inough, inow, NE. enuf.]

ga-raíhtei, f. (113), righteousness; Mt. V, 20. II. Cor. III, 9. V, 21. [< garaíhts.]

ga-raíhts, adj. (124), right, righteous, just; Mt. V, 45. Lu. II, 25. [OHG. gi-reht, right (not righteous), MHG. gereht, NHG. gerecht, adj., right, righteous.]

*ga-raiþs (-raids; 74, n. 2), adj. (124), commanded, appointed. [OE. (ge-)ræ̂de (w. umlaut), ME. rede, adj., redy, > (or < the Scand.) ME. (i-) rædi, rædiᵹ, redy, w. suff. -iᵹ, -i, OE. (ig), NE. redy.]

*ga-raþjan?, stv. (177, n. 2), to reckon, number.

garda-waldands (88^a, n. 2), m. (115), master of the house. [-waldands is prsp. of waldan.]

gards, m. (101), house, yard, household, family; Mk. I, 29. II, 1. 11. 15. 26. III, 20. 25. 27. V, 19. 38. Lu. II, 4. II. Cor. V, 1. [Properly an enclosure, with or without a building; < √ of -gaírdan. OE. geard, m., enclosure, yard, dwelling, ME. ᵹerd, ᵹard, yard, garden, NE. yard (for yard, a mezure s. gazds).]

ga-rinnan, stv. (174, n. 1), to run together, cum together, gather together, w. at w. dat.; Mk. I, 33.

*ga-riuþs (-riuds; 74, n. 2), adj. (124), honest, honorabl, wel behaved. [Prop. shamefully blushing; < √ of rauþs.]

ga-rûni, n. (95), counsel, consultation; Mk. III, 6. [< ga + rûna extended by suff. -ja-.]

ga-runs, f. (103, n. 3), a place where peple run together, street; Mt. VI, 2. [< ga-rinnan + suff. -si-.]

ga-saƕ, prt. of ga-saíƕan.

ga-saƕ, part of ga-saíƕan.

ga-saíƕan (34, n. 1), stv. (176, n. 1), to see, behold, w. acc. (sumtimes understood); Mk. I, 10. 16. 19. II, 5. 12. 14. 16. III, 11. V, 6. 15. 16. 38. Lu. II, 17. 20 (s. note). 48; in pass., to appear, w. pred. nom.; Mt. VI, 16. 18; —þô gasaíƕanôna, the things seen; II. Cor, IV, 18.

ga-sakan, stv. (177, n. 1), to reprove,[Pg 164] ebuke, w. dat.; Mk. IV, 39; in pass. w. nom.; Skeir. VII, a.

ga-sandjan (74, n. 3), wv. (187), to unite in sending; hense to accumpany, w. acc. of pers. and in w. acc. of place; II. Cor. I, 16.

ga-satjan, wv. (187), to set, place, w. acc.; namô g. w. dat. (indir. obj.), to giv a name or surname; Mk. III, 16 (s. note). 17.

ga-sêƕum, prt. of gasaíƕan.

ga-sêƕum, part of gasaíƕan.

ga-sibjôn, wv. (190), w. dat., to reconcile one's self to, be reconciled to; Mt. V, 24.

ga-siggqan, stv. (174, n. 1), to sink (said of the sun); Mk. I, 32; w. (instr.) dat., to sink under, be swallowd up; II. Cor. II, 7.

ga-sinþja (gasinþa), m. (108), (traveling) cumpanion, in pl. cumpany (for the Grk. συνοδία); Lu. II, 44. [< *ga-sinþs, adj.; -sinþs < the sb. sinþs. OHG. gi-sindo (for gasindjo), MHG. gesinde, m., traveling cumpanion, servant, while OHG. gi-sind, MHG. gesint(d), OE. ge-sîd (s. sinþs), m., cumpanion, attendant, are strong sbs.]

ga-sitan, stv. (176, n. 1), to set one's self down, sit down, sit, w. in w. dat.; Mk. IV, 1.

ga-skafts (51, n. 2), f. (103), creation, creature; II. Cor. V, 17.

ga-skaidnan, wv. (194), to becum parted, to depart.

ga-skapjan, stv. (177, n. 2), w. acc., to shape, make, create; in pass. w. nom.; Mk. II, 27.

ga-skeirjan, wv. (188), to make clear, explain, interpret; Mk. V, 41.

ga-slawan, wv. (193), to be silent; Mk. IV, 39.

ga-smeitan, stv. (172, n. 1), to besmear, annoint.

ga-sôk, prt. of gasakan.

ga-sôk, part of gasakan.

ga-staldan, rv. (179), to win, gain, possess.

ga-standan, stv. (177, n. 3), (1) lit., to stand, stand stil, stop; w. in w. dat., to tarry, stay behind; Lu. II, 43. (2) trop., (a) to take position, rize up, w. ana w. acc.; Mk. III, 26 (the first); to stand; Mk. III, 26 (the second); w. (loc.) dat.; II. Cor. I, 24; (b) to be restored; Mk. III, 5.

gasti-gôþs (88^a), adj. (124), good to a stranger, hospitabl.

ga-stôjan (26), wv. (186), to judge, determin, w. acc. and at w. dat.; II. Cor. II, 1.

ga-stôþ, prt. of gastandan.

ga-stôþ, past tense of gastandan.

gasts, m. (101), stranger. [OE. gæst, ME. gest, stranger, gest, enemy, NE. gest.]

ga-suljan, wv. (188), to found, ground.

ga-suljan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to establish, base.

ga-swalt, prt. of ga-swiltan.

ga-swalt, part of ga-swiltan.

ga-swikunþjan, wv. (188), to make known, manifest, w. acc.; Mk. III, 12.

ga-swiltan, stv. (174, n. 1), to die; Mk. V, 35. II. Cor. V, 15 (the second); w. faúr w. acc.; II. Cor. V, 15 (three times).

ga-taíhun, prt. of ga-teihan.

ga-taíhun, part of ga-teihan.

ga-taíran, stv. (175, n. 1), to tear, tear to pieces, break, destroy; Mt. V, 17. 19; in pass., to be dissolvd; II. Cor. V, 1; to be destroyd, be done away; II. Cor. III, 14.

ga-tamjan (33), wv. (187), w. acc., to tame; Mk. V, 4.

ga-taujan (26), wv. (187), to do, make, commit, (1) w. acc.; Mk. II, 25. II. Cor. V, 10 (s. note); astans g., to shoot forth branches; Mk. IV, 32; garûni g., to take counsel, w. bi w. acc.; Mk. III, 6; w. two accs., to make; Mt. V, 36; and faúr w. acc.; II. Cor. V, 21; to do. (2) w. dat. of pers. and ƕan filu; Mk. V, 19. 20. (3) w. acc. and inf., to make; Mk. I, 17. Skeir. VII, b. c.

ga-taúra, m. (108), tear, rent; Mk. II, 21. [< ga-taíran.]

ga-taúrnan, wv. (194), to rend (intr.),[Pg 165] becum void, be done away, be abolisht; þata gataúrnandô, that which is transitory or void; II. Cor. III, 7. 11. 13.

ga-taúrþs, f. (103), destruction. [< ga-taíran + suff. -þi-.]

ga-taúrþs, f. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), destruction. [< ga-taíran + suff. -þi-.]

ga-teihan, stv. (172, n. 1), to tel, report, announce; w. in w. dat. of place; Mk. V, 14; w. dat. of pers. and a clause introduced by ƕan filu; Mk. V, 19; or, in the pass., an inf. frase as subj.; Lu. II, 26.

ga-têmiba (33), adv. (103, n. 3; 210), fitly. [< *ga-têms (= OHG. gi-zâmi, MHG. gezæ̂me, adj., fit, suitabl) + -ba; < √ of ga-timan.]

ga-timan, stv. (175, n. 1), to suit.

ga-timrjô, f. (112), building; II. Cor. V, 1. [-timrjô < -timra (w. suff. -ra-) = OE. timber (w. inorganic b), n., ME. NE. timber, wood for building; +-suff. -jôn-.]

ga-trauan (26), wv. (179, n. 2; 193), to hav confidence, be confident, to trust; II. Cor. V, 6. 8; w. in w. dat.; II. Cor. II, 3.

ga-tulgjan, wv. (188), to confirm, establish; pp. gatulgiþs, firm, stedfast; II. Cor. I, 6.

gatwô, f. (112), street. [ON. gata (acc. gǫtu), f., street, > ME. gate, NE. (Sc.) gate, way, path.]

ga-þaírsan, stv. (174, n. 1), to wither; Mk. III, 1. 3.

ga-þaúrbs (56, n. 3), adj. (124), temperate. [< √ of (*ga-)þaúrban.]

ga-þaúrsnan (32), wv. (194), to dry up, wither away; Mk. IV, 6. V, 29.

ga-þiuþjan, wv. (187), w. acc., to bless; Skeir. VII, b.

ga-þláihan, rv. (179, n. 1), to cumfort, console; II. Cor. II, 7; to exhort; II. Cor. V, 20.

ga-þláihts, f. (103), a pleasing with kind words, cumfort; consolation; II. Cor. I, 3. 4. 6. 7. [< ga-þláihan + suff. -ti-.]

ga-þlaúhun, prt. pl. of ga-þliuhan.

ga-þlaúhun, past tense plural of ga-þliuhan.

ga-þliuhan, stv. (173, n. 1), to flee; Mk. V, 14.

ga-þrafsteins, f. (103, n. 1), cumfort, consolation; II. Cor. I, 5. [< gaþrafstjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

ga-þrafstjan, wv. (188), to cumfort, console, w. acc. of pers. and ana w. dat.; II. Cor. I, 4; or þaírh w. acc.; II. Cor. I, 4; in pass. the nom. (exprest or implied), w. (instr.) dat.; II. Cor. I, 4; or in w. gen.; II. Cor. I, 6.

ga-þrask (32), n. (94), threshing floor. [< √ of (*ga-)þriskan.]

ga-þulan, wv. (193), to suffer, endure, w. acc. and fram w. dat.; Mk. V, 26.

ga-þwastjan, wv. (188), to confirm, restore, establish, w. acc. and in w. acc.; II. Cor. I, 21.

gaumjan, wv. (188), to see, perceiv, observ, behold, (1) abs.; Mk. IV, 12. (2) w. a clause w. þatei; Skeir. VII, d.—in pass., to appear, be seen, w. dat.; Mt. VI, 5. [OHG. goumen and goumôn, MHG. goumen, to pay attention to, observ.]

gaunôn, wv. (189), to lament.

gaunôn, v. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to mourn.

gáurjan, to make sorry, to griev, w. acc.; II. Cor. II, 5 (the second); also abs., to cause grief; II. Cor. II, 5 (the first).—sa gáurida (pp.; 134), he who is made sorry, w. us w. dat.; II. Cor. II, 2. [< gáurs.]

gáurjan, to make someone sad, to grieve, w. acc.; II. Cor. II, 5 (the second); also abs., to cause sadness; II. Cor. II, 5 (the first).—sa gáurida (pp.; 134), the one who is made sad, w. us w. dat.; II. Cor. II, 2. [< gáurs.]

gáurs (24, n. 3), adj. (124), sorry, sorrowful, sad, grievd; w. in w. gen.; Mk. III, 5; of a sad countenance; Mt. VI, 16. [< √ gau, in gau-n-ôn, to mourn, lament. Cp. OHG. gôrag (w. suff. -a-ga-), adj., wreched.]

ga-waírþi, n. (95, n. 1), peace; Mk. V, 34. Lu. II, 29. II. Cor. I, 2. [< *ga-waírþs, adj., taking the same turn; hense agreeing, < (*ga)-waírþan (waírþan, orig., to turn) = OE. geweorðan, to please, agree, OHG. giwerdan, MHG. gewerden, NHG.[Pg 166] (dial.) gewäede, w. 'lassen', to let alone.]

ga-waknan (35), wv. (194), to awake, awaken.

ga-waknan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), v. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), to wake up.

ga-wandjan, wv. (188), to turn, cause to cum back, (1) intr., w. du w. dat.; II. Cor. III, 16. (2) tr., w. sik, to turn, turn back; Mk. V, 30; to be converted; Mk. IV, 12; to return; Lu. II, 20; w. in w. acc.; Lu. II, 39. 45; w. aftra; Lu. II, 43.

ga-wasjan, wv. (187), to clothe, w. sik, to clothe one's self; Mt. VI, 29; gawasiþs (pp.), clothed; Mk. V, 15. II. Cor. V, 3. gawasiþs wisan, to be clothed, w. (instr.) dat.; Mk. I, 6.

ga-waúrki, n. (95), work, business. [< ga- + waúrk extended by suff. -ja-.]

ga-waúrkjan, anv. (209), to work, make to do; w. acc. of pers. and du w. inf., to appoint, ordain; Mk. III, 14.

ga-waúrstwa, m. (108), fellow-worker; II. Cor. I, 24. [< ga- + waúrstw extended by suff. -an-.]

gawi, n. (95), region, district, province, cuntry. [OHG. gewi, gouwi, MHG. göu, gou, n., NHG. gau, m., district.]

ga-widan, stv. (176, n. 1), to join together.

ga-wigan, stv. (176, n. 2), to shake, shake together.

ga-wiljis, adj. (126), willing, unanimous. [-wiljis < wiljan.]

ga-wiljis, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), agreeable, unanimous. [-wiljis < wiljan.]

ga-wiss, f. (103), connection, joint. [< ga-widan, to join together, (s. -widan) + suff. -ti- (ss < dt).]

ga-wrisqan, stv. (174, n. 1), to produce fruit.

gazds, m. (91), sting. [OE. gierd (stem geardjâ-< gardjâ-, while gazds is an a-stem), gird, f., ME. yerde, twig, rod, NE. yard.]

-geisnan, wv. (194), in us-g., to becum amazed. [Cp. -gaisjan.]

Gelimêr, pr. n. (6, n. 2).

giba, f. (96), gift; Mt. V, 24. II. Cor. I, 11. [< giban. OE. giefu, gifu, f., ME. gife, gift; cp. -gifts.]

giban (56, n. 1), stv. (176), to giv, w. acc. of th.; Mk. IV, 7. 8. Lu. II, 24; two accs.; II. Cor. I, 22; w. dat. of pers. and acc. of th.; Mt. V, 31. VI, 11. II. Cor. V, 12. 18; or two accs.; II. Cor. V, 5; for the acc. an inf.; Mk. V, 43; w. dat. of pers.; Mt. V, 42. Mk. II, 26; so in pass.; Mk. IV, 25.—Cpds. at-, fra-, us-g. [OE. giefan, gifan, ME. gyve, NE. giv.]

gibands, m. (115), giver. [Prop. prsp. of giban.]

gif, imper. of giban.

gif, imperative of give.

-gifts (56, n. 4), f., a giving, in fra-g. [< giban and suff. -ti-. OE. gift, f. n., ME. NE. gift.]

-gildan, stv. (174, n. 1), to pay, in cpds. only. [OE. gyldan, geldan, to pay, requite, ME. ᵹelde, NE. yield.]

gilstr (75, n. 1), n. (94), tribute. [< -gildan + suff. -tra (st < dt.)]

gilstra-mêleins, f. (103, n. 1), enrolment for taxation; Lu. II, 2. [< stem of gilstr + -mêleins < mêljan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

gilþa, f. (97), sickl; Mk. IV, 29. [Cf. ON. gelda > ME. gelde, NE. geld.]

-ginnan, stv. (174, n. 1), in du-g., to begin. [OE. -ginnan, ME. ginne, NE. gin (obs.), cpd. begin (be-) = Goth. bi-.]

Gisaleicus (21, n. 1), pr. n.

Gisaleicus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

gistra-dagis, adv. (214), to-morrow; Mt. VI, 30. [Either an error, for afar-daga, or it means both yesterday and to-morrow; cp. ON. ígær, to-morrow, yesterday; OHG. êgestern, day after to-morrow, day before yesterday; gistra < gis- (cp. Lt. hes-ternus, yesterday) + -tra; dagis is gen. of dags.]

-gitan, stv. (176, n. 1), to get, in[Pg 167] bi-g. [OE. gietan, getan, ME. gete, NE. get (also in cpds.).]

giutan, stv. (173, n. 1), to pour, w. acc. and in w. acc.; Mk. II, 22. [OE. gêotan, ME. ᵹete, to pour, OHG. gioȥan, MHG. gieȥen, NHG. giessen, to pour, cast.]

glaggwô, adv., (211), diligently, perfectly, accurately, wel. [< *glaggwus + adv. suff. -ô.]

glaggwuba (4, b), adv. (131, n. 2; 210 and n. 1), diligently, accurately. [< glaggwus + -ba.]

*glaggwus (68), adj. (131, n. 2). [OE. glêaw, ME. gleu, adj., sagacious, skild.]

glitmunjan, wv. (187), to glitter, shine. [< *glitmuni, shine, splendor, < *glitmun- (+ suff. -ja), splendor, < *glit- (= glit-in E. glit-ter) + suff. -mun-.]

gôljan, wv. (188), to greet, salute, welcum, w. acc.; Mt. V, 47.

gôþs (gen. gôdis), adj. (124, n. 2; 138), good, meet, suitabl; Mt. V, 45. Mk. IV, 20. Lu. II, 14. [OE. gôd, ME. gôd, god, NE. good.]

graba (35), f. (97), dich, trench. [< √ of graban.]

graban (56, n. 1), stv. (177, n. 1), to dig.—Cpds. uf-, us-g. [OE. grafan, ME. grave, to dig, NE. grave, to entomb (obs.), to cut, engrave.]

gras (gen. grasis), n. (94), grass, blade of grass, herb; Mk. IV, 28. 32. [OE. græs, n., ME. gras, gress, NE. grass.]

grêdags, adj. (124), greedy, hungry; Mk. II, 25. [< grêdus (= OE. græ̂d, orig. u-stem, m., greed), m., greed, hunger, + suff. -a-ga-. OE. græ̂dig (w. suff. -ig-), ME. gredi, NE. greedy.]

greipan, stv. (172), to seiz, take.—Cpds. faír-, und-g. [OE. grîpan, ME. gripe, NE. gripe.]

grêtan, rv. (181), to weep, lament; Mk. V, 38. 39. [OE. græ̂tan, ME. grête, NE. greet, to weep, lament.]

grêts, m. (101, n. 1), weeping. [< grêtan.]

grinda-fraþjis, adj. (126), feebl-minded, pusillanimous.

grinda-fraþjis, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), weak-minded, cowardly.

*griþs (grids; 74, n. 2), f. (103), step, grade, degree.

grôba (35), f. (97), hole. [< √ of graban. OHG. gruoba, MHG. gruobe, NHG. grube, f., pit, hole, dich.]

guda-faúrhts (88^a, n. 1), adj. (124), God-fearing, devout; Lu. II, 25.

guda-laus (88^a, n. 1), adj. (124), godless, without God.

gud-hûs (88^a, n. 1), n. (94), house of God, templ.

Gudi-lub (56, n. 1; 88^a, n. 2), pr. n.

gudja, m. (108), priest; Mk. I, 44. II, 26. [< guþ + suff. -jan-.]

gulþ, n. (94), gold. [OE. gold, n., ME. gold, NE. gold.]

guma, m. (107), man. [OE. guma, ME. gome, NHG. -gam (in bräutigam, bridegroom) < MHG. gome, OHG. gomo, m., man.]

guma-kunds (88^a), adj. (124), of the male kind, male; Lu. II, 23.

Gumundus (65, n. 1), pr. n.

Gumundus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

-gutnan, wv. (194), to pour (intr.), in us-g. [< pp. stem of giutan.]

guþ (1, n. 4), m. (94, n. 3; 118, n. 1), God (in pl. guda, gods); Mt. V, 34. Mk. II, 7. IV, 11. 26. 30. Lu. II, 13. 20. 28. 40. 52. II. Cor. I, 1. 2. 3. 9. 12. 19. II, 15. 17. III, 4. IV, 2. 4. 6. 7. 15. V, 1. 5. 11. 18. 19. 20. 21. [OE. god, m., God; n., god, ME. god, NE. God, god.]

guþa-skaunei (88^a, n. 1), f. (113), the form of God. [-skaunei < skauns.]

guþ-blôstreis (88^a, n. 1; cp. 69, n. 2), m. (92), wurshipper of God.

[Pg 168]

Haban, wv. (192), (1) to hav, possess, (a) abs.; Mk. IV, 25; (b) w. acc.; Mt. V, 46. VI, 5. Mk. I, 22. 32 (s. unhulþô). 40. III, 1. 3. 11. 15. 22. 26. 29. 30. IV, 5 (the first). 6. 9. 23. 40. V, 15. II. Cor. I, 15. II, 13. III, 4. 12. IV, 1. 7. 13. Skeir. VII, a; and bi w. acc.; Mt. V, 23; fram w. dat.; Mt. VI, 1. II. Cor. II, 3; in w. dat.; Mk. IV, 17. V, 3. II. Cor. I, 9; miþ w. dat.; Mk. II, 19; us w. dat.; II. Cor. V, 1; wiþra w. acc.; II. Cor. V, 12. (2) to hold, take, take hold of, keep; habaiþ wisan, to be held, be redy for; Mk. III, 9. (3) to 'hav evil', be sick; Mk. I, 32 (the first). 34. II, 17; waírs h., rather to be wurse; Mk. V, 26; aftumist h., to lie at the point of deth; Mk. V, 23; ufarassau h., to hav in abundance; II. Cor. II, 4.—Cpds. dis-, ga-h. [OE. habban, ME. habbe, have, NE. hav.]

hafjan, stv. (177, n. 2), to heav, lift up, bear; Mk. II, 3.—Cpds. and-, us-h. [OE. hebban, ME. hebbe, heve, NE. heav.]

-hafnan (35), wv. (194), to heav (intr.), in ufar-h. [< pp. stem haf-ans < hafjan.]

hâhan (5, b), rv. (179), to hang. [OE. hôn (< *hôan < *hôhan < *hanhan; prt. hêng, pp. hangen; cf. hangian, wv.), ME. *hôn (prt. heng, pp. hange), and hange, NE. hang (by infl. of the forms w. ng and ang).]

Haíbráius (23; 61), pr. n., Hebrew. [< Ἑβραῖος.]

haíhait, prt. of haitan.

haíhait, part of haitan.

háihs (20, n. 2), adj. (124), with one ey.

hailags (21, n. 1), adj. (124), holy. [< hails + suff. -ga-. OE. hâliᵹ (w. suff. iᵹ for eᵹ), ME. hali, holi, NE. holy.]

hailidêdi-u, prt. of hailjan + -u.

hailidêdi-u, part of hailjan + -u.

hailjan, wv. (188), to heal, (1) abs.; Mk. III, 2. (2) w. acc. of disease; Mk. III, 15.—Cpd. ga-h. [< hails. OE. hæ̂lan, ME. hele, NE. heal.]

-hailnan, wv. (194), to heal (intr.), in ga-h. [< hails.]

-hailnan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to heal (intr.), in ga-h. [< hails.]

hails, adj. (124), hale, hole, sound, w. af w. dat.; Mk. V, 34. [OE. hâl, ME. hol, NE. hole.]

haims, f. (103, n. 4), village, town, cuntry; Mk. I, 38. V, 14. [OE. hâm, m., ME. hôm, home, dwelling, in acc. uzed as adv., NE. home, -ham, Ham-, in names of places.]

háiraísis (23), heresy, in nom. pl. -eis. [< αἵρεσις, pl. -εις.]

haírda, f. (97), herd, flock; Mk. V, 11. 13. Lu. II, 8. [OE. heord, f., ME. herde, NE. herd.]

haírdeis, m. (90), herd, shepherd; Lu. II, 8. 15. 18. 20. [< haírda. OE. hierde, hyrde, and heorde (without uml.), ME. herde, NE. herd, -herd (in shepherd = 'sheep-herd').]

haírtô, n. (109), hart; Mt. V, 28. VI, 21. Mk. II, 6. 8. III, 5. IV, 15. Lu. II, 35. II. Cor. I, 22. II, 4. III, 2. 3. 15. IV, 6. V, 12. [OE. heorte, f., ME. herte, hert, NE. hart.]

haírus, m. (105), sword; Lu. II, 35. [OE. heoru, m., ME. here, sword.]

haitan, rv. (170; 179), to name, call; to call, bid, invite; Mk. I, 20. III, 31; to command, w. inf.; Mk. V, 43; in pass., to be calld, w. pred. nom.; Mt. V, 19. Lu. II, 21. 23.—Cpds. ana-, and-, at-h. [OE. hâtan (in pass. hât-te = Goth. haitada), prt. heht (= Goth. haíhait), ME. hate, hote, prt. hêt, (for)heht, hight (< OE. *hiht; i for ie < eo by influence of the palatal, orig. guttural, h; eo < e before ht) > NE. hight (poet.); hense, prop., a prt. form.]

[Pg 169]

haiþi, f. (98), heath, field; Mt. VI, 28. 30. [OE. hæ̂ð, f., ME. hêth, NE. heath.]

haiþiwisks, adj. (124), wild; Mk. I, 6. [< haiþi + suff. -i-ska- (= E. -ish), the w between the two vowels being intrusiv.]

halba, f. (97), the half, a part; in þizai halbai, in this respect, in this behalf; II. Cor. III, 10. [Prop., f. of halbs uzed as sb. OE. healf (< *half), ME. half (behalfe, for be halfe, NE. behalf), NE. half, side.]

halbs, adj. (122, n. 1), half. [OE. healf, ME. half, NE. half.]

haldan, rv. (179), to hold, keep, feed; Mk. V, 11. 14. [OE. healdan, ME. halde, holde, NE. hold (notice its various meanings).]

haldis, adv. (212), rather, more. [Prop. compar. adv. Cp. OE. ge-healdre, ME. helder, G. halt (w. loss of suff.), rather, more.]

halja, f., (97, n. 1), hel. [Apparently < √ of *hilan (s. huljan) + suff. -jô-. OE. hell (< *halja), f., ME. helle, NE. hel.]

hals, m. (91, n. 4), neck. [OE. heals, hals, m., ME. hals, NE. halse (obs.), OHG. MHG. NHG. hals, m., neck.]

hamfs (53), adj. (124), maimd. [OHG. hampf, adj., maimd.]

-hamôn, wv. (190), to clothe, in af-, ana-, ufar-h. [< a sb. = OE. hǫma, hama, m., ME. hame, coat, cuvering (lic-hame, OE. lîc-hama, body), NHG. -am, for ham, in leichnam, m., corpse, MHG. lîchname, OHG. lîhhinamo (lîhhin is gen. of *lîhho, prop. weak adj. = Goth. -leika, in man-leika, m., OE. man-lica, m., ME. manliche, human form; Goth. -leika < -leiks; s. ga-leikan), m., corpse.]

hana, m. (108), cock. [OE. hǫna, hana, m., cock, ME. *hane, han- (in cpds.), OHG. hano, MHG. han, NHG. hahn, m., cock.]

handugei, f. (113), wisdom; Lu. II, 40. II. Cor. I, 12. [< handugs.]

handugs, adj. (124), wise. [< hand- (not allied to handus; s. Kluge, Stammbildungslehre, 203) + suff. -u-ga (the u by influence of handus). OE. hendig (w. suff. -ig), ME. hendi, NE. handy (a for e by influence of hand), adj. skilful.]

handus, f. (105), hand; Mt. V, 30. Mk. I, 31. 41. III, 1. 3. 5. V, 23. 41. [OE. hǫnd, hand, f., ME. hand, NE. hand.]

hansa, f. (97), multitude, cumpany, band of men. [OE. hôs (ô < ǫn < an), f., band of men, OHG. hansa, f., multitude, MHG. hanse, a commercial leag, NHG. hanse, f., Hanseatic leag.]

hardjan (14, n. 1), wv. (187), to harden, in ga-h. [< hardus.]

harduba, adv. (210 and n. 1), hard, severely, grievously. [< hardus + -ba.]

hardu-haírtei, f. (113), hard-hartedness. [< stem of hardus + haírtei < -haírts, adj.; s. armahaírtiþa.]

hardus, adj. (131), hard, severe. [OE. heard, ME. hard, NE. hard, -ard (as in drunkard).]

harjis, m. (90), army, multitude, legion; Lu. II, 13. [OE. here (< *heri < *hæri < *hari), m., army, multitude, ME. here, host, army, NE. her- (in heriot), har- (in harbor).]

hatis, n. (gen. hatizis; 94 and n. 5), hate, hatred, wrath, anger. [< hatan + suff. -iz-a. OE. hete (i-stem, orig. iz-stem; s. however Brugm., II, 421), m. (orig. n.), hate, persecution, ME. hete, hate, NE. hate.]

hatizôn (78), wv. (190), to be angry. [< hatis.]

hatjan (and hatan; 193, n. 1), wv. to hate, w. acc.; Mt. V, 44. [< hat-, consonantal stem of hatis. OE. hatian, ME. hate, NE. hate.]

[Pg 170]

haubiþ, n. (93), hed; Mt. V, 36. VI, 17. [OE. heafod, n., ME. heaved, heved, NE. hed.]

háuhei, f. (113, n. 1), height. [< háuhs. OHG. hôhi, MHG. hœhe, NHG. höhe, f., height.]

háuheins, f. (103, n. 1), lit. a heightening, a raizing on high; hense honor, glory, praise. [< háuhjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

háuhis, compar. adv. (212), higher. [< háuhs.]

háuhis, compar. adv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), taller. [< háuhs.]

háuhisti, n. (95), the highest height, the highest; Lu. II, 14. [< háuhista-, superl. stem of háuhs.]

háuhjan, wv. (188), to raiz on high, exalt, glorify, w. acc.; Mt. VI, 2. Mk. II, 12. [< háuhs. OE. hêan, hêgan, ME. heie, OHG. hôhjan, hôhen, MHG. hœhen, NHG. (er-)höhen, to make high, raiz.]

háuhs, adj. (124), high; superl. háuhista, the highest; Mk. V, 7. [OE. hêah, ME. heigh, NE. high.]

háuns, adj. (130, n. 2), humbl, base. [OE. hêan, ME. hêne, adj., base, vile, poor; cp. G. hohn, m., scorn, disgrace.]

haúrds, f. (103), door; Mt. VI, 6. II. Cor. II, 12. [OHG. hurt, pl. hurdi, f., hurdl, MHG. hurt, pl. hürte, hürde, f., hurdl, door, > NHG. hürde, f., hurdl, pen, fold; cp. also OE. hyrdel (w. l-suff.), m., ME. hurdel, NE. hurdl.]

haúrn, n. (94), horn. [OE. ME. NE. horn, n.]

haúrnja, m. (108), horn-blower, trumpeter. [< haúrn + suff. -jan-.]

haúrnjan, wv. (187), to blow a horn; Mt. VI, 2. [< haúrn.]

hausjan, wv. (187), to hear, listen, harken, (1) abs.; Mk. IV, 3. 9. 12. 23. (2) w. gen. of pers.; Lu. II, 47. (3) w. dat. of pers. (to listen to, hear); Lu. II, 46. (4) w. acc. of th.; Mk. IV, 16. 18. 20. 24. (5) w. fram w. dat.; Mk. III, 21. (6) w. þatei; Mt. V, 21. 27. 33. 38. 43.—Cpds. and-, ga-, uf-h. [OE. hîeran, hŷran, hêra(n) (ie, etc., < êa (= Goth. au) before orig. j), ME. here, NE. hear.]

hausjôn, wv. (187, n. 3; 190), to hear; Mk. IV, 33. [= hausjan having gone over to the second weak conjugation.]

hawi, n. (dat. hauja; 95), grass; Mt. VI, 30. Skeir. VII, b. [Prop., a thing to be cut (< √ hau, seen in OE. hêawan, rv., ME. hewe, NE. hew). OE. hêg, n., ME. hei, hai, NE. hay.]

hazeins, f. (103, n. 1), praise. [< hazjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

hazjan, wv. (187), to praise, w. acc.; Lu. II, 13; and in w. gen.; Lu. II, 20. [OE. herian, ME. herie, NE. herry (obs.), to praise.]

hêr (8), adv. (213, n. 1), here, hither. [OE. hêr, ME. hêr, NE. here.]

Hêrôdês (61), pr. n., Herod. [< Ἡρώδης.]

Hêrôdês (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Herod. [< Ἡρώδης.]

Hêrôdianus, pr. n. m., Herodian; dat. pl. -um; Mk. III, 6. [< Ἡρωδιανός.]

Hêrôdianus, proper noun, masculine, Herodian; dative plural -um; Mk. III, 6. [< Ἡρωδιανός.]

hêþjô, f. (112), chamber; Mt. VI, 6.

hidrê, adv. (213, n. 1), hither. [< pronominal stem hi-, in himma, + suff. -drê. Cp. OE. hider, ME. hider, ON. heðra (to which seems due the th of) NE. hither.]

Hildericus (61, n. 1), pr. n.

Hildericus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

Hildibald (54, n. 2; 61, n. 1).

hilpan, stv. (174, n. 1), to help; w. (instr.) dat. and bi w. acc.; II. Cor. I, 11. [OE. helpan, ME. helpe, NE. help.]

himina-kunds (88^a), adj. (124), hevenly; Lu. II, 13.

himins, m. (91), heven; Mt. V, 18. 19. 20. 34. 45. 48. VI, 1. 9. 10. 14. 20. 26. 32. Mk. I, 10. IV, 32. Lu. II, 15. II. Cor. V, 1. 2. [ON. himinn, m., heven. Cp. OHG. himil (w. suff. -l-), MHG. himel, NHG. himmel, m., heven.]

himma, hina, hita (155), forms of a[Pg 171] defectiv prn., this; himma daga, to-day; Mt. VI, 11. 30. Lu. II, 11; und hina dag, until this day; II. Cor. III, 14. 15. [< a pronominal stem hi-, this, as in OE. him, dat.; hine, acc. m.; hit, n., ME. hin and him (by confusion with the dat.), hit, it, NE. him, it.]

hindana, adv., uzed as a prep. w. gen., behind, on the further side of, beyond; Mk. III, 8. [< hin- (= OE. hin-, in cpds., = G. hin, away) + -dana; hin- < a pronominal stem hi-, as in himma. OE. hindan, adv. (be-hindan, adv., behind, and prep., behind, after), ME. hinde- (in cpds. behinde, adv. and prep.), NE. hind, hind- (in cpds.; behind, adv. and prep.).]

hindana, adv., used as a prep. w. gen., behind, on the other side of, beyond; Mk. III, 8. [< hin- (= OE. hin-, in compounds, = G. hin, away) + -dana; hin- < a pronominal stem hi-, as in himma. OE. hindan, adv. (be-hindan, adv., behind, and prep., behind, after), ME. hinde- (in compounds behinde, adv. and prep.), NE. hind, hind- (in compounds; behind, adv. and prep.).]

hindar, prep. (217), behind, on the further side of, on that side of, beyond, (1) w. dat.; so after qiman; Mk. V, 1. (2) w. acc.; Mk. V, 17. 21. [< hin- (s. hindana) + compar. suff. -dar. OE. hinder, adv. and prep., behind, ME. hinder- (in cpds.), hind, OHG. hintar, MHG. NHG. hinter, prep., behind.]

hindumists, superl. adj. (149, n. 1), hindmost, uttermost. [A dubl superl. form, < hinduma (+ suff. -ist-a-) < hin- (s. hindana) + suff. -dum-a(n)-. OE. hin-dema, superl. adj., hindmost, last. NE. hindmost < hind (s. hindana) +-most, for *-mest; s. aftumists.]

-hinþan, stv. (174, n. 1), to cach, in cpds. only. [Cf. OE. hendan (wv.), ME. hende, NE. hend (obs.), to seiz.]

hiri (20, n. 1), interjectional imper. (187, n. 4; 219), cum here! dual hirjats, cum here (you two); Mk. I, 17. [< *hirjan (cp. Brgm., 'Morph. Unters.', p. 414 et seq.) < *hir, adv., < hi- (+ suff. -r); s. himma.]

hiufan, stv. (173, n. 1), to mourn, lament. [OE. hêofan (str. and wv.), to lament.]

hiuhma (hiuma; 62, n. 4), m. (108), crowd, multitude. [< √ of háuhs + suff. -man-.]

hlahjan, stv. (177, n. 2), to laf.—Cpd. bi-h. [OE. hliehhan (ie < ea, by i-uml., < a before h, which was dubld before the orig. j), hlæhhan, ME. laghe, laughe, lauᵹwe, NE. laf.]

hlaifs (gen. hlaibis; 56, n. 1), m. (90), bred, loaf of bread; Mt. VI, 11. Mk. II, 26. III, 20. Skeir. VII, a. b. c. d. [OE. hlâf, m., ME. lôf, NE. loaf.]

hlaiw (42), n. (94), tomb, grave. [Stem hlaiwa-, orig. *hlaiwaz, -iz. OE. hlâw and (w. i-uml.) hlæ̂w, ME. lawe, lowe, mound, hil, cave, NE. low, hil. Its √ appears (w. abl.) in OE. hli-n-ian, intr., hleonian, to lean, hlæ̂nan, tr., to make to lean, ME. leonie; læne, lene, NE. lean, to incline.]

-hlaþan, stv. (177, n. 1), in af-h. [OE. hladan, ME. lade (stv.), NE. lade (wv., but str. is the pp. laden).]

-hlaupan, rv. (179, n. 1), in us-h. [OE. hlêapan, ME. lêpe, lepe (stv.), NE. leap (wv.).]

hleiduma, superl. adj. (139), left; uzed as sb., left hand; Mt. VI, 3. [Lit. hanging down most, < √ hlei (cp. hlaiw). For the suff., s. hindumists.]

hleis, m., (only in acc. pl., hlijans), tent, tabernacl. [< √ hlei; cp. hlaiw. Cp. OE. hlêo, hlêow, m., protection, roof, ME. lêwe, lew, shelter, NE. lee, lew (prov.), a shelterd place, a place defended from the wind, (a nautical term, probably due to) ON. hlé, lee (of a ship).]

hleis, m., (only in acc. pl., hlijans), tent, tabernacle. [< √ hlei; cp. hlaiw. Cp. OE. hlêo, hlêow, m., protection, roof, ME. lêwe, lew, shelter, NE. lee, lew (prov.), a sheltered place, a place defended from the wind, (a nautical term, probably due to) ON. hlé, lee (of a ship).]

hleiþra, f. (97), hut, tent; II. Cor. V, 1. 4. [< √ hlei (cp. hlaiw) + suff. -þrô-. ON. hleiþra, tent.]

hleiþra-stakeins (88^a), f. (103, n. 1), feast of tabernacls, lit. 'tent-stick[Pg 172]ing' [-stakeins < a lost v. *stakjan (= OHG. MHG. NHG. stecken, wv., to stick, put, set), to stick, put, put up.]

hlifan, stv. (176, n. 1), to steal; Mt. VI, 19.

hlijans; s. hleis.

hliuma, m. (108), hearing, ear. [< hliu- (+ suff. -man-) = OE. hlêo-, in hlêoðor, n., that which is herd, a sound, voice. Its √ is containd also in OE. hlûd (orig. pp., herd), ME. lud, loud, NE. loud; and in OHG. Hludwîg (-wîg < √ of Goth. weihan), NHG. Ludwig, Louis.]

hlûtrei, f. (113), purity, sincerity; II. Cor. I, 12. [< hlûtrs. OHG. hlût(t)rî, lût(t)ri, MHG. liuter, f., purity.]

hlûtriþa, f. (97), purity, sincerity; II. Cor. II, 17. [< hlûtrs + suff. -i-þô-.]

hlûtrs (15), adj. (124), pure. [< √ hlût + suff. -ra-. OE. hlût(t)or, ME. lutter, OHG. (h)lût(t)ar, MHG. lûter, NHG. lauter, adj., pure, clean, etc.]

hnaiwjan, wv. (187), to abase. [Caus. of hneiwan (prt. hnaiw). OE. hnæ̂gan (< hnâg, prt. of hnîgan), OHG. MHG. NHG. neigen, wv., to bend, press down.]

hnaiws, adj. (124), low, humbl. [< √ of hneiwan (prt. hnaiw).]

hnasqus, adj. (131, n. 1), soft, tender. [OE. hnæsce, hnesce, ME. NE. nesh (obs.), soft, tender.]

hneiwan, stv. (172, n. 1), to bend downwards, decline, bow.—Cpd. ana-h. [OE. hnîgan (For Goth. w and OE. g, s. Brgm., I, §§ 443 and 444). OHG. nîgan (for hnîgan), MHG. nîgen, stv., to bow, incline, NHG. neigen, wv. (due to neigen = Goth. hnaiwjan.)]

-hniupan, stv. (173, n. 1), in dis-hn., to tear or break to pieces, to break.

hnûþô (15; hnûtô in B), f. (112), thorn, sting. [ON. hnúða.]

hôrinôn, wv. (190), to whore, commit adultery; Mt. V, 27. 32.—Cpd. ga-h. [< hôrs.]

hôrs, m. (91), whoremonger, adulterer. [ON. hórr, m., adulterer, hóra, f., adulteress, > ME. hôre, NE. whore (w. inorganic w).]

hraineins, f. (103, n. 1), purification; Lu. II, 22. [< hrainjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

hrainja-haírts (88^a, n. 2), adj. (124), pure in hart, pure-harted. [-haírts < hairt- in haírtô; s. armahaírtiþa.]

hrainjan, wv. (187), to purify, clenz.—Cpd. ga-h. [< hrains. OHG. hreinnan (for hreinjan), reinen, MHG. reinen, to make clean. NHG. MHG. reinigen, to clean, < reinic(g), adj., < reine + suff. -ic, -g; s. hrains.]

hrains, adj. (130), pure, clean; h. waírþan, to becum clean, be clean; Mk. I, 41. to be clenzd; Mk. I, 42. [OHG. reini (r for hr), MHG. reine, NHG. rein, adj., clean.]

hraiwa-dûbô, f. (112), turtl-duv; Lu. II, 24. [Stem hraiwa- is in form = OE. hrâ(w), beside hræ̂(w), OHG. hrêo (ê before w = Goth. ai; o < w final), rê(o), MHG. rê, corpse.]

hrôpjan, wv. (188), to call, cry, cry out; Mk. III, 11. V, 5; w. (instr.) dat.; Mk. I, 26. V, 7.—Cpd. uf.-h. [< hrôps, m., outcry, clamor. (< √ of OE. hrôpan, rv., ME. rôpe, NE. (Sc.) roup, to cry, shout, OHG. ruofan, MHG. ruofen, NHG. rufen, to call, cry). OHG. ruofen, MHG. rüefen, wv., to call, cry out.]

hrôt, n., (94), roof; Mk. II, 4. [Cf. OE. hrôst (st < t-t), m., ME. rôst, NE. roost, a perch (for fowls).]

hrôþeigs, adj. (124), victorious, triumfant; II. Cor. II, 14. [< *hrôþi- (< √ hrô, seen in OHG. (h)ruom, MHG. ruom, NHG. ruhm,[Pg 173] m., fame, glory, + suff. -þi-) = OE. hrêð, f., fame, + suff. -ei-ga-. OE. hrêðig, adj., triumfant.]

hrûkjan (15), wv. (188), to crow. [Cf. OE. hrôk, m., ME. rôk, NE. rook, a kind of crow.]

huggrjan (66, n. 1; 67, n. 1), wv. (188), to hunger. [< stem hungru-; s. hûhrus. OE. hyngran, ME. hungre, NE. hunger.]

hugjan, wv. (188), to think, be minded, believ, w. acc.; Skeir. VII, a; w. acc. and inf.; Lu. II, 44; w. ei; Mt. V, 17; waíla h., to think wel towards, agree with, w. dat.; Mt. V, 25. [< hugs, m. (= OE. hyge, m., ME. hyᵹe, hiᵹe, mind, thought). OE. hycgean (< *huggjan), ME. huᵹie, to think.]

hûhrus (15; 66, n. 1), m. (105), hunger. [< stem *hunhru- (*hungru-; s. huggrjan). OE. hungor (transferd to the a-declension), m., ME. hunger, NE. hunger.]

hulistr, n. (94), a cuvering, veil; II. Cor. III, 13-16.—Cpds. and-, ga-h. [< huljan + suff. -s-tra-. ON. hulstr, m., case, cuvering, Du. holster, case for a pistol, > NE. holster.—OE. heolstor, cuvering, cave, is a primary formation < √ of helan; s. huljan.]

huljan, wv. (187), to cuver, veil. [< *hulja (= OHG. hulla, MHG. hülle, f., cuvering, raiment, NHG. hülle, f., cuvering, veil, < *hilan, OE. helan, ME. hele, OHG. helan, MHG. heln, stv., NHG. hehlen, wv., to conceal, but verhohlen, adj., orig. pp., conceald, unverhohlen, unconceald, frank). OHG. hullan, MHG. NHG. hüllen, to envelop, cuver, veil.]

-hun, enclitic particl (163), any. [Cp. -gin = OE. -gen in hwergen, hwærgen (ƕær, where), anywhere. OHG. *hwargin, wergin, io (= aiw) wergin > iergen, MHG. (MG.) iergen, NHG. irgend (w. inorganic d), anywhere. Cp. Kl. W., irgend.]

hund, n. (144), a hundred; occurs in the pl. only, hunda; cp. also hunda-faþs, chief of hundred men, centurion. [OE. ME. hund, NE. hund-, in hundred, < ME. OE. hundred (-red = Goth. *raþ in raþjô).]

hunsl, n. (94), sacrifice; Lu. II, 24. [OE. hûsl (< *hunsl), n., offering, eucharist, ME. hûsel, NE. housel.]

hunsla-staþs (88^a), m. (101), a place where sacrifices ar offerd, an altar; Mt. V, 23. 24. [< stem of hunsl + staþs.]

hups, m. (101), hip, loin; Mk. I, 6. [OE. hype, m. f., ME. hupe, hipe, NE. hip.]

-hûs (15), n. (94), house, in gud-hûs, house of God. [OE. hûs, n., ME. hus, hous, NE. house.]

huzd, n. (94), trezure; Mt. VI, 19. 20. 21. II. Cor. IV, 7. [OE. hord, n. m., ME. hord, NE. hoard, store, trezure.]

huzdjan, wv. (188), to lay up trezure, w. acc.; Mt. VI, 19. 20. [< huzd.]

Ƕa, n. of ƕas.

ƕaírban, stv. (174, n. 1), to walk. [OE. hweorfan (eo < e = Goth. aí), ME. hwerfe, to walk about, OHG. werban, MHG. werben, to walk about, pursue, NHG. werben, to sue for, woo, etc.]

ƕaírnei, f. (113), skul. [Cf. the meaning of OHG. hirni (< *hirzni), MHG. hirne, NHG. hirn, n., brain.]

ƕaiteis, m. (92), wheat. [OE. hwæ̂te, m., ME. whete, NE. wheat.]

ƕaiwa, adv. (and conj.; 218), how; Mt. VI, 28. Mk. II, 26. III, 23. IV, 13. 40. V, 16; ƕaiwa mais, how much more; Mt. VI, 30; rel.: ƕaiwa managai (-ôs, -a), how many, as many as; II. Cor. I, 20. [< stem of ƕas. OHG. (h)wêo (< hwêwu), later (h)weo, wio, MHG. NHG. wie, adv. and conj., how, as.]

[Pg 174]

ƕammêh, dat. sg. m. n. of ƕazuh.

ƕan, adv. (214, n. 1), (1) in negativ sentences: ibai, or nibai, ƕan, lest at any time; Mt. V, 25. Mk. IV, 12. (2) w. adjs. and advs., how, (a) in dir. questions or exclamations: ƕan filu, how great; Mt. VI, 23; (b) in indir. questions: ƕan filu, how much, what great things; Mk. III, 8. V, 19. 20. [< stem of ƕas. Cf. OE. hwanne, hwænne, ME. hwanne, whan, hwen, NE. when.]

ƕan-hun, adv. (163), ever, at any time.

-ƕapjan, wv. (188), in af-ƕ.

-ƕapjan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in af-ƕ.

-ƕapnan, wv. (194), in af-ƕ.

-ƕapnan, v. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in af-ƕ.

ƕar, adv. (213, n. 1), where. [< stem of ƕas + loc. suff. -r. OE. hwær-, hwer- (s. -hun), beside hwæ̂r, hwâr, ME. hwer, wher, NE. where.]

ƕarbôn, wv. (190), to go about, walk; Mk. II, 14; w. faúr w. acc.; Mk. I, 16. [OE. hwearfian, ME. wharfen, to turn, wander about. Cp. ƕaírban.]

ƕarjis, interr. prn. (160), who? which? (of several). [< ƕar + suff. -ja-.]

ƕarjiz-uh, indef. prn. (147, n. 1; 165), every one, every; Lu. II, 3. II. Cor. V, 10.

ƕas (ƕaz-), prn. (159), (I) interrogativ, who?, what?, which?, what sort of? ƕê (instr.), wherewith, in what degree, by what, whereunto, (1) in dir. questions; Mt. VI, 31. Mk. I, 24. 27. II, 7. III, 33. IV, 30. 41. V, 7. 9. 30. 31. II. Cor. II, 16. Skeir. VII, a; w. a prn. in the gen. pl.; Mt. VI, 27; —ƕê managizô, what greater (or more)? Mt. V, 47.—Sumtimes = Gr. τί, Lt. quare, quomodo, why?; Mt. VI, 28. Mk. II, 16. 24. V, 35. 39. Lu. II, 48. 49; (2) in indir. questions; Mt. VI, 3. 25. Mk. II, 25. IV, 24. V, 14. (II) indef. (116, n. 2), any one, any thing; Mt. V, 23. 39. 41. Mk. IV, 23. II. Cor. II, 5. 10. III, 5. V, 17; w. an adj. (uzed as sb.) in the gen. sing.; Mk. IV, 22. [OE. hwâ, m. f., whæt, n., ME. hwa, hwo, who, m. f., hwæt, hwat, what, n., NE. who, what.]

ƕas-hun, indef. prn. (163), any one.

ƕas-hun, indef. prn. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), anyone.

ƕassei (76, n. 1), f. (113), sharpness, severity. [< stem *ƕassa (in ƕassaba, adv., sharply) = stem of OE. hwæs, OHG. (h)was, MHG. was, adj., sharp. Stem ƕassa- < *ƕat-ta-< *ƕat (= OE. hwæt, ME. hwat, hwæt, sharp) + suff. -ta-.]

ƕaþ, adv. (213, n. 1), whither. [< stem of ƕas + suff. -þ.]

ƕaþar, interr. prn. (124, n. 1. 4; 160), whether, which of two?; Mk. II, 9. [< stem of ƕas + suff. -þar. OE. hwæðer, which of two, ME. hweðer, wheðer, NE. whether.]

ƕaþar-uh, indef. prn. (166), each of two, each.

ƕaþrô, adv. (213, n. 1), whense, from whense. [< stem of ƕas- + -þrô.]

ƕaz-uh, indef. prn. (147, n. 1; 164), f. ƕôh, n. ƕah, each, every, (1) as sb.; Mt. V, 22. Lu. II, 23. (2) as attrib.; Lu. II, 41; = ƕ. saei, whoever, whosoever; Mt. V, 28. 31. 32.—See also sa-ƕ. and þis-ƕ. For [ƕaz-: ƕas, s. 78, c.]

ƕê, instr. of ƕas.

ƕêh, instr. of ƕazuh (164, n. 2), uzed as adv., at least, only.

ƕeila, f. (97), while, hour, time, season; Mk. II, 19.

ƕeilaƕaírbs, adj. (124), enduring but for a while, transitory. [-ƕaírbs < √ of ƕaírban.]

ƕeilô-hun, adv. (97, n. 2; 163, n. 1), for a while. [ƕeilô- is the stem of [hv]eila.]

ƕeits, adj. (124), white; Mt. V, 36. [OE. hwît, ME. whyte, hwit, NE. white.]

ƕêlauþs, interr. prn. (161), how[Pg 175] great, what? [< ƕê + -lauþs, adj., grown up, < √ of liudan.]

ƕileiks, interr. adj. and prn. (161), what, what sort of?, in dir. questions; Mk. IV, 30. [< ƕi- (161, n. 1) + -leiks. OE. hwilc (< *hwi-lîc), ME. hwilc, hwilch, which, NE. which.]

ƕô, f. of ƕas.

ƕôftuli (51, n. 2), f. (98), rejoicing, boasting, glory; II. Cor. I, 12. 14. V, 12. [< ƕôpan + the composit suff. -tul-jô-.]

ƕôpan, rv. (179), to boast, glory; II. Cor. V, 12.

ƕôtjan, wv. (188), to threten, rebuke, charge.—Cpd. ga-ƕ. [< ƕôta, f., thret, thretening. Cp. -ƕatjan, to sharpen, incite, < *ƕat; s. ƕassei.]

Iaírusalêm, pr. n. f., Jerusalem; dat. -êm; Lu. II, 22. 25. 43; acc. -êm; Lu. II, 41. 45. [< Ἱερουσαλήμ.]

Iaírusalêm, proper noun, feminine, Jerusalem; dative -êm; Luke II, 22, 25, 43; accusative -êm; Luke II, 41, 45. [< Ἱερουσαλήμ.]

Iaírusaúlyma, pr. n. f., Jerusalem; gen. -ôs; Lu. II, 38; dat. -ai; Mt. V, 35. Mk. III, 22; acc. -a; Lu. II, 42. [< Ἱεροσόλυμα.]

Iaírusaúlyma, proper noun, Jerusalem; genitive -ôs; Luke II, 38; dative -ai; Matthew V, 35. Mark III, 22; accusative -a; Luke II, 42. [< Ἱεροσόλυμα.]

Iaírusaúlymeis, pr. n. in pl., Jerusalem; also the peple of Jerusalem; Mk. I, 5. [< Ἱεροσολυμίτης, inhabitant of Jerusalem (cp. Iaírusaúlymeitês in Jo. VII, 25).]

Iaírusaúlymeis, proper noun, plural, Jerusalem; also the people of Jerusalem; Mk. I, 5. [< Ἱεροσολυμίτης, inhabitant of Jerusalem (see Iaírusaúlymeitês in Jo. VII, 25).]

Iakôb (54), pr. n., Jacob. [< Ἰακώβ.]

Iakôb (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Jacob. [< Ἰακώβ.]

Iakôbus, pr. n., James; gen. -aus; Mk. III, 17; or -is; Mk. V, 37; dat. -au; Mk. I, 29. III, 17; acc. -u; Mk. I, 19. III, 18. V, 37. [< Ἰάκωβος.]

Iakôbus, proper noun, James; genitive -aus; Mk. III, 17; or -is; Mk. V, 37; dative -au; Mk. I, 29. III, 17; accusative -u; Mk. I, 19. III, 18. V, 37. [< Ἰάκωβος.]

Iarêd (6), pr. n., Jared. [< Ἰαρέδ.]

Iarêd (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Jared. [< Ἰαρέδ.]

Iaúrdanês, pr. n., the river Jordan; dat. -ê; Mk. I, 5. 9; also nom. -us; gen. -aus; Mk. III, 8. [< Ἰορδάνης, Ἰόρδανος.]

Iaúrdanês, proper noun, the river Jordan; dative -ê; Mk. I, 5. 9; also nominative -us; genitive -aus; Mk. III, 8. [< Ἰορδάνης, Ἰόρδανος.]

ibai (iba), (1) interr. particl (216), in dir. questions, a negativ answer being expected, perhaps, but uzually remains untranslated in English; Mk. II, 19. IV, 21. II. Cor. III, 1; so w. auftô; II. Cor. I, 17. (2) conj. (218), lest, lest by any means; Mk. II, 21; ibai auftô, lest perhaps; Mk. II, 22. II. Cor. II, 7; iba ƕan, lest at any time; Mt. V, 25. [OE. *if (in gif; s. jabai), OHG. ibu, conj. (prop. instr. of iba, f., dout; cp. Kl. W., ob), beside oba, MHG. obe, ob, NHG. ob, if, whether.]

ibnassus, m. (105), evenness, equality. [< ibns + suff. -assus.]

ibns, adj. (124), even, flat. [< ib- (apparently = ib in ib-dalja, descent, ibuks, backwards) + suff. na-. OE. efn, ME. even, NE. even.]

iddja (73, n.), weak prt. (207), I went; Mk. I, 45. II, 13. 15. V, 24. 42. Lu. II, 3. 51.—Cpds. af-, at-, ga-, us-i. For citations, s. the respectiv cpds. of gaggan. [OE. êode, ME. eode, ᵹede, ᵹeode, NE. yede, yode, (obs.).]

idreiga, f. (97), repentence; Mk. I, 4.

idreigôn, wv. (190), to repent, do penance; Mk. I, 15. [< idreiga.]

Idumaia, pr. n. f. in dat., Idumea; Mk. III, 8.

Idumaia, proper noun, feminine in the dative case, Idumea; Mk. III, 8.

Iêsus (1, n. 4), pr. n., Jesus (Christ); Mk. I, 9. 14. 17. 25. 41. 42. II, 5. 8. 17. 19. III, 7. IV, 1. V, 13. 20. 30. 36. Lu. II, 21. 43; gen. Iêsuis; Mk. I, 1. V, 22. II. Cor. I, 1. IV, 5; dat. Iêsua; Mk. II, 15. V, 15. 21; or Iêsu; II. Cor. I, 2; acc. Iêsu; Mk. V, 6. 27. Lu. II, 27. II. Cor. IV, 14; voc. Iêsu; Mk. I, 24. V, 7. [< Ἰησοῦς.]

iftuma, superl. adj. (139), the next. [< if + superl. suff. -tu-ma-n-.]

igqara (iggqara; 67, n. 1), pers. prn. 2nd pers. du. gen.; dat. acc. ig(g)qis; s. þu. [OE. gen. incer, dat. inc, acc. inc(it); ME. gen. incer, dat. acc. inc(k).]

igqara (iggqara; 67, n. 1), personal pronoun. 2nd person dual genitive; dative accusative. ig(g)qis; see þu. [OE. genitive incer, dative inc, accusative inc(it); ME. genitive incer, dative accusative inc(k).]

igqis, acc. du. of þu.

you, acc. du. of you.

ija, acc. sg. of si.

ija, gen. of si.

ik, pers. prn. 1st pers. nom. sing. (150), I, (1) emfatic, w. vs.; Mt.[Pg 176] V, 22. 28. 32. 34. 39. 44. Mk. I, 2. 7. 8. II. Cor. I, 23. II, 2; jah ik, and I, I also; Lu. II, 48. II. Cor. II, 10; gen. meina; dat. mis; Mk. I, 7. 17. II, 14. V, 7. 30. 31. II. Cor. I, 17. II, 1. 2. 12; acc. mik; Mk. I, 40. Lu. II, 49. II. Cor. I, 16. 19. II, 2. 5; dual nom. wit, we two; dat. ug(g)kis; acc. ug(g)kis, ugk; pl. nom. weis, we, (1) w. vs. (emfatic); Mt. VI, 12. II. Cor. I, 4. 6. IV, 11. 13. V, 16. 21; (2) jah weis, and we, we also; II. Cor. I, 6; weis allai; II. Cor. III, 18; or allai weis; II. Cor. V, 10; gen. unsara; dat. uns; Mt. VI, 11. 12. Mk. I, 24. Lu. II, 48. II. Cor. I, 8. 9. 11. 19. III, 2. 3. 5. IV, 12, V, 5. 12 (in B). 18. 19; or unsis; Lu. II, 15. II. Cor. IV, 7. 17. V, 5 and 12 (in A); acc. uns; Mt. VI, 13. Mk. I, 24. V, 12. II. Cor. I, 4. 5. 8. 10. 11. 14. 19. 20. 21. 22. II, 14. III, 1. 6. IV, 2. 5. V, 5. 11. 12. 14. 18. 20. 21; or unsis; Mk. V, 12. II. Cor. I, 21. IV, 14. V, 14. 18 (in A B). [OE. ic, ME. ic, ich, i, y, NE. I. See also meina, weis, unsara.]

im, anv. (204), 1st pers. sing. pres. indic.; s. wisan. [OE. eom, eam, am, ME. eom, æm, am, NE. am. The remaining forms of the prs. indic. and opt. (Goth. is, is-t; sijau, etc., OE. ear-t, is; sîe, etc.) ar from the same √.]

im, prn.; s. is.

im, as needed; n. is.

imma, prn.; s. is.

imma, prn.; s. is.

in, prep. (217), (1) w. gen., on account of, for ... sake, about, thru, by; Mk. II, 27. III, 5. 9. IV, 17. Lu. II, 20. II. Cor. I, 6. II, 10. 12. III, 7. IV, 5. 11. 15; in þis, in-uh þis, on this account, for this cause; II. Cor. II, 8. IV, 16. V, 9; in þiz-ei, because, for the reason that; Mk. IV, 5. II. Cor. IV, 13. (2) w. dat., both concrete and abstr., and after vs. of motion and rest, (a) local, in, into, within, among, on, at, towards, to, before; Mt. V, 19. 20. 25. 28. 45. 48. VI, 1. 2. 5. 9. 10. 13. 18. 23. Mk. I, 2. 4. 9. 11. 13. 14. 15. 19. 20. 23. 29. 39. II, 1. 6. 8. 15. III, 3. IV, 1. 17. 28. 36. V, 1. 3. 5. 13. 14. 20. 27. 30. Lu. II, 3. 7. 8. 11. 12. 14. 16. 19. 21. 22. 24. 25. 27. 34. 38. 43. 44. 46. 49. 51. II. Cor. I, 8. 9. 11. 19. 20. 23. II, 3. 8. 14. 15. III, 2. 3. 7. 10. 14. IV, 3. 4. 11. 12. V, 1. 4. 6. 11. 19. Skeir. VII, b. d; (b) temporal, in, at, during, within, by, for; Mk. I, 9. II, 20. III, 4. IV, 35. II. Cor. I, 14; (c) in other relations of which sum may be regarded as belonging under (2), (a), chiefly in an abstr. sense, indicating a 'state' or 'condition', in, of, with; Mt. VI, 6. 13. 18. 29. Mk. I, 23. 30. V, 25. II. Cor. I, 4. 12. II, 1. III, 8. V, 17; or 'manner', in, with; Mt. VI, 4. 6. 29; or 'instr.', 'means'; Mk. I, 5. 8. IV, 2. 24. V, 13. 21. Lu. II, 27. II. Cor. I, 21. II, 12. 17. III, 7. 14. V, 19. Skeir. VII, c (the first); or 'reason', 'cause', because of, for; Mt. VI, 7. II. Cor. V, 2. in þammei (= þamma ei), because; II. Cor. II, 13; with regard to, according to, in, after; Mk. I, 11. 15. II. Cor. II, 3. 9. IV, 8. Skeir. VII, e. (the second). (3) w. acc., (a) of place, in, into, on, among, to, toward, down to, up to; Mt. V, 25. 29. 30. VI, 6. 26. 30. Mk. I, 12. 21. 45. II, 1. 22. 26. III, 1. 13. 20. 27. IV, 1. 7. 8. 18. V, 12. 13. 18. 38. Lu. II, 4. 15. 39. 41. 42. II. Cor. I, 16. II, 13. III, 13. 18; (b) of time, in, for; Mt. VI, 13. Lu. II, 1; (c) in other relations, expressing 'disposition', 'feeling', 'direction', or 'action towards', toward, against, to, unto, in; Mt. V, 22. Mk. V, 34. II. Cor. I, 5. 11. IV, 11.—Occurs[Pg 177] often in composition w. vs., sbs., and adjs. [OE. in, ME. in, inn, NE. in.]

ina, prn., s. is.

in-brannjan, wv. (187), to set on fire, set fire to, burn.

in-feinan, wv. (193), to be moved with compassion, to pity, w. du w. dat.; Mk. I, 41.

in-ga-leikôn, wv. (190), to change into the likeness of; II. Cor. III, 18.

in-kilþô, f. adj. (132, n. 2), with child; Lu. II, 5. [-kilþôn- < a sb. = OE. cild, n. (m.), ME. child, NE. child.]

inn, adv. (213, n. 2), in; Mk. V, 40.—Occurs in many cpds. [< in. OE. in(n), ME. NE. in, adv.]

inna, adv. (213, n. 2), within, in; II. Cor. III, 3. [< inn + -a. OE. ME. inne, NE. in, adv., coinciding with in = Goth. inn.]

innana, adv. (213, n. 2), within, inside. [< inna + -na. OE. innan, ME. innen, NE. in (coinciding with in = Goth.) inn, inna.]

inn-at-gaggan, anv. (179, n. 3; 207), to enter, enter into, go or cum into; Mk. IV, 19. V, 39.

inn-at-tiuhan, stv. (173), w. acc., to bring in; Lu. II, 27.

innaþrô, adv. (213, n. 2), from within, within, inwardly. [< inna + suff. -þrô.]

inn-gaggan, anv. (179, n. 3; 207), to go in, enter, w. in w. acc.; Mk. V, 18; inng. framis, to go on; Mk. I, 19.

innuma, superl. adj. (139), inner, innermost, inward; II. Cor. IV, 16. [< inn + suff. -u-ma-n. Cf. OE. ME. innem-est (= Goth. *innumist-s, a dubl superl.; cp. hindumists), NE. inmost (-ost for-est by influence of most; s. maists).]

ins, prn.; s. is.

ins, as needed.; s. is.

in-saian (-saijan; 22, n. 1), rv. (182), to sow into, w. acc. and in w. dat.; Mk. IV, 15.

in-saíƕan (34, n. 1), stv. (176, n. 1), to look upon, behold, w. du w. dat.; Mt. VI, 26.

in-sailjan, wv. (188), to let down by means of a rope, let down with cords; Mk. II, 4.

in-sandjan, wv. (188), to send into, send off or forth, send, (1) w. acc.; Mk. IV, 29; and faúra w. dat.; Mk. I, 2; or in w. acc. and a clause w. ei; Mk. V, 12; or inf. of purpose; Mk. III, 14. (2) without obj., w. du w. dat.; Mk. I, 2.

inuh, prep. w. acc. (217), without; Mt. V, 32. Mk. IV, 34. Skeir. VII, b. [Also inu. Cf. OHG. âno, MHG. ân, âne, NHG. ohne, prep., without.]

in-wait, prt. of inweitan.

in-wait, past tense of inweitan.

in-weitan, stv. (172, n. 1; 197, n. 1), to wurship; Mk. V, 6.

in-winds, adj. (124), turnd aside; hense distorted from the right; perverse, unjust, unrighteous; Mt. V, 45. [-winds < √ of -windan.]

Iôdas (11, n. 2), pr. n., Juda. [< Ἰούδας.]

Iôhannês (61, n. 3), John; Mk. I, 4. 6. 14; gen. -is; Mk. II, 18; dat. -ê; Mk. I, 9. III, 17; or -ên; Mk. I, 29; acc. -ên; Mk. V, 37; or -ê; Mk. I, 19. [< Ἰωάννης.]

Iôsêf, pr. n., Josef; Lu. II, 4. 33. 43; acc. Iôsêf, pr. n., Josef; Lu. II, 16. [< Ἰωσήφ.]

Iôsêf, proper name, Josef; Luke II, 4. 33. 43; accusative Iôsêf, proper name, Josef; Luke II, 16. [< Ἰωσήφ.]

is, pers. prn. 3d pers. sg. m. (152), nom., uzed alone and w. vs., for emfasis, he; Mk. I, 8. 45. II, 15. 25. III, 8. 13. IV, 27. 38. V, 4. 34. 40. Lu. II, 28. Skeir. VII, d; gen. is; Mt. V, 35. Mk. I, 7. 16. 19. 22. 28. II, 15. 16. 23. III, 5. 27. IV, 32. V, 27. 28. 31. Lu. II, 21. 33. 34. 41. 43. 47. 48. 51. II. Cor. II, 11. III, 7. Skeir. VII, a. c; dat. imma; Mt. V, 25. 39. 40. 41. Mk. I, 5. 13. 18. 26. 27. 30. 36. 37. 40-45. Lu. II, 24; acc. ina;[Pg 178] Mt. VI, 8. Mk. I, 12. 25. 26. 34. 37. 40. 43. Lu. II, 7. 45. II. Cor. V, 16; pl. nom. eis; Mk. III, 4. Skeir. VII, b; gen. izê; Mt. VI, 14. 15. Mk. I, 23. 39. II, 5. III, 5. IV, 15. V, 37. Skeir. VII, d; dat. im; Mt. VI, 1. 7. Mk. I, 31. 38. 44. III, 4. II. Cor. IV, 4. Skeir. VII, b; acc. ins; Mt. VI, 26. Mk. I, 20. 21. 22. Skeir. VII, b. c; f. sg. nom. si; gen. izôs; Mt. V, 28. Mk. I, 31. V, 29; dat. izai; Mt. V, 28. 31. Mk. V, 34. 41. 43. Lu. II, 6. 7; acc. ija; Mk. I, 30. V, 33; neut. sing. nom. ita; Mk. IV, 37; acc. ita; Mt. V, 29. Mk. IV, 16; pl. nom. ija; Lu. II, 50; dat. im; Lu. II, 42 (?). 49. 50. 51. [All but si < a pronominal stem of the 3d pers., i-.]

is, ist, anv. (204), 2nd and 3d pers. sing. prs. indic. of wisan.

Iskariôtês, pr. n., Iscariot; acc. -ên; Mk. III, 19. [< Ἰσκαριώτης.]

Iskariôtês, proper noun, Iscariot; accusative -ên; Mk. III, 19. [< Ἰσκαριώτης.]

Israêl, pr. n., Israel; gen. -is; Lu. II, 25. II. Cor. III, 7. 13; dat. -a; Lu. II, 32. [< Ἰσραήλ.]

Israêl, proper noun, Israel; genitive -is; Luke II, 25. II Corinthians III, 7, 13; dative -a; Luke II, 32. [< Ἰσραήλ.]

Israêleitês, pr. n. (120, n. 2), Israelite. [< Ἰσραηλίτης.]

ist, 3d pers. prs. ind. of wisan.

ist, 3rd person present indicative of wisan.

ita, prn.; s. is.

ita, pron.; s. is.

itan, stv. (176, n. 3), to eat.—Cpd. fra-i. [OE. etan, ME. æte, ête, NE. eat.]

iþ, conj. (218), continuativ and more or less adversativ; so always at the beginning of the sentence, (1) but; Mt. V, 19. 21. 22. 29. 32. 33. 37. 39. VI, 3. 6. 15. 17. 20. 23. 27. Mk. I, 8. 14. 30. 41. 45. II, 18. III, 4. IV, 10. 11. 34. V, 33. 34. 36. 40. Lu. II, 19. 40. II. Cor. I, 12. III, 6. IV, 5. 18. V, 11. 16. Skeir. VII, a. b. (2) and; Mt. VI, 24. (3) iþ...nu, then, therefore; Mt. V, 19.

Iûdaia, pr. n., Judea; dat. -a; Mk. III, 7; acc. -an; Lu. II, 4; or -a; II. Cor. I, 16. [< Ἰουδαία.]

Iûdaia, proper noun, Judea; dative -a; Mk. III, 7; accusative -an; Lu. II, 4; or -a; II. Cor. I, 16. [< Ἰουδαία.]

Iûdaia-land, pr. n., the cuntry of Judea; Mk. I, 5.

Iûdaia-land, pr. n., the country of Judea; Mk. I, 5.

Iûdas or Jûdas, pr. n., Judas; acc. -an; Mk. III, 19. [< Ἰούδας.]

Iûdas or Jûdas, proper noun, Judas; accusative -an; Mk. III, 19. [< Ἰούδας.]

iup, adv. (213, n. 2), upwards, up. [Cf. OE. ûp, upp, ME. up, NE. up.]

iupa, adv. (213, n. 2), abuv, on high. [< iup + suff. -a.]

iupana, adv. (213, n. 2), from abuv, again. [< iup + suff. -a-na.]

iupaþrô, adv. (213, n. 2), from abuv. [< iupa + suff. -þrô.]

izai, izê, izô, izôs, prn.; s. is.

iz-ei (78, c; izê), rel. prn. (157, n. 3), he who, he that; II. Cor. I, 10. III, 6; f. sei (< si ei); Lu. II, 4. 5. 10; þana izei, him who; II. Cor. V, 21. sa izê, he who; Mt. V, 32.

izô, izôs; s. izai.

izô, izôs; n. izai.

izwar, poss. prn. (124, n. 1. 4; 151), m.; izwara, f.; izwar, n., your, in our 'Selections' always w. a sb., (1) preceding and, (a) without the art.; Mt. V, 37. 44. 45. 48. Mt. VI, 1. 8. 14. 15. 21. 25. 26. 32. Mk. II, 8. II. Cor. I, 14. 24. II, 9. IV, 5. V, 11. (b) w. the art.; Mt. V, 47. (2) following; so always without the art.; Mt. V, 20. II. Cor. I, 6. 24. [< stem of izwara. OE. êower, ME. NE. your.]

izwara, izwis, pers. prn.; s. þu. [2nd pers. gen. and dat. acc., respectivly. OE. gen. êower, dat. êow, acc. (êowic), êow, ME. gen. ᵹure, dat. acc. ᵹou, ᵹow, > NE. you.]

izwara, izwis, personal pronoun; singular þu. [2nd person genitive and dative, accusative, respectively. OE. genitive êower, dative êow, accusative (êowic), êow, ME. genitive ᵹure, dative and accusative ᵹou, ᵹow, > NE. you.]

izwizei (i. e. izwiz-ei), rel. prn.; s. þu-ei.

izwizei (i.e. izwiz-ei), rel. prn.; s. þu-ei.

Ja, adv. (216), yes; Mt. V, 37. II. Cor. I, 17. 18. 19. 20. [OE. iâ, geâ, ME. ᵹea, ᵹe, NE. yea.]

jabai, conj. (218), if, whether, even if, altho, (1) w. prs. indic.; Mt. V, 46. 47. VI, 14. 15. 22. 23. Mk. III, 24. 25. IV, 26. V, 28. II. Cor.[Pg 179] II, 2. 10. III, 9. 11. IV, 3. V, 1. 17; untê jabai...aíþþau, for either ... or; Mt. VI, 24. (2) w. prs. opt.; Mt. V, 29. 30. 39. 41. Mk. IV, 23.—jabai swêþauh jah, if only, even tho; II. Cor. V, 3. (3) w. pret. indic.; Mk. III, 26. II. Cor. II, 5. III, 7. V, 16. [< pron. stem ja- (cp. Brgm., I, § 123) + -bai (for ibai?); cp. OE. gif (for ge-if), gief, ME. yif, yf, NE. if. S. also ibai.]

Jaeirus, pr. n., Jairus; Mk. V, 22. [< Ἰάειρος.]

Jaeirus, proper noun, Jairus; Mk. V, 22. [<< Ἰάειρος.]

jah (the h being often assimilated to a follg. sound; 62, n. 3), conj. (217), (1) and (καί); Mt. V, 18. 19. 20. 23. 24. 25. 29. 30. 32. 38. 41-45. 47 (the 1st). VI, 2. 4. 5. 6. 12 (the 1st). 13. 17-20. 25. 26. 28. Mk. I, 4-7. 9-13. 15-26. 27 (the 1st). 29 (the 1st)-38 (the 1st and 2nd). 39-45. II, 1-4. 6. 8. 9. 11-14. 15 (all but the 2nd)-25. 26 (the 1st and 2nd). 27. III, 1-8. 9. 11-19 (the 1st). 20-28. 31-34. IV, 1. 2. 4-9. 11. 12. 13. 15-21. 24. 25 (the 1st). 26. 27. 30. 32. 33. 35-41 (all but the 3d). V, 1-7. 9. 10. 12-26. 29-34. 37-43. Lu. II, 3. 7-10. 12. 13. 14. 15 (1st and 3d). 16. 18. 20. 21. 22. 24-28. 30. 33-40. 42-52. II. Cor. I, 1. 2. 3. 6. 10. 12. 15-22. II, 2. 3. 4. 7. 12. 14. 15. 16. III, 2. 13. IV, 7. 14 (the 2nd). 16. 17. V, 2. 6. 8. 12. 15. 18. 19. Skeir. VII, a (the 1st and 3d). b. c (the 3d). d. (2) also (καί); sumtimes it is merely emfatic: even, indeed, or may remain untranslated in E.; Mt. V, 39. 40. 46. 47 (the 2nd). VI, 10. 12 (the 2nd). 14. 21. 24. Mk. I, 27 (the 2nd). 38 (the 3d). II, 15 (the 2nd). 26 (the 3d). 28. III, 19 (the 2nd). IV, 25 (the 2nd). 41 (the 3d). Lu. II, 15 (the 2nd). II. Cor. I, 5. 7. 8. 11. 13. 14. II, 10. III, 6. IV, 6. 11. 13 (the 2nd). 14 (the 1st). V, 3. 4. 5. 11. Skeir. VII, a (the 2nd). c (the 1st and 2nd). (3) and, but (δέ); Mt. VI, 30.—in þizei jah, and therefore; II. Cor. IV, 13.—jah...jah, both ... and; II. Cor. V, 5 (But s. note). Cp. also Mk. III, 35. [OHG. joh (ahd gr., 25, n. 1), MHG. joch, and, also.]

jainar, adv. (213, n. 1), there; Mt. V, 23. 24. Mk. I, 35. 38. II, 6. III, 1. V, 11. Lu. II, 6. [< jains + loc. suff. -r.]

jaind, adv. (213, n. 1), there, thither. [< jains + loc. suff. -d. Cf. OE. geond, ME. yond, NE. yond (obs.), adv., yonder.]

jaindrê, adv. (213, n. 1), there, thither. [< jains + suff. -drê. ME. NE. yonder.]

jains (20, n. 4), dem. prn. (156), that, w. a sb., (1) without the art.; Mk. I, 9. II, 20. IV, 35. Lu. II, 1; jainis stadis, to the other side; Mk. IV, 35. (2) w. the art.; Mk. III, 24. 25; jainaim þaim ûta, to them (that ar) without; Mk. IV, 11. [OE. geon, ME. ᵹon, NE. yon.]

jainþrô, adv. (213, n. 1), thense; Mt. V, 26. Mk. I, 19. [< jains + suff. -þrô.]

jaþþê (62, n. 3), conj. (153, n. 2; 218), and if, jaþþê...jaþþê, either ... or, whether ... or; II. Cor. I, 6. V, 9. 10. 13. [< jah (þ for h; s. jah) + þê, instr. of þata; s. sa.]

jau, interr. adv. (216), whether, if.

jau, interr. adv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), whether, if.

jêr, n. (94), year; Mk. V, 25. 42. Lu. II, 36. 37. 41. Skeir. VII, d. [OE. geâr, gêr, ME. yêr, NE. year.]

jôta, m. (108), iota, jot; Mt. V, 18. [< ἰῶτα, iota.]

ju, adv. (214, n. 1), now, alredy; Mt. V, 28. Lu. II, 15. [OE. iû, giû, adv., alredy, onse, formerly.]

juggs (124), adj. (124), new, fresh; Mk. II, 22. yung; Lu. II, 24.—sa[Pg 180] jûhiza (15; 66, n. 1), compar. (135, n. 1), the yunger. [OE. geong, giung, ME. ᵹong, ᵹung, NE. yung.]

juk, n. (94), yoke, pair. [OE. geoc, gioc, n., ME. ᵹok, NE. yoke.]

jus, pers. prn. 2nd pers. pl.; s. þu. [Cf. OE. nom. gê, gen. êower, dat. êow, acc. êowic; ME. nom. yê, gen. your, dat. you, acc. you (prop. dat.), NE. nom. ye, you (prop. dat.), (gen. your, poss., s. izwara), dat. you, acc. you (prop. dat.).]

jus, 2nd person plural pronoun; singular þu. [Compare OE. nominative gê, genitive êower, dative êow, accusative êowic; ME. nominative yê, genitive your, dative you, accusative you (proper dative), NE. nominative ye, you (proper dative), (genitive your, possessive, singular izwara), dative you, accusative you (proper dative).]

ju-þan, adv., alredy; Mk. IV, 37; juþan ni, no longer, no more; Mk. I, 4. 5. II, 2.

ju-þan, adv., already; Mk. IV, 37; juþan ni, no longer, no more; Mk. I, 4. 5. II, 2.

Kafarnaum, indecl. pr. n., Capernaum, in acc.; Mk. I, 21. II, 1. [< Καπερναούμ.]

kaisar, m. (91, n. 4; 119), Cesar; dat. -a; Lu. II, 1. [< καῖσαρ.]

Kajafa (52), pr. n., Cajaphas. [< Καϊαφάς.]

Kajafa (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Cajaphas. [< Καϊαφάς.]

kalbô, f. (112), female calf, hefer. [OHG. chalba, kalba, MHG. kalbe, f. Its orig. stem appears in OE. cealf-ru, pl., but cealf, sing. (without the orig. s: z: r-suff.), ME. cælf, kalf, NE. calf.]

kalds, adj. (124), cold. [Orig. a ptc. (da- being suff.), < √ kal, in OE. ME. côle, w. abl., NE. cool, OE. ceald, ME. cald, cold, NE. cold.]

kalkinassus, m. (105), adultery, fornication; Mt. V, 32. [< kalk- (seen in kalk-jô, or kalk-i, harlot, whore) + suff. -in-assu-.]

Kananeitês, pr. n. m., Canaanite; Mk. III, 18. [< Κανανίτης.]

Kananeitês, proper noun, masculine, Canaanite; Mk. III, 18. [< Κανανίτης.]

kann, kan(n)t; s. kunnan, prt.-prs.

can, can't; s. kunnan, prt.-prs.

kannjan, wv. (188), to make known.—Cpds. ga-, us-k. [Factit. of kunnan. OE. (ge-)cennan, ME. (i-) kenne, to make known, and (by influence of ON. kenna, to know) to know, NE. ken, to know, recognize.]

kara, f. (97; karist; 204, n. 3), care; kara wisan, to concern, w. acc.; Mk. IV, 38 (without ist). [OE. cearu, f., ME. care, care, grief, NE. care.]

karkara, f. (97; 119), prison; Mt. V, 25. [< Lt. carcer, m., prison.]

kas, gen. kasis, n. (94), vessel, picher, pot; II. Cor. IV, 7; in pl. also goods (so in the E. version; gerät in G.). Mk. III, 27. [OHG. char, MHG. kar, n., vessel, dish.]

kaupatjan, wv. (187, n. 1), to strike with the palm of the hand, to cuf, buffet.

Kaúrazein (57), pr. n., Chorazin. [< Χοραζείν.]

Kaúrazein (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Chorazin. [< Χοραζείν.]

kaúrei, f. (113), weight, burden; II. Cor. IV, 17. [< kaúrus.]

Kaúrinþaíus, pr. n., a Corinthian; dat. pl. -aíum; II. Cor. superscr. (in B); or -ium (in A). [< Κορίνθιος.]

Kaúrinþaíus, proper name, a Corinthian; dative plural -aíum; II. Cor. superscript. (in B); or -ium (in A). [< Κορίνθιος.]

Kaúrinþô, pr. n., Corinth; dat. -ôn; II. Cor. I, 1. 23. [< Κόρινθος.]

Kaúrinþô, proper noun, Corinth; dative -ôn; II. Cor. I, 1. 23. [< Κόρινθος.]

kaúrjan, wv. (188), to press, burden, trubl, w. acc., in pass. the nom. (implied); II. Cor. I, 8. V, 4.—Cpd. ana-k. [< kaúrus.]

kaúrn, n. (94), corn, grain; Mk. IV, 28. [OE. corn, n., a grain, corn, ME. NE. corn.]

kaúrnô, n. (110), corn, grain of corn; Mk. IV, 31. [< kaúrn.]

kaúrus, adj. (131, n. 1), hevy, weighty, burdensum.

heavy, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), weighty, burdensome.

kawtsjô (39, n. 1), f. (112), security. [< Lt. cautio, security.]

Kêfas (6), pr. n., Cephas.

Kêfas (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Cephas.

keinan, stv. (172, n. 2; 195, n. 2), to germinate, spring up, grow; Mk. IV, 27. [OE. cînan, ME. chine, to split, crack, burst, > NE. chink (w. k-suff.).]

kilþei, f. (113), womb. [S. inkilþô.]

kilþei, f. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), womb. [S. inkilþô.]

kindins, m. (91), guvernor; k. wisan, to be guvernor, to guvern; Lu. II, 2.

kinnus, f. (105), cheek; Mt. V, 39. [OE. cin- (in composition), chin (but cheek in cin-bân, n., cheek-bone, cin[Pg 181]tôð, m., cheek-tooth), ME. chin, NE. chin.]

kintus, m. (105), farthing; Mt. V, 26. [Perhaps < a vulgar form of Lt. quintus, one fifth (of an 'as'); cp. MHG. quentîn (quintîn) one fourth (perhaps orig. one fifth of a 'lot' = about ½ ounce), < Vulgar Lt. quintînus < Lt. quintus, fifth.]

kiusan, stv. (173, n. 1), to test, prove, choose. [OE. cêosan, ME. chese, chose > NE. choose.]

kniu, n. (94, n. 1), knee; Mk. I, 40. [OE. cnêo, ME. kne, NE. knee.]

knôþs (74, n. 2), f. (103), race, stock. [OHG. chnôt, chnuat, f., race. Its stem, knô, = OE. cnô-, in cnôsl (w. suff. -sla-), race, kin.]

knussjan, wv., to kneel down; Mk. I, 40. [< *knussus, a kneeling, < stem knu-:kniw-, extended kniwa- > kniu.]

Krêks (8), m. (119), a Greek. [< Lt. Græcus.]

Krêta (6), pr. n., Crete. [< Κρήτη.]

Krêta (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Crete. [< Κρήτη.]

kriustan, stv. (173, n. 1), to gnash.

-krôtôn (12, n. 1), wv. (190), in ga-k.

krusts, m. (101, n. 1), gnashing. [< kriustan.]

-kumbjan (54, n. 1), wv., in ana-, miþ-ana-k. [< Lt. -cumbere, in ac-c., to lie down, recline.]

kûmei, arise!; Mk. V, 41 [< κόυμι, arise!, < the Syrian.]

kûmei, get up!; Mk. V, 41 [< κόυμι, get up!, < the Syrian.]

-kunds, adj. (124), denoting origin or kind, in aírþa-, guma-, himina-, qina-kunds. [Prop. an old ptc. < √ of kuni. OE. -cund (as in god-cund, divine), extended cynde, ME. kynde, kinde, natural, suitabl, kind, NE. kind.]

kuni, n. (93), kin, race, tribe; Lu. II, 36. [OE. cyn(n), n., ME. kin, kun, NE. kin.]

kunnan, prt.-prs. (199), to know, w. acc.; Mk. I, 34. IV, 11. 13. II. Cor. II, 4. (in pass. the nom.) III, 2. V, 16. 21. Skeir. VII, a; and an indir. question; Mk. I, 24; or bi w. dat.; II. Cor. V, 16.—Cpds. fra-, ga-k. [OE. cunnan; prs. sing. can, cǫn, ME. cunne, kunne, conne; prs. con, kan, can > NE. can.]

-kunnan, wv. (199, n. 1), in ana-, at-, ga-, uf-k. [< kunnan, abuv. OE. cunnian, ME. cunne, to try to find out, to try, test, NE. con (obs.), to consider, cun (Sc.).]

kunþa, prt. of kunnan, prt.-prs.

kunþa, past tense of kunnan, present tense.

kunþi, n. (95), knowledge; II. Cor. II, 14. IV, 6. [< kunþs. OE. cŷð(ð), f. (?), ME. kith, MHG. künde, n., knowledge.]

-kunþjan; s. -swi-kunþjan.

kunþs, adj. (123; prop. pp.), known; II. Cor. III, 2; kunþa, sb. m. (107), acquaintance; Lu. II, 44. [< kunnan. OE. cûð (û < un), ME. cuth, adj., known, NE. -couth, in uncouth.]

kustus, m. (105), proof, trial, test; II. Cor. II, 9. [< kiusan + suff. -tu-. OE. cost (for cyst, s. ga-kusts), m., manner, ME. cost, cust, choice, quality, manner, OHG. chost, m., judgment, decision, > chostôn, MHG, NHG. kosten, to taste, try.]

Kyreinaíus, pr. n., Cyrenius; dat. -au; Lu. II, 2. [< Κυρήνιος.]

Kyreinaíus, proper noun, Cyrenius; dative case -au; Lu. II, 2. [< Κυρήνιος.]

-Qaírnus (105), in asilu-qaírnus, milstone (lit. 'ass-mil', i. e. a mil turnd by an ass), mil. [OE. cweorn, cwyrn, f., mil, ME. cwern, quern, NE. quern, hand-mil.]

qaírrus, adj. (131), meek, gentl. [ON. kvær (stem *kverru-) beside kvirr (stem *kvirria-), stil, quiet, OHG. *churri, *cwirri, MHG. kürre, MG. kurre, kirre, NHG. kirre, adj., tame, familiar, submissiv.]

qam, prt. of qiman.

qam, part of qiman.

Qartus (59), pr. n., Quartus.

Qartus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Quartus.

qaþ(-uh), prt. of qiþan (+ -uh).

qaþ(-uh), part. of qiþan (+ -uh).

[Pg 182]

qêmjau, qêmun, prt. of qiman.

qêmjau, qêmun, part of qiman.

qêns (qeins; 7, n. 2), f. (103), woman, wife; Mt. V, 31. 32. Lu. II, 5. [OE. cwên, f., ME. quene, wife, woman, queen, NE. queen. Cp. qinô.]

qêþun, prt. of qiþan.

qêþun, past tense of qiþan.

qiman, stv. (175, n. 1), to cum, arrive, both lit. and trop.; Mt. VI, 10. Mk. I, 7. 9. III, 31. IV, 4. 15. 17. V, 22. 23. 33. II. Cor. II, 3; w. af w. dat.; Mk. III, 22. II. Cor. I, 16; at w. dat.; Mk. I, 40. II, 3. III, 8. II. Cor. I, 15. 16. II, 1; fram w. dat.; Mk. V, 35; hindar w. dat.; Mk. V, 1; in w. dat.; Mt. V, 20. Mk. I, 14. 29. V, 1. Lu. II, 27. 51. II. Cor. I, 23. II, 12; nêƕa w. dat.; Mk. II, 4; us w. dat.; Mk. I, 11; duþê (therefore); Mk. I, 38; a final clause w. duþê ei; Mk. IV, 21; inf. of purpose; Mt. V, 17. Mk. I, 24. II, 17. V, 14; a ptc.; Mk. I, 14. 40. II, 3. V, 35. Lu. II, 16; an acc. of time; Lu. II, 44.—Cpds. ana-, fra-, ga-, us-q. [OE. cuman (< *cwuman < *queman), ME. cume, come, NE. cum.]

qina-kunds (88^a), adj. (124), female.

qina-kunds (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__^a), adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), woman.

qinô, f. (112), woman; Mt. V, 28. Mk. V, 25. 33. Skeir. VII, a. [OE. cwene, f., woman, lady, ME. quene, wife, woman, quean, NE. quean, OHG. quena, chone, MHG. kone, f., woman. Cp. qêns.]

-qiss (76, n. 1), f., in cpds. [< qiþan + suff. -ti (ss < þt). OE. -cwiss, in gecwiss, f., harmony.]

qistjan, wv. (188), to destroy, in fra-, us-q. [< stem *qis-ti, destruction, = OHG. quist, f., destruction.]

-qistnan, wv. (194), in fra-q. [Cp. qistjan.]

-qistnan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in fra-q. [Cp. qistjan.]

qiþan, stv. (176, n. 1), to say, speak, tel, name, call, (1) w. acc. of the th. said; Mk. I, 42 (in pass. the nom.). Lu. II, 21; (2) w. a dependent sentence or frase, (a) dir.; Mt. V, 27. 38. 43. VI, 31. Mk. I, 7. 24. 25. 27. III, 30. 33. 34. IV, 9. 26. 30. V, 7. 30. Lu. II, 13. 28. Skeir. VII, a; (b) w. þatei; Mt. V, 31. Mk. I, 11. 15. II, 12. III, 11. 21. 22. V, 23. 28. 35. (3) w. acc. and inf.; II. Cor. IV, 6. (4) w. dat. of the pers. addrest and, (a) an acc. of th.; Mk. V, 33; or a voc.; Mt. V, 22 (raka, indecl.); (b) a dir. obj. sentence; Mt. V, 18. 21. 26. 33. 44. VI, 2. 25. Mk. I, 17. 41. II, 9. 11. 19. 27. IV, 2 (and in w. dat.). 11. V, 8. Skeir. VII, d; (c) an obj. clause w. þatei; Mt. V, 20. 22. 28. 32. 33. VI, 5. 16. 29. Mk. III, 28; (d) a final clause w. ei; Mk. III, 9; (e) an inf.; Mt. V, 34. 39; (f) bi w. acc.; Mk. I, 30. (5) w. du w. dat. of the pers. addrest, and, (a) a dir. sentence; Mk. I, 38. 44. II, 5. 8. 10. 14. 16. 17. 18. 24. 25. III, 3. 4. 5. 23. 32. IV, 13. 21. 24. 35. 38. 39. 40. 41. V, 9. 19. 31. 34. 36. 39. 41. Lu. II, 10. 15. 34. 48. 49; (b) an obj. clause w. þatei; Mk. I, 37. 40. (6) w. swaswê and in w. dat.; Lu. II, 24.—Cpd. us-q. [OE. cweðan (prt. cwæð), ME. queðe (prt. quað, quoð), NE. (be-)queath (prt. quoth).]

qiþus, m. (105), womb; Lu. II, 23. [ON. kviðr, m., stomach.]

-qiujan (42), wv. (187), to quicken, in ga-q. [< qius. OE. cwicjan, ME. quike, to make alive, OHG. quicchan in ir-qu., MHG. erquicken, to cause to revive, to refresh, NHG. erquicken, to refresh.]

-qiunan (42, n. 3), wv. (194), in ga-q., to becum alive. [< qius.]

*qius, adj. (124, n. 3), quick, living, alive. [< stem qiwa-. Cf. OE. cwic (o-stem); cwicu and cucu (< stem in -u), NE. quick.]

qrammiþa, f. (97), moisture.

qrammiþa, f. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), humidity.

qums, m. (101, n. 1), a cuming, arrival. [< qiman. OE. cyme, m., ME. cume, kime, a cuming.]

[Pg 183]

Lag, prt. of ligan.

Lag, part of ligan.

laggei, f. (113), length. [< laggs. OE. lengu (str., for *lengî, weak, by change of declension), f., ME. lenge, OHG. lengî (likewise str.), MHG. lenge, NHG. länge, f., length.]

laggs, adj. (124), long (said of time only); Mk. II, 19. [OE. lǫng, lang, ME. NE. long.]

lagjan, wv. (187), to lay, lay down, put, place, giv, w. acc. and ana w. acc.; Mk. V, 23. II. Cor. III, 13; to communicate, commit, w. acc. and in w. dat. (or acc.?); II. Cor. V, 19.—Cpd. ga-l. [Caus. of ligan. OE. lecᵹan, ME. legge, leie, NE. lay.]

laígaíôn, legion; Mk. V, 9. 15. [< λεγεών, legion.]

laikan, rv. (179), to leap, leap for joy. [OE. lâcan, to leap, play, ME. lake, to play.]

laíktjô (57), f. (always in the margin, in B, opposit the passage to be red in church); II. Cor. III, 4. V, 11. [< L. lectio, a reading.]

laílôt, prt. of lêtan.

laílôt, past tense of lêtan.

laílôun, prt. of lauan.

laílôun, part of lauan.

lais (30), prt.-prs. (197), I know. [Cp. laisareis, laisjan.]

lais (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), prt.-prs. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), I know. [Cp. laisareis, laisjan.]

laisareis, m. (92), teacher, master; Mk. IV, 38. V, 35. Lu. II, 46. Skeir. VII, a. [< *laisa (= OE. lâr, f., a teaching, ME. lare, lore, NE. lore) < lais. OHG. lêrari, MHG. lêrære, lêrer, NHG. lehrer, teacher.]

laiseins, f. (103, n. 1), a teaching, doctrin; Mk. I, 22. 27. IV, 2. [< laisjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

laisjan (30), wv. (188; 197), to teach, (1) abs.; Mk. IV, 1. (2) w. acc. of pers.; Mt. V, 19. Mk. I, 21. 22. II, 13; and acc. of th.; Mk. IV, 2. [Caus. of lais. OE. læ̂ran, to teach, ME. lere, to teach, lern, NE. lear (obs.). OHG. MHG. lêren, to teach, lern (rare), NHG. lehren, to teach.]

laistjan, wv. (188), to follow, follow after, w. afar w. dat.; Mk. I, 18. III, 7. [< laists (< lais + suff. -ti- = OE. lâst, m. o-stem, ME. last, lest, NE. last), m., foot-print, track. OE. læ̂stan, to perform (by following a track), stand by, ME. laste, leste, NE. last.]

Laíwweis, pr. n., Levi; acc. -i; Mk. II, 14. [< Λευίς.]

Laíwweis, proper noun, Levi; accusative -i; Mk. II, 14. [< Λευίς.]

lamb, n. (94), lamb, sheep. [OE. ME. lǫmb, lamb, n., NE. lam.]

land, n. (94), land, cuntry, region; Mk. V, 1. 10, Lu. II, 8. (þata bisunjanê land, the cuntry round about; Lu. IV, 37); landis (215), gen. uzed adverbially, a portion of land, far away. [OE. lǫnd, land, n., ME. land, NE. land.]

lasiws (42, n. 1), adj. (124), feebl, weak. [< stem las-. Cf. OE. læ̂ssa, compar. adj., ME. lesse, NE. less.]

laþôn, wv. (190), to invite, call, w. acc.; Mk. II, 17. [OE. laðian, ME. laðie, OHG. ladôn, MHG. NHG. laden, to invite, summon.]

laþôns, f. (103, n. 1), a calling, invitation, consolation; Lu. II, 25. redemption; Lu. II, 38. [< laþôn.]

*lauan (22, n. 2; 26, n. 2), rv. (179, 4), to revile.

-laubjan (31), only in ga-, us-l. [< a sb. = OE. lêaf, f., ME. lêve, NE. leav, permission, (ge-)liefan, -lêfan, (< *-lêafian), ME. (i-, be-)lêve, NE. believ.]

laufs (56, n. 1), m. (91), leaf, the leavs, foliage. [OE. lêaf, n., ME. lêf, NE. leaf.]

laugnjan (31), wv. (188), to deny. [< -laugns (in ana-l.), adj., hidn. OE. lêgnian(?), lŷᵹnian, (< *lêagnian), ME. leine, laine, OHG. louginen, lougnen, MHG. löugenen, NHG. läugnen, to deny.]

lauhatjan, wv. (187, n. 1), to lighten.

lauhmuni (-moni; 14, n. 3), f., (98)[Pg 184] lightning. [< lauhmun- (+ suff. -jô) < √ of liuhaþ + suff. -mun-.]

Lauidja (26, n. 1), f. (97) pr. n.; in dat. -ai. [< Λωίς, dat. Λωίδι.]

laun, n. (94), pay, reward; Mt. VI, 1. [OE. lêan, n., ME. lean, OHG. MHG. lôn, m. n., NHG. lohn, m., pay, reward.]

laus (78, n. 2), adj. (124), empty. [< √ of liusan. OE. lêas, ME. lês, empty, free from, false, NE. -less, ON. lauss, free, > ME. los, NE. loose.]

lausa-waúrds (88^a, n. 1), adj. (124), speaking loose words, talking vainly. [-waúrds < waúrd.]

laus-handus (88^a, n. 1), adj. (131, n. 1), empty-handed.

lausjan, wv. (188), to loose, redeem, deliver, w. acc. and af w. dat.; Mt. VI, 13.—Cpd. ga-l. [< laus. OE. lŷsan, lêsan, ME. lese (NE. loose, ME. lose < los; s. laus), OHG. lôsen, MHG. lœsen, NHG. lösen, to loose.]

laus-qiþrs (88^a, n. 1), adj. (124), with empty stomach, fasting.

-leiban (56, n. 1), stv. (172, n. 1), in bi-l. [OE. (be-)lîfan, OHG. (bi-)lîban, MHG. blîben, NHG. bleiben, to remain, stay.]

leihts, adj. (124), light; II. Cor. IV, 17. [OE. lîht, ME. liht, NE. light.]

leihts, m. (? 90), lightness; II. Cor. I, 17. [< leihts, adj.]

leiƕan, stv. (172), to lend; l. sis, to borrow; Mt, V, 42. [OE. lêon (< lîhǫn), to lend, OHG. lîhan, MHG. lîhen, NHG. leihen, to lend, also borrow.]

leik, n. (94), body; Mt. V, 29. 30. VI, 22. 23. 25. Mk. V, 29. II. Cor. IV, 10. V, 6. 8. 10; flesh; II. Cor. I, 17. IV, 11. V, 16. [OE. lîc, n., ME. lik, lich, NE. like (obs.), person, corpse, lich- (in lichgate, lichwake, etc.), Lich- (in Lichfield), OHG. lîh (hh), f. n., body, flesh, MHG. lîch, lîche, f., body, corpse, NHG. leiche, f., corpse, leich- (in leichdorn, corn on a toe, leichnam, corpse; s. -hamôn).]

-leikan, wv. (193), to please, in ga-l. [< -leiks. OE. lîcian, ME. like, NE. like (obs.), to please. The signification of the simpl v. seems due to the compound (s. galeikan).]

leikeins, adj. (124), bodily, fleshly; II. Cor. I, 12. III, 3. [< leik + suff. -eina-.]

-leikjan, wv. (188), in silda-l. [< -leiks.]

-leikjan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in silda-l. [< -leiks.]

-leikôn, wv. (190), in in-ga-l. [< (ga-)leiks; s. galeikô.]

-leikôn, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in in-ga-l. [< (ga-)leiks; s. galeikô.]

-leiks; s. galeikô.

leitils, adj. (124; 138), litl, short; Mt. VI, 30. Mk. I, 19. [Cf. OE. lŷtel, lîtel, ME. litel (infl. litl-), NE. litl.]

-leiþan, stv. (172, n. 1), to go, in af-, bi-, ga-, us-l. [OE. lîðan, ME. liðe, to go, > the OE. caus. læ̂dan, ME. lede, NE. lead.]

leiþu, n. (? 106; n. 1), a strong drink. [OE. lîð, m. (o-stem), potion, wine, OHG. lîd, MHG. lît, lîd-, n. m., a wine-like drink.]

lêkeis (leikeis, 7, n. 2), m. (92), fysician; Mk. II, 17. V, 26. [OE. læ̂ce, m., ME. lêche, NE. leech, fysician (now obs.), a blud-sucking wurm.]

lêtan (leitan, 7, n. 2), rv. (181), w. acc., to let, suffer, permit, allow, leav; Mk. V, 19.—Cpds. af-, fra-l. [OE. læ̂tan, ME. lete, NE. let, to permit (let, to hinder, = Goth. latjan < lats, slothful, lazy).]

lêw, n. (94, n. 1), opportunity, occasion; II. Cor. V, 12. [Cf. OE. læ̂wa, m., betrayer; s. lêwjan.]

lêwjan, wv. (188), to betray.—Cpd. ga-l. [< lêw. OE. læ̂wan, ME. be-lewe, to betray.]

libains, f. (103, n. 1), life; II. Cor. II,[Pg 185] 16. IV, 11. 12. V, 4; world; Mk. IV, 19. [< liban + suff. -ai-ni-.]

liban, wv. (193), to liv; Mk. V, 23. II. Cor. I, 8. III, 3. IV, 11. V, 15 (the first); w. dat. of advantage; II. Cor. V, 15 (the second); w. miþ w. dat.; Lu. II, 36. [OE. libban, lifian, ME. libbe, livie, live, NE. liv.]

-lifnan, wv. (194), to remain, in af-l. [Cf. -leiban, pp. libans.]

ligan, stv. (176, n. 1), to lie, w. ana w. dat.; Mk. II, 4. II. Cor. III, 15; du w. dat.; Lu. II, 34; in w. dat.; Mk. I, 30. Lu. II, 16; þarei; Mk. V, 40. [OE. licgan, ME. ligge, lie, NE. lie.]

ligrs, m. (91), couch, bed; Mk. IV, 21. [< ligan + suff. -ra-. OE. leger, m., couch, ME. leir, NE. lair.]

-linnan, stv. (174, n. 1), to cease, in af-l. [OE. linnan, ME. linne, NE. lin (obs.; cpd. blin = *be-lin, OE. blinnan, ME. blinne), to cease.]

lisan, stv. (176, n. 1), to gather, collect, w. in w. acc.; Mt. VI, 26.—Cpd. ga-l. [OE. lesan, ME. lese, NE. lease, to glean, = G. lesen, to gather, read.]

lists (30), f. (? 103, n. 2), wile, craftiness. [< lis- (seen in lis-ans, pp. of lais) + suff. -ti-. OE. ME. list, skil, cunning, OHG. MHG. list, m. (f.), wisdom, craftiness, NHG. list, f., craft, cunning.]

liþus, m. (105), lim, member; Mt. V, 29. 30. [< √ of leiþan. OE. lioðu- (only in cpds.), m., lið, n. (o-stem), ME. lith, NE. (Scot.) lith, lim.]

liudan, stv. (173, n. 1), to grow, grow up; Mk. IV, 27. [OE. lêodan, to grow. Its √ appears also in OE. lêod, m. f., pl. lêode, ME. leode, lede, OHG. liut, m. n., pl. liuti, MHG. liute, NHG. leute, peple, men, servants.]

liufs (gen. liubis; 31; 56, n. 1), adj. (124, n. 2), beluvd, dear; Mk. I, 11. [OE. lêof, ME. lêf, NE. lief (poet.), OHG. liob, MHG. liep, lieb-, NHG. lieb, beluvd, dear.]

liugan (31), stv. (173, n. 1), to lie. [OE. lêogan, ME. lyᵹe, liᵹe, NE. lie.]

liugan, wv. (192, n. 1; 193), to marry, w. acc.; Mt. V, 32. [< liuga, f., marriage.]

liugn (31), n. (94), lie. [< liugan + suff. -na-.]

liugn (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), n. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), lie. [< liugan + suff. -na-.]

liugnja (31), m. (108), liar. [< liugn + suff. -jan-.]

liugnja (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), liar. [< liugn + suff. -jan-.]

liuhadei, f. (113 and n. 2), light, illumination; II. Cor. IV, 4 (-eins, partit. g., in A; -ein in B; s. note). 6. [< liuhaþ.]

liuhadeins, adj. (124), ful of light, shining, bright; Mt. VI, 22. [< liuhaþ + suff. -eina-.]

liuhaþ, gen. liuhadis, n. (94), light; Mt. VI, 23. Lu. II, 32. II. Cor. IV, 6. [< √ liuh + suff. -ada-.]

liuhtjan, wv. (188), to giv light, to light, shine; II. Cor. IV, 4. 6. [< *liuhts (< √ of liuhaþ + suff. -to-), adj. (= OE. lêoht, ME. licht, NE. light). OE. lŷhtan, ME. lihte, NE. light.]

-liusan, stv. (173, n. 1), in fra-l. [OE. (for-)lêosan, ME. (for-)lêse, NE. leese (obs.), to lose, pp. (for-)lorn.]

liuta, m. (108), dissembler, hypocrit; Mt. VI, 2. 5. 16. [Prop. weak form of the adj. liuts < √ of OE. lûtan, ME. lute, loute, NE. lout (obs.), to bend, bow, stoop. Cf. also OE. lyteg (w. suff. -eg), ME. luti, shrewd, cunning.]

lôfa, m. (108), the palm of the hand. [ON. lófi, Scot. loof, the palm of the hand.]

lubains (31), f. (103, n. 1), hope. [< *luban, to hope, (+ suff. -ai-ni-), < √ of liufs.]

lubja-leisei (30), f. (113), wichcraft. [< lubjaleis, adj., skild, < lubja- (= OE. lyb, f.?, poison; cf. also cêse-lib, ME. cheselep, NE. cheese[Pg 186]lep. The orig. meaning of lubja- was probably 'a strong essence, vegetabl juice') + -leis < √ of lais.]

-lubô (31), f. (111), in brôþru-(-a-?)lubô, brotherly luv. [< √ of liufs. OE. lufe (later lufu, a-declension), f., ME. lufe, luve, love, NE. luv.]

ludja, f. (97), face, countenance; Mt. VI, 17. [< √ of liudan + suff. -jô-.]

luftus, m. (105), air. [OE. lyft (i-stem), m. f. n., ME. luft, lift, NE. lift (Scot.), air.]

-lûkan (15), stv. (173, n. 2), to lock, in ga-, us-l. [OE. lûcan, ME. louke, luke, to lock. Its √ occurs w. abl. in -luks, m., an opening; cf. OE. loc, n., loca, m., ME. loke (> the vb. lokke, NE. lock), inclozure, lock, NE. lock.]

lukarn, n. (94), light, candl; Mt. VI, 22. Mk. IV, 21. [< Lt. lucerna, f., lamp, candl.]

lukarna-staþa, m. (108), candl-stick; Mk. IV, 21. [< stem of lukarn + -staþa < staþs, sted, place, < √ of standan + suff. -þi-.]

lûns (15, n. 1), f. (102), or lun, n. (94, n. 2), ransom.

-lusnan, wv. (194), in fra-l. [< pp. stem of liusan.]

lustôn, wv. (190), to desire, lust after, w. gen.; Mt. V, 28. [< lustus. OHG. lustôn, MHG. lusten, to desire, NHG. lüsten, MHG. lusten, lüsten, (OHG. lustjan, lusten, = OE. lystan, ME. liste, NE. list, to please, < lust, f., OE. lyst, f., desire).]

lustus, m. (105), lust, desire; Mk. IV, 19. [OE. lust (a-stem), m., ME. lust, NE. lust.]

Magan, prt.-prs. (201), to be abl, be abl to do, w. inf.; Mt. V, 36. VI, 24. 27. Mk. I, 40. 45. II, 4. 7. 19. III, 20. 23-27. IV, 32. 33. V, 4. II. Cor. I, 4. III, 7. [OE. *magan, prs. mæᵹ; prt. meahte (Goth. mahta), mihte, ME. prs. mai, may, prt. miht, NE. prs. may, prt. might.]

magaþei, f. (113), virginity; Lu. II, 36. [< magaþs.]

magaþs, f. (103), maid, virgin. [< stem mag-a- (s. magus, stem mag-u-) + suff. -þi-. OE. mægð, f., virgin, OHG. magad, virgin, MHG. maget, virgin, maid, female servant, NHG. magd, f., female servant.]

magula, m. (108), litl boy, lad; Skeir. VII, a. [< magus + dim. suff. -lan-.]

magus, m. (105), boy, child, servant; Lu. II, 43. 48. [< √ of magan. OE. magu (-o), m., sun, servant.]

mahta, prt. of magan.

mahta, part of magan.

mahteigs, adj. (124), mighty, strong. [< mahts + suff. -eiga-. OE. meahtig, mihtig, ME. mihty, NE. mighty.]

mahts (66, n. 1), f. (103), might, strength, power, virtue; Mt. VI, 13. Mk. V, 30. II. Cor. I, 8. IV, 7. Skeir. VII, a. c. [< √ of magan + suff. -ti-. OE. meaht, miht, ME. miht, NE. might.]

maidjan, wv. (188), to corrupt, deform, falsify; II. Cor. II, 17. [< -maiþs (in ga-maiþs; cp. ME. mad, NE. mad). OE. mæ̂dan, to deform, confuse, ME. mæde (madde), to confuse, derange, NE. mad (Shak.), to make mad.]

maíhstus, m. (105), dung, dung-hil. [< √ of OE. mîgan, ME. miᵹe, to urin. OHG. MHG. NHG. mist (for *mihst), m., manure.]

mais, adv. (212), more, rather; II. Cor. II, 7. V, 8; w. dat., more than; Mt. VI, 25; w. another compar.; Mt. VI, 26. Mk. V, 26. filu m., much more; Skeir. VII, d; und filu m., much more, so much the more; II. Cor. III, 9. 11; ƕaiwa m., how much more; Mt. VI, 30; ƕaiwa nei m., not much more; II. Cor. III, 8. [< ma- + adv. compar.[Pg 187] suff. -is. OE. mâ, ME. ma, mo, NE. mo(e) (obs.), more.]

maist, adv. (212, n. 3), most. S. maiza.

maitan, rv. (179), to cut, cut off, cut down.—Cpds. af-, bi-m. [OHG. meiȥan, MHG. meiȥen, to cut, hew. Cf. also G. meissel (w. l-suff.), m., chisel.]

maiþms, m. (91, n), gift. [< verbal stem maiþ- + suff. -ma-. OE. mâðum, ME. maðem, gift, trezure.]

maiza, compar. adj. (138), more, greater; filaus maizô, much more; Skeir. VII, b; superl. maists (138), greatest. [< stem ma- + suff. -iza. OE. mâra, superl. mâst, ME. mare, more, superl. most, NE. more, superl. most.]

Makaídonja (or i for aí, 11, n. 1), pr. n., Macedonia; dat. Makaídonjai (in B; i for aí in A); II. Cor. I, 16; acc. -a; II. Cor. I, 16. II, 13 (in A; i for aí in B). [< Μακεδονία.]

Macedonia (or i for aí, 11, n. 1), pr. n., Macedonia; dat. Macedonia (in B; i for aí in A); II. Cor. I, 16; acc. -a; II. Cor. I, 16. II, 13 (in A; i for aí in B). [< Μακεδονία.]

malan, stv. (177, n. 1), to grind in a mil. [OHG. malan, MHG. maln, NHG. mahlen, to grind.]

malô, f. (112), moth; Mt. VI, 19. 20. [Lit. 'grinding insect', < √ of malan.]

mammôna, m. (108), mammon, riches; Mt. VI, 24. [< μαμμωνᾶ(ς) < the Hebrew.]

managduþs, f. (103), abundance [< manags + suff. -du-þi-.]

managduþs, f. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), abundance [< manags + suff. -du-þi-.]

managei, f. (111; 113), crowd, multitude, the peple; Mk. II, 4. III, 9. IV, 36. V, 27. 30. An adj., ptc., or prn., referring to m., uzually agrees w. it in gender and number; Mk. V, 31. Lu. II, 10. 31. 32. The v. either agrees w. m.; Mk. III, 20. Lu. II, 13. Skeir. VII, c; or m. stands in the sg. and the v. in the pl.; Mk. III, 32; so all, or filu, m., Mk. II, 13. III, 7. 8. IV, 1. V, 21. 24. [< manags. OE. menigu (orig. -î), f., ME. manye, NE. many (sb.; as, a great 'many').]

managnan, wv. (194), to increase, abound; II. Cor. IV, 15. [< manags.]

manags, adj. (124), often uzed as sb., much, many; Mk. I, 34. II, 2. 15. III, 10. IV, 2. 5. V, 9. 26. Lu. II, 34. 35. 36. II. Cor. I, 11. II, 4. III, 12. Skeir. VII, a. b; swa m., so many; Skeir. VII, b; swa m. swê, as many as; Mk. III, 11; swa m. swaswê, as many as; Mk. III, 28; swaleikai m. swaswê, many such as; Mk. IV, 33; ƕaiwa m., how many; II. Cor. I, 20.—compar. managiza (136), more, greater; Mt. V, 20. II. Cor. II, 6. 7. IV, 15; w. dat. (as abl.); Mt. V, 37; ƕê m., what (i. e. in what degree or manner) more; Mt. V, 47. [OE. manig, mǫnig, ME. mani, NE. many. Cp. managei.]

mana-maúrþrja (88^a, n. 3), m. (108), man-slayer, murderer. [-maúrþrja < maúrþr + suff. -jan-.]

mana-sêþs (88^a, n. 3; gen. -sêdais), f. (103), 'man-seed', peple, multitude; world; II. Cor. V, 19. [sêþs < √ of saian + suff. -þi- (-di-). OE. sæ̂d, m. n., ME. sêd, NE. seed.]

man-leika (88^a, n. 3), m. (108), image. [Prop. weak adj. uzed as sb.; -leika < -leiks. OE. manlîca, m., ME. manliche, effigy, image.]

manna, m. (117), man; Mt, V, 19. VI, 1. 2. 5. 14. 15. 16. 18. Mk. I, 17. 23. II, 10. 27. 28. III, 1. 3. 5. 28. IV, 26. V, 2. 8. Lu. II, 14. 15. 25. 52. II. Cor. III, 2. IV, 2. 16. V, 11. Skeir. VII, b; ni m. or m. ni, no man, nobody; Mt. VI, 24. Mk. II, 21. 22. III, 27. V, 3. 4. 43. [< stem mann-. OE. mǫnna, manna, and mǫn(n), man(n), ME. man, NE. man.]

manna-hun, indef. prn. (163), always[Pg 188] in neg. sentences: ni m., no one; Mk. I, 44.

manwjan, wv. (188), to prepare, make redy, w. acc.; Mk. I, 3. 19. Lu. II, 31. Cpd. ga-m. [< manwus.]

manwuba, adv. (210), in rediness. [< manwus + adv. suff. -ba.]

manwus, adj. (131), redy.

manwus, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), ready.

marei, f. (113), sea; Mk. IV, 41; du marein, to the sea; Mk. III, 7; faúr, or faúra, marein, near the sea; Mk. I, 16. II, 13. V, 21; hindar marein, on the other side of the sea; Mk. V, 1. 21; in marein (dat.), in the sea; Mk. IV, 1 (the second), acc., to, or into the sea; Mk. I, 16. IV, 1 (the first). [OE. mere, m. (orig. n.), ME. mere, sea, lake, NE. mere, a pool or small lake, OHG. mari, meri, m. n., MHG. mere, NHG. meer, n., sea.]

Maria (Marja), pr. n., Mary; Lu. II, 19. dat. Mariin; Lu. II, 5. 34; acc. Marian; Lu. II, 16. [< Μαρία.]

Maria (Marja), proper noun, Mary; Lu. II, 19. dative Mariin; Lu. II, 5. 34; accusative Marian; Lu. II, 16. [< Μαρία.]

marikreitus, m. (119), perl. [Coind < μαργαρίτης, perl. So, also, OE. meregreot < the Lt. margarita > ME. margarite, NE. margarite (obs.), perl.]

marka, f. (97), border, boundary, coast; Mk. V, 17. [OE. mearc, f., ME. merk, mark, NE. mark, border, boundary.]

Markus, pr. n., Mark; acc. -u; Mk. superscr. [< Μάρκος.]

Markus, proper noun, Mark; accusative -u; Mk. superscript. [< Μάρκος.]

martyr (39), m., martyr. [< μάρτυρ, witness.]

martyr (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), n., martyr. [< μάρτυρ, witness.]

marzjan, wv. (188), to offend, w. acc.; Mt. V, 29. 30.—Cpd. ga-m. [OE. -merran, -myrran, in â-m., to provoke, offend, ME. merre, marre, NE. mar.]

matjan, wv. (188), to eat; (1) abs.; Mk. V, 43 (matjan as obj.). Skeir. VII, c. (2) w. acc.; Mt. VI, 25. 31. Mk. I, 6. II, 26. III, 20; miþ w. dat.; Mk. II, 16. [< mats.]

mats, m. (101), meat, food. S. also nahta-m. [OE. mete, m., ME. mete, NE. meat.]

Matþaius, pr. n., Matthew; acc. -u; Mk. III, 18.

Matthew, proper noun; accusative -u; Mk. III, 18.

maþl, n. (94, n. 2), assembly, market, market-place. [OE. mæðel, n., council, meeting.]

maudjan, wv. (188), to remind.—Cpd. ga-m.

maudjan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to remind.—Cpd. ga-m.

maúrgins, m. (91, n. 1; 214), morn, morning. [OE. morgen, mergen, ME. morᵹen, morn (> morning, w. suff. -ing, NE. morning), morwe, NE. morn, morrow.]

maúrnan, wv. (194), to be anxious or trubld; Mt. VI, 27. 31; w. dat.; Mt. VI, 25. [OE. murnan, ME. murne, mourne, NE. mourn.]

maúrþr, n. (94), murder. [< √ maúr + suff. -þra-. OE. morðor (murðor), n., ME. morther, morder, NE. murder, murther (obs.).]

maúrþrjan, wv. (188), to murder, kil; Mt. V, 21. [< maúrþr. OE. myrðrian, ME. murd(e)re, NE. murder.]

mawi (42), f. (94), maid, maiden, damsel; Mk. V, 42. [< magw- = magu-, stem of magus.]

mawilô, f. (112), yung maiden, damsel; Mk. V, 41. [< mawi + suff. -lôn-. OE. mêowle (< *mewilô), yung maiden, maid.]

mêgs, m. (91, n. 1), sun-in-law. [OE. mæg, m., mæ̂i, mai, OHG. mâg, MHG. mâc (g-), NHG. mage, m., kinsman.]

meina, pers. prn. in gen.; s. ik. [OE. mîn, dat. mĕ; acc. mec, mĕ (prop. dat.); ME. gen. wanting; dat. acc. me; NE. dat. acc. me.]

meina, personal pronoun in genitive; see ik. [OE. mîn, dat. mĕ; acc. mec, mĕ (proper dat.); ME. gen. not present; dat. acc. me; NE. dat. acc. me.]

meins, poss. prn. (151), (alone or) w. a following or preceding sb., w. or without the art.; Mk. I, 2. III, 33. 34. 35. V, 23. Lu. II, 30. 49. [< meina. OE. ME. mîn, mî, NE. mine, my.]

mêl, n. (94), (orig. point or mezure[Pg 189] of time or space), time (hour, season, in pl., writings, scriptures); Mk. I, 15. [OE. mæ̂l, n., time, mezure, (food taken at one time; hense) meal, ME. mêl, NE. meal.]

mêla, m. (108), mezure, bushel; Mk. IV, 21.

mêljan, wv. (187), to write, w. acc.; in pass. the nom. (implied); Lu. II, 3; and dat. of pers. (indir. obj.); II. Cor. I, 13.—Cpds. ana-, ga-m. [< mêl, pl. mêla, writings. OE. mæ̂lan, to mark, OHG. malôn, -ên, (of different conjugations), to mark, paint, MHG. mâlen, to paint, write, NHG. malen, to paint.]

mêna, m. (108), moon. [OE. mǫ̂na, m., ME. mone, NE. moon. Cf. mênôþs and Brgm., II, § 123, p. 393.]

mênôþs, m. (117), month. [OE. mǫ̂nað, ME. moneð, m., ME. month.]

mêriþa, f. (97), fame, report; Mk. I, 28. [< -mêrs. OE. mæ̂rðu, mæ̂rð, f., fame, glory.]

mêrjan, wv. (188; mêrjands, m.; 115), to make known, proclaim, noiz abroad, preach, (1) abs.; Mk. I, 7. 38. 39. III, 14. V, 20; w. in w. dat.; Mk. I, 39. (2) w. acc.; Mk. I, 4. 14. 45. II. Cor. IV, 5. (3) w. an obj. clause and in w. dat.; Mk. V, 20.—Cpds. waíla-, waja-m. [< -mêrs. OE. mæ̂ran, OHG. mâren, MHG. mæ̂ren, to make known, praise.]

*mêrs, adj. (130, n. 2), known, famous, in waíla-m., praisewurthy, of good report. [OE. mæ̂re, ME. mere, famous, OHG. mâri, famous, > mârî, f., mâri, n., rumor, fame, MHG. mæ̂re, n. f., tale, NHG. märe, f., news, tidings, report, > märchen (w. dimin. suff. -chen), n., tale, story, fable.]

mês (8), n. (94), table. [Cf. OE. mêse (gen. -an), f., table, perhaps < Lt. mensa (mêse < *mense), f., table.]

midjis, adj. (122, n. 1; 125), midl; Lu. II, 46. [OE. ME. mid(d), adj., midl, NE. mid- (as in midday, midnight, etc.).]

midjun-gards, m. (101), erth, world; Lu. II, 1. [Prop. 'midl-world', between heven and hel. midjun- < stem of midjis. OE. middaneard for middangeard, m., ME. middaneard, world.]

*miduma, f. (97; 139, n. 1), midst; Mk. III, 3. [Prop. superl. adj. uzed as sb., < mid- (cp. midjis) + superl. suff. -u-ma-n-. OE. meoduma.]

midumônds, m. (115), mediator. [Prop. prsp. of *midumôn < miduma.]

mik; s. ik, meina.

mik; s. ik, my.

mikilduþs, f. (103), greatness. [< mikil- (< mikils) + suff. -duþi-.]

mikilei, f. (113), greatness. [< mikils.]

mikilei, f. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), greatness. [< mikils.]

mikiljan, wv. (185), to magnify, glorify, praise, w. acc.; Mk. II, 12. Lu. II, 20. [< mikils.]

mikilnan, wv. (194), to becum great. [< mikils.]

mikils, adj. (138), great, much; Mt. V, 19. 35. Mk. IV, 32. 37. 39. 41. V, 42. Lu. II, 9. 10. Skeir. VII, a. b; strong, loud; Mk. I, 26. V, 7. [OE. micel, mycel, ME. mikel, mychel, muchel, NE. mickle (Sc.).]

mildiþa, f. (97), mildness, kindness. [< -milds (in friaþwa-, un-m.), adj., mild, kind, + suff. -i-þô-.]

milhma, m. (108), cloud.

milhma, m. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), cloud.

miliþ, n. (94), huney; Mk. I, 6. [Cf. OE. mele-, mil-, huney, in mele-, mil-dêaw, m., ME. mildew, NE. mildew.]

miluks, f. (116), milk. [OE. meolc, f., ME. NE. milk.]

*mims (mimz; 78, n. 1), n. (94), flesh, meat.

minnists, superl. adj. (138), very small, least; Mt. V, 19. 26. Mk. IV, 31. [< stem minn- (< minw-;[Pg 190] cp. Brgm., I, § 180) + superl. suff. -ista-. OHG. minnist, MHG. minnest, NHG. mindest (the d from the compar.; cp. Kl. W., minder), least.]

minniza, compar. adj. (138), smaller, less. [< stem minn- (s. minnists) + compar. suff. -iza. OHG. minniro, MHG. minner, minre, NHG. minder (w. eufonic d), smaller, less.]

mins (minz; 78, n. 1), adv. (212, n. 1), less. [< minn- (s. minnist) + adv. compar. suff. -s for -is.]

mis; s. ik, meina.

*missa-dêþs (-dêds), f. (103), misdeed, trespass, sin; Mt. VI, 14. 15. II. Cor. V, 19. [miss(a)- = OE. ME. NE. mis- (not = mis-, as in mischief, < Lt. minus).]

missa-leiks, adj. (124), various, divers; Mk. I, 34.

missô, adv. (211, n. 1), reciprocally, one another, w. a pers. prn.; sis m.; Mk. I, 27. IV, 41. Lu. II, 15. [< missa- + adv. suff. -ô.]

mitan, stv. (176), to mezure; Mk. IV, 24.—Cpd. us-m. [OE. metan, ME. mete, NE. mete.]

mitaþs, f. (116), mezure; Mk. IV, 24. [< mitan + suff. -a-þi-(-di-).]

mitôn, wv. (190), w. acc., to consider, reason upon, think over, think; Mk. II, 8; and refl. dat.; Mk. II, 8; to purpose, intend; II. Cor. I, 17. [Perhaps < a lost sb. OHG. meȥôn (< meȥ, n., mezure, way, manner), to mete, moderate.]

mitôns, f. (103, n. 1), consideration, thought; Lu. II, 35. [< mitôn + suff. -ô-ni-.]

miþ (mid; 74, n. 1), (1) prep. w. dat. (217), (a) denoting 'accumpaniment, community, connection', with, together with, among, amid; Mt. V, 25. 41. Mk. I, 13. 20. 29. 36. II, 16. 19. 25. 26. III, 6. 7. 14. IV, 10. 36. V, 18. 24. 40. Lu. II, 5. 13. 36. 51. II. Cor. I, 1. 21. IV, 14; (b) 'way' and manner'; Mk. III, 5. IV, 16. (2) adv., along (with). [Cf. OE. ME. mid, prep. and adv., with, along, NE. mid- (in midwife).]

miþ-ana-kumbjan (54, n. 1), wv. (188), to lie down together with, sit at table with; Mk. II, 15.

miþ-garda-waddjus (88^a, n. 2), f. (105), partition wall, midl wall.

miþ-þan-ei, conj. (218), (lit. 'with that that'), when, while, as; Mk. IV, 4. Lu. II, 6. 27. 43. II. Cor. III, 15. 16.

miþ-wissei (30), f. (113), a 'knowing with', conscience; II. Cor. I, 12. IV, 2. V, 11. [< *miþwiss < miþ + -wiss (in un-wiss, not known, uncertain), prop. an old ptc. in-to-, < stv. witan (ss < tt < d-t). -wiss = OE. -wis, in ge-wis (ge = Goth. ga), adj., certain, ME. (i-) wiss, adj., certain, and adv., certainly, NE. ywis (obs.), certainly.]

mizdô, f. (112), reward; Mt. V, 46. VI, 2. 5. 16. [OE. meord, mêd (by lengthening of e + z to ê; cp. Brgm., I, § 538), ME. mede, mêde, NE. meed.]

môdags, adj. (124), wroth, angry; Mt. V, 22. [< môþs + suff. -aga-. OE. môdig (w. later suff. -ig, for orig. -eg = Goth. -ags. Cp. my remarks on this point in 'Transactions of the Wis. Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters', vol. VIII, p. 167), adj., proud, brave, ME. mody, NE. moody.]

*môjan (26), wv. (187), in af-m. [OHG. muo(j)an, MHG. müe(j)en, to trubl, make angry, NHG. mühen, to trubl.]

Môsês, pr. n., Moses; Mk. I, 44. II. Cor. III, 13 (in B). 15; Môsêz; II. Cor. III, 13 (in A); gen. Môsêzis; Lu. II, 22. II. Cor. III, 7. [< Μωσῆς.]

Moses, pr. n., Moses; Mk. I, 44. II. Cor. III, 13 (in B). 15; Moses; II. Cor. III, 13 (in A); gen. Moses; Lu. II, 22. II. Cor. III, 7. [< Μωσῆς.]

môta, f. (97), toll, custom; the place where customs ar paid, receipt of[Pg 191] custom; Mk. II, 14. [OHG. *muoȥa, MHG. muoȥe, NHG. (Bavarian) mŭess, toll, multure, (LG. mûta >) OHG. mûta, MHG. mûte, NHG. maut, f., toll, custom.]

-môtan, prt.-prs. (202), in ga-m. [OE. *môtan, prs. ind. môt, may; prt. môste, ME. prs. mot, môt, may, must, 2nd prs. most (OE. môst); prt. most(e) > NE. must.]

môtareis, m. (92), toll-taker, publican; Mt. V, 47. Mk. II, 15. 16. [< môta + suff. -arja-.]

-môtjan, wv., to meet, in ga-m. [< *môt (= OE. môt, n., ME. môt, meeting). OE. mêtan, ME. mete, NE. meet.]

môþs (gen. môdis; 74, n. 2), m. (91, n. 2), wrath, anger; Mk. III, 5. [OE. môd, n., mind, curage, pride, ME. môd, NE. mood.]

mûka-môdei (15), f. (113), meekness. [mûka- = ON. mjúkr > ME. meoc, meke, NE. meek.]

-mûljan (15), wv. (188), in faúr-m. [< mûla-, n., mouth, cf. OHG. mûla, f., MHG. mûl, mûle, n., mûle, f., NHG. maul, n., mouth.]

munan, prt.-prs. (200), to mean, suppose, think.—Cpd. ga-m. [OE. (ge-)munan, prs. ind. man, mǫn, prt. munde, ME. (i-) mune, prs. man, prt. munde, remember, think.]

munan, wv. (200, n. 1), to think, intend. [< muns. OE. mynnan, ME. mynne, munne, to remember.]

muns, m. (101), thought, mind, purpose; counsel, device; II. Cor. II, 11. [< stv. munan. OE. myne, memory, luv, ME. mune, mind, memory.]

Naen (6), pr. n., Nain. [Ναΐν.]

Naen (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), proper noun, Nain. [Ναΐν.]

-nah, in bi-, ga-; s. -naúhan.

nahta-mats (88^a, n. 3), m. (101), supper (lit. 'night-food'); Skeir. VII, b.

nahts, f. (116), night; gen. nahts, in the night, by night; Lu. II, 8; dat. sg. naht, by night; Mk. IV, 27; dat. pl. nahtam, by night; Mk. V, 5. Lu. II, 37. [OE. neaht, niht, ME. niht, NE. night.]

naiteins, f. (103, n. 1), blasfemy; Mk. II, 7. III, 28. [< -naitjan (in ga-n.), to blasfeme, + suff. -ei-ni-.]

naqaþs, gen. naqadis, adj. (124), naked; II. Cor. V, 3. [OE. nacod (w. an unlabialized guttural), ME. naked, NE. naked.]

namnjan, wv. (187), to name, call. [< stem of namô (for the mn, s. Brgm., I, § 215). OE. nemnan (beside namian, ME. name, NE. name), ME. nemne, OHG. MHG. nemmen, nennen, NHG. nennen, to name, call.]

namô, n. (110, n. 1), name; Mt. VI, 9. Mk. III, 16. 17. V, 9. 22. Lu. II, 21. 25. [OE. nǫma, nama, m., ME. nome, name, NE. name.]

naseins, f. (103, n. 1), salvation; Lu. II, 30. II. Cor. I, 6. [< nasjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

nasjan, wv. (185), to save; Mk. III, 4.—Cpd. ga-n. [Caus. of -nisan. OE. nerian, nergan, to save, OHG. ner(j)an, MHG. nerigen, nern, NHG. nähren, to nurish.]

nasjands, m. (115), the Savior; Lu. II, 11. [Prop. prsp. of nasjan. OE. nergend, m., savior.]

nati, n. (95), net; Mk. I, 16. 18. 19. [OE. net(t), n., ME. NE. net.]

Naþan (70), pr. n., Nathan. [< Ναθάν.]

Nathan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Nathan. [< Ναθάν.]

Naúbaímbaír (54, n. 1), November. [< Lt. November.]

naudi-bandi (88^a), f. (96), fetter, lit. 'need-band'; Mk. V, 3. 4. [naudi- < stem of nauþs.]

Naúêl (26, n. 1), pr. n. [< Νῶε.]

naúh, adv., stil, yet; Skeir. VII, c; ni naúh, not yet, not as yet; Mk. IV, 40. [< nu + -uh. OHG. MHG. noh, NHG. noch, yet, stil.]

naúh, adv., still, yet; Skeir. VII, c; ni naúh, not yet, not as yet; Mk. IV, 40. [< nu + -uh. OHG. MHG. noh, NHG. noch, yet, still.]

[Pg 192]

-naúhan, prt.-prs. (201), in bi-, ga-n. [OE. -nugan, in 3d pers. sg. -neah (= Goth. -nah), in be-, ge-n., it suffices.]

naúh-þanuh, adv., stil, yet; Mk. V, 35.

naúh-þanuh, adv., still, yet; Mk. V, 35.

naus, m. (101, n. 3), a ded man, corpse.

nauþjan, wv. (188), to force, press, compel, in ana-n. [< nauþs. OHG. nôtan, nôten, MHG. nôten, nœten, to urge, compel.]

nauþs, f. (103), need, necessity. [OE. nîed, nêad, nêd, f., ME. nede, nêd, NE. need.]

Nazaraiþ, indecl. pr. n., Nazareth; Mk. I, 9. Lu. II, 4. 39. 51. [< Ναζαρέτ.]

Nazôrênus, pr. n., one of Nazareth. voc. (onse in) -ai (Gr. infl.); Mk. I, 24. [< Ναζωρηνός.]

Nazôrênus, proper noun, someone from Nazareth. voc. (in this instance) -ai (Greek inflection); Mk. I, 24. [< Ναζωρηνός.]

nê, adv. (216), no, nay; Mt. V, 37. II. Cor. I, 17. 18. 19. [Cf. ni.]

nêƕ (64), adv., near. [OE. nêah, nêh, ME. neih, neiᵹe, NE. nigh.]

nêƕa, adv. (216), near; uzed as prep. w. dat., near; Mk. II, 4. [< nêƕ.]

nêƕis, compar. adv. (212), nearer. [< stem of nêƕ + adv. compar. suff. -is.]

nêƕjan (sik), wv. (188), to draw near, approach.—Cpd. at-n. [< nêƕ. OHG. nâhan, nâhen, MHG. næhen, to bring near, beside nâhen, NHG. nahen, to approach, be near.]

nêƕundja, m. (108, neighbor; Mt. V, 43.) [< stem of nêƕ + suff. -und-jan-.]

nei, interr. particl, not?; II. Cor. III, 8. [< ni + ei.]

neiwan, stv. (172, n. 3), to hav a quarrel against.

ni, neg. part. (216), not, (1) joind to vs. (a) in declarativ sentences; Mt. V, 17. 18. 26. 34. 36. 39. VI, 1. 15. 18. 26. Mk. I, 7. 34. 45. II, 2. 12. 17. 18. 19. III, 9. 12. 20. 24. 25. 26. IV, 5. 6. 12. 13. 17. 22. 25. 27. 34. V, 19. 37. 39. Lu. II, 7. 26. 37. 43. 50. II. Cor. I, 8. 9. 23. II, 1. 3. 5. 11. 13. 17. III, 7. 10. 13. IV, 1. 2. 4. 16. V, 4. 16. 21. Skeir. VII, b. d; so also w. a pred. ptc.; Mk. II, 24. 26; or a prs. ptc.; Mk. II, 4. Lu. II, 45. II. Cor. IV, 18. V, 19; (b) in prohibitiv sentences; Mt. V, 7. 8. 17. 21. 27. 33. 42. VI, 2. 3. 5. 7. 13. 16. 19. 25. 31. Mk. V, 7. 36. Lu. II, 10. (2) joind to other words (sbs., adjs., ptcs. uzed as adjs., etc.), chiefly in antithesis and hypothetical sentences, and often w. other particls; Mt. V, 20. 30. VI, 15. 24. Mk. I, 22. II, 27. IV, 40. V, 26. II. Cor. I, 12. 13. 24. II, 4. 5. III, 3. 5. 6. IV, 5. 7. 8. 9. V, 3. 7. 12. 15. 16. Skeir. VII, a. b. c. [OE. ME. ne, NE. ne (obs.), adv., not. Also containd in no, neither, not, etc.]

niba, nibai (10, n. 2), conj. (218), except, but, if not, unless, save; (1) w. sbs.; Mk. II, 7. 26. V, 37. II. Cor. II, 2. (2) w. vbs.; Mt. V, 20. Mk. III, 27; nibai ƕan, lest at any time; Mk. IV, 12. [< ni + iba, ibai.]

nidwa, f. (97), rust; Mt. VI, 19. 20.

nih (20, n. 1; 62, n. 3), conj. (218), and not, not even; Mt. VI, 29; in a negativ sentence it merely intensifies the negation or is either copulativ or disjunctiv: ni..nih, not ... and not, not ... nor, (or not even, not as much as); Mt. VI, 20. 25. Mk. II, 2. III, 20. Skeir. VII, a; ni..nih..nih, not ... nor ... nor; Mt. VI, 26; nih..ak, not ... but; II. Cor. I, 19. Skeir. VII, a; nih þan..ak jah, for not ..., but also; Skeir. VII, c; ni..nih..ak, not ... nor ... but; II. Cor. IV, 2; nih allis ƕa..nih..ak, for nothing ... neither ... but; Mk. IV, 22; nih..nih, neither ... nor, not ... nor; Mt. VI, 20. 28; ni..allis ni ..nih..nih..nih, not at all,[Pg 193] neither ... nor ... nor ... neither; Mt. V, 34. 35. 36. [< ni + -h, i. e. -uh. OHG. nih-, in nih(h)ein, nechein, MHG. nehein, nechein, nekein, short hein, kein, NHG. kein, adj., not any, no.]

Nikaúdêmus (23, n. 1), pr. n., Nicodemus.

Nikaúdêmus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), pr. n., Nicodemus.

niman, stv. (170; 175), to take, accept, receiv, take away, w. acc.; Mt. V, 40. Mk. II, 9. 11. IV, 16. Skeir. VII, b.—Cpds. af-, and-, ga-, us-n. [OE. niman, ME. nime, to take, seiz, NE. nim (Shak.), to steal.]

-nisan, stv. (176, n. 1), in ga-n. [OE. gi-nesan, to be saved, OHG. gi-nesan, MHG. genesen, to remain alive, be saved, be deliverd (of a child), NHG. genesen, to recuver.]

niþan, stv. (176, n. 1), to help. [Its √ (w. abl.) appears in OHG. ginâda, f., mercy, grace, MHG. gnâde, genâde, NHG. gnade, f., grace, etc.]

niþjis, m. (92), kinsman, cuzin. [OE. nið-in pl. niððas, m., persons, men.]

niþjô, f. (112), female cuzin. [Extended < stem of niþjis.]

ni-u, interr. part. (216), in dir. questions, not? (= Lt. 'nonne'); Mt. V, 46. 47. VI, 25. 26. Mk. IV, 21. 38. Lu. II, 49; ni aiw, never?; Mk. II, 25.

-niujan, wv. (187), to renew, in ana-n. [< niujis.]

-niujan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to refresh, in ana-n. [< niujis.]

niuja-satiþs (88^a, n. 1), pp. uzed as sb., m. (134), a novice. [satiþs < satjan.]

niujis, adj. (126), new, yung; Mk. I, 27. II, 21. 22. II. Cor. III, 6. V, 17. [OE. nîewe, nîwe, < nêowe (+ suff. -ja-), ME. niwe, new(e), NE. new.]

niu-klahei, f. (113), puerility, pusillanimity; Skeir. VII, a. [< niuklahs, adj., under age, childish; niu- = OE. nêo-we; s. niujis.]

niun, card. num. (141), nine. [OE. nigon (the g being intrusiv), nigen, ME. niᵹen (infl. niᵹene > the contracted) nine, NE. nine.]

niunda, ord. num. (146), ninth. [< niun. OE. nigoða (< *nigonða), ME. nieþe, nynt, NE. ninth (by influence of 'nine').]

niuntêhund, num. (143), ninety. [< niun + -têhund. Cp. Brgm., III, § 179.]

niutan, stv. (173, n. 1), to enjoy. [OE. nêotan, OHG. gi-nioȥan (= Goth. ga-n.), MHG. genieȥen, NHG. geniessen, to enjoy.]

-nôhjan, wv. (188), in ga-n. [< (ga)-nôhs.]

-nôhjan, v. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in ga-n. [< (ga)-nôhs.]

nôta, m. (108), hinder part of a ship, stern; Mk. IV, 38.

nu, (1) adv. (214, n. 1; 218), now, even now, just now; Lu. II, 29; uzed as sb.: fram þamma nu, henseforth; II. Cor. V, 16. (2) conj. (218: so never at the beginning of a sentence), now, then, therefore; Mt. V, 19. 23. 48. VI, 2. 8. 9. 22. 23. 31. II. Cor. I, 17. III, 12. IV, 12. 13. V, 6. 11. 20. [Cf. OE. nû, ME. nu, nou, NE. now.]

nuh, adv. (216; 218), occurring always in questions, now, then, therefore. [< nu + -h, i. e. -uh-.]

-numja (33), m., one who takes, in arbi-numja, heir. [< niman + suff. -jan-.]

nunu, conj. (218), now, then, therefore. [< nu + nu.]

nuta, m. (108), cacher, fisher; Mk. I, 17. [< niutan.]

Ô, interj. (219), o! oh!

Ô, interj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), oh!

ôgan (35), prt.-prs. (202), to fear, be afraid, (1) abs.; Mk. V, 15. 33. Lu. II, 10; ôgan agisa mikilamma (instr. dat.), to fear exceedingly; Lu. II, 9. (2) w. refl. dat. (sis) and a cognate acc. (agis mikil), to fear exceedingly; Mk. IV, 41. [< *agan; s. unagands.]

[Pg 194]

ôgjan (35), wv. (188), to terrify, frighten. [Caus. of ôgan.]

ôhtêdun, prt. of ôgan.

ôhtêdun, past tense of ôgan.

ôsanna (61), Hosannah. [< ὠσαννά, pray, help!, < the Hebrew.]

Paida (51), f. (97), coat; Mt. V, 40. [Prob. a foren w. (51, a). OE. pâd, f., OHG. pheit, MHG. pheit, pfeit, f., gown.]

paíntêkustê (13, n. 1), Pentecost. [< πεντηκοστή, fiftieth (i. e. the 50th day after the Passover.)]

Paítrus, pr. n., Peter; Mk. III, 16; acc. -u; Mk. V, 37. [< Πέτρος.]

paraskaíwê (39), f. (113), the day of the preparation. [< παρασκευή, f., preparation.]

paska, f. (97), (the feast of) the Passover; Lu. II, 41. [< πάσχα < the Hebrew.]

Paúntius (24, n. 5), pr. n., Pontius. [< Πόντιος.]

paúrpura, paúrpaúra (24, ns. 2. 5), f. (97), purpl. [< Lt. purpura.]

Pawlus, pr. n., Paul; II. Cor. I, 1. [< Παῦλος.]

peika-bagms (51), m. (91), date-palm.

peika-bagms (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), date-palm.

Peilâtus (5, a), pr. n., Pilate. [< Πειλᾶτος.]

Phaeba (52), pr. n.

Phaeba (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), proper noun

pistikeins (51), adj. (124), genuin, pure. [< πιστικός, faithful, honest, + Goth. suff. -eina-.]

plapja, f. (97, n. 1), street; Mt. VI, 5. [Occurs only onse, in gen. pl. plapjô, which is prob. an error, for *platjô < Lt. platea < Grk. πλατεῖα, a broad way, street.]

plats, m. (91, or 100? or plat, n., 94?), a piece of cloth, pach; Mk. II, 21. [< Old Slavonic platu, pach.]

plinsjan (51), wv. (188), to dance. [< Old Slavonic plesati, to dance.]

-praggan (51), rv. (178), in ana-p. [< Old Slavonic. Cf. Dutch prangen, to press.]

praitôriaún, n. (120, n. 2), Pretorium. [< πραιτώριον, Pretorium.]

praúfêteis, f. (92), profetess; Lu. II, 36. [< προφήτις, profetess.]

praúfêtus (praúfêtês), m. (105; 91), profet; dat. -au; Mk. I, 2; acc. pl. -uns; Mt. V, 17. [< προφητής, profet.]

puggs (51), m. (91; or pugg, n., purse.) [Borrowd purse.]

pund (51), n. (94), pound. [< Lt. pondo, indecl. sb.; pound; cf. Lt. pondus, weight.]

Q. See K.

Q. Check out K.

Radagaisus (21, n. 1), pr. n.

Radagaisus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

raginôn, wv. (190), to guvern, be guvernor; Lu. II, 2. [< ragin (= OE. regn-, in composition), n., judgment, decree, counsel, (> also ragineis (92), m., counselor). OE. regnjan, to plan, arrange.]

rahnjan, wv. (188), to reckon, count, w. acc. of th. and dat. of pers., to impute anything to; II. Cor. V, 19.

raíhtis, adv. conj. (218) uzed as an enclitic, for, however, indeed; Mk. IV, 4. [< raíhts + adv. compar. suff. -is; s. 212.]

raíhts, adj. (124), straight, right; Mk. I, 3. [Prop. an old ptc. in-to-, < √ of reiks. OE. riht, ME. ryght, riht, NE. right.]

-raisjan, wv. (188), to cause to rize, to raiz, in ur-r. [Caus. of -reisan. OE. ræ̂ran (r < z < s), ME. rere, NE. rear.]

raka (indecl.), raca; Mt. V, 22. [< ῥακά < Hebrew râkâ, wurthless fellow.]

raka (indecl.), raca; Mt. V, 22. [< ῥακά < Hebrew râkâ, worthless person.]

-rakjan, wv. (188), to strech, in uf-r. [OHG. recchen, MHG. NHG. recken, Du. rekken, to strech, > NE. rack.]

rann, prt. of rinnan.

rann, past tense of rinnan.

-rannjan (32), wv. (188), to cause to run, in ur-r. [Caus. of rinnan.[Pg 195] OHG. rennan, rennen, MHG. rennen, to cause to run (especially a horse), NHG. rennen (intr.), to run, race.]

rasta, f. (97), stage (of a jurney), mile; Mt. V, 41. [< √ ras, to stay (> also razn (w. suff. na), n., house) + suff. -tô-. OHG. rasta, MHG. raste, rast, f., rest, stage of a jurney, NHG. rast, f., rest, repose. Cf. OE. rest, ræst (w. suff. -ti-), ME. NE. rest.]

-raþjan (?), stv. (177, n. 2), in ga-r.

raþjô, f. (112), number, account. [< √ of -raþjan + suff. -jôn-. OHG. redia, reda, MHG. rede, f., account, speech, NHG. rede, f., speech. ra-þ- = E. -red; s. hund. (Cp. Brgm., I, § 214; II, § 300.)]

-raubôn, wv. (190), to rob, in bi-r. [OE. (bi-)rêafian, ME. (bi)reve, NE. (be-)reav.]

raupjan, wv. (188), to pluck, w. acc.; Mk. II, 23. [OHG. roufen, MHG. roufen, röufen, NHG. raufen, to pluck, pul.]

*rauþs (gen. raudis; 74, n. 2), adj. (124), red. [OE. rêad, ME. rêd, NE. red.]

Reccarêd (6, n. 2), pr. n.

Reccarêd (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 2), proper noun.

-rêdan, rv. (181), (only in cpds.), to counsel, deliberate. [OE. ræ̂dan, ME. rede, reade, to advise, rule, NE. rede, read (Shak.), > OE. ræ̂d, m., ME. rede, reade, NE. (obs.) read, rede, advice, counsel, > OE. ræ̂dan (wv.), ME. rêde, to interpret, NE. read.]

reiki, n. (95), power, authority, rule. [< reiks, sb. OE. rîce (rîci), n., ME. riche, rike, reign, kingdom, NE. -ric (ME. -rich, OE. -rîce), in bishopric.]

reikinôn, wv. (190), to rule, guvern. [< reiks, sb.]

reiks, m. (117), ruler, prince. [Stem reik-, reika-, < Keltic rîg-, ruler. Cp. reiks, adj.]

reiks, adj. (130, n. 2), mighty, noble, honorabl; superl. (sa)reikista, (the) mightiest, prince; Mk. III, 22. [OE. rîce, powerful, mighty, of high rank, ME. riche, rice, powerful, also rich (by confusion w. the Fr. riche), NE. rich. Cp. reiks, sb.]

reiran, wv. (193), to trembl; Mk. V, 33.

-reisan, stv. (172, n. 1), to rize, in ur-r. [OE. rîsan, ME. rise, NE. rize.]

rignjan, wv. (188), to rain; Mt. V, 45. [< rign, n. (= OE. regn, m., ME. rein, NE. rain). OE. regnian, ME. reine, NE. rain.]

rikan, stv. (176, n. 1), to heap up, collect. [Its √ appears (w. abl.) in OE. raca, m. (or racu, f.?), ME. rake, NE. rake, an instrument for scraping erth.]

riqis, riqiz (78, n. 1), n. (94), darkness; Mt. VI, 23. II. Cor. IV, 6. [ON. rökkr, n., darkness.]

riqizeins, adj. (124), dark, darkend; Mt. VI, 23. [< riqis + suff. -eina-.]

rinnan, stv. (174, n. 1), to run; Mk. V, 6; w. in w. acc.; Mk. V, 13.—Cpds. ga-, ur-r. [OE. rinnan, uzually irnan, eornan, iernan, ME. rinne, renne, rynne, eorne, NE. run.]

rinnô (32), f. (112), brook. [< rinnan. OHG. rinnâ, f., aqueduct, MHG. rinne, f., aqueduct, gutter, NHG. rinne, f., gutter.]

*riureis (127; or riurs?; 130 and n. 2), adj., temporal, mortal; II. Cor. IV, 11. 18. [ON. ryrr, adj., small, poor.]

rôdjan, wv., (188), to speak, (1) abs.; Mk. I, 34. V, 35. II. Cor. IV, 13; so w. dat. of pers.; Mk. IV, 34; or bi w. acc., and in w. dat.; Lu. II, 38; or us w. dat., and in andwaírþja w. gen.; II. Cor. II, 17; or du w. dat. of pers.; Lu. II, 20. (2) w. acc. of th. (in pass. the nom.; s. also below); Mk. II, 7. V, 36; and bi w. acc.; Lu. II, 33. (3) w. acc. of th. and dat. of the[Pg 196] pers. addrest; Mk. II, 2; or du w. dat. of the pers. addrest; Lu. II, 17. 18. 50; and instr. dat.; Mk. IV, 33. [OE. rêdan, ME. rede, to speak.]

Rûma (15, n. 2), pr. n., Rome. [< Ῥώμη.]

Rûmôneis (15, n. 2), pr. n., Romans. [< Ῥωμαῖοι.]

-rûmnan (78, n. 4), wv. (194), in ur-r. [< rûms.]

rûms (15), m. (? 91), room, place; Lu. II, 7. [OE. rûm, n., ME. roum, NE. room. Cp. Brgm. I, § 59.]

rûna (15), f. (97), mystery, counsel; Mk. IV, 11. [OE. rûn, f., mystery, counsel, rûne, ME. roune, NE. roun (obs.; rûne < the Scand.).]

runs (32; 49), m. (101, ns. 1. 2), a running, issue; Mk. V, 25. [< rinnan. OE. ryne, m., a running, course, ME. rune, NE. run.]

Sa, m., sô, f.; þata, n. (153), (1) dem. prn. (for οὕτος, ἐκείνος, etc.), this, that, (for αὐτός) he, she, it, -self—(S. my Gothic Syntax, § 63 et seq.)—, (a) uzed alone; Mt. V, 30. 32. 37. VI, 8. 26. 29. 32. Mk. I, 19. 25. 27. 31. 42. II, 7. 8. 21. III, 35. IV, 4. 7. 18. 20. 30. 41. V, 12. 23. 32. 43. Lu. II, 6. 12. 34. II. Cor. I, 12. 17. II, 16. V, 2. 5. 15. Skeir. VII, a. d. For in þis inuh þis, s. in, (1); (b) w. sbs. or adjs. (follg. or prec.); Mt. V, 19. Mk. IV, 13. Lu. II, 15. 17. 19. 25. 38. 51. II. Cor. I, 15. III, 10. IV, 1. 4. 7.—þata silbô, this same thing; II. Cor. II, 1. 3; (c) w. a rel. prn.; Mt. V, 32. Mk. V, 15. Lu. II, 33. II. Cor. V, 21. Skeir. VII, d. (2) art. (for ὁ, ἡ, τό), the, (a) w. sbs. (unmodified; cp. b, β, and e, β, below), (α) appellativs; Mt. V, 20. 25. 47. VI, 2. 23. Mk. I, 10. 13. 15. 20. 22. 29. 31. 34. 42. 45. II, 4. 5. 6. 9. 10. 16. 20. 21. 22. 28. III, 9. IV, 7. 15. 16. 17. 19. 20. 27. 28. 33. 36. 39. V, 4. 8. 11-14. 22. 29. 31. 35. 36. 38-42. Lu. II, 7. Skeir. VII, b. c; (β) pr. ns. (where the E. often omits it, especially when the pr. n. occurs alone); Mt. V, 20. Mk. I, 16. III, 6. 17. Lu. II, 7. 10. 13. 15. 17. 20. 25. 27. 40. 43. 50. II. Cor. I, 4. 11. 12. III, 16. IV, 1. 2. 7. V, 1. 4. 5. 8. 17; (b) w. adjs. (poss. prns. or is), (α) alone (chiefly uzed as sbs.; so, sumtimes, w. other adjs. or ptcs.); Mt. V, 21. 33. 37. 39. 47. Mk. III, 27. V, 15. 16. II. Cor. II, 6. 7. III, 10. IV, 15. 17. V, 10. 17; (β) w. sbs. (the art. prec. the adj. and its sb.); Mt. V, 26. 35. Mk. I, 24. II, 21 (sc. plat). Lu. I, 8. II. Cor. I, 6. III, 13. 18. IV, 13. V, 1. Skeir. VII, d. (the art. standing between the sb. and its adj.) Mt. V, 19. 29. VI, 11. Mk. I, 11. 26. 27. II, 22. IV, 20. V, 7. 13. Lu. II, 26. II. Cor. I, 6. (or between the adj. and its sb.) Mk. V, 33. Lu. II, 19. (the art. standing before the sb. and its adj.) Mk. II, 9. III, 5. 9. 27. V, 34. Lu. II, 41. 48. II. Cor. I, 18. III, 5. (the art. prec. the first of two qualifying adjs.) Skeir. VII, d; (c) w. nums., (α) alone; Mk. IV, 10; (β) attributivly; Skeir. VII, b; (d) w. advs. or adv. (prep.) frases, (α) without sb.: Mk. I, 7. 19. 36. 38. II, 25. 26. IV, 10. 11. 15. 16. 18. 31. V, 40. II. Cor. I, 4. 20. V, 2. 16; (β) w. other words; Mt. V, 45. 48. VI, 1. 23. Mk. I, 38. IV, 19. 31. V, 4. II. Cor. III, 10. IV, 16; (e) w. a ptc. (chiefly uzed as sb.; so sumtimes w. an adj.), (α) without sb.; Mt. V, 40. 44. 46. Mk. I, 32. II, 17. III, 22. 34. IV, 3. 14. 16. 20. 24. V, 14. 32. Lu. II, 18. 21. 38. 47. II. Cor. I, 1. 20. II, 2. 14. 15. III, 11. 13.[Pg 197] IV, 3. 4. 13. 14. 18. V, 4. 12. 18; (β) w. sbs. or adjs. uzed as sbs. (the art. preceding the sb. and its ptc.) Mk. V, 30. 33. 36. Lu. II, 16. (and another art. before the ptc.) Mk. III, 3. II. Cor. I, 1. (or the ptc. and its sb.) Skeir. VII, d. (the art. standing between the sb. and its ptc.) Mk. III, 22. IV, 15. Lu. II, 15. 21. II. Cor. I, 1. 8. 9. III, 7; (f) w. a sb. or prn. in the gen., a sb. being easily understood; Mt. V, 46. VI, 7. Mk. I, 19. II, 14. III, 17. 18. Lu. II, 49; (g) a n. art. may precede any word or words and even a hole sentence uzed substantivly (cp. b, α, and d, abuv); II. Cor. I, 17. 20. II, 6. [This prn. refers to two Indo-Germanic stems, so-: sâ- and to-d. The former is found in sa, sô, and in OE. sĕ (chiefly art., but occasionally and orig. dem. prn.), m., ME. se. See also si and þata.]

sabbatô (indecl.) or sabbatus, m. (120, n. 1), the Sabbath; Mk. II, 27; dat. sg. -ô; Mk. II, 28; gen. pl. -ô; Mk. I, 21. II, 23. 27. III, 2. [< σάββατον < Hebrew shabbáth, rest, sabbath-day.]

sa-ei, rel. prn. (157) m.; f. sôei, sei (157, 3); n. þatei (for *þataei); that, who, whosoever, (1) for ὅς; Mt. VI, 8. Mk. I, 2. 7. 44. II, 4. 24. 26. III, 13. 17. 19. IV, 9. 16. 24. 31. V, 3. 33. 41. Lu. II, 11. 15. 20. 25. 31. 50. II. Cor. I, 4. 6. 10. 13. 17. 19. II, 3. 4. 10. IV, 4. V, 4. 10. Skeir. VII, a. b. c. d. (2) for ὅς ἄν (w. subj.), w. prs. indic.; Mt. V, 21. 22. Mk. III, 35. IV, 25; w. prs. opt.; Mk. IV, 22. (3) for ὅστις; Mk. IV, 20. Lu. II, 4. 10. (4) for the Gr. art. (w. prs. ptc.), w. prs. or prt. indic. or opt.; Mt. VI, 4. 18. Lu. II, 33. II. Cor. I, 4. II, 2; (w. aor. ptc.) w. prt. indic.; Mk. V, 16. 18. Lu. II, 17. II. Cor. IV, 6. V, 5. (w. sb.), w. prs. opt.; Mt. VI, 12.—When a rel. clause contains two vs., both may occur in the indic. mood, or the first stands in the indic. and the second in the opt.; Mt. V, 19.—The rel. saei is sumtimes preceded by the dem. (art.) sa; see sa, (1), (c).—It is uzually assimilated to the case of its antecedent; Lu. II, 20.—For its function as a conj., s. afar; in, (1) and (2), (c); þaírh; und; also þammei, þizei, and þatei.

saggws, m. (101), song, singing. [< siggwan. OE. sǫng, m., ME. songe, sang, NE. song.]

sa-h, dem. prn. (154) m.; f. sôh; n. þatuh (for þata-uh), and this, and that, and he; this, that, the same; he; who, which, (1) referring to a prec. rel. clause; Mt. V, 19. (2) follg. sum other antecedent; Lu. II, 38; so often as a connectiv before accessory clauses; Lu. II, 36. 37.—sah occurs frequently with þan; Mk. III, 11. Lu. II, 2. 37. II. Cor. I, 17. IV, 15. [< sa + uh.]

sa-ƕaz-uh, indef. rel. prn. (164, n. 1); s. þisƕazuh.

sai, interj. (204, n. 2; 219), see! behold! lo!; Mk. I, 2. II, 24. III, 32. 34. IV, 3. V, 22. Lu. II, 10. 34. 48. II. Cor. V, 17; suns sai, immediately; Mk. I, 12. [< sa + -i (a mutilated form of -ei), prop. a dem. particl attacht for emfasis.]

saian (saijan; 22 and n. 1), rv. (182), to sow, (1) abs.; Mt. VI, 26. Mk. IV, 4. (2) w. acc. (nom. in pass.); Mk. IV, 14. 15 (nom. implied). 32. (3) w. instr. dat. (fraiwa); Mk. IV, 3.—Followd by ana w. dat.; Mk. IV, 16. 20; or acc.; Mk. IV, 31; in w. acc.; Mk. IV, 18; —prs. ptc. (uzed as sb.) saiands, sower; Mk. IV, 3. 14.—Cpd. in-s. [OE. sâwan; (cp. waian), ME. sowe, NE. sow.]

[Pg 198]

saíhs, card. num. (141), six. [OE. seox, six, ME. NE. six.]

saíhsta, ord. num. (146), sixth. [< saíhs. OE. sixta, ME. sixte, NE. sixth (the th by influence of the numerals w. regular th).]

saíƕan (34, n. 1), stv. (176, n. 1), to see, look, behold, take heed, take heed to, (1) abs.; Mt. VI, 4. 6. 18. Mk. IV, 12. (2) w. acc.; Mt. V, 28. Mk. IV, 24. V, 22. 32. Lu. II, 15. 26. 30; and a ptc. in acc.; Mk. V, 31. (3) w. faírraþrô (afar, afar off); Mk. V, 6. (4) w. du w. inf.; Mt. V, 28. (5) w. an indir. question; Mk. IV, 24. V, 14. (6) w. a clause introduced by ei; Mk. I, 44.—Cpds. at-, bi-, ga-, in-, þaírh-, us-s. [OE. sêon (< *sehwǫn), ME. see, NE. see.]

-sailjan, wv. (188), to cord, in in-s. [< *sail (= OE. sâl, m., ME. sôl, OHG. MHG. NHG. seil, n., rope, cord). OE. sæ̂lan, to fasten with a cord.]

sáir (20, n. 2), n. (94), sorrow, travail. [Prop. n. adj. uzed as sb. (m. *sairs = OE. sâr, ME. sore, NE. sore, painful, >) OE. sâr, n., pain, ME. sore, NE. sore.]

saiwala, f. (97), soul, life; Mt. VI, 25. Mk. III, 4. Lu. II, 35. [OE. sâwol, sâul, f., ME. sawle, soule, NE. soul.]

saiws, m. (101, n. 1), sea, lake, marsh. [OE. sæ̂ (infl. also sæ̂w-), m. f., sea, lake, ME. sê, NE. sea.]

sakan, stv. (177, n. 1), to strive, quarrel, rebuke.—Cpds. and-, ga-s. [OE. sacan, ME. -sake (in cpds.), to strive, contend. Cp. frisahts and sakjô.]

sakjô (35), f. (112), strife. [< sakan + suff. -jôn-. Cf. OE. sæc(c), f. (jâ-stem), strife, contest; sacu, f. (â-stem), strife, hostility, ME. sake, strife, litigation, gilt, cause, (for ... sake =) NE. (for ...) sake.]

sakkus (58, n. 1), m. (105), sack, sackcloth. [< Lt. saccus (or) < Grk. σάκκος < Hebrew saq, sackcloth, sack for corn.]

salbôn, wv. (189), to salv, anoint; w. acc.; Mt. VI, 17. II. Cor. I, 21. [< *salba (= OE. sealf, f., ME. salfe, salve, NE. salv, sb.). OE. sealfian, ME. salfe, salve, NE. salv, vb.]

salbôns, f. (103, n. 1), salv, ointment. [< salbôn + suff. -ô-ni-.]

saltan, rv. (179, n. 1), to salt. [OE. sealtan, OHG. salzan, MHG. salzen, (NHG. salzen, wv., but pp. gesalzen), rv., to salt. Cf. OE. sealt, ME. salt, n. (also adj.), NE. salt > ME. salte, NE. salt, wv.]

sama, adj. prn. (132, n. 3; 156), same, the same, (1) without sb., and with the art.; Mt. V, 46. 47. Skeir. VII, d. (2) w. a sb., and with the art.; Lu. II, 8. II. Cor. I, 6. III, 14. IV, 13. [ON. samr, adj., > ME. same, NE. same. Cf. OE. sǫme, same, adv.: swâ s., just as.]

sama-fraþjis, adj. (126), like-minded.

sama-fraþjis, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), like-minded.

sama-lauþs (74, n. 1), adj. (124), of the same size or quantity, as much. [-lauþs < √ of liudan.]

sama-leikô, adv., equally, likewise; Mk. IV, 16. Skeir. VII, c. [< sama-leiks = OHG. samolîh, samelîh, MHG. same-, seme-, sem-lîch, alike, agreeing together. For -leiks, s. galeikô.]

samaþ, adv. (213, n. 2), to the same place, together. [< sama + suff. -þ. OE. sǫmod, samod, ME. samed, OHG. samet, MHG. NHG. samt, adv., together, and prep., together with.]

sandjan (74, n. 3), wv. (187), to send.—Cpds. in-, us-s. [Causal of *sinþan, to go. OE. sendan, ME. sende, NE. send.]

Satana, pr. n., Satan; Mk. III, 26; or Satanas; Mk. III, 23. IV, 15;[Pg 199] dat. -in; Mk. I, 13. II. Cor. II, 11; acc. -an; Mk. III, 23. [< Σατανᾶς < Hebrew sátán, enemy.]

Satana, proper noun, Satan; Mark III, 26; or Satanas; Mark III, 23. IV, 15;[Pg 199] dative -in; Mark I, 13. II Corinthians II, 11; accusative -an; Mark III, 23. [< Σατανᾶς < Hebrew sátán, enemy.]

satjan, wv. (187), to set, place, put; Mk. IV, 21.—Cpds. af-, at-, ga-, faúra-ga-s. [Causal of sitan. OE. settan, ME. sette, NE. set.]

saþs, gen. sadis (74, n. 3), adj. (124), sated, ful; s. waírþan, to be fild; Skeir. VII, d. [Prop. an old ptc. in-to-. OE. sæd, ME. sad, sed, NE. sad (obs.) satiated.]

saúhts (58, n. 2), f. (103), sickness, disease; Mk. I, 34. III, 15. [< √ of siuks + suff. -ti-. OE. suht (?), f., ME. suht, disease, ilnes, OHG. MHG. suht, NHG. sucht, f., disease, malady.]

sauil (26), n. (94), sun; Mk. I, 32.

Saúlaúmôn, pr. n., Solomon; Mt. VI, 29. [< Σολομών.]

Saúlaúmôn, proper noun, Solomon; Mt. VI, 29. [< Σολομών.]

-sauljan (24, n. 1), wv. (188), to soil, in bi-s. [Cp. OE. sylian (< sol, orig. *sul-, n., mire), ME. sulie, NE. sully.]

-saulnan (24, n. 1), wv. (194), in bi-s.

Saúr (24, n. 5), pr. n., a Syrian; dat. pl. -im; Lu. II, 2. [< Σύρος.]

saúrga, f. (97), care; Mk. IV, 19. sorrow, grief; II. Cor. II, 1. 3. 7. [OE. sorh, sorg, f., ME. sorwe, NE. sorrow.]

saúrgan, wv. (193), to sorrow, be grievd; II. Cor. II, 4; w. bi w. acc., to be anxious about, take thought for; Mt. VI, 28. [< saúrga. OE. sorgian (transferd to the Second Conjugation), ME. sorwe, NE. sorrow.]

sauþs, m. (101), sacrifice. [ON. sauðr, m., sheep, prop. an animal to be immolated, a victim, < √ of sjóða (prt. sauð) = OE. sêoðan (prt. sêað), ME. sethe, NE. seeth.]

sei, f. prn. (157, n. 3); s. saei.

Seidôna, pr. n. f., Sidon; acc. -a; Mk. III, 8. [< Σιδών.]

Seidôna, proper noun, feminine, Sidon; accusative -a; Mk. III, 8. [< Σιδών.]

Seimôn, Seimônus, pr. n., Simon; Mk. I, 36; gen. -is; Mk. I, 16. 29. 30; dat. -a; Mk. III, 16; acc. -a (Gr. infl.); Mk. III, 18; or -u; Mk. I, 16. [< Σίμων.]

Seimôn, Seimônus, proper noun, Simon; Mk. I, 36; gen. -is; Mk. I, 16. 29. 30; dat. -a; Mk. III, 16; acc. -a (Gr. infl.); Mk. III, 18; or -u; Mk. I, 16. [< Σίμων.]

seina, refl. prn. gen.; dat. sis, acc. sik, uzed for all genders and numbers, (I) alone, (1) where the Gr. has no corresponding prn., (a) m., (α) sing.; Mt. V, 42. VI, 29; (β) pl. Mk. II, 6. IV, 12. 41. Lu. II, 20. 43; (b) fem., (α) sg.; Mk. III, 20; (β) pl.; Mk. IV, 1. V, 21; (c) n., (α) sg. (not found in our 'Selections.') (β) pl.; Lu. II, 39. 45; (2) for ἑαυτῴ, αὑτῴ, αὐτῴ, etc., (a) m., (α) sg., Mk. II, 26. III, 14. 25. 34. V, 4. 5. 30. 37. 40. II. Cor. V, 19. Skeir. VII, a; (β) pl.; Mk. II, 8. 19. IV, 17. II. Cor. V, 15. (II) w. silba, m., (α) sg.: sis silbin, sik silban, himself; Mk. III, 26. V, 30; (β) pl.: sis silbam, (sik silbans), themselvs; II. Cor. V, 15. (III) w. missô: seina missô, one another; sis missô, one another; m. pl.; Mk. I, 27. IV, 41. Lu. II, 15. [Wanting in E., but see under seins.] OHG. gen. sg. (only m. n.) sîn; dat. wanting; acc. sih (sg. and pl.), MHG. gen. sg. sîn, acc. sg. and pl. sich, NHG. gen. sg. sein (poet.); dat. acc. sich (for all genders and numbers).

seins, poss. prn. (151), uzed for all genders and numbers, his, theirs, their, etc., (1) alone, referring to a f. in sg.; Mk. V, 26. (2) w. a sb., referring, (a) to a m. in sg.; Mt. V, 22. 28. 32. 45. VI, 27. 29. Mk. I, 6. 41. III, 7. 9. IV, 2. 3. 34. Lu. II, 3. 28. II. Cor. II, 14. Skeir. VII, c. d; (b) to a m. in pl.; Mt. VI, 2. 5. 7. 16. Mk. I, 5. 20. II, 6. V, 17. Lu. II, 8. 39; (c) to a f. in sg.; Lu. II, 7. 19. 36. 51. [< stem of seina. OE. sîn (referring to all genders and numbers;) OHG. sîn[Pg 200] (referring to a m. or n. sg. only), MHG. sîn, NHG. sein, his, its.]

seiteina (17, n. 2).

seiteina (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 2).

seiþus, adj. (131), late. [Cf. -seiþs (s. þanaseiþs).]

seiþus, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), late. [Cf. -seiþs (s. þanaseiþs).]

sêls, adj. (130), good, kind. [OE. sæ̂l, ME. sel, adj., good, >-sæ̂lig, ME. seli, happy, blessed, (NE. silly), OHG. sâlig, MHG. sæ̂lec (-g-), NHG. selig, adj., happy, blessed.]

sêtun, prt. of sitan.

sêtun, past tense of sitan.

si, pers. prn.; s. is. [Cf. OE. sêo (< si + the fem. ending-u), ME. sche, NE. she. (Cp. Brgm., II, § 110.)]

sibja, f. (97, n. 1), relationship. [OE. sib(b), f., ME. sib, sibbe, NE. sib (obs., but dial.), relationship, frendship, luv, peace.]

-sibjôn, wv. (190), in ga-s. [< stem of sibja. OE. ge-sibbian, wv., to appease, please.]

sibun, indecl. num. (141), seven; Lu. II, 36. [OE. seofon, ME. seven, NE. seven.]

sibuntêhund, num. (143), seventy. [< sibun + têhund. Cp. Brgm., III, § 179.]

sidôn, wv. (190), to practis. [< sidus. OHG. (gi-)sitôn, to do, prepare.]

sidus, m. (105), custom, manner. [OE. siodu, m., custom, manner, morality, ME. side-, in side-ful, adj., modest, OHG. situ, m., MHG. site, m., f. (rare), NHG. sitte, f., custom, manner.]

siggwan (68), stv. (174, n. 1), (1) abs., to sing. (2) w. acc. (nom. in pass.), to read (aloud); II. Cor. III, 15.—Cpd. us-s. [OE. singan, ME. singe, NE. sing.]

sigis, n. (94), victory. [OE. sigor, m. (from stem in -iz; hense orig. n.), beside sige, m. (as if < sigi-z; cp. Brgm., II, § 132, Rem. 2), ME. siᵹe, victory, OHG. sigi, -u, m., MHG. sige, sic (-g-), NHG. sieg, m., victory.]

Sigis-mêres (6, n. 2), pr. n.

Sigis-mêres (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 2), proper noun.

sigqan (siggqan), stv. (174, n. 1), to sink.—Cpd. ga-s. [OE. sincan (intr.), ME. sinke, NE. sink (tr. and intr.).]

sigljan, wv. (188), to seal, w. acc.; II. Cor. I, 22. [< Lt. sigillare, to seal.]

sigljô, n. (110), seal. [< sigljan.]

sigljô, n. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), seal. [< sigljan.]

sihu? (20, n. 1), acc. n. (106), victory. [Cf. sigis.]

sijau, siju, sijum, etc., v. (204).

sijau, siju, sijum, etc., v. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

sik, refl. prn.; s. seina.

sik, reflexive pronoun; s. seina.

-silan, wv. (193), in ana-s. [Cognate with, or < Lt. silere, to be silent.]

silba, prn. (132, n. 3; 156), self, (1) uzed alone; II. Cor. I, 4. 9. (2) w. a poss. prn., where it stands in the gen. (like Lt. ipsius w. a poss. prn.); Lu. II, 35. (3) w. a pers. prn.; Mk. I, 44. III, 26. V, 30. II. Cor. I, 9. III, 1. 5. IV, 2. 5. V, 12. 15. (4) w. a dem. prn.; as, þata silbô, this very thing; II. Cor. II, 1. 3. (5) w. a sb. Mk. IV, 28. [OE. seolf, self, ME. seolf, self (infl. -v-), NE. self.]

Silbânus (5, a; 54, n. 1), pr. n., Silvanus; acc. -u; II. Cor. I, 19. [< Σιλουανός.]

silba-wiljis, adj. (92, n. 4), of one's own accord. [-wiljis < wiljan.]

silda-leikjan, wv. (188), to be astonisht, be amazed, to wonder, marvel; Mk. I, 27. V, 20. Lu. II, 48; w. ana w. dat.; Lu. II, 33; bi w. acc.; Lu. II, 18. [< sildaleiks (= OE. sellîc, for seld-lîc, ME. sellich), adj., strange, wonderful, marvelous, < silda- (OE. seld, adj., rare, strange, ME. selde, pl., few; cp. OE. seldan, ME. selde, prop. dat. of seld) + -leiks.]

silubr, n. (94), silver, muney. [OE. seolfor, siolfur, ME. seolver, silver, NE. silver.]

simlê, adv. (214, n. 1), onse, formerly. [OE. simle, symle, ME. simle, adv., ever, always.]

[Pg 201]

sinaps, m. (91; or sinap, n.? 94), mustard; Mk. IV, 31. [< σίναπι, n., mustard.]

sineigs (10, n. 5), adj. (138 and 139), old, elder. [< *sina- (s. sinteins), adj., old, + suff. -eiga-.]

sinteinô, adv., ever, always, continually; Mk. V, 5. II. Cor. IV, 10. 11. V, 6. [< sinteins + suff. -ô.]

sinteins, adj. (124), daily; Mt. VI, 11. [< sin- (for sina-; s. sineigs), ever, + -teina-; sin- = OE. sin-in sin-niht, f., eternal night; sin-grêne, ME. sin-, sen-grene, NE. sengreen, the houseleek, lit. 'evergreen'.]

sipôneis, m. (92), pupil, disciple; Mk. II, 15. 16. 18. 23. 24. III, 7. 9. IV, 34. V, 31. Skeir. VII, d.

sipônjan, wv. (187; 188), to be a disciple. [< sipôneis.]

sis, prn.; s. seina.

sis, as needed; s. seina.

sitan, stv. (176, n. 1), to sit; Mk. II, 6. V, 15; w. at w. dat.; Mk. II, 14; bi w. acc.; Mk. III, 32. 34; in w. dat.; Lu. II, 46.—Cpds. bi-, ga-s. [OE. sittan (< *sittjan; the j occurs in the prs. tense only; prt. sæt, etc.), ME. sitte, NE. sit.]

siujan, wv. (187), to sew; Mk. II, 21. [< a lost sb. OE. siowian, seowian, ME. sewe, NE. sew.]

siukan, stv. (173, n. 1), to be sick, be il, be weak.

siuks, adj. (124), sick, il, diseast, weak. [OE. sêoc, ME. sêk, sek, sic, NE. sick.]

siuns (42, n. 3), f. (103), the sense of sight, sight; II. Cor. V, 7. [< saíƕan + suff. -ni-; cp. Brgm., I, § 441.]

siuþ = sijuþ; s. sijau.

skaban, stv. (177, n. 1), to shave. [OE. sceafan, scafan, ME. schave, NE. shave.]

skadus, m. (105), shade, shadow; Mk. IV, 32. [OE. sceadu (follg. a- or wa-stems, but orig. < stem in -u-), f., ME. schadowe, schade, NE. shadow, shade.]

-skadweins (14, n. 1), f. (103, n. 1), a shading, in ga-sk. [< skadwjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

-skadwjan (14, n. 1), wv. (188), to cast a shade or shadow, in ufar-sk. [< skadus. OE. sceadwian, ME. schadowe, NE. shadow.]

skaidan, rv. (179), to sever, separate, put asunder. [OE. sc(e)âdan, ME. shede, wv., NE. shed, to part, pour, spil.]

-skaidnan, wv. (194), to becum parted, in ga-sk. [< skaidan.]

skalkinôn, wv. (190), to serv, do service; Mt. VI, 24. [< skalks.]

skalks, m. (91), servant; Lu. II, 29. II. Cor. IV, 5. [OE. scealc, m., ME. schalk (= NE. -shal, in marshal < French < G.), OHG. scalch, servant, MHG. schalc, servant, bondman, NHG. schalk, m., wag, rogue.]

skaman, wv. (193), always w. sik, to be ashamed, w. inf.; II. Cor. I, 8. [< *skama, f. (= OE. sceomu, sceamu, ME. schame, NE. shame). OE. sceǫmian (of the Second, orig. Third Class), sceamian, ME. schame, NE. shame.]

-skapjan, stv. (177, n. 2), to shape, make, in ga-sk. [OE. scieppan (< scieppjan; ie < ea < a), scyppan, ME. scheppe, schape, stv., schapie, wv., NE. shape.]

skattja (80), m. (108), muney-changer. [< skatts + suff. -jan-.]

skattja (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), m. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), money changer. [< skatts + suff. -jan-.]

skatts (69, n. 1), m. (91), muney, coin. [OE. sceat(t), scat, m., ME. scat, OHG. scaz, m., coin, muney, MHG. schaz (-tz-), NHG. schatz, m., trezure, sweet-hart.]

skaþjan, stv. (177, n. 2), to do scath, do wrong. [OE. sceððan, sceaðan, str. and wv., to harm, > sceðð, n., sceaða, m., ME. scathe, NE. scath, harm.]

skauda-raips, m. (91; or -raip, n.?[Pg 202] 94), shoe-lachet; Mk. I, 7. [Lit. a string for fastening a cuver, < skauda- (cp. MHG. NHG. schôte, f., husk, pod) + -raips = OE. râp, m., ME. rôp, NE. rope.]

skauns, adj. (130, n. 2), beutiful. [Lit. wurth seeing, noticeabl (cp. Brgm., § 95; also us-skaus and the follg. w.), OE. scêone (for *scêane) > scîene, scêne, ME. schene, adj., NE. sheen, adj. (beutiful, fair; poet.) and sb.]

-skawjan (42, n. 2), wv. (188), to behold, see, in us-sk. [< -skaus; s. us-skaus.]

skeinan, stv. (172, n. 1), to shine; II. Cor. IV, 6.—Cpd. bi-sk. [OE. scînan, ME. schine, NE. shine.]

skeireins, f. (103), a making clear, explanation, interpretation. [< skeirjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

-skeirjan, wv. (188), to make clear, in ga-sk. [< skeirs.]

skeirs (78, n. 2), adj. (129, n. 1), clear, evident, plain. [< √ of skein-an. OE. scîr, ME. shire, bright, clear, pure; cp. ON. skærr, sheer, bright, > ME. schere, NE. sheer.]

skêwjan, wv. (188), to go, walk; Mk. II, 23. [Cf. ON. skæva, to go, stride along.]

skip, n. (94), ship, boat; Mk. I, 19. 20. III, 9. IV, 1. 36. 37. V, 2. 18. 21. [OE. scip, n., ME. schip, NE. ship.]

-skiuban (56, n. 1), stv. (173, n. 1), to shuv, push, in af-sk. [OE. scûfan (irreg. only in the pres., but later also scêofan), ME. shuve, (NE. shuv < ME. (schowwyn =) schove, OE. scofian, to shuv), OHG. scioban, MHG. schieben, NHG. schieben, to shuv.]

skôhs, m. (91?), shoe; Mk. I, 7. [OE. sceôh, scôh, m., ME. shô, NE. shoe.]

-skreitan, stv. (172, n. 1), to shred, tear, rend (tr.), in dis-sk. [OS. scrîtan, to tear. Cp. Swiss schrîssen, to pull, tear.]

-skritnan, wv. (194), to rend (intr.), in dis-sk. [< -skreitan.]

-skritnan, v. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to tear (intr.), in dis-sk. [< -skreitan.]

skuggwa (68), m. (108), mirror. [< √ of skaus, which is containd also in OE. scûwa, m., shade, and in OHG. scûchar, mirror.]

skula, m. adj. (132), gilty; sb. (108), detter; Mt. VI, 12; sk. wisan w. acc. of th.: þatei skulans sijaima, that for which we ow, our dets; Mt. VI, 12; the crime being indicated by the gen.: to be gilty of, be in danger of; Mk. III, 29; the punishment being indicated by the dat.; Mt. V, 21. 22; or in w. acc.; Mt. V, 22. [< skulan. OE. (ge-)scola, OHG. scolo, MHG. schol, ge-schol, m., detter.]

skulan, prt.-prs. (200), (1) w. inf., to be about to be, to be one's duty, to be obliged, ow, shal, must; Lu. II, 49. II. Cor. II, 3. V, 10. (2) skuld ist, it behoovs, it is lawful; Mk. II, 24. III, 4. 26. [OE. sculan, prs. indic. sceal, prt. sceolde, ME. schal, prt. scholde, schulde, NE. shal, should.]

skûra (15), f. (97), shower; sk. windis, storm of wind; Mk. IV, 37. [Cf. OE. scûr, m., ME. shur, schowre, NE. shower.]

slahan, stv. (177, n. 1), to strike, beat, smite. [OE. slêan < *slahǫn < *slahan, to strike, slay, ME. slê (= slæ̂), NE. slay.]

slahs, m. (101), stroke, stripe; plague; Mk. V, 29. 34. [< slahan. OE. slege, m., ME. sleᵹe, blow; OHG. slag (a-stem; in comp. also i-stem: slegi-), MHG. slac (-g-), NHG. schlag, m., blow, stroke.]

-slauþjan, wv. (188), to cause to slide, in af-s.

-slauþnan, wv. (194), in af-s. [Correlativ to -slauþjan.]

-slauþnan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in af-s. [Correlativ to -slauþjan.]

[Pg 203]

slawan, wv. (193), to be silent, hold one's peace.—Cpd. ga-s.

slêpan (78, n. 3), rv. (179), to sleep, fall asleep, be asleep; Mk. IV, 27. V, 39; w. ana w. dat.; Mk. IV, 38. [OE. slæ̂pan (st. and wv.), ME. slepe (st. and wv.), NE. sleep (wv.), OHG. slâfan, MHG. slâfen, NHG. schlafen, stv., to sleep.]

slêps, m. (91, n. 2), sleep. [< slêpan. OE. slæ̂p, m., ME. slep(e), NE. sleep.]

-slindan, stv. (174, n. 1), to devour, in fra-s. [OHG. (far)-slintan, MHG. ver-slinden, NHG. verschlingen (ng for nd by influence of schlingen, to wind, twist), to devour.]

sliupan, stv. (173, n. 1), to slip. [OE. slûpan (for *slêopan; cp. -skiuban), ME. (æt)-slupe, OHG. sliofan, MHG. sliefen, NHG. schliefen, to slip. Cp. also E. slip.]

smakka (58, n. 1), m. (108), fig. [A foren word. Cp. Old Bulgarian smoky, fig.]

smals, adj. (124), small, litl. [OE. smæl, ME. smal, NE. small.]

-smeitan, stv. (172, n. 1), in ga-s. [OE. smîtan, to strike, be-s., to soil, pollute, ME. smite, to strike, be-s., to soil, pollute, NE. smite.]

snaga, m. (108), garment; Mk. II, 21.

snaiws, m. (91, n. 1), snow. [OE. snâ(w), m., ME. snow, NE. snow.]

sneiþan, stv. (172, n. 1), to cut, reap; Mt. VI, 26. [OE. snîðan, ME. sniðe, OHG. snîdan, MHG. snîden, NHG. schneiden, to cut.]

sniumjan, wv. (188), to hasten, make haste; Lu. II, 16. [< an adj. = OHG. sniumi, quick, fast (sniumo, adv., = OE. snêome, snîome, adv., quickly, immediately), < √ of sniwan.]

sniumundôs, compar. adv. (212, n. 2), more quickly. [< sniumundô, adv., quickly, (< adj. stem sniumunda- + adv. suff. -ô) + compar. suff. -is, < sniumun- (+ suff. -da-) < √ of sniwan + suff. -mun-.]

sniwan, stv. (176, n. 2), to hasten, go. [Cf. ON. snúa, stv., to turn; and OE. sneowan, wv., to hasten.]

snutrs, adj. (124), wise. [< stem snut- + suff. -ra-. OE. snot(t)or, snoter, ME. snoter, adj., wise, prudent.]

sôh, f. of sah.

sôkjan (35), wv. (186), to seek, seek for, ask for, desire, long for, (1) w. acc.; Mt. VI, 32. Mk. I, 37. III, 32. Lu. II, 44. 45. 48. 49. IV, 42. (2) w. miþ w. dat., to question with; Mk. I, 27. [OE. sêkan, ME. seke, (bi)seche, NE. seek, beseech. Cp. sakan.]

sôkns (35), f. (103), serch, inquiry, question. [< √ of sôkjan + suff. -ni-. OE. sôcen (w. suff. -na-), f., ME. soken, a seeking, inquiry.]

spaíkulâtur (5, a; 24, n. 2), m., spy, executioner. [< Lt. speculator, spy.]

sparwa, m. (108), sparrow. [OE. spearwa, ME. spar(o)we, NE. sparrow.]

spaúrds, f. (116), stadium, furlong, race-course. [OHG. spurt, f. (?), a stadium.]

spêdumists, superl. adj. (139, n. 1), the last. [< stem *spêduma(n)- (< spêþs + suff. -u-ma-n-) + suff. -ista; spêþs = OHG. spâti, MHG. spæ̂te, NHG. spät, adj., late.]

speiwan, stv. (172, n. 1), to spit. [OE. spîwan, ME. spiwe, OHG. spîwan, spîan, MHG. spîen, NHG. speien, to spit. Cp. also OE. spiwian, speowan, ME. spewe, NE. spew.]

spilda, f. (97), (writing-) tablet; II. Cor. III, 3. [Cf. OE. speld, n., ME. speld, splinter, chip.]

spillôn, wv. (189), to tel a tale, tel, narrate; Mk. V, 16; to bring (good)[Pg 204] tidings; Lu. II, 10. [< spill (= OE. spell, n., a saying, narrativ, story, ME. spell, speech, preaching, NE. spel, an incantation). OE. spellian, ME. spelle, NE. spel.]

spinnan, stv. (174, n. 1), to spin; Mt. VI, 28. [OE. spinnan, ME. spynne, NE. spin.]

sprautô, adv. (211, n. 1), quickly, soon; Mt. V, 25.

stafs (56, n. 1), m. (101), element, rudiment. [OE. stæf, m., ME. staf, twig, staff, letter, NE. staff.]

staiga, f. (97), path, way, highway; Mk. I, 3. [< steigan. OHG. steiga, MHG. steige, f., an ascending road, NHG. steige, f., stile, staircase.]

stainahs, adj. (124), stony; Mk. IV, 5. 16. [< stains + suff. -ha (:ga). OHG. steinag, -ac, MHG. steinec (-g-), NHG. steinig, adj., stony.]

staineins, adj. (124), of stone, stony; II. Cor. III, 3. [< stains + suff. -eina-. OE. stæ̂nen, ME. stenen, OHG. steinîn, MHG. steinen, NHG. steinen (uzually steinern, w. dubl suff. -er-n), of stone.]

stains, m. (91), stone, rock; Mk. V, 5. II. Cor. III, 7.—Also uzed as a pr. n., Peter; Skeir. VII, a. [OE. stân, m., ME. stôn, NE. stone.]

staírnô, f. (112), star. [OE. steorra (rr < rn), m., ME. sterre, NE. star, OHG. sterno, sterro, MHG. sterne, sterre, also stern, a-stem, m., NHG. stern, m., star.]

-staldan, rv. (179), in ga-st.

-staldan, rv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in ga-st.

standan, stv. (177, n. 3), to stand, stand firm; Mk. III, 24. 25; w. in w. dat.; Mt. VI, 5; w. ûta; Mk. III, 31.—Cpds. af-, and-, at-, ga-, twis-, us-st. [A nasalized form < √ stat extended < sta. OE. stǫndan, standan, ME. stande, NE. stand. The orig. √ is seen in OHG. MHG. stân, stên, NHG. stehen, stv., to stand; and in staþs.]

staþs, gen. stadis (74 and notes), m. (101), sted, place; Mk. I, 35. 45. II. Cor. II, 14. Skeir. VII, b; an inn; Lu. II, 7; —jainis stadis (215), unto the other side (of the lake); Mk. IV, 35. [< √ of standan + suff. -þi-. OE. stede, m., ME. stede, NE. sted (insted = in sted).]

*staþs, gen. staþis, m. (? 91, n. 2), shore, land; Mk. IV, 1. [< √ of standan + suff. -þa- or -þi- (?). OE. stæð, n., bank, shore, ME. staðe, NE. staith.]

staua (26), f. (97), judgment; Mt. V, 21. 22. [< √ stâw: stôw; cp. stôjan.]

staua (26), m. (108), judge; Mt. V, 25. [< staua, f., + suff. -an-.]

staua-stôls, m. (91), judgment-seat; II. Cor. V, 10.

-staúrran, wv. (193), in and-st. [< a lost adj. (cp. OE. styrne, = Goth. *staúr-ni-, ME. sterne, NE. stern). OHG. storrên, MHG. storren, to be rigid, stand forth stif.]

stautan, rv. (179, n. 1), w. acc. and bi w. acc., to strike, smite; Mt. V, 39. [OHG. stôȥan, MHG. stôȥen, NHG. stossen, to thrust, push.]

steigan, stv. (172, n. 1), to mount, climb up.—Cpds. ufar-, us-st. [OE. stîgan, ME. stie, styᵹe, NE. sty, to mount, ascend.]

stibna, f. (97), voice; Mk. I, 3. 11. 26. V, 7. [OE. stefn, f., ME. steven, voice, NE. steven (obs.), an outcry.]

-stiggan, stv. (174, n. 1), to sting, in us-st. [OE. stingan, ME. stinge, NE. sting.]

stigqan (gg; 67, n. 1), stv. (174, n. 1), to thrust, strike. [ON. stökkva (for *stekkva), to jump, leap.]

stilan, stv. (175, n. 1), to steal; Mt. VI, 20. [OE. stelan, ME. stele, NE. steal.]

stiur (78, n. 2), m. (91, n. 4), steer, calf. [OE. stêor, m., ME. stêr, NE. steer.]

[Pg 205]

stiwiti, n. (95), endurance, patience; II. Cor. I, 6.

-stôdjan, wv. (188), only in the cpds. ana-, du-st. [< √ of standan.]

stôjan (26), wv. (186, n. 2), to judge, in ga-st. [< staua (cp. Brgm., I, § 179). OHG. stôwan, stouwan (prt. stôwida), MHG. stouwen, to scold, accuse.]

stôls, m. (91), stool, seat, throne; Mt. V, 34. [< √ of standan + suff. -la. OE. stôl, m., ME. stôl, NE. stool.]

straujan (42), wv. (187), to strew, spred. [< a sb. = OE. strêa(w), North. strê, n., ME. strâ(we), NE. straw. OE. strêge, strêawian, ME. streᵹe, strewe, NE. strew.]

striks, m. (91 or 100?), stroke, title; Mt. V, 18. [< √ of *streikan (= OE. strîcan, to move, go, ME. strike, NE. strike). OHG. strih, MHG. NHG. strich, m., stroke, line.]

stubjus, m. (105), dust. [OHG. stuppe, MHG. (ge)stüppe, (ge)stuppe, NHG. gestüpp, n., dust.]

-suljan, wv. (188), in ga-s. [< √ of OE. syll, f., ME. sille, NE. sil; and of Goth. suljô (prob. not < Lt. solea).]

suman, adv. (214, n. 1), onse, in times past. [< stem of sums.]

sums, indef. prn. (162), (1) alone, sum one, pl. sum; II. Cor. III, 1. (2) adj., certain, sum. (3) w. partit. gen., certain, sum; Mk. II, 6. V, 25.—sums..sums-uþ þan, the one ... the other; II. Cor. II, 16; sum raíhtis..anþaruþ-þan..jah sum, sum ... other ... and sum; Mk. IV, 4-8.—bi-sumata, in part; II. Cor. I, 14. II, 5. [OE. ME. sum, NE. sum.]

sundrô, adv., asunder, alone, privately; Mk. IV, 10. 34. [Cf. OE. sundor, ME. sunder, adv., especially, apart, OHG. suntar, MHG. sunder, adv., separately, especially; conj., but, rather; prep., without, NHG. sonder, prep., without.]

sundrô, adv., apart, alone, privately; Mk. IV, 10. 34. [Cf. OE. sundor, ME. sunder, adv., especially, separately, OHG. suntar, MHG. sunder, adv., separately, especially; conj., but, instead; prep., without, NHG. sonder, prep., without.]

sunja, f. (97, n. 1), truth; Mk. V, 33. II. Cor. IV, 2; acc. sg. is uzed adverbially (215). [< sunjis.]

sunjaba, adv. (210), truly, verily. [< sunjis + suff. -ba.]

Sunjai-friþas (88^a, n. 2), pr. n.

Sunjai-friþas (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__^a, n. 2), proper noun.

sunjis, adj. (126), tru. [stem sunja- for *sundja-< *sund- (< √ of im, sijau; s. wisan) = OE. sôð (for sǫnð), ME. sôth, NE. sooth.]

sunjôn, wv. (190), to verify, excuse. [< sunja.]

sunnô, f. (112), n. (? 110, n. 2), sun; Mt. V, 45. Mk. IV, 6. [OE. sunne, f., ME. sunne, NE. sun.]

suns, adv., soon, at onse, suddenly, immediately; Mk. I, 10. 12. 18. 20. 21. 28-31. 42. 43. II, 2. 8. 12. IV, 5. 15. 16. 29. V, 2. 13. 42. [Prop. compar. adv., < *sunis (cp. mins) < stem suna- + adv. compar. suffix -is. Cf. OE. sǫ̂na, ME. sone, NE. soon.]

suns, adv., soon, at once, suddenly, immediately; Mk. I, 10. 12. 18. 20. 21. 28-31. 42. 43. II, 2. 8. 12. IV, 5. 15. 16. 29. V, 2. 13. 42. [Prop. compar. adv., < *sunis (cp. mins) < stem suna- + adv. compar. suffix -is. Cf. OE. sǫ̂na, ME. sone, NE. soon.]

suns-aiw, adv., soon, immediately, straightway; Mk. III, 6. V, 29. 30. 36.

suns-aiw, adv., soon, immediately, right away; Mk. III, 6. V, 29. 30. 36.

suns-ei, conj. (218), as soon as, when.

sunus, m. (104), sun; Mt. V, 45. Mk. I, 1. 11. II, 10. 19. 28. III, 11. 17. 28. V, 7. Lu. II, 7. II. Cor. I, 19. [OE. sunu, m., ME. sune, sone, NE. sun.]

suts (15, n. 1), adj. (130), sweet, suitabl, patient. [OE. swête (jo-stem), ME. swete, NE. sweet.]

swa, adv., so, (1) alone; Mt. V, 19. VI, 9. 30. Mk. II, 7. 8. 12. IV, 40. Lu. II, 48. (2) correlativ: swaswê..swa jah, as ... so also; II. Cor. I, 5; swa..swaswê, so ... as; Mk. IV, 26. (3) w. an adj. or adv.; Skeir. VII, a. b. c. (4) swa swê, w. an adj. or adv. between them: swa filu swê, as much as; Skeir. VII, c; swa lagga ƕeila swê, as long as; Mk. II, 19; swa managai[Pg 206] swê, as many as; Mk. III, 10; swa managôs swê, Mk. III, 28. [OE. swâ, ME. swa, swo, so, NE. so.]

swa-ei, conj. (218), so that, that, therefore, (1) w. prs. indic.; Mk. II, 28. (2) w. prt. indic.; Mk. I, 27. Skeir. VII, c. (3) w. prt. opt.; II. Cor. III, 7. (4) w. acc. and inf.; II. Cor. II, 7.—wherefore, therefore; II. Cor. IV, 12. V, 16. 17.

-swaggwjan, wv. (188), to cause to swing, in af-sw. [Caus. of *swiggwan (= OE. swingan, ME. swinge, NE. swing). OE. swengan, ME. swenge, NE. swinge (for *swenge, as singe for *senge).]

swaíhra, m. (108), father-in-law. [Cf. OE. swêor (< sweohor < *swehur, a-stem), m., father-in-law, OHG. swehur, m., father-in-law, later also brother-in-law, MHG. sweher, NHG. schwäher, m., father-in-law.]

swaíhrô, f. (112), mother-in-law; Mk. I, 30. [Extended < stem *swaíhrô-. Cf. OE. sweger, f., OHG. swigar, MHG. swiger, NHG. schwieger (rare; uzually schwiegermutter), f., mother-in-law.]

-swaírban, stv. (174, n. 1), to wipe, in bi-sw. [OE. sweorfan, to rub, file, polish, ME. swerve, NE. swerv, to turn aside.]

swa-lauþs, adj. (161), so great, so much, such. [For -lauþs, s. sama-lauþs.]

swa-leiks, adj. (161), (1) alone; so w. the art., such a one; II. Cor. II, 6. 7. (2) w. a sb., without the art., such; Mk. IV, 33. II. Cor. I, 10. III, 4. [OE. swelc, swilc, < swâ-lîc, ME. swiche, swuch, NE. such.]

swamms (swams; 48; 80, n. 1), m. (91), spunge. [OE. swam, m., fungus, OHG. MHG. swam (mm), NHG. schwamm, m., spunge, fungus.]

swaran, stv. (177, n. 1), to swear, w. bi w. dat.; Mt. V, 34. 35. 36.—Cpds. bi-, ufar-s. [OE. swerian (the i, = j, occurs in the prs. tense only; prt. swore, pp. sworen), ME. swere, NE. swear.]

swarê, adv., without a cause, in vain; Mt. V, 22.

swarê, adv., without a reason, in vain; Mt. V, 22.

swartis (in A) or swartizl (in B), n. (? 94), that which is black, ink; II. Cor. III, 3. [< swarts + suff. -iz- (-zla- = NHG. -sal, -sel).]

swartis (in A) or swartizl (in B), n. (? 94), something that is black, ink; II. Cor. III, 3. [< swarts + suff. -iz- (-zla- = NHG. -sal, -sel).]

swarts, adj. (124), black; Mt. V, 36. [OE. sweart, ME. NE. swart.]

swa-swê, (1) adv., as, just as, as it wer, in like manner as, like, (a) uzed alone; Mt. V, 48. VI, 2. 5. 7. 12. 16. Mk. I, 22. II. Cor. II, 17. III, 5. Mk. I, 22. IV, 33. Lu. II, 20. 23. II. Cor. I, 5. 14. II, 17. III, 5. 13. 18. IV, 1; swaswê jah, even as, as also; II. Cor. I, 14; swaswê qiþan ist, as (= according to that which) is said; Lu. II, 24; (b) correlativ: swaswê..jah, as ... (so) also; II. Cor. I, 7. (2) conj. (218), so that, insomuch that, (a) w. prt. ind.; Mk. I, 45. II, 2. 12. III, 10. 20. IV, 32. 37; (b) w. prt. opt.; II. Cor. I, 8; (c) w. acc. and inf.; Mk. IV, 1.

swê, (1) adv., (a) in comparison, as, just as, like; Mt. VI, 29. Mk. I, 2. 10. 22. IV, 27. 31. II. Cor. II, 17. III, 1. V, 20. Skeir. VII, b; —analeikô swê, in like manner; Skeir. VII, a; swê..jah; Mt. VI, 10; (b) before numerals, about; Mk. V, 13. (2) conj. (218; temporal), as, when; Mk. IV, 36.

swêgnjan, wv. (188), to rejoice, triumf. [< a lost adj. or sb. *swêgna- < sweg- (cf. OE. swôgan, to sound, rustl; swêg, m., sound) + suff. -na-.]

sweiban (56, n. 1), stv. (172, n. 1), to cease. [Cf. OHG. (gi)-swiftôn, to be stil, be quiet; MHG. swiften (= OHG. *swiftjan), to silence,[Pg 207] appease, stil; NHG. be-schwichtigen (prop. Low G., w. ch for f), to silence, appease, stil.]

swein, n. (94), swine, pig; Mk. V, 11-14. 16. [Orig. adj., < *sû (= OE. sû, f., ME. sowe, NE. sow) + suff. -îna-. OE. swîn, n., hog, (wild) boar, (pl. swine), ME. swin, NE. swine.]

swêrs (78, n. 2), adj. (124), hevy, weighty; hense, grave, honord. [OE. swæ̂r, adj., hevy, difficult, OHG. swâri, MHG. swæ̂re, adj., hevy, grave, noble, NHG. schwer, adj., hevy, difficult, grievous.]

swês, adj. (124, n. 1), one's own; II. Cor. V, 10 (see note). [< swê- (allied to sei-na) + suff. -sa-. OE. swæ̂s, adj., one's own, domestic, intimate.]

swê-þáuh, adv. and conj. (218), yet, indeed, however; jabai sw. jah (s. jabai); II. Cor. V, 3; untê sw., for indeed, II. Cor. V, 19.

-swikunþjan, wv. (188), in ga-sw. [< swikunþs.]

-swikunþjan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), in ga-sw. [< swikunþs.]

swikunþs, adj. (124), evident, manifest, open; II. Cor. V, 11; sw. waírþan, to becum or be made manifest, appear; Mk. IV, 22. II. Cor. IV, 11. [< the pref. swi- (allied to swês) + kunþs.]

swiltan, stv. (174, n. 1), to die.—Cpd. ga-sw. [OE. sweltan, to die, ME. swelte, to faint, die, > the freq. sweltere, to faint away, NE. swelter, to be overcum with heat.]

swinþnan, wv. (194), to grow strong; Lu. II, 40. [< swinþs.]

swinþs, adj. (124), strong; Mk. III, 27. hole, helthy; Mk. II, 17.—Compar. swinþôza, mightier; Mk. I, 7. [OE. swîð (< *swinð), ME. swiþ, strong, OHG. *swind (in pr. ns.), MHG. swint (d-), strong, quick, NHG. schwind (obs., but dial.), ge-schwind, quick.]

swistar, f. (114), sister; Mk. III, 32. 35. [OE. sweostor, swustor, ME. suster and sister (by influence of ON. systir), NE. sister.]

swôgatjan, wv. (188), to sigh, groan; II. Cor. V, 2. 4. [Intensiv v. < swôg- in (OE. swôgan, ME. swowe > swoᵹne, swoune, NE. swoon) -swôgjan, to sigh; -atjan = OE. -ettan, NHG. -ezzen.]

swumfsl (80), n. (94), swimming-bath, pool. [For swumsl (so in MS., an amended form of swumslf. But the f is merely eufonic) < swimman (+ suff. -sla) = OE. swimman, ME. swimme, NE. swim.]

Symaíôn (39), pr. n., Simeon; Lu. II, 25. 34. [< Συμεών.]

synagôga-faþs, gen. -fadis, m. (101), ruler of a synagog; Mk. V, 22. 35. 36. 38. [< synagôgê + -faþs (only in cpds.), chief, master; s. brûþ-faþs.]

synagôgê (39), f., synagog; (gen. -ais;) dat. (-ai; or) -ein; Mk. I, 29 (-ên for -ein; 17, n. 1); or -ê (Gr. infl.); Mk. I, 23; acc. (-ein; or) -ên (Gr. infl.); Mk. I, 21. III, 1; dat. pl. -im; Mk. I, 39. [< συναγωγή, congregation.]

Syria, pr. n., Syria; gen. -ais; Lu. II, 2. [< Συρία.]

Syria, proper noun, Syria; gen. -ais; Lu. II, 2. [< Συρία.]

Tagl, n. (94), a singl hair, hair; Mt. V, 36. Mk. I, 6. [OE. tæᵹ(e)l, m., ME. tayl, NE. tail.]

tagr, n. (94), tear; II. Cor. II, 4. [OE. têar, teagor (< *taur, for *tahur), m., drop, tear, ME. tere, têr, NE. tear.]

tahjan, wv. (188), to tear, rend, w. acc.; Mk. I, 26.

taíhswa, f. (prop. str. adj.; Mk. XVI, 5. Col. III, 1), the right hand. [< taíhsws.]

taíhsws, adj. (124; uzually weak; 132; so also without the art.; cp. prec. word), right (not left); Mt. V, 29. 30. 39.—taíhswô (sc. han[Pg 208]dus), the right hand; Mt. VI, 3. [OHG. zeso (infl. zesw-), MHG. zese (infl. zesw-, zesew-), adj., right.]

taíhun, card. num. (141), ten. [OE. tên (< *teen for *tehen), têo (North.), ME. ten, NE. ten (-teen; s. fimf).]

taíhunda, ord. num. (146), the tenth. [< taíhun + suff. -da.] [OE. têoða (for *têonða), ME. tenþe (by influence of ten), NE. tenth.]

taíhun-têhund and -taíhund, card. num. (143; cp. 148), a hundred.

taiknjan, wv. (188), to betoken, point, show.—Cpd. us-t. [< taikns. OE. tâcnian, ME. tokne, to show, betoken, signify, NE. token (Shak.), to foretel, betoken, to make known.]

taikns, f. (103), token; sign, wonder, miracl; Lu. II, 12. 34. [< taik- (= OE. tâc-in *tâcian, to show, = tæ̂can, ME. teche, teache, NE. teach) + suff. -ni-. OE. tâcen (w. suff. -no-), n., token, mark, wonder, ME. tokne, NE. token.]

tainjô, f. (112), a basket of twigs, basket; Skeir. VII, c. d. [< tains + suff. -jôn-. OHG. zein(n)â, f., MHG. zeine, f. m., a basket of twigs.]

tains, m. (91), twig, branch. [OE. tân, m., twig, rod, staf, ON. teinn > ME. tein, staff.]

taíran, stv. (175, n. 1), only in dis-, ga-t. [OE. teran, ME. tere, NE. tear.]

taítôk, prt. of têkan.

taítôk, part of têkan.

taleiþa, f. (97), damsel; Mk. V, 41. [< ταλιθά < the Chaldean.]

talzjan, wv. (188), to teach, instruct.—talzjands, m. (prop. prsp.; 115), teacher. [< -tals (in un-tals, indocil, disobedient) < √ tal seen in OE. talu, number, narrativ, speech, ME. tale, NE. tale.]

-tamjan (33), wv. (187), to tame, in ga-t. [< an adj. = OE. tam, ME. tame, NE. tame; < √ of -timan. OE. tamian, temian, ME. tame, teme, NE. tame.]

taui (gen. tôjis; 26), n. (95), deed, work. [< taujan.]

taujan (26), wv. (187), (1) w. acc. (sumtimes understood), to do, make; Mt. V, 19. 46. 47. VI, 3. Mk. II, 24. III, 8. V, 32; armaiôn t., to do alms; Mt. VI, 1. 2. 3. (2) w. dubl acc., to make; II. Cor. IV, 2. (3) waíla t., to do wel, do good; Mt. V, 44. (4) w. bi w. acc., to do, make; Lu. II, 27. (5) w. acc. and inf., to make, cause; Mt. V, 32. (6) þiuþ t., to do good; Mk. III, 4; unþiuþ t., to do evil; Mk. III, 4; galiug t., to falsify, handl deceitfully; II. Cor. IV, 2.—Cpd. ga-t. [< √ of OE. tôl (w. instr. l-suff.), n., ME. tôl, NE. tool. Cf. OE. tawian, to prepare, dress, get redy, ME. tawe, to work, act upon, NE. taw, to prepare skins, curry, toil.]

-taúrnan, wv. (194), to rend (intr.), in ga-t. [< pp. stem of taíran.]

tawidêdeina, prt. of taujan.

tawidêdeina, part of taujan.

-teihan, stv. (172, n. 1), to show, in ga-t. [OE. têon (for tîon, for *tîhǫn), OHG. zîhan, MHG. zîhen, NHG. zeihen, to accuse of, charge with.]

Teimaúþaîus, pr. n., Timotheus; II. Cor. I, 1; acc. -u; II. Cor. I, 19. [< Τιμόθεος.]

Teitus, pr. n., Titus; acc. (-u or) -aún (Gr. infl.); II. Cor. II, 13. [< Τίτος.]

Teitus, proper name, Titus; accusative (-u or) -aún (Greek inflection); II. Cor. II, 13. [< Τίτος.]

têkan (ei for ê; 7, n. 2), rv. (181), to tuch, w. two dativs; Mk. V, 30.—Cpd. at-t. [ON. táka (prt. tók) > ME. take, NE. take.]

Theodemîr, Theodomirus (6, n. 2; 70, n. 1), pr. n.

Theodoricus (18, n. 1; 70, n. 1), pr. n.

Theudes (18, n. 1), pr. n.

Theudes (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

Theudicodo (18, n. 1), pr. n.

Theudicodo (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

[Pg 209]

*tigus, m. (142), a decad, in num. cpds. [OE. -tig, ME. -tiᵹ, -ti, NE. -ty.]

-tilôn, wv. (189), to aim, fit, in and-t. [< -tils (in ga-tils, adj., convenient; < √ ti + suff. -la-. Cp. til, n., aim, fit time, opportunity, = OE. til, n. fitness; and ON. til, prep., to, > ME. NE. til) = OE. til, adj., fit, suitabl. OE. tilian, to aim, strive for, labor, ME. tile, NE. til, to cultivate.]

-timan, stv. (175, n. 1), to be fit, in ga-t. [OHG. (ga)-zeman, MHG. (ge)zemen, stv., NHG. (ge)ziemen, wv., to be fit, behoov. Cp. -tamjan.]

timrja, m. (108), builder, carpenter. [< *timr (= OE. timber (the b being eufonic), n., material to build with, building, ME. NE. timber) + suff. -jan-.]

tiuhan, stv. (173), to pul.—Cpds. at-, inn-at-, us-t. [OE. têon (< *têohan), ME. te, to pul, draw, OHG. ziohan, MHG. ziehen, NHG. ziehen, to pul, draw, bring up.]

-tôjis (26, a), adj. (126), doing, only in cpds. [< √ of taujan.]

trauains, f. (97), trust, confidence; II. Cor. I, 15. III, 4. [< trauan + suff. -ai-ni-.]

trauan (26), wv. (179, n. 2; 193), to trust; w. du (in) w. dat.; II. Cor. I, 9.—Cpd. ga-tr. [OE. trûwian (26, b), orig. *trûwan, (the w being eufonic, as in) OHG. trûwên, beside trûên, MHG. trûwen, NHG. trauen, to trust, believ. OE. trêowian, to trust, believ, < trêowe = Goth. triggws.]

Trauas (26, n. 1), pr. n., Troas; dat. Trauadai; II. Cor. II, 12. [< Τρῳάς, gen. Τρῳάδος.]

trausti, n. (95, n. 1), cuvenant. [Extended < stem *trausta- (in OHG. MHG. NHG. trôst, m., consolation), < √ traus- (by-form of trau-; cp. trauan) + suff. -ta-.]

triggwa, f. (97, n. 1), cuvenant; II. Cor. III, 6. 14. [OE. trêow, f., ME. trewe, OHG. triuwa, MHG. triuwe, NHG. treue, f., faithfulness.]

triggws (68), adj. (124), tru, faithful, reliabl; II. Cor. I, 18. [OE. trêowe, ME. trewe, NE. tru. Cp. trauan.]

-trimpan, stv. (174, n. 1), to tramp, tred, in ana-tr. [Its corresponding prt. stem occurs in ME. trampe, NE. tramp.]

triu, n. (94, n. 1), tree. [OE. trêo(w), ME. tre, NE. tree.]

trudan, stv. (175, n. 2), to tred. [Cf. OE. tredan (Fifth Ablaut Class), ME. trede (pp. also troden, as if belonging to the Fourth Ablaut Class), NE. tred.]

tuggl, n. (94), constellation, star. [OE. tungol, n. m., constellation, star.]

tuggô, f. (111), tung. [OE. tunge, f., ME. tunge, NE. tung.]

tulgjan, wv. (188), to confirm, establish, w. acc.; II. Cor. II, 8.—Cpd. ga-t. [< tulgus.]

tulgus, adj. (131), stedfast, firm, strong. [Cf. OS. tulgo, adv., very.]

tunþus, m. (105), tooth; Mt. V, 38. [< √ of itan (cp. Brgm., II, § 126). OE. tôð (ô < ǫn < an; pl. têð), m., ME. toþ (pl. teþ), NE. tooth (pl. teeth).]

twai, card. num. (140), f. twôs, n. twa, two; Mt. V, 41. VI, 24. Mk. V, 13. Lu. II, 24. Skeir. VII, a. b. d (=·b·). [Cf. OE. twegen, m., twâ, f., tû, twâ, n., ME. tweien, two, twa, for all genders, NE. twain, two. Cp. Brgm., I, § 142; III, § 166.]

twalib-wintrus (88^a, n. 1), adj. (131), twelv years (lit. 'winters') old; Lu. II, 42. [-wintrus < wintrus, m. (= OE. winter, m. n., ME. NE. winter). OE. twelfwintre, twelv years old.]

[Pg 210]

twalif (56, n. 1), card. num. (141), twelv; Mk. III, 14. IV, 10. V, 25. 42. Skeir. VII, c (=·ib·; so in) d. [OE. ME. twelf, NE. twelv.]

tweifls, m. (91, n. 2), dout. [OHG. zwîfal, MHG. zwîvel, m., uncertainty, distrust, despair, NHG. zweifel, m., dout.]

tweihnai, distrib. num. (147), two apiece. [< tweih- (= OE. twîh, uzually betwîh, between) + suff. -na-. Cf. OE. twêone, dubl, two, > twêonum (prop. dat. pl.), uzually betwêonum, -an, ME. betwenen, NE. between.]

twis-standan (twistandan; cp. 78, n. 5), stv. (177, n. 3), w. dat., to depart from one, bid farewel to; II. Cor. II, 13.

Tykêkus (6, n. 1), Tychicus. [< Τυχικός.]

Tykêkus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), Tychicus. [< Τυχικός.]

Tyra, pr. n., Tyre; acc. -a; Mk. III, 8. [< Τύρος.]

Tyra, proper noun, Tyre; accusative -a; Mark III, 8. [< Τύρος.]

Þaddaius, pr. n., Thaddeus; acc. -u; Mk. III, 18. [< Θαδδαῖος.]

Thaddeus, pron. n., Thaddeus; acc. -u; Mk. III, 18. [< Θαδδαῖος.]

þadei, adv. (213, n. 1), where, wheresoever, whither. [< *þaþ (-d-; < stem of þata + -þ; cp. ƕaþ) + -ei.]

þagkjan (gg; 67 and n. 1), anv. (209; prt. þâhta; 5, b), to think, consider, ponder, reason; w. acc. and af sis silbin; II. Cor. III, 5; w. a dir. question (so w. sis); Mk. II, 6; w. acc. (understood) and in haírtin seinamma; Lu. II, 19; w. a dependent clause introduced by þatei, and bi w. dat., to purpose; II. Cor. I, 17.—Cpd. and-þ. [OE. ðencan, (prt. ðǫ̂hte; ǫ̂ < ǫn < an), ME. þenche, þenke (prt. þohte), NE. think (by influence of ME. þinke, NE. methinks; s. þugkjan).]

þahan, wv. (193), to be silent, be stil, hold one's peace; Mk. I, 25. III, 4. [OHG. dagên, MHG. dagen, to be silent, be stil.]

þâhô (5, b), f. (112), clay, πηλός. [OE. ðǫ̂ (< *ðǫ̂-e < ðǫ̂he < *ðanhe), f., OHG. dâha, MHG. dâhe, tâhe, (weak) f., NHG. (than, tahen, then < the oblique cases; later) thon (str.), m., clay.]

þai, þaiei, þaih, nom. pl. of sa, saei, sah.

, , , nom. pl. of , , .

þaim, þaim-ei, dat. pl. of sa, saei.

þaim, þaim-ei, dat. pl. of sa, saei.

þaírh, prep. w. acc. (217), (1) of space: thru, thru the midst of; Mk. II, 23. II. Cor. I, 16. IV, 15. (2) indicating the 'instrument' or 'means', 'author' or 'agent': thru, by, by means of, (a) w. names of persons; Mk. superscr. II. Cor. I, 5. 11. 19. 20. II, 14. III, 4. IV, 14. V, 18. 20; (b) w. names of things; II. Cor. I, 1. 4; —þ. þôei, because of; Skeir. VII, a; (c) denoting a state or condition: with, by; II. Cor. II, 4. III, 11. V, 7.—Occurs also in eight compound vs. [Cf. OE. ðurh, ME. þurᵹ, þuruh, NE. thru, thuro.]

þaírh-gaggan, anv. (173, n. 3; 207), to go thru, to pierce thru; Lu. II, 35; w. þaírh w. acc., to go thru; Mk. II, 23; w. und w. acc., to go on, proceed to; Lu. II, 15.

þaírh-saiƕan (34, n. 1), stv. (176, n. 1), to see thru, behold as in a glass, w. acc.; II. Cor. III, 18.

þaírh-wakan (63, n. 1), stv. (177, n. 1), to keep wach (thruout); Lu. II, 8.

þaírkô, n. (110), a hole thru (anything), the ey of a needl. [Allied to þaírh.]

-þaírsan, stv. (174, n. 1), to wither, in ga-þ. [The corresponding √-form (þars) of the pret. occurs in OHG. darra (rr < rz: rs), MHG. NHG. darre, f., a kiln for drying grain, meal, etc. Cp. -þaúrsnan.]

þamma, þamm-uh, dat. sg. m. and n. of sa, sah.

þamm-ei, dat. s. m. and n. of saei.[Pg 211] Sumtimes uzed as conj.; so w. in, because; II. Cor. II, 13.

þamm-ei, dat. s. m. and n. of saei.[Pg 211] Sometimes used as a conjunction; so with in, because; II. Cor. II, 13.

þan, adv. and conj. It is often preceded by the enclitic -uh (s. especially under (II), below). There is no distinction in sense between þan and -uh þan; the latter, like þan (which occurs oftener), stands after verbal forms of any kind; -uh þan, never þan, is inserted between a sb. and its prep., also between a prep. and a v., and is frequently found after sums, anþar, ni, rarely after sbs. or adjs. (I) adv., (1) dem., then, thereupon; Lu. II, 42; jah þan, and then; Mk. II, 20; (2) rel., when, whenever, as long as, (a) w. prs. ind.; Mk. II, 20. IV, 16. 31. 32. (Cp. Lu. II, 42); —jah þan, and when, but when; Mk. IV, 15; (b) w. prt. ind.; Mk. I, 32. II, 25. III, 11; (c) w. prs. opt.; Mt. VI, 2. 5. 6. (II) conj. (continuativ), therefore, then; but, farther, also; Mt. V, 31. 37. VI, 7. 29. Mk. I, 6. 28. 32. II, 5. 6. III, 32. IV, 5. 6. 35. V, 6. 11. 13. Lu. II, 1. 4. 6. 17. 47; —jah þan, and then; Mk. III, 6. 31; and also; Lu. II, 35; for; II. Cor. II, 10; and; Mk. IV, 36; —-uh þan, for; Mt. VI, 32; but, and, now; Mt. V, 31. 37. VI, 7. 29. Mk. I, 6. II, 6. IV, 5. V, 11. 13. II. Cor. II, 16. Skeir. VII, c; —sah þan, and this, and he, etc.; Lu. II, 2. 37. II. Cor. I, 17; for this; II. Cor. IV, 15. [< stem of þata. Cf. OE. ðǫnne (for ðanne), ðǫn (for ðan), ME. þanne, ðan, NE. than, then.]

þana, þanei, acc. s. m. of sa, saei.

þana, þanei, acc. s. m. of sa, sae.

þana-mais, adv. (153, n. 2), further, henseforth, yet, stil; Mk. V, 35. [þana- < stem of þata.]

þana-seiþs, adv. (212, n. 1), longer, stil; ni þ., no more, no longer; niþ (= nih-h) þan þ., no more, no longer; II. Cor. V, 15; ni þ. ni, no more, no longer; II. Cor. V, 16. [þana < stem of þata; -seiþs (for *seiþis, compar. adv. to seiþus) = OE. sîð (< *sîðiz), compar. adv., later, late; also prep., sinse, ME. sið, NE. sith (Shak.), OHG. sîd, adv., later, MHG. sît, prep., adv., conj., NHG. seit, prep. and conj., sinse.]

þandê (þandei), conj. (218), (1) if (prop. causal: sinse); Mt. VI, 30. (2) because, sinse, for; Lu. II, 30. ((3) while, until). [OHG. dantâ, therefore, because. Cf. OE. ðenden, ðendǫn, while, until, meanwhile.]

-þanjan, wv. (187), to strech, in uf-þ. [OE. ðennan, ME. þenne, OHG. MHG. den(n)en, NHG. dehnen, to strech.]

þan-nu, conj. (218), then, so then, therefore, so that, for; Mk. IV, 41. II. Cor. V, 15.

þan-uh, adv. and conj. (218), (1) adv., then. (2) conj., but; Mk. IV, 29. Skeir. VII, d; therefore, then; Skeir. VII, d.

þans, acc. pl. m. of sa.

þans, acc. pl. m. of sa.

þanz-ei, acc. pl. m. of saei.

þanz-ei, acc. pl. m. of sae.

þar, adv. (213, n. 1), there. [< stem of þata + loc. suff. -r. Cf. OE. ðæ̂r (= Goth. *þêr), ME. þere, NE. there.]

þar-ei, adv., where; Mt. VI, 19. 20. 21. Mk. II, 4. IV, 5. 15. V, 40. II. Cor. III, 17.

there, adv., where; Mt. VI, 19. 20. 21. Mk. II, 4. IV, 5. 15. V, 40. II. Cor. III, 17.

þarihs (20, n. 1), adj. (124), not yet fuld, new.

þar-uh, adv. and conj. (218), (1) adv. there; Mt. VI, 21. II. Cor. III, 17. (2) conj. (continuativ, for καί, οὖν, δέ), and, then, so, therefore, but; Lu. II, 25.

þata, dem. prn. n.; s. sa [< stem þa-t- + -a (as in þan-a, in-a, ƕana), which caused the retention of the originally final t (see sa; cp. also þar). OE. ðæt, ME. þat, NE. that.]

that, demonstrative pronoun n.; see the [< stem tha-t- + -a (as in than-a, in-a, wha), which resulted in the retention of the originally final t (see the; also compare there). OE. ðæt, ME. þat, NE. that.]

[Pg 212]

þat-ain-ei, adv., only; Mt. V, 47. Mk. V, 36. Skeir. VII, b. [< þatain (< þat-a + the n. sg. of ains), that one, that only, + -ei.]

that-one-only, adv., only; Mt. V, 47. Mk. V, 36. Skeir. VII, b. [< thatone (< that-a + the n. sg. of one), that one, that only, + -ei.]

þata-ƕa-h, nom. sg. n. of saƕazuh.

þat-ei, n. sg. of saei, uzed as conj. (218), (1) that; so after vs. of 'saying, thinking, knowing, perceiving (seeing, hearing, etc.)', and the like, chiefly w. ind. Like ὅτι, it often introduces a dir. discourse; Mt. V, 20-23. 27. 28. 31. 32. 33. 38. 43. VI, 5. 16. 29. 32. Mk. I, 15. 37. 40. II, 1. 8. 10. 12. III, 11. 21. 22. 28. V, 23. 28. 29. 35. Lu. II, 11. 23. 49. II. Cor. I, 7. 12. II, 3. III, 3. IV, 14. V, 1. 6. 15. Skeir. VII, d. (2) causal, because, for, that; Mk. II, 16. Lu. II, 49; —ni þatei w. opt., not that, not because, not as; II. Cor. I, 24. III, 5. (3) afar þatei w. a finite v., after; Mk. I, 14. Skeir. VII, c.

þaþrô, adv. (213, n. 1), (1) local, thense. (2) temporal, afterwards, then. [< stem of þata + suff. -þrô.]

þaþrô-h, adv. (213, n. 1), (1) local, thense. (2) temporal, sinse that time, afterwards, then; Mk. IV, 17. 28. [< þaþrô + -h = -uh. (Cp. also 62, n. 3).]

þau, þáuh (i. e. þau + -uh), (1) conj. (218), (a) after a compar., than; Mt. V, 20; (b) introducing the second part of a disjunctiv question, or; Mk. II, 9. (2) adv. (216), perhaps, stil; or untranslatabl; in the apodosis of a conditional sentence (in most cases for ἄν): ni þau w. prs. ind.; Mt. V, 20. VI, 15. [OE. ðêah, ME. þeh, ðeh, ðoh (by influence of ON. þó, contracted < þáuh), NE. tho.]

þáuh-jabai, conj. (218), even if, tho; II. Cor. IV, 16.

þaúrban, prt.-prs. (199), to hav need, to need, want, lack, (1) abs.; Mk. II, 25. (2) w. gen.; Mt. VI, 8. 32. Mk. II, 17. II. Cor. III, 1. [OE. (be)ðurfan (cp. 56, n. 3), ME. (be)þurfe, to hav need, to need, want, OHG. (bi)durfan, to hav need, to want, lack, MHG. dürfen, durfen, to hav reason or cause, to need, want, dare, be permitted, be-d., to need, want, NHG. dürfen, to dare, be permitted, be-d., to want, need.]

þaúrfts (56, n. 4), f. (103), need, necessity. [< þaúrban + suff. -ti-. OHG. MHG. durft, f., NHG. -durft (in composition), f., need, want.]

þaúrnus, m. (105), thorn; Mk. IV, 7. 18. [OE. ðorn, m., ME. þorn, NE. thorn.]

þaúrp, n. (94, n. 2), field. [OE. ðorp, n., village, ME. þorp, NE. thorp, a small village, now chiefly uzed in names of places (-thorp, also -throp).]

-þaúrsnan (32), wv. (194), to dry, wither, in ga-þ. [< þaúrsus. ON. þorna, to wither.]

þaúrstei (32), f. (113), thirst. [< *þaúrst, adj., thirsty, + suff. -ein-, < √ of -þaírsan, þaúrsus, -þaúrsnan, + suff. -ta-. Cf. OE. ðurst (w. orig. tu-suff.), ðyrst (w. suff. -ti-), m., ME. þurst, NE. thirst.]

þaúrsus (32), adj. (131), dry, witherd. [< √ of -þaírsan (pp. -þaúrsans). OE. ðyr, OHG. durri (ja-stem), MHG. durre, NHG. dürr, adj., dry, witherd.]

þê, instr. of þata. [Cf. the OE. instr. ðŷ, North. ðy, ðê, ME. ði, þê, NE. the in 'the more'.]

the, instrument of that. [Cf. the OE. instr. ðŷ, North. ðy, ðê, ME. ði, þê, NE. the in 'the more'.]

þê-ei, conj. (157, n. 1; 218), that, for the reason that, always w. ni, not that; II. Cor. II, 4.

þei, (1) rel. prn. (= þatei; 157, n. 2); so after þataƕah, þisƕaduh, þisƕah, þisƕaruh, þisƕazuh (164, n. 1). (2) conj., that; in order that; Mt. VI, 26. [< *þa (a by-form of þata) + -ei.]

[Pg 213]

þeihan, stv. (172, n. 1), to thrive, profit, increase, advance, w. (loc.) dat.; Lu. II, 52. [OE. (ge)ðêon (for *ðîon, contr. < *ðîhǫn), ME. þee, NE. thee (Spenser), to thrive, prosper.]

þeiƕô, f. (112), thunder; Mk. III, 17.

þeina, gen. sg. of þu.

þeina, gen. sg. of þu.

þeins, poss. prn. (151); f. þeina; n. þein, þeinata, thy, thine, (1) alone (predicativ); Mt. VI, 13. Mk. V, 19. (2) w. a prec. sb., (a) without the art.; Mt. V, 23. 29. 30. 33. 36. 40. 43. VI, 3. 4. 6. 10. 17. 18. 22. 23. Mk. I, 44. II, 5. 9. 11. 24. III, 32. V, 19. 34. 35. Lu. II, 29. 30. 32; ƕa namô þein, what (is) thy name?; Mk. V, 9; (b) w. art.; sa..þeins; Mt. V, 24. VI, 4. Mk. II, 9. 11. III, 5. V, 34. Lu. II, 48. (3) w. a follg. sb., (a) without art.; Lu. II, 35; (b) w. art.; Mk. II, 18; (c) between adj. and sb.; Mt, V, 30. 39. [< þeina. OE. ðîn, ME. þin, þi, NE. thine, thy.]

-þinsan, stv. (174, n. 1), to draw, in at-þ. [OHG. dinsan, MHG. dinsen, to draw, pul, expand, NHG. *dinsen, pp. gedunsen (uzed as adj.), bloated, puft up.]

þis, gen. sg. m. n. of sa, þata.

this, gen. sg. m. n. of the, that.

þis-ƕaduh, adv. (164, n. 2); w. þadei or þei, withersoever, wheresoever. [< þis (here adv.), < stem of þata, + ƕaduh < ƕaþ (-d-) + -uh.]

þis-ƕammêh, dat. s. m. n. of þisƕazuh.

this-ham, dat. s. m. n. of this-hazeh.

þis-ƕaruh, adv. (164, n. 2); w. þei, wheresoever. [< þis (s. þisƕaduh) + ƕaruh < ƕar + uh.]

þis-ƕazuh, prn. (164, n. 1) m.; þisƕah, n. (164, n. 1); folld. by the rel. ei, þei, or saei; uzually w. opt.: þ. ei, whoever; þ. þei, whosoever, n. whatsoever; þ. saei, whosoever, whatsoever; Mk. IV, 25. [< þis (s. þisƕaduh) + ƕazuh.]

þiubjô, adv. (211), secretly, in secret. [< stem þiubja-, secret; cp. þiufs.]

þiubs, s. þiufs.

, s. thiufs.

þiuda, f. (97), peple, nation; in pl. (uzually) 'the Gentiles'; Mt. VI, 32. Lu. II, 32; þai þiudô, those of the heathen; Mt. V, 46. VI, 7. [OE. ðêod, ðiod, f., ME. þede, peple, population, OHG. diot(a), MHG. diet, peple, NHG. *diet; cp. Diedrich, pr. n.]

þiudan-gardi (88^a, n. 1), f. (98), kingdom; Mt. V, 19. 20. VI, 13. Mk. I, 14. 15. III, 24. IV, 11. 26. 30. [-gardi < gards.]

þiudanôn, wv. (190), to be king, to rule, reign. [< þiudans.]

þiudans, m. (91), king; Mt. V, 35. [< þiuda + suff. -ana-, OE. ðêoden, m., king.]

þiudinassus, m. (105), kingdom; Mt. VI, 10. [< þiudanôn (-in-) for -an- by influence of the sbs. in -in-assus w. regular -in-, formd < vs. in -in-ôn the -in- of which refers to the weakend suff. of stems in -an (cp. fraujinassus) < fraujinôn < frauj-in-, weakend stem of frauja.]

þiufs, þiubs (56, n. 1), m. (91), thief; Mt. VI, 19. 20. [OE. ðêof, m., ME. þêf, NE. thief.]

þiu-magus (88^a, n. 1), servant.

þiu-magus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__^a, n. 1), helper.

*þius, m. (91, n. 3), servant. [OE. ðêo (contr. < *ðe-u, for *ðew < ðewo-, gen. ðeowes, contr. < ðe-uwes, the u having developt itself before the w; hense also nom.) ðêow, m., ME. þeow, servant, OHG. deo, m., servant, cpd. deo-muoti, MHG. demuot, NHG. demut, f., humility, humblness.]

þiuþ, n. (94), good, in pl. good things; II. Cor. V, 10; þ. taujan, to do good; Mk. III, 4.

þiuþi-qiss (88^a, n. 2), f., blessing.

þiuþi-qiss (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__^a, n. 2), f., blessing.

þiuþjan, wv. (187), to bless, (1) w. acc.; Mt. V, 44. Lu. II, 34. (2) w. dat.; Lu. II, 28; —pp. þiuþiþs,[Pg 214] blest; II. Cor. I, 3.—Cpd. ga-þ. [< þiuþ.]

þiwi, f. (98, n. 1), maid-servant, hand-maid. [< stem of þius + suff. -jô-.] [OE. ME. ðêowe, f., female servant, maid.]

þizai, þizai-ei, dat. sg. f. of sa, saei.

þizai, þizai-ei, dat. sg. f. of sa, saei.

þizê, þizê-ei, gen. pl. m. n. of sa, sa-ei.

thizê, thizê-ei, gen. pl. m. n. of sa, sa-ei.

þiz-ei, gen. sg. m. n. of sa-ei; s. also in (1).

þizô, þizôs, gen. pl. and sg. f. of sa.

this, this's, gen. pl. and sg. f. of the.

þiz-uh, gen. sg. m. n. of sa-h.

this, gen. sg. m. n. of that.

-þláihan, rv. (179, n. 1), to cherish, fondl, in ga-þl. [Cf. OHG. flêhan, flêhôn (fl < þl), to caress, flatter, entreat, MHG. vlêhen, to entreat, NHG. flehen, to beseech, entreat. Root flaih is also seen in OE. flâh, adj., deceitful, crafty.]

þlaqus, adj. (131), soft, tender.

þlaqus, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), soft, gentle.

þliuhan, stv. (173, n. 1), to flee.—Cpd. ga-þl. [OE. flêon (contr. < *flêohan; fl < þl; cp. þláihan), ME. flee, NE. flee.]

þô, þô-ei, acc. s. f. and nom. acc. pl. n. of sa, sa-ei.

þôs, þôz-ei, nom. acc. pl. f. of sa, sa-ei.

þôs, þôz-ei, nominative accusative plural feminine of sa, sa-ei.

Þômas, pr. n., Thomas; acc. -an; Mk. III, 18. [< Θωμᾶς.]

þrafstjan, wv. (188), to console, cumfort.—Cpd. ga-þr.

þrafstjan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to console, comfort.—Cpd. ga-þr.

þragjan, wv. (188), to run. [OE. ðrægan, to run, race.]

þraíheina, prt. of þreihan.

þraíheina, past tense of þreihan.

þramstei, f. (113), locust; Mk. I, 6.

þreihan, stv. (172, n. 1), to throng, crowd round, press upon, afflict; Mk. III, 9. V, 24. 31. II. Cor. I, 6; pp. þraíhans, trubld; II. Cor. IV, 8. [< *þrinhan. OE. ðringan, ME. þringe, OHG. dringan, MHG. NHG. dringen, to urge, press.]

þreis, card. num. (140), three; Lu. II, 46. [OE. ðrî, m., ðrêo, f. n., ME. þrê, NE. three.]

þridja, ord. num. (146; 149, n. 1), third. [< (þri-, the short form of the stem of þreis) + -dja. OE. ðridda, North. ðirda, ME. þridde, thyrde, NE. third.]

þriskan, stv. (174, n. 1), to thresh. [OE. ðerscan (for *ðrescan), ME. þreshe, NE. thresh.]

-þriutan, stv. (173, n. 1), to urge, trubl, in us-þr. [OE. â-ðrêotan (â = us), to be weary, OHG. bi-, ir-drioȥan, MHG. be-, er-, beside ver- (= Goth. faír-), drieȥen, to excite disgust or weariness, NHG. ver-driessen, to griev, vex. The √ of OE. ðrêat (prt., = Goth. *þraut) occurs also in OE. ðrêat, m., ME. þrete, NE. thret.]

þruts-fill (15, n. 1; 88^a, n. 3), n. (94), leprosy; Mk. I, 42; þr. habands (for λεπρός), leper, lit. (one) having leprosy; Mk. I, 40. [< þruts, prob. < √ of -þriutan. Cf. OE. ðrûstfell; also ON. þrútinn, swoln.]

þu, pers. prn. 2nd pers. (150), thou, uzed alone or w. vs., for emfasis, (1) sg., (a) nom. þu; Mt. VI, 6. 17. Mk. I, 11. 24. III, 11; w. a prec. voc.; Mt. VI, 9; (b) gen. þeina (or, tho for σοῦ, poss. prn.; s. note); Mt. VI, 13; (c) dat. þus; Mt. V, 26. 29. 30. 40. 42. VI, 2. 4. 6. 18. 23. Mk. I, 2. 24. II, 5. 9. 11. V, 7. 19. 41; (d) acc. þuk; Mt. V, 23. 25. 29. 30. 39. 41. 42. VI, 3. Mk. I, 24. 37. 44. III, 32. IV, 38. V, 7. 19. 31. 34. Lu. II, 48. (2) dual, (a) nom. (wanting); (b) gen. iggkara (wanting in our 'Selections'); (c) dat. igqis, iggkis (wanting in our 'Selections'); (d) acc. igqis; Mk. I, 17. (3) pl., (a) nom. jus, ye, you; Mt. V, 48. VI, 8. 9. 26. II. Cor. I, 14. III, 2; (b) gen. izwara; Mt. VI, 27. II. Cor. I, 23. II, 3. 10. IV, 15; (c) dat. izwis; Mt. V, 18. 20. 22. 28. 32. 34. 39. 44. VI, 2. 5. 14. 16. 19. 20. 25. 29. Mk. III, 28. IV, 11. 24. Lu. II, 10. 11. 12.[Pg 215] II. Cor. I, 2. 11. 12. 13. 15. 16. 18. 19. 21. II, 1. 3. 4. III, 1. IV, 12. 14. V, 12. 13; (d) acc. izwis; Mt. V, 44. 46. VI, 30. Mk. I, 8. II. Cor. I, 6. 8. 16. II, 2. 5. 7. 8. [OE. ðû, gen. ðîn, dat. ðê, acc. ðec, ðê (prop. dat.); ME. þou, þu, gen. þin, dat. acc. þe, the; NE. thou, dat. acc. thee.—For du. and pl., s. igqara and jus.]

þugkjan, anv. (209), (1) impers.: þugkeiþ mis, 'methinks', I think; so w. ei, that; Mt. VI, 7. (2) pers. (not in our 'Selections'): to think, suppose, intend, seem. [OE. ðyncan (< *ðuncjan), prt. ðûhte (< *ðunhte, pp. ðûht); mê ðynceð, it seems to me, ME. þunche, þinche, ðinche; me ðincð, NE. methinks (cp. þagkjan).]

-þûhts (15, b), adj., thinking; s. háuh-, mikil-þûhts. [Prop. pp. of þugkjan.]

þûhtus (15, b), m. (105), thought, wisdom. [< *þunhtus < √ of þugkjan + suff. -tu-.]

þuk; s. þu.

you; s. you.

þulains, f. (103, n. 1), sufferance, patience, suffering; II. Cor. I, 5. 6. 7. [< þulan + suff. -ai-ni-.]

þulan, wv. (193), to tolerate, suffer, bear.—Cpd. ga-þ. [OE. (ge)ðolian (transferd to the Second Weak Conjug.), ME. (i)ðole, to suffer, endure. Cp. the verbal abstr.: OHG. gedult (w. t-suff.), MHG. (ge)dult (-d-), NHG. geduld, f., patience.]

þus; s. þu.

thus; s. you.

þûsundi (15), card. num. (145), a thousand, uzually f. sb. (98); Mk. V, 13. Skeir. VII, b. [OE. ðûsend, n., ME. þusend, NE. thousand.]

þûsundi-faþs (88^a), m. (101), leader of a thousand, captain, high captain.

þuz-ei, dat. of þu-ei (158).

þuz-ei, dative of þu-ei (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

þwahan, stv. (177, n. 1), to wash, w. acc.; Mt. VI, 17; to wash one's self. [OE. ðwêan (contr. < *ðwaǫn, for ðwahǫn), OHG. dwahan, MHG. twahen, zwahen, zwagen, NHG. (dial.) zwagen, to wash (cp. zwehle, w. l-suff., f., towel).]

-þwastjan, wv. (188), to secure, in ga-þw.

-þwastjan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to secure, in ga-þw.

-u, an enclitic uzed in asking a question (216 and n. 1), (I) in simpl questions, (1) dir., (a) attacht to a v.: skuldu (ptc.) ist, is it lawful?; Mk. III, 4; (b) to a prn.; (c) to an adv. (2) indir., w. opt., affixt to a v.; II. Cor. II, 9. (II) in disjunctiv questions, both dir. and indir.; —abu (= af + u) þus silbin þu þata qiþis, sayest thou this (thing) of thyself?; Jo. XVIII, 34.—After the pref. ga-: ga-u-laubjats, believ ye?; Mt. IX, 28; ga-u-ƕa-sêƕi, if he saw aught; Mk. VIII, 23.—Cp. niu.

Ubadamirus (40, n. 1), pr. n.

Ubadamirus (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

Ubadila (40, n. 1), pr. n.

Ubadila (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

ubilaba, adj. (210), evilly, il; u. haban, to be il, be sick; Mk. II, 17. [< ubils + suff. -ba-.]

ubils, adj. (124; 138), evil, il, bad, useless; Mt. V, 45.—The n. ubil is often uzed as sb.; so also þata ubilô, the evil, an evil thing; Mt. V, 37. VI, 13; ubil haban, to be il, be sick; Mk. I, 32. 34. [OE. yfel, ME. yfel, ivel, evel, NE. evil.]

ubil-tôjis, adj. (126), evil-doing, mischievous.

ubil-tôjis, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), wicked, troublesome.

ub-uh, i. e. uf-uh.

ub-uh, i.e. uf-uh.

uf (56, n. 2), prep. (217), (1) w. dat., (a) local, under, beneath; Mk. IV, 32; (b) temporal, in the time of; Mk. II, 26. (2) w. acc., local, under; Mk. IV, 21.—Occurs also in numerous cpds. [Cf. OE. ufe- (in ufeweard, higher), OHG. oba, MHG. obe, ob, NHG. ob, prep. (rare), over, ob-, prefix in cpds., over.]

[Pg 216]

uf-aiþeis (56, n. 2), adj. (130, n. 2), under an oath.

ufar, prep. (217), (1) w. dat., local, over, abuv, beyond; u. himinam, 'over (the) hevens', hevenly; Mt. VI, 14. 26. 32. (2) w. acc., trop., abuv; II. Cor. I, 8. Skeir. VII, b; u. filu wisan, to be 'over much', to abound; II. Cor. I, 5.—Occurs also in numerous cpds. [< uf + compar. suff. -ar. OE. ofer, ME. ofer, over, NE. over.]

ufarassjan, wv. (188), to cause to abound, increase excessivly, w. acc.; II. Cor. IV, 15. [< ufarassus.]

ufarassus, m. (105), overflow, abundance, excellency; II. Cor. IV, 7. 17. u. wulþaus, abundance of glory, glory that excels; II. Cor. III, 10.—The dat. ufarassau is uzed adverbially: abundantly; II. Cor. I, 8. 12. II, 4.—ufarassus wisan w. gen. and in w. dat., to abound in (the gen. becuming the subj. in E.); II. Cor. I, 5. [< ufar + suff. -assu-.]

ufar-hafnan (35), wv. (194), to exalt one's self.

ufar-hamôn, wv. (190), to put on clothes over, be clothed upon, w. (instr.) dat.; II. Cor. V, 2.

ufar-ist, 3d pers. sg. prs. ind. of ufarwisan.

ufar-ist, 3rd person singular present indicative of ufarwisan.

ufarô, (1) adv. (211, n. 1), abuv, thereon. (2) uzed as prep. (217), (a) w. gen., upon, abuv; (b) w. dat., over, abuv; Lu. II, 8. [< uf + compar. suff. -ar + adv. suff. -ô. Cf. OHG. obaro, MHG. obere, NHG. ober(e), upper.]

ufar-skadwjan (14, n. 1), wv. (188), to overshadow.

ufar-steigan, stv. (172, n. 1), to mount over, grow higher, grow up; Mk. IV, 7.

ufar-swaran, stv. (177, n. 1), to overswear, forswear; Mt. V, 33.

ufar-wisan, stv. (176, n. 1), to be over, exceed, abound; II. Cor. III, 9.

uf-bauljan (24, n. 1), wv. (187), to pul up, blow up, be highminded.

uf-blêsan, rv. (179, n. 1), to blow up, puf up.

uf-brinnan, stv. (174, n. 1), to burn up, scorch, (intr.); Mk. IV, 6.

uf-graban (56, n. 1), stv. (177, n. 1), to dig up, dig after, dig thru; Mt. VI, 19. 20.

uf-hausjan, wv. (187), to listen with submission, to obey, be subject to, w. dat.; Mt. VI, 24. Lu. II, 51; —uf-h. in allamma, to be obedient in all (things); II. Cor. II, 9.

uf-hrôpjan, wv. (188), to cry out, cry; Mk. I, 23. w. (instr.) dat.; Mk. I, 26.

uf-kunnan, wv. (prt. ufkunþa, onse ufkunnaida; 199 and n. 1), to recognize, acknowledge, know, (1) abs.; II. Cor. I, 13 (second). (2) w. acc. of th.; II. Cor. I, 13 (first); and an interr. sentence; II. Cor. II, 9; or in w. dat.; Mk. V, 30. (3) w. acc. of pers. and bi w. dat.; II. Cor. V, 16. (4) w. þatei and ana w. dat.; Mk. V, 29; or (loc.) dat.; Mk. II, 8.

uf-rakjan, wv. (188), to strech out, strech forth, put forth, w. acc.; Mk. I, 41. III, 5.

ufta, adv. (214, n. 1), oft, often; Mk. V, 4. [Cf. OE. oft, ME. oft, extended ofte, often, NE. oft, often.]

uf-þanjan, wv. (187), to strech.

uf-þanjan, wv. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), to stretch.

uf-wôpjan (63, n. 1), wv. (187), to cry out.

-uh, -h (the h being frequently assimilated to the initial consonant of a follg. word; 24, n. 2; 62, ns. 3 and 4), enclitic particl (218), but, and, now, therefore; Mk. II, 11. V, 41; inuh þis, on this account; II. Cor. II, 8. IV, 16. V, 9.—With prns. and other particls it often ads intensity to the signification; s. andizuh, duhþê (s. duþê), (ƕanuh), nih, nuh, sah, sumzuh (= sums-uh),[Pg 217] (swah), þaþrô-h, þanuh, þaruh, þau-h.—Modifications by means of -uh (164 et seq.) ar seen in ƕarjizuh, ƕaþaruh, ƕazuh, ƕêh, þisƕaduh, þisƕaruh.—For uh þan (or uþ þan), s. þan.

ûhteigô (15, n. 3), adv. (211), in season, at a fit time. [< ûhteigs +-suff. -ô.]

ûhteigs, ûhtiugs (15; 19), adj. (124), in season, at leisure for. [< ûht- (s. ûhtwô) + suff. -eiga-, -iuga-.]

ûhtwô (15), f. (112), daybreak, dawn; áir ûhtwôn, before daybreak; Mk. I, 35. [< *unhtwô-, -twô-n-being suff. (cp. Brgm. III, § 61). OE. ûhte (ûht-, in cpds.), n., ME. uhte, dawn.]

ulbandus, m. (? 105), camel; Mk. I, 6. [< Lt. elephantus < ἐλέφαντ-, stem of ἐλέφας, elefant, < Hebr. aleph, eleph, ox.]

un-, inseparabl particl, in meaning = our un-, in-, dis-, -less. [OE. ME. un-, NE. un-.]

un-, an inseparable particle, meaning = our un-, in-, dis-, -less. [OE. ME. un-, NE. un-.]

un-agands (35), ptc. adj. (202, n. 2), not fearing, fearless. [-agands, inf. *agan, stv., prt. *ôg; s. ôgjan.]

un-and-huliþs, ptc. adj. (134), not uncuverd; II. Cor. III, 14.

un-and-sôks (35), adj. (130, n. 2), irrefutabl. [-sôks < √ of sakan (prt. sôk).]

und, prep. (217), (1) w. dat., in return for, for; Mt. V, 38. (2) w. acc., denoting 'direction toward', or 'the point' or 'goal at which anything, in its direction, arrives', unto, to, until, as far as, up to, down to, (a) of space; Lu. II, 15; (b) of time; II. Cor. I, 13. III, 14. 15; —und þatei (218), til, until, as long as, while; Mt. V, 18. 25. Mk. II, 19; (c) of degree; und filu mais, so much the more, much more; II. Cor. III, 9. 11. [OE. un- (for *und; s. Sk., unto), ME. un-, NE. un- (as in unto, until).]

undar, prep. w. acc. (217), under; Mk. IV, 21. [< und + compar. suff. -ar. OE. ME. under, NE. under.]

undarô, adv. (211, n. 1), below, beneath; uzed as prep. w. dat. (217), under. [< undar + adv. suff. -ô.]

und-greipan, stv. (172), to gripe, seiz, take, lay hold on, w. acc.; Mk. I, 31.

un-fáurs, adj. (130), not wel-behaved (for φλύαρος, tatler).

un-fáurs, adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), not well-behaved (for φλύαρος, gossip).

un-frôþs (35; 74, n. 4), adj. (124, n. 2), unwise, foolish.

un-ga-hôbains (35), f. (103, n. 1), incontinency. [gahôbains < gahaban (w. ô-abl) + suff. -ai-ni-.]

un-ga-laubjands, ptc. adj. (133), unbelieving; II. Cor. IV, 4.

un-ga-saíƕans, ptc. adj. (134), not seen, invisibl; II. Cor. IV, 4. 18. [OHG. ungesehan, MHG. NHG. ungesehen, not seen.]

un-handu-waúrhts, ptc. adj. (124), not wrought by hand, not made with hands; II. Cor. V, 1. [-handu-waúrhts < stem of handus + pp. of waúrkjan.]

un-hrains, adj. (130), unclean; Mk. I, 23. 25. 26. 27. III, 11. 30. V, 2. 8. 13. [OHG. un-(h)reini, MHG. unreine, NHG. unrein, adj., unclean.]

un-hulþô, f. (112), evil spirit, unclean spirit, devil; Mk. I, 32. 34. 39. III, 15. 22. V, 12. [Prop. weak form of the adj. *unhulþs (< un- + hulþs, gracious, = OE. ME. hold, OHG. hold, MHG. holt (-d-), NHG. hold, adj., gracious, affectionate) = OE. ME. OHG. unhold, MHG. unholt (-d-), adj., ungracious, hostil, NHG. unhold, adj., disaffectionate, ungracious. OHG. unholdâ, MHG. unholde, f., fiend, sorceress, wich.]

un-karja, weak adj. (132, n. 3), careless, neglectful; Mk. IV, 15. [karja < kara + suff. -ja-n.]

un-kaúreins, f. (103, n. 1), a refraining from being a burden, a thing[Pg 218] without charge. [-kaúreins < kaúrjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

*un-lêþs (74, n. 2), adj. (124), poor. [OE. un-læ̂d(e), ME. unlede, adj., poor, wreched.]

un-mana-riggws (68), adj. (124), inhuman, fierse.

un-mana-riggws (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), adj. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__), inhuman, fierce.

uns; s. ik.

us; s. ik.

unsar, poss. prn. (124, ns. 1 and 4; 151), our, (I) uzed alone. (II) w. sbs., (1) prec., (a) without art.; Mt. VI, 9. 11. Mk. I, 3. II. Cor. I, 2. 3-6. 8. 12. 14 (ƕôftuli understood). 22. III, 2. IV, 3. 6. 10. 11. 17. V, 2; (b) w. art.: sa..unsar, our; Mt. VI, 12. II. Cor. I, 18. III, 5; (2) follg., (a) without art.; (b) w. art., II. Cor. V, 1. [< stem of unsara (= OE. ûser, ûre; dat. ûs; acc. ûsic, us (prop. dat.), ME. gen. ure; dat. acc. us; NE. us. OE. ûser, ûre, ME. ure, oure, NE. our).—Cp. ik, weis.]

unsara; s. ik, also unsar.

un-sêls, adj. (130), wicked, evil; Mt. VI, 23; uzed as sb.; Mt. V, 39.

unsis; s. ik.

untê, conj. (218), (1) temporal, (a) til, until, (as long as, while), w. prs. ind.; Mt. V, 18. 26; (2) causal, because, for, sinse; Mt. V, 34. 36. 45. VI, 5. 13. 14. 24. Mk. I, 22. 34. 38. III, 30. IV, 6. 25. 29. 41. V, 4. 8. 9. 28. Lu. II, 10. II. Cor. I, 5. 8. 12. 13. 14. 19. 24. II, 2. 11. 15. 17. III, 6. 10. 14. IV, 6. 17. 18. V, 2. 7. 10. 13. 14. 19. 21.—ni untê..ak untê, not because ... but because; Lu. II, 7.

un-þiuþ, n. (94), evil; Mk. III, 4. II. Cor. V, 10.

un-wâhs (5, b), adj. (124), blameless. [-wâhs < stem *wanha-. OE. wǫ̂h (wǫ̂g), ME. woh, adj., crooked, wrong, > wǫ̂gian, to woo, lit. to incline, ME. wowe, NE. woo.]

un-weis, adj. (124), unlernd, ignorant; II. Cor. I, 8. [< un + -weis (= OE. ME. wîs, NE. wise.—Germanic stem wîso-< wît-to, prop. verbal adj. to witan, to know). OE. ME. unwîs, NE. unwise.]

un-witands, ptc. adj. (133), unknowing, ignorant; II. Cor. II, 11. [witands is prsp. of witan, to know.]

ur-; s. us.

ur-raisjan, wv. (188), to raiz up, raiz, lift up, w. acc.; Mk. I, 31; to rouse up, wake; Mk. IV, 38; to raiz, raiz up (the ded); II. Cor. I, 9. IV, 14.

ur-rann, prt. of urrinnan.

ur-rann, part of urrinnan.

ur-rannjan, wv. (188), to cause to rize (lit. to cause to run out); Mt. V, 45.

ur-reisan, stv. (172, n. 1), to arize; Mk. II, 9. 11. 12. III, 3. IV, 27. 39. V, 41. 42. II. Cor. V, 15.

ur-rinnan, stv. (174, n. 1), to run out, go out, w. du w. inf.; Mk. IV, 3; w. us w. dat. and in w. acc.; Lu. II, 4; to go up, rize (said of the sun); Mk. IV, 6; to spring up, grow up (said of seed); Mk. IV, 5. 8. 32; to go out (i. e. to be issued); Lu. II, 1.

ur-rists (30), f. (103), arizing, resurrection. [< ur-reisan + suff. -ti-. OHG. urrist, f., resurrection.]

ur-rûmnan (78, n. 4), wv. (194), to expand, enlarge (intr.).

ur-runs (78, n. 4), m. (101, n. 1), a running out; hense outlet, draft; also dayspring, east.

us (uz- before ê, ô, u; 78, c; ur- before r; 78, n. 4; sumtimes u- for us- before s; 78, n. 5), prep. w. dat. (217), (1) of space, out, out of, from, forth from; Mk. I, 10. 11. 25. 26. 29. III, 7. 8. V, 2. 8. 10. 30. Lu. II, 4. 35. II. Cor. I, 10. V, 8. (2) indicating a going out or forth, a cuming or springing out of any thing, and the like, from, of, out of, with, by; Lu. II, 4. 36. II. Cor. II, 2. 16. 17. III, 1. 5.[Pg 219] IV, 6. 7. V, 1. 18. Skeir. VII, d. (3) designating 'circumstances, way, and manner in which anything takes place or with which it is connected', of, out of, with, in; Mt. V, 37. II. Cor. II, 4. III, 9 (in B). V, 2.—Occurs also in many cpds. [OE. or-, â-, ME. or-, a-, NE. or- (cp. ordeal), a- (cp. arize).]

us-agjan (35; 78, n. 4), wv. (188), to frighten utterly.

us-agljan (14, n. 1), wv. (188), to trubl exceedingly.

us-alþan, rv. (179, n. 1), to grow old.

us-anan (78, n. 4), stv. (177, n. 1), to breath out, giv up the ghost.

us-baíran, stv. (175), to carry out, bring forth; to exclaim, answer; Skeir. VII, a.

us-beidan, stv. (172, n. 1), to expect patiently, abide for, w. acc.; Lu. II, 38.

us-beisns (75, n. 1), f., expectation. [< usbeidan + suff. -sni-; cp. Brgm., II, § 95.]

us-bruknan, wv. (194), to break off (intr.), be broken off.

us-daudjan, wv. (188), to strive, endevor, labor, w. inf.; II. Cor. V, 9. [< usdauþs.]

us-dauþs (74, n. 2), adj. (124), diligent, zelous, forward.

us-dreiban (-drêbi; 10, n. 5), stv. (172, n. 1), to drive out, cast out, send away, w. (instr.) dat. and us w. dat.; Mk. V, 10.

us-drusts, f. (103), a falling away, (said of) a ruf way. [< us-driusan, to fall out, fall away, + suff. -ti-.]

us-faírina, wa. (132, n. 2), without fault, blameless.

us-filma, wa. (132, n. 2), amazed, astonisht, w. ana w. dat.; Mk. I, 22. [-filma-, -an-, < -fil- (s. -fill) + suff. -ma-.]

us-fulljan, wv. (188), to (fil completely, fil up, supply, accomplish) fulfil; Mt. V, 17.

us-fullnan (180), wv. (194), to becum ful; to be fulfild, accomplisht; Mk. I, 15. Lu. II, 6. 21. 22.

us-gaggan, anv. (179, n. 3; 207), to go out, cum out, go forth, go up, cum up; Mk. I, 35. 45. II, 12. V, 13; w. and w. acc.; Mk. I, 28; du w. dat.; Mk. I, 5; in w. acc.; Lu. II, 42; us w. dat.; Mk. I, 10. 26. 29. V, 2. 8. 30; ût us w. dat.; Mk. I, 25; jainþrô; Mt. V, 26; w. inf.; Mk. III, 21.

us-gaisjan, wv. (188), to strike agast; in pass. to be beside one's self; Mk. III, 21.

us-geisnan, wv. (194), to becum or be amazed, agast, astonisht, affrighted; Mk. II, 12. II. Cor. V, 13; w. (instr.) dat.; Mk. V, 42; w. ana w. dat.; Lu. II, 47.

us-giban (56, n. 1), stv. (176), to giv out, giv away, w. dat. (indir. obj.), to reward; Mt. VI, 4. 6. 18; w. acc. (dir. obj.), to giv, pay; Mt. V, 26; w. both dir. and indir. obj., to giv, render, perform; Mt. V, 33.

us-graban (56, n. 1), stv. (177, n. 1), to dig out, to break up or thru; Mk. II, 4.

us-grudja, wa. (132, n. 2), weary, faint; II. Cor. IV, 1. 16.

us-gutnan, wv. (194), to be pourd out, be spild, flow out; Mk. II, 22.

us-hafjan, stv. (177, n. 2), to take up, lift up, w. acc.; Mk. II, 12.

us-haista (69, n. 2), wa. (132, n. 2), very poor.

us-hlaupan, rv. (179, n. 1), to leap up, rize quickly.

us-iddja, prt. of us-gaggan.

us-iddja, part of us-gaggan.

us-kannjan, wv. (188), to make known; w. dat. (indir. obj.) and acc. (dir. obj.), to commend one to one; II. Cor. V, 12.

us-kunþs, adj. (124), wel known, evident, manifest; II. Cor. IV, 10.

us-qiman, stv. (175, n. 1), to kil, (1)[Pg 220] abs.; II. Cor. III, 6. (2) w. (instr.) dat.; Mk. III, 6.

us-qistjan, wv. (188), to destroy, kil, w. acc.; Mk. III, 4.

us-qiþan, stv. (176, n. 1), to proclaim, w. acc.; Mk. I, 45.

us-laubjan (31), wv. (188), to permit, suffer, giv leav, w. dat.; Mk. V, 13.

us-leiþan, stv. (172, n. 1), to go out, cum out, go away from, (1) w. gen. of aim; Mk. IV, 35. (2) w. hindar w. acc.; Mk. V, 21; us w. dat.; II. Cor. V, 8; —to pass away; Mt. V, 18. II. Cor. V, 17.

us-liþa, m. (108), one with useless lims, one sick of the palsy; Mk. II, 3. 4. 5. 9. 10. [Prop. wa. uzed as sb.; cf. liþus.]

us-lûkan (15), stv. (173, n. 2), to unlock, open, w. acc.; Mk. I, 10. Lu. II, 23. II. Cor. II, 12; pp. uslukans (uzed as adj.), opend, open; Mk. I, 10.

us-mêt (34), n. (94), manner of life, conversation, behavior. [< us-mitan. -mêt = late MHG. mâȥ, NHG. mass, n., mezure, degree, manner.]

us-mitan, stv. (176), to behave; II. Cor. I, 12.

us-niman, stv. (170; 175), w. acc., to take out, take away; Mk. IV, 15.

us-saíƕan (34, n. 1), stv. (176, n. 1), to look out, look round about on, w. acc.; Mk. III, 5.

us-sandjan (74, n. 3), wv. (187), to send out, send forth, w. acc.; Mk. I, 43.

us-siggwan (68), stv. (174, n. 1), to read (lit. 'to sing out'), w. an indir. question; Mk. II, 25.

us-skaus (42, n. 2; 124, n. 3), cautious, wakeful, awake. [Its √ appears in OE. scêawian (tr. and intr.), ME. schewe, NE. shew, show.]

us-skawjan (42, n. 2), wv. (188), w. sik, to awake; in pass. to recuver one's self.

us-standan, stv. (177, n. 3), to stand up, rize up, arize; Mk. I, 35. II, 14; w. ana w. acc., to rize up against; Mk. III, 26.

us-stass, f. (ustass; 78, n. 5), f. (103, n. 3), a rizing up or again, resurrection; Lu. II, 34. [stem -stassi- < stat-ti-< √ stat (s. standan) + suff. -ti-.]

us-steigan (ust-; 78, n. 5), stv. (172, n. 1), to mount up, go up, ascend, w. in w. acc.; Mk. III, 13.

us-stiggan, stv. (174, n. 1), to pluck out, w. acc.; Mt. V, 29.

ustaig = us-staig (s. us), prt. of us-steigan.

ustaig = us-staig (s. us), past tense of us-steigan.

us-taiknjan, wv. (188), (1) w. acc. of pers., to point out, appoint.—us-t. sik du w. dat., to commend one's self to; II. Cor. IV, 2. (2) w. acc. of th. and ana w. dat., to show, designate; Skeir. VII, c. (3) w. dubl acc., to show, expose, make; II. Cor. II, 14.

us-taúhun, prt. of ustiuhan.

us-taúhun, part of ustiuhan.

us-tiuhan, stv. (173), w. acc. (sumtimes understood; in pass. the nom.), (1) to lead out, put forth; w. acc. and in w. acc., to drive into; Mk. I, 12. (2) to perform, finish, accomplish, fulfil; Lu. II, 39. 43.

us-þriutan, stv. (173, n. 1), to trubl, uze despitefully, w. acc.; Mt. V, 44.

us-waírpan, stv. (174), to cast out, (1) w. acc. (in pass. the nom., or pers. pass.); Mk. I, 34. 39. III, 15. 23. (2) w. (instr.) dat.; Mk. III, 22. V, 40.

us-wakjan, wv. (187), to wake up, awake from sleep.

us-wandjan, wv. (188) w. dat., to turn one's self away from; Mt. V, 42.

us-waúrhts, adj. (124), just, righteous; Mk. II, 17.

us-waúrpa (32), f., a casting away.

us-waúrpa (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), f., a throwaway.

[Pg 221]

ût (15), adv. (213, n. 2), out, always w. vbs. of motion; Mk. I, 25. [OE. ût, ME. out, ut, NE. out.]

ûta, adv. (213, n. 2), out, without; Mk. I, 45. III, 31. 32. IV, 11. [OE. ûte, ME. ute, NE. out, without, abroad.]

ûtana, adv. (213, n. 2), without, on the outside, from without; sa ûtan unsara manna, our outward man; II. Cor. IV, 16. [OE. ûtane, ûtan, ME. uten, outside, externally, NE. -out, in about, ME. abute, abouten, OE. a-, ǫn-bûtan (ǫn < an = Goth. ana), prep., about.]

ûtaþrô, adv. (213, n. 2), from without. [< ûta + suff. -þrô-.]

-uþ-; s. -uh.

uz-êta (us-êta? 78, n. 4), m. (108), manger, lit. 'a thing to eat out of'; Lu. II, 7. [< us + -êta < √ of itan.]

uz-u, uz-uh, i. e. us + -u, -uh.

uz-u, uz-uh, i.e. us + -u, -uh.

-Waddjus (73, n.), f. (105), wall, in baúrgs-, grundu-, miþgarda-w. [< primitiv Germanic wajus (w. suff. -ju-). Cf. ON. veggr (m. i-stem); OE. wâg, wâh, m., ME. waghe, wowe, wall. Cp. Brgm. I, § 142, p. 127.]

wadi, n. (95), pledge, ernest; II. Cor. I, 22. V, 5. [OE. wed (for *wedd, stem *wadjo-), n., ME. wed, pledge, NE. wed- (in wedlock).]

wadja-bôkôs (88^a), f., bond, handwriting.

wadja-bôkôs (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__^a), f., connection, handwriting.

*waggareis, m. (92; or waggari, n., 95—?), pillow; Mk. IV, 38. [< *waggô (= OE. ME. wange, wǫnge, n., cheek, jaw, NE. wang, rare or vulgar; cpd. wang-tooth, obs., jaw-tooth) + suff. -arja-.] [OE. wangere, m., ME. wonger, pillow.]

wahsjan, stv. (177, n. 2), to wax, grow, increase; Mt. VI, 28. Mk. IV, 8. Lu. II, 40. [OE. weahsan, ME. waxe, NE. wax, to grow.]

wahstus, m. (105), a waxing, growth, increase; Mt. VI, 27. Lu. II, 52. [< wahsjan + suff. -tu-. ON. vǫxtr, m., growth. Cf. OE. wæstm (for *wæhstm, w. an additional m-suff.), m., ME. wastme, growth, fruit.]

*wahtwô (58, n. 2), f. (112, or -a; 97—?), wach; Lu. II, 8. [< wakan + suff. -twôn- (or -twô-). OHG. wahta (by loss of w), MHG. wahte, waht, NHG. wacht, f., wach.]

wai, interj. (219), woe! [OE. wâ, ME. wa, wo, NE. wo.]

waian (22), rv. (182), to blow. [OE. wâwan (cp. saian). Cf. OHG. wâjan, wâen, MHG. wæ̂jen, wæ̂n, NHG. wehen (wv.), to blow.]

wai-dêdja (21, n. 2), m. (108), woe-doer, evil-doer, malefactor. [-dêdja < dêþs + suff. -jan-.]

wai-faírƕjan, wv. (188), to wail; Mk. V, 38.

waíhsta m. (108), corner; Mt. VI, 5.

waíhsta m. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), corner; Mt. VI, 5.

waíhts, f. (116 and n. 1), a whit, thing, (in our 'Selections') always w. ni (or a negativ v.): ni w. or w. ni, sumtimes separated by other words, no whit, naught, nothing; Mk. I, 44.—ni (in) waíhtai or w. ni, in nothing, nothing at all; Mk. V, 26. Skeir. VII, b (ni..w.). c. d. ni waíht (116, n. 1) mikilis, no great thing, lit. 'nothing of great'; Skeir. VII, a. [OE. wiht, wuht, f., ME. wight, wiᵹt, NE. wight, person, creature. To the Goth. waíht, n. (s. waíht in my 'Compar. Glossary'), answers OE. wiht, n., ME. wiht, NE. whit (for *wiht the h of which had lost its sound).]

waíla (20, n. 3), adv., wel; s. under galeikan, hugjan, taujan. [Cf. OE. ME. NE. wel.]

waíla-mêrjan, wv. (188), to bring glad tidings, proclaim, preach the gospel; w. acc. (in pass. the nom.), to preach, w. in w. dat.; II. Cor. I,[Pg 222] 19 (mêrjada, as in A, seems preferabl).

waíla-wizns, f. (103), wel-living, food; Skeir. VII, b. [-wizns < wisan, to eat, feast, be merry, + suff. -ni-; cf. wizôn, to liv (I. Tim. V, 6).]

waír, m. (91, n. 4), man; Skeir. VII, b. [OE. wer, m., ME. were, wer-, NE. wer-, were- (in werewolf, ME. werwolf, OE. were-wulf, lit. 'man-wolf').]

waírpan, stv. (174), to cast, throw, (1) w. acc. and in w. acc.; Mk. I, 16; and af w. dat. (the dir. obj. being understood); Mt. V, 29. (2) w. (instr.) dat. and ana w. acc.; Mk. IV, 26.—Cpd. us-w. [OE. weorpan, ME. werpe, OHG. werfan, MHG. NHG. werfen, to cast, throw.]

waírs, compar. adv. (212, n. 1), wurse; Mk. V, 26. [For *waírs-s (cp. 78, n. 2), i. e. *waírs-is (-is being adv. compar. suff.), OE. wiers, wyrs, ME. wurs, wers, NE. wurse.]

waírsiza, compar. adj. (138), wurse, wurser; Mk. II, 21. [< waírs- + compar. suff. -iz-an-. OE. wiersa, wyrsa, ME. wurse, werse, NE. wurse (> wurser, a dubl comparison).]

waírþan, stv. (174, n. 1), (I) principal v., (1) to be born, arize, becum, cum forth, appear; Mk. IV, 37. 39. (2) to cum to pass, happen, be done or fulfild; Mt. V, 18. VI, 10. Mk. IV, 11. V, 14. 16. Lu. II, 15 (second). Skeir. VII, c; sumtimes the prs. must be renderd by the future in E.; Lu. II, 10; the impers. warþ (prt.) often introduces a narration, either without a connectiv or folld. by jah: it came to pass; Mk. I, 9. II, 15. IV, 4. Lu. II, 1. 6. 15. 46; so w. dat. and inf.; Mk. II, 23.—Of time: to cum, cum on; Mk. I, 32. IV, 35.—With dat., to be givn to, cum to; II. Cor. I, 8. (3) to be, w. in w. dat.; II. Cor. III, 8; miþ w. dat.; Lu. II, 13. (4) to becum, be, (a) w. a pred. adj. (especially wa. discharging more or less the function of a sb.); Mt. V, 20. 21. 22. VI, 16. 22. 23. Mk. I, 22. 36. 41. 42. II, 21. IV, 22. 32. Lu. II, 2. II. Cor. I, 7. III, 7. IV, 1. 11. 16. V, 17. Skeir. VII, d; —w. twalib-wintruns (sc. alþeis), to be twelv years old; Lu. II, 42; (b) w. a pred. sb.; Mt. V, 45. Mk. I, 17. II. Cor. V, 21. Skeir. VII, c; (c) w. adv.: sundrô; Mk. IV, 10; ja jah nê..ja; II. Cor. I, 19. (II) auxiliary v., w. a pp.; Mk. I, 14. II. 27. III, 26. II. Cor. IV, 1.—Cpd. fra-w. [OE. weorðan, ME. wurðe, worthe, NE. wurth, to becum, be, as in frases: 'woe wurth the day', or 'the man' (indir. obj.).]

waírþida, f. (97), wurthiness, dignity, sufficiency; II. Cor. III, 5. Skeir. VII, a. [< waírþs + suff. -i-dô- (72). OHG. wirdida, f., wurthiness.]

-waírþnan, wv. (194, n. 1), in ga-ga-w.

waírþs, adj. (124), wurth, wurthy, able, w. du w. dat.; II. Cor. II, 16; w. inf.; Mk. I, 7. II. Cor. III, 5; w. a clause introduced by ei; Mt. III, 11; —waírþana briggan w. gen., to make or count wurthy, make able; II. Cor. III, 6. [OE. weorð, wurð (the u by influence of the w), adj., ME. worth, wurth, NE. wurth.]

wait, prs. of the prt.-prs. witan.

wait, present tense of witan.

waja-mêreins, f. (103; 113, n. 1), a blasfeming, blasfemy. [< waja-mêrjan + suff. -ei-ni-.]

waja-mêrjan (21, n. 2), wv. (188), to blasfeme, w. acc.; Mk. III, 28. 29. [waja- < wai.]

wakan, stv. (177, n. 1), to wake, wach.—Cpd. þaírh-w. (63, n. 1).[Pg 223] [OE. wacan, to arize, cum to life, be born, ME. wake, NE. wake. The wv. refers to OE. wacian, prt. wacode, ME. wakie, prt. wakede.]

-wakjan, wv. (187), to wake (tr.), in us-w. [OE. (â)wecc(e)an (< *wacjan), ME. (a)wecche, OHG. (ir)wecchen, MHG. NHG. (er)wecken, to wake up, rouse from sleep.]

-waknan (35), wv. (194), to awake, in ga-w. [< pp. stem of wakan. OE. wæcnan (intr.), to arize, be born, ME. wakne (intr.), NE. waken (tr. and intr.).]

Valamir (6, n. 2; 40, n. 1), pr. n.

waldan, rv. (179, n. 1), to wield, rule, guvern. [OE. wealdan, ME. wealde, welde (rv.), NE. wield (wv.).]

waldufni, n. (95, n. 1), power, might, authority; Mk. I, 22. 27. Skeir. VII, a; —w. haban w. inf.; Mk. II, 10; or du w. inf.; Mk. III, 15. [< waldan + suff. -ufnja-.]

waljan, wv. (187), to choose, be willing, w. inf.; II. Cor. V, 8. [OHG. wellen, MHG. weln, wellen, NHG. wählen, to choose, elect.]

waltjan, wv. (188), to roll, beat upon, dash; Mk. IV, 37. [OE. wyltan, weltan (< weoltjan < weolt, prt. of wealtan, ME. walte, = OHG. walzan, MHG. walzen, stv., NHG. walzen, wv., to roll, revolv), OHG. MHG. welzen, NHG. wälzen, to (cause to) roll.]

wamba, f. (97), womb, belly; Lu. II, 21. [OE. wamb, wǫmb, ME. wombe, NE. womb.]

wamm, n. (94), spot. [Prop. n. adj. (cf. ga-, un-wamms). OE. wamm, n. m. (adj. wam, wǫm), spot, > OE. wemman, ME. wemme, to stain, defile, < wemme, wem, NE. wem (obs.), spot, blemish.]

wandjan, wv. (188), to wend, turn, w. dat. of pers. and acc. of th.; Mt. V, 39.—Cpds. ga-, us-w. [Caus. of -windan. OE. wendan (prt. wende, for *wend-de), ME. wende (prt. wende, wente), to turn, turn one's self, go, NE. wend (rare; prt. went), to go.]

waninassus, m. (105), want; Skeir. VII, c. [Like wanains (w. suff. -ai-ni-), a waning, diminishing, < *wanan (< *wans, lacking, wanting, = OE. wan, wǫn, ME. wan, ON. vanr, n. vant, deficient, > ME. want, adj., deficient, and sb., NE. want) + suff. -inassu-.]

*war (s. 78, n. 2), adj. (124, n. 1), wary, cautious, sober. [OE. wær, ME. war, adj., cautious, NE. ware (obs., but in beware = be-ware), extended wary (w. suff. -y).]

-wardjan, wv. (188), in fra-w. [Caus. of fra-waírþan, to go to ruin, corrupt (intr.)] [OE. wyrdan (< *weardian), werdan, ME. werde, to spoil.]

warei, f. (113), wariness, craftiness; II. Cor. IV, 2. [< war + suff. -ein-.]

wargiþa, f. (97), condemnation, judgment; II. Cor. III, 9. [< -wargs (in launa-wargs, an unthankful person. -wargs = OE. wearg, m., outlaw, criminal, wolf, ME. wari, weri, villain.) + suff. -iþô-. OE. wergðu, f., condemnation, punishment.]

warjan, wv. (187), to forbid, thwart. [OE. werian, ME. wer(i)e, to defend, ward off, OHG. werian, weren, MHG. wern, to hinder, protect, defend, NHG. wehren, to protect, defend.]

warmjan, wv. (188), to warm, cherish. [< *warms (= OE. wearm, ME. warm, NE. warm). OE. wyrman (< *wearmjan), ME. werme, warme, NE. warm.]

warþ, prt. of waírþan.

warþ, past tense of waírþan.

was, prt. of wisan.

was, past tense of wisan.

wasjan, wv. (187), to vest, clothe, put on, dress, (1) tr., w. acc. and[Pg 224] swa; Mt. VI, 30. (2) intr., w. instr.; Mt. VI, 25. 31.—Cpd. ga-w. [OE. werian (< *wazian), ME. were, wv., NE. wear (stv., by influence of bear).]

wasti, f. (98), garment, cloak; Mt. V, 40. Mk. V, 27. 28. 30; in pl. also raiment; Mt. VI, 25. 28. [< wasjan + suff. -tjô-.]

was-uþ-þan; s. the components.

was-uþ-þan; s. the elements.

watô, n. (110, n. 1), water; Mk. I, 8. 10. [Cf. OE. wæter (w. r-suffix), n., ME. water, NE. water.]

waúrd, n. (93), word; Mt. V, 37. Mk. I, 45. II, 2. IV, 14-20. 33. V, 36. Lu. II, 15. 17. 19. 29. 50. 51. II. Cor. I, 18. II, 17. IV, 2. V, 19. [OE. ME. word, n., NE. word.]

-waúrdjan, wv. (188), in filu-w. [< waúrd. OHG. -wurten, in ant-wurten (= Goth. and-waúrdjan), MHG. and-würten, NHG. antworten (by influence of antwort, f., answer), to answer.]

waúrkjan, anv. (209), (1) abs., to work (intr.), becum effectiv, w. in w. dat.; II. Cor. IV, 12. (2) w. acc. (in pass. the nom.), to work (tr.), do, make, produce, prepare, and dat. of pers.; Mk. III, 35. II. Cor. IV, 17; w. dubl. acc.; Mk. I, 3. Skeir. VII, b.—Cpd. ga-w. [OE. wyrcan (prt. worhte, pp. worht), ME. werke, worche (prt. wrohte, pp. wrocht, wrogt), NE. work (prt. and pp. wrought and worked).]

waúrms, m. (101), serpent. [OE. wyrm, wurm, serpent, ME. worm, wurm, NE. wurm.]

waúrstw, n. (94), work, deed. [For *waúrhstw < waúrkjan + suff. -s-twa-.]

waúrstweigs, adj. (124), effectiv, effectual; II. Cor. I, 6. [< waúrstw + suff. -ei-ga-.]

waúrstwja, m. (108), workman, laborer. [< waúrstw + suff. -jan-.]

waúrts, f. (103), wurt, root; Mk. IV, 6. 17. [OE. wyrt, f., herb, plant, root, ME. wort, NE. wurt.]

waúrþum, prt. of waírþan.

waúrþum, past tense of waírþan.

wêgs, m. (91, n. 5), a violent movement, as of billows; hense tempest; in pl. billows, waves; Mk. IV, 37. [< wigan. OE. wæ̂g, m., wave, billow, flud, sea, OHG. wag, MHG. wâg(-g-), m., flud, wave, river, sea, NHG. woge, f., wave, billow.]

weiha, m. (108), priest. [< weihs.]

weiha, m. (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), priest. [< weihs.]

weihan, stv. (172), to fight, strive, contend. [OE. wîgan (the g, for h, being due to the forms with grammatical change), OHG. wîhan (wîgan), MHG. wîgen, to contend, fight. The prsp. (uzed as a m. sb., = Goth. weihands) is seen in OE. wîgend, OHG. MHG. wîgant, NHG. weigand, m., warrior; cp. also OE. wîg, m., ME. wiᵹ, fight, batl.]

weihnan, wv. (194), to becum holy, be hallowd; Mt. VI, 9. [< weihs.]

weihs, adj. (124), holy; Mk. I, 8. III, 29. Lu. II, 25. 26. II. Cor. I, 1; w. gen.; Mk. I, 24. Lu. II, 23. [OHG. wîh, MHG. wîch (-h-), NHG. weih-, adj., holy, in weihnachten, Christmas, (lit. 'holy nights'), weihrauch, incense (lit. 'holy smoke').]

wein, n. (94), wine; Mk. II, 22. [< Lt. vinum > also OE. wîn, n., ME. win, NE. wine.]

weina-basi (88^a, n. 1), n. (95), wineberry. [-basi = OHG. beri (r < s = z), n., MHG. bere, n. f., NHG. beere, f., berry; an extended form is OE. berige, f., ME. berie, NE. berry.]

weina-triu (88^a, n. 1), n. (94, n. 1), 'wine-tree', vine.

wein-drugkja (88^a, n. 1), m. (108), wine-drinker, wine-bibber.

weipan, stv. (172, n. 1), to crown. [OHG. *wîfan, MHG. wîfen (stv.), to swing, wind, prt. weif > the[Pg 225] caus. weifen, to swing, reel, NHG. weifen, to reel.]

weis, pl. of ik.

weis, plural of ik.

-weisjan, wv. (188), to make wise, in fulla-w. [< -weis (s. unweis). OE. wîsian (prt. wîsode; Second Weak Conj.), ME. wise, OHG. wîsen (< wîsjan), MHG. wîsen, NHG. weisen, to direct, gide, show, instruct, lit. 'to make wise'.]

-weitan, stv. (172, n. 1; 197, n. 1), to see, only in fra-, in-w. [OE. wîtan, ME. wîte, to see, look, rebuke, NE. wite (Sp.), to reproach, blame.]

-weitjan, wv. (188), in faír-w. [< -weit, in fraweit (< fra-weitan), n., revenge, MHG. ver-wîȥ, NHG. verweis, m., rebuke, reproof; and id-weit, n., reproach, = OE. idwît, n., ME. edwit, reproach, blame.]

weitwôdei, f. (113), witness, testimony; II. Cor. I, 12. [< weitwôþs.]

weitwôdiþa, f. (97), witness, testimony; Mk. I, 44. [< weitwôþs + suff. -iþô-.]

*weitwôþs, weitwôds (30; 74, n. 2), m. (117), witness. [< √ of -weitan, witan. Cf. Brgm., II, § 136, 5.]

wênjan, wv. (188), to hope, trust, expect, (1) w. acc. and inf.; II. Cor. V, 11. (2) w. a clause introduced by ei; II. Cor. I, 13; so w. du w. dat.; II. Cor. I, 10. [< wêns. OE. wênan, ME. wene, wêne, to suppose, NE. ween (obs. or poet.).]

wêns, f. (103), expectation, hope; II. Cor. I, 6. III, 12. [OE. wên, ê is i-uml. of ô, for (West-Germanic) â = Goth. ê, f., hope, expectation, ME. wene, OHG. MHG. wân, opinion, belief, hope, NHG. wahn, m., delusion, fancy.]

wêsi, wêsun (-uþ = -uh); prt. of wisan (204).

wêsi, wêsun (-uþ = -uh); part. of wisan (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__).

-widan, stv. (176, n. 1), to bind, in ga-w. [OHG. wetan, MHG. weten, to bind, join, yoke. Its √ is containd also in OE. wæ̂d, f., wæ̂de, n., ME. wêde, NE. weed, garment.]

widuwô, f. (112), widow; Lu. II, 37. [OE. widewe, widwe, f., ME. widewe, NE. widow.]

-wigan, stv. (176, n. 1), to move, shake up, in ga-w. [OE. wegan, ME. weye, to carry, bear, move, weigh, NE. weigh.]

wigs, m. (91), way; Mt. V, 25. Mk. I, 2. 3. IV, 4. 15. Lu. II, 44. [OE. weg, m., ME. wei, wey, NE. way.]

wileis, prs. opt. of wiljan.

wileis, 2nd person plural of wiljan.

Wilia (40, n. 1), pr. n.

Wilia (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, n. 1), proper noun.

wilja, m. (108), wil; Mt. VI, 10. Mk. III, 35. Lu. II, 14. II. Cor. I, 1. [< wiljan. OE. willa, m., ME. wille, NE. wil.]

wilja-halþei (88^a), f. (113, n. 2), special favor. [< *wiljahalþs, adj., < wilja- (stem of -wiljis, in cpds., willing, < wiljan) + -halþs = OE. heald, adj., inclined; cp. OHG. halda, MHG. NHG. halde, f., declivity.]

wiljan, anv. (205), to wil, wish, (1) abs.; Mk. I, 40. 41. (2) w. acc.; Mt. V, 40. Mk. III, 13. (3) w. swa filu swê; Skeir. VII, c. (4) w. inf.; Mt. V, 40. 42. II. Cor. I, 15. V, 4. Skeir. VII, c; w. acc. and inf. (wisan being understood); II. Cor. I, 8. [OE. willan (prt. wolde, wulde), ME. wille (prt. wolde), NE. wil (prt. would).]

wilþeis, adj. (127), wild; Mk. I, 6 (gloss). [OE. wilde, ME. wild, NE. wild.]

wilwan, stv. (174, n. 1), to plunder, rob, w. acc.; Mk. III, 27.—Cpd. dis-w.

-windan, stv. (174, n. 1), to wind, only in bi- (du-, ga-, us-) w., to wind round, inwrap, swathe, w. acc.; Lu. II, 7; pp. biwundans, wrapt; Lu. II, 12. [OE. windan, ME. winde, NE. wind.]

[Pg 226]

winds, m. (91), wind; Mk. IV, 37. 39. 41. [OE. wind, m., ME. NE. wind.]

winnan, stv. (174, n. 1), to suffer, sorrow, (1) abs.; Lu. II, 48. (2) w. acc.; II. Cor. I, 6. [OE. winnan, to fight, strugl, toil, ge-w., to (obtain by fighting), win, ME. winne, to fight, acquire, win, NE. win.]

wis, n. (94), a calm; Mk. IV, 39. [< wisan.]

wisan, stv. (176, n. 1), (1) to dwel, abide, remain; II. Cor. III, 11. 14. V, 6. (2) to be, be present, exist, liv. (In this and the follg. senses wisan supplies the defects of the sb. v.: im, is, ist, sijau, etc.; s. 204. It is frequently understood.—For nist, etc., s. 10, n. 2; 4, n. 1); Mt. VI, 30. Lu. II, 25. 36. II. Cor. IV, 7. Skeir. VII, b. ufarassus w., to abound; II. Cor. I, 5. (3) w. dat. (as in Gr. which sumtimes has the gen.), to be, belong or pertain to; hense to hav; so occasionally folld. by a partit. gen.; Mk. I, 24. V, 7. Lu. II, 7. (4) w. a gen. in the pred., to be of, belong to, (a) poss.; II. Cor. II, 3, (b) qualitativ; Mk. V, 42. (5) to be anything or in any manner, (a) w. an adv. in the pred.; Mt. VI, 25. Mk. IV, 26. 36; (b) w. a prep. in the pred.; Skeir. VII, a; (c) the pred. is a complete sentence or an elliptical frase (as in Gr.), (α) in a dir. quotation; Mt. V, 37. II. Cor. I, 18; (β) introduced by a rel. particl: þatei; Mk. II, 16; þarei; Mk. IV, 15; swaswê; Mt. VI, 5; (d) the pred. is a prsp. denoting duration; Mt. V, 25. Mk. I, 4. 22. 39. II, 6. 18. IV, 38. V, 5. 40. Lu. II, 8. 33. 51. II. Cor. I, 9. II, 9. 11. 17. V, 19; (e) the pred. is a pp., (α) w. an act. meaning; Mk. I, 33; cp. II, 24. 26. III, 4. II. Cor. IV, 10. V, 10; (β) w. a pass. meaning; Mk. I, 6. V, 11. Lu. II, 26. II. Cor. IV, 3; preceded by the art.; Mk. IV, 16. 18. 20. V, 14; wisan being auxiliary v.; Mt. V, 21. 27. 31. 33. 38. 43. Mk. I, 2. 5. 9. III, 9. 21. IV, 11. V, 4. Lu. II, 3. 11. 17. 20. 21. 23. 24. 33. II. Cor. I, 4. 8. Skeir. VII, c; (f) the pred. is a rel. clause (cp. (c), abuv); Mk. IV, 22. II. Cor. II, 2. Skeir. VII, d; (g) the pred. is an adj.; Mt. V, 29. 30. 48. VI, 22. 23. 26. Mk. I, 7. II, 9. 25. III, 29. IV, 17. 31. 40. V, 18. 34. Lu. II, 5. 25. II. Cor. I, 18. II, 16. III, 3. 5. 10. IV, 18. V, 6. 8. 11.—Cp. also 5, e, α, abuv; (h) the pred. is a sb., either alone or w. an attribute; Mt. V, 34. 35. VI, 12. 22. 23. Mk. I, 11. 16. II, 28. III, 11. 35. IV, 38. V, 9. Lu. II, 2. 11. 12. 25. 37. II. Cor. I, 7. 12. 14. 19. 24. II, 15. III, 2. 3. 9. 17. IV, 4; (i) the pred. is a prn., (α) interr.; Mk. I, 24. 27. III, 33. IV, 41. V, 9; (β) poss.; Mt. VI, 13; (j) the pred. is a num., (α) def.; Mk. V, 13; (β) indef.; Mk. II, 15. V, 9. (6) to be, be calld, mean: þat' ist, that is (to say); þatei ist, which is, that is (to say); Mk. III, 17. V, 41; ƕa ist þatei, how is it that?; Mk. II, 16. (7) to be, be present, be found, (a) w. an adv.: hêr; Skeir. VII, a; jainar; Mk. III, 1. V, 11. Lu. II, 6; þarei; Mk. II, 4. V, 40. II. Cor. III, 17; þaruh; Mt. VI, 21. II. Cor. III, 17; ûta; Mk. I, 45; (b) w. a prep.: ana; Mk. I, 45. IV, 1. 38. Lu. II, 25. 40; at; II. Cor. I, 17; faúra; Mk. V, 21; fram; II. Cor. I, 2; in; Mt. V, 25. VI, 4. Mk. I, 13. 23. II, 1. IV, 36. V, 5. 25. Lu. II, 5. 8. 25. 44. 49. II. Cor. I, 1. V, 4. Skeir. VII, b; miþ; Mk. I, 13. II, 19. 26. III, 14. IV, 36. V, 18; ufar filu wisan, to abound; II. Cor. I, 5; us; Mt. V, 37. Lu.[Pg 227] II, 4. II. Cor. III, 5; wiþra; Mk. IV, 15.—Cpds. at-, ufar-w. [Goth. wisan, prt. was, etc., < √ wes. OE. wesan, prsp. wesende, imper. sg. wes, pl. wesað; prt. 1st and 3d pers. sg. wæs, 2nd pers. wæ̂re, pl. wæ̂ron; subj. sg. wæ̂re, pl. wæ̂ron; ME. inf. wese, prt. 1st and 3d pers. sg. wæs, was, 2nd pers. wære, were, pl. wæren, weren; subj. wære, were; NE. prt. sg. was, pl. wer.—Goth. im, siju, sijau, etc., < √ es:-s. OE. 1st pers. sg. eom, eam, am (North.), 2nd pers. eart, 3d pers. is, pl. sind (t), siondun, sindun, North. aron beside sint (d), sindon; subj. sg. sîe, sî, etc.; ME. 1st pers. sg. eom, eam, am, 2nd pers. eart, art, 3d pers. is, pl. sind, sinden, aren, are; subj. sg. seo, si, pl. seon, sion, sien; NE. 1st pers. sg. am, 2nd pers. art, 3d pers. is, pl. ar.]

wissêdun, prt. of witan, prt.-prs.

wissêdun, past tense of witan, present participle.

wit, dual of ik.

wit, dual of I.

witan, wv. (197, n. 1), to look at, giv attention, observ, wach, w. dat.; Mk. III, 2; w. wahtwôm ufarô w. dat., to keep wach over; Lu. II, 8. [< √ of witan, to know. OHG. (ga-, ir-) wiȥên, to pay attention, observ.]

witan (30), prt.-prs. (197), to know, (1) abs.; Mk. IV, 27. Lu. II, 43. (2) w. acc.; Mk. IV, 13. V, 33. II. Cor. V, 11. (3) w. a clause introduced by þatei; Mt. VI, 32. Mk. II, 10. Lu. II, 49. II. Cor. I, 7. IV, 14. V, 1. 6. (4) w. an indir. question; Mt. VI, 3. [OE. witan, 1st and 3d pers. sg. prs. ind. wât (Goth. wait), prt. wiste, ME. wite, prs. wot, prt. wiste, NE. wot, wist; to wit < ME. to wite(n), OE. tô witanne, gerund.]

witôþ (gen. witôdis), n. (94), law; Mt. V, 17. 18. Lu. II, 22. 23. 24. 27. 39. [< a lost v. witôn (= OE. witian, ME. witie, to destin) + suff. -da; < √ of witan, to know.]

witubni (30), n. (95), knowledge. [< witan, to know, + suff. -ubnja.]

witum, pl. of wait.

witum, plural of wait.

wiþra, prep. w. acc., (1) local, over against, by, near, to; Mk. IV, 1. 15. II. Cor. V, 12. (2) metaforical, (a) in a frendly sense, to, toward; (b) in a hostil sense, against, to, for; Mk. III, 24. 25. [OE. ME. wiðer, prep., against, NE. wither- (in the cpd. withernam, a law term in England, a second or reciprocal writ, a writ of reprisal; -nam < niman = Goth. niman), OHG. widar, MHG. wider, NHG. wider, prep., against, wieder, adv., again, back.]

wiþrus, m., lam. [OE. weðer, m., ME. NE. wether.]

wlaitôn, wv. (190), to look round about; Mk. V, 32. [< a lost sb. (= ON. leit, f., inquiry, serch) < *wleitan. OE. wlâtian, to look.]

wlits, m. (101, n. 1), face, countenance; II. Cor. III, 7. [< *wleitan (s. andawleizn). OE. wlite, m., ME. wlite, figure, look.]

wôkains (35), f. (103, n. 1), waching. [< *wôkan (+ suff. -ai-ni-), to wach, < a lost sb. < wakan.]

wôkrs, m. (91, n. 2), uzury. [Apparently < √ of wakan (prt. wôk) + suff. -ra-. OE. wôcor, f., progeny, posterity, OHG. wuohhar, MHG. wuocher, m. n., produce, fruit, profit, uzury, NHG. wucher, m., uzury.]

wôpjan, wv. (187), to cry aloud, cry out, cry; Mk. I, 3.—Cpd. uf-w. (63, n. 1). [OE. wêpan (stv., w. the prs. in-jo-), to cry aloud, complain, bewail, ME. wepe (stv.), NE. weep (wv.).]

wôþeis, adj. (128), sweet, mild, plezant; dauns wôþi, sweet savor; II. Cor. II, 15. [OE. wêðe, adj., sweet, mild.]

*wôþs, wôds (74, n. 2), adj. (124),[Pg 228] mad, possest; Mk. V, 15. 16. 18. [OE. ME. wôd, NE. wood (obs.), mad, possest, furious.]

wrakja, f. (97), persecution; Mk. IV, 17. [< wrikan + suff. -jô-.]

wratôn, wv. (190), to go, jurney; Lu. II, 41. [ON. rata, to jurney, travel.]

wrêþus (wriþus; 7, n. 3), m. (205), herd. [OE. wræ̂ð, f., herd, troop.]

wrikan, stv. (176, n. 1), to persecute, w. acc.; Mt. V, 44; wrikans, persecuted; II. Cor. IV, 9. [OE. wrecan, to drive, urge; avenge, punish, ME. wreke, NE. wreak.]

-wrisqan, stv. (174, n. 1), in ga-wr., to produce fruit. [ON. *reskva, pp. roskenn, grown.]

wrôhjan, wv. (187), to accuse, w. acc.; Mk. III, 2. [< wrôhs, f., accusation. OE. wrêgan (< wrôgian), ME. wreie, OHG. ruogen (< ruege, f. jô-stem), MHG. rüegen, to accuse, NHG. rügen, to reprove.]

wulan, stv. (173, n. 2; 175, n. 2), to wallop, boil; be fervent. [Cf. OE. weallan (prt. wêoll), ME. walle, OHG. wallan (prt. wial), MHG. wallen (prt. wiel), NHG. wallen (wv.), to bubl, boil; also OE. wellan, wv., ME. welle, NE. well, to issue forth, spring.]

wulfs, m. (91), wolf. [OE. wulf (pl. wulfas), m., ME. wulf (pl. wulves, wolves), NE. wolf (pl. wolves).]

Wulfila, pr. n. (108; 221). [Prop. 'litl wolf', < wulfs + suff. -ilan-.—Οὐλφίλας.]

wulla, f. (97), wool. [OE. wull, f., ME. wulle, wolle, NE. wool.]

wulþags, adj. (124), gorgeous, honorabl, glorious; II. Cor. III, 7. 10. [< wulþus + suff. -a-ga- (a for the stem-vowel u).]

wulþrs, adj. (124), of wurth, of consequence; mais wulþriza wisan, to be of more wurth, be better; Mt. VI, 26. [< wulþus + suff. -ra-.]

wulþus, m. (105), glory; Mt. VI, 13. 29. Lu. II, 9. 14. 32. II. Cor. I, 20. III, 7-11. 18. IV, 4. 6. 15. 17. [< stem wul (cf. ON. Ullr—ll < lþ—, name of a god) + suff. -þu-.]

wundufni, f. (98), wound, plague; Mk. III, 11. [< wundôn (< wunds, adj., = OE. ME. wund, OHG. wunt, MHG. wunt, -d-, sore, wounded, NHG. wund, adj., sore; -wundôn = OE. wundian, ME. wounde, NE. wound) + suff. -ufnjô-.]

Xristus (1, n. 4), pr. n. m. (105 and n. 2), Christ; Lu. II, 11; gen. -aus; II. Cor. II, 10. 12. 15. III, 3. IV, 4. V, 10. 14; dat. -au; II. Cor. I, 21. II, 14. 17. III, 14. V, 19; acc. -u; Lu. II, 26. II. Cor. I, 5. III, 4. V, 16. 18. 20.—Iêsuis-aus (gen.); Mk. I, 1. II. Cor. I, 1. 3. 14. IV, 6; Iêsu-au (dat.); II. Cor. I, 2; Iêsu-u (acc.); II. Cor. IV, 5. [< Χριστός.]

Y; s. § 39.

Y; s. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Zaíbaídaius, pr. n., Zebedee; gen. -aus; Mk. I, 19. III, 17; acc. -u; Mk. I, 20. [< Ζεβεδαῖος.]

Zaíbaídaius, proper name, Zebedee; gen. -aus; Mk. I, 19. III, 17; acc. -u; Mk. I, 20. [< Ζεβεδαῖος.]

Zakarias (43), pr. n., Zacharias. [< Ζαχαρίας.]

Zakarias (__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__), pr. n., Zacharias. [< Ζαχαρίας.]

[Pg 229]

*G. H. BALG'S GOTHIC PUBLICATIONS:*
A COMPARATIV GLOSSARY OF THE GOTHIC LANGUAGE, with specific focus on English and German, bound	$5.00
THE FIRST GERMANIC BIBLE translated from Greek by the Gothic Bishop Wulfila in the fourth century, along with other remnants of the GOTHIC LANGUAGE, edited with an introduction, syntax, and glossary, bound	3.25
BRAUNE'S GOTHIC GRAMMAR, with Reading Selections and a Glossary, edited with Explanatory Notes, Full Citations, Derivations, and Correspondences, bound	1.35
☞ The hole set, bound $7.50. ☜

Address:

G. H. BALG,
623 FIFTH ST.
Milwaukee, Wis.

Location:

G. H. BALG,
623 Fifth St.
Milwaukee, WI.

TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES

PM. Note: Balg's translation is a bit awkward. He knew quite a number of languages so well that he wrote books about them, but he had is own view of English orthography. He frequently left out "e" when the "e" was not pronounced, like in "ar" (for "are"), "hav", "givn" etc. He did this consistently, so this was his deliberate choice.

PM. Note: Balg's translation is a bit awkward. He knew quite a few languages well enough to write books about them, but he had his own take on English spelling. He often left out "e" when it wasn't pronounced, like in "ar" (for "are"), "hav," "givn," etc. He did this on purpose, so it was a deliberate choice.

On p. x the reference "Brugm., Grundriss der vergleichenden grammatik der indog. sprachen von K. Brugmann (Engl. edition). Strassburg 1886-92" is the German ed.; the English one, to which refs. in this book apply, is Elements of the Comparative Grammar of the Indo-Germanic Languages, New York 1888-95.

Silently corrected simple spelling, grammar, and typographical errors.

Silently fixed simple spelling, grammar, and typographical mistakes.

Retained anachronistic and non-standard spellings as printed.

Retained outdated and non-standard spellings as printed.

Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!

A GOTHIC GRAMMAR WITH CHOICES FOR READING AND A GLOSSARY

AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

EDITOR'S PREFACE.

CONTENTS.

ABBREVIATIONS.

FONOLOGY.

CHAP. I. THE ALFABET.

CHAP. II. THE VOWELS.

a

e

i

o

u

ei

iu

ai

au

APPENDIX.

FOOTNOTES:

CHAP. III. TABLE OF THE GOTHIC VOWELS.

A. FONETIC SYSTEM.

B. HISTORICAL SYSTEM (Ablaut-Series).

CHAP. IV. THE CONSONANTS.

A. SONOROUS CONSONANTS.

1. The semivowels w and j.

w

j

2. Liquids.

l

r

3. Nasals.

m

n

B. NOIZD SOUNDS.

1. Labials.

p

f

b

2. Gutturals.

k

q

h

ƕ

3. Dentals.

t

d

s

APPENDIX. GENERAL REMARKS ON THE CONSONANTS.

INFLECTION.

CHAP. I. DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVS.

GENERAL PRELIMINARY REMARKS.

(a) On declension in general.

(b) On the declension of substantivs.

(c) On the nominal composition.

A. VOCALIC (STRONG) DECLENSION.

1. (a) A-Declension.

Masculins.

Neuters.

1. (b) Ô-Declension.

2. I-Declension.

Masculins.

Feminins.

3. U-Declension.

Masculins and Feminins.

Neuters.

B. N-DECLENSION (WEAK DECLENSION).

1. Masculins.

2. Neuters.

3. Feminins.

C. MINOR DECLENSIONS. (REMAINS OF CONSONANTAL DECLENSIONS.)

APPENDIX. DECLENSION OF FOREN WORDS.

CHAP. II. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVS.

A. STRONG ADJECTIVS.

B. WEAK ADJECTIVS.

C. DECLENSION OF THE PARTICIPLS.

D. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVS.

1. COMPARATIV.

2. SUPERLATIV.

3. IRREGULAR COMPARISON.

CHAP. III. NUMERALS.

A
GOTHIC GRAMMAR
WITH CHOICES FOR READING AND A GLOSSARY

APPENDIX.
GENERAL REMARKS ON THE CONSONANTS.

C. MINOR DECLENSIONS.
(REMAINS OF CONSONANTAL DECLENSIONS.)

APPENDIX.
DECLENSION OF FOREN WORDS.

1. FROM THE GOSPEL OF ST. MATTHEW.
(CODEX ARGENTEUS).

2. FROM THE GOSPEL OF ST. MARK.
(CODEX ARGENTEUS).
AIWAGGELJO ÞAIRH MARKU ANASTODEIÞ.

3. FROM THE GOSPEL OF ST. LUKE.
(CODEX ARGENTEUS).

4. FROM THE SECOND EPISTL TO THE CORINTHIANS.
(CHAPS. I-V IN CODEX AMBR. B; I, 8-IV, 10 AND V ALSO IN CODEX AMBR. A).
DU KAURINÞAIUM ANÞARA DUSTODEIÞ.

5. FROM THE SKEIREINS.
(LEAF VII.—ABOUT JOHN VI, 9-13.)[101]